/:■> CD = 00 \n •CD CO THE !H AWALLISBUDGE . THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN ITS HISTORY AND MONUMENTS 5,3^15^. THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN ITS HISTORY AND MONUMENTS E. A. WALLIS BUDGE, M.A., Litt.D., D.Litt., Lit.D. FORMERLY SCHOLAR OF CHRIST'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, KEEPER OF THE EGYPTIAN AND ASSYRIAN ANTIQUITIES IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS IN TWO VOLUMES VOL. IT. KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. Limited Dryden House, 43, Gerrard Street, London, \Y. 1907 LONDON : ■ HV (ilLP.KRT AND RIVINGTON LTD. •UN'S HOUSE, CLEKKKN'WKI.L, K.C. TABLE OF CONTENTS VOL. II. PART 11.— (Continued). CHAPTER IV. PAGE The Rise of the Nubian or Sudan! Kingdom of P IAN Kill CHAPTER V. The Successors of Piankhi 27 CHAPTER VI. The Successors of Tanuath-Amen . 56 CHAPTER VII. The Successors of Piankhi 83 CHAPTER VIII. The Sudan in the Ptolemaic Period .... 104 CHAPTER IX. The Nubian Kingdom on the Island of Meroe . .114 CHAPTER X. The Sudan in the First Century before, and the First Century after, Christ 153 v TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER XI. I 'ACE The SudAn in the Roman Period . . [66 CHAPTER XII. The Muhammadan Invasion and Occupation of the Sudan . . . [84 CHAPTER XIII. The Rule of Muhammad \\u and his Descendants IN THE SUDAN ........ 209 CHAPTER XIV. The Mahdj in the Sudan 240 ( HAPTER XV. Christianity in the Northern Sudan .... 288 Appendix to chapter xv. — the inscription of silko, KING OF I Hi: NOBADAE CHAPTER XVI. Christianity in the SudAn. Modern Missionary Enterprise • CHAPTER XVII. The Gold Mines of the SudAn 324 CHAPTER XVIII. Tin Modes n .... CHAPTER XIX. Tiir. British en the SUdAn ..... 448 Bibliography of the SudAn ... 515 vi 57 J LIST OF PLATES VOLUME II. Harua, an official of Queen Amenartas, holding statues of Hathor and Tefnut Ornamentation of the Egypto-Roman Temple at Nagaa Scene from north wall of Temple A at Nagaa Scene from west wall of Temple A at Nagaa . Doorway of a Temple at Nagaa Cailliaud's plan of Temples, &c, at Masawwarat As-Sufra Lepsius' plan of Temples, &c, at Masawvvarat As-Sufra . "Anak" in Eastern Desert drawing water "Anak" dwellings at Gebel Maraan .... " Anak " house at Gebel Maman Scenery in Kordofan ....... Major Marchand in Steam-launch Faidherbe at Fashoda Fashoda — Major Marchand's house and guns . Agar Dinka woman at Shambi Shilluks at the American Mission on the Sobat River Conquest of Nubia by Rameses II Payment of tribute by Nubians to the King of Egypt's representative Plan of gold mines in the Eastern Sudan worked in the reign of Seti I View of Gondokoro in 1905 Kagera River ..... Native hut on the White Nile . Tawfikiya ...... Floating sudd on the White Nile Woman grinding dhiirra at Kiro Women washing clothes at Lado Gondokoro Natives in an ambatch canoe . Woman drawing water at Omdurman Cotton spinners at Omdurman Shilluks on the White Nile resting . Khor Arab in flood .... Modern Sudani silver work Woman of Omdurman Shilluks at Fashoda. Altar with Meroi'tic inscription Sirdar inspecting the construction of the Nile-Red Sea Railway Nile-Red Sea Railway near Gebet . vii Nile-Red Sea Railway 406, 138 142 144 ■46 148 150 174 176 178 231 279 280 284 320 325 326 335 349 352 375 378 379 38i 382 384 386 394 396 398 400 408 428 434 444 476 478 480 ILLUSTRATIONS IN THE TEXT VOLUME II. PAGE Portrait of Shabaka Portrait of Shabataka Shrine with seated figure of Amen- Rfi Relief on altar of Tirhakah .... .36 Rowol roped together Tirhakah offering to Amen '' .43 Stele with account of the Dream of Tanuath- Amen 47 Stele with account of the coronation of K: Stele with account of dedication of gifts to Amen-Ra at Napata by King Aspelta and his Queen Stele with Edict against Eaters of Raw Meat at Gebel Barkal 71 Reliefs and text from Stele of Heru-Sa-Atef ... jj Reliefs and opening lines of stele of Nastasenen, or s- 5 on Nile near Ad-Damar 103 Sudan Elephant Portrait of Ra-Mer-Ka Amen-Tarit . ... Remains of Temple on east bank of Nile near 'Amara 122 Plan of Temple of 'Amara olumns of Temple at V 124 Portrait of ! len 125 Metek-Amen : fi Queen Amen-Tarit :,from altar at \V. 127 of Temple at Outline of remains of Temples a .... 129 who built Ten and hei Consort slaughfc their >uis pillar in shrine of Amen-h.etep II.'s lime God worshipped at Na aa Lion-hi from a lotu s i Lion banner of Queen Amen-Tarit . 1 ; .! IV. 140 viii ILLUSTRATIONS IN THE TEXT Bi ildi Amen-Tarit Netek-Amen God worshipped at Nagaa (Jupiter Sarapis ?) . Ark-Teten Egypto-Roman Temple at Nagaa . Plans of Temple E, F, and G at Nagaa . Sculptures on columns of Great Temple at Nagaa River Atbara KhorArab Papyrus on Bahr Al-Gebel .... View of village of Kassam, near Fazogli, in 1837 View of the Blue Nile, near Fazogli, in 1837 . Gebel Kasala, as seen from the New Government View of Al-Obed in 1837 Ripon Falls, Victoria Nyanza .... Victoria Nyanza at the Ripon Falls . Five-piastre note of Gordon .... Twenty-piastre pieces of the Khalifa Transport of gunboats by railway . Mahdi's Tomb, Omdurman, before the bombardment Bahr Al-Gebel at Kiro and Mongalla Pyramids of Meroe ..... Plan of church in the Christian monastery in the Wadi Al-G Christian monastery in the Wadi Al-Ghazal Ruined church at Siedever .... Plan of gold mines of the reign of Rameses II. Southern Sudan and district of the Great Lakes Ankoli district mountains .... Lake Albert Edward View on the Semliki River .... Upper Fall on Wakki River .... Junction of the Asua River with the Bahr Al-Gebel Sobat River River Abai, from bridge of Agam Ueldi . Abai near Lake Sana .... Lake Sana ...... Abai Rapids Portuguese bridge at Agam Deldi . Fola Rapids on Bahr Al-Gebel Cataract at Semna and Kumma Fashoda River Bank at Bor Lado Earthquake Hill azal 44. 1 1 PACK I40 I40 141 143 M3 45, 146 49, 151 161 162 171 215 215 216 217 219 219 251 267 269 277 283 287 300 301 305 337 344 352 353 354 355 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 367 369 377 381 382 383 IX ILLUSTRATIONS IN THE TEXT Murchison Falls on Victoria Nile Khartum and Onidurman Palace at Khartum . Mosque at Khartum . Sudani silver-work cigarette case Sawakin Gordon Gate, Sawakin Sawakin Bazaar Main street, Sawakin Dongolawi merchant Sudani woman .... Sudani young man . Sudani man .... Sudani woman .... Sudani maiden .... Sudani youth of Negro origin . Sudani woman wearing the rahat Meroitic inscriptions Altar with Meroitic inscription . IIalfa-Abu-1 lamed Railway Sudan Railways The Driver of the "Gedaref" . American engine on the JJalfa-Abu-I lamed Railway A shady resting-place Atbara-Sawakin Railway . Railway shops, Sawakin . Material train Leaving Sawakin Laying the Atbara-Red Sea Railway Sir W. Garstin's proposed Canal in the Sudan PAGE 385 392 393 395 405 408 409 410 4'i 418 419 421 423 425 426 427 4«9 444 445 464 465 4'>7 468 469 474 475 476 477 4«5 PART II. [continued] A HISTORY OF THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN, ANCIENT AND MODERN, CHAPTER IV. THE RISE OE THE NUBIAN OR SUDANI KINGDOM OF PIANKHl. After the departure of the priests of Amen from Thebes to seek a refuge for their god and themselves at Napata, the condition of affairs in Egypt passed from bad to worse, and no man was able to make himself truly the king of Egypt. In Upper Egypt disturbances broke out everywhere, .and such influence as the priests who remained at Thebes possessed was used by them to thwart every attempt of the kings of the North to increase their power in the South. In the Delta itself the authority of the Rubastite kings was lightly regarded, and little by little each governor of a large city arrogated to himself the authority of a king. Taking advantage of these circumstances, the native princes of Napata soon made themselves independent rulers of Nubia, and by degrees their authority was recognized over a tract of country which extended from the First Cataract in the north to the Blue Nile in the south. Under the influence of the priests of Amen who had settled in their capital and had established on a firm base the worship of the Nubian Amen, they began to regard Thebes in Egypt and the country between that city and the First Cataract as parts of their kingdom, and they spared no pains in trying to turn the fertile Dongola province into a copy of Upper Egypt, which, indeed, in many particulars it closely resembled. VOL. II. i b THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN The time was ripe for the making of this attempt, and the population of this portion of the Nile Valley, containing as it did a large Egyptian element, was ready and willing to be ruled rding to the laws of Egypt, with the civilization and religion and manners and customs of which they had been familiar for ab »ut fifteen centuries. Since the time of Aniemhrtep II. Napata had been regarded as a second Thebes by the Nubians, and we may be sure that when l.ler-lleru usurped the title of "' Prince of Kash," the act had a profound political as weli as religious signification. Whilst the petty kings in the Delta were fighting among themselves, and the chiefs in Upper Egypt were striving for sovereignty, the princes ^\ Nubia were consolidating their power, and apparently waiting for a favourable opportunity of making a descent upon Egypt. The kings of the North were far too much occupied with their own affair- to have either time or attention to give to the Sudan, and. as they had not stiff] power to take over the gold mines and work them as a govern- ment monopoly, that country interested them butlittle, and it was from the interference of Egypt ial generation?. About the year B.C 750 there reigned at Napata a Nubian king called Piankhi.1 Of his origin and of the circumstances which brought him to tin.1 throne we know nothing, though his name sts that ther< Egyptian blood in him, ami he may well have been a descendant of the great Theban royal line of which Amen was the ancestor. We may note in passing that on a pillar in the temple which he built at Gebel Barkal he styles himself the " son of Bast,'" i.e., the greal goddess of the city of Bubastis in the Delta, but it is difficult to see how he could be ci>w- 1 with that city, lie this as it may, he enclosed his name in a uche, he adopted the prenomen Usr-Maat Ra,8 which he also rtouche, and placed in front of it the title ^\{fa Suten Bat, which Mena., the first king of Egypt, used to express 1 Probablj the irapfiovs <>l Manetho. •jre of Bast which appears to hav ■ ted to the goddi ikhi and his wi e Kenensat ; >ee Pierret, 44- .( -.. *^lf° fM_4 PIANKHI his sovereignty over the South and the North, and he styled himself "Meri Amen " (beloved of Amen), son of Bast." These facts are interesting, for they prove that a Nubian prince of Napata in the eighth century before Christ endeavoured to connect himself with the ancient monarchy of the Pharaohs, and used their titles, apparently not realizing their exact signification, and, it may be added, his absurdity in doing so, and described himself as the son of an alien goddess, and the ".beloved " of a foreign god. He also called himself " son of Ra." In Northern Nubia we see on the reliefs in the temples built by the kings of Egypt figures of Tetun, certainly one of the oldest gods of Nubia, if not the oldest, but nowhere in Piankhi's inscription, or on his buildings, is there any mention of this god, and it is clear from this fact that Amen had been made to absorb the attributes of the indigenous gods of the country, and had become the " king of the gods " in Nubia as in Egypt. In the Sudan, as in Egypt, Amen appears in the form of a man, wearing a pair of high feathers on his head, or as a man with a ram's head, or as a ram, and the Nubians never confounded him with the ram-headed god Khnemu, who was especially worshipped in the Cataracts. The horns of the species of ram sacred to Khnemu project horizontally from the sides of his head, whilst those of the ram sacred to Amen curl down on each side of the animal's face. As Piankhi assumed the titles of the ancient kings of Egypt, so his Queen Kenensat also adopted the titles of the ancient queens, and her name was enclosed within a cartouche;1 of her origin likewise nothing is known, but her name does not appear to be Egyptian.2 The greatest event in the life of Piankhi was his expedition to Egypt, of which he caused a lengthy account to be cut upon a massive block of black basalt and set up in a temple built by him at Gebel Barkal ; this object was found by an Egyptian officer in the Sudan in 1862, and was subsequently brought with great difficulty to Cairo, where it is now preserved in the Museum of Thus, D ^ ^ mMim - The title of the goddess Bast worshipped by herself and her husband is it at cli taut THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Egyptian Antiquities.1 The text is the longest and fullest of any Nubian king known to us, and is of the greatest interest and value for the history of the period. It should, of course, be remembered that it is only a one-sided statement of facts, but, on tlie other hand, it is the sole authority on Piankhi's conquest of Egypt, and as such must be highly prized. The Stele of Piankhi is about 5 feet 10 inches high, 6 feet wide, and I foot 4 inches thick, and the text tills one hundred and fifty-nine lines. On the face of the rounded part of the stele v Lmen seated, and behind him the goddess Mut ; before him stands the king receiving the address which is made to him by Nemareth, who is bringing a horse as a gift. At the feet of Piankhi kneel three kings, and behind the goddess are five more; the name of each is above him. The narrative set^ forth that Piankhi, the sou of Ra, the Counterpart of Tern, and the offspring of a god, was a suten, i.e.. king from his mother's womb, and that a certain man came to him and reported that the whole of the North of Egypt was in revolt, that Tafnekhth, a local chief of the town of Neter in the Delta. had first seized the whole country as far as Memphis, and had then sailed up the Nile with a large number of soldiers, and th.it tlu- governors of the great cities of Medum, Oxyrhynchus, Crocodilopolis, and other cities on the west bank of the Nile, had thrown open their gates and received him. This done, Tafnekhth .I the river, and several cities on the east bank submitted to him in a similar manner. The only one that stood out against Tafnekhth was I lerakleopolis, the governor of which was haa-Bast ; this he besieged vigorously, and in a very short time no one could either come out of it or go into it. When Piankhi received this intelligence it must have been clear to him that Tafnekhth was tlu kind of man to succeed, and to force his southwards until he had Thebes at his mercy, but Piankhi appears t<> have taken no steps to arrest his pr< >■ Later moreover, we find from the narrative that the heads of the civil and military powers in all the cities of Egypt sent frequent mes- to Piankhi. begging him not " to keep silent," for otherwise i the text, see Mariette, Man. Divers^ plates i.-vi. It was first translated ee Ckrestomathie K^yptie?uh\ Fasc. iw. Pan's, 1876). htc. 1877, pp. 676-707, and its English translation, hte, p. 564 ff. 4 PIANKHI INVADES EGYPT all the nomes of Middle Egypt and the Land of the South would fall into the hands of Tafnekhth. They reported also that king Nemareth, after resisting for some time, had at length thrown in his lot with Tafnekhth. Matters now appeared to be serious, so Piankhi sent a message to his generals Puarma and Lamersekni, who were stationed in Egypt, and commanded his forces there, to go and seize all the men and cattle, and all the boats on the river, to stop all work in the fields and to draw up a force before the nome of Hermopolis in order to check the advance of Tafnekhth. From this state- ment it is clear that there must have been a force of Nubian troops stationed somewhere on the southern border of Egypt, which was always ready to defend Piankhi's interest in Upper Egypt. Piankhi sent his soldiers some excellent advice, and bade them fight in the way in which they were accustomed to fight, and with boldness, because they were fighting for Amen. He also bade them perform religious ceremonies when they arrived at Thebes, so that Amen, who was able to make one man to capture a thousand, may give them his potent help. His advice is so paternal that he even provides them with a formula of prayer to Amen, which runs : — " O open thou the way before us, and " Let us fight under the shadow of thy sword ; for " A child, if he be sent forth by thee, " Shall overcome him that hath overcome multitudes." Piankhi's soldiers returned him a suitable answer, and vowed that in his name they would do great things. When they arrived at Thebes they worshipped Amen according to their instructions, and then they embarked in their boats and sailed down the river. On their way they met a force of Tafnekhth's sailing up, and a fight took place in which the Nubians were victorious, capturing many boats and prisoners, and so destroying Tafnekhth's chance of reducing Herakleopolis. Piankhi's troops then marched on to the relief of Herakleopolis, and when they arrived there they found that the siege was being directed by Tafnekhth him- self, assisted by Nemareth, Auapeth, Shashanq, and several other chiefs, including the governors of Busiris, Mendes, Hermopolis Parva, and Bubastis. The Nubians attacked the confederates without delay, and defeated them and captured several of their 5 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN boats, but a remnant managed to escape, and succeeded in finding refuge at Pa-pek, which, as Prof. Maspero has pointed out, may well be near the modem Al-Ffika'i. At dawn the next morning the Nubians left their boats and marched agains.t the foe, and, according to Piankhi, his soldiers slew such a large number of men and horses that it was impossible to count them. The remainder fled, having suffered the "worst and most disastrous "defeat which they had ever known." Meanwhik: Xemareth escaped and went to HermOpolis, and having gathered together the people and the cattle, he went with them into the city and entrenched himself behind its earthworks, and here Piankhi's soldiers found him when they arrived. They surrounded Hermopolis, and then sent to report to their master what they had done. When Piankhi received the news he me like a panther in a rage, and swore by Amen that as soon as he had performed the festival ceremonies of that god at Thebes, he would come in person, and make "the Land of '• the North to taste the taste of his claws." Leaving a force to Hermopolis, the remainder of the Nubians set out to attack Oxyrhynchus, and having captured the city with all the fury of a water-flood, they sent a report to this effect to Piankhi, but the king's wrath was not appeased. They next attacked Tatehen and captured it, beating down its walls with a battering ram: they killed many of its inhabitants, include son ofTafnekhth, but when they sent the report of their success to the king his wrath was not appeased. They next attacked Hipponon, and captured it. but still the king was not satisfied. On tlie ninth day of the month Thoth (August- September) Piankhi set out from Napata, and came down quickly on the the inundation to Tii bes. Having performed all the ceremonies, and made all the- offerings proper for the New festivals, In- re-embarked and went on to Hermopolis. Me left his boat, and mounted his chariot, and attacked the city at the of his troops, and the enemy trembled lie had his tent pitched to the south-west of the city, and made his soldiers build earthworks, stiffened with poles, up to the level of the tops of the walls, and. having caused wooden shelt on these he filled them with archers and slingers, who poured their missiles among the people and slew many of them. After three days 6 PIANKH1 INVADES EGYPT Hermopolis capitulated, and Nemareth sent messengers, laden with rich gifts, to offer his submission to Pifmkhi ; he also sent his queen and her women to entreat for mercy from the Nubian queen and princesses and ladies, who had accompanied the Nubian king to Egypt. In due course Nemareth himself appeared, leading a horse with one hand and holding a sistrum in the other, and, having made a suitable speech, he offered to Piankhi rich tribute. Having made an offering to Thoth, the great god of the city, Piankhi went through the palace and the storehouses of Nemareth, and had all their contents brought out before him, including the ladies of the royal harim, but on these last he did not look at all. Then he passed on to the royal stud farm, and when he found that the brood mares and foals had been allowed to go hungry, he swore by the Sun-god that he considered this neglect of the horses to be the very worst of all the offences which Nemareth had committed. Piankhi divided the spoil of Hermopolis into two lots , one he gave to Amen, and the other he kept for himself. At this time Pef-tchaa- Bast, governor of Herakleopolis, also brought tribute, including a number of very fine horses. He tendered his submission in picturesque words, saying that he had fallen deep down into hell, and was buried in the blackness of night, when the light of Piankhi fell upon him, and his darkness was rolled away, &c. Piankhi then passed on to Al-Lahim, which submitted to him, and he thus became master of the Fayyum ; the son of Tafnekhth was allowed to march out with his followers unmolested. Medum and Thet-taui also opened their gates to Piankhi, and then he was able to go straight on to Memphis. Here, however, the gates were shut against him. He found some means of address- ing the people of the city, and told them that if they let. him in he would offer sacrifice to Ptah and Seker, and then sail down the river, and that not even a child should cry out in alarm. 1 hese words the people did not believe, and they kept their gates fast shut, and, when they found a few Nubian artificers who were examining the quay, or the harbour, separated from the main body of the Nubian army, they fell upon them and killed them. One night Tafnekhth appeared and addressed the garrison of Memphis, which numbered 8,000 men, and pointed out to them how well the place was provisioned, and how strongly it was 7 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN fortified, and he advised them to offer resistance to Piankhi, at all events until he (Tafnekhth) returned. He then mounted his horse and rode away. Tin- next morning Piankhi went to the side of the city and examined the fortifications, and he found them very strong. When his soldiers saw them they made up their minds that the city could only be taken by casting up mounds against it, and attacking it under cover of wooden towers; but Piankhi thought otherwise, and ordering his boats to advance, they dashed in among the vessels which lined the quay sides, and as the water was up to the walls, their bows projected over them into the city. From the bows of the boats the soldiers leaped into the city, and captured it with all the force of a water-flood. At dawn next day the king sent men to protect the temples, and then he went and made an offering to the gods, and he purified the city, and made sacrifices to Ptah and Seker. At this time Auapeth, and Merkanshu, and Peta- Ast tendered their submission and brought him gifts. The following day Piankhi crossed the river to Kher-Aha and sacrificed to Temu, and then he went on to Heliopolis to perform ceremonies in honour of the gods there. He first purified himself by bathing his face in the Sun Well, and then he offered up white oxen. &C, to Ra. He entered the temple of Ra, ami prayed many prayers there, and the high-priest also prayed on his behalf. This done, he asperged and censed himself, and then, taking with him flowers and perfume, he mounted the steps of the shrine, and opened the doors of the ark, and saw Ra face t<> face. He then adored the Boats of Ra and Tern, and, having shut the doors of the ark and sealed them, he ordered the priests t no other king enter the sanctuary. Piankhi was thus acknowledged king of Egypt by the god Amen-Ka. and all the people knew that they must tender to him their submission as the god's vice-gerent upon earth. The following day the Erpa Peta-Ast submitted and paid him large tribute, and fifteen other kings, and dukes, and governors followed his example. Meanwhile Tafnekhth, the leader of the rebellion, dismantled Unifications, set tire to his treasure-houses, and, taking his soldiers with him, fled to the city of M,st. Thither Piankhi sent soldiers under the Erpa P< fca-Ast, and they slew every man they PIANKHI LORD OF EGYPT found there. Tafnekhth seems to have escaped to some place among the salt lagoons near the sea-coast, and from this place he sent an envoy bearing his submission. He acknowledged his faults in picturesque language, and bagged Piankhi not to punish him according to his deserts ; in weighing his offences he begs the king to hold the scales of his judgment in such a way that such merit as he possesses by reason of his submission, and his suffer- ings and misery, may tell in his favour as much as possible. Finally, he said he was ready to pay tribute to Piankhi and to swear an oath of allegiance, and he asked the king to send an envoy to receive the tribute, and to hear him swear the oath. This Piankhi did, and Tafnekhth went into the house of his god, and in the presence of the Nubian commander-in-chief and a high-priest, he swore never to offend again ; this satis- fied Piankhi, who accepted the tribute, and granted peace to Tafnekhth. Soon after this the cities of Cynopolis and Aphrodito- polis submitted to Piankhi, and thus the whole of Egypt was in his power. Finally, two Governors of the North and two of the South, and all the other chiefs of the country, came and tendered their submission in person, but as all save one, Nemareth, were uncircumcised, and were fish-eaters, they were not admitted to the royal tent, and they stood outside in awe, " their legs (trembling) like those of women." There was nothing further for Piankhi to do. so his boats were loaded with the masses of tribute which had been given to him, and he sailed up the river with a glad heart, the people every- where receiving him with joy. He had added the kingdom of the North, which at its conquest by him extended from the Mediterranean to Asyiit, to his own kingdom of the South, and the Nile Valley so far south as Napata was once more subject to one king, just .as it had been under the XVIIIth Dynasty, only that king was a Sudani instead of an Egyptian. Piankhi did not rule from Thebes as might have been expected, but he returned to Napata with his spoil, a large portion of which fell, no doubt, to the share of the priests of Amen and their god. Probably with the view of commemorating his conquest of Egypt, Piankhi built a large temple on the plain at the foot of Gebel Barkal, which was dedicated to Amen-Ra and the other deities of his triad. It was at least 500 feet long and 135 feet wide, and 9 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN contained two courts, a hypostyle hall, a vestibule, and a sanctuary, which held probably three shrines. The pylon which divided the first court from the second was decorated with battle-scenes, ssions, &c, copied, no doubt, from the temples of Egypt. 'l"he temple is now a mass of ruins, but thanks to the plans and riptions made by Cailliaud, Hoskins, and Lepsius, when they in a less confused state than now, its general arrangement can be satisfactorily made <>ut. As this has been discussed where in the present work, nothing need be said about it here. It is a moot point whether Piankhi repaired and enlarged a temple erected by one of the great kings of the Wlllth or XlXth Dynasty, or built an entirely new edifice; it seems. however, most probable that he adopted the former course. It is impossible to think that the Thothmes and Amcndietep kings did not build temples in the capital of their Sudan kingdom, especially as under their reigns Napata must have been the great trading centre to which the slaves of the countries <>n the White and Blue Niles, and the gold, red stones, ivory, ebony, ostrich feathers, skins. &c., were brought. Hoskins tells1 us that he found in the burial ground at Merawi a stone bearing one half of the name of Rameses II.: and Lepsius, probably referring to the same that the oldest remains which existed at G Barkal were confined to '"one temple which Rameses the G d to Amen-Ra." The occurrence of the name of this king on an isolated block of stone proves nothing beyond th< that some admirer of this king cut his name on it. As a matter of fact. Rameses II. had little interest in Napata, for in the Wadi 'Ulaki, near Dakka, he found a rich gold-producing country which was far nearer Egypt than the mines of the region further south. And we know that his name appears prominently in places \\ here he built nothing. Piankhi to have neither restored nor built any temples \ pt : if he did, no traces of them remain. The black basalt stele on which he caused to be cut the history of his campaign \ pt tells us nothing concerning his subsequent acts, and nothing is known about his dealings with the duels further to the south in tin- Sudan, or the system on which he ruled -' Letters^ \>. 222. INSCRIPTION OF PIANKHI his kingdom. The one document which he has left us is, how- ever, most valuable, and its contents are of more than ordinary interest ; moreover, the information which it gives us is not to be obtained elsewhere. No other Nubian king has supplied us with such a full account of the chief events of his reign, and that the reader may be able to judge of his narrative in a consecutive form, an English rendering of it is here appended. A few passages are obscure to modern investigators of it, and the mean- ings of some of the words in it are not yet known accurately, but the general sense of the document is quite clear, and it proves that the Nubian Piankhi was no mere savage conqueror, but a man endowed with a full belief in his divine origin, a capable and energetic soldier, and a ruler who, in the hour of his triumph, exhibited moderation in his dealings with the vanquished, and who knew how to respect the temples and gods of Egypt, and the civil and religious institutions of the country whence his own civilization, and religion, and laws were drawn. Translation of the Inscription of Piankhi Meri Amen, King of the Egyptian Sudan, about b.c. 730. On the first day of the month Thoth, in the twenty-first year of the reign of the king of the South and North C Piankhi-meri-Amen 1 , the ever-living, His Majesty pronounced the~[following] words : Hearken ye to the things which I have done more than [my] ancestors. I am a suten (king), the emanation of God, and the living counterpart of Tern ; [when I] came forth from the womb I was decreed (literally, written down) to be a ruler (heg) who should strike fear into his chiefs. I was recognized as a ruler by my mother when I was in the egg (i.e., in embryonic state), and as a well-doing god, and the beloved of the gods, the son of Ra, the work of his hands ( Piankhi-meri-Amen J. One came and said unto His Majesty : " The governor of the " country of the West (Amentet), the great duke (ha) in the city of " Neter (Sais), Tafnekhth, [hath made himself master] in the nome " of . . ■ . , in the nome Ka-heseb, in Hap, in An, in Pa-nub, and " in White Wall (Memphis) ; he hath taken possession of the whole " of the West Country, from the region of the swamps (on the "north) to Thet-taui [a district of Memphis]; he hath sailed up "the river with a large number of soldiers, and all the lands on "both sides of the Nile have joined themselves unto him, and the n THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN "dukes and the governors of the towns and cities which have " temples in them guard his feet like so many dogs. None of the " cities which are fortified hath shut its gates against him in " the nomes of the south. The city of Nfer-Tem, the city of Pa-Ra- " sekhem-kheper, the city of Xeter-het-Sebek (Crocodilopolis), the "city of Pa-Matchet (Oxyrhynchus), the city of Thekansh, and i \- town in the West Country, have unbolted their gates, by "reason of their fear of him. Then he betook himself to the " nomes of the East Country, and they also opened theirgates before "him, namely, IJet-Bennu Ilipponon), Taiutchait, Suten-^et and •• Pa-n< -b-ti-p-iihet (Aphroditopolis) ; verily [thus have they "done]. He hath also beleaguered Suten-henen (Herakleopolis), "and he hath completely surrounded it.1 Of those who want to "come out none cometh out, and of those who would go into it " none goeth in by reason of the fighting which goeth on each day "(or, all day long) He hath invested the city closely at e "point, and every duke (ha) knoweth the portion of the wall " [which he is to attack]. He hath allowed every man among "the dukes and the governors of cities, which have temples in "them, to dwell in his own district. [These things hath he done] " by reason of the arrogance of his rebellious heart, and his heart is " swollen with pride and joy." And moreover, the chiefs, and the dukes, and the generals of the army which were in every town were sending mes- to His Majesty every day, saying: "If thou keepest silence "in this matter then all the Land of the South, and the "nomes of Middle Egypt, will be lost; Tafnekhth carrieth all "before him, and findeth none to resist him. Nemareth . . . . "the duke of I.Iet-urt hath thrown down the fortifications of "'the city of Neferus, and hath himself laid waste his own town. " being afraid that Tafnekhth will capture it; but when he was "besieged by him in another city, verily he departed and "became a watcher of his feet. Nemareth hath now forsaken His "Majesty ami hath become an adherent of Tafnekhth, whom he /eth, and Tafnekhth hath handed over to him the nome of "Oxyrhynchus, and hath given to him everything that his heart sireth." Then His Majesty sent messages to the dukes and to the Commanders-in-chief who were in Egypt, namely to the general Puarma, and the general Lamersekni, and t<> every general of His Majesty in Egypt, telling them to go quickly with boldness, and set in array the battle .... and to seize the men, and the cattle, and the barges which were on the river, and to prevent the labourers from going out to the fields, and to stop every ploughman from ploughing the land, and t<> beleaguer closely the country in front of the nome of Un (Hermopolis), and to fight against it each day. And thus did they. 1 Literally, " he hath made himself like a serpenf with [its] tail in [itsj mouth." IJ INSCRIPTION OF PIANKHI Then His Majesty made soldiers march into Egypt, and gave them strict commands, saying: "Ye shall not [pass] the night in "pleasure,1 but as soon as ye see that he hath set his troops in " marching order, do battle with him. If any man shall say, He " hath marched his infantry and cavalry to another city, then abide "ye where ye are until his soldiers arrive. Attack ye when one " shall tell you that he is with his forces in another town, and let ' ' the dukes whom he hath brought to help him be gathered together, " [and] let the Thehennu (Libyans), [and] as many soldiers as he " pleaseth muster [where they will], and let the battle be set in " array according to ancient custom. And say, We do not know " how to command him, and to give orders to his soldiers, and to "harness the finest horses of the stable. Then fight in battle "boldly, for we know that it is the god Amen who hath sent us "forth. And when ye arrive at the sanctuary of Uast (Thebes), " opposite the Apts (i.e., Karnak and Luxor), go ye into the water, " and cleanse ye yourselves in the waters of the stream. Undress "yourselves at the head of the lake, unstring your bows, lay aside "your arrows, and let not any chief imagine himself to be the "equal of the lord of two-fold strength, for the strength of no " mighty man shall prevail without his help. Him who is feeble "of arm he maketh strong of arm ; if the enemy be many, he " maketh them to flee before the hand of the impotent man, and " he maketh one man to lead captive a thousand. Wet ye "yourselves in the water of his altars, and smell ye the earth " before him, and say ye unto him ; ' O make thou a way for us, " and let us fight under the shadow of thy sword, for a child, if he " be sent by thee, shall overcome him that hath overcome " multitudes. '" Then the soldiers cast themselves on their bellies before His Majesty, saying: "Through thy name Amen will work mighty "deeds by us. Thy counsel leadeth thy soldiers, thy bread is in " our bodies on every road, and thy beer quencheth our thirst, "thy might giveth to us the sword of battle, and victory shall " come to us by the mention of thy name. The soldiers who are " led by a captain having unnatural passions shall not stand firm. " Who is like unto thee ? Verily thou art a strong king, thou " workest with thy hands, and thou art the overseer of the opera- " tions of war." Then the soldiers made their passage down the river, and they arrived at the city of Thebes, and they did everything which His Majesty had commanded them to do. And they continued their journey down the river, and they met several large boats sailing up the river containing soldiers, and sailors, and mighty captains of every kind of the Land of the North, and every man of them was equipped with the weapons of war and ready to do battle with the troops of His Majesty. Then the soldiers of His Majesty 1 De Roug<5 translates: N' (attaquez pas) pendant la nuit,comme pour un jeu. 13 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN inflicted a mighty defeat on them, and slew a countless number, and made pri ; their soldiers, and captured their boats. and they brought the captives alive to the place where His Majesty was. Then they marched on to the territory before the city of Suten-hem Lkleopolis) in order to set in array the battle against the dukes and the kings of the Land of the North. that is to ittack king Nemareth, and king Auapeth, and Shashanq, the chief of the Mashuasha, of the city of Pa-Asar neb- T< t. i.e., Busiris) : and Tchet-Amen-af-ankh, the erreat chief of the Mashuasha, of the city oi Pa-ba-neb-fet (i.e., Mendes) ; and his eldest son who was commander of the Hoops of the city of Pa- Tehuti-ap-rehehui i.e., Hermopolis Parva) , and the soldiers of the Erpa Bakennifi; and his el Nesnaqeti, the chief of the Mashuasha in the nome of ka-heseb : and every prince who carrieth a fan in the Land of the North ; and king Uasarken, who is in Pa- ■ Bubastis) and the city of Uu-en-Ra-nefert ; and every duke, and every governor of a city wherein there is a temple on the west of the river, and on ti of the river, and in the lands which art- between them. All these had joined themselves ther, and had become guardians of the feet of Tafnekhth, the chief <-f the Land of the West, the governor of all the temple cities of the Land of the- North, the prophet of Neith, the lady of SaYs, and the settl priest of the god Ptah. The soldiers of \\\< Majesty marched against them, and they inflicted defeal upon them, the greatest defeat there everwas, and they captured their boats on the river. A remnant of them made their escape and succeeded in reaching a place in the country on the western bank called Pa-pek. As soon as the dawn came on the following morning the soldiers of His Majesty set out to attack them, and they rushed in among them and slew such a large number of men and horses that it was impossible to say how many had died. I hen panic seized the rest of them, and they fled to the Land of the North, having suffered a defeat which was greater and more disastrous than they had ever known.' And king Nemareth sailed up the river, having been told that the city of Khemennu I Hermopolis) was [open] before the enemy. that is, the soldiers of Mis Majesty [Piankhi]. He captured its ttle, and he himself went into the city of I'm f His Majesty [Piankhi) were [in boats] on the on the territory of the nome of In. and when they heard this, they surrounded the nome of (."n on all its four sides, and they allowed no man either t<> come in orto go out ; and they sent mess to announce to His Majesty, the King of the South and North f Piankhi-meri-Amen J, the life-giver, each defeat which had been inflicted on the enemy by the forces 1 When complete, the text at this j the number of the people who nn in tin I) it the figures have either been ei wittingly, or broken dentally. 14 INSCRIPTION OF PIANKHI of His Majesty. And His Majesty raged like a panther, and said : " If it should happen that they leave alive a remnant of the soldiers "of the Land of the North, and if any one of them escape to " relate the story thereof, and if they do not slay utterly every one " of them, I swear by my own life, nnd by the love which I bear to " Ra, and by the grace which Father Amen hath shown to me, " that I myself will go down the river and will overthrow every- " thing which he (i.e., Tafnekhth) hath made, and will make him " to retreat from the fight for evermore. When I have performed ''the ceremonies which belong to the Festival of the New Year, "and I have made my offering to Father Amen during his beauti- " ful festival, wherein he maketh his beautiful appearance at " the Festival of the New Year, he shall send me away in peace " to see Amen during the beautiful festival of the Festival of Apt, " and I shall make him to appear in his divine form in the Apt of the " South ' in his beautiful festival of the Festival of the Apt, on the " night of the Festival which is stablished in Thebes, the Festival " which Ra ordained 2 when time began, and I shall make him to " appear in his temple, and he shall take his position on his throne " on the day whereon the god entereth, which is the second day of " the third month of the summer, on that day, I say, will I make " the Land of the North to taste the taste of my fingers."' Now when the soldiers [of His Majesty Piankhi] who were in Egypt heard of the wrath which His Majesty nursed against them they waged war against the nome of Uaseb at Pa-Matchet (Oxyrhynchus), and they captured it like a water-flood. They sent messengers to His Majesty [to announce this], but his heart was not satisfied thereat. Then they attacked Tatehen,3 which was very strongly fortified, and they found it to be full of mighty men of war of all kinds of the Land of the North. And they constructed a tower 4 to send against it to beat down its walls, and they made so great a slaughter among its people that the dead could not be counted ; among these was the son of Tafnekhth, the prince of the Mashuasha. They sent messengers to His Majesty [to announce this], but his heart was not satisfied thereat. Then they attacked Het Bennu, and it opened its fortress, and the soldiers of His Majesty entered therein. They sent messengers to His Majesty [to announce this], but his heart was not satisfied thereat. On the ninth day of the first month of the summer, His Majesty set out on his journey and went down the river to Thebes, and he took part in the celebration of the Festival of Amen, the Festival of Apt. Then His Majesty continued his journey down the river to the city of Un. And His Majesty came forth from the cabin of his barge, and he harnessed his horses, and mounted his chariot, and the terror of His Majesty 1 I.e., the temple of Luxor. s Literally, made. 3 A fortress near Memphis. A I.e., a battering ram. 15 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN penetrated even to the remotest parts of the country of the Sati Asia ?), and every heart quaked with the fear of him. And His Majesty rushed forth and threw himself upon those whom his soldier- hated, and he raged at them like a panther, and said : " W ye still continue to fight, and if ye still gainsay my com- "mands, and if ye, moreover, persist in your rebellion I must in " truth put the fear of me in the Land of the North." And he inflicted upon them a terrible defeat, disastrous and crushing. Then a tent was pitched for him to the south-west of the city of Hermopolis, and he besieged the city every day. lie made heaps of earth to cover the walls, and he set up wooden stagings ale them. And the archers [who were in them] shot forth arrows, and the leathern slings hurled forth stones to kill people [in the city] every day. And it came to pass on the third day that the city of On was in a stinking state, and the people thereof could not breathe by reason of the stench [of the corpses]. Then the city ^l~ I'n cast it>elf upon its belly, and it offered up supplications for mercy before the king (/W, i.e., His Majesty Piankhi . And envoys came forth with things of every kind which were beautiful to look upon, that is to say, gold, precious stones of every kind, and apparel made of the finest linen, [and they said]; "He hath risen! The uraeus is on his brow, he hath 11 placed his terror [in our hearts], and it is unnecessary for us to " allow many days to pass before making supplication to his "crown." '1 hen he [i.e., Nemareth] made his wife to come, tin- wife of a king and the daughter of a king. Nesthentmeh, to make supplication before the queen and loyal concubines, and princesses, and sisters of the king (i.e., of Piankhi), and she cast herself upon her belly in the house of the women, before the queens, saying. " O come with me, queens, and princesses, and . and make ye to be at peace Horus, the lord of the " palace, whose souls are mighty, and whose- word cometh to pass " with great effect indeed, O come ye " [Fifteen lines of the text are here broken away] *' the way of life.1 If I were to ascend into the sky like an "arrow, I should be [caught by thee. Have submitted to thee] " the countries of the South, and the land of the North bows in "homage before thee. We beseech thee to let us live under "thy shadow .... Not a grown man is seen with his father, thy Domes are tilled with children.'" And he cast himself upon his belly before Hi- Majesty .... saying: "O Horns, "lord of the palace, behold, it is thy souls who have done this " thing unto me. I am one of thy royal vassals, who are bound "to pay tribute into thy treasury, whose tribute thou dost ,pute, but I will pay unto thee more than they all." Then he brought the tribute which had been laid upon him, silver, Lapis-lazuli, turquoises, copper (?), and [precious] stones of : This is a part of the speech of the conquered rebel to Piankhi. INSCRIPTION OF PIANKHI every kind in large quantities, and he filled the treasure-house with these offerings. He led a horse in his right hand, and in his left he held a sistrum, a sistrum of gold and lapis-lazuli, Then [Piankhi] rose in his palace, and he came forth and went to the Temple of Thoth, the Lord of the Eight Gods, and he slaughtered oxen, and calves, and geese, to Father Thoth, the Lord of the Eight Gods in the House of the Eight Gods, and the fighting men of the nome of Un [Hermopolis] shouted for joy, and the priests said : " Right well hath Horus, the son of " Ra, ( Piankhi 1L taken up his place in his town. Thou hast " made for us a festival inasmuch as thou hast protected the nome "ofUn." • Then His Majesty set out to go to the palace of king Nemareth, and he went through every chamber of the royal house, and his treasury, and his store-houses. Then he made them bring to him the queens and the princesses, and they were loud in their praises of His Majesty after the manner of women, but His Majesty did not permit his face to turn towards them. And His Majesty went on to the place where the horses were kept, and into the stalls of the foals, and he perceived that they had been suffering from hunger, and he said : " I swear by my " own life, and by the love which I have for Ra, who reneweth *' the [breath of] life which is in my nostrils, that, to my mind, " to have allowed my horses to suffer hunger, is the worst of all " the evil things which thou hast done in the violence of thy " heart. I can testify to the terror of a lord in thy people. 1 " Knowest thou not that the shadow of God is upon me, and that " my luck never faileth me ? I swear that if any man whom I " had not known had done this thing to me I would never have " remitted to him his offence. I was brought forth from [my " mother's] womb having been brought into being from a divine " egg, and the god begot me and set his person [in me]. I have " never done anything without him, and he himself hath decreed " that which I have done." Then His Majesty took count of the spoil for the treasury, and of his storehouses [which he dedicated] as an offering for Amen in the Apts. And the governor of Suten-henen (Herakleopolis >, Pef-tch-aa-Bast, came with his gifts to Pharaoh, gold, silver, [precious] stones of all kinds, and the finest horses from his stables, and he cast himself upon his belly in the presence of His Majesty, and he said : " Homage to thee, O Horus, thou mighty "king, thou bull who subduest bulls! I dug out a place for " myself in the Tuat,2 I was sunk deep down in the darkness, 1 A difficult pa-sage. De Rouge reads : " Ne rebelle pas ton cceur ! j'attes- terai la terreur du maitre a tes gens : " and Brugsch renders : " That thou hast laid thy heart bare through this, evidence is furnished me of thy habitual views " (?). 2 I.e., the Other World. He means to say, " I was in the blackest hell." VOL. II. iy C THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN 11 when light was cast in on me. I found no friend in the day of '• evil, or any one who supported me in the day of battle excepl " thyself, O king. Thou hast rolled away the darkness which "was over me. Henceforward I will be thy servant, and all my '• possessions are thine. Suten-luiien shall pay tribute into thy "palace, tor 'heboid, thou art the image of Ra-Harmachis and " thou art above the stars which never fail (akkemu seku). His " existence is thine in thy capacity of king j he never diminisheth " and thou shalt never diminish, O king of the South and North, "f Piankhi J, who livest forever ! " Then His Majesty sailed down the river to A.p-she (i.e., the Payyum), near to Rehent (Al-Lahun), and he found the city of Pa f Ra-sekhem-kheper J, with its fortifications manned, and its fortress shut against him, and it was filled with mighty m< war of all kinds from the Land of the North. And His Majesty sent a message unto them, saying: "0 ye who live in the death " of the Tuat, deprived of ye wretched ones ! 0 ye who "live in death, if another moment pass without your having "opened your gates to me, verily ye shall suffer the doom of " vanquished folk, and it shall be disastrous to the king. Do not close the doors of your lives at the block of slaughter this "day; do not love death and hate life " Then they sent engers unto His Majesty, saying: "Indeed the shadow of " god is on thy head, O son of Nut,1 and he hath given unto thee " his two hands. The thing which is imagined in thy heart " cometh to pass straightway, even as that which cometh forth " from the mouth of God, for verily, thou art born of God ; this " wesee by the work- of thy two hands. Verily [this is] thy city, " and its enclosed fortifications [are thine] let every man " enter and let every mango forth, and let His Majesty 'swill be done." Then they came forth with the son of the Prince of Mashuasha, Tafnekhth. And the soldiers of His Majesty entered into the city, and he did not slay any man whom he found therein. [Then His Majesty sent men] with those who had the seals to seal up his doc u and he had a list made of the things in his treasury for the ■wy. and the contents of the store-houses were counted as offering for his father Anien-ka, the lord of the thrones of the Two Lands. And His M; ntinued his journey down the river, and he found the city ofMer-Tem, the Temple of Seker-neb-sehetch, with ates] shut, but before he came th( I onflict broke out within it and fear [seized | them, and terror closed then mouths Then His Majesty sent messengers unto them, saying: " Verily tl two ways before you: cho< according your -ates and ye shall In I.e.. the goddess of the sky. Mom the mouth of thy two han< ATTACK ON MEMPHIS " them closed and ye shall die • for My Majesty passeth by no "city that keepeth its gates shut." Thereupon His Majesty entered straightway into the innermost part of this city, and he dedicated [and offered sacrifices] to the goddess Menhi- khent-Sehetch. And he made a list of the contents of his treasury and store houses which he set apart as offerings to Amen of the Apt?. Then His Majesty continued his journey down the river to Thet-taui,1 and he found its fortifications closed and manned by mighty men of war of all kinds of the Land of the South. And they opened the gates of their strong places, and they cast them- selves upon their bellies, [and they sent messengers to] His Majesty, [saying] : " Thy father hath decreed that thou shalt "possess his heritage of the lordship of the Two Lands: thou "hast taken possession of them, and thou art the lord over [all] "the earth." Then His Majesty went forth [from the cabin of his boat] , and he offered up a great sacrifice to the gods who dwelt in this city, oxen, calves, geese, and good and pure things of eveiy kind. And he had a list of the contents of the treasury made for his treasury, and of the contents of the store-houses he made offerings [to Amen of the Apts]. [Then His Majesty advanced to] White Wall (i.e.. Memphis), and he sent messengers unto the inhabitants thereof, saying : " Shut ye not your gates, and there shall be no fighting inside " your city. My entry therein shall belike unto the entry of the "god Shu, who is from primeval time, and my going forth shall "be as his going forth, and my passage shall not be obstructed. " I will make an offering unto Ptah and the gods who are within "White Wall, I will perform all the ceremonies appertaining to " Seker in the secret sanctuary, I will look upon the god who is 'on his southern wall (i.e., Ptah), and then I will sail on down " the river in peace .... White Wall shall remain unharmed " and safe, and not a child shall raise a cry of distress. Consider " ye now the nomes to the south. Not a man in them, except " such as hath uttered blasphemies against god and hath revolted, " hath been slain, for the block of slaughter hath only been " prepared for those who have rebelled." [Nevertheless the inhabitants of White Wall] shut fast their gates, and they caused a company of soldiers to go forth against a few of the soldiers of His Majesty who were artificers, and master- masons, and boatmen [and they slew them on] the river bank of White Wall. And behold that Prince of Sais (Tafnekhth) came to White Wall by night, and he gave orders to his soldiers, and to his transport men, and to every officer of his soldiers ;who were in all] eight thousand men, and he admonished them very strictly indeed [saying] : — " Verily 1 This strong-; fortress was built by Amenemhat I., and marked the division between Lower and Upper Egypt. It lay a little to the south of Memphis. 19 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN •• Men-Nefer is filled with the bravest, mightiest men of war of "all kinds of the Land of the North, and its granaries arc over- 11 flowing with wheat, and barley, and grain of all kinds, and '• weapons Of all kinds are [stored therein], and [the city is " surrounded by] a wall, and the great bastions are built as " strongly as the craft of the mason can build them, and [as] the 11 river floweth round its eastern side no place for attacking it can " be found there. The byres remain full of cattle, and the " treasury is stored with silver, gold, bronze, clothing, ino " honey, and unguents. I am going away, and I commit " [this] property to the chiefs of the North, I will open their " nomes for them, and I will become . . . [defend ye these " for a few] days until I conn-." Then he mounted his h for he could not depend upon his chariot, and he went down the river through fear of His Majesty. And as soon as it was dawn on the following day. His Majesty set out for White- Wall : he landed on the northern side of the city, finding that the waters reached up to the walls, and the boats came up close to the [quay] of Men-Nefer (Memphis). And His Majesty saw that it was Strongly fortified, and that the walls thereof had been made higher by means of new buildings, and that the bastions thereof were provided with fort i tic; it ions, and that there was no place available whereat it might be attacked. Now every man among the soldiers of His Majesty .-pake his opinion as to the method which ought to be followed in attacking [the city], and every one said: — "Come, let us surround it on all " sides .... verily its soldiers are very many. And the master "of affairs [or. works] said:— Make a pas-age to it. We will " throw up earth against the walls thereof, and on this we will lay " planks of olive wood firmly fastened together, and we' will ■ " wooden towers, and will make wooden .... round about " its whole circuit, and with these we will make breaches every- " where in it from the mounds of earth and the .... to raise ••the' ground by its walls, and we shall [thus] find a path for our t." Then was His Majesty filled with rage like a panther, and he: said : — " I swear by my own life, and by the love of Ra, and by "the grace of my father Amen, that I believe1 this hath " happened in respect of it by the' decree of Amen. This ii.e\. the ch given above) is the speech of a man ... and the " nomes of the south : they opened their gates to him [whilst he " was] on the road. They have not set Amen in their hearts, "and they know not his decree; this hath he done so that he " might make' his souls cause his terror to be seen. I shall nire the city like- a water-flood, and this hath [my father " Amen] ordered me to do." Then he made his boat advance, and his soldiers to attack the quay of Men-Nefer ; and 1 Literally, " I find " (?). CAPTURE OF MEMPHIS they passed in among the barges, and transports, and all boats with decks, and all the boats without, and these, in very large numbers, they tied up their own boats to the quay of Men-Nefer, with their bows close in to the houses of the city .... and none of the soldiers of His Majesty caused one child to cry out in distress. Then His Majesty himself had the vessels, and they were very many, drawn close to [the quay]. And His Majesty said unto his soldiers: — " It resteth now upon you " to act ; surround the walls, and enter the houses on the " waters of the river. If any man among you entereth by the " wall, let him not stay upon the place where he is ... . Offer " no resistance to the captains [who wish to submit], for that " would be an abominable thing [to do]. We have closed the " country of the South, and we have arrived at the country of the " North, and we sit upon Makhi-taui." l And His Majesty captured the town of Men-Nefer like a water- flood, and he slew a large number of the people who were therein, and the prisoners were brought alive to the place where His Majesty was. And when it was dawn on the following day, His Majesty caused men to go there to protect the temples of God, and he performed acts of worship in the sanctuary of the gods, and he poured out libations to the divine chiefs of Het- ka-Ptah, and he purified Men-Nefer with natron and incense, and he set the priests in their appointed places. Then His Majesty went to the temple [of Ptah] and he poured out a libation at the entrance thereof, and he performed all the ceremonies which are prescribed for performance by the king, he entered into the divine house, and he offered up a great sacrifice to Ptah upon his Southern Wall, consisting of oxen, calves, geese, and every kind of good thing. Then His Majesty went into his house, and he heard that all the towns which were in the district of Men-Nefer, that is to say, the town of Heripetmai, and Peni- .... naunaa, and Pebekhen- nebiu, and Tauhibit, had opened their gates, and that all the inhabitants thereof had betaken themselves to flight, and that no man knew where they had gone. And Auapeth and Merkanshu, the chief of the Mashuasha, and the erpct Peta-Asteta, and all the dukes of the Land of the North came bearing their offerings to look upon the beauties 2 of His Majesty. And he adjudged the contents of the treasuries and store-houses of Memphis as offerings for Amen, and Ptah, and the company of the gods who were in Het-ka-Ptah (Memphis). And at dawn on the following day His Majesty made a journey to the east side of the river, and he made an offering to Tern in 1 A name meaning, " The Balance of the Two Lands." This place was near Memphis. 3 I.e., to experience the noble qualities of forgiveness and magnanimity of Piankhi. 21 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Kher-Aha,1 and to the company of the gods in the temple, and to the company of the gods of the Amhet, and to the gods who arc therein, consisting of oxen, calves, and geese, so that they might give Life, strength, and health to the king of the Smith and .\orth, Piankhi, living for ever. Then His Majesty set out for Annu ( Heliopolis), oxer the mountain of Kher-Aha, by the road of the god Sep to Kher-Aha, and Mis Majesty went on to the camp to the west of the town n( the two wells (or lakes) Merti (i.e., the modern Matariva>, and he made an offering there, and he purihed himself in tin of water, and he bathed his face in the milk (i.e.. water) of Nut. wherein Ka bathed his face. And he passed on to Shai-qa-em Annu, and he offered up a great offering there before Ka as he i consisting of white oxen, milk, ami, incense, and sweet-smelling wood of all kinds. And as he was going along he went into the House of Ra, and he entered the temple, and prayed many pri therein. And the chief kher heb priest offered up prayers that the attacks of Bends on the king might be repulsed. And he performed the ceremonies of the per sba (?) chamber, and he girded about him the sefeb garment, and he purified himself with incense, and he sprinkled himself with water, and la- brought the ankhiu flowers of the shrine (het-benbent, i.e.. the house of the obelisk), and he took perfume, and he ascended the steps to the great ark in order that he might look upon Ra himself in the shrine (het-benbent) . And His Majesty stood up there by himself, he drew back the bolts, and opened the doors of the ark. and he i upon Ra in the shrine, and he made adorations before the • Boat of Ra, and the Sektet Boat of Tern. Then he drew together '.he doors [of the sanctuary] and set clay upon th whereon he impressed the seal 01 the king himself. And he admonished the priests, saying : "1 h [my] seal : ^(,t no '•other king whatsoever who may stand [here] enter." And the ast themselves upon their bellies before His Majesty, saying: " Horns, who loveth Annu (Heliopolis) shall endure, " and flourish, and shall never diminish!" And His Majesty went on and entered into the house of Tem, and he performed the ceremonies connected with the offering of figures made of anti of Tem-Khepera, the prince of Annu. Then the king Uasarken came to see the beauties of His ty. And His Majesty set out on the following morning at dawn, at the head of his boats from the river bank, and journeyed t<> Ka qem. And his Majesty's tent was pitched to the south of Kaheni. and to the east of Ka-qem, and the kings and the dukes Oi the Land of the North, and all the chiefs, and all the fan- id all the umbrella-bearers, and all the nobles, and all the royal kinsfolk from ti and from the West Countries, 1 A city which occupied the site of Old Cairo. SUBMISSION OF REBELS and from the regions of Middle Egypt, came to look upon the beauties of His Majesty. And the Erpii Pata-Astet threw him- self upon his belly before His Majesty, saying: "Come thou " to Ka-qem, and may the god Khent-Khatthi look upon thee, " and the goddess Khuit protect thee. Offer thou sacrifices to " Horus in his temple, oxen, calves, and geese. Enter thou into " my house, open the doors of my treasury, and make thyself '• lord of the property of my father. I will give unto thee as " much gold as thine heart can desire, and a mass of copper (or " turquoise) as large as thyself, and the finest horses which are " in my stud-farm, and the best and strongest which are in " my stables." Then His Majesty went to the temple of Heru- khent-Khatthi and made an offering of oxen, and calves, and geese to his father Heru-khent-Khatthi, the lord of Qem-ur. And His Majesty went into the palace of the Erpa Peta-Ast, who presented to him gold, silver, lapis-lazuli, copper (or turquoise), and a great mass of property of all kinds, that is to say, suits of apparel made of byssus of every quality, and couches, and cover- lets of fine linen, and dnti perfume, and vases full of unguents, and all the best horses and mares in his stables. Then Peta-Ast purified himself and swore an oath by [his] god before the kings and governors of the Land of the North, saying : " Whosoever shall conceal his horses, or hide any property "which he hath [from His Majesty] shall most assuredly die the " death of his father. These things I declare so that ye may " cease to offer opposition to him. And if ye know of anything "that belongeth to me which I have hidden from His Majesty of "the things of my father's house ye shall certainly declare it, " whether it be gold, or silver (?), or [precious] stones, or metal " vessels, or bracelets, or gold ornaments for the neck, or metal " collars inlaid with [precious] stones, or amulets for any " member of the body, or crowns for the head, or rings for the " ears, or ornaments worn by the king, or gold vases wherein " the king performeth the ceremonies of purification, or [precious] " stones of any sort or kind whatsoever. I have given to the " king thousands of suits of apparel made of the finest linen, " every kind being of the best which I have in my house, and I " know [O king] that thou wilt be satisfied therewith. Pass "thou now into my stud-farm and choose thereout as many of the " horses which please thee as thou desirest." And His Majesty did so. Then the kings and dukes spake unto His Majesty, saying : " Permit us to depart unto our towns, and we will open our " treasure-houses, and we will choose thereout the things which " thy heart loveth, and we will bring unto thee the best horses " from our stud-farms, and the finest of our chargers." And His Majesty did so. [Here followeth] the list of the names of the kings ; — King Osorkon in Bubastis and Ra-nefer. 23 THE EGYFriAN SI DAN King A.uapeth in Thenteremu and Ta-an. Duke Tchet-Amen-auf-ankh in Mendes and Ta- . . . -Ra. His eldest son, Anikh-IJeru, commander-in-chief in Pa- Telmti-ap-reheh. Duke Merkanesh in Sebennytus, and Pa-Hebi, and Sma- lVhut.-t. Duke and Prince of the Mashuasha, Pathenfin Pa Sept, and . . . pen-aneb fretchet Duke and Prince of the Mashuasha, Pemau in Busiris. Duke and Prince of the Mashuasha, Nesnaketi in Pharbae- Duke and Prince of the Mashuasha, Nekht-Heru-na- shennu, in Pakerer. Prince of the Mashuasha [in] Pentaurt. Prince of the Mashuasha [in] Penth-bekhent. The Proplu-t of l.lonis, lord of Sekhem, Peta-rleru-sma-taui. Duke Murhasa in Pa-Sekhet-nebt-Saut and in Pa-Sekhel neb- Refresaui Duke Tcbet-khiau in Khent-Nef< Duke Pa-Bas in Kher-aha and in Pa-Hap. [These came with their offerings of fine objects of all kinds, that is to say, gold, silver, [lapis-lazuli,] copper (or turquoise), [and a great I property of all kinds, that is to say, suits of apparel made ofbyssus of every quality], and couches, and cover- f fine linen, and ami perfume in \ ... and all the best horses and mares [in his stable- .... [•And it came to pass after] these things that one came and told His Majesty, saying: " [ Tafnekhth] hath [gathered together! " his , and he hath I torn down] his walls through fear 01 •• thee, he hath set fire to his treasure-nouses, [he hath fled in a •' boat on the river, and lie hath entrenched himself strongly in " the city of M es$ [with his] soldiers.'" And His Majesty caused fighting men to go and see what had happened, and they did so under the command of the Erpa P And they came back and reported to His Majesty, saying ; " We have killed every man whom we found there; "and His Majesty gave a reward to the Erpa Then Tafnekhth, the Prince of Mashuasha, heard of this, and he sent an envoy to the place where His to make supplication, saying: "Be thou at > " [with me]. I have not seen thy face during the days of shame. ind against thy tire, and the terror of thine onset •• hath vanquished me. Behold, thou art the god Nubt, the .ein. »r of the South, and the god Menthu, the mighty bull! '• In every matter whereto thou hast set thy fece thou hast *• found none who could resist thee. I have reached the utter- ■• nu-st swamps on the coast of th< Greal Green Water (i.e., the ■• Mediterranean), but I am afraid of thy souls because thy word fire hath become an enemy to me. Is not the heart of Thy •• M .d by reason of the things which thou hast SUBMISSION OF REBELS " done unto me? Behold, I am in very truth a most miserable " man ; punish thou me not in proportion to [my] abominable " deeds. The measure of the scales taketh count of qclet weights, "and do thou double them on my behalf in forgetting [my " misdeeds]. If thou sowest seed thou wilt meet it [again] in " [its] season, and dig thou not up the trees when they are in " blossom. Thou hast sown the terror of thee in my body, and " the fear of thee is in my bones. I do not any longer sit in the " beer-hall, and no man bringeth to me the harp. Behold, I only " eat the bread [required] by hunger, and I only drink the water " [demanded] by thirst. Since the day when thou didst hear my kl name wretchedness hath been in my bones. My head hath "lost its hair, and my apparel is rags. I have lied and taken " refuge with the goddess Nit (Neith), O come to me and turn thou " thy face to me ! Seeing that I have separated myself from my " sin, hold then thy servant guiltless, and lift his [sin] from him. " I beseech thee to receive my goods into [thy] treasury, the gold, "and the [precious] stones, together with the best of my horses, " and an abundant supply of every thing. I beseech thee to send "to me an envoy to take them, and to remove the fear which " is in my heart. Verily I will go in his presence into the " temple, and I will purge myself of my sin by swearing an oath " [of allegiance to thee] by God." Then His Majesty sent the hh-r heb priest Peta-Amen-[neb]- nest-taui and the commander-in-chief Puarma, and Tafnekhth loaded them with silver, and gold, and raiment, and [precious] stones, and he went into the house of [his] god, and prayed unto him, and purged himself of his sin, and swore an oath of allegiance by God, saying : " 1 will never again transgress the " decree of the king, and I will never oppose the words of His " Majesty. I will never again injure (?) any duke without thy " knowledge, and I will perform the king's behests, and I will " never transgress any decree which he hath uttered." And with these words the heart of His Majesty was satisfied. Then one came and reported to His Majesty, saying ; "The " city of Cynopolis hath opened its gates, and the city of " Aphroditopolis hath cast itself on its belly. There is now no " nome shut against His Majesty of the nomes of the South, or of " the North, or of the West, or of the East. The districts of " the Interior are on their bellies through fear of thee, and they " have brought their property, as they were bound to do, to the " place where His Majesty is, even like servants of the palace." And at dawn on the following day the two governors of the South, and the two governors of the North, with their uraei on their foreheads, came to smell the ground of (i.e., do homage to) the souls of His Majesty, and behold the kings and dukes of the Land of the North came also to look upon the beauties of His Majesty. Now their legs were like the legs of women. And they did not enter into the house of the king, because they were 25 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN uncircumcised, and they were eaters of fish, [a habit] which is held m abomination in the royal house. And behold, king Nemareth did enter the royal house, because he was i monially pure, and was not an cater of fish; [but the other el >od on their feet, and not one of them entered the royal house. Then [His Majesty] Loaded the barges with silver, and gold, and copper, and raiment, and kind of product of the Land of the North, and with products of all kinds from Syria, and with spices of Ta-netcr. and he 1 up the river, and his heart was glad, and both sides of the river, the Wesl and the East, rejoiced And the people welcomed him with rejoicings, and they shouted and cried out with gladness, saying :" Hail, divine Governor and Conge, ■•Hail, divine Governor and Conqueror! f Piankhi J, the \ ernor and Conqueror ! Thou hast come and hast made thy- self governor of the Land of the North. Thou hast made men *'to | »men. Let the heart of the mother rejoice who "hath given birth to a man. He who dwelleth in Am (i.e., Amen) "hath poured out the seed which produced thee. Let praise tscribed to the Cow which gave birth to the Bull. Mayest •"thou live for ever, and may thy strength en. lure eternally. (> ■■ ( rovernor, who Invest I I CHAPTER V. THE SUCCESSORS OF PIANKHI. The great inscription of Piankhi, of which a translation has been given in the preceding pages, gives us, unfortunately, no particulars of his ancestry, and tells us nothing of his descendants. The: list of kings compiled by Lepsius, and adopted by Brugsch and Bouriant in their work,1 gives as the immediate ancestor of Piankhi another king of Napata of the same name, whose Horus name was " Heru sehetep taui-f," "2 whose prenomen was " Senefer-Ra," 3 and who called himself "son of Ra," and " King of the South and North." Why this king was made to head the list of the kings of Napata is not clear, but from the form of his prenomen, which resembles those of Senka-Amen-seken4 and Atlanersa,5 it is probable that he reigned after Piankhi Meri- Amen. Be that as it may, on the death of Piankhi Meri-Amen the sovereignty appears to have passed into the hands of a Nubian called Kashta,6 who was then ruling in some capacity at Thebes. His claim to the throne is not clear, but he may have been a son of Piankhi Meri-Amen, or his mother may have been a descendant of one of the priest-kings at Thebes. It is a remarkable fact that his name is not found on any monument at Gebel Barkal, and we may therefore conclude that he usurped the kingdom whilst Napata was still in the hands of one of Piankhi's offspring. By some Kashta has been identified with the Zet, Zyjt, or Xet, H>;t, whom Manetho makes to be one of the two last kings of the 1 Le Livre des Rois : Cairo, 1887. (SIS- T /wwv\ \ ■2 D Ileru-seh-taui v\ I <=&*=*. 5 Heru-ker-taui C\ \ r^n His prenomen is unknown. 27 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN XXIIIrd Dynasty. Kashta married Shep-en-Apt,1 a daughter of Osorkon III., the great high-priestess of Amen, whose official title •• XrUr-Tuat," i.e., "divine adorer," or "morning star/' By her he had issue Shabaka, who became king of Egypt and Nubia, and Amen&rtas, who attained to the rank of high-priestess of Amen. Kashta's influence in Egypt and the Sudan was not great, and he made no attempt to slay Bakenrenf, who had succeeded his father Tafnekhth at Sais, and who was regarded as the king of Lower Egypt. Bakenrenf, who is called Bocchoris by the Greek writers, was one of the six great law-giversol Egypt, and he is described as a wise and prudent man. Kashta's son and su< SHABAKA,' who was the first of the Nubian or Sudani Dynasty, ascended the throne between B.C. 710 and 710, and reigned at least twelve years. His home appears to have been at Napata, and it is probable that he began to reign their, but he found that the kingdom of the North was ling stronger and stronger, and he set out to reduce to submission the country which Piankhi had made: a province oi his dominions. He left Napata and passed triumphantly into and through Egypt, and he defeated all who took up arms against him. Bakenrenf, the son of Tafnekhth, king of SaTs and Memphis, and a vassal of Piankhi, was either burned or flayed alive by Shabaka, who took up his abode at Thebes and ruled Egypt and the Sudan from that city. The rule of Shabaka was beneficial to pecially in matters connected with the agriculture of the country. He made a law that criminals, who would in the ordinary way be put to death.'' should be made to labour at raising the foundations of the cities and towns above the level of the waters of the inundation, and he had the canals cleared out by the sam< We must not assume that Shabaka was the first king to have such works undertaken, but. with th< which 1 n the country under his reign, it became possible to carry 1 I A/WNAA _y< I . 137 ; Diodoru?, i. 65. SEJABAKA out works of public utility. The city in the Delta which most benefited by the system of forced labour inaugurated by Shabaka imcoTuveGmn PORTRAIT OF SHABAKA. [Drawn from Lepsius, Denkmdler, Abth. III. Bl. 301. was Bubastis, the temple of which evoked such great admiration in Herodotus. In Shabaka some writers have identified " So, the king of Egypt," who is mentioned in 2 Kings xvii. 4, but there 29 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN can be no doubt now l that So is no other than the Sib', or Sib'e, of the cuneiform inscriptions, who was the turdannu or comman- der-in-chief of Egypt. That Shabaka was in communication with on, king of Assyria, is clear from the fact that clay seals inscribed with his name and titles were found among the tablets of the Royal Library of Nineveh at Kuyunjik,2 and the two kings certain ly exchanged gifts. Shabaka repaired and added to several of the older tempi- Egypt, but he appears to have done little or nothing of the kind in Nubia. He carried out building operations at Bubastis, in which city he took special interest, at Memphis, and at Th where his name is found at Karnak, Luxor, and Madinat Habu. His sister Amenartas,8 the high-pri< Amen, lived with her husband Piankhi l at Thebes, and the monuments there prove that he carried out on them a series of important repairs. hi conjunction with her brother she built a sanctuary near the great north door of the temple of Karnak, and it is probable that from this place came her fine alabaster statue, which is now in the Museum in Cairo. Her position in Thebes must have been of considerable importance, for her name occurs side by side with that of her brother Shabaka, and even in remote places like the Wadi l.lammamat her cartouche appears "' between those of her father and brother. On a scarab in the British Museum1'' her cartouche is cut by the side of that of her father, and her name is ded a prominent position between the figures of two goddi which are held on the knees of the figure of the high official Hani a in the British Museun ( )f Shabaka Diodorus, after speaking of his piety and his kind- 1 See my IfisA '/, vol. vi., pp. 124 ft". 1 British Museum registration numbers are 51-9-2, 43, and 81-2-4, 332: 1 options, see my Afummy, p. 249, and Bezold, Catalogue, p. 1784. I >ne of the objects is exhibited in Table-case I., No. 32, in the Nineveh Gallerj . ; Her prenomen was Mut-kha-neferu f "_^ Q JJJ J. Lepsius, Denkmaler, Abth. v., Bl. 1. Fourth Egyptian Room, Table-case D., No. 130S. Third Egyptian Room, No. 32.555. 30 ~^^iM(^lO^( ~ HARUA, A HIGH OFFICIAL OF QUEEN AMENARTAS, SISTER OF KING SHABAKA, HOLDING SEATED STATUES OF HATHOR AND TEFNUT. [British Museum, No. 32555. ^\ SHABATAKA ness to men, says : " A man may likewise judge of his extraordinary "piety, from his dream, and his abdication of the government; " for the tutelar god of Thebes seemed to speak to him in his sleep, WS(oTUUU<3g(EiaagUl PORTRAIT OF SHABATAKA, BELOVED OF AMEN. [Drawn from Lepsius, Denkm'dler, Abth. III. Bl. 301. ' and told him, that he could not long reign happily and ' prosperously in Egypt unless he cut all the priests to pieces ' when he passed through the midst of them with his guards and 3i THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN rants; which advice being often r . he at length sent "' for the priests from all parts, and told them that if he stayed in " Egypt any longer he found that he should displease God, who •• never at any time before, by dreams or visions, commanded any VT UNING \ -I '. Kl "1 AMEN-RA. II WAS DEDICATED II. GOD BY 5HABATAKA, KI\<. 0 . 65O. British Museum, No. 11,013. •• such thing. And that he would rather be gone and lose his " life, being pure and innocent, than displease God, or enjoy ''the crown of Egypt, by staining his life with the horrid " murder of the innocent. And so at length, giving up the " kingdom into 'the hands of the people, he returned into •• Ethiopia." 32 SHABATAKA Shabaka was succeeded by his son Shabataka ' in the first or second year of the reign of Sennacherib, who ascended the Assyrian throne B.C. 705. It seems that Shabataka was associated with his father and aunt Amenartas in the rule of the kingdom a few years before Shabaka's death, for on a painted stele at Turin, which is described by the late Dr. Pleyte,2 we find the cartouches of Shabataka, Shabaka, Shep-en-Apt, the high-priestess of Amen, Piankhi, and Shep-en-Apt's mother, Amenartas, the high-priestess of Amen. On this stele is a figure of the double god Horus- Set, with outstretched arms, which seems to indicate that one arm specially protects the two royal personages who were connected with the South, and the other the two who were connected with the North. It may be noted in connection with this, that the text, which was copied in the reign of Shabaka from a worm-eaten [wooden] :5 tablet on to the black slab preserved in the British Museum (No. 32,555), deals with the combat which went on perpetually between Horus and Set through the disap- pearance of Osiris into the sea. Of the reign of Shabataka, we learn very little from the hieroglyphic inscriptions, but he built a chamber at Karnak,* and seems to have repaired some portion of the temple of Ptah at Memphis. His name is found nowhere in the Sudan, but one of the small temples now in ruins at Gebel Barkal may have been built by him. That he was a devotee of Amen Ra goes without saying, and if proof of this be needed we have it from the small bronze shrine in the British Museum, 6 which contains a figure of this god, and is inscribed with the king's name. The greatest event in his reign was the agreement which he made with Hezekiah, king of Judah, wherein he promised to help 1 His Horus name was }i '•, his %\j/ name was I fl ^S^7 c^'l / 11 fl S& I r-~-i A % 1 1 =?=?= . m n f the XVIIIth Dynasty, and he eded admirably. The people felt that peace was assured as long as he lived, and under his protection the trade of the country increased, and means were forthcoming for the repair of ancient temples and the building of new ones. That he should one day win back some of the former possessions of Egypt in Syria must have been an idea always present in his mind, and ^%^ i^m^i-h^q T1RHAKAH that the manner of his dealings with the kings and governors of Syria was dictated with it always in view is evident from many considerations. His friendship with the kings of that country was dis- approved of by Sennacherib, who appears to have made a second expedition into Palestine with the view of invading Egypt, but nothing came of it so far as Egypt was concerned, and Taharqa continued his friendly relations with the kings on the Palestinian sea-coast until the middle of the reign of Esarhaddon, who succeeded to the throne of Assyria after the murder of his father Senna- cherib, B.C. 681. About B.C. 676 Esarhaddon sent an expedition against Milukhkha, i.e., against the tribes of the desert on the east and north-east of the Delta, for he felt that the combination of these tribes, if backed by help from Egypt, might result in the loss to Assyria of Jerusalem, and all the neighbouring towns. The success of this expedition was not decisive, for Esarhaddon was not able to reduce the tribes at once to submission. Some three years later he made a second attempt to break up the combination of people which he now knew to be in league against him, but this also failed, at any rate, the Assyrian king did not advance against Egypt, and invade her territories. On this Taharqa rejoiced greatly, for he foolishly assumed that it was the fear of his arms which kept Esarhaddon out of Egypt. And in com- memoration of a campaign, which he did 37 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN not fight, in a country which he never entered, he caused a list of the gnat peoples of Syria and Palestine to be cut on the base of his statue ' as nations which he had conquered ! In this list we rind the names of Kadesh, Assur, Kheta, Nehernu, and of many other Western Asiatic places, together with the names of several districts of the Sudan. Among those who hastened to profit by the retreat of Esarhaddon was Baal, king of Tyre, who made a treat}- quickly with Taharqa, and. following his example, the neighbouring princes did the same. For nearly three wars Taharqa was permitted to indulge without hindrance his wish to intrigue in Syria and in Palestine, tor it was not until the spring of tin B.C. 670 that Esarhaddon was ready to strike. In the month of Nisan he left Nineveh and set out for Syria, and having visited the mainland opposite Tyre, and cut off the water supply oi Baal, its king, he went on to Aphek. He did not go straight on to Egypt from this place, but turned off to the 'south-east, and marched for a considerable distance in the desert. This journey was a terrible one for his troops, on account of the . and the serpents and scorpions which infested the country, but, thanks to the arrangements which he had made for the supply of water with the local shekhs, his army marched triumphantly through the desert. At length he reached Raphia, and, after another march into the desert, made in order to avoid the ordinary caravan route into Egypt from Syria, arrived at some point on the eastern frontier of the Delta about three months after he set out from Nineveh. On the third day of the month 'fammuz. Esarhaddon appears to have engaged the Egyptian frontier troops, and on the sixteenth and eighteenth days of tin- same month two battles were fought by him, no doubt against Taharqa's regular army which he had sent to the tern Dell ( )ii each <>f these occasions the Assyrians were the conquerors, and Taharqa's soldiers were driven back from town to town towards Memphis. Four days after the second battle, Esar- haddon appeared before Memphis with his army, and captured the 1 This object was found in the temple <>f Mut at Karnak. '-' Mariette, Karnak % plate 45, a 2. TIRHAKAH city by assault,'and the Assyrian soldiers pillaged it so thoroughly that even the Nubian warriors must have been surprised. Taharqa himself managed to escape, but he was obliged to leave behind him the queen and the other women of the royal karim and all their children, and they became the conqueror's property. Esarhaddon did not attempt to pursue Taharqa, who had probably fled to Napata, but he appointed some twenty governors or more, over twenty large cities, which they were to rule in his interest, and having fixed the amount of tribute which they were to pay to him annually, and gathered together a vast amount of spoil, he set out to return to Nineveh. On his way northwards he stopped at the mouth of the Nahr al-Kalb River near Beirut , and set up a monument to commemorate his victory over Egypt and Tyre. Henceforward he styled him- self in his Annals, " King of Lower Egypt, of Upper Egypt, and of Kash " (Nubia, or the Sudan). At many places he set up stelae to record his triumph, and on the large monumental tablet found at Sinjirli ' is sculptured a figure of Esarhaddon, who holds in his hand cords to which are tied figures of Taharqa and Baal of Tyre. The former is kneeling and the latter is standing before the king, and each has his hands raised in an attitude of supplication. As Taharqa pretended in his inscriptions that he had conquered all Syria and Assur, so we find Esarhaddon pretending that he had captured Taharqa and Baal, and had them fettered at his feet. Both text and sculptures are to be understood symbolically, but such examples show that the evidence of the monuments of some of these old warriors cannot be relied on implicitly. Soon after Esarhaddon returned to Nineveh the chiefs of the Delta principalities split up into two parties, one being led by Pakrer,'- or Paqrer, the governor of the nome of Pa-Sept in the Eastern Delta, and the other by Nekau, prince of Sais. Taharqa, hearing of this, and knowing that Esarhaddon was in Nineveh, gathered together an army and marched to Memphis. It is probable that the native chiefs of the Delta would have flocked 1 See Luscban, Ansgrabungcn in Sendschirli, vol. i., p. 30. 39 & _^=£ THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN to his standard gladly, for they had no love for the rule of the king of Assyria, but they were afraid to do so, because the Assyrians in the Delta had sent news of what had happened to Nineveh, and it was pretty certain that an Assyrian army would be sent to restore order. When Esarhaddon received the report he made haste to make one of his sons, Shamash-shum-ukin, king of Babylon, and another, Ashur-bani-pal, king of Nineveh, and then, even though his health was failing, he set out on his third campaign against Egypt. This was in the year B C. 668. On the way his illness increased, and he died in the month of May. having reigned about twelve years. The death of rhaddon did not, however, retard the advance of the Assyrian army, which pursued its way to Egypt under the leadership of the " Turdannu " (Tartan), or commander-in chief. Wh< n it arrived in Syria the twenty-two kings who had been appointed tendered their fealty to the Tartan, and the Assyrians approached Egypt by the old caravan route from Syria. At a place called Karbanit tiny found Taharqa's troops, but in the battle- which took place they were utterly defeated, and such large numbers "I them wire slain that any attempt to rally at Memphis and defend that city was hopeless. Meanwhile Taharqa had once more escaped, and had found his way to Thebes, which he fortified to the best of his ability. Unlike Esarhaddon, the new Assyrian king. Ashur-bani-pal, was not content with suppressing the rebellion in the Delta and occupying Memphis, but he ordered the commander-in-chief of the army which he sent to the aid of the Tartan to ascend the Nile and sack Thebes. On his arrival near Egypt, this commander-in-chief, whose official title was Rab-saki ( Rabshakeh i. collected a fleet of boats and sailed up the Nile to Memphis. where In- joined his forces to those of the Tartan, and a- soon as tble they set out for Thebes. During the six weeks which were occupied by the Assyrians in sailing up to Thebes. Taharqa began to intrigue with the chief riders in the Delta, i.e.. Nekau oi . l'akier of Pa-Sept, and Sharru-ludari of Tanis, against the Assyrians, but his messengers bearing their despatches were caught by the Assyrians, who proceeded to punish the con- tors according to their usual methods. Their troops in the 40 TIRHAKAH Delta destroyed the cities of Sa'is, Tanis, and Pa-Sept, the ring- leaders of the revolt among the people were either flayed alive or impaled, and Nekau and Sharru-ludari were sent in fetters to Nineveh. Pakrer managed to escape. Taharqa, divining from these events what his fate was likely to be if caught, fled from Thebes to the south, leaving that city to the mercy of Ashur- bani-pal's soldiers. Menthu em-hat,1 its governor, promptly surrendered, and thus Upper and Lower Egypt, and the Sudan. became a province of the Assyrian Empire. The fate of Taharqa is unknown, but the Assyrian annalist says that Taharqa fled to Kush and that the terror of the soldiers of Ashur overwhelmed him in the place whither he had gone, and he went to his destiny of night.2 Taharqa was a capable and energetic king, and under his able rule the country, notwithstanding his wars with the Assyrians, enjoyed a period of prosperity for about twenty-five years. That he should have been able to offer such steadfast resistance to Esarhaddon and Ashur-bani-pal says much for his capacity as a soldier and leader of men. There must have been something attractive in his personality, and his deeds appealed so strongly to the popular imagination, at all events in Greek times, that they were regarded as the exploits of a hero, and he had the reputa- tion of being a great traveller as well as a great conqueror."' As a builder he displayed great activity, and remains of several of his edifices have come down to us. Near the temple of Karnak he built a small temple in commemoration of his coronation at Thebes. On the walls here we see Taharqa's mother, Aqleq,4 and a priest performing ceremonies connected with the enthronement of her son, who appears under the forms of Tetun, Sept, Amen, and Heru, thereby signifying that he is lord of the four quarters of the world. Next, a high priestly official called Heru-em-heb, 2 Cuneiform Inscriptions, vol. v. pi. 2, 1. 20 f. £^£j^T| T r~"T *-T form of Amen is said to reside in the " Holy Mountain," i.e. Gebel Barkal; the ram-headed form gives the king a seat on the throne of Horus, and the man-form makes him to rule over all ►r the text, see Mariette, Monuments Divers, plates 7 and 8. For translations, sec Maspero, Revue Arch., 1868, torn, xvii., p. 329 ff". ; Maspero, is of the I'ast, vol. iv., p. 81 ft*. ; Brugsch, Geschichte Aegyptens, pp. 707- 713 : English translation, vol. h\, p. 24S ti". See also Maspero. Melanges, torn. in., p. 5 ft"., p. 217 ff. ; Schaefer, Zur Erklarung der Traumstele, in Aeg.Zeit., teindorff, Beitrdge su '°g**% V()'- '•• !'• 35^ : Mariette, /,//., N.8., torn, xii., p. 1O2 ; de Roug6, M&langes, torn, i., p. 89 ff. 4'- -"^fltfORST; :^±^tM~^,f^/iiTM&nf^m^mmm^& MZM4MZ'EJ5l MltS'AmU lO A AQIW M-& *. • o^=SiR :M — - — ©< gSHWT &$,&mu&$A?£% ir;=;C?8Ti2SfP^^4WJ »Af^ ^±^rj,s-^^°^][i^^^i???;^^§girr:P ;r-?MPr ^ nr-^? ^Lf«^^A^aa.f^c^?rrt>5s ?1 FaorotS:' _°idj^,^E= ^Ibm^-^b Jio/zonr^ *?£>' .as m^zscfcgft i x?^-^37;DPvjr:*^5f ^ ®KTtSi**3H»»EM3 Zf^S4^^1»4ir,lllirMS'^MS,?l!:^ST=J™^ "grrtTfesHTSe^rg^i^^iMoaa^- eC// dOi i in a. ^^A*Jiys5^fc2f^»acr3Cs3ifi: iSWMHUISMl^Sifflai 1 **rOfiK3Kai STELE INSCRIBED WITH AN' ACCOUNT OF THE DREAM OF TAN U ATH-AMEN, FOUND AT GEBEL KARKAL. ^o STELE OF TANUATH-AMEN countries, and all deserts and mountains, and places all the Nine Tribes of the Bow under his sandals. The text opens with a string of titles, and the king is described as a" fierce lion," and like unto "the dweller in Hesert." The document is dated in the first year of the king's reign, and in that same year he dreamed a dream wherein he saw two serpents, one on his right hand and the other on his left, and when His Majesty awoke he saw them no longer. Such is the dream. When the king asked his wise men what it portended, they told him that he already held the South, and that he must seize the North, so that he might wear the crowns of both countries, for the whole world would be his, and that none should vie with him in power. Then the king went to Napata. and was acknowledged by Amen, to whom he offered thirty-six oxen, forty large vessels of beer, and one hundred ostrich feathers ; a gift of ankham flowers of the god was given to the king, and he was crowned forthwith. The remainder of the text describes the next acts of the king. He set out for the North, and when he arrived at Elephantine he made offerings to Khnemu-Ra, the lord of the P'irst Cataract, and to Hapi, the Nile-god, the source of whose stream was supposed to be in the neighbourhood. He then went on to Thebes, where he offered gifts to Amen-Ra, and amid the acclamations of the people on both sides of the river he sailed down to Memphis to "repair the temples, to set the statues and "emblems of the god on their pedestals, to provide offerings for " the gods and goddesses, and the dead, to re-establish the "priests in their grades, and to cause all proper ceremonies " connected with the worship of the gods to be performed." At Memphis his progress was barred by the Assyrian garrison, but in the fight which took place Tanuath-Amen was victorious, and he took possession of the city, and made offerings to Ptah, its great god. He then sailed on to reduce the garrison towns to the north, but the troops in these would not come forth to do battle with him, and he therefore returned to Memphis. From this city he made some arrangement with the governors of the chief cities in the Delta, for after a time they came to Memphis, with Pakrer, the governor of Pa-Sept, as their leader, and they begged for their lives, and promised to be his faithful vassals. vol. ii. 49 E THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN At this Tanuath-Amen was very pleased, and made a feast, and he and the Delta chiefs partook of cakes, and ale, and "all good things.*' After some days they said to him, " Why tarry we here, O king our Lord ? " And the king replied " Why ? " Thereupon they departed, each to his city, and sent back gifts to the king. Here the text comes to an end, and the Egyptian inscriptions tell us nothing about subsequent events. The Assyrian Annals. however, help us, and from these we find that whilst Tanuath- Amen was at Memphis, the report of his arrival and proceedings was carried to Ashur-bani-pal at Nineveh. The king of Assyria, hearing that his troops in Memphis had been slain by the Nubian king, whom he regarded as a rebel, set forth without delay for Egypt. On his arrival, Tanuath-Amen fled to Th and the governors of the cities who had given gifts to him promptly tendered their submission to the king of Assyria. Ashur-bani-pal and his soldiers advanced to Memphis, and then followed the fugitive up the Nile. On hearing of their advance, Tanuath-Amen fled to Kipkip,' without attempting to defend Thebes, and thus the city fell into the hands of the Assyrians, who plundered it in their usual fashion. On their return to the North they carried off gold, silver, precious stones, rich apparel, costly furniture, fine horses, men. women and children, and two objects of which the Assyrian king seems to have been especially proud, 'flit ts, which were called dimmi in the Assyrian text-, weighed two thousand five hundred talents, and they were made of won,], which was over- laid with some precious metal. Ashur-bani-pa] was now master of the kingdoms of the South and the North : he took no steps to assert his authority over Nubia, and so far as we know he made no attempt to capture Tanuath-Amen. On his return to Memphis he ordered the affairs of the Delta to his own satisfaction, and then, laden with spoil, returned to Nineveh, and Egypt saw him no more. Of the fate of Tanuath-Amen the inscriptions of Egypl tell us nothing, but with his downfall the XXVth Dynasty came to an vnd, and the power (A~ Nubia in Egypt was broken, and 1 In Assyrian ^^J] the great lady, the dweller in Ta- kenset." From this it appears that there was a temple at Geb 1 Barkal specially dedicated to the goddess and consort of Amen. The style of the hieroglyphics suggests that they were cut not very long after the inscriptions on Taharqa's temple. 2. Netch - KA- Mi£N fes^ ( "t" 5fcji ]• His name is found on a door-curve in a room of the temple at Gebel Barkal, where the name of a PlANKHI MERI-AMEN-SA-BAST occurs.' m 5s ' CO * — » r^ n 90 °t *— <=== 11 G( — ) L^ At m ¥3i Heru-nekht d ;]•■ 1 Lepsius, Denkmaler, Abth. v., Bl. 14 /. - Ibid. A Ibid., e. SENKA-AMEN I /WWW d /VW\AA o o 4. Senka-Amen-seken, with the prenomen of Sekheper-en- Ra, and the Horus name of Seh [er] taui. His name and titles occur on an altar which Lepsius took from the ruins of a temple at Gebel Barkal to Berlin 1 (No. 1481). In the in- scription here given he calls him- self " beloved of Amen-Ra, lord of " the throne of the Two Lands, the " dweller in the Holy Mountain " : three copies of this inscription appear on the altar. The surface of the altar shows marks of long usage, the prenomen Khu-ka-Ra, and the & *?0 \i\ it 5. Athlenersa, with Horus name of Hetep(?)-taui,2 i.e., " the peace of the Two Lands," and the Nekhebet-Uatchet title of Meri Maat,8 and the Golden Horus title of Smen-en-hepu.4 On an altar, which Lepsius found among the ruins of a temple at Gebel Barkal,5 in addition to his other titles this king calls himself " beloved of Amen-Ra, lord of the throne of the Two Lands, at the head of the and " stablished by his soldiers/* " 6. Amathel. with the prenomen Uatch-ka-Ra ; the other i^^i names are broken away from the headless /WWVA granite statue of this king, on which his O prenomen and nomen are given. The statue was found at Gebel Barkal by Lepsius, who took it to Berlin, where it is now preserved in the Royal Museum (No. 2240, Verzeichnis, p. 401). The inscription upon it reads: — "All life, all permanence, all joy, all health, all 1 Lepsius, Denkmaler, Abth. v., Bl. 15 a ; see the official Verzeichnis, p. 401. lllltlllll o 1\ u ) .2^ (?) See Denkmaler, Abth. v., HI. 15 b. 57 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN ,v happiness are at the feet of this good god, whom all men " adore." A.SPELTA, with the prenomen Mek-ka-Ra, and the Horus name of Nefer-KHA, and the Nekhebet-Uatchet name of Nefeiv kha, and the Golden Horus name of Usr-ab.1 Of the reign of this king we know nothing. He seems to have flourished during the reign of Psammetichus I., and Dr. Schaefer has come to the conclusion ' that his date may be fixed at B.C. 625. The principal monument of his reign is a large gray granite stele which was found at Gebel Barkal, and brought to Cairo during Mariette's Directorship of Antiquities. On its upper portion the ram- headed Amen is seen seated on a throne, with a king kneeling in front of him ; behind the god stands the goddess Mut, and in front of the king stands the royal sister, royal mother, "the mistress of Kash," holding a sistrum in each hand. The name of this " royal mother," as well as that of Aspelta, has been obliterated on the monument, but we may restore it from the stele in the Louvre, which was first published by Pierret.'' From this we learn that Aspelta's mother was called Enenselsa, and his wife- Mat . . henen, and his daughter Khebit.' The god before whom the king kneels is Amen of Nept (Napata), and he tells Aspelta that he has established the uraei of sovereignty on his brow as the heavens upon their four pillars. Below this scene are inscribed thirty lines of hieroglyphics, in which Aspelta ibes the ceremonies that were performed at his coronation or inthionement, and for this reason the monument is generally known as the "Stele of the Coronation," or the " Stele of the Knthronement." It will be remembered that Diodorus tells us that when a king was to be crowned in Nubia the priests first of all selected a number of suitable candidates, that these were led ;. Ze/t., xxxiii., 1 895, p. 10 1 ft. ' to/o^n/ucs, torn, i., pp. 96-ico; Records of the Past, vol. iv. p. 87; see also Schaefer, Aeg. Zeit '.. 1895, p. 101 fif 5« miftt£f7^wE*nz)^$^m=m*3ft-&£.u£& oItmblj;: frbrg.rr.mte iop n -kAizfr.wrte •£Zmi"T¥*0&? ^'T^^j^^A^nl^MlVM^^A^^T^^^^Zm^ T7^qrr:^p^^^r^^(^^?:;;r^^^rM^4tPP^^Lp:::rfe?c:T^r:4 :M^~zmzfr~4l&^.&<.rr°.8d±ig rrA& aiW^^^AM: MftkWWiahzlc?Jrtik^AM^AV77tgnB#^£rr,zh sLfkA ^^m^r^7i^^i^—^r^^Gio^o^^u^mAmtui.f^^iZ: r^SgT^^^o^-^B£(^^f^X^^,^^W^M^g^^UP^£: ±fe^y^—±fc£&77M&^l%£M\te»t4Chzm%m±&tM*~^®&^ ^TrfrJ; bsf£r£V&%%ftt?*5Am&& m^MmA^MMM £3 ; £* &rn< 1 P^Lfcr^ £Kr:¥ ^.l^fS^Il'^-l^^I^ng^Rt^Try.^M^ ^r:xAss^f^sgpp^Mrr^eBfT^^a^feTi^^^£!i^im-^^.T,^^p r^^i'?^gr^^■?■m^ra^-e^aifefts^|g^r:^rif^g^^^•s^^g• m^^m^mmrrMi^z^mmAm A> mn^B^^mmiz^i ^^mm^.^^itrmmM :^«l€^fell§i)^^Op7rC^ri?SflZ^Ki^^rr?y^^^^#3^WP^ .:•: - ! 3j I5fMPE!MZZ2!^r^^iir?r,Ti^ri,i fc\m*ih&mz&£^. ■ sue r^f^g^^r^ii^fc^s^.ff^^s^p^^p^gtP^rfeg^^^i^M^g: ^■;..^^PiM?^^Tii^t:?ita4i^?i^g£^^^?s¥«^^n^^gPfe^-z '^TTM^'A hB'^^a^ i i^ ^H^fT^^^ igpfcgggd |^Mjt£K«TOI^ -■:'' ■^sMil^^^M^ ^^^^l^f^lM^^Ll^'i: flMZzmM&'ZTyifr: ,'),//. 1 ^ ;^i2rMi£M^c^ WJi^?^^,£rrg^i»MPniin^nni^mr<£^ (ICT^P^g.*rO g8o».P«H^^m1^r I f?^u^- .v/r1;;:; ; ■ STELE INSCRIBED WITH AN ACCOUNT OF TJIE CORONATION OF KING ASPELTA. FOUND AT GEBEL BARKAI.. STELE OF ASPELTA in by them before the statue of the god during the performance of certain festival rites, and that the candidate whom the statue of the god touched or embraced was regarded as chosen by him to be king. This done, all present fell on their faces and adored the king-elect as a god, believing that the divine power had been transferred to him by the touch or embrace of the image.1 Now Diodorus was, as we shall see, well-informed on this matter, and the Stele of the Coronation supplies a number of details which supplement his statement in a striking manner. The document is dated in the first year of the king's reign, and sets forth that all the soldiers of His Majesty were in the town of Tu-ab (the Holy Mountain, i.e., Gebel Barkal), the seat of Tetun Khenti-Nefert, i.e., the god of the country of the Second and Third Cataracts. With these were assembled twenty-four great officers of the kingdom, six being chosen captains of the army, and six of the seal-bearing caste of priests,2 and six of the caste of learned scribes, and six of the chief chancellors of the palace, and they agreed to elect a king. And they said, " There is a lord among us, but we know him not," and they earnestly desired that he might be made manifest to them. And the twenty-four officials said one to the other, that none knew who he was save Ra, and prayed that he would be defended from all evil. Next, allusion was made to the death of the late king, and the vacant throne, and then they all decided to gc to Amen- Ra, and to lay the matter before him, and to make offerings and pray for his guidance. When the twenty-four officials arrived at the temple of Amen-Ra, they found the prophets and priests already assembled, and they told them the object of their com- ing. Then the priests proceeded to asperge and cense the temple, and to pour out libations of water and wine, and when they had done this, they prayed to Amen-Ra, and asked him to 1 Ot pev yap lepels e£ avra>v tovs dpiaTovs irpoKpivovcriv, ex 8e tojv K.aTa\e)(8evTa>v, 01/ av 6 debs Kv koto tivci (Tvvrjdeiav 7repi(pep6pevos \dl3rj, tovtov to nXrjdoi- alpelrai daaiKea' evBi'S 8e koi rrpoaKvvd f the throne of Napata. His ancestress in sixth generation was probably a contemporary of the ■.. Piankhi, and may have belonged to the same branch of the royal STELE OF ASPELTA house of Napata as he. The inscription which records Aspelta's coronation : is very important as illustrating Nubian customs in the seventh century before Christ, and a translation of all the portions of it now remaining is therefore given here. The Coronation of Aspelta — Translation. (i) On the fifteenth day of the second month of spring of the first year of the Majesty of Horus Nefer-kha, the king of the shrines of Nekhebet and Uatchet, Nefer-kha, the Horus of gold Usr-ab, the king of the South and North, the lord of the Two Lands, ( Mer-ka-Ra 1L the son of the Sun, the lord of crowns, (Aspelta), the beloved of Amen-Ra, the lord of the throne of tne Two Lands, who dwelleth in Tu-ab — now behold (2) all the soldiers of His Majesty were in the temple-hall of the city of Tu-ab — now the name of the god who dwelleth therein is Tetun Khenti- Nefert, the god of Kash, — after the god (i.e., the late king) had departed to his place of rest. (3) And there were there six captains who tilled the heart [of the king] of the army of his Majesty, and six of the chiefs who filled the heart [of the king] who were overseers of the seal, and (4) six overseers of the archives who filled the heart [of the king], and six nobles who were overseers of the chancery of the palace. And they said unto all his soldiers, " Come, let us " (5) make a king for ourselves, who shall be like unto a bull whom " none can resist." And the soldiers pondered anxiously and said, " Our lord abideth among us, but we know him not. (6) We " wish indeed that we did know him so that we might enter into ''his service, even as the Two Lands served Horus the son of " Isis after he had taken his seat upon the throne of his father " Osiris, and ascribed adoration to the two uraei [on his brow]." (7) And one spake unto his neighbour, saying, " No man knoweth "him, save only Ra himself: may the god drive away from him 11 evil in every place wheresoever he may be ! " And [again] one (8) spake unto his neighbour, saying, " Ra (i.e., the late king) " hath taken up his place in the Land of Life (Ankhtet), and his "crown is [empty] among us." And [again] one spake unto his neighbour, saying, " It hath been a fixed and unalterable decree of " Ra since the time when heaven came into being, and (9) since " the crown of royalty existed, that he should give [the crown] to " his beloved son, for the king is his image among the living, and " hath not Ra placed himself in this land because of his love for it, 1 For the text, see Mariette, Monuments, plate 9 ; and for translations, see Maspero, Rev. Arch., 1873, torn. xxv\, p. 300 ff. ; Maspero, Records of the Past, vol. vi., p. 71 ; Maspero, Annates &thiopie?i7ies, § ii ; M tiller, Aethiopien, p. 27. 63 THE EGYPTIAN ST DAN md that this land may have peace?" And [again] one said (10) unto his neighbour, " Hath not Ra ' entered into heaven, and •' is not his throne empty without a king ? And do not his rank ind his beneficence remain in his hands to give unto his son who "loveth him ? For Ra knoweth that by means of them he (i.e., "the king) will make good laws on his throne." (n) Then all the soldiers pondered anxiously, saying, "Our " lord abideth among us. but we know him not.'* And each and all the soldiers of His Majesty said with one voice, " Now, moreover, ••this god Amen Ra, lord of the throne of the Two Lands, the Iweller in Tu-ab is the god of Kash. Come, (12) let us ^ro to "him, and let us do nothing without him, for not good is the thing "which is done without him. Aral let us place the matter with "the god, for he hath bun the god of the kingdom of Kash since " the time of Ra, and he will lead us. For (13) the kingdom of " Kash is in his hands, and he giveth it unto the son whom he "loveth. We will adore him. and we will smell the earth [as we " lie on] our bellies before him. and we will declare before him. saying, * We have come unto thee. O Amen, do thou give unto •• us our lord to vivify us. to build the temples of all the gods and goddesses of the South and North, and to provide (14) offerings " for them. We will do nothing without thee, thou art our guide, ••and nothing whatsoever shall be done without thee.' " Then each and every soldier said, " This is a saying which is good, and " we declare it to be so a hundred thousand times. Then the captains of His Majesty went (15) with the chief officers of the palace of Amen, and they found the prophets and the chief libationers standing at the door of the temple, and they said unto them, "[We] come before this god Anien-Ka. the :\\«ller in Tu-ab, so that he may give unto us our lord to vivify "us, to build the tempi. all the godsand all the g< ddr nth and North, and to provide offerings for them, and "we will do nothing whatsoever without this god, for he is our Then the prophets and the chief libationers went into the temple, and they performed all the ceremonies of purification the pouring out of water therein. And the captains of His Majesty ty) and the nobles of the palace went into the temple, and they threw themselves on their bellies before this god, and they said, " We have come unto thee. () Amen-Ra, the lord of the " throne of the Two Lands, the dweller in Tu-.ab, give thou us a lord "to vivify us, to build the temples of the gods of the South and rth, and to provide offerings [for them |. and [to receive] "the gracious 18) dignity from thy two hands which thou gh •• unto thy beloved son." / And they set the royal brethren in th< e of this god, but • • • king. Sep: this is an old phrase borrowed from the rubrics STELE OF ASPELTA he did not draw to himself one of them. Then they set a second time [before the God] the Royal Brother, the son of Amen, born of Mut, the lady of heaven, the son of Ra, f Aspelta ], who liveth for ever, and the god Amen-Ra, (19) the lord oflhe throne of the Two Lands, said, " He it is who is the king your lord, and he shall " vivify you, and he shall build all the temples of the Lords of the "South and North, and provide offerings therefor. His father " was the divine son, the son of Ra f \ mad kheru} whose " mother was the royal sister, the royal mother, the mistress of " Kash, (20) the daughter of Ra f \ who liveth for ever; " whose mother was the royal sister, the Meter Tuat (i.e., high- " priestess) of Amen-Ra, the king of the gods of Thebes, f J, " maat kheru; whose mother was the royal sister ( 1, " maat kheru ; whose mother was the royal sister ( J, maat "kheru; whose mother was the royal sister ( J, maat kheru : "whose mother was the royal sister f J, (21) maat kheru ; " whose mother was the royal sister, the mistress of Kash, "( jL maat kheru. He shall be your lord." Then the captains of His Majesty and the nobles of the palace cast themselves down on their bellies before this god, and smelt the earth in the deepest humility, and gave thanks unto this god for the mighty {22) deed which he had done for his beloved son, the king of the South and North, f Aspelta J, who liveth for ever. And His Majesty entered in to let himself be crowned before Father Amen-Ra, the Lord of the throne of the Two Lands, and he found every kind of crown, and the royal apparel of the kings of Kash, and their sceptres, laid before this god. Then His Majesty spake in the presence of this god, saying: (23) "Come thou to " me, O Amen-Ra the lord of the throne of the Two Lands, who " dwellest in Tu-ab, grant thou unto me thy beneficent dignity "which is not in my heart, and let me love thee (?). Give thou " to me the crown, according to the desire of thy heart, and the " sceptre." Then the god said, " Thine is the crown of the royal "brother, the king of the South and North ( j, mad " kheru (24); and his diadem is stablished on thy head, even as " is stablished .... on thy head ; and his sceptre is in thy 1 " He whose word is maat," i.e., he who has attained the power of making every order he gives to take effect. Thus we know that Aspelta's father was dead. VOL. II. 65 F THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN " hand, and it shall overthrow all thine enemies." Then His Majesty rose up before Amen-Ra, [the lord of the throne of the Two Lands], .... and he took the sceptre in his hand, and His Majesty cast himself upon his belly before this god (25) to smell the earth in the deepest humility. And he said : " Come thou to " me, O Amen-Ra, the lord of the throne of the Two Lands, who " dwellest in Tu-ab . . . ." From this point onwards the text is much mutilated, but enough of it remains to prove that when the king came out from the temple he was received by his soldiers with shouts of joy (line 28), and that he established festivals in honour of the gods, and gave gifts to the priests. In connection with the reign of Aspelta mention must be made of the Stele set up by his Queen Mat .... henen (?) at Gebel Barkal, to commemorate the gifts which she made to the temple of Amen-Ra there. This Stele, after it was removed from the Sudan, came into the possession of Linant Bey, and it passed into the hands of Prince Napoleon and E. de Rouge, and after the death of the latter was given to the Museum of the Louvre by J. de Rouge.1 On the upper portion of it is sculptured a scene wherein Aspelta is making an offering of Maut, $ , to Amen-Ra, Mut, and Khensu, and behind him stand his mother Enselsa, his wife Mat . . . henen (?), and his sister Khebit, each pouring out a libation with her right hand, and holding a sceptre in her left. Each of the three royal ladies is steatopygous, and their figures resemble those of the ladies who are seen represented on the chapel-walls of the pyramids of Meroe. Beneath the sculptured scene are twenty-three lines of text, which set forth that on the twenty-fourth day of the fourth month of the season Shat, in the third year of Aspelta's reign, the following officers of the kingdom of Napata came to the temple: six overseers of the seal called Rum-Amen, Amen-tarhaknen .... a-Amen-saknen, the Anauasasu official Kuru-Amen-tanen samakhinen, Nastaabusaknen,- and the chief scribe of Kash, Marubiua- 1 First published and translated by P. Pierrot, in 1£iude$ Hgypt.t torn, i., pp. 96-106, plate 2, Paris, 1873 ; also published and translated by Schaefer, in Zeit., 1895, P- IQI- - I. 66 r.#o^!tt.*?«P2i«#?rcn»r*ii.fc:2.<*i5«t'?7 =n. x~ K^e.£?^,rft^tgM:'f-.7:^45if T-i*T^^4;n?n>c-it?i?i^T(ft^ifrr^ t-f+.T^r! — T^r»?.lf Tft4***-l7'i,4tf *?^ L^ftw tr^snaw *y# 1 zig«f?>Tsiir^ytrt^p-^7a «? g6Ke»flg*»^^.^>Etggji^cK5?T^tt|-\ Uo u f fexngg^t y a r^trif -sqr ? £~>n tn r uc=5 vnt-r^.-jrLitv-y^y-jKr/if'^^i'M^ l^^jjrsir«y "xirfe^j^T^p^ STELE INSCRIBED !WITH AN ACCOUNT OF THE DEDICATION OF GIFTS TO THE TEMPLE OF AMEN-RA AT NAPATA BY KING ASPELTA. FOUND AT GEBEL BARKAL. STELE OF ASPELTA'S QUEEN Amen,1 and the scribe of the granary, Kbensu-Artas,- the chief chancellor of the marches of Ta-Kenset, Arta,3 the royal scribe Takarta,1 the chancellor Pata-nub/' in all, eleven officials. In the presence of these stood the queen, with a silver bowl in her right hand, and a sistrum in her left, and she made an offering to Amen and agreed to give to the god fifteen loaves of bread, ten of one sort and five of another, each day, and e\cry month fifteen measures of beer, and every year three oxen, and on festival days she promised to give a measure of some kind of beer, and two measures of another, extra. These gifts were to be maintained by the queen during her life, and by her children and grandchildren after her death. Every descendant of hers who carried out her wishes would be favourably regarded by Amen-Ra, and would have a son to succeed him, but whosoever diminished these offerings would be smitten by the sword of Amen-Ra, and be burned by the fire of Sekhet, and have no son to succeed him. There were present also at the dedication of this endowment, the second, third, and fourth prophets of Amen, who were called Uahmani-Amen, Tanen-Amen, Tanenbuta, respectively; and the scribe of the divine words of Amen, whose name is erased ; the seven chief libationer-priests, Sapakhi, Sab, Peta-Amen, Nemkhi, Kurumut, Khent(?)-ruhi, Kuru-tanen-Amen ; the three presidents, Nes- Anher, Bes . . . ., and Un-nefer, and the temple scribe Nes- Mut. Here for convenience' sake, and because the document probably belongs to the end of the seventh century before Christ, reference must be made to the edict against the eaters of raw meat, which was promulgated at Napata by a king whose name has been A/WAAA AAAW U I D _£ss ^f^£?' 69 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN obliterated.' The edict is inscribed upon a stone slab, with a rounded top, which was found by an Egyptian officer at Gebel Barkal, and which w quently brought to Cairo, under Mariettas Directorship of Antiquities ; this monument is generally known as the " Stele of the Excommunication." On the rounded part is sculptured a scene wherein th< king, whose name has been d from the cartouche, is making an offering of Maat $ , to Amen-Ra, who is represented with a ram's head surmounted disk and plumes; behind the god stand Mut and Khensu. Amen promises to give him "all life and power'*: and Mut, "all health," and Khensu, "the veritable scribe of the company of the and Horns, the lord of joy of heart, all joy of heart." ith the - ten lints of text, the first three of which contain the king's names and titles. The rest of the inscription sets forth that, in the second year after His Majesty had ascended the throm . he went into the temple of Father Amen of Napata, the dweller in Tu-al>, to drive away these men (or tribes). who were haters of the god [Amen], and were called " Tern pesiu ■ t khaiu," saying : " They shall not enter into the temple of I Napata. the dweller in Tu-ab, because of that thing, "whereof to speak is an abomination, which, they did in the " temple of Amen." Nowtheydid a thing, which the god had not given the command to do, and they made a blasphemous n in their hearts, in respect of slaying the man in whom listed no abomination, the- which the god had given no mand to perform. But the god made their words [empty whilst yet] in their mouths, and their words wherein they had things which rose up against them in an evil ! smote them, and he made the fire of the 3 through their midst. In order to put into all prophets, and into all libationers, who enter into the place where this holy god is. the fear of the greatness of his souls and of the might of his living power, Hi \ saiththus: — " All prophets and all libationers who shall commit an evil act "in the temple shall [the god Amen] slay. And their feet shall tte, Mori. Divers, plate 10 ; and for translations, see 71, torn, xxi., p. 329 : Records of the Past, vol. iv., ; and see Mariette, Revue Arch., torn, ii., p. 91UO Ps?^ ,cnr I^Pl^ o^©g@B _ lLLLUil tff"*J,l££> APrr; ;?B A( 'C^fltg)^ B i^e^i n a^~\ <=> -^— n , 'IT#fz;^aLsf3i^M^^|p^-tTI i^>^$te*A. ^ 1 1 1 C^^Ci 1 1 11 1 L *M_ « <=> 1 1 . »*6$ vi:!;0' : ^=7»D (L^-T^i 1 1 itatues of Rameses II. The most important of those in Greek is that whim ^hues that it was cut by the comrades of Psammetichus, the son of Theokles. when king nmetichus came to Elephantine The expedition, it goes on iled by was- of Ki rkis to the source of the river, Deche- mmanding the foreigners, and Amasis the Egyptians. who wrote were Damerarchon, the son of Amoibichos, and Pelekos, the son of Udamos.3 The name Reikis * has been •e 2 Kings xxiii. 29. ee Lepsius. Denkmnler, Abth. vi.. Bl. 98 ff.; Corpus Insert p. Semit., torn, i., pi. 19, 20, text, torn, i., pp. 128-137 ; Sayce, Trans. Soc. Bibl. Arch., . p. 144 \\. iXtos tXduvTos is 'EXtquii'Ttvai' VupnaTiKo •nura ty papain ot avv ¥afifiaTi\oi toi B/okXos (irXtov f)Wov 3« Ke'pnios Karwfp devtairn iruTapos dvir) d\6y\oaos A^frroToo-i/xro AtyvKTMK 8i "Apaais lypctfpt Aapfpap\ov ^Apoldi^ov kcu TlfXfKos 0l8dp.nv. 4 See A 1 demann, in Rheiflisches Museum, Bd. xxxv., p. 372. 74 HERU-SA-ATEF the subject of much discussion, but the reading is well-established, and it seems better to look for this place to the south of Abu Simbel, than to identify it either with Kirsh, opposite to Garf Husen, or with Korti, a little above Dakka. Practically speaking, the expedition sailed nearly to Wadi Haifa, the Egyptians of the time considering that the Nile Valley from Elephantine to this point belonged to them. Wadi Haifa, or Behen as it was then called, had lost its importance, but this was certain to happen when it ceased to be a central market for the products of the Southern Sudan. This ancient frontier town was situated in a most unproductive portion of the Nile Valley, and it was to the interest neither of the kings of Napata nor of the kings of Egypt to maintain or defend it against each other at this period. During the rule of the early kings of the XXVIth Dynasty of Egypt there flourished at Napata, probably between B.C. 610 and B.C. 580, a king called P-ankh-aluru, whose name occurs in this form :- las I J fefe r^ 1" Nothing whatever is known about his reign, but his name occurs twice in the Stele of Nastasenen, once in connection with a vine- yard, or garden, which he planted at Ta-hehet, and once in connection with Heru-sa-atef. Following close on the period of his rule came the reign of Heru-sa-atef, whose prenomen was Sa-mer- Amen. His Horus name was Ka-nekht-kha-em- Nept,1 his Nekhebet-Uatchet name was Netch- neteru,2 and his Golden Horus name was Uaf- th-tat-semt-semt-nebt.3 The only known monument of this king is the famous gray granite stele from Gebel Barkal which is now in the Egyptian Museum at Cairo. On the upper portion of the obverse is sculptured a figure of the winged disk, with pendent uraei, between /WWVA X Q £k AA/WNA /WWVA ° ^Z s^z 1111 i- fwi r\z^i ^3: a I ^ III <= 75 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN which is uche containing the name of Irjeru-sa-atef Beneath are two scenes: in that to the right the king is standing, and is making an offering of a string of heads, a neck- and a pectoral to the ram-headed Amen of Napata, and behind him is the "royal mother, royal sister, mistress of Kash, Thesma nefer-ru " ;' in tin- seem- to the left the king is making mie kind of offerings t<> the man-headed Amen, and behind him stands the " royal sister and wife Behth&iis (?). On the four <>f the stele are e6i lines of hieroglyphics, wherein is rded the history of the principal events of the reign oi Heru- sa-atef.a The following rendering of them will illustrate their contents: — (i The thirteenth day of the second month (^ the season of Pert, in the thirty-fifth year under the majesty of the Horns, the Mighty Bull crowned in Nept (Napata), the lord of the shrines of Nekhebet and Uatchet, (2) the Advocate of the gods, the Golden Horus, tht conqueror i?> of all foreign lands, the king of the South and North, fSa-mer-Amen], the son of Ra, the lord of the Two Lands, the lord of crowns, <;■ the lord who hath made creation, ceeding] from his body, beloved by him, M.Ierw-s.'.-ateM, who liveth for ever, beloved of Amen-ka, the if the thrones of the Two Lands, who dwelleth in the Holy [Mountain]. We give him (4) life, stability, and all power, and all health, and all joy of heart, like Ra, for ever. rn the beginning they decided that Amen of (5) Napata . . . . my beneficent Father, should give unto me ra-Neheset (i.e., the Land »f the Blacks, or Sudan): 111 the beginning it was they who iound <»n the royal tiara, in the beginning it was they who I upon me with their kind eyes, and who spake unto me, sayin n< to the temple of Amen oi Napata, " who dwelleth in the Hall of the (8) North." r hen was I afraid, and I made supplication unto a certain aged man. and him], and he (9) spake unt<> me, saying: " Seek on 11 behalf of thy two hands: he who buildeth up my (10) holy hall be protected." Then they caused me to come into the presence of Amen of Napata, my (n) beneficent Father, sa\ in- : " I beseech thee to give unto me the diadem of the Land 1 E221' '" Q^ii^Jii . plates 11-13; and for translations, of ike Pdsty vol. vi«, pj ttudes de Mythologie, : t i Ool I urn of _sic ^MT^^n-^^iirrrt> :aPP^Em^3/^iiM£ a~at (Ik ^ « .fli;,1f£?gTm£TT1Tm ;«juc;rafeij4: i^nt tp->«^t r i^^^r: £T >G 73fe^ni OMmCiPWC P£M£/p&"~*\ RELIEFS AND TEXT FROM THE FRONT OF THE STELE OF HERU-SA-ATEF. FOUND AT GEBEL BARKAL. STELE OF HERU-SA-ATEF "of the Blacks"; and (12) Amen of Napata said unto me, "I " have given unto thee the diadem of the Land of the Blacks ; "and [ have given (13) unto thee the Four Quarters of the whole "earth; and I have given unto thee the water which is good ; " and I have given unto thee (14) the water which is foul ; and I " have placed all thy foes so that they may be beneath thy " sandals." (15) If any country maketh a [hostile] advance on " thy two sides it shall not succeed ; but if thou (16) makest an " expedition against any country which is on either side of thee, " (17) the thigh and the legs thereof shall come to nought." And having seen him I poured out a great libation in return for that which Amen of Napata, (18) my beneficent Father, had given me, and I stood up in the hall of the Apts of Amen of Napata, (19) within the sanctuary. And it came to pass after these things that [I] made a journey to Amen-Ra (20), the lord who dwelleth in the city of Qemten, and I spake, saying, " Amen of Napata." And I made a journey to Amen-Ra, the lord who dwelleth (21) within Pa-Nebes. and I spake, saying, "Amen of Napata." And I made a journey to Bast of (22) Taret, and I spake, saying, " Amen of Napata." Then they spake to me, saying, " Get thee gone (23) to the temple " of Amen of Tarukhet(?)-reset, for men say that the building "thereof is not complete." (24) Then I turned back a second time, and I builded it, and I provided materials, and I adorned it completely in five months. And when I looked at the (25) temple of the Apts of Amen of Napata, and saw that it lacked gold, I gave (26) unto the temple of the Apts forty teben of gold, and of worked gold (?) five thousand one hundred and twenty pek. (27) Then one spake unto me saying, " The pa shennut lacketh gold/' And I (28) caused them to bring shent (acacia) wood, and wood of Arkaret, in abundance, (29) and I made them bring it to Napata, and I made them to lay plates of gold on both sides of it [in weight] forty teben. (30) And I gave to the treasury (?) of the temple twenty teben of gold, and of worked gold one hundred pieces. (31) O Amen of Napata, I have given unto thee [a pectoral] and beads for thy neck .... and a statue of Amen-Ra .... inlaid with . . . and gold, and three .... of gold, which were inlaid with [precious stones], and a figure of Ra inlaid with gold, and three gold figures of the head of Amen, and two censers (?) of gold, and one hundred and thirty-four bands (?) of gold, and one hundred teben of silver, and one rncihen vessel of silver, and one haru vessel of silver, and five sekaru vessels of silver, and one liaru vessel of silver, and one mahen vessel of silver, and one dbrek vessel of silver, and nine mennu vessels of silver, and four karu vessels of copper, and .... mekatmi vessels of copper, and two hahrdmdu vessels of copper, and two fire-holders of copper, and one ukhakh vessel of copper, and fifteen sekaru bowls of copper, and five patennu vessels of copper, and two large lavers 79 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN r — total, thirty-two [vessels]. And two hundred teben . and rive jars of honey (56). And on another occasion, when the House of a Thousand Years n to fall into ruin, I rebuilt it for thee. I made for it a with pillars; 1 built for thee a stable for oxen, two hundred and fifty-four cubits [long]. I restored for thee a temple, which though small had gone to ruin, and I made supplication, ." And I spake, saying, -" Be- hold, as a king of Egypt have I built for thee, and I have "provided for its supply of offerings." And again, I gave unto thee five hundred oxen, and I gave unto thee two mQnen vessels of milk, and wry many .•. on many occasions. And I unto thee ten ministrants. And I gave unto thee captives, tiftv men and fifty women, in all one hundred. O Amen of tta, I have not reckoned [what I gave] unto thee. I am the man who provided for thee that which I vowed. (72) And 011 the twenty-third day of the third month of the season Pert, in tin second year, they made him set out on an expedition against the rebels, and I slaughtered the Rehrehsa. and Amen hamstrung the thighs that were stretched out against me. I did acts of ry anion- them, and defeated them utterly. And on the fourth day of the second month of the season in the third year, I did acts of bravery among the Met. t 5, and I defeated them utterly .... and it was thou who workedsl for me. And on the twelfth day of tl nd month of the n Shemu, in the fifth year of the son of Ra, the king of the South and North ( Heru-sa-atef JL life, strength, health [to him] for wmen and my horsemen to go against the rebels in tin- country of Metet. and they performed mighty deeds in the towns of Anerua . . . ru, and they defeated them, and large numbers of them, and they took many prisoners, and I the Prince Aruka .... th. \!id on the fourth day of the second month ot season Shemu. in the sixth year of the son of Ra, I, who liveth for ever, 1 called together a multi- iinst the country of MeU-t, and I did j among them and their towns, and I ted and routed them utterly in the town of Hebsi (?). Mills, and cows, and asses, and sheep, and i men si I women slaves thereof, and the .... tnd it was thy terror which worked graciously on my behalf. Then the chief of the land of Metet sent unto me, saying, •• I hou art my god, I am thy servant, 1 am a woman, O com* And he caused the dfennut* to be brought unto m 1 The .: the money which he paid to Heru-sa- j STELE OF HERU-SA-ATEF the hands of an envoy (?). And I came and [I] performed the ceremonies of Amen of Napata, my beneficent Father. And I gave unto thee oxen in very large numbers. (92) And on the fourth day of the first month of the season Pert, in the eleventh year [of my reign], I made my bowmen to set out on an expedition against the country of Taqnat, under the leadership of Kasau, for the troops of the chiefs Baruka and Samensa had reached the city of Sunt. He did mighty deeds of valour there and defeated Baruka and Samensa, and slew all the people of the city. It was through the terror of thee which was beneficent [towards me] that I did [this]. (96) And on the fifteenth day of the first month of the season Sha, in the sixteenth year [of my reign], I caused my bowmen and my horsemen to set out on an expedition against the rebels of the land of Mekhetsa(?) and they performed mighty deeds of valour among them, and my bowmen defeated them with slaughter, and captured the finest of their cattle. (99) And on the thirteenth day of the first month of the season Pert, in the eighteenth year of [the reign of] the son of Ra, ( Heru-sa-atef ], who liveth for ever, the rebels of the country of Rehrehsa came under the leadership of with his men into the city of Baruat (Meroe), and I repulsed him. Thy auspicious terror and thy two mighty thighs smote him bravely, and I defeated him and overthrew him with very great slaughter, and scattered his men. And thou thyself didst so work for me in the lands (?) that he rose up in the middle of the night and took to flight. (105) And on the eighteenth day of the third month of Shemu, in the twenty-third year of [the reign of] the son of Ra, ( Heru-sa-atef J , who liveth for ever, Arua, the chief of the countries of Rehrehsa, and all his men came against me in the city of Baruat (Meroe). And I did mighty deeds of valour among thern, and I defeated him and overthrew him with very great slaughter, and I repulsed him and put him to flight. And I defeated Shaikaru who came to his assistance under an agreement with him. It was thy auspicious terror and thy two thighs [which smote] the chief and my bowmen and my horsemen drove him off. (in) And on the fifteenth day of the first month of the season Pert, in the thirty-fourth year of [the reign ofj the son of Ra, fHeru-sa-atefl, who liveth for ever, 1 sent a messenger to Amen of Napata, my beneficent Father, saying, " Shall I send " my bowmen against the countries of Mekhetsai ? " And Amen sent a message unto me, saying: "Certainly send them." Then I caused to set out fifty scouts and horsemen, and the people of the four lands of Mekhetsai who were gathered together did they defeat with slaughter, and none remained, and none of them vol. 11. 81 g THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN . and none of them was able to take the road, and none of them was able to put his feet [to ground], and none of them was able and none of them was able to grasp a bow (?), and they gave themselves up as prisoners (?). (in)) And. moreover, so soon as they spake unto me, saying, " The temple fell into ruin in the third month of the season Pert "during the festival of Ptah," 1 built the temple for the. built for thee a temple of gold .... of wood, six chambers of 1. and four pillars of stone. And moreover, so soon as they spake unto me. saying: "Thehouse of the king (i.e.. palace) hath "become in such a state of ruin that no man can enter therein,"" I built thehouse of the king, and four houses in Napata, and sixty houses which I caused to be enclosed within a wall. And. moreover, I built a place of each side of which was fifty cubits [long], making in all two hundred cubits. And, moreover, I planted six gardens with a vine in each, making in all six vines in Napata And I gave unto thee most beautiful gardens in Barual (Meroe), making in all six. And I caused to be offered up unto thee offerings on the twelfth (or, twenty-second) night [of each month] one hundred and fifteen measures of grain, and thirty-eight measures of barley, making in all one hundred and fifty-three measures of wheat and barley. [The next four linesare mutilated, but the text seems to mean that the king carried out repairs of temples in every town which needed them]. I made Osiris to i . celebrated a festival to the god) in ... . tint ; [ made to rise Osiris, the dweller in Baruat (Meroe) ; 1 made to rise Osiris and Isis in Merthet : I made to rise Osiris and [sis four times in Kaivrt ; I made to rise Osiris and Isis and Horns in Seh reset ; I made to rise Osiris and Amen-Abti ' in Sekarukat ; I made to rise Horus in Karuthet (Korti?); I made to rise K.i in Mehat(?); I made to rise An-her in Aruthnait ; I made to - in Napata ; I made to rise Osiris in N eh an at : I made -<■ Osiris and Isis in Pa-Qemt ; and I made to rise Osiris three in Pa-Nebes, for ever. OfitTd CHAPTER VII. THE SUCCESSORS OF PIANKHI. The information to be gained from Heru-sa-atef 's inscription is of a most interesting nature, and it proves that in the sixth century before Christ there lived at Napata a king, who, by means of the nine expeditions which he made during his reign of at least thirty- five years, made himself master of the Nile Valley from Pa-nebes, the Tlvovyjr of Ptolemy, near Wadi Haifa, to Sennaar on the Blue Nile, and Dar Fur on the White Nile. How far to the west his rule extended cannot be said, but he was certainly conqueror of all the country on both banks of the Atbara. He made no attempt to wage war against the Egyptians, and he seems to have laid claim to no country north of Pa-nebes, a city which lay to the south of Wadi Haifa. He devoted all his energies to the conquest of the various savage, or half savage tribes, whether with black, or red, or white skins, and whether of pure Sudani or Semitic origin, that lived south of the Island of Meroe, and his success was great. With the spoil which he took from the vanquished chiefs he endowed the great temple of Amen at Napata, and he rebuilt the sanctuaries of the gods in many cities, and established one or more annual festivals in each of the twelve chief cities of his kingdom. It is clear that he was wholly in the hands of the priests of Amen, and that he took their advice about going to war. We see also that the bulk of the spoil went to them and to their god, and that Heru-sa-atef bestowed upon Amen of Napata a new endowment after each of his great expeditions. The gods chosen by him for endowment besides Amen of Napata were Osiris, Isis, Horus, Ra, An-Her, and a local form of Amen called "Amen-Abti." Heru-sa-atef copied the great Egyptian kings of the XVIIIth Dynasty in causing a summary of his deeds 83 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN in the form of Annals to be drawn up, and. like them, he attributed to Amen the successful results which he achieved. The exact length of his reign is unknown, and nothing is known of the events which followed his death. I le may have been succeeded by a son, but tin- materials at present available do not permit any statement made on this point, and we do not reach a period concerning which historical facts exist until tin- reign of Xastasenen. Ni.STASENEN, with the prenomrn of Axkh-Ka-Ra, and the - 0 Morns name of Ka NEKHT Ml-K PAUT NETERU KHA 5j* Bid NepiTA,1 and the title of "son of Ra," ended the throne about B.C. 525, and he appears to have been the king of the Sudan against whom Cambyses directed his campaign, nly known monument of his reign is the ray granite slab about 5 feet, 6 inches high, inscribed on both sides in hieroglyphics, which is called by Lepsius the " Stele of Dongola." In a note printed at the end of Brugsch's translation of the text, Lepsius says that the stele was obtained through the agency of Graf Wilhelm von Schlieffen, through whom it was given by Muhammad All to the Berlin Museum in L854, but then- is some mistake here, for Muhammad AH died in [849. The difficulty is partially cleared up by a com- munication which Graf Wilhelm von Schlieffen has made to wherein he says that he first saw the stele in New ■la lying Hat on its side in 1N53 ; he cleared away the dust from it. and took a paper impression of the text on one side. When he returned to Cairo the following winter he was instructed by the Prussian Consul-Genera] t<> obtain the stele from 'Abbas hen the Ruler of Egypt, and 'Abbas PashA ; it to His Majesty Frederick William IV. The s1 ined at New Dongola, and it was not until 1 when the Crown Prince Frederick William took a personal 0 LI f Mighty Bull, beloved of the company of the gods, crowned in Napata." 1 tb. v., BL 16 ; for translations, see Maspero. ' /.'.. vol. iv., p. 2, 1K76 ; Records of the Past, vol. x., p. 55 ff. ; . vol. in., p. 239 ffi ; Brugsch, Aeg. Zcit., 1877, p. 23 ; Erman, Vet Hcknis of the Roy il Museum in Berlin, p. 402 ; Schaefer, xschrift (Us Berliner Museums^ Leipzig, 1901. STELE OF NASTASENEN him that Amen had laid the sovereignty of the country at his feet, he continued his journey, and arrived, by the west bank of the river, at Napata. He crossed the river and rode on a " large horse " to the temple at Gebel Barkal, and when he had performed all the appointed cere- monies, Amen gave him the kingdom of the Sudan, which extended from the neighbourhood of the modern village of Kosha, about one hundred and twenty miles south of Wadi Haifa, to the country of Alut, the Alwah of Muhammadan writers, the southern limits of which extended along the Blue and White Niles some two or three hundred miles south of the modern city of Khartum. The capital of this country was probably on the site of the ruins on the right bank of the Blue Nile, a little above Khartum, now known as Soba. All the country between the Nile and the Red Sea formed a part of Nastasenen's dominions, and all the Bayuda desert, and the regions to the north and south of it. After returning thanks to Amen, the new king danced before his god, and sacrificed two oxen or bulls, and then went up and took his seat on the Golden Throne, amid the acclamations of gentle and simple, who rejoiced in the appearance of a king who would renew the prosperity of their country. It was now necessary for Nastasenen to show himself in the northern parts of his kingdom, and he therefore journeyed to the shrine of Amen of Pa-Qem, which was probably situated between the Third and Second Cataracts. Here he was received by the god, in whose honour he celebrated a festival, and when Amen had confirmed his rule the king went up and sat upon the Golden Throne. From Pa-Qem he went to Pa-Nebes, which was situated near Wadi Haifa, and the Amen who was worshipped in this place having confirmed his rule, the king went up and sat upon the Golden Throne. At Pa-Qem he received a bow from the god, and at Pa-Nebes he received a leather-laced club, and thus, having been acknowledged as king in the two chief religious centres in the northern parts of his kingdom, he returned to Napata. Here he offered up further sacrifices, and then he spent four nights in the tchaut chamber in the temple, and during the four days he performed some kind of acts or ceremonies, of the nature and import of which nothing is known. When these days 80 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN were accomplished he offered up as sacrifices two more oxen or hulls, and then he went and seated himself upon the throne which is in the house of the Golden Garden (?). Up the river from Napata, at a place called Tert, was a famous sanctuary of the goddess Bast. Thither Nastasenen journeyed, and presented himself before the goddess, who embraced him, and him her Left breast [to suck], and presented him with a strong club (?). The site of Tert is unknown. The king occupied five in going there and coming bark, and we may assume there- iiat the sanctuary was situated some distance up the Fourth art, perhaps near the modern Berti. When Nastasenen had 1 Tert his religious pilgrimages, which were also somewhat of a political character, came to an end, and he was free to con- sider a course of anion which would fill the treasury of Amen vvith gold. From his private possessions he dedicated to Amen of Napata four gardens and thirty-six men to work them, a gold statue of Amen of Pa-(Jem-Aten, and two gold statues of Horus, il sets of silver and copper vessels for use in the sanctuary, and large quantities of incense, honey, and myrrh. To Amen in Apt he dedicated ten very fine bulls and cows, and several sets of copper NOw whilst Nastasenen was consolidating his rule, and carrying out the behests of the priests of Amen, events of importance were happening in Egypt. Cambyses, king of Persia, had quarrelled with Amasis II., king of Egypt, and was making preparations to invade Egypt. The causes of the quarrel do not rn as here, for once having made up his mind to invade !, Cambyses would not have much difficulty in finding an by Phanes, who had been formerly an officer in Amasis LI., he obtained guides and water from the who lived on the north-east frontier of Egypt, and in a short time he appeared with his host at Pelusium, where, however, he learned that Amasis II. had just died after a short id that his son, Psammetichus III., had succeeded him. imetichus III. marched out with the Egyptians and his naries to fight Cambyses, but in the fierce battle which took place at Pelusium his forces were beaten, and he retreated to phis. A few days later, having captured Pelusium, Cam- 90 CAMBYSES byses advanced on Memphis, which in due course fell into his hands, and thus Egypt and Nubia so far south as Wadi Haifa became a satrapy of the Persian Empire. According to one account, Psammetichus III. was compelled by Cambyses to commit suicide by drinking bulls' blood,1 according to another, he was exiled, with six thousand Egyptians, to Susa. Cambyses next determined to conquer the country to the west of Egypt, and Carthage, and Nubia (the Sudan). Before, how- ever, he began to do this, he appears to have set to work to gain the affections of the Egyptians by adopting their manners and customs. He caused his name to be written within a cartouche, and he adopted a Horus name (Sma taui, i.e., the " uniter of the two lands,") and a prenomen, Mesuth-Ra ; 2 he also styled him- self " son of Ra," as if he had been a true Egyptian Pharaoh. With the view of further conciliating the Egyptians, he went to SaTs, restored at his own expense the temple of Neith, which had suffered greatly during the war, and under the tuition of the " ha prince and real royal kinsman," Utcha-Heru-Resenet, learned something of the mythology of the goddess who was the mother of Ra, the Sun-god. Cambyses purified the temple, reinstated the priests, restored their incomes, and performed an act of worship to Neith and poured out a libation to her. With the money which Cambyses restored to him, the priest of Sais did good to all, and it is expressly said of him that he provided coffins for those whose relatives were too poor to buy them, and that " he took care of the children." According to Herodotus (iii. 16), Cambyses had the body of his old enemy, Amasis II., brought out from its tomb, and then beaten and stabbed, and when he found that he could not destroy it, he ordered it to be burned. Herodotus says that he did not believe this story, and most people will share his scepticism in this respect. When Cambyses thought that the fitting time had arrived, he determined to send his fleet to Carthage, and a portion of his army against the dwellers in the Oasis of Jupiter Ammon, and 1 The ancients believed that bulls' blood was poisonous, and that Midas, king of Phrygia, Themistocles, and Smerdis, all died through drinking it. 91 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN another portion against the Nubians.' The expedition to Carthage broke down because the Phoenicians in the fleet of Cambyses refused to fight against their kinsmen, the Carthaginians, rind the king thereupon decided to send an army to Carthage by land. He sent to Elephantine f for a number of the Fish- eaters who were acquainted with the Nubian tongue, and when they had come he gave them their instructions, and sent them into the Sudan with the following gifts: a purple robe, a gold neck-chain, amulets, an alabaster box of myrrh, and a cask ■ 1 m wine. He als« > wanted to know whether the " table of Sun" really existed in Nubia. The " table of the Sun " was a meadow full of boiled flesh of all kinds of beasts, which the t rates stored with meat each night, and whosoever liked came and ate during the day. The Nubians to whom the Fish-eaters went were the "tallest and handsomest of men," and their king was the tallest citizen, who- ih equalled his height. When the Fish-eaters arrived, they told the king of Nubia that Cambyses wished to be his friend and ally, and that the gifts they bore to him from him those wherein he most delighted. The Nubian king told mvovs that their words were untrue, that they were spies, and that their king was not a just man because he coveted his country. He then gave them a bow ami told them that when ins could pull it easily they might come against the Nubians: thus saying he unstrung the bow. Of the gifts which Cam! Qt, the only one he approved was the wine, which he better than anything they had of the kind in Nubia. In answer to the questions of the Fish-caters the Nubian king them that most of his people lived one hundred and twenty more: that they ate boiled flesh and drank nothing but milk; he showed them a fountain, the waters of which made their flesh glossy and sleek, and smell of per- fume like that of violets; he showed them the prisoners in the »f gold, and the "table of the Sun " ; and t 1 coffins wherein the dead were placed for one year burial.'1 When the Fish-eaters returned to Can nd gave him their tus, iii. 17. - Ibid., 19. a Ibid., 23, 24. CAMBYSES report, he was furious, and immediately set out against the Nubians, without making arrangements for feeding his troops. When he arrived at Thebes he detached fifty thousand men from his main army, and sent them off to the Oasis of Jupiter Ammon, with orders to take all the people captives, and to burn the temple of Jupiter Ammon. These men by the help of guides reached the Oasis of Kharga in seven days, and then set out for the Oasis of Jupiter Ammon, but when they were half-way across, they were overtaken whilst eating their mid-day meal by a " strong and deadly " south wind, which buried them all in the sand that it brought with it, and never a man returned to Egypt. Meanwhile Cambyses continued his journey up the Nile, but before he had advanced one-fifth of the distance to the Nubian capital his army had eaten all the provisions, and the soldiers began to eat the transport animals, and the grass and the herbs which grew on the skirts of the desert. When, however, the great sandy desert was reached, even these failed, and the troops began to kill and eat their comrades, every ten men selecting a victim.1 Then Cambyses became frightened and retreated to Thebes with the few soldiers that remained to him. Such is the story, as told by Herodotus, of the mad attempt made by Cambyses to conquer the Sud&n. Details of the route chosen by Cambyses are wanting, and we do not know whether he intended to go to Napata or Meroe. If to the former place, he would have to go to Wadi Haifa, then traverse the awful " Belly of Stones," and the howling wilderness of the Third Cataract, and then march from Kerma to Napata along the river bank, a distance of at least two hundred miles. If to Meroe, he would leave the Nile at Korosko, and cross the desert to Abu Hamed, a distance of two hundred and thirty miles, and then proceed along the river bank for two hundred and twenty miles more. In either case it seems impossible for Cambyses to have reached his destination. Several historians, both ancient and modern, have, however, thought that Cambyses conquered the Sudan. Strabo says* that he conquered the capital of " Ethiopia," and gave it his sister's name " Meroe," and the 1 Herodotus, iii. 25. - Bk. xvii. 93 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN merit is repeated by Josephus ' and Diodorus.- The modern authorities who accept this statement adduce the fact of the existence of a city somewhere near the Third Cataract, called by Plin mbusis," and by Ptolemy4 Ka/xfiuaov ra/xiela, or "the store places of Cambyses." The hieroglyphic texts also mention a city called " Qem-baiu-set,"5 which Brugsch was pre- pared to identify with the " Cambusis " of Pliny. Whether this identification be true or not, matters comparatively little, for the real question Is whether there exists in the hieroglyphic in- scriptions any evidence that Cambyses conquered the Sudan. On this point the Stele of Nastasenen, the contents of which have already been partial!) described, throws much light, and its evidence goes to show that Cambyses did invade the Sudan, and that his troops wen- defeated by Xastasenen with such slaughter that Cambyses was compelled to retreat to Egypt. In lines thirty-nine and forty it is said : " The Chief Kambasu- • ten came, and I made my bowmen to advance against him from "the city Tchart. There was a great slaughter. [I captured] "all his I made myself master of all the boats of his tains, I muted and overthrew him. I seized all his lands (or "territory), and all his oxen, hulls, cow j, and animals of . v kind, and everything whereon men live, from the city of " Kartepl unto the city of Taruti-pe$it ...."' The name of the chief whom Nastasenen overthrew is written in the inscription Ka-m- ba-sa-u-t-n-? Brugsch transcribed these signs by Kambi .... uten, the fourth character being to him illegible, hut Dr. Schaefer, after an minat itself, identified it as ^ sa. and there is no i doubt about the correctness of his reading. The last sign may be ®, the determinative of "city," and H$, the last character of all, proves that the preceding characters are intended to form tin: name of the chief against whom Xastasenen fought. When .///ld mentioned prove that some of these 3 lay along the countries on the Blue Nile, and the great mimi Lttle suggest that the king raided so far south as Dar Fur and perhaps Korddfan also. It is quite clear that when Nastasenen had raided a country he left it a wilderness, and in much the same state as the Sudan was in on the death of the Khalifa in November, r&jo. Cattle, women, and gold were the three this 1 by the Nubian king five hundred years before Christ, and it is interesting to note how closely his views on this matter resembled those of Muhammad Ali, twenty-four centuries later ! The gifts which Nastasenen made to Amen were on a large- 1 faet which provesthat he was merely the instrument of the ind his frequent laudations of Amen suggest that he was a narrow-minded and fanatical adherent of this god, and remind us of the frequent references to the mercy and power of Allah with which the Mahdi and Khalifa interspersed their clamations. Fie was prudent in his benefactions, and ' Ltion, at his own expense, of the temple property which had been stolen from Amen Pa-( Km-Aten and from the goddi iiert. in the Fourth Cataract, was clearly due to motives which wer< ligious than political. xiption of Nastasenen is a most interesting document, dlustrat- of conquest which was followed by a - probably an usurper, and of pure Sudani origin. 1 ally it i- ;rst importance, as may be seen from STELE OF NASTASENEN the excellent monograph which Dr. Schaefer has devoted to it. x\s a genuine Sudani historical composition its value is very high, and a rendering of it in full is therefore given here. Inscription of Nastasenen. The ninth day of the first month of the season Pert, in the eighth year under Horus, the Mighty Bull, beloved of the company of the gods, who hath risen in Nepita, lord of the shrine of Nekhebet, lord of the shrine of Uatchet,1 the son of Ra, (Nastasenen), Horus, the Bull who trampleth those who rebel against him beneath his sandals, the great and tearing Lion, who stablisheth all the two lands, the son of Amen, whose thighs are great, who maketh broad every part of the two lands, the son of the gods, the most mighty one who is adored by all the two lands and the gods, who comprehendeth all knowledge like Thoth, who marcheth with long steps, who buildeth the house (?) of all the two lands like unto the god Pet (Ptah?), who provideth the means of living for every one like unto Amen, the son of Isis, the most might}' one, whose birth the gods decided to bring about, the protector of the two lands, the son of Ra ( Nastasenen I, the son of Amen, who hath been proclaimed blessed in heaven . I would have you to know that the king of the South and North, ( Ankh-ka-Ra , the son of Ra, the lord of the two lands, ( Nastasenen ]L who liveth for ever, speaketh, saying : When I was a good boy in the city of Beruat (Meroti), Amen of Napata, my good Father, called to me, saying, " Come." Then I cried unto the members of the royal family throughout all the city of Beruat, and I said unto them, "Arise ye, and come with " me and let us search out for us a judge for our " And they said, " We will not go with thee. Thou art his good child, " and Amen of Napata, thy good Father, loveth thee." At dawn on the following day I set out on my journey, and I arrived at the city of Astersat,-' and I slept there, for there was my home(?). And I heard those who were journeying from Napata say : " He is in the city (?) of all lands." I set out on the morning of the second day, and I arrived at Ta-hehet (?), which is the great lion, the vineyard wherein king ( P-ankhi-Aluru. J, grew. And as my hand was stretched out (?) straightway to benefit (?) and to the temple of Amen, there came unto me all the men from the temple of Amen of Napata and from the Or, " lord of the vulture crown, lord of the uraeus crown." & I©* vol. ii. 97 H i THE EGYFllAN SUDAN towns, and tli I (i.e., rich) men. and they spake unto Napata, thy good Father, hath set reignty of the Land [of Kenset]." And all the men -aid: " When Will lie land? " Then I spake unto them, sayii von down the river, and I entreat you to make an ■iit with my good Father, Amen of Napata, on my behalf; >ne, and prostrate urselves before Amen o( P.ita.'* Then I set <>nt and went down to the quay, and crossed over the river to the House of Ra, and I mounted a large horse and arrived at the Great House. And all the great men and the rits of the god Amen prostrated themselves before me, and , mouth declared my praises. And I went up and opened the great doors, and I performed the ceremonies which it was my duty to perform, and the good nobles [brought me] to the Golden Apt (or, Golden Temple). I told Amen of Napata. my good Father, everything which was in my heart, and Amen of Napata hearkened unto [the words of] my mouth. And Amen of Napata. my good Father, gave unto me tin- sovereignty of Ta-Kenset, and the crown of king Mleru-sa-atef J. and the strength of kin^ (p-ankhi-Aluru]|. day of the third month of the season Shat. 1 od Father, Amen of Napata, to rise, and he came forth from the < rreat I louse, and he made me to be king ov< \lut.! and the Nine Tribes who fight with bows, and the country on both sides of the river, and the Four Quarters of th<' world. Then I spake my fair words unto Ra, and unto Amen I spake, saying: "It is thou thyself who hast wrought "this thing for me, and all lands and all people have heard tiing it. Thou didst call me from the city of Berual . and I have come doing thy bidding, and thou hast laid " before me the sovereignty of Ta-Kenset. It was not men who " made me king on that twenty-fourth day. whereon thou didst - unto me the sovereignty [of Ta-Kenset]." And there were men ofp ! men who were destitute, of every kind on the \ad I danced with joy before Ra, and I came to the ifices were made, and I took two oxen and slew , and 1 went up and sat upon the Golden Throne, in the Golden Apt. in the shade, on this day. And all men spak . ng: "He shall make all things to prosper, Amen of Napala " hath given unto him thi ignty, with life, strength, and 1 (J QA ^, i -c, Alwah, the capital of which was Sdba. ["his city ed on the right bank of the Blue Nile, about ten miles above • an. the wealthy and the poor. or. gentle and simple, were there. STELE OF NASTASENEN "health, over Ta-Kenset. The son of Ra ( Nastasenen ]. " hath gone up and taken his seat on the Golden Throne in the " shade on this day. He shall reign as king, and shall sit and " abide in Beruat." On the twelfth day of the first month of the season Sha, I set out and went down the river to Amen of Pa-Qem,1 my good Father, and I caused Amen of Pa-Qem to rise and to come forth from the Great House, and I spake my fair words with him [and] with Ra. And he gave unto me the sovereignty of Ta-Kenset, and of the country on each side of the river, and of the Nine Peoples who light with the bow, and his own mighty bow. And he said unto me the same words which Amen of Napata, my gracious Father, had said unto me, and I went up and took my seat upon the Golden Throne. Then I went to Amen of Pa-Nebes,2 my good Father, and he came from the Great House and gave unto me the sovereignty of Ta-Kenset, and his own leather-covered club (?), and I spake the fair words which I had to say to Ra, and I went up and sat upon the Golden Throne. Then I came up [the river] to Amen of Napata, my good Father. And on the nineteenth day of the second month of the season of Pert, I caused Amen of Napata to rise, and he came forth from the Great House. And I spake fair words"' to Ra, and I repeated to him all the favourable words which Amen of Pa- Qem, and Amen of Pa-Nebes, and all the gods had spoken unto me. And I danced with joy. Then I came to the places where sacrifices were mad3, and I took two oxen and slew them. And I went down into the tchaut chamber, and I lay down therein for four nights, and for four days I performed .... of every kind. Then I went up out of the chamber and came to the place where sacrifices were made, and I took two oxen and slew them, and then I went into the temple, and I seated myself upon the throne which is in the house of the Golden Garden (?). On the twenty-fourth day of the month I went up to Bast, who dwelleth in Hert,4 my good Mother, and she gave me life, and great age, and happiness, and her left breast, placing me in her bosom of beautiful life, and she gave unto me her strong club (?). Then I came [back] to Napata, and on the twenty-ninth day I caused to rise Amen of Napata, and he gave unto me all the 1 A place which was probably situated near Suwarda. " The nvovyjs of Ptolemy, to the south of Wadi Haifa. 3 I.e., words of an auspicious character. 4 A town two or three days' journey above Napata. It was probably situated near the modern town of Berti, about half-way between Merawi and Abu Hamed. 99 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN fens, and all the lands, and all the rivers, and all peoples. And I went up and seated myself upon the Golden Throne. ledicated unto thee four gardens, O Amen of Napata, in the city of Napata, whereto were attached thirty-six men. And I unto thee three large copper kalulu vessels full of incense, and f<»ur large kalulu vessels full of honey, and three [packets] of nnti spice; one figure of Amen of Pa-qem-Aten, of gold, and two figures of Horus [weighing in all] three feden; three silver mesfi Is, three katcha vessels of silver, and seven dpet vessels of silver, making in all thirteen vessels, and [weighing] i^tebcn; two large copper bowls, thirteen copper skimming pans for milk, opper vessels for beer, six copper buckets (?), twelve copper kas vessels, and six copper incsti vessels. And on the last day of the first month of the season Shemu I dedicated unto thee, Amen in Apt, two young oxen and two full grown, in all four oxen, two heifers and two full grown, in all four cows : one young ox (?) and one full grown, in all two oxen : ... en khirurteba vessels in copper, two tekht vessels in copper, ten red vessels in copper, two batcha vessels in copper, two dpet vessels in copper. The chief Kambasuten came, and I made my bowmen to advance against him from the city Tchart. There was a great ; or slaughter) : [I captured] all his weapons (?), and I made myself master of all the boats oi his captains, and I routed and threw him. I seized all his lands, and .all his oxen, cows, calves, and animals of every kind, and everything whereon men live, from the city of Kartept to the city of Taruti-peht 'I ity of Tarumen twelve sacred bulls of those which given] to Amen of Napata, and they were brought down from On the twenty-sixth day of the fourth month of the season Shat on the birthday of the son of Ra ( Nastasenen J, I gave to the ksaktit six bulls of the property of Amen of Napata, my 'her, and they came down the river from Napata. On the last day of the fourth month of the season Sha, which is the day V rown was given to the son of Ra ( Nastasenen J, 1 Amen of Napata, twelve breast -plates (or I, and th ?) and green herbs (?) from the city of Kartept i ;«t. I dedicated to thee, O Amen of Napata, 1 Father, a lamp in Taqtetet, and of the spoil which I ired I brought to thee three hundred oxen, and three hundred and calves, and two hundred men. O Amen of Napata, thy ntence of which it is difficult to make connected sense. • rendering is by Dr. Schaefer (o/>. <•//., p. 121), who trans- den Wurmen (?) das. worm YYunden waren, das, wovon ' >chen leben konnten, liess ich am Leben . . . . " 100 STELE OF NASTASENEN two thighs and thine excellent, overwhelming might brought these things to pass. I gave thee, O Amen of Napata one hundred and ten women. Moreover, I caused my bowmen to set out on an expedition against the rebels of the country of Mekhenteqnent,1 and I fought against them, and I inflicted great slaughter upon them, and I took prisoner their Chief Aikhentkat (?).2 And I captured all the women, all the cattle, a large quantity of gold, 209,659 oxen, 505,349 cows, calves, and sheep, 2,236 women, and 322 aqit* of the city of Katartit. I left for the .... [to eat] whatsoever the land on both sides of the river produced for food. I dedicated unto thee, O Amen of Napata, a lamp in Katartit, and twelve dqit. I dedicated unto thee two massive copper lamp standards, and I set them up in the city of Uast O Amen of Napata, my good Father, I dedicated unto thee six breast-plates (or, pectorals) in the city of Katartit, and I opened the Temple of the Gold Bull, whose form (?) is that of Amen of Napata, my good Father. Moreover I caused my bowmen to set out on an expedition against the rebels of the land of Rebarut 4 and the land of Akar- karhent (?),5 and I defeated them with great slaughter. I took prisoner their Chief Rebkhentent,0 and [I captured] all his gold, the quantity whereof was so great that it could not be told, and 203,216 bulls and oxen, and 603,107 cows, calves and sheep, and all the women, and everything which men could eat for food. I gave the Chief to Amen of Napata, my good Father. [O Amen of Napata], thy thigh is mighty, and thy wisdom is good. Moreover I caused many threatenings to go against the rebel land of Arersat,7 and I defeated [the people thereof] with great slaughter. I took prisoner Abskhent (?)8 the Chief of the country of Mashat,9 and I captured all the women, and all the cattle, and 1,212 teben of gold, and 22,120 oxen and bulls, and all the women, and 55,200 cows and calves, and I gave the Chief and all his property to Amen of Napata, my good Father. [O Amen of Napata], thy name is great and good, and thy overwhelming power is good. 3 Objects made of one of the precious metals, gold or silver? Perhaps figures of sacred animals or gods. loll" i 21' I <=^> <=> I I 1iJ7T!V °> 101 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Moreover I made my bowmen set out on an expedition against the rebel land of Mekhsherkherthet,1 and I defeated the people thereof with great slaughter. I took the Chief thereof prisoner, and captured all the food of man in the country, and all the en. And I seized for my own share 203,146 oxen and bulls. :m(l 33»°5° cows, calves and sheep. O Amen of Napata, my good Father, thy thigh is strong, and thy name is great and beautiful. Moreover I made very many threatenings to go forth against the rebel country of Maikhentkat (?).■ and the rebels attacked me at the sycamore tree of Sarsart ;:; I did battle with them there, and I defeated them with great slaughter. I took prisoner their Chief I amakhitlit't,1 and I captured all his women, and all his cattle, and 2,000 teben of gold, and ^5,330 oxen and bulls, and 5 5 , 5 _* ^ > cows. calves and sheep, and everything which men eat for food Amen of Napata, my good Father, hath given unto me all lands, his thigh is mighty, his power is good, his name is great and beautiful, like the heavens. Amen of Napata, my good Father, hath done [these things for me]. Moreover, certain things which had been dedicated as votive offerings to the temple of Pa-Qem Aten by the King, life, strength, health! fAspeltal, had been carried off (i.e., stolen). There- upon many urgent appeals went forth to the finest of my soldiers [for the restoration of the property which had been dedicated by the King, life, strength, health! [Aspeltaj], and for the punishment of the enemy who belonged to the Meti country, [but the property could not be recovered]. Then they took sonic of my own treasure to replace it. It was Amen of Napata, my g Father, who gave it to me, and I gave it [back] to Amen of Pa-Qem Aten, my good Father. Then Amen of Pa-Qem-Aten, my Father, said unto me : " I give thee my bow, wherein are strength "and might, and I will make all thine enemies to be prisoners " beneath thy sandals." And moreover, the enemies in theMetit country5 stole some of the lire which belonged to the goddess Bast, of the city of Thert,'' which had been dedicated by king (Aspeltaj. Then there came sonic of my own treasure which I dedicated to the goddess . who dwelleth in the city of Thert, my good Mother. And she gave unto me a great and beautiful flower-shaped sceptre, V I STELE OF NASTASENEN a good long life extending into an advanced old age, and her might, and she said unto me : "This shall be thy protection, and thy renewing of power (?) " Amen of Napata, my good Father, made [the treasure] for me, he made my wealth abundant {or good), his thigh is strong. Verily, O Amen of Napata, my good Father, the things which thou utterest with thy mouth cannot come to nought ; and verily, when thou closest thy mouth no man hath the wherewithal to feed himself beneath the heavens. NATIVE BOATS ON 103 CHAPTER VIII. THE slOAX IN THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD. . 517, i.e., about the time when Darius the Great came to Egypt, and nothing is known about his successor. We may assume that at his death the throne reverted to some ndant of the legitimate kings of Napata, who probably took Up his abode there, and appointed a governor to rule over the Island of Meroe. From Egypt the kingdom of Napata had nothingto fear, for Darius was wholly occupied in developing her trees, and rendering the country prosperous. He honoured the Egyptian gods, and studied the- religious works which treated of them, and finally he came to be regarded as the sixth of the great lawgivers which the country had produced. Egypt, with Libya, Cyrene, and Barce, formed the sixth of the twenty satrapies into which he divided his kingdom, and it paid to him - hundred talents of gold as its annual tribute, besides a heavy tax on the fisheri Lake Moeris, and sufficient corn for the maintenance of 120,000 men at Memphis.1 The gold which the tians paid to Darius came no doubt from the mines in the D from Wadi 'Ulaki, where it was probably tied by an arrangement made with the Nubians who lived south suit of the peaceful policy pursued by caravans nabled to travel in safety from the Sudan to Egypt, and their owners did a thriving business in iry, ebony. &c. The Persians were fond of ribing Darius as a "huckster," saying that "he looked to making a gain in everything," ' and it was not long before he I the advantages which accrued to the Nubians from his rule. 1 Herodoti - Ibid., 89. 104 HERODOTUS ON THE SUDAN He then, according to Herodotus, made the " Ethiopians" bordering upon Egypt, who were reduced by Cambyses when he made war on the long-lived Ethiopians, and the Calantian Indians, bring every third year two schoenices of virgin gold, two hundred logs of ebony, five Ethiopian boys, and twenty elephant tusks. Herodotus adds that these gifts were paid to the Persians down to his own time. A little consideration shows us, however, that the " Ethiopians " who sent these gifts were probably those who lived between Philae and Korosko, or Derr ; in other words, they belonged to that portion of Northern Nubia which the Egyptians had for centuries regarded as a portion of their Empire. If they were not, they must have been the chiefs of caravans who gave a fixed quantity of gold, &c, to the Government officials of the chief towns on their route for the privilege of bringing their wares into the markets. One hundred years ago the governor of Asyiit who levied heavy tax upon the caravans from Dar Fur and Kordofan might, in the same way as Darius, have claimed the overlordship of these countries, because he made the merchants who traded in products from them pay import duties. The Persians had never any authority over the Nile Valley south of Wadi Haifa, and it is doubtful if the Island of Meroe was to them any more than a name. The information about the Sudan collected by Herodotus is, on the whole, very good. He 'first says (ii. 29) that beyond Elephantine the land rises, and that it is necessary to tie a rope to the boat on each side ; if the rope snaps, the vessel is borne down stream by the force of the current. After four days, the distance travelled is, he says, twelve schoenes, and then a plain is reached, and also the Island of Tachompsos, round which the Nile flows in two branches. Half this island is occupied by the " Ethiopians," who live south of Elephantine, and the other half by Egyptians. Beyond the Island is a lake, on the shores of which live nomad " Ethiopians," and when this is passed, the Nile is again reached. Here the traveller lands, and he must journey along the banks of the river for forty days, since it is impossible to proceed further in a boat on account of the sharp rocks which jut out from the water, and the sunken rocks which abound in that 1 Herodotus, i ii - 97. 105 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN part of the stream. At the end of this time he takes boat again, and after twelve days more arrives at a great city called Meroe, " which is said to be the capital of the other ' Ethiopians.' "' The only gods worshipped by the inhabitants are Jupiter (i.e., Amen- chus (i.e., Osiris), to whom ,^rreat honours are paid. There is an oracle of Jupiter In the city, which directs the warlike the " Ethiopians " ; ' when it commands they go to war. and in whichever direction it bids them march, thither straightway they carry their arms. Going onward, after the same number of days which it took the traveller to reach Meroe from bantine, the traveller reaches the " Automoli," or"Asmakh" (see above, p. 54), who are the descendants of the Egyptians of the warrior caste, who went over to the "Ethiopians" in the reign of Psammetichus (I.), to the number of two hundred and forty thousand men, because they had not been relieved of their garrison duty for three years. From this statement it is clear that Herodotus placed the " Automoli," or "Deserters" (the "Sembritae" of Strabo) in a country on the White Nile four months' journey south of Elephantine, i.e., some hundreds of miles south of Khartum, and he, no doubt, refers to the tribes who not negroes, and whose skins were not black, that lived in and about the modern kingdom of Sennaar. His statement about the river flowing from west to east is to me inexplicable, but when on to say that beyond this point "no one has any "knowledge of it- source, since the country is uninhabited by -on ^( th< it seems that he must be alluding to the Swamps about the Hahr al Cdia/;'d. information which the Ichthyophagi brought back to Cambyses has already been described (see above, p. go), and we may ; therefore to the statement of Herodotus (ii. 104) about circumcision. He says that the Colchians, Egyptians, and "Ethiopians" are the only nations who have practised circumcision from the earliest times, but he could not make out whether the "Ethiopians" learned the practice from the ptians, or the Egyptians from the "Ethiopians." In any -. it is undoubtedly of very ancient date in itement is found in the Stele of Nastasenen, wherein it is Lmen if he should go on a certain war, or not. HERODOTUS ON THE SUDAN "Ethiopia." As to the clothing of the " Ethiopians " he says (vii. 69) that they wore skins of leopards and lions, and that they were armed with palm-stem bows, four cubits long ; the arrows were short and tipped, not with iron, but with a stone. Their spears were tipped with the horns of antelopes, and they had knotted clubs. When they went into battle they painted their bodies half with chalk and half with vermilion. The monuments prove the truth of all these statements except the last, and if we had reliefs with coloured battle scenes upon them, we should probably find it to be true also. Herodotus divided (vii. 70) the " Ethiopians" into two classes, " Eastern," and " Western," the sOdan elefhant. [From Lepsius, Dtnkm'dler, Abth. V. Bl. 75. languages and hair of each being different ; the former had straight hair, and the latter woolly hair. From this we see that Herodotus calls the negro tribes to the west of the White Nile "Western Ethiopians," and the light or red-skinned tribes of the Eastern Desert and Blue Nile " Eastern Ethiopians." He adds the interesting information that the " Eastern Ethiopians " wore upon their heads the scalps of horses, with the ears and mane attached ; the ears were made to stand upright, and the mane served as a crest. For shields this people made use of the skins of cranes. Finally, he says (iii. 114), where the south declines towards the setting sun, lies the country called Ethiopia, the last inhabited land in that direction. There gold is obtained in great plenty, huge elephants abound, and wild trees of all sorts, and ebony ; and the men are taller, handsomer, 107 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and longer-lived than anywhere else. Herodotus here un- doubtedh to the countries on the Blue Nile, and his information as to their products is correct. From h.c. 517 to the beginning of the Ptolemaic Period nothing is known of the Sudan cither from native or Egyptian sources, and even the world-conqueror. Alexander the Great, left that country uninvaded. Greek writers of historical romances about Alexander and his exploits, e.g., Pseudo-Callisthenes, were ■ 1 make their hero master of every country in the known world, and thus we find in their works impossible narratives of his travels into China and the remotest regions of India. Pseudo- Callisthenes in his book (iii. 18) introduces an account of a fabulous visit of Alexander to Queen Candace, who is described descendant of Seniiramis, and declared to have possessed wondrous beauty. To her Alexander is made to write a letter in which, after referring to the graves and houses in her land, and her worship of the god Amen, he invited her to meet him at the boundary of her territory so that they might worship Amen ther. To this "Candace, Queen of Meroii," replied that Amen, by means of an oracle, has forbidden his image to be id, that no one is to enter her country, and if he does he will be treated as an enemy. Alexander is not to think scorn because her people are dark-coloured, for they arc whiter in soul than the white folk who are with him. Her tribes are eight}- in number, and they arc ready to punish any who attack them. She approves of his worship of Amen, and she sends him by her ambassadors bars of gold, 500 Ethiopian maidens, 200 parrots, 200 sphinxes, and for Amen on the borders of Egypt, a crown set with emeralds and impicrced pearls, and 10 string pearls, and Besides these things she gave him 308 elephants, 300 1< 13 rhinoceroses, 4 panthers, 300 man-eating dogs, "ghting hulls, 6 elephants' tusks, 300 panther-skins, and 1500 ebony rods, and told him to send men to fetch them away. The ider in the country of Candace do not nd for further information about them Mailer's llent edition of the (.reck text of Pseudo-Callisthenes may be :. Ih- writer of the story given above was ignorant of lion of Candace's kingdom, but the alleged visit to THE PTOLEMIES the queen by Alexander was capable of treatment which he knew would appeal to his readers, and historical accuracy was therefore disregarded by him. Under the Ptolemies an attempt seems to have been made to bring the Sudan and Egypt into relations which should be closer than those existing as a result of the passage to and fro of trading caravans. Ptolemy I. made no expedition into Nubia, but it seems that the terror of his arms was carried into surrounding countries by Eumachus. This general inflicted a great defeat on the Numidians, and then, Diodorus says (xx 58 ff.) he made an expedition into " higher Africa." He passed over a high mountain two hundred stadia in length, which was full of cats. He next entered a country abounding in apes, and came to three cities called Pithecussae ; here the apes lived in the houses and were worshipped as gods by the natives, and children were called after their names. Eumachus took one of the three cities by storm, and razed it to the ground, and the other two capitulated. He went no further, however, for, hearing that the barbarians were gathering preparatory to coming against him in a large body, he retreated to the sea. It is impossible to identify the region to which Eumachus marched, but it was situated, clearly, in some portion of the Sudan where apes abounded. Ptolemy II. (b.c. 283-247) was on friendly terms with Ergamenes the king of Nubia, who, according to Diodorus (iii. 6), had been bred up in the Grecian discipline and philosophy ;' whether this Ergamenes is the same as the Arq-Amen who was a contemporary of Ptolemy IV. and Ptolemy V. is somewhat un- certain. The friend of Ptolemy II. set a precedent in the history of his country which is noteworthy. Diodorus tells us that the priests at Meroe, i.e., the priests of Amen, who held the greatest possible power, had been, up to that time, accustomed to send whensoever they pleased a messenger to the king commanding him to put himself to death. They supported such commands with the statement that they were the will of the gods, and that it was unlawful to disregard them. The kings of Napata, who always held their authority from the priests, usually obeyed the orders of the priests, and so killed themselves, believing that 1 /xere a xr]Kdos ^Wtjvlktjs ('ywy^r ko.1 % J\ (\ no PTOLEMY II. The principal towns in it were : Parembole, the modern Dabud ; Taphis, with Contra Taphis, the modern Tafa ; Talmis, with Contra-Talmis, the modern Kalabsha ; Tutzis, the modern Garf Husen ; Pselcis, the modern Dakka ; Contra-Pselcis, the modern Kubban ; Tachompso, the modern Kurta ; Hiera- sykaminos, the modern Miharraka. The last-named town marked the southern limit of the Dodekaschoinos.1 As already said, Ptolemy II. made one expedition into the Sudan by the route which had been followed by the kings of Egypt for centuries, but he took steps to develop the trade between Egypt and the seaports nearest the South Sudan. From the " Stele of Pithom," which was discovered by Prof. Naville a in 1884, we learn that Ptolemy sent a fleet of ships to the southern land of Khemthithet,3 and to the " borders of the land of the Blacks,"4 and that his general brought back the things which were " beloved of the king and royal wife Arsinoe." He also tapped the supplies of the Eastern Desert by founding the city of Ptolemais Epitheras, which cannot have been far from the modern Sawakin. From the country to the south of this city his officers brought large numbers of elephants which were shipped to Egypt, and the writer of the text is no doubt correct in saying that "the like of this was never before done for any " king in all the earth " In the last line on the stele Ptolemy is said to have Egypt in his grasp, and all the southern lands bow 1 The district between the southern end of the Island of Meroe and Philae was dixided into thirteen portions, thus : 1. Pehqennes ^aammM* 2. Marauat I) J£s& l\-je) (Meroe)- 3. Napt~wwv (I (Napata). 4. Peten-Hert V\ #.. 5. Pa-Nebes >£< J f] ©. 6. Ta- Uatchet ^^^Sh m- 7- Behent J ' LJ (Wadi Haifa). 8. Atefthit 1 «L ) 11 ©-^ NEHiu 7d °f a^ Egypt. His rule appears to have lasted 1=1 ^ about twenty-five years, and we may be sure that he gave all the assistance in his power to the rebels in Upper Egypt. His successor, Atchakhar-Amen, with even greater boldness, built his temple at Parembole, some ten or fifteen miles only from the Egyptian frontier. When Ptolemy V. succeeded in suppressing the rebellion, he took steps to reassert his authority in the Dodekaschoinos, and he appears to have succeeded. At all events, we hear no more of Nubian " kings of the South and North " in the Ptolemaic Period. We have now to consider briefly the extent of the Meroitic Kingdom between B.C. 200 and the end of the second or third century after Christ, and to enumerate the names of the kings who probably reigned during this interval, and the towns, temples, and pyramid-tombs which they left behind them. The two ii5 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN tich power as the Meroitic kings and the queen- moth i at this time were Meroe and Napata ; their si town to the south was Sdba, on the Blue Nile, and their frontier town on the north was probably near the modern village of 'Amara, which stands on the Nile, a few miles above it is important to note that the kings of pure Sudani stock never employed the ancient forts of the great Egyptian kings of the Xllth, XVIIIth, and XlXth Dynasties as places of defence, though it is probable that they made use of them as quarri r natural situations for fortresses than Senma and Kiimma could be found in the Sudan, yet the only Nubian king who built at either place was Taharqa, who temple i.> his great predecessor Usertsen III. at Sen ma. The principal sites chosen by the pure Sudani kings of the Meroitic Kingdom on which to build temples are: — i. 'Am aha. which lies on the east bank of the Nile, about [30 miles from Wadi Haifa. 2. Napata, on the west hank of the Nile, 648 miles from Wadi Haifa. Down-stream of this place are the pyramid fields nk&sf, Kurru, and Zuma : up-stream is the pyramid field of Nuri, or Belal, and opposite to it is the group of pyramids at I Barkal. 3. MeroB, on the east bank, 877 from Wadi Haifa by river, and 554 miles by the route across the Haifa-Abu l.lamed Desert. To the south and east of the city ruins are four pyramid fields; they lie near the villages of Sur and Malaga. 4. W Nagaa, twenty-four miles south of Shendi. At the in end of the khor, from seventeen to twenty miles to the 'die ruins of several temples, and about fifteen miles to the north, at Masawwarat as-!§ufra, are also the ruins of several temples. 5. Soba, on the right bank of the Blue Nile, a few- miles from Khartum. From the ruins of the temples and pyramids at these places Lepsius collected the cartouches 1 kings and several queen-mothers of the Meroitic Kingdom, but they, of course, only represent a small proportion of the number of kings and queens who reigned between B.C. and the downfall of the kingdom. It will be convenient ve these cartouches here, but no correctness is claimed for the order in which they are plac tt6 KINGS OF THE SUDAN i. The Queen-Mother Katimar, or Katimal Jj ^.x Her name was found at Napata. 2. Amen-taui-kalbath H^iiiiiii ^-^!fo? Her name was found at Meroe. O D <2>- I fiC iHg. The lady of the two lands, Amen-Arit, the lady, maker of things, Kentha-Hebit. Her pyramid-tomb2 is near Meroe (Northern Group, No. i). This name was first read " Kentakit," and was thought to be the original form of the name Candace, but it is clear that the fifth sign in the second cartouche is <^§~7 heb, not ^z^* k. g^CEiiiaioGlSj " The lord of the two lands, Ankh-ka-Ra,3 priest of the second " order, Arkenkherel." In the second cartouche he styles himself " Priest of the second order of Osiris, the lord of the South." His pyramid-tomb is near Meroe (Northern Group, No. 5). raj A BH^- NEHARQ — .... NENTENI, tomb is at Meroe. beloved of Mut. His pyramid- ,Q mA B-](;pH1Cf?j r The Queen Kenrethreqnen-m (?) Ser . . . tinen-m (?). He pyramid-tomb5 is near Meroe (Southern Group, No 4). short form of the first name is Kenreth. In the inscriptions on the chapel walls two other cartouches are found, viz, Perui, or Peru. fJ»®K^»«]»™dK^T 1 See Lepsius, Kbnigsbuch, No. 939. 2 Lepsius, Denkmdler, Abth. v., Bl. 47. 4 See Lepsius, Kojiigsbuch, No. 945. 5 See Lepsius, Denkmaler, Abth. v. Bl. 52 117 EE3- Ibid., Bl. 43. THE EGYPTIAN SFDAN Khni-.m ai:-K\,' son of Ri, Amen-Ark-NEB (?). His pyramid- tomb is near Nferoe (Southern Group, No. 6). Kakka. <>r Kalka, and Kakteka, or KaltelA. Both these names- are found on a pyramid-tomb near Meroe (Southern Group, No. 10). AnKH-NEFER-AB-RI, son of Ra, lord of crowns, AsRU*8 Men Amen. His name is found on one of the two granite lions which Lord Prudhoe brought from Gebel Barkal, and presented to the British Museum (No. 34). The pyramid-tomb of this king is southern Group, No. 5). -UQTE11E3I- Aki-Amkn.1 the ever-living, the beloved of Isis. He ma}- be the Arq-Amen who was a contemporary of Ptolemy IV. (see above, Vol. II., p. 113), but it is unlikely. His pyramid-tomb is near Nferoe (Northern Group, No. 7). 12. SS3IP NfURTEK .... His name is found on the walls of the chapel of No. 14. *i®](CS] Kheper-KA-Ra NeteK-Amen.' The name of this king is found at Gebel Barkal, Wad Ba Nagaa, and Meroii (Northern 1 See Lepsius, Daikmulcr, Abth. v., Bl. 55. '-' Ibid., 55. 3 Md* Bi * Ibid., Bl. 36. 5 Ibid., Bl. 25; Konigsbuch, Nos. 963,981. KINGS OF THE SUDAN 14 •0 /www 22;%; Amen akha1 ab-en 15- oSS . (Northern Group, No. 4). inuiijii r^n Amen-khetashen 2 (Northern Group, No. 18). 16. S3 I lS, .\nkii-k.\-Ka Ark-atalal (?) His name appears at Nagaa.1 22. \> VsJ ZZJ[ ° e ' V -^ n aa^va i ! y ^ (J = — ^QQsl A.MEN-TARIT1 was the wife of Netek-Amen (No. 20), and her name is found at Wad Ba a, and 'A mar a ; it is clear that during her reign building operations were carried on at all these places, and that the Meroitic kingdom must have been in a state of great prosperity. The fact that she or her husband built a temple at 'Amara proves that the Nubian power in the Northern Sudan must have been great, and it is probable that this queen was the Candace who came in conflict with the Romans. *(«a?°} SHARKRAH, or SHALKLAL. This personage must have been a contemporary of Netek-Amen and the queen mentioned above, for his name occurs with theirs on the pillars of the temple of 'Amara. :; On temple A at Nagaa are also found the following names : 24- iQ ■=« rll ■9 a Da N ASS J Q . a Da _2s&^J < J5- Km« ( 11: 4>- 3¥P-^];' "( |ZXi 1 j?-C > naaQ y 1 Lepsius, Dekkmhlet 1 Ibid.. Bll. 59, 60. , Bl. 66. ■ Ibid., Bl 55. 57, 69 56. *• Ibid., Bl. 69. Bl. 62. KINGS OF THE SUDAN 28. Shankpitah (?) ^gg^M^y^EriT)! This name occurs at Nagaa, Temple F. issH)7:*i(nz5)= PORTRAIT OF THE'mEROITIC SOVEREIGN, RA-MER-KA AMEN-TARIT. [Drawn from Lepsius, Denkvi'dlcr, Abth. III. Bl. 304. It now remains to enumerate the principal ruins in the Sudan which belong to this period. The most northerly of these is a 1 Lepsius, Denkmiiler, Bl. 68. 121 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN temple at 'Amara, on the right bank of the Nile, a few miles above Kosha, When complete it probably consisted of two chambers, each wider than it was long, with a court containing from six to ten pillars. At the time when Lepsius had his plan made.1 it was only possible to trace the walls of the sanctuary chamber, and only six of the columns were standing. The columns are deeorated with scenes wherein a king, a queen, and a prince arc represented in the act of making offerings to Khnemu, Amen-Ra, Isis, Sekbet (?) Osiris, Thoth, Menu, and : NIK h:\iiik BUILT r.v \ MER< BANK OF THE NILE NEAR 'AMARA. [Fro;: 'ikmiiler, Abth. I. HI. 114. other deities <>f the Cataract country. The scenes on each column are divided by horizontal rows of stars, and by perpen- dicular rows of hieroglyphics, each containing three car- touches, consisting presumably of dedications to the gods. 1 he cartouches are identical with those- found at Wad Bfi Nagaa, Nagaa, and they prove that this temple was built by Netek- Amen and his queen Amen-tarit. probably about r>.< . 30. ( )f the temples which existed at Meroe, on the island of the same name, very little can be said, for their remains are 1 Lepsius, Denkmaler, Abth. i.. Bl. [15. 122 TEMPLE OF AMARA extremely scanty. From the plan published by Lepsius ' we see that this scholar was able to trace the walls which surrounded a space containing the remains of three or four temples (c, d, e), and that to the north and east of the enclosure he found ruins of six or seven other small temples. To the south of these may be i^~ 10 Metres PLAN OF THE TEMPLE OF 'AMARA. [From Lepsius, Denkm'dler, Abth. I. Bl 115. traced another rectangular enclosure,2 which had a doorway in the centre of its east and west sides. The temple itself was rect- angular, and was entered through a doorway with pylons; inside was a rectangular chamber, entered on the east side,which probably was used as a sanctuary, and contained the shrine of the god. A passage ran round all four sides of this chamber. The temple 1 De?ikmaler, i., Bl. 132. 2 Ibid., i., Bl. 133. 123 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN was approached by a flight of steps. Immediately in a line with the doorway of the temple are the remains of two small buildings, also oriented to the east, and to the south-east may be traced the outline of the edge of a large reservoir. This reservoir was probably an appanage of the temple, and the revenues which the priests derived from the sale of the water in it from passing caravans . no doubt, devoted to the support of their god and themselves. ssing southwards to Wad Ba Nagaa, there may still be seen in the so-called Wadi Al-Kirbikan a number of mounds of bricks, •LUMNS OF A TBMPLE AT WAD BA NAGAA. [From Lepsius, Dtnkm<r, Al>tb. I. HI. 139. ruins of columns, &c, which mark the site of a once flourishing town. W'lun. or by whom this town was founded is unknown, but a settlement of considerable size existed here in the XYIIIth Dynasty, for a kneeling statue of king Amen-hetep II. was dis- covered among the ruins,1 a fact that seems to prove conclusively that he made offerings in a temple which, even at that period, had stood for some time on the site. The most important remains of buildings which were seen there by Cailliaud 2 con- I of the ruins of two temples; the larger temple contained a number of rectangular pillars, ornamented with sculptured 1 See above, p. 602. 5 See Voyage d Merov, pll. 9, 10. 124 TEMPLE AT WAD BA NAGAA figures of the god Bes, surmounted by heads of the goddess Hathor in relief. Two of these pillars were in a tolerably good PORTRAIT OF THE MEROITIC KING NETEK-AMEN, BUILDER OF A TEMPLE AT WAD BA NAGAA. [Drawn from Lepsius, Denkm'dler, Abth. III. BI. 304. state of preservation, even when the drawing of them published by Lepsius1 was made. Cailliaud, mistaking the god Bes for Typhon, called this temple the " Typhonium." The building'is 1 Denkmaler. i. 139. 125 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Like the two other temples on this site, to the south. The town represented by the ruins at Wad Ba Nagaa lay close to the river, and was clearly an important halting-place for caravans I BY LBPSIUS AT WAD HA NAGAA. on the road between towns on the Nile above the Third Cataract, and Abu Mara/ on the Blue Nile. After leaving the Nile, the first halting-place was Nagaa, the site of which lies up the khor at a distance of between seventeen and y miles ; here the route joined the main road which ran from NETEK-AMEN AND AMEN-TARIT Shendi to Abu Haraz. As the traveller journeys through the khor the ground rises, and when Gebel Nagaa is reached he sees all round him a fine open space dotted all over with the ruins of ancient Si^^KlHE QUEEN AMEN-TARIT. FROM AN ALTAR FOUND BY LEPSIUS AT WAD BA NAGAA. temples, large and small. To the east, on the gentle slope of a hill, are the remains of a large number of tombs, and it is probable that royal personages and notables were buried here. Beyond this, to the south, was an enormous reservoir, the greater part of the sides of which was formed of the living rock of two 127 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN conveniently placed hills; the gaps on the east and west sides filled up by artifical embankments, traces of which are still to be seen. At the south-east corner of the reservoir was a temple,1 which was oriented nearly south-east, and which stood 6 Metres n an OF A TEMPLE ai NAGAA (LBPSIUS, A). LUi, Dt*kmtili r, V ■'■',. I. Bl, 145. within an enclosure surrounded by a wall. A colonnade ran round the whole of the outside of the temple ; on the south-east side it of pillars. To the north-west of this temple are 1 Lepsius. plan (i. See Denkmaler, i., Bl. 143. # * / 7 0 y -9 C> * B ^ iV G / 20 40 Metres Ud O 3 1 *& £ 3 it" 3 ugr ' U i:::S:::g 100 80 60 40 30 0 ^ I I i i i I mwmmmM IP ''■/, mm AliillW 8KSft\i ioo Metres OUTLINE OK THE REMAINS OF THE TEMPLES AT NAGAA. [From Lepsius, Denkmdler, Abth. I. Bl. 143. VOL. II. TEMPLE OF AMEN-TAR1T the remains of another reservoir, and I was told by the natives that after the summer rains a considerable quantity of water remains in it for two months or more. An examination of the site shows that the ruins of some sixteen distinct buildings may be traced at Nagaa, but of most of them the remains are so scanty that is impossible to attempt to describe the plans of more than half a dozen. The best preserved of all of them is the important little temple ' which was built by one of the Candace queens called Amen-tarit (?) who flourished probably in the second or third century a.d. Her own name a and that of her consort 3 are mutilated, and there exists, unfortunately, no means of supplying the missing signs. This temple consists of a single chamber, about 45 feet long, and contained four columns, which supported the roof; it has, however, fallen in, and the greater part of each pillar is destroyed. The pylon is about 22 feet high ; the cornice is practically de- stroyed ; in front of the entrance through the pylon was a small rectangular portico. The doorway is ornamented with a cornice sculptured with uraei having disks on their heads, and with three winged disks, with pendent uraei, and closely resembles the sculptured shrines in the chapels of the Pyramids of Meroe. On the right facade is sculptured a colossal figure of a queen, wearing the characteristic Nubian head-dress, with uraei over the forehead. She wears a necklace of circular beads, to which is attached a pendant in the form of Amen ; her bracelets and armlets are deep and richly ornamented. Her neck and arms are bare, but she wears a belt with a sheath for a scabbard attached, and skirts elaborately decorated with feather work. With her right hand she grasps the hair of thirty prisoners, representatives of conquered nations, who kneel at her feet with their hands raised beseechingly. Her left hand holds a short sword, or dagger, and is raised aloft as if about to smite the prisoners. By her side is a raging lion engaged in clawing the vanquished men before him. Above her head is the vulture - 1 Called B by Cailliaud, and A by Lepsius (L, Bll. 144, 145). MiD- 'fieri °ii1- 131 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN HN WHO BUILT TEMPLE A AT KAGAA SLAUGHTERING ins | [From Lepsius, Dfnkmtltr, Abtb. V. Ul. 56. Mut, and beneath her feet are seven captives with their tied at the ,lh.»ws behind them; their bodies are in the n of jars. 132 TEMPLE OF AMEN-TARIT THE QUEEN WHO BUILT TEMPLE A AT NAGAA SLAUGHTERING HER FOES. ABOVE HER IS THE VULTURE-GODDESS MUT. [From Lepsius, Deiikmdler, Abth. V. Bl. 56. On the left facade is sculptured the figure of a king who is about to smite with his battle-axe a group of thirty rebels kneel- ing before him. Above his head is a hawk with outstretched 133 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN wings, and beneath his feet is a lion gnawing the dead body of an enemy ; in a lower register are seven captives as before. On the north wall, outside are sculptured eight colossal figures. The first is that of a king-consort, whose name is wanting ; he on rath hand a ring which covers the second joints of all four ringers, and his robe is ornamented with lions' winged heads. The second figure is that of queen ( %^ ^^ ^f >^ □□ R who - the crown of Isis. The Egyptian name of this queen is Amen-tarit, and she was the wife of Netek-Amen; her native name is found at 'Amara, and Wad Ba Nagaa. The sceptre which she holds in her right hand is noteworthy. The third figure is that of her husband, who wears the crown of Osiris. Before him stands Isis (?), who is presenting to him a group of captives. Behind her stand two gods and two goddesses, three of whom hold papyrus sceptres surmounted by symbols of " life." The first pair are probably Mut and Khensu, and the second Isis and Osiris. On the west wall are five large figures, the central one being that of a god, with three lions' heads and two pairs of outstretched hands and arms, and wearing the triple crown, with horns, uraei, disks, &c. In one of his right and one of his left hands he grasps a bunch of flowers. Three lions' heads are seen to form a very effective ornament above a lotus-pillar in a shrine of the time of Amen-hetep II., but what they symbolize is unknown. On his right stands king f^^$^^X]' Netek" Amen, who is clearly of negro origin, wearing an elaborate crown and ornaments, and behind him is another royal personage whose robe is decorated with symbols T , which are intended to represent ■¥-, "life." On the left of the god is Netek-Amen's n, Amen-tarit (?), and behind her is another royal attendant, wla-se name appears to be identical with that of the royal servant 1 Netek-Amen. Each figure wears two rings, with large n each hand, the south, as on the north wall, are sculptured eight es, three being those of royal personages, i.e., Netek-Amen, *34 TEMPLE OF AMEN-TARIT his queen, and a prince, and five deities. The king, queen and prince wear very large rings, and the queen's finger-nails are several inches long. The first deity has the head of a lioness, and is probably Bast ; she holds in one hand a lotus flower, and in the other the symbol of " life." Between her and the king is a /"\ / \ / \ S\ f\/"S mm THREE LIONS HEADS ABOVE A LOTUS PILLAR IN A SHRINE OF THE TIME OF AMEN-HETEP II. l_From Lepsius, Denkm'dler, Abth. III. Bl. 63. sort of banner, with tassels, on the top of which is a lion, wearing the triple crown ; he may be intended to represent the queen's ka, or " double," or may be her fetish. The second deity is Ra, or one of the Horus gods, the third is Amen, the fourth is Khensu, and the fifth is Khnemu. On the north, west, and south walls, on a level with the heads of the gods and royal personages, 135 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN is a row of characters intended to represent the symbol of " life." The apparel of the gods is richly decorated with scale and feather work, and the forms of the crowns which they wear suggest that they were copied from models of the Ptolemaic Period. The wings of the pylon are ornamented with : — i. A lion-headed nt, with human hands and arms, rising out of a lotus flower ; 2. A banner, surmounted by a lion wearing the triple crown, the pole of which is driven through the body of a captive enemy. On the north wall, inside, figures of the same royal personages are seen adoring the gods ; above these, in a sort of frieze, is a D WORSHIPPED AT NAGAA. 1 . and other gods. Amongthese thy is the god who is represented full-face, with rging from his head ; he is seated on a throne, and Standard in his right hand. He is clearly a form of the Sun-god. Among the larger figures of the gods is one wearing the plumes of Amen. He is arrayed in long, flowing robes, and his attitude somewhat suggests that of Jupiter Sarapis. He holds in 'land a number of cords, each of which is tied round the neck aptive enemy, and the ends of these he is giving to the king -lands before him. Figures of this god also appear on the insides of the west and south walls. On the upper portion of the . I THE LION-HEADED SERPENT, ONE OF THE PROTECTORS OF THE TEMPLE OF QUEEN AMEN-TARIT AT NAGAA, RISING FROM A LOTUS (?). [From Lepsius, Denk7tidler, Abth. V. BI. 60. THE LION-BANNER OF QUEEN AMEN-TARIT. [From Lepsius, Denkm&ler, Abth. V, Bl. 60. TEMPLES AT NAGAA east wall, inside, three members of a royal family are seen adoring a hawk-headed crocodile, which has a disk and plumes, enclosed within a circle, upon his head. This temple is a very interesting and striking object at Nagaa, and it is to be hoped that steps will be taken by the Sudan Government to pre- vent the cracked stones over the doorway from falling down. The next most important ruins are those of the buildings called by Cailliaud1 "Grand Temple de l'Est," and by Lepsius c and d ; 2 they stand on the slope of a hill, at no great distance from the quarries whence the stone em- ployed in building the town and its temples was taken. The total length of the ruins is about three hundred feet. The temples were approached by a flight of steps (a), at the top of which was a short avenue, consisting of three pairs of stone rams (b) ; next to these was a rectangular portico3 with fourteen columns (c), and beyond this was another avenue, contain- ing three more pairs of stone rams (d). The head of each ram when on its pedestal was about 8 feet from the ground. The hall of the temple (f) im- mediately behind the pylon (e) 1 Planche xv. * Denkmaler, i., Bl. 145 ; and see v., Bl. 66 f. 3 Ibid., v., Bl. 66a. Wfc Q CQ W& ••M^tfsavuv.mn.v 7 W 139 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN KING ADORING A HAWK-HEADED CROCODILE WITH THE HANDS AND ARMS OF A MAN. [From tkm<r, Abth. V. Bl. 65. contained eight columns. Passing through the pro-naos (g) a group of rooms (h-p) are seen ; these were used by the priests for the storage of temple property. In the sanctuary (q) was the - M 1 I.K-AMKN. A GOD WORSHIPPED AT NAGAA (jUPITER SARAPIS?). [From Lepsius, Denkm'dler, Abth. V. Bl. 64 SCENE FROM THE NOFWHICH THE NECKS OF A GROUP OF [From Lepsius, Dtnkmaler, Abth.v., Bl. 57. TEMPLES AT NAGAA figure of the god. The reliefs on the portions of the entrances and walls which now remain show that this temple was built by Netek-Amen and his queen Amen-Tarit, and their car- touches occur here, together with a cartouche of a prince whose prenomen was Ankh-ka-Ra and whose native name was Ark-teten (?). Numerous figures of the Nile-god occur, and Amen of Napata and Amen of Thebes are represented in several places. Both the king and queen wear the disk and plumes of Amen. On one of the pillars in the first hall x the three cartouches of the royal wor- shippers are arranged side by side, and in the panels each is seen adoring 1 See Lepsius, Denkmaler, Abth. v., Bl. 67 a. ARK-TETEN. THE EGYPTO-ROMAN TEMPLE AT NAGAA. [From a photograph by C C F. Mackenzie, Esq. 143 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Amen, Menu, Morns, Bast, &c. Elsewhere the prince is seen standing between Isis and Thoth, and Isis and Horus.1 (lose to the top of the mountain is a group of ruins of three small temples, one of which is oriented to the north-west, one to the north-east, and one to the south. The largest temple was built, apparently, by king Shankpitah (!)fel^,^jg ^ About 40 feet to the south-east of the temple (a) is a small pto- Roman rectangular edifice, which appears to have no con- nection with any other build- in- at Nagaa ; it is about 28 feet long, and 13 feet 6 inches high. The ornamentation of the capitals of the pillars, and of the arches between them, proves that this portico belongs to the period of the most recent of the Pyramids of Meroe, and it is unlikely that it is older than the third century of our era. It is well preserved, and, if we except the buildings of a similar class at Kh&rga, is per- haps the best example extant of the architecture of the period to which it beloiK Other ruins at Xagaa are: — A small temple, marked l the plan of Lepsius, about 50 . and 30 feet wide, which consisted of two chambers. i chamber contained two circular pillars, and had a door on the south side; in the second was the sanctuary, which held the shrine of the god, and two long narrow chambers wherein the tlit statue of the god were stored. The builder of this temple is unknown. Two temples, the larger of which was connected by a wall with a -mall rectangular edifice, and consisted of a single chamber and 1 See Lepsius, DenJtmdler, Bl. 67 t\ d. ■ Ibid., Bl, 68 d. *44 6 Metres PLAN in TEMFLE E \\ KAGAA. 'idler, Abth. I. HI. 143, AND HIS QUEEN AMEN-TAR TEMPLES AT NAGAA a portico with six columns. In the hall of this temple were four columns, and an altar, and the statue of the god was placed in a niche in the end wall. The total length of the temple and portico was about 65 feet. The second temple was built at right angles to the first, and consisted of three chambers, in the first of which PLAN OF TEMPLE F AT NAGAA. [From Lepsius, Denk inciter, Abtb. I. Bl. 145. were two doorways, and in the third an altar. This group stands on the slope of a hill and is marked Fin the plan of Lepsius. The orientation is unusual. A temple consisting of a single chamber, marked G' in the plan of Lepsius. It was surrounded by a colonnade, which on the east vol. 11. 145 L THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN side had two rows of pillars, and wt ed within a mud-brick w;ill. will in front of the door of the temple. The temple enclosure was nearly a square, about [30 feet long and 1 [8 feel wide. The orientation of the building is unusual. ;o 10 Metres PI ,\\ "i 1 1 Mil 1. Q AT \.v. \ \- Hid probably the most perplexing of all the groups in the Sudan is that which is found in the Wftdi As-§ufra, and which is commonl) known as " Masawwariit as ^ufra," 01 the The rums here, like those .11 Na 1 p. RUINS NEAR SHEND1 stand on raised ground at the head of a valley, and they lie on the older of the two routes between Shendi and Nagaa, about thirty miles from the former place. On this same route, about halfway between Shendi and Mas- awwarat, are the remains of some sculptures which Cailliaud thought belonged to a small temple, and on the same road, a few miles south of Shendi, is an ancient well. The temple,1 when in a perfect state, was about 20 feet long. Its walls are formed of comparatively large stones, and were covered with sculptures, which are now in a ruined state. Cailliaud, however, was able to identify on them figures of women who were dressed in apparel similar to that worn by the queens of Nagaa and Meroe. Along this road Mr. J. W. Crowfoot discovered some interesting sculp- tures which had escaped the attention of Lepsius and other travellers. The chief group of ruins in the Wadi As-Sufra is found within an enclosure of the general shape of which a good idea will be gained from the accompanying plans, reproduced from the works of Cailliaud and Lepsius." It is impossible to obtain an accurate plan of the ruins until many parts of the site have been carefully excavated. The ruins consist of the remains of " chambers, " courts, corridors and temples, in an enclosure or parallelogram, " 760 by 660 feet ; but in more accurate numbers the entire cir- " cumference is 2,854 feet. The north-east side is 660 feet long; "the north-west, the only side on which there are entrances, " 769 J feet ; the south-west side 665 feet ; and the south-east " 760 feet."3 Opposite to the central entrance is a corridor 8 feet wide and 205 feet long ; this leads to a temple which stands in an enclosure 94 feet long and 85 feet wide. The temple itself is 47 feet long, and 40^ feet wide, and stands very nearly in the centre of the enclosure. It contained four pillars, and was sur- rounded by a colonnade which had on its south-east side a double row of pillars. On each side of the door leading into the small temple on the east side are the remains of a colossal statue 1 Cailliaud, Voyag?, plate xxx., No. 9 ; and see torn, iii., p. 158. 2 Ibid., plate xxii. ; Denkmaler, i., Bl. 139. 3 Hoskins, Travels, p. 100. 147 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN sculptured in very high relief. This temple consisted of a single chamber, which contained four pillars, and had a portico in front of it: it was approached by a flight of steps, and was 53 feet and 45 feet wide. The door is ornamented by two serpents, which in form and treatment remind us of Alexandrian Roman work of the third centory of our era. Another temple to the north-east of the largest temple is 52 feel long by 29 feet wide. It contained four columns, and had a colonnade with two rows of pillars in front of it. The use to which this group of buildings was put when complete has puzzled every traveller, and it seems impossible to understand its object. The most easily understood divisions of it are the temples, about the purpose of which there can be no doubt. Cailliaud thought the buildings formed a college. Hoskins believed them to have been a hospital, and Heeren declared them the Ammonium. One thing seems clear, namely, that the ;1 temple was the first building set up here. It is per- missible to assume, until proof to the contrary is forthcoming, that chambers were built in the temple precincts for the use of the priests and of their royal masters, that these were in due nclosed by walls, and that building after building was 1 ami enclosed, and two other temples were built. Possibly ts may have been used for driving cattle into when fight- i between the tribes, and the whole group of buildings made to serve the purposes of a kkdn, or desert the south of the main group of buildings are the ruins of a • ingular edifice which contained many chambers, and to his. air the remains of a small house (?) of irregular 1 'o the n^rth and east are the ruins of reservoirs, and to nth of the larger reservoir are the remains of three temples.1 The largest of these consisted of a single chamber, containing as entered through a pylon. There are ither ruins on this site, and it seems clear that no town The confusion which reigns here is chaotic, but here and there among the ruins are mutilated reliefs and See Lepsius, J)cnkmalci\ i., Bl. 140. PLAN OF THE TEMPLES, ETC., AT MASAWWARAT AS-SUFRA. [According to MYTHICAL ANIMALS columns which are of con- siderable interest.1 The columns of the first row of the colonnade of the great temple are unlike any found elsewhere in the Sudan, and display the high pitch of perfec- tion attained in the sculp- tor's art by the artisans who set them up. Their capitals are ornamented with lotus flowers, and the flutings and rope- work patterns which adorn the shafts give them a graceful appear- ance ; round the drums and bases are sculptured figures of gods, warriors, athletes, &c, in high relief.2 The reliefs in the no. 3. panels into which the shafts of many of the pillars are divided are no less interesting. With many of the designs we are familiar from other temples in the vSiidan, e.g., 'Amara and Nagaa. Worthy, however, of special note are the large numbers of mythical and fantastic animals which are sculptured on the 1 For general views of the site, see Cailliaud, Voyage, plates xxiii. ff. ; Hoskins, Travels, plates 14 and 15 ; and Lepsius, Denkmaler, i., Bl. 141. 2 See Deukmaler, v., Bl. 71. 149 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN 4. rown, crushing a ite man with his right fort-paw (No. 2). ;. A lion-headed god riding a lion which is gnawing the body of a man held between its fore- pi N ». 3). In three scenes the lion pmbably typifies the .. \ hawk-headed r nil the solar disk on his head, riding a NO. 6. 150 lower parts of the columns : — I. The rain- headed god Khnemu leading a child with his right hand, and a winged lioness, with a curly tail, by a string with his left. Under the right fore-paw of the lioness, which is stretched out, are two stricken gazelle (No. 1). A winged, hawk- headed lion, wearing the NO. 5. winged lioness with a woman's head, surmount- ed by a disk. With its right fore-paw the lioi is crushing a couple gazelle (No. 4*. The lioness probably sym- bolizes a queen. 5. The vulture-goddess Mut sup- porting her weight on the body <>f one prostrate foe, ami holding a second PLAN OF THE TEMPLES, ETC., AT MASAWWAKAT AS-SUFRA. [According to Lepsius, Abth. SCULPTURES AT MASAWWARAT in her claw and beak (No. 5). 6. A god wearing the double-crown, riding an elephant, the trunk of which is being held by a kneeling man (No. 6). 7. The god Bes, with plumes and a tail, playing the harp to a seated lion, which wears the triple crown and smells a flower (No. 7).1 These sculptures are full of spirit, and the expressions on the faces of some of the animals and their attitudes are strikingly comical, and can hardly have failed to appeal to the humorous side of all the Sudani folk who saw them. The style and character of the sculptures and reliefs on this site suggest that the ruins are the latest of all the Meroitic buildings. The work is too good to have been done by natives guided by purely native overseers, and I believe that Egyptians who had been trained in the service of Roman architects were imported to carry it out, probably in the second or third century of our era. Several of the walls must belong to a far later period, and some are evidently built of stones which have been carried off from the older buildings. The next great centre of trade that flourished when the Meroitic kingdom existed was Soba, a town of considerable extent, which stood on the bank of the Blue Nile a few miles above Khartum. Of the history of the town during the first few centuries after the establishing of the Nubian kingdom on the Island of Meroe nothing is known, but it is tolerably certain that 1 See Detikma/er, v., Bl. 74, 75. 151 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN it contained a number of temples, built of sandstone, similar to those of Napata, As-Sufra, Nagaa, Wad KA Nagaa, c\x. One of these, as we may see from the ruins of it which still exist, was turned into a church by the Jacobite Nubians. A few facts con- cerning the town when it formed the capital of a Christian kingdom have been obtained, and these will be ^iven in the chapter on Christianity in the Sudan. 152 CHAPTER X. THE SUDAN IN THE FIRST CENTURY BEFORE, AND THE FIRST CENTURY AFTER, CHRIST. The information which is to be derived from native sources about the Sudan between B.C. ioo and a.d. ioo is scanty, but we may with advantage summarize here the statements about that country made by Diodorus, Strabo, and Pliny. The narratives of Diodorus and Pliny are in some respects not so valuable as those of Strabo, but the first was very well informed on many points connected with the history and civilization of Nubia, and many of his statements are supported by archaeological evidence. According to Diodorus (i. 33), the Nile rises far away in Ethiopia, and in its course forms many islands, the largest of which is Meroe, whereon Cambyses built a city, and called it after his mother's name " Meroe." This island is shield-shaped, is 3,000 stadia long, and 1,000 stadia wide. It contains mines of gold, silver, iron, and brass, ebony trees and precious stones (i. 33). The Inundation begins at the summer solstice, and increases until the equinox ; its waters bring down new soil for the land (i. 36). The inhabitants of the Island of Meroe call the Nile " Astapus " 1 ; Diodorus rejects the opinion of Herodotus that the Nile rises from a lake (i. 37). The Ethiopians (ie., the Sudani folk) were the first men who ever lived (iii. 2), and are generally held to be autochthones; they were the first to institute the worship of the gods and sacrifices. The Egyptians were a colony from Ethiopia, and Egypt was formed of slime and mud brought down from Ethiopia. The laws of Ethiopia and Egypt are identical, and the writing in use in both countries is the same (iii. 3). Kings are chosen from the priesthood. The candidates are brought into the god's presence, and he whom the god 1 They, of course, referred to the Blue Nile. 153 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN touches becomes king, and is worshipped as a god. When the priests were tired of their king they ordered him to commit suicide ; this custom lasted for centuries, but was broken by Ergamenes (Arq-Amen), who refused to obey the priests, and, taking soldiers, went to the Golden House [at Napata ?] and slew the priests. This happened in the reign of Ptolemy II. (iii. 6). No man is put to death, but he is compelled to commit suicide ; when the king kills himself, his servants do the same. These- are the laws of the people on the Island of Meroe. There are, however, several other Ethiopian nations that dwell on each side of the river Nile ; some border upon Arabia (i.e., the Eastern Desert), and others are seated in the heart of Africa. The greater part of these, especially those near the river i iii. 8), are blacks, flat-faced, have curled hair, are exceeding fierce and cruel, and are in their manners like unto the animals, not so much, however, in their natural temper, as in their studied and contrived acts of wickedness. Their whole bodies are filth) and nasty, their nails are long like the claws of beasts, and they arc very cruel to each other. Some carry raw ox-hide shields and short lances ; others darts with forked points ; others have bows four cubits long, and when they have used up their arrows they fight with clubs. The women fight with men's weapons, many wearing a brass ring in their lips Some of them go naked, some wear skins, and others wear sheep's tails hanging in front of them from their waists. Some wear breeches made of human hair. Their food consists of marsh fruit, young branches of trees, wis. lotus, roots of cane, &c. Those who are archers live on line tiny kill, but most of them live upon flesh, milk, and the gods, some are mortal (iii. 9), and others im- 1 ; among the former are I si s. Pan,' Hercules, and Jupiter,' and among the latter, the sun, moon, and the universe. Some believe in no gods at all, and when the sun rises they hide in the marshes as from an implacable enemy. The dead are disposed of: 1. By throwing the bodies into the river, j. By pouring melted on them, and keeping them in their houses. 3. By burial irthen coffins near their temples. An oath sworn by the 1 Probably the Egyptian god Menu. ompare the illustration above, page 141. 154 DIODORUS ON THE SUDAN names of the dead is the most sacred. Kings are chosen from among the handsomest men, or from the most industrious shep- herds, or from the richest men, or from the bravest in war. The Ethiopians and Africans quarrel (iii. 10) for the possession of the lands near the river. Herds of elephants from higher Libya come down to the morasses for food. In the deserts are numerous large serpents, which are able to kill the elephants. We must not trust writers about Ethiopia too implicitly, for most of them were either too credulous, or invented lies as a diversion ; Agatharcides of Cnidus and Artemidorus the Ephesian "have in their writings nearly pursued the truth." Diodorus then, quoting from Agathar- cides, describes how gold is obtained ; as his narrative will be given in the Chapter on Gold-mining in the Sudan, we pass on to summarize his remarks on the nations in the Eastern Desert or Troglodyta, and Southern Ethiopia, i.e., Dar Fur, Kordofan, Sennaar, &c. The Ichthyophagi (iii. 15) live along the Red Sea coast. They go naked, and have their wives in common. The women and children catch the little fish in the shallows, and the men catch the lobsters, lampreys, dog-fish, sea-calves, &c. They kill them with goats' horns and stones. The fish are partly cooked in the sun and then boiled with the seed of a plant ; each person eats as much as he can. They also eat shell-fish, breaking the shells with stones ; when these fail they gnaw the fish bones, which they take care to keep. Every fifth day they go to the wells of the shepherds to drink, and they drink so much that they can hardly move for a whole day. They resemble herds of cattle, and make a horrid noise as they go about. Other fish-eating people do not drink at all. They speak to no stranger, they are interested in nothing ; if assaulted with drawn swords, they stir not, and even if hurt they feel no anger. They are unconcerned if their wives and children be slain before their eyes. Some of them live in caves, and others in tents made of grass and whale- bone. Another class lives under the branches of living trees plaited together, and a fourth lives in holes which they dig in sea- moss. The dead are laid on the shore at low tide, and when the sea flows back it carries the bodies away. A fifth class lives in holes in the high rocks. 155 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN The Chelonophagi (iii. 21) live on sea turtles. The Rhizophagi live on the roots of canes (iii. 23) ; many of these people are destroyed by lions, which are, however, kept in check by the gnats, which sting them and drive them out of the country. The Hylophagi are tree-climbers, and feed on the buds and branches of trees ; they leap from tree to tree like birds (iii. 24). They go naked, have their wives in common, and tight with clubs. The Spermatophagi live on fruits and herbs. The Konegoi (iii. 25) sleep in trees, and eat the flesh of wild bulls, leopards, &c, and when this fails they eat the skins of animals which they have killed. They are good marksmen with the dart. The Elephanto- machi (iii. 26) live in forests, and kill elephants by hamstringing them. To the west of these live the Simoes, and to the south the Struthophagi (iii. 27). Near these are the Acridophagi (iii. 29), who are smaller than other men, of lean and meagre bodies, and exceeding black. They are small, swift of foot, and short-lived ; they rarely live more than forty years, and they die through winged lice breeding in their bodies. They live on locusts, which they kill by suffocation, and which they salt. Beyond these is a country tilled with spiders and scorpions (iii. 30), by which the inhabitants were driven out of the country. To the south of these are the Canimulgos (iii. 31), who wear long beards, and keep large numbers of fierce dogs; they live on the flesh of oxen. " The nations that lie farthest south live the lives ists under the shapes of men." The Troglodytes, or Nomades (iii. 32), live pastoral lives; they are divided into tribes, and have a monarchical government. The)- have their wives in common, pi only the wife of the king. They drink for a part of the year milk and blood boiled together. Cattle that are old or sick are killed and eaten. They call no man father, and no woman mother, but only a bull, an ox, a goat, or a sheep, of which they call the males fathers, and the females mothers, because the)' have their daily food from them and not from their parents (iii. The common drink is made from the ptxliurus plant, but men of ion drink a wine which is made from the juice of a flower. ! except for beasts' skins round their loins. All the lodytes are circumcised, and the cripples among them are mutilated. ■56 STRABO ON THE SUDAN The Megabarei fight with raw ox-hide shields, iron-bound clubs, and bows and spears. The dead are tied neck and heels, and carried to the top of a hill, where they are pelted with stones until they are covered over ; upon each heap a goat's horn is stuck. They fight among themselves for the pastures. The old folk tie themselves by their necks to tails of oxen, and so end their days. The heat is so great at midday that two standing together cannot see each other (iii. 34). The animals in Ethiopia are rhinoceroses, sphinxes, and the cynocephali (iii. 35). The cepus has the face of a lion, is like a panther, and is as big as a deer. The wild bull lives on flesh. He is as swift as a horse, he is red in colour, and he can move his horns like his ears. His hair stands on end, and his skin is impenetrable. The crocotta is of a mixed nature, part wolf and part dog? and fiercer than both. The serpents are huge, some say a hundred cubits long, which no one believes ; a serpent thirty cubits long was brought to Alexandria in the reign of Ptolemy II., and it became quite tame. According to Strabo (i. 2, § 25), " Ethiopia" runs in the same direction as Egypt and is long, narrow, and subject to inundation. Beyond the reach of the waters the land is parched and desolate, and unfitted for human habitation. Near Meroe (xvi. 4, § 9) is the confluence of the rivers Astaboras, Astapus, and Astasobas with the Nile. On the banks live the Rhizophagi, or Root-eaters, and the Heleii, or marsh-men. Here live lions, which are driven from the country by large gnats at the rising of Sirius. Close by live the Spermophagi, who live on seeds of plants and trees. Far in the interior is Endera, where naked men live, who use bows and arrows. They generally shoot the animals from the trees. They live on the flesh of their cattle, and of other animals, and when this fails they roast the skins of animals and eat them. Two rivers empty themselves into the Nile, which issue out of some lakes towards the east, and encircle Meroe, a considerable island. One of these rivers is called Astaboras [Tacazze], flowing along the eastern side of the island. The other is the Astapus, or, as some call it, Astasobas. But the Astapus is said to be another river which issues out of some lakes in the south, and this river forms nearly the body of the Nile, which flows in a straight line, and is filled by the summer rains ; above the confluence of the Astaboras and the Nile, at the distance of 700 stadia, is Meroe, 157 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN a city having the same name as the Island ; and there is another Island above Meroe, occupied by the fugitive Egyptians, who [ted in the time of Psammetichus, and are called Sembritae, or foreigners. Their sovereign is a queen, but they obey the king of Meroe. The lower parts of the country on each side of Meroe, along the Nile towards the Red Sea. are occupied by ibari and Blemmyes, who are subject to the Ethiopians, and border upon the Egyptians; about the sea are Troglodytae. The Troglodytae, in the latitude of Meroe, are distant ten or twelve days' journey from the Mile. On the left of the course of the Nile live Nubae in Libya, a populous nation. They begin from Meroe and extend as far as the bends[of the river]. They are not subject to the Ethiopians, but live independently, being distributed int<> several sovereignties. (Book xvii., chap, i., § z.) Strabo's remarks on the Elephant-eaters, the Struthophagi, and other nations in this country are derived for the most part from the writings <>f Artemidorus, and as they have been already quoted need no further reference. He continues : — The Ethiopians at present lead for the most part a wandering life, and are destitute of the means of subsistence, on account of the barrenness of the soil, the disadvantages of climate, and their great distance from us. For the mode of life [of the Ethiopians] is wretched ; they are for the most part naked, and wander from place to place with their flocks. Their flocks and herds are small in size, whether sheep, goats, or oxen : the dogs also, though fierce and quarrelsome, are small. It was perhaps from the diminutive size of these people, that the story of the Pygmies originated, whom no person, worthy of credit, has ted that he himself has seen. They live on millet and barley, from which also a drink [rnarissa] is prepared. They have no oil, but use butter and fat instead. There are no fruits, except the produce of trees in the royal gardens. Some feed even upon . the tender twigs of trees, the lotus, or the roots of reeds. They live also upon the flesh and blood of animals, milk, and <■. The) reverence their kings as gods, who are for the most hut up m their palaces. Their largest royal seat is the city of Meroe, of the same name as the Island. 1 he shape of the Island is said t<> be that of a shield. Its size is perhaps exaggerated. Its length is about 3,000, and its breadth 1,000 Stadia. It is very mountainous, and contains great forests. The inhabitants are nomades, who are partly hunters and partly husbandmen. IT ilso mines of copper, iron, gold, and various kinds of preciou mrrounded on the side of I hills of sand, and on that of Arabia by continuous In the higher parts on the south, it is bounded by the ■5* STRABO ON THE SUDAN confluent streams of the rivers Astaboras, Astapus, and Astasobas. On the north is the continuous course of the Nile to Egypt, with its windings, of which we have spoken before. The houses in the cities are formed by interweaving split pieces of palm wood or of bricks. They have rock salt, as in Arabia. Palm, the persea (peach), ebony, and carob trees are found in abundance. They hunt elephants, lions, and panthers. There are also serpents, which encounter elephants, and there are many other kinds of wild animals, which take refuge, from the hotter and parched districts, in watery and marshy districts. Above Meroe is Psebo, a large lake, containing a well- inhabited island. As the Libyans occupy the western bank of the Nile, and the Ethiopians the country on the other side of the river, they thus dispute by turns the possession of the islands and the banks of the river, one party repulsing the other, or yielding to the superiority of its opponents. The Ethiopians use bows of wood four cubits long, and hardened in the fire. The women also are armed, most of them wear in the upper lip a copper ring. They wear sheepskins, without wool ; for the sheep have hair like goats. Some go naked, or wear small skins or girdles of well-woven hair round the loins. They regard as God one being who is immortal, the cause of all things ; another who is mortal, a being without a name, whose nature is not clearly understood. In general they regard as gods benefactors and royal persons, some of whom are their kings, the common saviours and guardians of all; others are private persons, esteemed as gods by those who have individually received benefits from them. Of those who inhabit the torrid region, some are even supposed not to acknowledge any god, and are said to abhor even the sun, and to apply opprobrious names to him, when they behold him rising, because he scorches and tortures them with his heat ; these people take refuge in the marshes. The inhabitants of Meroe worship Hercules, Pan, and Isis, besides some other barbaric deity. Some tribes throw the dead into the river ; others keep them in the house, enclosed in hyalus (oriental alabaster?). Some bury them around the temples in coffins of baked clay. They swear an oath by them, which is reverenced as more sacred than all others. Kings are appointed from among persons distinguished for their personal beauty, or by their breeding of cattle, or for their courage, or for their riches. In Meroe the priests anciently held the highest rank, and sometimes sent orders even to the king, by a messenger, to put an end to himself, when they appointed another king in his place. At last one of their kings abolished this custom by going with an armed body to the temple, where the golden shrine is, and slaughtering all the priests. The following custom exists among the Ethiopians. If a king is mutilated in any part of the body, those who are most attached to his person, as attendants, mutilate themselves in the same manner, and even die with him. Hence 159 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN the king is guarded with the utmost care. This will suffice on the subject of Ethiopia. Pliny's account of" Ethiopia *' will be found in his Sixth Hook, tion 35, and a perusal of it will show that classical writers had m his day a very -nod general idea of the extent of Nubia, or the Sudan, and of its principal characteristics and products. It will be seen, however, that his geographical knowledge is not very accurate, and that he transmits a number of fanciful statements, compiled from the works of many writers, without question. His narrative is, nevertheless, of considerable interest, and is worth reproducing here: — l On leaving Syene, and taking first the Arabian side, we find the nation of the Catadupi, then the Syenitae, and the town <<( Tacompsos, 1>\ .died Thatice, as also Aramasos, Sesamos, Sanduma, Masindomacam, Arabeta and Boggia, Leupitorga, Tantarene, Mecindita, Noa, Gloploa, Gystate, Niegada, Lea, Renni, Nups, Direa, Patiga, Bacata, Dumana, Rhadata, at which olden cat was worshipped as a god, Moron, in the interior, and Mallos, near Meroe ; this is. the account given by Bion. Juba, however, gives another account ; he says that there is a city on Mount Megatichos, which lies between Egypt and Ethiopia, by the Arabians known as Myrson, after which come Aramus, Sesamos, Pide, Mamuda, Orambis, situate tream of bitumen, Amodita, Prosda, Parenta, Mama. tta, Gallas, Zoton, Graucome, Emeus, the Pidibotae, the Hebdomecontacometae, Nomades, who dwell in tents, Cyste, lagale, Proaprimis, Nups, Detrelis, Patis, the Ganbn the Megasnei, da, Crandala, Denna, Cadeuma, Thena, . Alana, Mascoa, tlic Scammi, Hora, situate on an island, and then Abala, Androgali e, the Malli, and Agole. On the African side we find mentioned, either what is another place with the same name of Tacompsos, or else a part of the one -mentioned, and after it M< Edos, Plenariaj. Pinni Buma, Linthuma, Spintum, Sydop, the Censi. Pindicitora, Acug, Orsum, Sansa, Maumarum, Urbim, the town <>t Molum, by the I ailed Hypaton, Pagoarca, /manes, at which point elephants begin to be found, the Mambli, Peri' and Acetuma : there was formerly a town also called Epis, over against Merer, which had. however, been destroyed before Bion te. re the names of places given as far as Meroe; but at I day hardly any of them on either side of the river are nts, the praetorian troops that were sent 1 The rendering is that of Messrs. BostO< k and Riley, London, 1890. 160 PLINY ON THE SUDAN by the Emperor Nero under the command of a tribune, for the purposes of inquiry, when, among his other wars, he was contem- plating an expedition against Ethiopia, brought back word that they had met with nothing but deserts on their route. The Roman arms also penetrated into these regions in the time of the late Emperor Augustus, under the command of P. Petronius, a man of Equestrian rank, and prefect of Egypt. That general took the following cities, the only ones we now find mentioned there, in the following order: — Pselcis, Primis, Abuncis, Phthuris, Cambusis, Atteva, and Stadasis, where the river Nile, as it thunders down the precipices, has quite deprived the RIVER ATBARA, NEAR KALLABAT. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. inhabitants of the power of hearing : he also sacked the town ol Napata. The extreme distance to which he penetrated beyond Syene was 970 miles ; but still, it was not the Roman arms that rendered these regions a desert. ^Ethiopia, in its turn gaining the mastery, and then again reduced to servitude, was at last worn out by its continual wars with Egypt, having been a famous and powerful country even at the time of the Trojan War, when Memnon was its king ; it is also very evident from the fabulous stories about Andromeda, that it ruled over Syria in the time of king Cepheus, and that its sway extended as far as the shores of our sea. VOL. 11. 161 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN In a similar manner, also, there have been conflicting accounts the extent of this country : first by Dalion, who travelled a considerable distance beyond Meroe, and after him by Aristocreon and Basil 11 as the younger Simonides, who made a stay of h\ . . when he wrote his account of Ethiopia. Timosthenes, however, the commander of the fleets of Phila- delphus, without giving any other estimate as to the distance, says that Meroe is sixty days' journey from Syene ; while Eratosthenes 3 that the distance is 625 miles, and Arteinidorus 600. Sebosus says that from the extreme point of Egypt, the distance t.> Meroe* is [,675 miles, while the other writers hist mentioned KH< >R ARUB, NEAR K.M.I \i: \ I . [From Sir W, Ctrstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. it 1,250. All these differences, however, have since been settled; for the pei><>ns scut by Nero for the purposi discovery ha\c reported that the distance from Syene to Meroe is 87] miles, the following being the items:— From Syene i<» Hiera- iminos they make to he 54 miles, from thence to Tama 72, to the country of the Evonymitae, the first region of ^Ethiopia, \eina 54. t<> Pittara 25, and to Tergedus lo6. They » that the Island of Gagaudes lies at an equal distance ;ie and Meroe, and that it is at this place that the bird 1 the parrot was first seen ; while at another island called Articula. the animal known as the sphingium was first discovered PLINY ON THE SUDAN by them, and after passing Tergedus, the cynocephalus. The distance from thence to Napata is 80 miles, that little town being the only one of all of them that now survives. From thence to the Island of Meroe the distance is 360 miles. They also state that the grass in the vicinity of Meroe becomes of a greener and fresher colour, and that there is some slight appearance of forests, as also traces of the rhinoceros and elephant. They reported also that the city of Meroe stands at a distance of 70 miles from the first entrance of the Island of Meroe, and that close to it is another island, Tadu by name, which forms a harbour facing those who enter the right-hand channel of the river. The build- ings in the city, they said, were but few in number, and they stated that a female, whose name was Candace, ruled over the district, that name having passed from queen to queen for many years. They related also that there was a temple of Jupiter Hammon there, held in great veneration, besides smaller shrines erected in honour of him throughout all the country. In addition to these particulars, they were informed that in the days of the ^Ethiopian dominion, the Island of Meroe enjoyed great renown, and that, according to tradition, it was in the habit of maintaining 200,000 armed men, and 4,000 artisans. The kings of ^Ethiopia are said even at the present day to be forty-five in number. The whole of this country has successively had the names of /Etheria, Atlantia, and last of all, ^Ethiopia, from Aithiops, the son of Vulcan. It is not at all surprising that towards the extremity of this region the men and animals assume a monstrous form, when we consider the changeableness and volubility of fire, the heat of which is the great agent in imparting various forms and shapes to bodies. Indeed, it is reported that in the interior, on the eastern side, there is a people that have no noses, the whole face representing a plane surface ; that others again are destitute of the upper lip, and others are without tongues. Others again, have the mouth grown together, and being destitute of nostrils, breathe through one passage only, inbibing their drink through it by means of the hollow stalk of the oat, which there grows spon- taneously and supplies them with its grain for food. Some of these nations have to employ gestures by nodding the head and moving the limbs, instead of speech. Others again were unacquainted with the use of fire before the time of Ptolemy Lathyrus, king of Egypt. Some writers have also stated that there is a nation of Pygmies, which dwells among the marshes in which the river Nile takes its rise ; while on the coast of ^Ethiopia, where we paused, there is a range of mountains, of a red colour, which have the appearance of being always burning. All the country, after we pass Meroe, is bounded by the Troglodytae and the Red Sea, it being three days' journey from Napata to the shores of that sea ; throughout the whole of this district the rain-water is carefully preserved at several places, 163 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN while the country that lies between is extremely productive of gold. The parts beyond this are inhabited by the Adabuli. a : and here, over against Meroe, are the barri, by some writers called the Adiabari ; they occupy the »me of them, however, are Nomades, living on the flesh of elephants. Opposite to them, on the African side, dwell the Macrobii, and then again, beyond the Megabarri, there are the Memnones and the Dabeli, and, at the distance of 20 days' journey, the Critensi. Beyond these are the Dochi, and then the Gymnetes, who always go naked ; and after them the Andetae, the Mothitae, the Nfesaches, and the Ipsodorae, who are of a black tint, but stain the body all over with a kind of red earth. On the African side again there are the Medimni, and then a nation of Nomades, who live on the milk of the cynocephalus. and then the Aladi and the Syrbotae, which last are said to be eight cubits in height, Aristocreon informs us that on the Libyan side, at a distance of five days' journey from Meroe, is the town of Tolles, and then at a further distance of twelve days' journey, . a town founded by the Egyptians who fled from Psam- metichus ; he: states also that they dwelt there for a period of . and that opposite, on the Arabian side, there is a town of theirs called Daron. The town, however, which he calls Esar, i> l>v Bion called Sape, who say- that the name means "the strangers"; their capital being Sembobitis, situate on an island. . third place of theirs, Sinat in Arabia. Between the moun- and the river Nile are the Simbarri, the Palugges, and, on the mountains themselves, the Asachae, who are divided into numerous peoples; they are said to be distant five days' journey from the sea, and to procure their subsistence by the chase of the elephant. An island in the Nile, which belongs to the Sem- berril verned by a queen ; beyond it are the Ethiopian 1. at a distance of eight days' journey ; their town is Tenu- n the Nile. There are the Sesambri also, a pa among whom all tin; quadrupeds are without ears, the very eleph n. On the African side are the Tonobari, tin people who have a dog for their king, and divine from I t- what are his commands; the Auruspi, who considerable distance from the Nile, and the mi, the Phaliges, the Marigerri, and the Casmari. Bion makes mention also of some other towns situate on islands, the whole distance being twenty days' journey from Sem- a town in an adjoining island, under the queen of the Semberritae, with another called Asara, and another, in a id island, called Darde. The name of a third island is Med- >«'•, which is the town of Asel, and a fourth is called Garodes, with a town upon it of the same name Passing thence along the I the Nil • towns of Navi, Modnnda, Andatis. idum, Colligat, Secande, .Vivectabe, Cumi, Agrospi, ^Egipa, rogari, Araba, and Summara. Beyond is the region of PLINY ON THE SUDAN Sirbitum, at which the mountains terminate, and which by some writers is said to contain the maritimeiEthiopians,the Nisacaethae, and the Nisyti, a word which signifies "men with three or four eyes," — not that the people really have that conformation, but because they are remarkable for the unerring aim of their arrows. On that side of the Nile which extends along the borders of the Southern Ocean, beyond the Greater Syrtes, Dalion says that the people, who use rain-water only, are called the Cisori, and that the other nations are the Longompori, distant five days' journey from the (Ecalices, the Usibalci, the Isveli, the Perusii, the Balii, and the Cispii, the rest being deserts, and inhabited by tribes of fable only. In a more westerly direction are the Nigroae, whose king has only one eye, and that in the forehead, the Agriophagi, who live principally on the flesh of panthers and lions, the Pamphagi, who will eat anything, the Anthropophagi, who live on human flesh, the Cynamolgi, a people with the heads of dogs, the Artabatitae, who have four feet, and wander about after the manner of wild beasts ; and, after them, the Hesperiae and the Perorsi, whom we have already spoken of as dwelling on the con- fines of Mauritania. Some tribes, too, of the ^Ethiopians subsist on nothing but locusts, which are smoke-dried and salted as their provision for the year ; these people do not live beyond their fortieth year. M. Agrippa was of opinion that the length of the whole country of the ^Ethiopians, including the Red Sea, was 2,170 miles, and its breadth, including Upper Egypt, 1,297. Some authors again have made the following divisions of its length : — From Meroe to Sirbitum eleven days' sail, from Sirbitum to the Dabelli fifteen days', and from them to the /Ethiopian Ocean six days' journey. It is agreed by most authors, that the distance altogether, from the Ocean to Meroe, is 625 miles, and from Meroe' to Syene, that which we have already mentioned. ^Ethiopia lies from south- east to souch-west. Situate as it is, in a southern hemisphere, forests of ebony are to be seen of the brightest verdure; and in the midst of these regions there is a mountain of immense height, which overhangs the sea, and emits a perpetual flame. By the Greeks this mountain is called Theon Ochema, and at a distance of four days' sail from it is a promontory, known as Hesperu Ceras, upon the confines of Africa, and close to the Hesperiae, an ^Ethiopian nation. There are some writers who affirm that in these regions there are hills of a moderate height, which afford a pleasant shade from the groves with which they are clad, and are the haunts of ^Egipans and Satyrs. [Book II., cap. 75]. At Meroe, an island in the Nile and the metropolis of the /Ethiopians, which is 5,000 stadia from Syene, there are no shadows at two periods of the year, viz., when the sun is in the 18th degree of Taurus and in the 14th of Leo [May 8th and August 4th respectively]. 165 CHAPTER XI. THE SOdAN IN THE ROMAN PERIOD. THE first pnfict of Egypt was Cornelius Callus, who was born about B.C 6g and died B.C. 26 : he was appointed by the Emperor Augustus, to whom he had rendered important services, B.C. 30, and h ued Egypt four years.1 Cornelius, having attacked and taken the city of Heroopolis with a small body of men, advanced into Upper Egypt, and in a very short time reduced the ptians to subjection. The centres of the revolt were Coptos and Thebes, and it is pretty certain that the rebels were supported by the Nubians irom beyond the First Cataract. Cornelius next proceeded to Syene, and interviewed the Nubian chiefs of the tract of territory which extended from Philae to a place a little to the south of WVuli Haifa, and which was called at that time Triakontaschoinoi, and, though asserting the rights of Rome to that portion of the Nile Valley, he allowed the chiefs to retain their independence. During the rule of the later Ptolemies the Nubians had remained unmolested, and it is probable that they • piite prepared to fight the Romans, unless Cornelius was willing to allow them to retain the privileges which they regarded ;i- their rights. A trilingual inscription in Egyptian (hiero- glyph ind Latin, found by Captain H. C. Lyons Phila Is the suppression of a revolt b.c. 29, and we may .me that the first agreement between the Nubians and Roman- \\;is made in that, or in the following year. According to Dion Caseins liii., 23), Cornelius became so much puffed up through his success in Egypt that he set up statues of himself everywhere in the country, and had inscriptions describ- ing his exploits cut on pyramids!1 He was denounced by . ,53 ; Dion Cassius, li.9, 17. Report on tin- Island and Temples of Philae, p. 29; Lyons and rrichte d. k<>n. prcuss. Akad. WtSSen^ April, 1896. ' tpyn oan tnt7Wtr]Kfi, tarus nvpufxiSns tatypayj/f. GALLUS AND PETRONIUS Valerius Largus to the Emperor, and was deposed by Augustus, and later the Senate decreed his exile, and the confiscation of his estates ; at length he killed himself with his own sword. Cornelius Gallus was succeeded by Gaius Petronius, who, according to Strabo,1 was successful in quelling a revolt which broke out in Alexandria. He was in turn succeeded by yElius Gallus, about B.C. 25, and was deputed by Augustus to go to Arabia Felix, and make friends with the tribes there, so that the Romans might get possession of the treasures with which the country was supposed to be filled. If the inhabitants refused to come to terms, vElius Gallus was instructed to fight them. iElius Gallus chose for his guide Syllaeus, the chamberlain of Obodas, king of the Nabataeans, and he led both the sea and land forces into serious difficulties. Gallus built eighty biremes, and triremes, and galleys, at Cleopatris (Arsinoe), but as these were useless, he built 130 vessels of burden, wherein he embarked 10,000 infantry, including 500 Jews and 1,000 Nabataeans. After much hardship he reached Leuce-Come in fifteen days, having lost many of his vessels, and some with all their crews. Large numbers of his soldiers fell ill of what would now be called enteric fever, and dysentery, and Gallus had to stay at Leuce-Come a whole year. Another six months were wasted through the perfidy of Syllaeus, but eventually Gallus returned to Alexandria with the remnants of his army. The whole expedition was a terrible failure in one respect, but Strabo admits that it was of " some small service." ~ The Nubians, learning that the prefect Gallus had got into difficulties in the Eastern Desert, and seeing that a large number of Egyptian troops were engaged in fighting the Arabs, took the opportunity of invading the Thebaid, and attacked the garrison, which consisted of three cohorts, near Syene. They captured Syene, Elephantine, and Philae, by a sudden inroad, and enslaved the inhabitants, and overthrew the statues of Caesar. When the news of this serious revolt reached the Romans, Petronius, who had already been prefect of Egypt, was despatched 1 Strabo, xvii. 1, 53. 2 Ibid., xvi. 4, §§ 22-24; Dion Cassiu-, liii. 29. 167 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN with son i infantry and 800 cavalry to fight the enemy, whose army contained 30,000 men. The Nubians were either driven or withdrew to Pselcis, i.e., the modern Dakka, where Petronius parley with them. He sent deputies who demanded the tution of the things which the Nubians had carried off, and 1 them to give their reasons for revolt. The Nubians replied that they had been ill-treated by the nomarchs, whereupon nius replied that they were not the sovereigns of the country, the lord of which was Caesar. The Nubians then asked for three days for consideration, but, as they made no overtures during this period, Petronius attacked them, and made them fight. Badly officered and poorly armed, the result for the Nubians was a foregone conclusion, and their skin shields, hatchets, spears, and swords, availed nothing. They soon fled, some to the city, others to the desert, and others swam away to an island in the river. Among the fugitives were the generals of Candace, queen of the Nubians, a masculine woman, who had lost an eye. nius pursued them in rafts and boats, and, having captured them all, sent them to Alexandria; he then attacked Pselcis and took it. Nearly all the Nubians were killed or taken prison 5. l'rom Pselcis Petronius went on to Premnis, the rn [brim, "travelling over the hills of sand, beneath which " the army of Cambyses was overwhelmed by the setting in of a "whirlwind."-' He took Premnis without difficulty, and then ded 500 miles up the river to Napata, the ancient tic capital, capturing on his way the cities of Abuncis, Phthi \tteva, and Stada was not at Napata when Petronius arrived, but :im ambassadors to treat for peace, and an offer to , tiers whom she had taken at Syene, and. to give itues [of Caesar?]: on this Petronius attacked, and destroyed Napata He made many prisoners, and much spoil, and then returned to the north, for the heat and I made it impossible to advance further. On his return wii. I . 54, •-*s' troops were overwhelmed in the Western Desert, between m ' • w. 35. 168 CAESAR AND CANDACE to Premnis he fortified the place, and, placing a garrison of 400 men there, with provisions for two years, he returned to Alexandria. Some of the Nubians were sold as slaves, one thou- sand were sent to Caesar, and many died of disease. On the departure of Petronius, Candace attacked the garrison he had left at Premnis with an army of several thousand men, but he returned before the Nubians reduced it, and the queen was obliged to send messengers to treat for peace. In reply, Petronius referred them to Caesar, and when they said they knew neither who he was, nor where to find him, Petronius sent men to take them to Caesar at Samos. The ambassadors obtained all they asked for, and Caesar even remitted the tribute which he had imposed.1 It is clear from Strabo's narrative that in the year B.C. 24 the Nubians possessed a very large army, and that they were ruled by one of the Meroitic queen-mothers, who bore the title of " Candace." According to Pliny,2 this name " had passed from " queen to queen for many years," and in support of this state- ment it may be noted that a " Candace, queen of the Ethiopians," is referred to in Acts viii. 27, and that Pseudo-Callisthenes makes Alexander the Great visit " Candace," queen of Meroe. Neither of these Candaces can be the opponent of Petronius. Lepsius thought that he had recovered the hieroglyphic form of the name Candace from Pyramid No. 1 of the Northern Group of the Pyramids of Meroe.3 Now the name of the queen for whom this pyramid was built is not " K(e)ntkit," but " Kenthehebit," 4 and unless ^^7 is a mistake for ^=^s, the name of" Candace " can hardly come from the name in the cartouche. Moreover, if " Kenthehebit " is a royal title we ought to find it on the pyramids of the other queens of Meroe ; but it has not yet been found on them.5 To identify with certainty the Candace who defied the Romans is also at present impossible. So far as the monumental evidence is concerned, we may identify her with Amen-tarit, the wife of 1 Dion Cassius, liv. 6. 2 vi. 35. 3 See Vol. I., p. 363. Not (3EE5I)I' but Qi^Ml- 0 There still remain two chapels to clear out, and until this has been done it is impossible to say that Kenthehebit occurs but once. 169 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN [-Amen, whose prenomen and nomen occur on the temples of Wad l, and 'Amara. This fact proves that she, or her consort, was an able and successful ruler of the Island of . ami that her power was effective from Wad Ba Nagaa, at least, in the south, to 'Amara in the north, i.e., over a portion of the Nile Valley about 800 miles long. It is evident that if the country in her time had not been in a prosperous state these temples would not have been built. Trade also must have been in a flourishing condition, for we may note that all the temples ing her name are close to important towns on the great trade route- from south to north, and at Nagaa they are near the great voirs which supplied the towns close by. If more remains of the temples in the city of Meroe existed, we should probably find that Queen Amen-tarit was the builder of the largest of them: the same also may be said of Napata. The invasion of Petronius proved to the Nubians that the Romans were a people against whom it was unsafe to rebel, and learned well the lesson which he intended his severe chastise- ment to teach them. He took with him an ample force of infantry and cavalry, struck quickly and hard, and then marched to their royal city, and razed it to the -round; he deported numbers of them to Alexandria, where they were sold as slaves, and then carried off all the booty which he could collect. Pliny Speaks of the country being "famous and powerful'" under its Memnon Anien-hetep III.), but it was only as a province of pt, and when administered by Egyptian officials, that it merits such a description. In saying that H Ethiopia" ruled over Syria in the time of king Cepheus,' he probably refers to the reign of we have already seen (Vol. II., pp. 37, 38) was always intriguing in Syria. During the reign of Augustus the building of the large temple lmis (Kalabsha) pin, and additions, at least, were made to the temples of Dendur and Dakka. In the reign of Claudius (a.D. 41-54) the Romans undertook 5 connected with the development of the trade \rabia, India, and Egypt,and Nero (a.d. 54-68) meditated an invasion of Ethiopia (i.e., the Sudan, not Abyssinia), with the 1 Pliny, i NERO'S CENTURIONS view of making himself master of the products of the country. It is curious how little, even at this time, the Romans really knew about Sudan geography, otherwise they would have known that the richest sources of wealth in the country were in Dfir Fur, Kordofan, and the lands on and between the Blue and PAPYRUS ON THE BAHR AL-GEBEL. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. White Niles. Before, however, Nero attempted to invade Nubia he sent a tribune, with some praetorian troops, to report on the country in general, and when they returned they stated that they had found nothing on the banks of the Nile but wastes.1 The 1 "Certe solitudines nuper renuntiavere principi Neroni missi ab ea milites "praetoriani cum tribunum ad explorandum, inter reliqua bella et Aethiopicum " cogitandi.'; Pliny, vi. 35 (181). 171 THE BGYFflAN SUDAN information which they acquired about the Sudan was consider- They went from Syene to Meroe by the following cities: — -Svkaminos, 54 miles; Tama, yz miles from Hiera- Sykaminos ; the region of the Evonymitae, 120 miles from Tama ; Acina. 64 miles from the Evonymitae ; Pittara, 22 miles from the Acina; Tergedus, 103 miles from Pittara; Napata, 80 miles from Tergedus ; Me roe, 360 miles from Napata; in all 875 miles. I that the city of Me roe was 70 miles from the entrance to the island, which would make its site to be near Shendi, and that it formerlj maintained 240,000 soldiers, and 3,000 artizans.1 's soldiers and the two centurions must have peneti for a considerable distance into the Sudan, and it is clear from a ment of Seneca that they reached the great marshes out of which the Nile was supposed to spring. The " Nili Paludes," or ai toO NilXou \ifivat,1 were held to be situated at the foot of the mountains of the Moon, but it is incredible that the soldiers travelled so far south. They told Seneca that, after travelling an Immense distance, they arrived at some marshes of enormous extent, that these were without outlet, and that the muddy water red over with an entangled mass of weeds, which it was impossible to wade through or to sail over. There, too, they saw two rocks, from which the river poured forth with tremendous force/1 N<>\\- the first portion of this description suggests that reached some portion of the region of the Sudd," the southern limit of which we know, on Luthority of Sir William Garstin,* begins north of B6r. the marshes are filled with papyrus and ambatch, and quire to have their roots under water for 11 of the year. North of Sham!)], "many islands 14, 3;), 1S4-186. -jrnphy, iv. 9. 3. Dturicrae* duos, quos Nero Caesar, aut aliarum virtutum, in primis ainantissmms, ad investigandum caput Nili miserat, audivi longum illos iter peregisse, quum a rege Aethiopiae instructi nmendatique proximis regibus, penetrassent. Ad ulterioraequidem, ad immensas paludes, quarum exitutn nee incolae, quisquam potest. Ita implicitae aquis herbae sunt, et nee pediti c!uctabile> nee navigio, quod nisi parvum et uniuscapax limosa palus non ferat. Ibi, iriquit, vidimus duas petras, ex quibus ingens inis excidebat ,J (A'aiuralium turn, vi. 8, ed. Koeler, p. 163). B '■ In of the Upper Nile, p. 94. NERO'S CENTURIONS " covered with ambatch and papyrus separate the stream " into numerous branches, and the whole country is a waste " of swamp." 1 When we compare the description of the swamps of the Bahr al-Gebel by Sir William Garstin with that of the marshes, or swamps, of the two centurions it seems certain that they must have reached some portion of the Nile Valley through which that river flows. " The scenery of the Bahr-el-Gebel throughout its course ' through the ' Sudd ' region is monotonous to a degree. There ' are no banks at all, and, except at a few isolated spots, no ' semblance of any ridge on the water's edge. The reedy swamps 1 stretch for many kilometres upon either side. Their expanse is ' only broken at intervals by lagoons of open water. Their surface ' is only a few centimetres above that of the water-level in the ' river when at its lowest, and a rise of half a metre floods them ' to an immense distance. These marshes are covered with a ' dense growth of water-weeds extending in every direction to ' the horizon. Of these reeds the principal is the papyrus, which ' grows in extreme luxuriance. The stems are so close together ' that it is difficult to force a way through them, and the plants { reach a height of from three to five metres above the marsh. In ' addition to the papyrus large areas are covered with the reed 'called Um-soof, or 'mother of wool,' by the Arabs, another 1 called Bus, and the tall feathery-headed grass so well known to ' Indian sportsmen by the name of ' Tiger ' grass. The extent of ' these swamps is unknown, but more especially to the west of ' the river, it must be enormous. In all probability the greater ' portion of the region lying between the Bahr-el-Gebel and the ' Bahr-el-Ghazal is in the rainy season avast marsh The ' whole region has an aspect of desolation beyond the power of ' words to describe. It must be seen to be understood." a "North of Rejaf the ' marsh ' formation commences. A low ' ridge follows the water's edge on either bank. Beyond this ' again on both sides is a wide depression full of tall elephant ' grass and very swampy."3 1 Report on the Basin of the Upper Nile, p. 95. - Ibid., p. 98. 3 Ibid., p. 90. 173 THE EGYPTIAN ST DAN Th< ks through which, according to the centurions, the river rushed with tremendous force are hard to identify ; some rapid- appear to be referred to, and it is difficult not to think of the Fola Rapids in connection with their statement. These Rapids begin " in two or more falls with a drop of five or six M metres. . . . Below the falls the stream rushes down an extremely 14 narrow gorge with a very heavy slope, enclosed between vertical " walls of rocks. . . . The water tears through this channel in a sheet with an incredible velocity. . . . At the foot of "this race the river leaps into a deep cauldron or pot, which it •'tills with an apparently boiling mass of white water lashed into 11 " This cauldron is fifty metres long, and is not more than twelve metres across! Below this the channel widens out to thirty metres, " while the river thunders down in a series of rapids " for a considerable distance."1 It is to be regretted that more details of the report of the centurions have not come down to us. but it seems quite clear that their description of the Nile swamps ;ed upon personal observation. From about A.D. 54 to 260 the Nubians gave the Romans little trouble, and seem to have acquiesced in the arrangement which left them masters of the Nile Valley from Premnis (Ibrim) southwards. Kmperor after emperor added to the temples of id a few of them, e.g., Trajan, Hadrian, and Verus, built at Philae, Talmis, and other places in the district between 1 1 >akka. The Emperors Vespasian and Titus carried on building operations in the Oasis of Dakhla ■ (Oasis Minor), which lies a journey of lour days west of Al-Kharga, thereby, no doubt, attempting to establish friendly relations with the tribes of the V ert for the purposes of trade. The tribes of the Eastern Desert, however, whom the ancient ptians kn< n,or " Hill-men," towards the beginning of the third century a. p. began to encroach on the southern frontier ccupy the lands immediately to the south of it, and to the east and west of the Thebaid itself. It is said that had settlement- even in the Oasis of Kharga. To 1 Report on the Basin oft ' l m ^^ ^"^ w ° T< i •74 AN "ANAK" IN THE EASTERN DESERT DRAWING WATER. [From a photograph by Sir Reginald Wingate, K.C.B. THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN turn them out of Upper Egypt, for the tribes of the Eastern and its united against him; eventually he succeeded in gaining possession of Coptos, the most important city in Upper it, for all the trade from the East passed through it. During the early years of the reign of Diocletian (284-305) the inroads of the Blemmyes into Egypt became more and more frequent, and the Roman troops stationed at Syene and at trious posts in the Dodekaschoinos were unable to offer any effective resistance to the marauding bands on the river, and to stop those who invaded the Thebaid from the desert was impossible. Diocletian was unprepared to send a large army into the Sudan, and he therefore decided to withdraw his garrisons from Syene, Hiera-Sykaminos, &c*, and to hand over the protection of the Dodekasehoinos to the Nobatae. a powerful tribe of nomads who m the Western Desert. The Nobatae appear to have come originally from Dar Fur and Kordof&n, and in Diocletian's time their settlements extended to the Oasis of KhArga ; all the trade of tli*- Southern Sudan was in their hands, and their warlike and savage disposition made them suitable opponents of the Hamitic Blemmyes of the Eastern Desert They were the descendants of the " Mentiu," or "Cattle-men," who were a terror to the Pharaohs, and the ferocity of their modern representatives, the " Iiakkiira," or "Cattle-men,"' is too well known to need description, Nobatae Diocletian forthwith allotted lands round about Elephantine and on each side of the river, and he arranged to pay them annually a sum of money in return for their guardianship of Roman in At the same time he made an agreement with the Blemmyes, in which he undertook to give them yearly a n payment in money provided that they ceased to raid \ pt and the territory which belonged to the Romans. l Thi letian built a strong fortress on an island near Elephantine, and set up a temple and altars whereat the Romans and the Barbarians might adjust their differences in a friendly manner, and renew their oaths to each other in the presence of : by the various parties to the agreement. At Philae and the Blemmyes worshipped Isis, Osiris, and 1 ri Ktu BXfpvo-iv (Ta£f diftoadai di(\ nciu eroj prjrov ti \pv(riov cj> f the Nubians, otherwise they could not have been per- formed, and there is little doubt that the conversion of the Ltae to Christianity, which was brought about through the instrumentality of the Empress Theodora, about A.D. 540, pre- ay for the closing of the temple of Isis. Under riusll.0 the tribes of the Sudan again made them- tublesome, but their revolt was crushed by Aristomachus, maiider-in-chief of the Roman forces in Egypt, and we 1 Procopius, Persico, ANAK" HOUSE AT GEBEL MAMAN ON THE OLD CARAVAN ROAD BETWEEN KASALA AND SAWAKIN. [From a photograph by Sir Reginald Wingate, K.C.B. THE BLEMMYES OR BEJA hear nothing more of them for nearly a century. The Romans were fully occupied in keeping the Persians out of Egypt, and the nomads of the Eastern and Western Deserts were left to govern themselves in their own way. APPENDIX TO CHAPTER XL AL-MAKRlZl's DESCRIPTION OF THE BEJA.1 The beginning of the country of Beja is from the city of Kharba, at the emerald mines in the desert of Kus, about three 2 days' journey from that town. Jaheth mentions that there are no other emerald mines in the world, but in this spot. They are found in far extended and dark caverns, into which they enter with lights and cords, for fear of going astray, and with these they trace their way back. They dig for the emeralds with axes, and find them in the midst of stones, surrounded by a substance of less value, [i.e., mica], and inferior in colour and brilliancy. The extremities of Beja touch upon the confines of Habesh [Ethiopia]. The Beja live in the midst of the island, meaning the island of Egypt, as far as the shores of the salt sea, and towards the island of Sawakin, and Nadha, and Dahlak. They are Bedouins, and fetch the herbs, wherever they grow, in leathern sacks. They reckon lineage from the female side. Each clan has a chief ; they have no sovereign, and acknowledge no religion. With them the son by the daughter, or the son by the sister, succeeds to the property, to the exclusion of the true son, and they allege that the birth of the daughter, or sister's son, is more certain, because, at all events, whether it is the husband or some one else who is the father, he is always her son. They had formerly a chief, upon whom the minor chiefs depended, who lived at the village of Hejer, on the extremity of the island of Beja. They ride choice camels, of a reddish colour, the breed of which they rear, and the Arabian camel is likewise there met with in great numbers. Their cows are very handsome, and of various colours, with very large horns ; others without any horns ; their sheep are spotted, and full of milk. Their food is flesh and milk, with little cheese, though 1 See Burckhardt, Travels, p. 503 ff. 2 Al-Mas'ftdl says ten. 179 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN some of them eat it. Their bodies are full grown, their stomachs emaciated, their colour has a yellowish tinge. They are swift in running, by which they distinguish themselves from other people. Their camels are likewise swift and indefatigable, and patiently bear thirst ; they outrun horses with them, and fight on their backs, and turn them round with ease. They perform journeys which appear incredible. In battle the Beja pursue each other with their camels : when they throw the lance, and it adheres, the camel flies after it, and its master takes it again ; but if the lance falls down, the cam 1 lowers its hinder parts to permit the master to take the lance up from the ground. They are people of good faith ; if any of them has defrauded his guest, the latter holds up a shirt on the end of his lance, and exclaims, " This is the tent-covering of such a one," meaning the guilty ; the people then abuse the culpable until he satisfies the defrauded. They are very hospitable ; if a guest arrives, they kill for him (a sheep) ; if there be more than three people, they slaughter a camel of the nearest herd, whether it belongs to them or to any one else ; and if nothing else is at hand, they kill the camel upon which the guest arrived, and afterwards give him a better in return. Their arms are the lances called *' Sebaye," with an iron point three pics in length, and a wooden shaft of four pics, for which reason they are called " Seb The iron head is of the breadth of a sword. They very seldom deposit these lances, but keep them always in their hands. On the extremity of the wood is something like a handle, which ■nts it from slipping through the hand. These lances are made by women, at a place where they have no intercourse- with men, except with those who come to buy the lances. If any of women bears a female child by one of these visitors, they permit it to live ; but if a male, they kill it, saying that all men are a plague and a misfortune. Their shields are made of cow- skins full of hair ; and others of their shields, called Aksomye,1 are inverted in shape, and made of buffalo skin, as are likewise the Dahlakye, or else of the skin of a sea animal. Their bow is the Arabian bow, large and thick, made of the wood of Seder and Shohat ; they use them with poisoned arrows : the poison is 1 From the city Axum. 180 THE BLEMMYES OR BE J A made of the root of the tree Falfa (or Galga), which is boiled over the fire until it dissolves into a glue. To try its efficacy, one of the people scratches his skin, and lets the blood flow ; if the blood, upon being touched with the poison, is driven back, they know that the poison is strong, and they wipe the blood off, that it may not return into the body and kill the person. If the arrow hits a man, it kills him in an instant, even though the wound be not larger than the scratch made in cupping ; but it has no effect except in wounds, and in blood, and it may be drunk without any harm. The country is full of mines ; the higher it is ascended the richer it is found to be in gold. There are mines of silver, copper, iron, lead, loadstone, marcasite, hamest, emeralds, and a very brittle stone, of which if a piece is rubbed with oil, it burns like a wick ; other similar productions are found in their researches after gold ; but the Beja work none of these mines except those of gold. In their valleys grow the tree Mokel \ditm palm ?], and the Ahlylej [myrobolan ?], and the Adkher, the Shyh [Artemisia?], Sena, Coloquintida, Ban [tamarisk ?], and others. On the farthest confines of their country dates, and vines, and odoriferous plants, and others grow naturally. All sorts of wild animals are seen here, as lions, elephants, tigers, fahed, monkeys, weasels (?), civet cats, and a beautiful animal resembling the gazelle, with two horns of a golden colour ; it holds out but a short time when it is hunted. Their birds are the parrot, the taghteit, the nouby, the pigeon called narein, the wood dove, the Abyssinian fowl, and others. Maribus omnibus in hac regione testiculorum dexter abstrahitur : praecisa autem foeminarum labia pudendi, intensione prima, ut medici dicunt, contrahuntur et sibi invicem radicitus adhaerent ; ante nuptias perforantur, cum rima ad mensuram inguinis virilis efficitur. Haec autem, quae jam rarior est, con- suetodo, originem traxisse fertur ex antiquo pacis foedere, cum tyranno quodam inito, qui, ad gentem funditus defendam, universis imperavit, ut masculorum liberorum testiculos, alterius autem sexus mammas abscinderent : hi vero, diversa ratione, maribus quidem mammas, foeminis pudenda exsecabant. A race of Beja tear out their back teeth, alleging that they do not wish to resemble asses. Another of their races living on the 181 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN extremity of their country is called Baza. Among them all the women are called by the same name, and so are the men. A Moslira merchant once travelled through their country, who, happening to be a handsome man, they called out to each other and said, " This is God descended from heaven ; " and they kept looking at him from afar while he sat under a tree.1 The serpents of this country are large and of many different species: it is related that a serpent was once lying in a pond, with its tail above water, and that a woman who came in search of water looked at it, and died in convulsions. Here lives a serpent with- out a head, not large, with both extremities (or sides) alike, and of a spotted colour. If a person walks upon its track, he dies ; and if it is killed, and the person takes into his hand the stick that killed it, he himself is killed; one of these serpents was once killed by a stick, and the stick split in two. If any of these serpents, whether alive or dead, is looked at, the beholder will be hurt. Tin Beja country is always in commotion, and the people are prone to mischief. During the [slam, and before that time, they had oppressed the eastern banks of Upper Egypt, and had ruined many villages. The Pharaoh kings of Egypt made incursions against them, and at other times left them in peace, on account of their works at the gold mines ; and the Greeks did the same when they took Egypt. Remarkable ruins of Greek origin are still to be seen at the mines, and their people were in possession of these mines when Egypt was conquered by the Moslems. The interior Beja live in the desert between the country of Aloa and the salt sea, and extend to the limits of the country of sh. Their people rear cattle and are pastors : their \\ living, their ships, and army, are like those of the Hadharebe, but the latter are a more courageous and more religious people, whilst those of the interior all remain infidels. They adore the devil, and follow the example of their priests : every (Ian has its priest, who pitches a tent made of feathers, in the shape of a dome, wherein he practises his adorations ; when they consult him about their affairs, he strips naked, and enters the tent stepping backwards; he afterwards issues with the appearance of a mad 1 Burckhardt says that when the Beja women saw him they uttered a shriek, and those who spoke Arabic exclaimed, "God preserve us from the devil ! '' 182 THE BLEMMYES OR BEJA and delirious person, and exclaims, " The devil salutes you, and tells you to depart from this place, for that a hostile party (naming it) will fall upon you." If you ask advice about an expedition which you may be about to undertake against any particular country, he often answers, " March on, and you will be victorious, and will take booty to such an amount, and the camels you will take at such a place must be my property, as well as the female slave you will find in such a tent, and the sheep," &c. On the march, the priest loads his tent upon a camel destined for that sole purpose, and they believe that the camel rises up from the ground, and walks with great difficulty, and that it sweats pro- fusely, although the tent is quite empty, and nothing is in it. Among the Hadharebe live some of those people who still retain this religion, and others who mix with it the Islam. 183 CHAPTER XII. THE MUHAMMADAN INVASION AND OCCUPATION OF THE SUDAN. The fortress of Babylon in Egypt fell into the hands of the Muhammadans under 'Amr ibn al-'Asi, general of Omar the Khalifa, on the 9th of April, 641, and thus Egypt, and such portions of the Sudan as were regarded as her possessions, at once became a province of the new Muhammadan Empire. As soon as the fortress was taken 'Amr at once set about occupying the principal divisions of Egypt, and sent troops into Alexandria, Damietta, and Tinnis in Lower Egypt, and into the Fayyum and other portions of Upper Egypt. About a year after the conquest of Egypt 'Amr sent an expedition into Nubia1 under one of his generals called 'Abd-Allah bin Sa'd, whose force consisted of twenty thousand men.2 Al-Mas'udi tells us (chap, xxxiii.) that the Arabs attacked the Nubians, and discovered that they 1 " In the history of Bahnase (Oxyrhinchus), and that of its valorous defence ust the Arab conquerors of Egypt, I find it stated, that a large army of as and Xoubas, headed by Maksouh, king of Bedja, and Ghalyk, king of " Nouba, came to the assistance of the Christian chief, Batlos, who was besieged thnase, by the officers of Amr Ibn el Aas. This black army is said to have of 50,000 men. They had with them 1,300 elephants, each bearing "upon its back a vaulted house made of leather, in which ten men took their > ittle. In the company of the Bedjas were a race of men of otic stature, called El-Kowad, coming from beyond Souakin. They were " covered with tiger skins, and in their upper lips copper rings were fixed. The ims defeated this army. There is a strange mixture of truth and romance i in this history, but the arrival of the Bedja army is so well authenticated by a •• train of witnesses, that little doubt can remain of it having really taken place ; ■ ugh the number both of men and elephants seems to be exaggerated. The of southern Nubia are, as far as I know, no longer used to ride " upon." (Burckhardt, Travels, p. 528.) The giants referred to above arc ) those who in modern times are known by the name of " Anaks." rhe authority for this statement is Al-Makri/i. For the Arabic text, see oq Bey Shucair, History of 'the Stiddn, vol. ii., p. 42. 184 CAPTURE OF DONGOLA were first-class archers, but he does not say where the fight took place. 'Abd-Allah stayed in Nubia for some time, and there is little doubt that he found his task not so easy as he had imagined ; he was at length recalled by 'Amr, who, however, gave the Nubians no rest so long as he had power in Egypt. The Arabs appear to have entrenched themselves strongly at Aswan, which they made their frontier city, and they soon found that the Nubians were ever ready to cause them trouble, and to break out in revolt. When 'Abd-Allah returned to Fustat (Cairo), the Nubians saw their opportunity, and, pouring northwards from the south, they invaded Egypt and laid waste the country far and wide. For some years the Arabs watched these invasions in silence, but at length, in 652, 'Abd-Allah returned to the Sudan and crushed the rebellion of the Blacks with merciless rigour. The capital of the new kingdom of the Blacks, who were now Christians, had been placed at Dongola (Old), a town situated on the east bank of the Nile, about 280 miles south of Wadi Haifa, by Silko, the king of the Blemmyes, about a.d. 450. To this town 'Abd-Allah sailed or marched, and, when he had battered down all itschief buildings, including the church, with stones which hehurled against them from slings, the natives cried out for peace. Their king Koleydozo1 came out of the town with all " the signs of weak- ness, misery, and humbleness," and was graciously received by 'Abd-Allah, who granted him peace on the condition that he paid the annual tribute of slaves, which had already been agreed upon by 'Amr. Al-Makrizi says that his Bdkt,- or tribute, consisted of three hundred and sixty slaves, but Al-Mas'udi gives the number as three hundred and sixty-five, and says that besides these, there were forty slaves for the governor of Egypt, twenty for the governor of Aswan, five for the judge, and twelve for the inspectors, whose duty it was to see that the slaves were in a sound and healthy condition. The place fixed for the payment of the Bakt was Al-Kasr (i.e., the Fortress), near the Island of Philae, on the western bank, six miles from Aswan. The king of Dongola having agreed to observe faithfully the stipulation which had been made by 'Amr, 'Abd-Allah made a treaty with him, the contents 1 Burckhardt, Travels, p. 511. 2 WsJI. 185 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of which. en by Al-Makrizi, who quotes Ibn-Selim Al- ii. ;uv well worth recording here ; it reads : — ' " In the Name of God, &c. This is a treaty granted by the • Emir 'Abd-Allah ibn Sa'd ibn Abi-Sarh, to the chief of the • Nubians and to all the people of his dominions, a treaty binding 'on great and small among them, from the frontier of Aswan to ' the frontier of 'Aiwa. 'Abd-Allah ibn Sa'd ordains security and 'peace between them and the Muslims, their neighbours in Upper pt, as well as all other Muslims and their tributaries. pie of Nubia, ye shall dwell in safety under the safeguard of ' God and His Apostle, Muhammad the Prophet, whom God ' bless and save ! We will not attack you, nor wage war on you, ' nor make incursions against you, so long as ye abide by the ' terms settled between us and you. When ye enter our country, it ' shall be but as travellers, not as settlers, and when we enter your ' country it shall be as travellers, not settlers. Ye shall protect ' those Muslims or their allies who shall come into your land and ' travel there, until they quit it. Ye shall give up the slaves of ' Muslims who seek refuge among you, and send them back to the 4 country <>f Islam ; and likewise the Muslim fugitive who is at ' war with the Muslims, him ye shall expel from your country to 'the realm oi Islam: ye shall not espouse his cause nor prevent ' his capture. Ye shall put no obstacle in the way of a Muslim, ' but render him aid till he quit your territory. Ye shall take care 'of the mosque which the Muslims have built in the outskirt of ' your city, and hinder none from praying there ; ye shall clean it, ' and Light it. and honour it. Every year ye shall pay three ' hundred and sixty head of slaves to the leader of the Muslims, of 'tin- middle class of the slaves of your country, without bodily 'delects, males and females, but no old men, nor old women, nor 'young children. Ye shall deliver them to thegovernor of Aswan. • No Muslim shall be bound to repulse an enemy from yon or ittack him, or hinder him, from 'Aiwa to Aswan. If ye ' harbour a Muslim slave, or kill a Muslim or an ally, or attempt ' to destroy the mosque which the- Muslims have built in the out- 1 skirt of your city, or withhold any of the three hundred and ad of slaves, — then this promised peace and security will withdrawn from you. and we shall revert to hostility, until ' God decide betw the best of umpires. Forour 'performance of these conditions we pledge our word, in the name ind our compact and faith, and belief in the name of 'His Apostle Muhammad, God bless and save him! And for 'your performance of the same ye pledge yourselves by all that hold most sacred in your religion ; by the Messiah, and by -tie--, and by all whom ye revere in your creed and • Poole's translation {Middle Ages,y>. 21) : see also Burckhardt, Travels, p. 511. 186 THE ARABS IN THE SUDAN " religion. And God is witness of these things between us and " you. Written by 'Amr ibn Shurahbil in Ramadan in the year "31" (A.D. 652). When the Nubians paid the Bakt to 'Amr, they added forty slaves as a present for himself, but these he refused to accept, and returned them to Samkus, the inspector of the Bakt, who gave the Nubians wine and provisions for them. The additional forty slaves were always sent with the tribute, and in later times the Nubians received in exchange wheat, barley, wine, horses, and stuffs.1 The Bakt was paid regularly by the Nubians for a period of about six hundred years. In the year 722,2 under the rule of the Khalifa 'Omar ibn 'Abd al-'Aziz, 'Obed Allah ibn al-Habbab, the treasurer, carried out a general destruction of the sacred pictures of the Christians in Egypt. This resulted in a rising of the Copts in the Delta, which, though suppressed for a time, broke out again when the Coptic Patriarch was imprisoned. The Nubians were so enraged at the ill-treatment which their co-religionists received that their king Cyriacus marched into Egypt at the head of one hundred thousand men, and was only induced to return to his own country by the request of the Patriarch, who was hastily liberated. Under the rule of the Beni 'Ommia and the Beni 'Abbas,3 the Nubians sold several villages to the inhabitants of Aswan, and when Ma'mun became Khalifa (a.d. 813) their king appealed to him for protection against the men of Aswan. The matter was referred to the governor of Aswan, and the sale was confirmed.4 Under the rule of Ma'mun the Beja, i.e., the tribes of the Eastern Desert, caused the Muslims a great deal of trouble, and at length, in 831, 'Abd-Allah ibn Jahan set out to do battle against them. This general defeated them several times, and finally made a treaty with their king Kanun, who lived at Hejer. In this it was stipulated that the Beja should pay an annual tribute 1 The exact amounts are given by Burckhardt, Travels, p. 512. 2 Stanley Lane Poole. Middle Ages, p. 27. 'A These tribes appear to have made their way into the Eastern Sudan from Arabia in the eighth century, and to have settled on the Blue Nile and near the modern Sennaar. 4 Burckhardt, Travels, p. 517. 187 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of one hundred camels, or three hundred dinars, that the country from Asw&n to Dahlak and Nadha should be the property of the Khalifa, who should be the overlord of the whole district. Further, the Beja were not to mention disrespectfully the name of Muhammad, or his Kur'an, or the religion of God, or to kill a Muslim, whether he were free man or slave, or to assist the enemies of the Muslims, or to rob a Muslim, wherever he might nd i! they did, they were to pay the blood fine ten-fold, and /alue of the slave ten-fold, and the value of any Muslim tributary ten-fold. Muslim merchants and pilgrims were to be permitted to pass through the country in safety. Muslim run- aways, or fugitives, and strayed cattle were to be given up, and in tin- latter case no fees were to be paid. The Beja were to be unarmed when travelling in Egypt. Muslims were to be allowed to trade in Beja land without molestation, their goods were not to be pilfered, and they were to pass through the land at will. N<> mosque of the Muslims was to be injured, and officers were to be allowed to enter Beja land to collect alms from the true believers. The Nubian king Kanun ibn Aziz was to appoint an Agent in Upper Egypt to ensure the payment of the tribute as well as of fines. No Beja was to enter the Nuba country between Al-Kasr, near Philae, and Kubban. This treaty was translated by Zakarya ibn Sfdah of Jidda and 'Abd-Allah ibn [sma'll, and some of the inhabitants of Aswan were witnesses then About ,\.n. 833 the Nubians appear to have become somewhat lax in the payment of the Bakt. and the Muslims of the frontier ped the supply of provisions which they had been o send to them Zakarya ibn Bahnas, the king of d by his son Frraki, then determined to cease to tribute, and if necessary to prepare to fight his overlord, the Khalifa Mo'tasim (833-842). Feraki set out for Baghdad in to lay his father's case before the Khalifa, and he was n his journey by the king of the Beja and his retinue. Khalifa received Feraki very kindly, and accepted his ing him in return gifts which were double their value. He told Feraki to a>k for any favour he wished, and Nubian prince at once asked that certain Nubian prisoners 188 REVOLT OF THE BEJA might be set free ; this the Khalifa at once did. Feraki found great favour in his sight, and the Khalifa made him a present of the house wherein he had alighted in Mesopotamia, and bought two houses for him in Cairo, one at Giza, and one at Beni Wayl in Cairo. When Mo'tasim inquired into the question of the Bakt, he found that the gifts given by the Muslims to the Nubians exceeded in value their tribute ; thereupon he refused to send them any more wine, and reduced the quantity of corn and of the stuffs which was to be given to them, and he decreed that the Bakt was to be paid at intervals of three years. The Nubian king next demanded that the fortress of Al-Kasr should be removed from his territory to the frontier, and appealed for justice in the matter of certain lands which the inhabitants of Aswan had purchased from his slaves ; in each case his suit was rejected by the Khalifa, and the Bakt was paid according to his decree.1 In 854 the Beja broke faith with the Muslims and declined to pay the tribute, which at that time consisted of four hundred slaves, male and female, a number of camels, two elephants, and two giraffes. They slew the Egyptian officers and miners who were working the emerald mines in the Eastern Desert, and then invaded Upper Egypt, and plundered the towns of Esna, or Asna, and Edfu, and drove out the inhabitants from these and many other cities. 'Ambasa, the Muslim governor of Egypt, wrote to his master Al-Mutawakkil at Baghdad, and asked for instructions. Notwithstanding the reports which had reached him of the savagery of the Beja and their country, Al-Mutawakkil determined to punish the rebels. The Muslim troops were collected quickly at Kuft (Coptos), Esna, Erment, and Aswan on the Nile, and at Kuser on the Red Sea, with large stores of weapons, horses, camels, &c. Seven ships were manned at Kulzum, and laden with stores, and they sailed for Sanga near 'Aydhab,2 the chief port on the African coast 1 Ibn Selim Al-Aswani, quoted by Burckhardt, Travels, p. 514. 2 'Aydhab was seventeen days' journey from Kus on the Nile ; it had no walls, and most of its houses were built of mats. It was formerly one of the first harbours in the world, because the ships of India and Yemen brought their merchandise there ; it maintained its important position until 189 THE EGYPTIAN ST DAN of the R The commander, Muhammad of Kumm, marched from Ki'is, with 7,000 men, crossed the desert to the emerald mines, and even went near Dongola. 'All Baba, king of the Sudan, collected a large army, and prepared to meet him, but as his men were naked and armed only with short spears, they were at a great disadvantage. Their camels were, moreover, ill-trained and unmanageable. The Nubians skirmished from place to place, and had nearly worn out the Muslims, when the seven ships from Kulzum appeared off the coast. The Muslim general hung camel- bells round the necks of his horses, and when the Blacks came on to attack him, he suddenly charged them with the cry of" Allahu Akbar," i.e., " God is the Great One." The clang of the bells on the horses' necks and the noise of the drums and the shoutings so terrified the camels, that they threw their riders and, turning tail, stampeded. 'Ali Baba himself escaped, but his forces were ted with great slaughter, and he sued for peace, and agreed to pay the arrears of the Bakt, or tribute. Muhammad of Kumm received him with honour, made him sit on his own carpet, gave him rich presents, and induced him to go to Fustat, and later, in 855, to see the Khalifa at Baghdad.' 'Ali Bab8 also undertook not to obstruct the work of the Muslims at the emerald mines. \. i). 1420, when Aden took its place. It lay in a bare desert, and all provisions, and even water, were imported. Its inhabitants grew rich by the taxes which ■ vied on the merchants who thronged the place, and they took toll on every camel-load of goods ; and they hired out to the pilgrims to Mekka the ships wherein they sailed to Jidda and back, thereby making much profit. Close to 'Aydh&b was a pearl fishery, and the divers, when not working, lived in the town. The people of 'Aydh&b lived like brutes, and were more like animals than men. The ships that carried the pilgrims were made without nails. They bound the planks with ropes made of cocoa-tree bark, and drove into them pegs made of palm-tree wood, and they pouted over them butter, or oil made from a plant or taken from a large fish which devoured those who were drowned. The sails were of mats made from the produce of the Mokel tree. The men of 'Aydh&b overcrowded their ships, saying, "To us belongs the care of the ships, and to the pilgrims that of their own selves." The inhabitants of 'Aydhab were Bejas, who were said to have no religion, and to be people of no undemanding. Their males and females were constantly round their loins, but many of them having no tig whatsoever. 1 This narrative is told by Ibn Miskaweh, and is translated by Burckhardt, els, pp. 508-509, and by Poole, Middle Ages, pp. 41-42. 190 THE NUBIANS REJECT ISLAM In 878 Abu 'Abd Ar-Rahman ibn 'Abd-Allah marched to the gold mines in the Eastern Desert, with 6,000 camels and a large number of men, and for a time he carried on work there, and obtained much gold. The local Arabs caused him much trouble, and he moved on to Shankir, to the south of Dongola; here he attacked the Nubians who were led by their king George, and defeated him. In 956 the king of the Nubians attacked Aswan, and slew many of the Muslims there, and in the following year Muhammad ibn 'Abd-Allah marched against him and defeated him. Mu- hammad sent many Nubian prisoners tq Cairo, where they were beheaded, and he captured Ibrim (Primis), took its inhabitants captive, and returned to Cairo with 150 prisoners and many heads. A few years later the Nubians again invaded Egypt, and took possession of the country so far north as Akhmim. In 969 Gawhar, the governor of Egypt, sent a mission to George, king of Nubia, to receive the customary tribute and to invite him to embrace Islam. George received the envoy Ahmad ibn Solaim with great courtesy, and, presumably, paid the tribute, but he remained a Christian. In 1005 the peace of Nubia was disturbed in a singular manner. A member of the royal 'Umayyad family,1 who adopted the name of " Abu. Rakwa," i.e., "father of the leather bottle," from the leather water-skin which he carried after the manner of the Dervishes, took possession of Barka, defeated the troops of Hakim, who had been sent against him, overran Egypt, and vanquished the Khalifa's troops again at Giza, where he encamped. He found it necessary to retreat to Nubia with his followers, where he was joined by the Nubians, but he was subsequently overcome, and his head and the heads of 30,000 of his followers were sent to Cairo, and thence in procession through all the towns of Syria on the backs of 100 camels, and then thrown into the Euphrates. Fadl, the general who had brought about his defeat, was ill-rewarded for his services. He was unlucky enough to enter Hakim's presence as he was cutting up the body of a beautiful little child whom he had just murdered. Fadl was horrified, and, knowing that he had seen too much, went home, 1 Abu Salih calls him Al-Walid ibn Hisham al-Khariji. 191 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN made his will, and admitted the Khalifa's headsman an hour later.' In 1 173 an expedition into Nubia was undertaken by the elder brother of §alah ad-Din (Saladin), who was called Shams ad- Dawlah Tur&n Shah, and surnamed Fakhr ad-Din, first with the view of compelling the Nubians to pay tribute, and secondly to find out if it was a suitable country for the retreat of his brother Saladin in the event of his needing to fly from Egypt beyond the reach of his overlord Nur ad-Din Turan Shah crossed into Nubia from Yemen, and, driving all the natives before him. he arrived at Ibrim, or Primis, which was well supplied with provisions and arms. The Nubians made a stubborn defence, but were defeated, and their city was destroyed, and all its inhabitants, about 700,000 men, women, and children, were taken prisoners. In the city were found 700 pigs,-' which the Muslims promptly killed. The Muslim conqueror ordered the cross on the ehurch to be burned, and his followers pillaged the church, and the Muslim call t<> prayer was chanted from the top of its dome. Tiie bishop of the district, who was in the city, was examined by torture, but he had no hidden treasure to reveal, and he was there ton' made prisoner and thrown into the fortress on the- hill, which was very strong. A large quantity of cotton was found in the city, and this Turan Shah sent to Kus in Upper Egypt and sold. Having left a company of horsemen in Ibrim, with an abundant supply of food, arms, and ammunition, Turan Shah departed. Abu Snlih tells us:: that Saladin went with the Patriarch Anba Kha'il to beg for assistance from the Nubians when George was king of Nubia. George was tilled with wrath when he heard of the treatment meted out to the Patriarch, and he collected 00 men and as man_\- camels, and inarched into Egypt, which he everywhere laid waste. At Length In- reached ( airo. Mr. Butler has already pointed out, took place in the reign of Marwan II.. the last 'Umayyad Khalifa (a.d. 750- 1 Poole, Midii. Shucair, History of the Suilhu ii.. p. 50. Kvetts and But'er. p. 267; Poole, \ftdd . 197; . ii., p. 51 . 3 lid. Evetts and Butlei I')-' SALADIN AND BEBARS 754), and the Emir of Egypt was nor Saladin, but 'Abd al-Malik ibn Miisa ibn Nasir. In 1174 Saladin's forces defeated the army of Kanz ad-Dawlah, the rebel governor of Aswan, who had marched against Cairo with an army of Blacks and Arabs. A battle took place near the village of Tiid, and the rebel's followers were routed with great slaughter. Kanz ad-Dawlah himself escaped, but he was killed soon afterwards. For a period of about twenty years there appears to have been peace between the Nubians and Saladin, and at his death on March 4th, 119.3, the port of Aswan became deserted, and the town fell into a state of decay. In 1275 the Muslims annexed the Sudan. This result was brought about by Dawud, the king of the Nubians, who refused to pay the Bakt which had been fixed by 'Amr ibn al-'Asi soon after the capture of Babylon of Egypt, and broke the terms of his treaty with the Muslims by seizing numbers of Arabs, and carrying them off as prisoners, both at Aswan and at 'Aydhab, the chief port of the Bejaon the Red Sea. Moreover, Dawud burned many water-wheels on the Nile, whereby much of the land went out of cultivation. The Egyptian governor of Kus set out to do battle with him, but could not overtake him ; the governor, however, succeeded in seizing many Nubians, and the Lord of the Mountain,1 and having taken these to Cairo, the Bahrite Mamluk Khalifa Rukn ad-Din Bebars (1260-1277) ordered them all to be hewn in twain. Now it happened at this time that Shakanda, the son of the sister of Dawud, came to Cairo to ask assistance, and to plead against the injustice which he had suffered at his uncle's hands. Bebars espoused the nephew's cause, and sent him, together with a large army under the command of two Amirs, into Nubia to overthrow his uncle. The army consisted of horsemen, spear- men, bowmen, and men who were skilled in burning down the buildings of an enemy. When the Muslim force arrived in Nubia it was met by Dlwud's army, the spearmen of which were mounted on camels ; both sides fought bravely, but the Nubians were defeated, and fled. The Muslims advanced into Nubia by desert and by river, and 1 I.e., the governor of the islands of Mika'il and of the province of Daw. VOL. II. 193 O THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN - after fortress, and slew many men, and took many prisoners. At length they reached the Island of Mik;Vil (Michael),1 at the •' head of the Cataracts," and drove back the Nubian boats, whereupon the Nubians fled to the islands in the Nile. Large numbers of cattle fell into the hands of the Muslims. Thereupon Kamr ad- Da wl ah, the general of Dawud. swore allegiance to Shakanda, and, as the Amir Farkani gave him a safe-conduct, he went and brought back the people of Meris to their towns, and all the fugitives. The other Amir, Al-Afram, then besieged a tower on a small island in the river and took it. Here Dawud and his brother had taken refuge. Two hundred men were slain. Dawud's brother was taken prisoner, but Dawud himself escaped: he was pursued by the Muslim soldiers for three days, but they could not overtake him. His mother and sister, however, fell into the hands of the enemy. The Amirs now established Shakanda as king of Nubia, and 1, I to pay annually three elephants, three giraffes, five panthers, one hundred camels of good stock, and four bund' . He promised to divide the revenue of his country into two parts, one of which was to be given to I or his successor, and the other to be devoted to the upkeep and guarding of the country. The territory of the Cataracts, since it was near Aswan, was to belong to Bebars; this territory was equal to one quart Nubia, and at that time produced cotton and dates. Besides all this, so Ion- as the Nubians remained Christians, Shakanda under- took t<> pay annually one gold dinar as poll tax, for every adult male of the population. He also swore a solemn oath to observe dit ions on behalf of himself, and his subjects also inn oaths on behalf of themselves. The Amirs then ►yed the churches of Nubia, and carried off everything of value which they found in them. They seized the p about twenty Nubian chiefs, and set free the Muslim prisoners from Aswan and 'Aydhab. When Shakanda had taken the oath, is set upon the throne and crowned king. He was compelled ve Up to I'.ebars all the property of Dawud, as well as all that of those who had been killed or taken captive, in addition to the V'hich then consisted of four hundred head of : Perhaps the Island of S.'u. MANSUR KALAIX slaves and one giraffe ; in return he was to receive one thousand ardebs of wheat, and his delegates three hundred.1 In 1287 Al-Mansur Kala'un sent an expedition into Nubia, which raided the country for a distance of fifteen days' journey south of Dongola. Before his generals returned to Cairo they established a garrison in that city, but so soon as they had retired the Nubians rose and drove out the garrison, and Kala'un was obliged to send a second army to Nubia to put down the revolt and to punish the rebels. The first expedition was undertaken as the result of a request made by Adiir, king of the Gates, who made complaints against Shemamun, king of Nubia, and sent a gift of elephants and a giraffe to Kala'un. The king of Dongola then sent four hundred and twenty-six head of slaves, and two hundred cattle, which he caused to be taken to Kus. When Shemamun saw the Muslims approaching he fled, and a great number of his soldiers were slain. Jures, " the Lord of the Mountain," and one of the king's cousins were taken prisoners, and Shemamun's nephew was appointed king ; and the Muslims carried off large numbers of slaves, horses, camels, cattle, and stuffs. Shemamun then appeared and drove out the Egyptian garrison, and his nephew went to Kala'un and told him what had happened. When the second expedition reached Aswan, the king of Nubia, i.e., Shemamun's nephew, died, and a nephew of king Dawud was appointed in his stead. When the Muslim army entered Nubia, the soldiers massacred every one they found there, burned the water-wheels, and fed their horses on the crops. When they reached Dongola they only found there one old man and one old woman, for Shemamun and his followers had fled, and had taken refuge on an island which was fifteen days' journey from Dongola. When the Muslims arrived there, Shemamun retired to "the Gates," a further distance of three days' journey. Here he was abandoned by his officers and by the bishop and the priests, who took away from him his crown and the silver cross which he wore. They returned to Dongola, and, having partaken of a meal in the Church of Jesus, they crowned as king the nephew of Dawud, who took the oath of allegiance, and undertook to See Burckhardt, Travels, pp. 514-5 16 ; Poole, Middle Ages, p. 271; and Shucair, History of the 6uddn, ii., p. 52. 195 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN pay the tribute. As soon as the Muslims returned to Egypt, Shemamun reappeared, and all his soldiers flocked to his standard. Marching at their head, he attacked the palace at Dongola, made prisoner the new kin^, and so found himself master of the country more. He then cut the throat of a bull, and having cut the hide into strips, he bound the body of his prisoner with them, tying him to a post. As the strips of hide dried, they shrank and cut into the ex-king's body, and caused his death. Shemamun then slew Jures, " the Lord of the Mountain," and wrote and told Kala'un what he had done, and asked for his friendship, and promised to pay an increased tribute. His envoys took with them rich presents and many slaves, and as Kala'un took no steps to chastise Shemamun we may assume that lie condoned his behaviour. In i J04 An-Nasir sent an expedition into Nubia to replace on the throne Amai, who had come to Cairo to implore his help : the leader of the Muslim troops was Sef ad-Din Taktuba, governor ^i K u s. In 1 31 1 Kerenbes, king of Nubia, went to Egypt after his brother's death, and took the appointed tribute with him. The following year Muhammad ibn Kala'un sent 'Abd -Allah, the son of Sanbu, to Nubia, with an army under the command of ad-Din Ibek, who was ordered to crown Sanbu king. Kerenbes and his brother Ibrahim fled from Dongola, but they soon fell into the hands of the Muslims, and were sent to Cairo and cast into prison. Sanbu was crowned kin^, and the Amir and his army returned to Cairo. Thereupon Kanz ad-Dawlah went to Dongola, slew the new king, and ascended the throne of Nubia. On this the Sultan took Ibrahim out of prison and sent him to Nubia. promising him to set at liberty his brother Kerenbes so soon as he delivered Kanz ad-Dawlah bound into his hands. When Ibrahim came to Dongola, Kanz ad-Dawlah submitted, and Ibrahim arrested him, and would have sent him to Cairo only he (Ibrahim) died three days later; the Nubians then unanimously elected Kanz ad- Dawlah to be their king. In [324 Kerenbes returned to Dongola with two Amirs and a of soldiers, and Kanz ad-Dawlah lied on their approach. Kerenbes was crowned king, but when the Muslims had departed, 196 AKTAMUR KING OF NUBIA Kanz ad-Dawlah attacked him, and once more defeated him, and once more ascended the throne of Nubia. In 1365 the tribe of Kanz gained possession of Aswan and the desert of 'Aydhab, and they robbed the caravans, and plundered travellers, until at length no merchant dared to travel in that region. A nephew of the king of Nubia revolted, and attacked Dongola at the head of an army of Arabs, and in the fierce battle which took place the king was slain and his followers were scattered. The loyal Nubians placed their late king's brother on the throne, and entrenched themselves in Daw. The rebel nephew, having made himself king, invited all the chiefs of the Arabs who had assisted him to a great feast, and on the appointed day they came to the rendez-vous. Whilst they were feasting all the houses round about were filled with wood and set on fire, and, as the guests rushed out in alarm from the building in which they were, they were cut down by the soldiers of the new king who were stationed at the door. In this way nineteen Amirs and a large number of chiefs were slain. Not content with this, he fell upon the camp of the Arabs and massacred the greater part of them, and, having driven away the remainder, seized all their possessions. He then went to Daw, and, making peace with the last king's brother, joined with him in a petition to the Sultan that he would send them help to drive away the Arabs, and to regain possession of their kingdom. Their petition was granted, and a Muslim force was sent into Nubia. When its commander arrived there he learned that the king in the fortress of Daw was besieged by the Arabs. He passed on to Ibrim, and soon after joined forces with the king of Nubia. Without waiting for the remainder of his army, he seized the Awlad Kenz, and the Amirs of the Akremi Arabs, and then marched on the west bank of the river to the Island of Mika'il, whilst the king of Nubia and his forces marched along the right bank. They attacked the island on both sides, and nearly all the Akremi were killed by arrows or by Greek fire. The Amir Khalil ibn Kusun returned to the Amir Aktamiir with much spoil and many slaves. With the consent of Aktamur the king of Nubia took up his residence at Daw, for the town of Dongola was in ruins, and the nephew of the king was in Ibrim ; the former sent presents of 197 Ill K EGYPTIAN SUDAN 3, horses, and dromedaries to the Sultan in Cairo, which arrived in due course and were accepted. On their way back the Muslim generals took with them the chiefs of the Awlad Kenz and of the Akremi Arabs loaded with fetters. At Aswan they tarried seven days, and executed summary justice upon the slaves of the Awlad Kenz against whom complaints were n; In the same year the Sultan appointed Hosam, surnamed ;> Black blood," to be governor of Aswan, and sent to him the prisoners of the Awlad Ken/ who were in Cairo. When they reached Kus, Hosam had them nailed to pieces of wood, and, having marched them in this state t<> Aswan, he-wed them asunder there. Here he was compelled to fight the Awlad Ken/, but was ted, and Q&OSl of his soldiers were wounded. The con- rs wreaked their vengeance on the people of Aswan, ravaged the country round about, burned and destroyed the houses, slew the men, and carried off the women. In 1378 Kart, the governor of Aswan, sentto Cairo the heads of eleven chiefs, and two hundred men of the Awlad Ken/ in fetters : the heads were exhibited on the Bab Zuwela. In the same year the governor arrested an official called Golam Allah, and seized a number ofswords which it was believed he intended to hand over to the Awlad Kenz. At this time two members of that tribe, were nailed to wood, and, having been led through the Streets of Cairo and Kustat in this state, were hewn asunder. In [385 the Awlad Ken/ seized Aswan, and slew ti r number of its inhabitants. Husen, the son of Kart, was appointed rnor. About thn later the Awlad Ken/ committed further outrages in Aswan and the neighbourhood. In 1 marched against Aswan ami pillaged the town and plundered the house of HusSn, who had fled; the Muslims marched against them, but returned without having reduced the rebels. In 1 ;<»; Nasr ad-Dm. kin- of Nubia, lied to Cairo to beg iinst his cousin. In 1403 I ;vpt was in a state o{ desolation, and Aswan ceased to belong to the Sultan of Egypt. In 14 1 J the l.lawara tribe attacked and defeated the Awlad Ken/, killed many men, carried off the women, and destroyed the walls of Aswan, leaving the town a mass of ruins. From this time until 1517, when Seliin reconquered Egypt, the Awlad Ken/ were [98 THE SUDAN CHRISTIANIZED masters of the Northern Sudan, and the Khalifa lost all authority over them. From the facts derived from the works of Muhammadan historians given above, we see that the raids and expeditions of the Muslims into Nubia, which took place between 640 and 1400, with one or two exceptions, were confined to that portion of the country which lies between Aswan and Gebel Barkal, and that, speaking generally, no serious attempt was made by the Khalifas to rule or occupy the Sudan from Gebel Barkal to Khartum. When we remember the conquests of the Arabs in Western Asia, Egypt, and other countries, it seems certain that the Khalifas of Baghdad and their viceroys in Egypt would have liked to obtain possession of the Nile Valley, and the adjoining countries, and we may be sure that they would have taken possession of the lands which produced slaves, and gold, and ivory if it had been at all practicable. The chief obstacle which stood in the way of their ambition was the Christian kingdom of Nubia, with its capital at Dongola, and there appears to be no doubt that the tide of the Muslim conquest from Egypt southwards was stayed by it for about seven hundred years. Christianity became the official religion of Nubia in the first half of the sixth century, and in spite of raids, persecutions, and the payment of heavy tribute, the dwellers on the Nile clung both to their own language and to the Christian religion, as they understood it, until the fourteenth century, when the Christian kingdom of 'Aiwa on the Island of Meroe fell to pieces. The extraordinary people who occupied the banks of the Nile from Aswan to Dongola preserved also all the fundamental customs which had descended to them from Pagan times, and though they learned Arabic and talked it, their own language never fell into disuse. The Christian Nubian kingdom, which extended from Aswan to the Blue Nile, came to an end through internal dissensions, and through the attacks made upon it by the peoples who lived on its eastern, western, and southern frontiers. Its fall was hastened by the rise to power of a number of Arab tribes, and of a powerful negro triba called " Fung." There is no doubt that Arabs in limited numbers had been crossing the Red Sea from the various provinces of Arabia and settling in the rich countries 199 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN on the Blue Nile for centuries, even before the rise of Islam. After the establishment of the Muhammadan power it is quite certain that the immigration of the Arabs increased, and that their caravans travelled in all parts of the Sudan where profitable business could be done. The progress of such immigrants, and also of the negro tribes to the south and east of Khartum, was blocked by the Christian Nubian kingdom, and it was greatly to their interest to bring about its abolition. During the fourteenth century the negro tribes between the Blue and White Niles began to obtain pre-eminence, and the descendants of the Muhammadan settlers from Arabia to lose power, and a century later, on the downfall of the cities of Dongola and Soba, the capitals of the Christian Nubian kingdom in the north and south respectively, the negro tribes found themselves to be the greatest power in the country. Chief among these was the tribe of the Fungs,1 whose original home, according to some, was in the Shilluk country, and, according to others, in Dar Fur. Many origins have been suggested for them, but in the absence of definite knowledge probability is all that can be claimed for the most reasonable of them. But what- ever their origin may have been, they fixed their capital at Sennaar. and their kingdom at the most flourishing period of its existence extended from the Third Cataract in the north to Fazd'gli in the south, and from Sawakin on the Red Sea on the east to the White Nile on the west. In 1493 the Fungs were the dominant power in the Northern Sudan, and in 1515 they founded their capital at Sennaar, with ' Amaka DUNKAS as their king. Little is known of this king's personal exploits, but he must have been an astute ruler, for, observing how the power of the Turks was increasing, he strengthened his kingdom by making an alliance with 'Abd-Allah (iema'a, a tribal chief, and conquered the tribes on tin- Blue Nile between Fazo'gli and Khartum. The founding of his kingdom at Sennaar followed as a matter of course. Twelve years after 'Amara Dunkas became king Selim the Sultan of Turkey, defeated the Egyptian army outside (early in 1517), and four days later he entered Cairo in 1 The Arabic opinions as to their origin are collected by Shucair in his •> y of t lie Siu/'hi, ii., pp. 7 1 -73. 200 THE FUNG KINGS state as the lord of Egypt. He promptly sent a force to Sawakin and Masaw'a, and entered Abyssinia, and 'Amara Dunkas feared that he would attack him. Thereupon he wrote and told Selim that he could not comprehend why he had invaded his country, and that if he had done so for the sake of the religion of Islam he must know that both he and his people were Arabs who had embraced Islam, and who followed the religion of the Prophet of God, and that the greater number of his people were [descended from] Arabs of the desert.1 With his letter he sent a series of genealogical tables which had been drawn up by an Imam of Sennaar called As-Samarkandi, wherein it was shown that the Fungs were descended from Arab tribes. When Selim saw these tables he was struck with wonder at their contents and admitted the nobility of the Arabs of Sennaar. From this state- ment it is clear that the Fungs embraced Islam as a political measure ; such tribes among them as were contented to lose their language, religion, and nationality became Muslims, and the rest left the country. The practical result of the diplomacy of 'Amara Dunkas was that Selim took possession of Northern Nubia so far as the Third Cataract, and ruled it by means of kashafa? or governors, whom he appointed over the larger towns, and the Fung king ruled from the Third Cataract to Sennaar, presumably in peace. 'Amara Dunkas reigned from 1505 to 1534. He was succeeded by : — 1. 'Abd Al-Kader,-5 his son, who reigned from 1534 to 1544. 2. Na'il, his brother, who reigned from 1544 to 1555. 3. 'Amara ibn Sakakin, his brother, who reigned from 1555 to 1563. During his reign 'Abd-Allah Gema'a, shekh of Kerri, died, and left his district to his son 'Agib Kafut. 4. Darin ibn Na'il, surnamed Al-'Adel, who reigned from 1563 to 1578. 5. Tabal, who reigned from 1578 to 1589. 6. Unsa I., who reigned from 1589 to 1599. 7. 'Abd Al-Kader II., who reigned from 1599 to 1605. 8. 'Adlan ibn Aba, who reigned from 1605 to 1612. 1 See Shucair, op. dt, ii., p. 73- 2 I.e., " governors," kashafa is the plural of kashif. 3 See Cailliaud, Voyage, torn, ii., p. 255. 201 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Daring his reign 'Agtb, shekh of Kerri, rebelled, and 'Adlan sent an army against him. A battle was fought at Kalmaku), between 'filful and Khartum, and 'Agib was slain and his followers fled to Dongola. 'Adlan sent a free pardon to them by Idris ibn Muhammad, and they returned with him to Sennaar, where 'Adlan treated them honourably, and made one of them, 'Agil, governor of Kerri. Shekh Idris was born in 1507, and he died in 1650, aged 143 years.1 An authority quoted by Xa'um Shucair that Islam hrst entered Sennaar when Harun Ar-Rashid was Khalifa (a.D. 786-809). 0. BIdi, or Sayyid Al-Kum, who reigned from 1612 to 1615. 10. Rabat, his son, who reigned from 1615 to 1643. 11. Bad! ABU Dhikn, who reigned from 1643 to 1678. I5\pi made war on the Shilluks and captured many slaves. He then went further south to Gebel Takali. and destroyed many villages on both banks of the White Nile, and carried Large numbers of slaves back to Sennaar. Then he built villages win rein the members of each tribe could live by themselves, and t<> these he gave the names of the villages wherein they had lived in their own country, e.g., Takali, Kadro. Kank, Karko, &c. He 1 patron of learning, and fond of learned men. and he built a mosque in Sennaar with brass-framed windows? he also built a palace1 which was surrounded by a wall, and which had nine The Blacks whom he had captured on the White Nile iic soldiers in his army. E2. Ansa II.. his nephew, who reigned from 1678 to 16 In [683 a severe famine broke out, and men were reduced to eating dogs ; the country was swept by an epidemic of small-pox, and very many people died. Ham Al-Ahmar, i.e., Badi the Red, who reigned from i68g to 1715. In his reign some of the Fung tribes rebelled, led by Shekh Ardab; l>adi attacked them, and slew their leader and many of his men. and the rest tied to 'Atshan. In his reign lived Shekh l.Iamed ibn At-Tarabi, an Arab, whose tomb is at Sennaar." 1 Interesting accounts of his life are ;^i\en by Shucair, op. cit., ii., pp. 74-76. . ,'/>. 4° ,, 3 Idris, his son » j ,, 30 ,, 4. Gabar I. > > „ 15 5 5 5. Gabar II., his son 5> ,, 2 ,, 6. Zankar (?) 1 1 1 >> 7. Rawya J> ,, 2 J J 8. Ambadi, his son > J 4 ,, 9. Atwar6 ,, 3 > > 10. Adarla ,, - 15 ,, 11. Matar, his son J J „ 16 ) 5 12. Fankaro, his son >> ,, 16 ,, 13. Kalbas,2 his son >> 1 >> 14. Kambo, his brother ,, ,, 2 > 5 15. Kambar ,, 5 ) 5 16. Am6shat,:! his brother > 5 ,, 1 ) ' 17. Hasan ibn Tabal " 12 J > 215 ye ars.4 3. The sixteen kings of Shendi, who reigned two hundred and thirty-six years. Shendi was the capital of a district which was ruled by the Ga'alin Arabs, and which practically represented the territory of the ancient Meroitic kingdom. At an early period in the history of the Shendi kings their kingdom was divided into two parts, the part on the east bank of the Nile having as its chief town Shendi, and that on the west bank having as its chief town Matamma. The names of the kings of Shendi are : — 1. Sa'adab Dabus He reigned 20 years 2. SULEMAN AL-'ADAD ,, ,, J ,, 3. Idris I. ibn Suleman ,, ,, 35 ,, 4. 'Abd As-Salam ,, ,, 1 ,, 5. Fahal ibn 'Abd As-Salam,, ,, 15 ,, 1 Given by Shucair (op. cit., pi. ii., p. 102), on the authority of the last king. - Slain by his brother. 3 Slain by 'Adlan. 4 See also Cailliaud, Voyage, lorn, ii., p. 396. 205 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN 6. 1 1 > k i s II.. his brother He reigned 6 years. >iY\r., his brother 12 Kanbalawi 3 i tlSHARA 7 10. Sn.l-M.AN IP.N S.\I AM 15 •• 1 1. Sa'ad I., his brother - 12 Inuis III. ., 20 Sa'ad II.. his son .. 40 , 14. Masa'd, his son 1 ; 15. Muhammad Al-Mak .. n . N imk. his son Tot;d Dar Fur, \ 17 .. J 15 years.1 4. Tin- twenty-six Sultans of vho reigned f< hundred and tbirt) is : — 1. SULEMAN I. who reigned fron 1445 to 1476 Amk I. • • I47(> to I_|()J \r.i> Aw-Kahman I. E492 to 15H 4. Mahmud 15 1 1 to 1526 5. Mr ham ma i) !* 1526 to 1551 Dalil 1551 to [561 Sharaf [56] to I5S4 Ahmad r584 to I593 0. [DRJS i5').; to E615 to. Salih I OI 5 to l622 11. Man [622 to 1639 - i(> ; [683 15. Ki [683 t.. il)()5 II. L695 to r.715 17. Mi sa, his son r.715 to 1726 \u\i\n BAKR I~J() t<> I 740 . Muhammad Dawra [746 to 1757 •Amk II.. his son 1757 to [764 21. ABU'L Kasim [764 to 1768 i THE KASHAFA OR GHU/Z 22. Terab, his brother, who reigned from 1768 to 1787 23. 'Abd Ar-Rahman II. ,, ,, 1787 to 1801 24. Muhammad Al-Fadl ,, „ 1801 to 1839 25. "Muhammad Hasin ,, ,, 1839 to 1874 26. Ibrahim ,, „ 1874 to 1875 ' Of the history of Nubia from the First to the Third Cataract between the period of the downfall of the Arab power in Egypt and 1820 very little is known. It is said that about 1318 a number of the Jawabir Arabs occupied the Nile Valley between the First and Second Cataracts ; they seem to have been kinsmen of the Arabs of Nejd and 'Irak (Mesopotamia). The district between the First Cataract and Sabu'a was, and is still, called the " country of the Kenuz." Between the Second Cataract and Gebel Diisha, i.e., in Sukkot, lived some of the Arabs who belonged to famous tribes, and in Mahass, i.e., between Gebel Dusha and the Third Cataract, lived Arabs who declared they were descended from the tribe of Kuresh. The latter founded a kingdom at Gebel Sasi, near Dulgo, or Deligo. In 1520 the Arabs sent to Selim and asked for help against the Jawabir Arabs, and he despatched with the envoys a number of Bosnian troops, under the command of Hasan Kiishi, who drove the Jawabir Arabs to Dongola, and only a few of them remained in Haifa. The Bosnian soldiers built fortresses in Aswan, Ibrim, and Sai, and established them- selves therein, and they drew a certain annual allowance from the treasury in Cairo. After the death of Hasan the country was governed by 11 Kashafa " who were known by the name of " Al-Ghuzz." Soon after the Fung kings became lords of Sennaar they wished to seize Northern Nubia, and sent an army to occupy the country. Ibn Janbalan, the chief of the Ghuzz, collected an army, and set out to fight the invaders. The two armies met near Hannek, and the Fungs were defeated with great slaughter, and retreated, leaving their path strewn with their dead. It is said that their blood was collected in a pool by the victors, who built a " Kubba " - l For the details of their reigns seeShucair, op. at., ii., p. 113 ff. ; for accounts of the kingdom of Fur see the following chapter in the same work, p. 132 ff. The condition of the kingdom at the end of the XVIIIth century is fully described in Mr. Browne's Travels, of which mention has already been made (Vol. I., p. 23). 207 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN (Gubba) over it, and that this became the boundary mark be- i the territories of the Fungs and the Bosnians. From this time until [sma'f] went to Sennaar in 1820 the Bosnians and their ippear to have been left severely alone by the Fungs. Remains of many of their castles are still to be seen in Sukkot and Mahass, both on the islands in the Nile, and on the river banks. They consist of a central fort surrounded by walls about fifteen cubits high and three cubits wide. Each wall had one tower on it about fifty cubits high, and was ascended by steps, or a ladder. Every tribe or clan had its castle, and in times of trouble the men made all their women and Hocks go into the fortified pail of it, and if attacked, they either went up on the towers and hurled stones at their enemies, or went out boldly and fought them with , and swords, and knives, and their women went out and took food to them, and encouraged them to do deeds of valour. When Ism.'i'il passed through Nubia in 1N20, the KAshif Hasin Ibn Suleman wished to prevent his advance, but was prevented from making the attempt by his brother Hasan. He then fled to Kordofan with three hundred slaves, and slew Makdum Musallim, and took his harnn and his treasury to the Sultan of Dar Fur, whose daughter he married. Meanwhile Isma'il made Hasan chief of the country from Aswan to Haifa, and gave him 293 of land and six purses of money, and the new k.'ishif married many Nubian women as he liked. 208 CHAPTER XIII. THE RULE OF MUHAMMAD 'ALI AND HIS DESCENDANTS IN THE SUDAN. After the capture of Cairo by Sultan Selim in 1517 the military affairs of Egypt and of Nubia as far as the Third Cataract were managed by twenty-four Mamluk Beys, whose actions were supposed to be controlled by a Pasha and a council of seven high officers of state. The principal military appointment was that of Governor of Cairo, or " Shekh al-Balad," which at first was given to the ablest man among the twenty-four Beys. The country remained in a comparatively peaceful state until about 1700, when it was found that Bey after Bey throughout the land intrigued to obtain the governorship of Cairo, and that many murders took place as the result of their endeavours. By this time, too, the power of the Pasha of Egypt had become purely nominal, and the Beys, headed by the Shekh al-Balad, were to all intents and purposes masters of the Turkish province of Egypt and Northern Nubia. In 1763 the famous 'All Bey became Shekh al-Balad. In 1768 he rebelled against the Sultan of Turkey, and succeeded in persuading the Council of Seven to drive out the Pasha and to declare Egypt independent. In 1772 Muhammad Abu Dhahab, one of 'Ali Bey's generals, rebelled against him, and was declared Shekh al-Balad ; he was subsequently made Pasha of Egypt by the Sultan. After his death the supreme power was eventually shared by Isma'il Bey and Murad. Bey, but in 1785 the Sultan despatched Hasan, his Lord High Admiral, to crush their authority and to make them pay the annual tribute. After a successful battle Hasan took Cairo, and chased Isma'il and Murad into Upper Egypt, where a fierce fight between the two forces took place. Hasan was, however, obliged to withdraw on account of the war which broke out between Turkey and Russia, and Isma'il returned vol. 11. 209 p THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN ypt and I'-kh al-Balad. He died in the year of the terrible plague, 1790. In May, 1798, the French Expedition under General Bonaparte arrived in Egypt, and on July 5th Alexandria fell. Two years Murad B a was m idr governor ol a portion of Upper Egypt by Kle"ber, and in ber of that year the French evacuated ; t. Among those who had been sent by the Sultan to fight against the French was an Albanian called Muhammad 'All, ivas born at Cavalla in i;(>s. lie married a daughter of the rnor of his native town, and by her had three sons. Ibrahim, Tiisiiu. and I s : 1 1 ; V 1 1 . At the age of thirty-three he was sent with T-in-laW 'Ah AghS and three hundred men to attack the French, and after their departure from Egypt he was promoted to ommand of one thousand men. Soon after the evacuation *ypt by the French the country was filled with anarchy, I by the struggle between the Mamluks, who were known as Al-Ghuzz, the name of their chief tribe, and the Albanians, or '• Arnauts,'* for the supreme power. Muhammad Khusruf. who had made Pashfi of Egypt after the departure of the French, ked tin/ Mamluks with a force of [4,000 men, but he was :ed. and his jjums and ammunition fell into the hands of the my. aim and the Delta were scenes of strife and turmoil, and this period was only brought to an end in May. 1805, by the people ol Cairo electing Muhammad 'AH to be the Pasha :. A month or so later a furmdn arrived from tantinople appointing him governor <>f Egypt, but all the Mamluk I well as the friends of Khurshid Pasha, now <)n August iNth the P>eys with their followers I their way into Cairo, and proceeded along the streets until they came b> the main road (.died " B6n Al-Kasrdn." Here they suddenly tired upon, and when they turned to flee, they found all the side stn I against them. Several cut their through their foes, and .scaped over the city walls, and many in the Mosque of Sultan Parkuk. The latter j fifty of them were slain on the spot: the inder were taken to the house of Muhammad 'All, who ttered and kept in the courtyard until the MAMLUKS IN THE SUDAN next day. The following morning the heads of those who had been killed the day before were skinned, and the skins stuffed with straw before their eyes. The same night all but three of the remainder were tortured and put to death, and shortly after eighty-three heads were sent to the Sultan by Muhammad 'Ali, with the boast that he had destroyed the Mamluks. On March 17th, 1807, about 5,000 British troops landed in Egypt with the view of bringing Muhammad 'Ali to his senses, and proceeded to take Rosetta. They advanced into the town without opposition, but once inside a heavy fire was opened on them, and they only retreated with difficulty, having lost 185 men killed and 262 wounded. The heads of the slain were sent to Cairo, and stuck upon stakes on each side of the road which crossed the part of the city now covered by the Ezbekiya Gardens. A second attempt to take Rosetta was made, but it was followed by disaster, and the British lost in killed, wounded, and missing 900 men. The British prisoners were sent to Cairo, and were marched between the stakes whereon were displayed by hundreds the heads of their fellow-countrymen. In the September following, the British, finding that it was impossible to help the Mamliik Beys, left Egypt. In 181 1 Muhammad 'Ali enticed 470 of the Mamluks into the Citadel, and when they were inside, and ascending the sloping road which leads to the great gate, with the outer gate shut behind them, a murderous fire was opened upon them by the troops from the walls and the surrounding houses, and very few *of them escaped. This was a signal for a general massacre of the Mamluks throughout Egypt, and for two days the houses of the Beys were pillaged and destroyed, their women violated, and their friends and servants murdered. The Mamluks who managed to escape the general massacre fled first to Upper Egypt, and subsequently to Nubia. In 1819 Muhammad 'Ali determined to conquer the Sudan, first with the object of finding occupation for his troops, and secondly in order to get the gold which he was told existed there in fabulous quantities, and to collect a large number of slaves, of whom he intended to form a strong army. In 1820 he collected a force of about 5,000 Arabs and Turks, and in the summer of that year despatched them to Nubia under the command of his youngest 211 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN son, Isma'il. At Esna the Mamluks offered some resistance, but this was speedily overcome, and Isma'il advanced without much difficulty to Dongola, where, in a tierce fight, he utterly destroyed the power of the Mamluks who had settled there, and were t rating terrible atrocities on the wretched Nubians. The Shaikiya tribe in the neighbourhood of the Island of Arko were foolish enough to attempt to stem the tide of invaders, and they paid dearly for their temerity.1 Isma'il reached Khartum without mishap, and then proceeded to Sennaar, where he found the country torn with the dissension caused by 'Adlan and Ragab, both of whom had claimed the throne. Ragab had murdered 'Adlan. and had lied the country. Sennaar was taken without fighting, and, having been joined by his brother Ibrahim. Isma'il proceeded to Fazd'gli, where he established the sovereignty of pt. When Ibrahim returned to Cairo, the natives rebelled, but Isma'il quickly came back and put down the rebellion in the usual way. From F&z6'gM he returned to Shendi, and, when epted an invitation to a banquet to be given in his honour by Nimr, the Mek of Shendt. When he and his followers had eaten, and were, most probably, drunk, Nimr, i.e.. " The Panther," caused wood and scrub from the surrounding • to be piled up round the house wherein the banquet was taking place, and set tire to, and Isma'il and his followers were burned to death. This event took place in 1N22. just after the founding of the city of Khartum, which Muhammad 'Ali intended to be lal of the Sudan. While Isma'il was taking ion of the kingdom of Sennaar, mmad Bey, the Defterdar, was sent to seize Kord6fan by Muhammad 'Ah, and after a long struggle succeeded in his ion. When the news of the murder of Isma'il reached him, he collected a large army and returned to Shendi to take irs of all the men and women he could find of the tribe cut off, and sent them to his father in Cairo! Cailliaud, i . pp. 58, 59. light two battles and were beaten both tn ie word " Mek" is, ii title, ami is not to be confounded with It is probably connected with the old Ethiopian root, **** \\ ffl "to be glorious," and in the life of Takla Mary 6m we find a scribe called :^e." 212 MUHAMMAD AL1 S RULE vengeance on Nimr and his town. He bombarded the town and destroyed the palace and most of the houses, then his soldiers entered and massacred every one they found. Nimr himself escaped, but his subjects suffered cruelly at the hands of the Turks and black men from Kordofan, and the atrocities which were perpetrated are indescribable. Meanwhile the natives to the south again rebelled, and Muhammad Bey had to return and fight several battles on the White and Blue Niles. At this time he captured the city of Al-Obed (Al-Ubayyad). In 1825 Osman Bey was appointed Governor of the Sudan, and he made the recently founded city of Khartum his headquarters. His rule lasted about one year, and was not very successful. He made Shekh Shanbul of Wad Medani governor of the district from Hagar Al-'Asal to Gebel Fung, but he was soon slain ; Osman Agha was appointed in his stead. At this time an epidemic of small-pox broke out in the country, and then came a famine, during which men ate dogs and donkeys. Osman Bey died on April 22nd, 1826. In 1826 MAHHU Bey of Bsrber ruled Khartum for a few months. He was an honest and intelligent man with courteous manners, and he endeavoured to do good to the people. He built a government house in Khartum, and to the south of the city is a large tree which is called after his name ; he also dug a well at Berber. In the same year Khurshid Pasha was appointed governor of the Sudan. In 1828 he led an expedition against the Dinka tribes on the White Nile, and went to the mountains of Takali and Fashoda (Kodok). In 1830 he went south in boats and attacked the Shilluks, and slew large numbers of them, and returned to Khartum with much spoil and many prisoners. In this year the Nile rose to an alarming height. In 1832 Khurshid marched against the Sabderat tribes and wasted their territory. In 1834 ne built a mosque in Sennaar, and went to Kordofan. In 1836 he went to Egypt via Dongola, and stayed in Cairo for a few months. On his return he was obliged to send an army under the command of Muhammad Effendi to chastise the Abyssinians, who had come down from their mountains and killed many people and laid waste the country. Ragab, the son of Bashir, their leader, was caught, and was brought to Khurshid at Ruseres, 213 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN where he was killed. In 1837 cholera broke out, and many of the notables died of the disease ; when it reached Khartum. Khurshfd Went to Shendi ; in the same year a great star appeared which visible at noon and shot forth sparks of fire! In [838 the Abyssinians attacked Kallabat, and did some damage. In May, 1839, Ahmad Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan : because of the size of his ears he was called " Abu Udan." On October 15th of this year Muhammad Ali left Cairo to visit Sudan. He reached Khartum on November 23rd, and stayed there twenty-two days. He set out for F&zd'glt, and arrived there on January [8th, 1N40, and returned to Cairo via Korosko on March 14th. A marvellous journey for a man seventy years of age ! As the result of his personal inspection of the countries wherein he believed gold was to be found in large quantities, he determined to send expeditions into the Sudan on a large scale for the purpose of bringing back gold and slaves in large numbers for his army. He interviewed the shekhs and notables of Khartum and Fazo'gli, and no doubt came to an understanding with them as to what he required them to do. Under the rule of Ahmad Pasha the province of Taka, or Kasala, was added to Muhammad 'All's kingdom. Taking advantage of the enmity which existed between two of the Bega tribes, the Hadanduwa and the I.Ialanka, he succeeded in stirring up strife in the country, and then by an artifice managed to destroy a number of the people, and take possession of the villages and lands. He played one tribe off against the other, fought against all of them, and finally succeeded in reducing them to subjection. He then iver Taka 'Amr Bey and Farhat Bey in succession, and finally made Musa Ibrahim, the nephew of Muhammad Din, the Shekh of the Hadanduwa, their governor. The taking of Taka was as disgraceful as it was inexcusable, and it was carried out in a manner both cruel and shameful. The population of the district sent messengers to Ahmad Pasha to announce their submission, but notwithstanding this, a company of four hundred "ArnautS," or Albanian mercenaries, were sent into the country to murder, plunder, burn, and destroy everything and everyone they could find, and they performed their mission thoroughly. Hundreds of unarmed men and women were slain at sight, and the wretched 214 •*•" ^w»-^" '** *t$ H<*$ VIEW OF THE VILLAGE OF KASSAM, NEAR FAZOGLI, IN IS37. [From Russegger, Reiscn, BI. 20. VIEW OF THE BLUE NILE, NEAR FAZOGLt, IX 1S37. [From Russegger Reisett, Bl. 16. 215 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN captives who were brought before Ahmad were beheaded whilst he sat looking on in his tent. Forty-one of the sh^khs who had set out to come to Ahmad with the soldiers had been shot on the way because the}- could not march fast enough. eh captive s< carried before him the stem of a tree as thick as -( a man's arm. about fiveor six feet long, which terminated in a " fork, into which the neck was fixed. The prongs of the fork "were bound together by a cross-piece of wood, fastened with a ! THE NEW GOVERNMENT mil D t VV, < rarstin' er of H.M. S strap. Some of their hands, also, were tied fast to the handle of the fork, and in this condition they remained day and night. During the march, the soldier who is specially appointed to overlook the prisoner, carries the end of the pole: in the night most of them have their feet also pinioi ther . . . ." Then after all the conditions that were imposed li fulfilled, and the heavy contributions which had been required from them under every variety of pretext had been also correctly paid, the Pasha caused all the Sheikh- • nee, as if MUHAMMAD ALI'S RULE "for a fresh conference, but forthwith had them all put in fetter?, " together with 120 other people, and led away as prisoners. " The young and strong men were to be placed among the troops, " the women handed over to the soldiers as slaves ; the Sheikhs ft were reserved for punishment till a later day. Such was the " glorious history of the campaign against Taka as it was related "'to me1 by the European eye-witnesses." Under the rule of Ahmad Pasha the Sudan was divided into seven mudirias, or administrative provinces, namely, Fazo'gli, Sennaar, Khartum, VIEW OF AL-OBED IN 1837. [From Russegger, Reisen, Bl. 16. Kasala, Berber, Dongola, and Kordofan, and a military commandant was set over each. Ahmad Pasha died at Khartum in October, 1844, and was buried there. In 1844 Ahmad Pasha Al-Manikli was appointed Governor of the Sudan, and his rule lasted for about two years. In 1846 Khalid Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan, and his rule lasted for about four years. In 1848 Ibrahim PAsha, on account of Muhammad 'AlTs failing health, was made Ruler of Eeypt, but the disease from which he was suffering 1 Lepsius, Letters, p. 200. 217 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN captives who were brought before Ahmad were beheaded whilst he sat looking on in his tent. Forty-one of the sh&khs who had set out to come to Ahmad with the soldiers had been shot on the way because they could not march fast enough. ch captive " carried before- him the stein of a tree as thick as " a man's arm, about five or six feet long, which terminated in a " fork, into which the neck was fixed. The prongs ^^ the fork "were bound together by a cross-piece of wood* fastened with a rHE NEW GOVERNMENT BU1LDIN i W, < rarstin . I.M. Stationei ... Some of their hands, also, were tied fast to the handle of the fork, and in this condition they remained day and night. During tin: march, the soldier who is specially appointed to rlook the prisoner, the end of the pole : in the night most of them have their feet also pinioned together ....'* n after all the conditions that were imposed had been fulfilled, and the heavy contributions which had been required from them under every variety of pretext had b< ctly paid, the Pasha caused all the Sheikhs to assemble at i)ncc, as if MUHAMMAD ALUS RULE " for a fresh conference, but forthwith had them all put in fetter?, "together with 120 other people, and led away as prisoners. " The young and strong men were to be placed among the troops, " the women handed over to the soldiers as slaves ; the Sheikhs " were reserved for punishment till a later day. Such was the " glorious history of the campaign against Taka as it was related "to me1 by the European eye-witnesses." Under the rule of Ahmad Pasha the Sudan was divided into seven mudirias, or administrative provinces, namely, Fazo'gli, Sennaar, Khartum, VIEW OF AL-OBED IN 1837. [From Russegger, Reisen, Bl. 16. Kasala, Berber, Dongola, and Kordofan, and a military commandant was set over each. Ahmad Pasha died at Khartum in October, 1844, and was buried there. In 1844 Ahmad Pasha Al-Manikli was appointed Governor of the Sudan, and his rule lasted for about two years. In 1846 Khalid Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan, and his rule lasted for about four years. In 1848 Ibrahim Pasha, on account of Muhammad 'All's failing health, was made Ruler of Egypt, but the disease from which he was suffering 1 Lepsius, Letters, p. 200. 217 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN increased, and be died on November ioth of that year. He was succeeded by 'Abbas Pasha, the grandson of Muhammad 'All, on December 24th. On August 2nd, 1849, Muhammad \-\li died, heart-broken, it is said, because the British Government had cut down the number of his army to 18,000 men, and forbidden him to make use of his navy, which lay rotting in the harbour at Alexandria. He undoubtedly conferred great benefits on his country, and, in a fashion, was a patron of art and learning and a supporter of many reforms. He was greater as a warrior than as an administrator. He failed to see that the resources of Egypt of an agricultural character, and encouraged industrial schemes which, had they been as successful as he wished, would have ruined his country. His character was a mixtui shrewdness, cunning, simplicity, cruelty, avarice, and generosity, and his love of wealth made him steal the revenues of tombs and religious institutions in Cairo, and take possession of nearly all the best land in Egypt. His policy in the Sudan encouraged the slave trade to a degree hitherto unknown, and the cruelty and corruption of his officials there sowed the seeds of the rebellion which broke out thirty years later, and culminated in the rule of Muhammad Ahmad the Mahdi, and one of his Khalifas, 'Abd-Allah. In 1850 La in Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan. In 1851 RUSTUM Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan. He was stricken with an illness at Wad Medani, and died in the following year, and was buried there. In [852 IsMA'il Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan. After making a tour in the Eastern Desert, he returned to Khartum, and was recalled to Cairo. In 185; Si. 1 im Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan. In [854 'Au Pasha Sirri was appointed Governor of the Sudan, and in July of the same year 'Abbas Paslu died, and was succeeded by Sa* id Pasha, a son of Muhammad 'Ali. About this time the Egyptian officials found it more and more difficult to 1 the revenue, for the taxes were so heavy that the ;it farmers were ruined everywhere in paying them. In 1855 'Aii Pasha Sharkas was appointed Governor of the 218 RIPON FALLS, VICTORIA NYANZA, THE SOURCE OK THE WHITK NILE. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office VICTORIA NYANZA AT THE RIPON FALLS. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of ihe Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. 219 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Sudan, and his rule lasted until 1858. During the visit of 'Abd Al-Halim Pasha cholera broke out, and very many people died of the disease. On January 16th, [858, Said Pasha, the Khediveof pt, visited the Sudan, and he was horrified at the state in which he found the country. He proclaimed the abolition of slavery, reduced the taxes on the water-wheels, made several sweeping reforms in the administration of the provinces, and established a camel-post between Khartum and Cairo. He conceived the idea of connecting the Sudan with Egypt by means of a railway, and Mougel Bey made a report on the subject. During the rule of kAli Pasha Sharkas Mr. John Petherick, H.B.M's Consul for the Sudan, obtained permission to send a series of trading expeditions into the Sudan. He left England in March, 1845, and was employed by Muhammad \\li to search for coal, and subsequently investigated the mineral resources both of Egypt and the Sudan. His expeditions to the country south of Khartum took place in November, 1853, October, 1N54, November, 1855, December, 1856, and February. 1.858. He wrote an account of his travels, which was published in [861, and from this excellent work a very good idea of the state of the country may be gathered. He was aceused of complicity in the and his reputation suffered through many bitter ks which ide on it. He appears to have been badly treated by the British Foreign which ab dished his ilate at Khartum. In 1858 Mr. John Hanning Speke d that the Victoria Nyanza was the true source of the Nile.1 In April, i860, in company with Captain J. A. Grant, he set out on another expedition to obtain further proof of the wonderful he had made in 1858. Man}' of his statements were by the late Sir Richard Burton (see The Nile Basin, I, but the priority and genuineness of Speke's discovery in unquestioned. In 1859 Akakii. I ippointed Governor of the Sudan. :•/>/, the Soudan, and Central Africa, \Y. Blackwood, Edinburgh, and London. -' Speke, Journey of the Discovery of the Source of the A He, London, 1863 ; and Wh it Led to the Discovery of the Source of the A//<\ Loin: 220 THE SLAVE TRADE In i860 Hasan Bey Salama was appointed Governor of the Sudan. In this year the Europeans who had traded with natives for ivory, gum, &c, realized that it was impossible for them to con- tinue their business without aiding and abetting the slave trade, and, though they made a gallant stand against this shameful traffic, they saw that it was hopeless to resist successfully the results of the machinations of the corrupt Turkish officialdom at Khartum and in Egypt. They therefore sold their trading con- cerns to Arabs, with the result that the state of the wretched black folk became worse than before, and in a year or two the slave trade increased to a frightful extent. In March, 1861, Sir Samuel Baker set out to discover the sources of the Nile, with the hope of meeting Speke and Grant, who had been sent out by the British Government via Zanzibar with that object. He left Cairo in April, 1861, and, having explored all the country through which the Atbara flows, arrived in Khartum on June nth, 1862. In July of this year Muhammad Bey Rasikh was appointed Governor of the Sudan. The state of Khartum, the capital, at this time is described by Baker thus ' : — " A more miserable, filthy, and unhealthy spot can hardly 'be imagined The town, chiefly composed ' of huts of unburnt brick, extends over a flat hardly above ' the level of the river at high water, and is occasionally ' flooded. Although containing about 30,000 inhabitants and ' densely crowded, there are neither drains nor cesspools ; the 1 streets are redolent with inconceivable nuisances ; should ' animals die, they remain where they fall, to create pestilence ' and disgust. Khartoum is the seat of government, the Soudan 1 provinces being under the control of a Governor-general, with ' despotic power. In 1861 there were about 6,000 troops in the 1 town ; a portion of these were Egyptians ; other regiments were ' composed of blacks from Kordofan, and from the White and ' Blue Niles, with one regiment of Arnouts, and a battery of ' artillery. These troops are the curse of the country : as in the 1 case of most Turkish and Egyptian officials, the receipt of pay ' is most irregular, and accordingly the soldiers are under loose ' discipline. Foraging and plunder is the business of the Egyptian ' soldier, and the miserable natives must submit to insult and ' ill treatment at the will of the brutes who pillage them." 1 Albert Nyanza, New Edition, London, 1870, p. 8 ff . 221 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN On December 18th J>aker left Khartum for the south, and arrived at Gondokoro on February 2nd, 1863 ; here, on the 15th of the same- month, arrived Speke and Grant. The former had walked the whole way from Zanzibar. They explained to Baker that they had been unable to follow the course of the Nile west- ward to the place where it entered the large lake called by the natives Luta N'zige,1 which Speke believed to be a second source of the Nile and Baker determined to proceed to this lake, and thus complete the splendid work which Speke and Grant had begun. Speke gave Baker minute directions as to the course he should follow, and on February 26th Speke and his compa- nion sailed from Gondokoro for Khartum in Baker's boats. On March 26th Baker set out on his march to the Luta N' After innumerable delays caused by the idleness and obstruction of the natives, and by grievous sickness, starvation and fatigue, he arrived at the Luta on March 14th, 1864, and was the first European to look upon its waters. He says: "The glory "of our prize burst suddenly upon me! Then-, like a sea of " quicksilver, lay far beneath the grand expanse of water — a " boundless sea horizon on the south and south-west, glittering in •; the noon-day sun : and on the west, at fifty or sixty miles1 "distance, blue mountains rose from the bosom of the lake to a " height of about 7,000 feet above its Level. . . . As an imperish- " able memorial of one loved and mourned by our gracious Queen, "and deplored by every Englishman, I called this great lake 'the •' Albert N'yanza.' The Victoria and Albert Lakes are the two " sources of the Nile." ■ In 1863 Ism. vii . son of Ibrahim Pasha, became Khedb •t. and in the same year Musa P&sha Mamdi was appointed rnor of the Sudan. *• '1 his man was a rather exaggerated "specimen of Turkish authorities in general, combining the v. ' of Oriental failings with the brutality of a wild animal." * He is also described as " an unprincipled and cruel tyrant, who ruled "only by military power, and oppressed and plundered the pie *' :l and \\ Id that, in spite of the prohibition of 1 I.e., the " dead locust Lake." \ert Nyanzc^ p. 308. tker, Albo 1 1. help the chief to fight his enemies, and on a given night the)- went and bivouacked near the village where tiny lived. A little before daybreak, whilst the inhabitants ■-till sleeping, their huts were set on fire, and volleys of musketry poured in on them through the flaming thatch. The panic-stricken natives rushed out, and the men were shot down, and tlif women and children secured; the cattle were seized as the prize of vietory. The women were fastened by the necks to forked poles, to which their hands were also tied, and the children tied by their necks with a rope attached to the women, and marched off to the victor's carap with the cattle. All the ivory found in the huts was seized, and the "trader's party" dug up the floors of the huts to find the iron hoes, and destroyed all the granaries. To obtain the iron or copper bracelets from the they cut off their hands. The "traders" then returned to the negro chief, who was delighted at the overthrow of his foe, tally when they gave him a present of cattle, and a captive girl of about fourt* The negro chief wanted cattle, and was prepared to exchi ivory for them, a tusk for a cow, a profitable business, for the cows lothing. One third of all the stolen animals belonged to ler's " men. The slaves wen- next put up at auction among men, who bought such as they required, the amount of their purchases being entered on their papers to be against their Kidnapped women and children were some- times ransomed : itain number of tusks; if a woman attempted to is flogged, or hanged, or shot. [uently the " trader " picked a quarrel with his negro ally, whom he then murdered, his women and children becoming slaves. A raid of this kind produced usually ivory to the value 224 THE SLAVE TRADE of about £4,000, and the " trader's " own profit was represented by four or five hundred slaves, each of which was worth from five to six pounds — between £2,000 and £3,000. The slaves and ivory were then packed in boats and sent down the river under the charge of some of the "trader's" men, the rest of whom stayed in the country to obtain by plunder, massacre, and enslave- ment another cargo for the following season. The slaves were landed in parties at various places on the river, being received by agents, who transported them to Sennaar, and to Sawakin and Masaw'a on the Red Sea, whence they were shipped to Arabia and Persia. When the " trader " returned to Khartum he paid his original loan of £1,000 in ivory, and having a handsome profit, he was able to begin business as an independent merchant in ivory. In 1863 the Turkish officials pretended to discountenance the slave trade, yet the officers were paid in slaves ! And every house was full of slaves, and nearly every European merchant was engaged in the slave trade. The slave raiders sailed their boats flying the English, French, Austrian, Turkish, and even the American flag. This picture is a gloomy one, but the witnesses to the appalling condition of misery in which the Sudan was in 1863 are so numerous, and the agreement in their evidence is so universal, that there is absolutely no reason for doubting their testimony. Soon after the accession of Isma'il Pasha as Ruler of Egypt, in 1863, that energetic prince issued orders for the suppression of the slave trade, and there is no good reason for doubting the sincerity of his wish for the abolition of the trade in human beings. He held no foolish or sentimental ideas about the fitness of the Blacks to rule either their country or themselves, and he made no proposal to interfere with domestic slavery, an institution which has always been the fundamental principle of all native African society, for he well knew that, speaking generally, slaves were kindly treated by their owners, and that the disgusting brutality of the slave trade lay in the burning of the villages, the murders of the men, the kidnapping of the women and children, and in the driving of the slaves over hundreds of miles of burning desert, with the attendant deaths from sickness and starvation. What Isma'il realized was that the leaders of the slave-raiding vol. 11. 225 Q THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN expeditions, both Arab and European, formed a serious menace to his authority in the Sudan, and an effectual check to the extension of his territories. The European Powers urged him to destroy the slave trade, and he determined to do it, but as soon as he began to take the necessary steps his subjects in Egypt abused him for attacking the greatest of all the trading interests of the country, his officials declared he was not a true Muslim, and the English newspapers asserted that the suppression of the slave trade on the White Nile was merely a pretext for annexing the whole of the Nile Basin ! In 1865 Ja'afar Sadik Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan. In 1866 Ja'afar Mazhar Pasha was appointed Governor of the Sudan. lutween 1863 and 1869 matters went from bad to worse, for every official in the Sudan, realizing that the slave trade was threatened, made as much money as he could out of slaves while he had the opportunity. The actions of the Arab and European raiders justified Isma'il's view that they were a serious menace to his authority, for some of them had secured from the Governors of the Sudan leases of whole provinces, and they wire de facto not only independent rulers in the territories leased by them, but enemies to any rule except that of lawlessness. Isma'il's first great difficulty was to find men to carry out his wishes, for his officials in the Sudan could not be trusted. Nearly every one of them had an interest in the ivory and slaves that had been collected, and were still waiting at stations up the White Nile. Many of the largest merchants at Khartum employed exclusively bands of Arabs to raid slaves, and one of them had as many as 1 Arabs in his pay. These gangs were officered by deserters from tin Egyptian army, were divided into companies, and were armed with muskets. &c There were about 15,000 men thus em- ployed in the Sudan, and they raided about 50,000 slaves annually, and one "trader" called Akad claimed the right of jurisdiction jiiare miles of territory. Each " trader " established f stations, manned by about 300 of his men, throughout his district, and was thus able to occupy it effectively.1 1 I owe these facts to linker. Ismail'ia, London, 1879, P- * ^- 226 SIR SAMUEL BAKER Early in 1869 IsmtVil, who was now Khedive, selected Sir Samuel Baker to carry out the great work of reorganizing the Sudan, and he issued a./arwdn wherein he authorized him to : — 1. Subdue the country south of Gondokoro. 2. Suppress the slave trade. 3. Introduce a system of regular commerce. 4. Open the Equatorial Lakes to navigation. 5 Establish a chain of military stations and commercial depots, distant from each other a three days' march, throughout Central Africa, with Gondokoro as the base of operations. Baker was to have the supreme command of the expedition for four years, beginning April 1st, 1869, and the power of life and death over every member of it. He was also given supreme and absolute authority over all the country south of Gondokoro included within the Nile Basin. Baker left Suez on December 5th, 1869, and proceeded to Khartum via Sawakin, where he found that about half of the 30,000 people who formerly lived in the town had disappeared, that nearly all the Europeans had gone away, and that most of the population of the district had turned into brigands, and were hunting slaves on the White Nile. To his disgust, Baker dis- covered that Mazhar Pasha, the Governor of the Sudan, had prepared for an expedition to Dar Fur eleven vessels and several companies of soldiers, and that he had given the chief command to one Kutchuk 'Ali, a notorious raider, who had made a large fortune out of slave-raiding and dealing ! Thus the Khedive was doing his best to suppress the slave trade, and his Governor of the Sudan was sparing no pains to support it. On February 8th, 1870, Baker left Khartum with two steamers, thirty-one sailing vessels, and 800 soldiers. After steaming for 103 hours, he reached Fashoda, now Kodok, and found it garrisoned by Egyptian soldiers under the command of 'Ali Bey, a Kurd, who told him that the Shilluk country was in good order, and that according to the Khedive's instructions he had exerted himself against the slave trade. This statement Baker doubted, and a few weeks later actually caught him in the act of kidnapping 155 slaves,1 and he discovered that 'Ali levied a toll upon every slave whom the 1 Ismaitia, p. 45. 227 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN traders' boat brought down the river, which he kept for himself. Baker insisted that the slaves should be set free, and this was done with great reluctance by the Governor of Fashoda, who ex- plained that he had only been collecting the taxes ! Finding it impossible to press to Gondokoro on account of the obstructing vegetation in the White Nile, Baker stopped at a favourable place, and founded the station of Tawhkiya. Whilst here, he stopped several boats laden with slaves and ivory; the former he liberated, and the latter he sent on to Khartum, where it was confiscated. The complicity of the Sudan officials was established beyond a doubt. In October Baker learned that the Egyptian Government had already leased to the "trader" Ahmad Shekh Agha ' an area of 90,000 square miles of the territory which he was about to annex in the Nile Basin, for several thousand pounds sterling per annum, together with the monopoly of the ivory trade. Ahmad paid £3,000 a year for his lease, and he foresaw that if the Government were established in his district, his raiding and trading would be at an end. The slave-hunters were actually the tenants of the Egyptian Government, and they naturally resented the purchase of ivory by the Government from countries already leased to trailers. It was a difficult position for all concerned, for the Khedive, for his Governor of the Sudan, for Baker, and for the trader. r himself was obliged to admit that Ahmad had a grievance against the Government, and actually agreed with him that no ivory should be bought by any one else in the district leased to him until after the expiry of the contract on April 9th, 1N72. On April 15th, 1871, Baker arrived at Gondokoro, and on May 26th he officially annexed the country for the Egyptian Govern- ment. Twelve hundred men were paraded, with ten guns, and the Turkish flag having been run up, the officers saluted with drawn swords, the troops presented arms, and the artillery tired a ; salute. On May 14th, 1872, at Masindi, with the full approval of Kabba Kega, the former kin-. Baker took formal possession of the country of Unyoro in the name of the Khedive of Egypt. He next set to work to put the commerce of the count ry on a good footing, and purchased ivory for the Government with from ■ lor an acount of his agent, the infamous Abu Sa'ud, see /swai'Iia, pp. 77, 138, 152. J2.N DEATH OF LIVINGSTONE 1,500 to 2,000 per cent, profit. A few beads, three or four gaudy- coloured cotton handkerchiefs, a zinc mirror, and a fourpenny butcher's knife would purchase a tusk worth £20 or £30 ! And the natives found that such " luxuries as twopenny mirrors, four- " penny knives, handkerchiefs, earrings at a penny a pair, finger " signet rings at a shilling a dozen, could be obtained for such " comparatively useless lumber as elephants' tusks .... In " Unyoro each party to the bargain thought that he had the best " of it." ' Baker built forts at Masindi, Fatiko, and Fuwera, and administered justice in a rough-and-ready fashion with great suc- cess. All his troops were Muhammadans, but the natives believed in nothing ; even so the latter were " free from many vices that disgrace a civilized community." Early in 1873 Baker entered into friendly relations with M'tesa, king of Uganda, and thus the Egyptian dominions extended to within 20 of the Equator. On April 1st, 1873, Baker returned to Gondokoro, or Isma'iliya, and his term of service to the Khedive expired. On his way down the river he learned that several cargoes of slaves had passed the Government station at Fashoda, and his informant, Wad Hojoly, himself had 700 slaves, in three vessels, which he was taking down to a station a few days south of Khartum. Moreover, the infamous Abu Sa'ud had gone to Cairo to appeal to the Government, and to represent that Baker had ruined his trade.2 In 1873 David Livingstone, the celebrated explorer and mission- ary, died of dysentery on April 30th at Chitambo. His body was carried to the coast, and was buried in Westminster Abbey, April 18th, 1874. He was born at Blantyre, near Glasgow, March 19th, 1813. He discovered Lake Ngami in 1849; explored the Zambesi and Kuanza Basins to Loando in 1851-4; recrossed Africa and discovered the Victoria Falls in 1855 ; led an expedi- tion up the Zambesi and Shiri Rivers, and discovered Lakes Shirwa and Nyassa in 1858-9 ; explored the Rovuma Valley in 1866, the Chambezi in 1867, and Lakes Tanganyika, Moero, and Bangweolo in 1867-8 ; was at Ujiji in 1869 ; navigated Tangan- yika, was relieved by Stanley at Ujiji in 1871 ; parted from Stanley at Unyanyembe in 1872, and returned to Lake Bangweolo. His " Last Journals " were published in 1874. 1 IsmaiTia, p. 341. ' °P- a'*-> P- 457- 229 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN In 1873 Isma'ii. Pasha Ayub was appointed Governor of the Sudan. He is famous for having initiated great reforms in the Sudan, and he tried to stop the bribery and corruption which were rampant. He did excellent work in connection with clearing the Sudd, or blocks of vegetation, from the White Nile, and suc- ceeded in re-opening the river to navigation in the following summer. On August 24th Baker reached Cairo, and had an audience of Isma'ii Pasha, to whom he explained the chart of the new territory which he had acquired for him. To Baker belongs the great credit of destroying the slave trade between Khartum and Gondokoro, of opening up commerce on the Nile, and of carrying civilization to within 20 of the Equator. Had Isma'ii Pasha's servants in the Sudan been faithful to their orders, the abominable traffic in human flesh would have been entirely wiped out from the Egyptian Sudan. Baker resigned his appointment in 1873, and was succeeded by Colonel C. G. Gordon, R.E., who left Cairo to take up his duties in the Sudan early in the spring of 1874. His instructions were to (airy on the work which Baker had begun, i.e., first, to crush the slave trade, which was then, in spite of all Baker's efforts, a thriving business ; secondly, to establish law and order in the newly- acquired Egyptian provinces south of Gondokoro, and to develop trade on just lines. The Khedive's farman made him " Governor of the Equatorial Provinces on the Nile," and his authority was to extend from Fash 6 da (Kodok) to M'tesa's country to the south. The authority of the Governor of the Sudan was not to extend south of Pashoda. Gordon arrived at Gondokoro on April 15th, where he found Baker's garrison, and at once took steps to con- solidate the Egyptian power in the country. He established a garrison of 160 soldiers at B6r, north of Gondokoro, and sent a member of his staff, Colonel Long, on a mission to king M'tesa at nda. He next broke up several slave-traders' stations on the liahr az-Zaraf, and established a station on the Sobat, which was so placed that he could control the traffic up and down the White Nil-. In the summer of 1N74 Munzinger, the Consul of Britain and who lived at Na?aw'a,' took the opportunity of the out- 1 See Shucair, History of the Sudan, iii., p. 89. 2 a. s I cr b O «-■ OCCUPATION OF DAR FUR break of a war between the Abyssinians and the Gallas to occupy Keren, the capital of the Abyssinian province of Bogos, with 1,500 men. And at the same time the district of Ailet, which lay between Hamasin and Masaw'a, was sold to the Egyptian Govern- ment by its treacherous governor. Thus the Egyptians became masters of Senhit. John, king of Abyssinia, sent an appeal by Colonel Kirkman to the European Powers against the proceeding, but naturally no action in the matter was taken by them. When Gordon arrived at Gondokoro in April, 1874, he relieved the commandant, Raw'uf Pasha, who proceeded to Khartum. The king of Harar, Ahmad, was dead, and had been succeeded by one Muhammad, who was extremely unpopular with the people, for he had deposed their nominee to the throne, Sitra Amir. The people of Harar sent to the Khedive of Egypt, and asked him to take over their province, and the task of occupying the same was given to Raw'uf Pasha. He proceeded to Harar, with a sufficient force, and, having taken the country, hanged Muhammad without giving him an opportunity of defending himself.1 In the same year (1874) the Egyptians found it necessary to take possession of the kingdom of Dar Fur, for it had been clear for years past that it was impossible to put a stop to the slave trade so long as slave caravans could pass unhindered from the countries near the Equator to Egypt via Dar Fur and Kordofan. Dar Fur appears to have been from time immemorial the centre of the slave trade, and from about the eighth century of our era to have been inhabited by a number of tribes, some of whom were partly of Arab descent, and by others whose origin is not clear. They were not, however, negroes. The kingdom of Dar Fur extended at one time to the Atbara, but the Fung kings of Sennaar little by little filched the territory of the Dar Furians until the White Nile became the boundary between the two nations. The Fung kings were, about 1770, masters of Kordofan, a province of Dar Fur, for a few years, but Dar Fur proper seems to have been always an independent state, and its line of Sultans was unbroken for about four hundred years. In 1822 Kordofan was conquered by the Defterdar, Muhammad 'All's son-in-law, who appropriated to himself the enormous spoil which he took, and treated the 1 Shucair, op. at., p. 90. He says the country was taken October nth, 1875- 23 T THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN natives with shameful cruelty, and mutilated hundreds of them.' In 1869 Isma'il, Khedive of Egypt, decided that the time had come for him to give the natives some proof of his authority over Dar Fur, and he therefore despatched to the Bahr al-Ghazal an officer called Muhammad al-Ballali, with a force of 800 men, 400 of whom were Bashbuzak, or " Bashi Bazuks." Among the great slave-dealers of Dar Fiir at this time was Zuber ibn Rahama, who traced his descent back to Ghanini, a man of the tribe of 'Abbas. When Zuber understood for what purpose Al-Ballali had come, he collected an army and went against him, and, by a superior knowledge of the country and its methods of warfare, he caught him in an ambush, ami burned his camp and completely destroyed his force. After this the fame of Zuber increased in the Sudan, and the tribes flocked to him, and for a few years he was the most powerful man in the country. In 1873 a dispute broke out between the Egyptian Government and the Sultan of Dar Eur, which assumed serious proportions in 1874, when the Sudan authorities seized all the slaves in a caravan which had been despatched to Egypt. In retaliation the Sultan raided for slaves certain districts which had been leased to Zuber, and stopped the supply of corn which he and his fellow slave-merchants had been in the habit of obtaining from Dar Fur. Zuber, knowing his strength, determined to invade Dar Fur and bring the Sultan to reason, but when the Egyptian Government heard of this, Isma'il decided to under- take the conquest of the country himself, and to employ Zuber in the work. Zuber was ordered to attack Dar Fur from the south, and Isma'il Ya'kub Pasha from the north. The Sultan of Dar l'fir and two of his sons were killed in one of the battles which took place soon after, and the country became an Egyptian province. Zuber was created a Pasha, but was not satisfied, for he wished to be made Governor of the territory which the tians had gained chiefly by his skill and goodwill. He went to Cairo to urge his claims, but he was " detained " there2 ; For an account of his acts, see Petherick, Egypt, the Soudan and Central Africa, p. 277 ff. Gleichen. Anglo- Egyptian Sudan, p. 236. GORDON IN THE SUDAN until the end of 1898; he now lives at Geili on the Nile, about thirty miles north of Khartum.1 Meanwhile Gordon had been working very hard, and had made the effect of his influence and personality felt all over the countries on the White Nile. On September nth, about twenty-five shekhs from the region of Gondokoro came and did homage to him, a striking example of the belief which the natives had at that time in him. He established a post on the Sobat, and stations at Naser, Shambi, Makaraka, Bor, Latiika, Lado, Reggaf, Dufili (Ibrahimiya), Fatiko, and Fuwera. His measures for the sup- pression of the slave trade were vigorous, and his officer, Yusuf Bey, Governor of Fashoda, intercepted a convoy of 1,600 slaves, and 190 head of cattle.'- When Gordon left Cairo in March, 1874, he took with him the infamous slave-dealer Abu Sa'ud Al- 'Akad,3 who had gone to Cairo to complain that Baker had ruined his business. When they arrived at Gondokoro Gordon gave him a position of trust, and set him over other slave-dealers, no doubt thinking that he would not do any mischief whilst he himself was near. He was, however, mistaken, for Sa'ud used his appointment to advance his interests in the slave-dealing business, and Gordon was obliged to discharge him promptly. How Gordon could ever have employed a man with such a past, which was well known to him, passes understanding, and suggests that he overrated his own powers of discernment. In 1874 Slatin Pasha visited the Sudan. He reached Khartum, via Aswan, Korosko, and Berber, in October, and then went on to the Nuba Mountains, and stayed some time at Delen, where there was an Austrian Mission. From here he explored the Naima and Kadero mountains. He returned to Austria in 1875. In 1875 Gordon proposed to the Khedive to establish a station at Mombassa Bay, 250 miles north of Zanzibar,4 but Isma'il preferred the mouth of the Juba* River, and fitted out an expedition to go there, under the command of McKillop Pasha, 1 A most interesting account of his life, dictated or written by himself, is given in Shucair's History of the Sudan, iii., p. 60 ff. 2 Gleichen, op. at., p. 234. 3 See Shucair, op. cit. iii., p. 53, 128. 4 Gleichen, op. cit., p. 237. 233 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and Colonels Ward and Long. This site being found unsuitable, Mrkillop occupied Port Durnford and the harbour of Kismayu. These places, however, belonged to the Sultan of Zanzibar, and as the expedition threatened to injure the trade of the mer- chants of Zanzibar, Great Britain intervened, and its further development was stopped. With great difficulty Gordon trans- ported a steamer to the Lakes, and established stations on the west bank of the river ; on the east bank the Bar! were hostile, and at Dufili a party under Linant, one of Gordon's officers, was surprised and massacred. Whilst Gordon was in the south the Shilluk tribes rebelled against the cruelty and oppression of the Government, and but for Gessi's 1 presence there F&shoda would have been lost to Egypt. In 1875 a dispute broke out between the Abyssinians and Egyptians about the port of Zi^a and the district of Giuda, which Kirkman had occupied on behalf of King John of Abyssinia. In October Colonel Arendrup, on behalf of the Egyptians, sailed to Masaw'a, marched to Giuda and took possession of it; he then advanced to Adua, the Abyssinian capital. King John collected an army, attacked Arendrup and defeated him, killing 1,800 nun and capturing 2,000 rifles; among the slain were 'Arakil the agent of Munzinger, and Munzinger himself. The battle was fought on November nth. Isma'il promptly sent out another expedition, which arrived at Masaw'a on December nth. It was under R&tib Pasha, and consisted of 15,000 men, and with them were Colonel Long and Prince Masau Pasha. On March 7th, 1876, King John attacked the Egyptians at Kar'a, fifty-five miles from Masaw'a, and slew some 10,000 of them, and captured thousands of rifles, and twenty-five guns, and many prison^!-. The Egyptian arm)- returned to Cairo in January, [877. After the battle of Kar'a, Walda Mikael laid waste the Hamasin territory of Abyssinia; this act delayed the peace tiations which were in progress, for King John knew that Walda Mikael was supported by the Egyptians. 1 Gessi was employed as interpreter to the British troops during the Crimean war, and joined General Gordon's staff in 1874 ; he died at Suez on April 30th, - Gleichen, op. tit., p. 238 ; Shucair, )ii., p. 91. 234 GORDON IN THE SUDAN In March, 1876, Gessi, by Gordon's order, circumnavigated the Victoria Nyanza, and found it was 140 miles long, and 50 miles wide ; in July a steamer was put together, with heroic exertions, above Dufili Falls, and a passage cleared to the Albert Lake. A treaty was made with M'tesa, King of Uganda, and Dr. Emin Effendi (Edward Schnitzer) was sent to him as Gordon's representative. In October Gordon left the Sudan in disgust, for all his efforts to suppress the slave trade were nullified by the resistance of Isma'il Yakub Pasha, the Governor of the Sudan, and his lying and corrupt officials. In February, 1877, Gordon was persuaded to return to Egypt, and Isma/il made him Governor-General of the Sudan and of the Equatorial and Red Sea Provinces, and gave him instructions to suppress the slave trade, to develop commerce, and to make peace with King John of Abyssinia. Gordon went to Masaw'a and made an arrangement with Walda Mikael whereby his raids on Abyssinian territory came to an end, and he proceeded to Khartum via Kasala and Kadaref. When he arrived there he found that a very serious rebellion had broken out in Dar Fur. It was led by Harun, a kinsman of the late Sultan of the province, and he was joined by all the neighbouring shekhs and by every one who had a grievance against the Government and was interested in the slave trade. The number of men in open revolt amounted to many thousands, and Hasan Hilmi, the Governor of Dar Fur, was unable to maintain his authority. Gordon went to Dar Fur in June, and learned that the province of Bahr-al-Ghazal was also in revolt, and that Suleman, the son of Zuber, had collected a large number of men and was ready to attack any force which the Government might send into the country. In July Harun retreated before Gordon to Tura,1 and when a month later he went to Dara, he found there Suleman and made him return to Shakka. Two months later Gordon went to Shakka, the chief centre of the slave trade, and sent Suleman to the Bahr al-Ghazal. Thus, for the time, the slave trade was broken up. Meanwhile Walda Mikael was giving trouble, and Gordon wished to seize him and send him to Cairo. At the end of 1877 Gordon visited the 1 See Gleichen, op. a'/., p. 239 ; Shucair, op. cit., Hi., p. 93. 235 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Red Sea provinces, and from Z61a went on to Harar. Here he found that the Governor, Raw'fif Pfisha, had ruled the people in a cruel fashion, and that he was a slave-dealer on a large scale ; he there- fore promptly dismissed him. In March, 1878, Walda Mikael attacked Rfts Bary6n, the commandant of the Abyssinian frontier, and defeated and killed him, and succeeded in obtaining possession of Gordon's letters to the Ras, wherein his views about Walda Mikael were expressed. Osman PAshA, one of Gordon's officers, supplied him with ammunition, and the Minister of War in Cairo wrote and congratulated Walda Mikael on his victory ! Nine months later Walda MikAtM made his submission to King John, which was accepted. Notwithstanding that most of Gordon's time and attention was occupied in keeping the peace, such as it was, in the Sudan, he managed to consider matters of commercial and practical utility. Among these was the scheme for uniting the Sudan with Egypt by a railway. The scheme was an old one, which was proposed so far back as 1857 by Sa'id Pasha, and the route was surveyed by Mougel Bey, the builder of the Barrage north of Cairo. In 1865 the country was examined by Messrs. Walker and Pray, but the railway was not begun. Subsequently Isina'il ordered a line to be laid from Haifa to the south, but after about fifty miles had been laid, at a cost of £450,000, the scheme was stopped. Gordon wished to make a line from Berber to the port of Sawakin, which is the natural outlet for Sudan produce, but the Khedive would not listen to the proposal. Meanwhile Gordon was doing splendid work in suppressing the slave trade, for in two months he seized fourteen caravans, and he settled a batch of 1,300 of ZuImt's old slave-soldiers in a district between W'adai and Dar Fur. The greatest event of the year 1878 was the campaign of : against Suleman, the son of Zuber, who revolted at the instigation of his father,1 and seized the province of Pahr ai- (dia/al. Gordon had long realized that it was hopeless to expect any support or help from Cairo, and he had good reason for ring that, in his inmost heart, [sma'il's sympathies were with his own corrupt officials in the Sudan, and that he regarded him 1 See (ileichen, op. cit.% p. 241 ; Shucair. op. \s army. Slatin found that the only course open to him was to surrender; this he did at Dara in December, 1883.2 He was then sent to Al-Obed under the name of 'Abd Al-KAder, and thence to Umm Durman (Omdurman), where he remained a prisoner until his escape in i895. About the middle of 1883 Osman Dikna gathered together the Hadanduwa and the Bishari and other tribes of the Eastern Desert, and they revolted against the Government to such purpose that by December the Egyptian garrisons of Sinkat, Kasala, Kad.'nef. Kallabat, &c, were in their hands. In October and November parties intended for Sinkat and Tokar were cut nf\\ and on December 2nd about 700 men wen- annihilated near Tamanib. In the Bahr al-Ghaz&l, Jankt, Shekh of the Dinkas, rebelled at Liffl on August 18th, [882, on behalf of the Mahdi; towards the end of the year Lupton marched against him and ited him with great slaughter at Telgona. Early in [883 Janki returned to Liffi and was again beaten : hut in September ked Rufai 'Agha, an officer of Lupton's, at Dembo, and -acred him and all his men. The whole Dinka tribe then led, and Lupton had to retreat to Dein ZuIh't : after August 15th he was isolated. After the annihilation of Hicks's army it was decided to abandon the Sudan, for the simple reason that Egypt could neither produce an army, nor pay for one, which should be strong enough to crush the revolt in the Sudan, The various Egyptian garrisons throughout the country had, of course, to be withdrawn, (jleichen, op. a'/., p. 255. M Shucair, op. a'/., iii., p. 1X7. 2J() GENERAL GORDON and the man chosen by the authorities to perform this work was General Gordon. He left London on January 18th, 1884, and reached Berber, via Korosko and Abu Hamed, on February nth ; he was accompanied by Colonel Stewart, who had been made his Deputy- Adjutant-General. At Berber he issued the decree authorizing the evacuation of the Sudan, which it is said astonished the Mudir, Husen Pasha Khalifa, and practically sealed Gordon's own fate. On the 18th Gordon arrived at Khartum, and the townsmen welcomed him. The enthusiasm was great at his assumption of power, at his remission of past and reduction of future taxes, and it lasted about nine days.1 Soon after his arrival Gordon issued a proclamation to the people, in which he said : — . . . . " I also give you the right to keep the slaves in your " service without any interference from the Government or any- " body else . . . ." "Whereas my sincerest desire is to adopt a course of action " which shall lead to the public tranquillity, and being aware with " what regret you have regarded the severe and stringent measures " which have been taken by the Government for the suppression "of the traffic, and the seizure and punishment of all concerned " in the slave trade, as provided by the convention and by the " decrees, I therefore confer upon you these rights : that hence- " forth no one shall interfere with your property ; that who- " ever has slaves in his service shall have full right to their " services and full control over them without any interference " whatsoever." s When the first enthusiasm was over the people of Khartum began to consider Gordon's pbsition. He was Governor of the Sudan, but he had no army, he forgave everybody, he freely remitted taxation, and he gave his support to the slave trade, which in years past he had done so much to crush. What did it all mean ? Then men remembered that Cairo had been taken possession of by the British, who had determined to abandon the Sudan, and they wondered when their country had been cast off by Egypt who was to rule it. Gordon announced that the Sudan was now an independent kingdom, with himself as the Governor- 1 Wingate, Mahdiism, p. 109. 8 Ibid., Appendix to Book v., p. 551. 247 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN General, but no one in Khartum regarded the man who had permitted Gessi to shoot Suleman, Zuber's son, and had dismissed in disgrace Raw'uf PAshA, the Governor of Harar, for slave- dealing, and had liberated thousands of slaves, as the permanent Governor of the country, the chief industry of which had, for thousands of years, consisted of slave dealing and slave-raiding. Nor had the tribes between the White and Blue Niles and the Ga'alin Arabs between Berber and Khartum a different opinion, and they remembered that it was Gordon who issued the edict to eject the Gellabas from the southern districts, and that as a result of this drastic measure many of the people had not only lost fathers, brothers, and sons, but had been reduced to beggary. • Were they," Slatin pertinently asks, "likely to forgive Gordon this?"' Gordon's position was an impossible one, and the authorities had sent him to do a thing which was, for him, impossible. Neither the British nor the Egyptian Government realized how serious the situation was, and even Gordon himself appears to have underrated the strength and extent of the fanaticism which produced the rebellion, and to have overrated his ability to cope with it. He appointed the Mahdi Sultan of Kordofan by proclamation, and sent him some very tine clothes and a letter asking for the se of all prisoners. But the Mahdi was already de facto master of all the country south of Khartum, and had tens of thousands of fanatical followers ready to right for him to the deathj whilst Gordon entered Khartum with merely a small bodyguard.- The Mahdi knew well that Gordon could not take from him by force of arms what he had obtained, and when he wrote back to him he advised Gordon to surrender and save his This incident is both ludicrous and pathetic, and illustrates -n's attitude towards the rebellion. In a very short time the natives made up their minds that Gordon was merely a Stop-gap, and they began to consider who was to be their head after his departure. There was only one man whom the tribes admitted to be fit to hold his office, and that man was the notorious Zuber ; and it was for him that they Mired. Gordon agreed with them, and asked the authorities 1 fire and Sword, p. 280. Una., p. 281. 248 GENERAL GORDON to send Zuber up to Khartum to take over from him the rule in the Sudan. The request was, however, refused on the ground that he had been a slave-dealer ; therefore Zuber was kept in Cairo. When the people in Khartum learned the decision of the Government, they were much disappointed, and shekh after shekh began to demand that Khartum should be handed over to him. Thereupon Gordon lined the forts with soldiers, and made ready for war. On March 16th he hazarded a fight, but his men " ran like hares and were massacred " ; a week later the " Bashi- Bazouks " refused to obey orders, and were promptly disarmed. On March ioth the Mahdi called on Gordon to surrender, and sent him as a present a suit of Dervish apparel, which consisted of a coat, an overcoat, a turban, a cap, a girdle, and beads, and invited him to come out to him at once wearing this suit. Gordon called a council to consider this summons,' and it decided to trust Gordon and resist ; and Gordon accepted the trust. He was never allowed to leave Khartum, and even on the most trifling boat journey he was always accompanied by vigilant townsmen,2 whose fetish he had become. Meanwhile Colonel Valentine Baker had set out in January to relieve Tokar, with 3,700 men, but on February 4th at At-Teb he was attacked by 1,200 Arabs; his men literally ran away, and as they made no resistance 2,300 of them were slain. Baker and his officers escaped with difficulty, but 3,000 rifles and four Krupp guns fell into the hands of the enemy. Four days later Tawfik and his men fought their way out of Sinkat, and they were all cut to pieces. General Graham was then sent to relieve Tokar with a British force of 4,000 men ; he defeated the rebels at At-Teb on January 29th, and again on March 13th at Tamai. In April Kadaref surrendered to the forces of the Mahdi; on the 21st of the same month Karam-Allah,3 the Amir of Bahr al-Ghazal, forced Lupton Bey to surrender. Lupton was given a new name, 'Abd- Allah, and sent to Omdurman, where he died on July 17th, 1888. On May 20th Berber was attacked, and, after some resistance, 1 A translation of the document is given by Wingate, Mahdiism, p. 1 1 1 ff. ; for the Arabic text, see Shucair, op. a'/., iii., p. 226. - Wingate, Mahdiism, p. 116. 3 He was executed at Al-Fasher by 'Ali Dinar in 1903 ; Gleichen, op. cit., p. 259. 249 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN surrendered. On the 27th Karam-Allah called on Emin Bey at Ladd to surrender, but he held on to his post, although his men very greatly disaffected. Emboldened by his capture of Berber, Haddai marched into the Dongola province, where, however, he was defeated in July at Debba and Tani. On September 1st Mustafa Pasha Yawar, the Mudlr of Dongola, with 400 men, attacked Haddai and Muhammad Mahmud, and their 3,000 men, and defeated them with great slaughter; both leaders were killed in the battle. In the interval the British Government had decided to send out a Gordon Relief Expedition, and to Lord Wolseley was given the command of it ; he arrived at Cairo on September 9th, and the expedition concentrated eventually at Korti in December. Towards the end of August Gordon felt that the time had omit' to strike- a blow at his enemies, who were hemming him in more closely each daw and on the 29th and 31st, his '4 fighting Pasha," Muhammad ' A 1 i Pasha, set out for the Blue Nile with a large force. He defeated \\l>d al-K&der at Geref, and Shekh Al- 'Obed at I.lalfava, and gained two brilliant victories. On September 4th, however, the Shekh Al-'Obed fell upon his forces at Umm Dubban at dawn, when they were tired and in disorder, for they had lost their way and had been wandering about all night, and Muhammad 'All and 800 of liis men were cut down, and 980 Remington rifles fell into the hands of the enemy.1 This disaster took place about twelve miles to the east of the town of Al-'filaffin on the Blue Nile, a few miles above Soba, and was the more heart-rending because it happened after the brave " lighting Pasha'* had gained a third victory at '£lafun. After this defeat mi believed his position to be, humanly speaking, despx and In- despatched the steamer " Abbas" to Cairo2 with Colonel Stewart, Herbin, Power, and a bodyguard of Greeks on board. The steamer left on September 10th, and was allowed to proceed safely ><> far as Habba in the Fourth Cataract, where she arrived on the 18th. Here the steersman ran her on a rock, and she sank, but Stewart and his companions managed to land. The)' entered a neighbouring village, and, having been invited into the 1 Win^ate, Malniiism, p. i 57 ; Shucair, o/>. cit.t iii., p. 251. ec Shucair, iii., p. 258 tt" 250 GENERAL GORDON house of Suleman wad Na'man to drink coffee and to discuss the hire of camels, were murdered. The Arabs who murdered the party were collected by Fakri wad 'Uthman, a blind man, and Suleman wad Kamr, the ShSkh of the Monasir Arabs, assisted them. After the murder of Stewart and his party, another body of Arabs attacked the crew of the steamer, and only thirteen of them escaped. On September 26th Gordon sent three steamers under the command of Nashi Pasha to meet the British Expedition, but this they did not do until January 21st, when they met the °4 t'/ rijv' /rf/yn TTTUB L>**f?- [COPY OF A FIVE-PIASTRE NOTE, PAYABLE AT KHARTUM OR CAIRO, SIGNED BY GORDON IN ARABIC AND ENGLISH. Desert Column near Matamma. The steamers were the TelaJi- wiya, the Borden, the Manmra, and later they were joined by the Safia. On October 10th news was received at Shendi of Stewart's death, and a steamer was sent to Khartum to inform Gordon. The steamer returned to Shendi, and the attack on that town by Gordon's men went on for three months. Meanwhile nothing was heard of the British Expedition, and the hearts of men in Khartum grew sick at the delay. After the disaster at '£lafun the inhabitants " fell into despair and distress, and wept for their state," and Burdeni Bey ' says that Gordon wept with them ; it 1 Quoted by Wingate, Mahdiism, p. 163 ff. 251 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN • the first and last time I ever saw Cordon Pasha in tears/' The day after the defeat the Mahdi sent 'Abd A r- Rahman an- X;i»unii with 10,000 men to Kalakala, and called upon every tribe to send men to besiege Khartum. They did his bidding, and began to bombard the town from all sides. But Gordon had no fear, and one evening when his friend Burd^ni suggested that he should have boxes of sand placed in the windows to stop the bullets, he was enraged, and at once had a lantern which would hold twenty-four candles brought to the room. He and his friend filled its sockets with candles, and lit them. Cordon then said, " Winn God was portioning out fear to all the people 11 in the world, at last it came to my turn, and there was no Fear "left to give me; go, tell ajl the people in Khartum that Cordon "fears nothing, for God has created him without fear." On November 12th a fierce fight between Gordon's men and the Is took place, and the latter lost heavily. After the fight the rebels built forts between Omdurman and Khartum, and bom- barded the latter town continuously. On December 28th a River Column left Korti under General Earle, with orders to push on to Abu Named, and two days later a Desert Column left the same place to occupy Gakdul Wells. •On January 5th, 1885, Farak-Allah. the brave commandant of Omdurman, was obliged to surrender, and all his men were taken prisoners. Thereupon the rebels began to cut off all supplies from Khartum, and men began to starve. The crops on Tuti Island were sown and reaped under the fire of the guns from the fort! They produced 20oardefoot Corn (the ardeb-=z$\ bushels, <»r 300 pounds), and each ardeb Cordon bought for £12. When this eoni and the biseuits were eaten, the town was carefully bed, but very little corn was found. A receipt was given to every man from whom corn was taken. Then men ate doe;-. donkeys, skins of animals, palm fibre, and gum. The soldiers stood like logs of wood on the fortifications, and the corps civilians tilled the streets. Then the cattle, 2N animals in all, were killed, and their fiesfa distributed among the soldiers. On January nth the Desert Column left Gakdul Wells, 1800 Strong, and on the 17th it engaged a force of 11,000 Dervishes at I b Abu Klea"), which it defeated with great slaughter. DEATH OF GORDON On the 19th it fought another battle at Abu Khrug, and on that day Sir Herbert Stewart was mortally wounded. On January 20th the rebels fired a salute of 101 guns, pretend- ing that they had beaten the British, but Gordon was not deceived. On the 24th Sir C. Wilson left Gubat with two of Gordon's steamers which had arrived on the 21st at Matamma. Meanwhile in Khartum the arrival of the British was expected, " but as day by day passed," says Burdeni Bey, " and we neither saw nor ''heard anything of them, we began again to despair. Gordon " Pasha used to say every day, ' They must come to-morrow,' " but they never came." On the following Sunday, January 25th, Gordon observed that a great commotion was taking place at Kalakala, and he felt sure that an attack on the town was imminent. He summoned his friends, and through Giryagis begged them to make a stand for the last time, for he had no doubt that in twenty-four hours the British would come. He was too much agitated to address his friends himself, and he felt that all the town was now believing that he had told them lies when he said the British were coming. Burdeni saw him after the meeting, and notes that the distress and anxiety of the last few months had turned his hair a " snowy white." If only a couple of English soldiers of the advancing force " could be paraded about " the lines of Khartum," he used to say, " 1 should not fear the " enemy's attack." Gordon sat writing till midnight, and then lay down to sleep, but was awakened between 2 and 3 a.m. by the cries of the 50,000 Arabs, who had crept across the parapet ' and over the filled-up ditch into the town. For an hour he kept up a hot fire on them, but it was useless to stay the horde which thronged to the palace. He then left the roof and went to his room, and having changed his sleeping apparel for his white uniform, he stepped out at the head of the staircase. Here four men, Taha Shahin, Ibrahim Abu Shanab, Hamad Wad Ahmad, and a certain Dongolawi, rushed towards him as he stood in "a calm and dignified manner, his left hand " resting on the hilt of his sword." He asked, " Where is Muhammad Ahmad ? " Shahin attacked him at once with the words, " O cursed one, to-day is thy day " (i.e., thy time hath come), 1 Ohrwalder, Ten Years' Captivity, p. 1 54 253 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and plunged his spear into his body. Gordon, it is said, made a gesture of scorn with his right hand, and turned his back, where he received another spear wound, which made him fall forward, and probably caused his death. The other three men rushed on him and hacked at him with their swords, and he must have died in a few seconds.' Gordon had a revolver in his hand, but he offered no resistance, and did not rire a shot.- His head was cut off at once15 and sent to the Mahdi, and his body was dragged down the stairs into the garden, and stripped, and it lay there naked for some time ; many Arabs came and plunged their spears into it. The head was taken over to Omdurman and shown to Slatin Pasha l by Shatta, a black soldier; it was afterwards fixed between the branches of a tree and all who passed by cursed it, and threw stones at it. His body was finally thrown into a wellr> 1 Burden! Bey, quoted by Wingate. Mahdiism, p. m. wholly different version of Gordon's death is given by Neufeld in his A Prisoner of the Khalifa. It reads : " By the time Gordon had slipped into his " <>ld serge, or dark tweed suit, and taken his sword and revolver, the advanced •• Dervishes were already surrounding the Palace. Overco ning the guards, a " rush was made up the stairs, and Gordon was met leaving his room. A "sin, ill spear was thrown, which wounded him, but very slightly, on the left " s-houlder. Almost before the Dervishes knew what was happening three of "them lay dead, and one wounded, at Gordon's feet; the remainder fled. " Quickly reloading his revolver, Gordon made for the head of the stairs, and "again drove the reassembling Dervishes off. Darting back to reload, he "received a stab in his left shoulder-blade from a Dervish concealed behind the " corridor door, and on reaching the steps the third time, he received a pistol " shot and spear-wound in his right breast, and then, great soldier as he was. '4 he rose almost above himself. With his life's blood pouring from his breast — " not his back, remember— he fought his way step by step, kicking from his " path the wounded and dead Dervishes ; . . . and as he was passing through " the doorway leading into the courtyard another concealed Dervish almost \ with a single blow. Then Gordon fell." o an authority quoted by Shucair(iii., p. 299) the actual murderer i»i Gordon was Muframmad Nubawi Shdkh ibn Garar. 1 Fire and Sword, p. 340. An eye-witness who visited the palace after the murder of Gordon says he saw his headless body, smeared with blood, lying at the foot of the stairs. He went upstairs, and passing three dead bodies entered Gordon's office, wherein he also took his meals, and saw on the table a plate with cooked eggs on it, a tm of preserved meat with a fork in it, a small spoon, and another plate with pieces ot sugar on it. He nexi went into his bedroom and saw clothes hanging er his bed, and looking-glasses, and his portmanteaus standing by the (Shucair, op. cil., hi., p. 254 FALL OF KHARTUM at Khartum. Gordon was murdered shortly before sunrise on Monday, January 26th, 1885. * Thus died one of the greatest of Britain's sons, and it was a common saying among Muslims. " Had Gordon been one of us he " would have been a perfect man ! " His bravery, generosity, and self-sacrifice won the admiration of his bitterest enemies.'2 We have it plainly stated by Sir Reginald Wingate,:J the greatest living authority on Sudan affairs, that the fall of Khartum was not caused by treachery in the besieged, nor by the stratagems of the besiegers, but through starvation and long neglect. Only the cruel river filled the ditch which protected the town with mud, and then ebbed away. Over this swarmed the Mahdi's men, and nothing could stop them. Help was at hand, only one short hundred miles away — but hunger and despair decided the issue.4 For some time past Gordon has been the subject of much cri- ticism ; ' some of it is friendly, but a great deal of it is of a decidedly 1 He was born on January 28th, 1833, at Woolwich. 2 Ohrwalder, Ten Years' Captivity, p. 169. 3 Mahdiisw, p. 156. 4 Ibid., p. 199. 5 Compare the following" from Sir Auckland Colvin's The Making of Modern Egypt, pp. 68 ff. On February 8th Gordon telegraphed that security in the Sudan would be restored in a month (p. 69). On the 18th he proposed that Zuber should be made Governor-General, and a K.C M.G. (p. 72). Gordon reversed the order of his instructions, and instead of arranging for the evacuation of the Egyptian troops, urged that the Mahdi should be " smashed up " (p. 73). Gordon for the first time grasped the situation when he arrived at Khartum. From that time he contended that evacuation was a mistake, and should be postponed until the Egyptian Government destroyed the authority which had superseded its own. He resolved to wreck that authority (p. 74). If the policy of evacuation were insisted on he would resign, and on March 25th he decided to remain (p. 75). The British Government and their Envoy over- estimated the influence which the latter could exercise in the changed conditions of the Sudan. "Gordon Pasha, as the representative of Ismail Pasha, at the "zenith of that Khedive's powe*-, and with slave-dealers only to contend against, " was one man ; but he was another General Gordon altogether as the emissary " of Tewfik Pasha— Tewfik the prot^gS of Christian England, the prisoner only "yesterday of his own rebellious Egyptian Army — and with Muhammad Ahmed " El Mahdi as adversary. Gordon Pasha, in the days when he was Governor- " General, by his energy, his ubiquity, his matchless courage, his lofty single- "mindedness, his large generosity, and by the absolute authority with which he "was endowed, had been a name of terror to evildoers. But General Gordon, " shut up in Khartum, authority wrenched from him, assistance from Egypt " unavailable to him, and with the Dervishes gathering around him, was not to 255 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN hostile character. What, however, is now plain is that when the authorities sent him to the Sudan in 1884 they did not really understand the seriousness of the situation in that country. Affairs had developed so rapidly since Gordon left the Sudan in 1879, and on lines so different from what he expected, that he himself probably failed to realize that he had undertaken to do what was impossible. Any one who ha* travelled in the Sudan, and conversed with Europeans and natives who know what state the Sudan was in at that time, cannot help hearing that, from an administrative point of of view, Gordon himself was impossible as a servant of the Government, and that he was often a thorn in the side of the authorities. It is said that his impulsive disposition, his generous emotions, his utter disregard for rules, orders, and precedents, his sometimes injudicious actions and fanaticism, " be regarded as of great account " (p. 78). No one realized that the country had passed over to the Mahdi (p. 78.) But if the responsibility of misleading the British Government rests on Gordon, the Cabinet cannot escape censure for their selection of so unsuitable an envoy. Gordon, with all his splendid qualities, was the most unfit selection possible for a mission of which retreat was the leading feature ; for his task he was eminently and absolutely unsuited. His peculiarities were no secret. ' He was not made to obey. In his own Journal he writes, " I own to having been very insubordinate to Her Majesty's Government " and its officials. But it is my nature, and I cannot help it. I know if I were "chief 1 would never employ myself, for I am incorrigible." He thought lie was directly guided by Providence, and his " impulsive and emotional nature " was beyond human control or comprehension. Years of solitary communing in " the African deserts, long days and nights of exhaustion and fatigue, fevers, "privation, wrestlings in prayer and spiritual strivings, had worked their M inevitable effect on the texture, both of mind and body" (p. 81). Lord Fitzinaurice, in his Life of Lord Granville. London, 1905, says, ,l It is not disputed by the biographers of General Gordon that, once arrived at " Khartum, he either forgot or deliberately put aside his instructions" (vol. ii., 5). Lord Granville wanted to recall Gordon (vol. ii., p. 401). Mr. Gladstone approved of Gordon's proposal to send Zuber to the Sudan, and at first Lord Granville did also (ii., p. 387). The four Ministers present at the meeting of the Cabinet which sent Gordon out were Lord Harrington, Lord Granville, Lord Northbrook. and Sir C. Dilke. Mr. Gladstone telegraphed his concurrence from Hawarden. Later he wrote : "Gordon remained in utter "defian< «• of the whole mind and spirit of our instructions. I do not see what " could have justified him, except (like Nelson at Trafalgar) a great success " (ii., p. 401). H( iks of the "insufficient knowledge of our man, whom rather took on trust from the public impressions, and from newspaper "accounts, which were probably not untrue, but so far from the whole truth "that we were misled" (ii.. p. 401). 256 THE RELIEF EXPEDITION caused his superior officers the gravest anxiety, and reduced them to despair. At the same time it is generally agreed that the initial mistake, which resulted in his going to the Sudan in 1884, was not made by him, and that had the advice of competent counsellors been taken he would not have been allowed to go there at all. But once sent, he should have been accompanied by a military escort sufficiently strong to show that he was supported by the Government, and that his orders would be, if necessary, enforced by arms. He was besieged in Khartum on March 12th, 1884, and those who knew the extent of the rebellion felt and said that his case was hopeless : yet the Relief Expedition was not sanctioned till the following August. Sir Reginald Wingate says,1 " There were no elements "of chance in the success of the expedition to relieve General " Gordon. It was sanctioned too late." And even when the expedition was ready to start it was, in direct opposition to the advice of the greatest authority on the subject. General Sir F. Stephenson, sent by the Nile instead of by the Sawakin-Berber route. This involved sending the force a distance of 1,650 miles from its base at Cairo, by a river in which were innumerable obstacles in the shape of cataracts, rocks, and shoals. It had to proceed against the stream, thus making slow progress, and in boats every one of which would have to be specially constructed for the purpose.2 All who were acquainted with the difficulties of the Nile route, and had had experience of past Egyptian expeditions into the Sudan and possessed a competent knowledge of the country, strongly recommended the Sawakin-Berber route, but to no purpose. The Relief Expedition was at Matamma on January 21st, four days after the brilliant defeat of the combined forces of the Arabs under Musa wad Helu at Abu Tleh (" Abu Klea "), when four of Gordon's steamers arrived to obtain news, and to bring British soldiers to Khartum. And Slatin Pasha asks, " Why did they "not send some Englishmen on board, no matter how few, and " despatch them instantly to Khartum ? If they could only have " been seen in the town, the garrison would have taken fresh " hope, and would have fought tooth and nail against the enemy ; 1 Mahdiism, p. 156. "2 Royle, Egyptian Campaigns, p. 313. VOL. II. 257 S THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN 11 whilst the inhabitants, who had lost all confidence in Gordon's "promises, would have joined most heartily in resisting the "Dervish attack, knowing that the relief expedition was now " certain to reach them.'" Gordon had done his best to hold the town. lie had made a paper currency,- and distributed honours and decorations almost daily, but what good were these now ? No one believed his promises, and how could men faint from hunger, with only gum to chew, carry out his orders ? The streets were tilled with people who had died from starvation, even though Gordon had kept his men hungry by distributing hundreds of pounds' weight of biscuit and dkurra among the destitute poor. But if only one steamer3 had arrived with news of a British victory * the inhabitants would have believed his words, and the town and the life of that fearless, brave, and gallant officer, who was courteous and generous to all, and careful for every one but himself, would have been saved. Father Ohrwalder's statement on this point is conclusive: "The unaccountable delay of the " English was the cause of the fall of Khartum, the death of " Gordon, and the fate of the Sudan. The Mahdi only made up his 11 mind to attack when he heard that they had delayed at Gubat. " He did not begin to cross over his troops till January 24th, and "it was not till Sunday night that the crossing was completed." After the defeat of his men at 'ftlaffm on September 4th Gordon saw that his position was indeed desperate, and from March 1 Jth he had known that it was precarious. Still, for 311 days he stuck to his post and did his duty, in spite ofwant, hunger, neglect, and despair. The imagination fails to grasp how acute his mental sufferings were during the last five months of the siege, as he ed to the south daily from the palace roof and saw the enemy slowly but surely closing in on him, and to the north for the help which never came. For six hours after the fall of Khartum the town was given up 1 Fire and Sword, p. 341. 2 On November 12th Gordon had in the Treasjry only ^831, but his paper 'ii ted ,£42,000 more. ■ also the opinion ot the fiki Medawi, quoted by Wing.ite, Maluiiism, p. I 1 Ohrwalder says that if twenty red-coats had arrived Khartum would have been saved (p. 167). *58 PILLAGE OF KHARTUM to pillage by the Arabs, and about 4,000 ' people were massacred ; the bloodshed and cruelty which attended the massacre are said by Slatin 2 to be beyond description. On January 28th, 1885, Sir Charles Wilson arrived with two steamers at Khartum, and learned that the town had fallen and that Gordon had been murdered two and a quarter days previously. The news was generally known in England on February 5th, and the bitterness of a great national disappoint- ment was felt to the fullest extent. All the gallantry and devotion of her officers and men had been unavailing ; the costly Nile Expedition had proved a dismal failure ; and Gordon had been allowed to perish. The main responsibility will always rest with the Government which so long delayed the despatch of the Relief Expedition, and then, as if to make its failure more certain, sent it by the wrong route.3 On February 13th the Desert Column, under Sir Redvers Buller, who had succeeded General Stewart, evacuated Gubat on the Nile, and retreated to Korti, which it reached early in March. The River Column succeeded in ascending the Fourth Cataract as far as Khulla, about 26 miles from Abu Hamed, and on its way fought, on March 10th, a decisive action, with brilliant results, at Kirbikan. General Earle was killed. At Salamat the Column destroyed house, water-wheels, palm-trees, and all property of Suleman wad Kamr, and Fakri wad 'Uthman, who had arranged the murder of Colonel Stewart. On March 6th the Column arrived at Merawi. Soon after the fall of Khartum the British sent another Expedi- tion to the Sudan via Sawakin under General Graham ; Indian and Australian troops were enrolled in it. General Graham was ordered to crush Osman Dikna, to occupy the Eastern Sudan, to build a railway to Berber, &c. The Expedition consisted of 13,000 men, and reached Sawakin on March 12th. The season chosen for the Expedition was singularly unfortunate, as it 1 Ohrwalder says (p. 162) that 10,000 people were killed, and that the streets were filled with headless corpses. The value of the sovereign sank to two-and- a-half dollars. 2 Fire and Sword, p. 345 ; Ohrwalder, Ten Years Captivity, p. 158. 3 Royle, Egyptian Campaigns, p. 386. 259 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN coincided with the precise time of the year at which, twelve months before, the hot weather had compelled Graham to with- draw his army. The Expedition stayed at Sawakin for two months, and fought actions at Tell Hashim on March 20th, at Tufrik on March 22nd, and at Tamai on April 3rd. The railway laid, 4 feet 8J inches in single gauge, so far as Awtan, but work on it ceased on April 20th ; the Expedition retired on May 17th. In February the garrison of Kallabat was relieved, in April the garrisons of Senhit and Amadib were relieved, Gira was relieved in July, but on the 30th of the same month Kasala was starved into submission. In March Sir Francis Grenfell became Sirdar of the Egyptian Army. On June 22nd the Mahdi died, according to Slatin, of typhus fever, and according to Ohrwalder, of fatty degeneration of the heart. Before his death he nominated as his successor 'Abd- Allah At-Ta'aisln,1 one of his four Khalifas. Soon after the death of the Mahdi a revolt broke out in Dar Fur and Korddfan, and Emin Pashi was obliged to withdraw from Lado and retreat to Wadelai, whence he hoped to enter into relations with Kabarega, king of Unyoro. About this time the frontier of Egypt was fixed at Wftdi Haifa, and the British force was withdrawn from Dongola on July 5th. Thus the Dervishes were free to raid the country so far north as the Second Cataract, and they took the opportunity of tearing up the railway and destroying the tele- graph. Most of the daggers seen in the Sudan in recent years are made from the rails and the fish-plates stolen at this time. During the summer of 1885 the Khalifa Wbd-Allah matured the plan for the conquest of Egypt which the Mahdi had formulated. 1 plan was to send two columns to march along the river to Haifa, and a third to cross the river from Abu Hamed to Korosko, thus cutting off from Egypt the frontier force at Haifa. By the beginning of August the Amir 'Abd al-Magid was at Don- gola with 4.000 men, and on the 24th the Amir Wad An-Xagumi left Omdurman with a large force for the north. In October 1 See Sbucair, op. a'tn iii., p. 302. 260 KOSHA AND GINNIS there was a Dervish force of 7,000 men at Hafir, and another 3,000 at Abu Hamed. On November 17th about 8,000 Dervishes reached Dulgo, and a week later there were 7,000 at 'Amara, a few miles from Ginnis and Kosha. On December 29th Generals Stephenson and Grenfell, with 5,000 men, attacked the Dervishes at Kosha and Ginnis and defeated them. 'Abd al- Magid, eighteen chiefs, and 500 men were killed, and 300 wounded. This defeat was a serious check to the Khalifa's advance. On September 23rd of this year Osman Dikna was defeated by the Abyssinians and the Beni Amer, at Kufit, and 3,000 of his men were killed. Early in 1886 Wadi Haifa was again made the frontier station of Egypt. In June the Dervishes arrived at 'Ukasha, and tore up the railway between that place and Ambikol Wells. In October 10,000 more left Berber, 1,500 of them having rifles, and this force had two or three steamers and a fleet of native boats; a month later their advanced guard of 2,000 men was at Abka, eight miles south of Wadi Haifa. In September Osman Dikna suffered defeat from the tribes on the Abyssinian frontier, and was obliged to run away. In January, 1887, Mr. Charles Neufeld, a German merchant, joined a party of the men of the famous Kababish Shekh Salih, intending to go to Kordofan to open up a trade in gum and ostrich feathers. When the party arrived at the Oasis of Selima, the Dervishes seized them, and the few who were not killed were taken to Dongola. There, with the exception of Neufeld, they were all beheaded, but he was sent on to Omdurman, where he arrived on March 1st. On April 27th Colonel Chermside killed Nur al-Kanzi and 200 Dervishes at Sarras. On May 17th, Shekh Salih and a large number of his men were killed by the Khalifa's men. He was the only man, it is said, of whom the Khalifa stood in fear. In June the Abyssinians, under Ras Adal, advanced to Kallabat, and defeated the Dervishes under Wad Arbab, whom they killed. The Khalifa sent reinforcements, whereupon the Ras threatened to invade the Sudan. The Khalifa then sent against him an army of 87,000 men under Abu Anga and Zaki Tummal, and a great battle was fought at Dabra Sin, thirty miles 261 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN from Gondar, in August.1 The Abyssinians were defeated, and the Dervishes entered Gondar and sacked it. In October the Dervishes again occupied Sarras, their force consisting of 2,500 men. In December a Dervish force led by Osman wad Adam (Ganu) fought an action against Zayid of Dar Fur near Dara, and repulsed him ; in a second fight he routed him completely, and entered Al-Fasher. Zayid and his predecessor Yusuf rled to the hills, but were killed soon after. Early in 1888 the Dervish force retired to Gemai, and on June 4th the last detachment of British troops was withdrawn from Aswan, and the frontier was left entirely to the protection of the Egyptian army. On August 29th the Fort of Khor Musa was captured by the Mahdi's men, and recaptured by the Egyptians. In this year a revolt broke out in Dar Fur. It was headed by a fanatic, an Anti-Mahdi, called Abu Gameza(" Father of the Sycamore"), Shekh of the Masalat tribe; he destroyed nearly one half of the Mahdi's force under Ganu at Kabkabia in October, and large numbers of men deserted from the Mahdi in consequence. Throughout this year attacks were made on Sawakin. On January 17th the Dervish camp at Handub was attacked by friendlies, who captured it. The Dervishes, however, returned, and drove the friendlies into Sawakin with considerable Colonel (now Lord) Kitchener and Lieut. Me.Murdo were wounded. The object of the attack was to capture Osman Dikna. On March 4th the Egyptians made an unsuccessful sortie under Colonel Tapp. On September 17th about 500 Arabs attacked the Water Forts and began to tire on the town, and the besi pushed on their trenches to within 600 yards of the defences. :.il Grenfell arrived in November, and with a force of 2.000 itians, J, 000 Sudani men, and 750 British troops, attacked ( >sman Dikna's force at Gameza on December 20th. The defeat of OsmAn Dikna's followers was complete, for his trenches were rushed, and 500 out of his 1,500 men were killed. The attack ought to have been followed up, but no instructions to that effect were given, and the British troops were withdrawn. On April 28th of this year Stanley and Emin met at Nsabe, 1 On the prophet * ts i who appeared at this time, see Shucair, op. cit.. iii., p. 480. 262 GRENFELL AT TUSHKI and the Khalifa, on learning of this, sent 4,000 troops to annihilate Emin. These arrived at Dufili on October 15th, and their leader, 'Omar Salih, called on Emin to surrender. Emin's men pre- ferred to resist, and for two months fighting went on between the two forces. On November 15th Reggaf was taken by the Dervishes, with large quantities of loot, several prisoners, des- patches, flags, &c, which were sent on to the Khalifa in Om- durman. Some of these were sent on to General Grenfell at Sawakin by means of Osman Dikna, and the worst fate was feared for Stanley and Emin. The advance of the Dervishes from Reggaf was prevented by Emin's men in December. In July the Abyssinian General Ras Adal attacked a Dervish force which, under Abu Anga, had invaded Abyssinian territory, and defeated it with great slaughter. The Ras made himself king of Gojam, and assumed the name of Takla Haymanot. At the end of the year the Khalifa prepared to invade Egypt, and collected a large force under Wad An-Nagumi to carry out his plan. On February 22nd, 1889, Abu Gameza's army was destroyed at Al Fasher by the Khalifa's troops, and the Shekh himself died the day following. Thus the Khalifa's power became supreme once again in Dar Fur, and the invasion of Egypt was taken in hand seriously. In April the Amir 'Abd al-Halim arrived at Sarras with 1,000 men, and by May 5th about 1,500 more came. On June 22nd Wad An-Nagumi came, and joined his men to those of 'Abd al-Halim, who had by this time crossed the river to Ma'tuka; the united force amounted to 4,000 men. In July Colonel Wodehouse engaged the force at Argin, and killed 900 men and took 500 prisoners. Undismayed by this defeat and by the secession of 500 men, who returned to Ma'tuka and thence south, Wad An-Nagumi burnt his camp on August 4th and moved on northwards so far as Faras. Here he camped, but was shelled out by artillery fire, and on the 10th he camped on the hills two miles south of Balanga. On July 28th his force consisted of 3,300 fighting men, and 4,000 camp followers, and with these he moved on to the hills four miles south of Tushki, which he reached on August 1 st. Here General Grenfell had concentrated his forces on the previous day. On August 3rd he discovered that Wad An-Nagumi was trying to avoid fighting, and that he wished to 263 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN continue his journey northwards. General Grenfell therefore determined to make him fight, and, without waiting for the arrival of the squadron of the 20th Hussars, which was on its way, attacked him with Egyptian and Sudani troops, and stopped him at Tushki, twenty miles north of Abu Simbel. The Dervishes were defeated with great loss, for Wad An Naguml and 1,200 of his men were killed, and 4,000 prisoners were taken. A> the immediate result all the reinforcements which had been sent down the river to assist Wad An-Nagfimi either retreated or deserted. General Grenfell shattered the Mahdiist vision of the conquest of Egypt, which was to be followed by that of the world, and struck a blow at the Khalifa's power which it took years to recover. In January, [889, Abu 'Anga, the great Dervish leader, died. In February King John of Abyssinia determined to take vengeance on the Dervishes for the sacking of Gondar. and at the end of the month he marched against Matamma, the capital of Kallabat, with an army of 87,000 men. He surrounded the town, which was held by Zaki Tummal, with 60,000 men, and on March 9th completely defeated the Dervishes. At the end of the fight King John was accidentally shot, and, panic seizing the Abyssinians, they retreated. The Dervishes pursued them, and their retreat lie a flight, and Zaki Tummal killed man)- of them and captured King John's body.1 Menelek II., King of Shoa, then d the throne of Abyssinia, and now reigns as " king of kings of Ethiopia." In the latter part of this year Einin Pashl succeeded in reaching Zanzibar, and the Dervishes evacuated the Bafrr al-Ghazal province, and Karam-Allah was withdrawn to Omdurman. On February 11th, 1890, Osman Dikna burned his camp at Handub, and removed to Tnkar, which became his head-quarters. On October 7th he left Tokar to attend a council to be held by the Khalifa at Omdurman. The crushing blow inflicted on the -las at Tushki in August, 1888, had completely paralyzed the Khalifa's organization. In the autumn of this year Suldman wad Kamr. Stewart's murderer, was killed. On January 27th, 1N91, Colonel Holled-Smith attacked Osman 1 See Shucair, op. tit., i i.. p. 480. 2(>4 THE KHALIFAS CRUELTY Dikna's camp at Handub and captured it. In February he advanced and took Trinkitat and At-Teb, and on the 19th, after a fight at Tokar, he captured the village of Afafit, and slew 700 of Osman Dikna's followers. Osman himself lied with about 300 men to Kasala, via Tamarin. On the 22nd, General Grenfell visited Afafit, and congratulated the troops on their victory. The result of these operations was the re-opening of the Sawakin- Berber road for trade. In this year several risings against the Khalifa's rule took place in Dar Fur and Kordofan, and Sultan 'Abbas ruled in Gebel Marra. The Shilluks also rebelled, and Zaki Tummfil was sent to reduce them. He made an alliance with the Nuers against the Shilluks, and they killed the Mek of the Shilluks. Soon after, however, the Nuers turned against the Dervishes and drove them out of the country south of Fashoda. In December the Shilluks defeated their enemies at Fashoda, and were then allowed to rest in peace for a short time. On Sunday, November 29th, Father Ohrwalder escaped from Omdurman with some Sisters of the Austrian Mission, and a black girl called Adila ; they reached Cairo on December 21st. In 1892 Osman Dikna continued to raid the tribes near Sawakin, and in the summer he attacked the post at Tamarin, but was driven off by Major Hunter with a loss of 70 men. The Dervishes began again to give trouble on the frontier, and in December a fight took place in which Captain Pyne and twenty- six of his men were killed. During this year the Shilluks suffered a number of defeats at the hands of Zaki Tummfd, who was, how- ever recalled with his army, and he was obliged to evacuate Fashoda. As the Italians were gaining power in Eritrea, he was sent to Kadaref and Kallabat to arrest their advance. When he reported that this was impossible he was recalled to Omdurman, and, having been invited into the house of Ya'kub (the Khalifa's brother), was seized, disarmed, and made a prisoner. His house was searched, and 50,000 dollars and a large number of gold rings, &c, were found in it. The Khalifa had him walled up in a building in the shape of a coffin, and a little water was given him through a hole in the wall, but no food. He lingered for twenty- three days, without uttering a groan or complaint, and without begging : on the twenty-fourth day he died, and the Khalifa had 265 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN him buried with his back towards Mekka, to destroy his hope of life in the world to come.1 In this year the Khalifa, hearing that Europeans were advancing from Zanzibar on his southern provinces, withdrew his garrison, under 'Omar Salih, from R< to B6r, and in October he sent Abu Kirga to bring 'Omar Salih to Omdurmfin : Abu Kirga, not wishing to go, fled to Fashoda, and he was supposed to have deserted and joined the cause o Muzil al-Muhan, whose wish was to destroy the Khalifa. The Khalifa was afraid of the success of Muzil al-Muhan, ■ the " father of sandals.*' and sent a force of 4,000 men against him under Ibrahim Khalil, but this was unnecessary, for the fanatic's preach- ings were neglected. In July, 1893, Osman Azrak raided the village of Beds, and the ptian Government established posts at the Oases of Khfirga and Dakhla. In November the Dervishes raided Murat WYlls. and killed Shekh Salih. By the end of the year the movement started by Muzil al-Muhan had died out. In this year the Khalifa became really alarmed at the growth of the Italian power in Eritrea, and he ordered a force to march eastwards from Kasala, the governor of which at that time was Musa'id Kedum. A Dervish force of 12,000 men under Ahmad 'Ali arrived at Kasala in November, and marched on to Aghiirdat, halfway to Masaw'a. lb re it was overthrown by Colonel Arimondi, with only a force of 2,000 men and 42 officers, and on December 21st Ahmad 'Ali was killed. Aim Kirga. who had fled to Fashoda in 1892, came to Re in 1893, and sent a gift of ivory to the Khalifa. When 'Omar Salih arrived in Omdurman he reported that his former district was no r in danger, and the Khalifa sent 'Arabi wad Dafa' Allah to • ommand, and to take the garrison back from B6r to Reggaf, and to put Abu Kirga in chains. When 'Arabi arrived, he wrote dl al-Mawla Bey, who was in command of some of Emin's nun, and told him to bring Baert, the successor of Van Kerckhoveii and leader of the Congolese Expedition, and his officers to him. Fadl declined to do this, and Baert pushed on in order to establish <>n the Upper Nile in the interest of the Congo Free S 1 Slatin, Fin and Sword, p. 574. 2 Seethe account of him given by Shucair, op. cit., iii., p. 547. 266 " RODDY ' OWEN His men under Fadl met the Dervishes at Makaraki and Wandi ; at the latter place a fight took place, and Fadl was killed, together with about half of his men, in January, 1894. In the summer of 1893 Abu Maryam, the successor of Osman Ganu, the Dervish commandant of Shakka, attacked the Dinkas, but he was killed, his force nearly destroyed, and many fugitives from his army fled to Shakka. On January 2nd, 1894, Colonel TWENTY-PIASTRE PIECES STRUCK BY THE KHALIFA A.H. 1311 (A.D. 1893). No. 2, a specimen of the " Umla Gadida," or " New money," contains 2 dirhams o. silver and 5 dirhams of copper. Colvile arrived in Unyoro ; he was appointed Chief Commissioner of Uganda in 1893, when the British Government took over the country. On February 4th Major " Roddy " Owen hoisted the British flag at Wadelai. On July 17th Colonel Baratieri, with 2,510 men, marched from Aghurdat, and surprised and took Kasala ; he fortified the town, and the Italians held it for two and a half years. In this year the Khalifa sent orders to Mahmud to re-occupy the Bahr al-Ghazal province, and he despatched 3,800 267 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN soldiers, under Hatim Musa from Shakka towards the Belgian posts. The Belgians retired before him, and the Dervishes entered Faroge; Shekh I.lamed went over to the Dervishes. In this Father Rossignoli, of the Austrian Mission, escaped from Omdurman, and arrived in Cairo on October 20th. On January 15th, 1895, Major Cunningham and Lieut. Van- deleur1 planted the British flag at Wadelal, in spite of the resistance caused by Kabarega, king of Unyoro. In 1895 Osman Dikna raided the country round TAkar. In the Bahr al-Ghazal, Hatim Musa, finding that the Belgians had retired, retreated to Shakka, whereupon, through want of food, most of his men deserted to Zemio ; he then retreated to Kordofan. Thus was the province free from Dervishes. In June Wad Dafa* Allah retired from Reggafto Shambi, frightened at the supposed advance of a European force, and the Khalifa sent 4,000 men to help him ; he then returned to Reggaf. On February 20th Slatin Pasha escaped from Omdurman, and he arrived at Aswan on Saturday. March 16th. On February 29th, 1896, an Italian army of about 37,000 men lefeated with great slaughter at Aduwa by the Abyssinians under Menelek II. They lost 7,000 killed, wounded and missing, and the Abyssinians captured 1,000 men and fifty-two guns. Their scattered forces were obliged to retreat towards Mas awa. and were therefore unable to give assistance to their countrymen who were practically imprisoned by the Dervishes in the garrison of Kasala. Emboldened by the defeat of the Italians, the Dervishes attacked Sabderat on March 18th, and were repulsed; on April 2nd they attacked Mukram, and on April 3rd Tukruf, sala, but they weir beaten by the Italians under Colonel Stefani, and were compelled to retreat. On April 15-17 Colonel Lloyd from Sawakin and Major Sidney from Tokar, with 1,000 men, and a party of friendly Arabs led by Shekh 1 Ttta, killed about 100 of Osman Dikna's men, and ided about 100 more, at Khdr Wintri. The rest of his force of about 600 men managed to escape to the hills, but his pre This brave and distinguished officer, who was killed in action at the age of thirty-two, has found a sympathetic and truthful biographer in Colonel Maxse ; see Seymour Vamiclcur, London. 1906. jfxS KITCHENER'S ADVANCE was destroyed, and there were no more fights in the neighbour- hood of Sawakin. Early in March, 1896, partly with a view of assisting the Italians, and partly because it was felt that the time had come when a blow must be struck at the Khalifa's power, the British Government determined to make an advance on Dongola. It was decided that the Expedition should consist of 9,000 Egyptian troops under the Sirdar, Sir Herbert Kitchener, who had succeeded Sir Francis Grenfell. On March 12th Colonel Hunter was ordered to advance to 'Ukasha. On March 19th the TRANSPORT OF SECTIONS OF LORD KITCHENER'S GUNBOATS BY RAILWAY. Egyptian Government applied to the Commissioners of the Public Debt to advance £500,000 towards the expenses of the Expedition. Four out of the six Commissioners agreed, and the money was advanced. In the lawsuit which followed, the Mixed Tribunal in June ordered the Government to refund the money (already spent !) with interest, and this judgment was, on appeal on December 2nd, confirmed. The British Government, at the instance of Lord Cromer, lent the sum due, £515,600, which was paid into the Caisse on December 8th. and subsequently presented the amount to the Khedive's Government. 269 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN j_ On April 2nd the Italians defeated a force of 5,000 Dervishes at Mount Mukram, and killed 800 of them. On May 24th the railway from Haifa had reached Ambikol Wells. On June 7th the Sirdar attacked the Dervish garrison at Ferket, with a River and a Desert Column, the two together consisting of about 9,000 men, and surprised it, and almost destroyed the entire force there. The Dervishes lost 1,000 killed, and 500 were made prisoners, and 'Osm&n Azrak and forty chiefs were among the slain. The Sirdar sent on his troops to occupy Suwarda, which had until that time been the base for Dervish raids. Thus the Khalifa's frontier army was destroyed. On June 17th Captain Mahon captured eleven boats laden with grain. On August 4th the railway was pushed on by Captain Girouard, R.E., to Kosha, which on July 5th had been made the Sirdar's headquarters. On August 25th a rain-storm swept away part of the line at Sarras. Cholera appeared at Kosha on July 15th, and carried off four British officers and two engineers who were putting together the gunboats. On September 18th the Sirdar's forces reached the Island of Tombos, and on the 19th the Dervishes under Wad al- Bishara were driven out of Hafir by the gunboats and artillery. The Dervishes lost 200 men. New Dongola was occupied at 1 1 a.m. on the 23rd, and 900 prisoners were captured ; these converted into a black battalion and were added to the Sirdar's army. Debba, Korti, and Merawi, ten miles from the foot of the Fourth Cataract, were occupied a few days later. Merawi became the head-quarters of the Frontier Field Force, and the Sirdar returned to Cairo, leaving General Hunter in command of the province, which was placed under military law. Tlic building of the railway was continued, and the rebuilding and re-inhabiting of New Dongola began at once. The Khalifa, expecting the Sirdar to advance across the desert, began to fortify Omdurman. In 1897 tne Sirdar continued his policy of advancing slowly, and making good every step taken by him towards the re- conquest of the Sudan. The railway from Haifa reached Kerma i May 4th, but long before this the Sirdar realized I s use, so far as the Expedition was concerned, was practically lie therefore determined to build another line from Haifa 270 MASSACRE AT M ATA MM A across the desert to Abu Hamed (231 miles) ; without such a line any advance on Berber and Omdurman was practically im- possible. The distance saved in cutting across the desert, instead of following the course of the Nile through the Second, Third, and Fourth Cataracts, is about 330 miles. The building of this line was sanctioned early in the year, and by May 4th about 15 miles of it had been actually laid. When the Halfa-Kerma line was finished the whole of the railway battalion was set to work on the Haifa-Abu Hamed line, and it advanced with marvellous rapidity under the direction of Captain Girouard, R E. The officer in charge of rail-head was Lieut. E. C. Midwinter, R.E., and the average rate of progress was ih miles per day. In June the Khalifa decided to send a strong force under Mahmud to occupy the important strategic point Matamma, the capital of the Ga'alin tribe, which lies on the west bank of the Nile a few miles south of Shendi. The Ga'alin, an Arab tribe which is famed for the chastity of its women, wrote to the Khalifa entreating him not to send an army there, and undertaking to defend their town against the " Turks." The Khalifa was furious at this request, and ordered Mahmud to proceed to Matamma. The Ga'alin sent shekhs to Merawi to ask for help and rifles, saying they would resist Mah- mud and throw in their lot with the Sirdar and the Egyptians. The Sirdar sent 6,000 rifles, and a large quantity of ammunition, but to send an army was out of the question, for he could not feed it at Matamma, and the town itself was unequal to such a task. Besides, the possibility of treachery had to be taken into account. Before the rifles reached Matamma Mahmud attacked the town, and though his first onset was repulsed, his second succeeded. Mahmud arrived at dawn on July 1st, and for three days the Ga'alin kept him at bay, but when their ammunition was spent they had to surrender. The Dervishes entered the town and massacred about 2,000 men, besides women and children, and thousands died through the mutilation of their limbs which Mahmud had carried out on every male. The women were treated in an atrocious manner, and numbers of them drowned themselves in the Nile to escape dishonour; the old women were killed, and the girls were made prisoners. Practically the whole population of Matamma was destroyed. The few Ga'alin 271 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN who escaped made their way to Gakdul Wells, and the Sirdar supplied them with rifles and ammunition, food, the report of the Dervish night attack rid into the Khalifa's camp men who pretended that they iters from the Sirdar, who was going to attack the Dervishes that night. No night attack therefore took place. At 5.30 a.m. on September 2nd the bombardment <>f Omdurman was continued, and a few minutes later the advance of the enemy 11. " It was a splendid sight. A huge amphitheatre, lit up by 1 "On one occasion there were one hundred Dervishes praying in the court- •' yard of the mosque ; a lyddite shell burst in their midst, and only two came "out unwounded."— Sudan Campaign^ p. 226. BATTLE OF OMDURMAN " a blazing sun, in which a mass of fearless men, clad in gay- " coloured jibbahs, waving countless flags, and following reck- " less horsemen, were rushing forward with absolute confidence of " victory, and absolute contempt of death." l At 6.45 the artillery opened fire, and their shells burst in the Dervish ranks, but it did not stop their advance. Whilst one body of Dervishes attacked the southern face of the Sirdar's position, another rushed out from behind Gebel Surgham (Surkab) to attack the left flank. Presently the Guards opened fire, and next the Warwicks, the Highlanders, the Lincolns, and, later on, Maxwell's brigade. The Dervishes fell in heaps, but those behind pressed on until the foremost row were only 800 yards from the British force. Whilst the Khalifa was attacking the British position, the Khalifa's son, Shekh Ad- Din, and 'Ali Wad Helu, with 10,000 men marched out on the Egyptian troops under Colonel Broadwood. The Dervishes attacked with boldness, and Colonel Broadwood was so hard pressed that disaster must have followed had not the gunboat opened fire at close range, with deadly effect, and so saved the situation. These attacks on the position having failed, the 21st Lancers, about 320 in number, under Colonel Martin, were sent out to prevent the Dervishes from retreating to Omdurman. Soon after they started they saw, as they thought, from 200 to 300 of the enemy concealed in a khor, and they wheeled into line and charged. As they came near, the party of Dervishes was found to be about 3,000 strong, and these suddenly rose up and opened fire. The Lancers, however, rode on, charged through the mass of Dervishes, and fought their way out on the opposite side ; then they dismounted, and opened fire on the enemy, and drove them out of the position. The Sirdar then ordered his force to evacuate the camp and to march on Omdurman. About 9.30, when the leading brigades were close to the west side of Gebel Surgham, the third division of the great Dervish army, some 20,000 strong, led by the Khalifa himself, rushed to the attack on the Sirdar's flank. The brunt of the attack was borne by the brigade of Colonel Macdonald, who, whilst carrying out the change of front ordered by the Sirdar, found himself about a mile distant from the rest of the army. 1 Sudan Campaign, 1896 to 1899, by an Officer, p. 192. 275 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN The Dervishes, preceded by 300 or 400 mounted Bakkfua. attacked from the west, intending to break Macdonald's line, but never a man got within 300 yards of the fighting line. The Dervishes drove their banner-poles into the ground, and gathered round them, and died. But whilst Colonel Macdonald wasstill fight- ing, the Dervishes who were hidden behind the Karari hills, to the north of Gebel Surgham, rushed out to deliver a second attack, thus threatening Macdonald both before and behind. The Dervishes were in two divisions, one led by Shekh Ad-Din, and the other by 'Ali wad Helu, and they intended to envelop Macdonald. Seeing this, Macdonald coolly moved the men of his brigade into such a position that one portion of them faced north and the other west. When the Dervishes came up, they were received with a fire that no living thing could face and live, and at the same time Colonel Lewis's Brigade enfiladed the Khalifa's ranks on the left. Colonel Wauchope's Brigade then came up, the fight ceased, and the Dervishes broke and fled. " The masterly " way in which Macdonald handled his force was the theme of icral admiration." The Dervish loss was 10,800 killed,1 and 16,000 wounded ; the Sirdar's entire loss was 48 killed, and 382 wounded. About 4,000 black troops surrendered, and some 1,222 of these were wounded ; and three of Gordon's old steamers were captured.8 Soon after 3 o'clock the Sirdar entered Omdurman, and was met by shekhs bearing flags of truce, who said the people tendered their submission ; this the Sirdar accepted, and the soldiers laid down their arms, whilst the people swarmed out of their he and cheered the troops. The Khalifa's house was shut and barred, and was shelled by the gunboats from the river. The Mahdi's tomb was then entered, and it was found to be much damaged by the fire from the gunboats and the howitzer batt the top of the dome was knocked off, and there were several holes in it. The Khalifa unfortunately escaped before the Sirdar entered Omdurman, and made his way to the west, leaving 1 Koylc. Egyptian Campaigns^ p. 571. 2 See the fine accounts of the battle given by "An Officer," in Sudan \igti) p. 191 ff., and by Colonel Maxse, in Seymour Vanddeur, and Royle, btian Campaigns, p. 551. 276 KITCHENER IN OMDURMAN untouched the dinner to which he had invited the Amirs to come after his defeat of the Anglo-Egyptians ! As soon as steps had been taken to guard the town, the Sirdar went and set free the European prisoners, Charles Neufeld, Joseph Ragnotti, Sister Teresa Grigolini, and about thirty Greeks, and a large crowd of natives, many of whom had been THE MAHDIS TOMB AT OMDURMAN BEFORE THE BOMBARDMENT OF THE TOW'X BY LORD KITCHENER. officials under the old Government ; the total number of prisoners set free was 10,854. At 5 p.m. five Brigades reached the north end of Omdurman, but it was nearly midnight before they had marched through the town and bivouacked. The cavalry pursued the fugitives until far into the night, but want of forage and stores then compelled them to return ; the gunboats steamed 90 miles south of Khartum, but could find no trace of the Khalifa. When 277 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN the arsenal was examined it was found to contain an enormous collection of weapons and stores of ammunition, including sixty cannon, Dervish spears, swords, banners, drums, rifles, and a lot of miscellaneous stuff picked up on the battle-field where Hicks was defeated. Two carriages, in one of which Gordon had driv< also found,1 and there were shirts ot mail said to date from the time of the Crusaders. At dawn on September jrd the army marched out and bivouacked four miles south of Omdurman, and parties were told off to bury the dead. Among these were numbers who pretended to be dead, but who jumped up when any one came near and either speared or shot the first soldier they met. Such shammers were promptly despatched, and incidents of the kind gave ri tlie outrageous charge made in the Contemporary Review that the Sirdar ordered the Dervish wounded to be massacred, and that his soldiers wantonly killed wounded and unarmed Dervishes The char- - mischievous as it was untrue, as all who knew the Sirdar and the officers who were with him understood. British officers neither do such things, nor allow them to be done. It is notorious that the Sirdar might have had hundreds of unarmed men cut down as they rushed towards him when he rode through the town, and that he did all in his power to prevent unnecessary slaughter. At one time it was a question whether the Dervishes would spare his life, not whether he would spare theirs.-' but as he rode coolly among them and promised them amdn, i.e., " security," they laid down their arms, and no one touched them. We have it on the unimpeachable authority of Captain Adolf von Tiedemann, of the Royal Prussian General that he saw the Sirdar, wholly regardless of his personal . ride into narrow streets and courtyards, with uplifted hand, calling out Anion. Tin- charge that Omdurman was looted for three days was equally untrue. It was also said that the Sirdar did nothing to alleviate the sufferings of the wounded ishes, but as we know from the evidence of the Daily ■i respondent, that b,ooo to 7,000 out of the 16,000 1 For a picture of it, see Sudan Campaign, p. 222 In the other, Sa'id P&shl had driven from Cairo to Khartum. udan Campaign, p. 217. 278 KITCHENER IN KHARTUM Dervishes wounded were treated in Hasan Effendi Zfiki's hospital, this statement is also seen to be without foundation. One other important and most necessary thing was done, at the request of, and with the approval of, many Muhammadans. The Mahdi's tomb was destroyed, and his body taken from its grave, and burned in the furnace of one of the steamers, and the ashes thrown into the Nile. The head, it was said, was taken possession of by a British officer, but subsequently orders were issued to bury it, and a burial ceremony took place at Haifa. Had the building been allowed to stand, and the body to remain in its grave, the tomb would have become the centre of fanaticism and revolt, and the effect of the victory of law and order over lawlessness, barbarism, and savage despotism on the minds of the tribes for hundreds of miles round would have been ruined. The outcry raised against the act showed that there were even in 1898 some people in England wrho did not realize how completely the whole Sudan had been held in the grip of Mahdiism, but the Muhammadans understood their co-religionists, and knew that nothing short of the destruction of the Mahdi's body would bring lasting peace to the Sudan, and prove that Muhammad Ahmad was, even in the eyes of Muhammadans, an impostor. The ruins of the tomb proclaim to all passers-by the fate of one of the greatest of false teachers, and the lesson which they teach has sunk deeply into the minds of the natives. On Sunday, September 4th, the Sirdar, with his staff and a large force, steamed over to Khartum. The troops formed up into three sides of a square facing the ruined palace, on the staircase of which Gordon was murdered on January 26th, 1885 ; the Sirdar made a signal, and the British and Egyptian flags were run up flagstaffs erected on the palace, and the bands played " God save the Queen," and the Khedivial Hymn, whilst the gunboats saluted with twenty-one guns, and officers and men stood at attention. Three cheers were given for the Queen, and three for the Khedive, and the Guards' band played the " Dead March" in Said; after a short service the Sudani band played Gordon's favourite hymn, " Abide with me.'J On September 10th the Sirdar left for the south, and on his 1 Royle, Egyptian Campaigns, p. 581. 279 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN arrival at Fashoda on the 19th he found it occupied by Major Marchand ; the British and Egyptian tia^s were hoisted,1 and leav- ing a force there under Major Jackson, the Sirdar went on his way. A few days later the Egyptian flag' was hoisted at Meshra ar-Rek. Major Hunter occupied Sennaar, Karkoj, and Ruserea by October 1st, and Major Parsons defeated the Dervishes at Kadaref on September 22nd, and occupied the town. On December j(>tli Colonel Lewis defeated Ahmad Fadil, cut up his force and killed about 500 Dervishes. ( )n December 7th Colonel Collinson hoisted the British and Egyptian flags on the old fort at Kail a bat. In January. 1899, Lord Cromer visited the Sudan. In November, 1:899, Colonel Sir Reginald Win I out to attack the Khalifa with a force of 3,700 men. On the -'2nd he seized the camp of Ahmad Fadil at Abu Adel, killed 400 of his men, and captured all the grain he was taking to the Khalifa. On the 24th a fierce fight was fought at Umm Dabr&kat, and the Khalifa and all his chief Amirs, including Wli wad Helu and Ahmad Fadil, weir killed.' The Dervish loss was 600 killed, and 3,000 prisoners and 6,000 women and children were taken. It was this ■ Major Marchand evacuated Fashoda on December nth. Sec Shucair, op. 1//., iii., p. 664. \s soon as Colonel Wingate's force had swept through the Dervish " position into the enemy's camp, the news at once spread that the Khalifa "killed with most of his Emirs. Colonel Wingate immediately went to the '•spot where the Khalifa was said to be lying. < >n the way a boy of 15 " caught hold of Major Watson's hand and said, 'The Khalifa is dead. I am his "son/ He took Major Watson to the place where his father lay. There was •"the Khalifa lying in his forwah (sheepskin), his jibbeh riddled with bullets. " Lying over him were his two chief Emirs, Ali Wad Helu and Ahmed Fedil. LCh side of him were ten or a dozen of his chief Emirs, and in front of "him his faithful bodyguard, all dead. While Colonel Wingate was looking "at this terrible but noble spectacle of brave men dead, a small man was seen "to crawl out from under the slain. This was Yunis Deghemi, the former "' Emir of Dongola. After a short time he began to speak, and at length 11 answered the questions put to him by Colonel Wingate. He said that when " the Dervishes failed to outflank the Egyptians and began to run before the u terrible fire the Khalifa called to his Emirs and said. ' I am not going away ; 1 " shall die here ; I call on you to stay by me and let us die together.' The Khalifa "took his forwah (sheepskin), sat down on it, and calmly awaited the end, "which was not long in coming. Later in the day, by order of Colonel " Wingate, the Khalifa and the Emirs who were killed were buned where they 280 DEATH OF THE KHALIFA fight which finally destroyed the power of Mahdiism in the Sudan. The defeat of the Dervishes at Omdurman restored that city to the Egyptians, but so long as the Khalifa lived he was the visible personification of the Mahdi's movement, and many Muham- madans who saw him believed that he would one day be victorious. Only in the preceding August Khalifa Sherif ' preached Mahdiism openly at Wad Madani; but he was captured by Captain N. M Smyth, V.C., and tried by court-martial and shot. On August 26th the Atbara railway bridge was opened. On December 17th Colonel Mahon, D.S.O., occupied Al-Obed. On December 22nd Sir Reginald Wingate succeeded Lord Kitchener as Sirdar and Governor of the Sudan. On January 18th, 1900, Captain F. Burges captured the notorious Osman Dikna in the Warriba Hills, to the south-west •of Sawakin ; he was first sent to Rosetta, but later to Damietta. Captain Burges was assisted by a Commandant of Police called Muhammad Bey Ahmad." On March 4th 'Ali 'Abd Al-Karim, the leader of a fanatical sect of Muhammadans whose views were opposed to the Government, and several of his chief followers, were deported to Haifa and placed under restraint. :i The prompt action which Sir Reginald Wingate took in this matter is highly praiseworthy, for religious enthusiasts of the kind of 'Abd Al- Karim should never be allowed to be at large. Their ultimate aim is always political power, and every one who preaches in the Sudan equality and community of other people's possessions is always certain of a large following. The Mahdi adopted this method, with what success we have seen. On November 29th Colonel Sparkes left Omdurman with a force of nearly 400 men in steamers to occupy the Bahr al- Ghazfil province, and he arrived at Meshra ar-Rek on December 14th. In December Lord Cromer visited the Sudan a second " fell by their own people with proper ceremonial. They lie in a beautiful spot, " near a large sheet of water surrounded by trees, and not so very far (some " forty miles) from Abba Island, the cradle of Mahdiism." — Times, December 9th, .1899. 1 He lived at Shakaba, forty miles from Sennaar, and had with him Fadil and Bishra, two of the Mahdi's sons. 2 Shucair, op. cit., hi., p. 670. 3 Ibid., p. 671. 28l THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN time, and on the 24th he delivered a speech of an important character.1 On January 1st, 1901, Colonel Sparkes made Tong his head- quarters, and then made expeditions to W&w, Fort Dessaix, Rumbek, Amadi, Kird and Shambi. Major W. Boulnois con- ducted a patrol to D6m Zuber, Telg6na, F&r6ge\ and Chamamui, and returned to Tong on April 10th. In April the post which had been established at Kirn was transferred to Mongalla, across the river, because Kir6 was claimed to be in Belgian territory. In June Colonel Sparkes visited Sultan Tambura of the Xiani- Niams, and was well received, and he found the people to be of a " comparatively highly civilized order." In this month 'Ali Dinar, who after the conquest of Omdurman had been entrusted with the province of Da* Fur, began to pay tribute to the Govern- ment. In this year the Sudan Government made two treati< to the eastern frontier. The first was arranged by Colonel Collinson, Mudir of Kasala, with Signor Martini, Governor- Cm ral of Eritrea, on February 28th, and the second by Colonel tin Hon. M. G. Talbot, R.E., with Lieut. Colli at Kasala on April 16th. In April Major Gwynn, D.S.O., and Captain Smyth, V.C., surveyed the country about FAmaka. The expedi- tion, which left Nasser in January under Major Austin to explore the almost unknown, but rich gold-producing country to the south- rly came to i,rrief. It was arranged that the Abyssinians to store supplies at Murle, on the north bank of Lake Rudolf, but when the party arrived they found that the Abys- sinians had failed to keep their word. The party suffered greatly 10m hunger and sickness, and thirty-nine of the fifty-three men ir vat ion. During the year 1901 the Sudan Government, notwithstanding its small staff of officials, and its limited means, explored its vast territories, organized and administered the country, established tribunals, and extended communications, and, in Count Gleichen's words, "settled down into an . [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Offk THE BAHR AL-GEBBL — MOXGALIA. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. 283 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN expeditions were quickly organized under Major Hunter and Captain L. Strack, who burned the Agar villages, and killed 1 1 of their men and carried off their cattle. The ringleader of the Agars, Myang Matyang, died of his wounds in July, and the Agars sued for peace. On May 15th a frontier treaty was signed at Adis .Ababa by Menelek II., King of Abyssinia. In the spring or summer of this year the Shekh As-Senussi died, having nominated his nephew, Ahmad Ash-Sharif, as his successor. His death put an end to the communications between the Senussi and 'Ali Dinar, Sultan of DAr Fur, which had been going on for three or four years. In July the Dervish Amir 'Arabi Daf'a Allah surrendered to 'Ali Dinar with 3,000 rifles. In December, 1902, Lord Cromer visited the Sudan a third time On January 27th, 1903, Lord Cromer made a speech in the Grand Hotel, Khartum.' In March Colonel Sparkes marched from Kossinga to I.lufrat An-nahAs," the famous copper mines in the south of Dar Fur, He found a number of shallow pits in a space about half a mile square. The place was deserted, for the former chief, Ibrahim Murad. went to Kahkingi when the Mahdi rose to power. In February Captain Armstrong was sent to open up relations with Yambio, the chief of the Niam-Xiams. He was killed by an elephant on the 23rd, but the expedition was continued by Colour-Sergeant Boardman, R.M.A. On reaching the Niam- Niam country he was attacked by Mangi, the son of Yambio, and was obliged to retire. In Augusta Mahdi called Muhammad Al- Amin appeared ami settled in Gebel Takali. but he was captured olonel Mahon, C.B., D.S.O., and taken to Al-Obe'd, where inged on September 27th. In November work on the Atbara-Sawakin Railway was begun. During the year 1903 good progress was made in the delimitation of the Abyssinian frontier by Colonel the Hon. M. G. Talbot, Major C. W. Gwynn, and Major C. E. Wilson, and a provisional agreement was made between tin Sudan and Congo Free State Governments about the territory between 5 and 5 30' north latitude. The capture of Ahmad al-( ihazali on March 20th, and the death of the brigand 1 An Arabic translation of it is given by Shucair, op. r//., iii., p. 680 ft. For the route, see Gleichen, op. a'/., vol. 11., p. 103. AN AGAR DINKA WOMAN AT SHAMBI. [From a photograph by Miss Hilda Burrows. RAIDING CHECKED Hakos on December 16th, brought peace to Wadai and the Abyssinian frontier respectively. On January 27th, 1904, Captain P. Wood left Tong to visit Yambio, the Sultan of the Niam-Niams, with a view of establishing friendly relations with him. He was received with treachery and hostility, and found it necessary to destroy the village of Riketa, a son of Yambio. His losses on this occasion were Captain Haynes, who died of his wounds, two men killed, and eight wounded. Wood retired slowly to Mvolo (lat. 6° 6' and 290 58') in order to keep in touch with the " Scientific Mission" of Lemaire, which had established itself in Anglo-Egyptian territory. In May Sir Reginald Wingate visited Itang on the Baro River. On May 23rd Ibrahim wad Mahmud, the notorious slave-dealer of Gebel Gerok, was hanged at Wad Madani. In spite of warnings given to him in 1903, he had continued his raids, and openly defied the Government, and eventually Colonel Gorringe, Governor of Sennaar, was sent with 800 men to capture him. Ibrahim escaped from his village, but was caught and handed over to Major G. de H. Smith by Shekh Ahmad of Asosa on March 3rd. In August another religious enthusiast, called Adam, who proclaimed himself to be the Mahdi, appeared near Senga on the Blue Nile. The Egyptian Ma'amur of Senga, acting with most commendable promptitude, went out to capture him, and met him with his " twelve Apostles." Adam refused to surrender, and in the fight which followed he and his " Apostles " were killed. The Ma'amur was, unfortunately, killed also. In September, Major O'Connell marched with a force of 340 rifles, and reduced to subjection the chiefs of Nuba, who had been in the habit of raiding the country south of Obed. During 1904 the efforts of the Siidan Government towards the pacification of its country met with great success, and Count Gleichen tells us ' that the desert west of Dongola, and the country of the Southern Atbai and of the Gamilab tribe were visited, and certain districts mapped and surveyed. Posts too were estab- lished between the River Setit and Kallabat, and the raids of the 1 Op. tit., p. 279. 285 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Abyssinian brigands who infested the country were checked. The district about Gebel Tabi was explored, and garrisons established in the country of the northern Burun. As a result trade routes were opened up, to the great benefit of the natives. More effective control was established over the Shilluks near Fashoda (K6d6k),and more friendly relations between the Dinkas and the Nuerswere entered into. In the Mongalla districts posts were established where necessary, and troops were quartered throughout the Nuba mountains. Sir Reginald Wingate visited Waw in November, 1904. As the attempt made in 1904 to establish peaceful negotiations between the Niam-Niams and the Egyptian Government had failed, Sir Reginald Wingate despatched a force against them under the late Major \Y. A. Boulnois, Governor of the Labr al- Ghazal province. The eastern column of this force was under Captain A. Sutherland, and tin- western under Major Boulnois ; tlie former was to attack Mangi, the son of Yambio, and the latter Yambio himself. On January 1st Captain Sutherland's was concentrated at Mvolo, and on the 26th that of Major Boulnois left N'Doruma, 255 miles south of Waw, and began to advance against Yambio. On the 30th Captain Sutherland came upon a post oi Congo Free State troops at Ire* (lat. -1 55', long. which was a portion of Lemaire's "Scientific Mission*'! It subsequently transpired that M. Lemaire had established five posts in Anglo- Egyptian territory, " in the interest nee." On February 25th Captain Sutherland's force joined that of Major Boulnois at Mangi's village. On January 30th Major Boulnois reached Zugumbia, and on the 6th he occupied the village of Yambio. who had iled into the bush. On the Nth the- late Lieut. Fell I Yambio's position, and in the evening Major Carter captured him. Yambio received a mortal wound during the skirmish and died that night. His death relieved the country of a cruel chief, who had oppressed his people for years; the tribes came in soon after and tendered their submission to the Govern- ment Major Boulnois died on his way back to Waw, and Lieut J. L. Fell, Late R.N., who cut the waterway through the great marshes of the Giir River, died at Tambura of black-water fever. The other British officers who took part in this very successful SUDAN DEVELOPMENT expedition were Captain Sutherland, Major Carter, Major H. A. Bray, Captain H. Gordon, Captain A.J. Percival, D.S.O., Captain A. B. Bethell, R.A., who went alone on a mission to Tambura's country, notwithstanding the hostility of the Niam-Niams (Azande), Captain R. I. Rawson, and Captain S. K. Flint.1 1 See the summary of their exploits in the London Gazette for Friday, May 18th, 1906, pp. 3443-3445. PYRAMIDS OF MERGE. 287 CHAPTER XV. CHRISTIANITY IN THE NORTHERN SUDAN. Of the means by which Christianity was introduced into the Sudan, who its introducers were, and when they took up their abode in the country, nothing is known with certainty. All the evidence which exists on the subject goes to show that Christianity did not make its way down the Blue Nile from Ethiopia into the Northern Sudan, as some have thought and said, but that it entered Nubia from Egypt, as did the civilization of the ancient Egyptians, and that in the course of centuries it advanced to the southern end of the Island of Meroe, where the Christian kingdom of 'Aiwa flourished in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries. The Christianizing of the Northern Sudan was the result of the preaching of St. Mark in Alexandria, and the phase of Nubian Christianity known to us bears the marks and character of the form of Christian belief and teaching which were promulgated by the Jacobite (or Monophysite) Patriarchs of that city. According to a wide-spread tradition, emanating probably in the first instance from the Church of Alexandria, St. Mark preached in Alexandria about a.d. 69, and was the leader of the Christians and their Church there f<»r some years. The traditions about the manner of his death vary : according to one he died a natural death, according cond he was burned, and a third declares that his body was dragged over stones until it broke into piec( s. Be this as it may, a considerable body of respectable tradition asserts that Christianity was preached in Egypt before the close of the first century, and it is certain that the new religion advanced southwards and spread quickly. The oldest authority for this I lusebius.1 In the third quarter of the second century, the number of 1 Hist. /ur/cs., ii. 16. PERSECUTION OF DECIUS Christians in Egypt was large enough to necessitate the appoint- ment of three bishops,1 and in the reign of Severus (193-211) their number and influence were sufficient to bring upon them the wrath of the Romans, and a general persecution was the result.'2 In the second quarter of the third century the number of bishops was increased from three to twenty.1 In the year 250 Decius issued his famous edict against the Christians, the object of which was to bring the people back to their ancient worship of the gods of Greece and Rome, and this could only be done by the stamp- ing out of Christianity. The Roman officials everywhere were ordered to make the Christians renounce their faith, and those who apostatized were required to offer sacrifice and to burn incense to the gods. Each person who did this received a certificate from the magistrate setting forth that the Emperor's demands had been complied with. Large numbers, no doubt, sacrificed to the gods and renounced the Christian religion, but the "strong spirits " refused to do so, and these were hunted down without mercy. When caught, they were cast into prison, where many were done to death ; in many respects the persecu- tion of Decius resembled that inaugurated by Trajan (98-117). With the death of Decius, who fell in battle against the Goths in Pannonia, the persecution stopped, but it was revived by Valerian (253-260). Many Christians in Egypt, of course, fled from their native towns whilst the persecutions of Decius and Valerian were in progress, and some have thought that the general adoption of the monastic life by the Egyptians dates from this period. This may be so, but it is impossible to assume that there were no Christians in Upper Egypt, especially in the Thebaid at this time, and it is quite certain that some of these must have fled from the prison and tortures prepared for the Christians who refused to deny Christ. The most natural place for such to flee to would be the Nile Valley, south of Aswan, and if they did so, they must have carried Christianity with them. Apart from this, members of caravans trading between Egypt and the Sudan would not fail to describe the events which were taking place in the former country, and the leading features of the new religion would be much discussed. Taking the probabilities 1 Eutychius, Annates, i. 2 Eusebius, Hist. Ecctes., vi. 1. VOL. II. 289 U THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of the matter into consideration, it is impossible to think that individual Christianity was unknown in Nubia in the second and third centuries after Christ.1 In the reign of Diocletian (284-305) a severe persecution of the Christians took place in Egypt, due partly to the hatred of the young men for military service, and partly to their refusal to take part in the worship of this Emperor. Those who fled to the south would be certain to find a refuge among the Blemmyes, who were at this time masters of Upper Egypt, and many, no doubt, retired from Egypt to Northern Nubia, where in the islands in the Nile and in the rocks of the hills they could lead the life of self-abnegation and religous con- templation, which was at the beginning of the fourth century becoming popular. Anthony the Great (born about 250) was in 311a power in Egypt, and crowds of men were at that time obey- ing his teachings and emulating his example. The persecution continued by Galerius (305-311) and Maxi- minus (305-313) only served to fill the hills and deserts with monks, and the Nitrian Valley in Lower Egypt under the rule of Ammon and the Thebaic! became filled with coenobites and anchorites. Indeed, if we may believe Bar-Hebraeus (Hist. Dynast., text, p. 135), Christianity had penetrated not only all t, but also the regions of the Sudan and Nuba and Abyssinia ■ in the time of Constantine. It would be wrong to assume that conversion to Christianity had become general in Nubia and Abyssinia in the time of Constantine, but there is every reason to believe that there were in those countries numbers of Christians in the first half of the fourth century, although the Blemmyes, who then the masters of the country between Aswan and Primis, pagans and idolaters. The portion of the Nile Valley between the Second and Fourth Cataracts was far more suitable for the Christians to live in than the sterile region between Primis and K6sha, a little above the head of the Second Cataract, and those who Med to this region probably followed the desert route to the west of the Nile. There are several large islands in the Nile 1 Abu Snlih (ed. Kvetts. p. 265) says that the first Nubian who was converted from Star-worship to Christianity was Bahriya, the king's nephew ; he built churches and monasteries in lar^e numbers. ) 12--* ^ gfojaJ! >_»';-»! j)i+*-) t*j£) M-'' \j+ s** J*1 g*Mtj 290 BLEMMYES OR BEJAS above Kosha, e.g., Sai, Arnitti, Nilwatti, Wussi, Nilwa, Ertemri, Narnarti, and between the Third and Fourth Cataracts the number of them is considerable. In fact the remains of Christian buildings, churches, monasteries, &c, are found at comparatively frequent intervals all the way up between Hannek and Merawi, and many of these stand on sites which were occupied by the Christians so far back as the sixth century, when the Christian kingdom of Silko was founded, with its capital at Old Dongola. But whether the Christians in Nubia during the fourth and fifth centuries were many or few, the people generally were pagans and idolaters. Olympiodorus,1 who visited the country between 407 and 425, says that the Blernmyes, who occupied Nubia so far south as Primis, were heathen, and he makes no mention of Christians. The various tribes of the Blernmyes, i.e., the Bejas, who lived in the great Eastern Desert, were also pagans. Thus it is clear that the edict of Theodosius I. (378-395), decreeing that the whole of the Roman Empire should become Christian, had failed to abolish the worship of idols, which continued to flourish at Philae, Talrnis (Kalabsha), and other places in Nubia. The Blernmyes were, moreover, still pagans in the year 453 ; this fact is made known to us by Priscus,2 the friend of Maximinus, who in the reign of Marcianus (450-457) went into Nubia on a punitive expe- dition against that people. The Nobatae had failed to fulfil :i the agreement made with them by Diocletian to keep the Blernmyes in check, and the latter had invaded Upper Egypt and raided the country. Maximinus, having severely punished the Blernmyes, made terms with them, and drew up an agreement with them which was to last one hundred years. They promised to pay for the damage they had done, to restore all the prisoners they had taken, and to give hostages ; to the first and third of these clauses they had never before agreed. On their side, however, they stipulated that they should be allowed to visit the Island of Philae according 1 Ed. Bekker, p. 62. 2 Excerpt, legate in Labbe, Protrept., p. 40. 3 See Revillout, Memoire sur les Blernmyes, Paris, 1864; Une Page de Chistoire de la Nubie, in Revue ILgyfitol., torn, iv., pp. 156 ff. ; and Second Memoire sur les Blernmyes, Paris, 1887. 291 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN to their ancient use and wont,1 and that they should be allowed to borrow the statue of Isis, and to take it to a certain place in their own country, so that they might make petitions to the goddess in their own way. Here, then, we have a proof that the worship of Isis flourished at Philae and throughout the country of Northern Nubia more than fifty years after the famous Edict of Theodosius I. That a Roman general, with a great reputation for piety,2 should agree to such a stipulation is strange, but it is more remarkable still that he should select Philae, the seat of the worship of idols, as the place wherein to sign the treaty, though we can readily understand that the Blemmyes would be more likely to regard the treaty as wholly sacred and binding if it were signed at the sanctuary of their great goddess. Thirty years later the condition of things was unchanged in Nubia, for Marinus of Flavia Neapolis in Palestine tells us in his life of Proclus,1' that in his day Isis was still worshipped at Philae. Of the progress of Christianity in the Sudan during the first half of the sixth century we know nothing, but from the now famous Greek inscription which the Nubian king Silko caused to be cut in the Egyptian temple at Talmis (Kalabsha), it is clear that before the close of the century Christianity became the official religion of the country. This inscription was published for the first time by Gau from a copy made by him,' and its contents were discussed by Niebuhr ; B another copy made by Cailliaud formed the subject of an exhaustive essay and of a translation by Letronne.6 An excellent copy was also published by Lepsius,7 and from this the uncial text given on p. 309 is taken ; the transcription on p. 310 is that of Dittenberger.8 In this inscription Silko, who calls himself "BaaiXiaKos of the Nobadae and of all the Ethiopians," says that he came to Talmis 1 Letronne has shown that this custom was at least 250 years old when Priscus wrote. Histoire du C/iristianismt\ p. 68. 1 his fact is well demonstrated by Revillout, Blemmyes, p. 45. :i Ed. Boissonade, Leipzig, 1814, p. 109, "laiu tt)v kutu t<\s *t'Aas en TifKofif'vrjv. ' Antiquit&s de la Nuln'e, pi. 1, No. 1. ' Inscriptiones Nubienses, Rome, 1820- 6 Oenvres C/ioisies, torn, i., pp. 3 ff. 7 Denkmiilcr, Abth. vi., Bl. 95. s On'cnlis Graeci Inscriptiones Selectae, torn, i., p. 303. 292 SILKO and Taphis twice, that he fought against the Blemmyes, and that God gave him the victory once with three others, that once again he conquered [the Blemmyes], and that he made himself com- pletely master of their cities, and established himself in them from the beginning with his troops. " I conquered them," he says, "and they made supplication to me: I made peace with them, " and they swore oaths to me by their idols [to observe it], and I " believed their oath, because they were good men." This done, he returned to the upper, i.e., the southern part of his own coun- try. He continues, " Now that I have become BaaiXiaKos, not " only do I not follow after the other kings, but I march at their "head. Those who love to contend with me I do not permit to " dwell in peace in their own country, unless they entreat me for " forgiveness. For in the plains I am a lion, and in the hills I am "abear(?)."1 " And I fought with the Blemmyes yet another time, from " Primis to Talmis. And I laid waste the countries of the peoples " above (i.e., south of) the Nobadae, because they would contend " against me. And as for the chiefs (BeaTrorai) of the other " nations who would contend against me, I do not permit them to " take rest in the shade unless they bow their backs in homage " before me, and they cannot even take a drink in their own " houses. And as for those who offer resistance to me, I carry off "their women and their children." The general meaning of this important inscription is quite clear. SiJko warred against the Blemmyes and beat them on various occasions, and after his fifth fight he occupied their cities of Taphis (Tafa) and Talmis (Kalabsha), which none of his prede- cessors had done ; he also took their country so far south as Primis (Ibrim). These victories he attributes to God. In his earliest campaigns the Blemmyes took the oath of allegiance to him, swearing to observe it by their idols. As a result of his victory he became /3acrt/\t'o-vo9,'2 i.e., chieftain, and he be- came greater than any of his predecessors. He raided the coun- try of the tribes who resisted him, and he harassed the local Shekhs {hecnrorat) so mercilessly that they were always in the sun, and none of them found a chance to rest in the shade [of the trees 1 More probably u oryx." 2 Literally, " little king," or "kinglet." 293 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of his native villagej, still less to take a drink of water in his own house Such as resisted him suffered the loss of their wives and children. In the lower country he was a lion, and in the hills an oryx (?). Finally, we see that Silko was a Christian, and that his enemies were idolaters. There is no need to discuss here the date of the inscription of Silko, for all that can be said on the subject, both for and against, has been said by Letronne. He was of opinion that it was written not earlier than the middle of the sixth century,1 and was inclined to believe that it belonged to the period towards the end of that century. There is, however, one point which must be taken into consideration. Silko says that the Blemmyes took their oaths by their idols, and this suggests that the worship of Osiris and Isis at Philae was still flourishing. Now we know from Procopius 2 that Justinian (527-565) ordered Narses the Pers- armenian to go to Philae and put an end to the worship of Isis, and that this officer did so and closed the temple, and cast the priests into prison, and carried off the statues to Constantinople. This took place about 563, or, at all events, not many years before Justinian's death, but it is obvious that such a high-handed pro- ceeding could not have been carried out by Narses unless the population generally concurred. Justinian may have felt that the custom of sacrificing human beings to the sun, which Procopius tells us was in force at Philae, and the worship of Priapus, were a disgrace to his empire, or, what is far more likely, he was anxious to seize the revenues of the temples of Isis and devote them to other purposes, but in either case there must have been in Nubia a large number of Christians who were prepared to further his views. Among such was Silko, who appears to have been urged to attack the Pdemmyes about the time when the period of their treaty with the Romans for one hundred years expired. Silko crushed the Blemmyes and took their cities from Taphis to Prirnis, and then Justinian's envoy removed the statues of the gods from Philae, and closed the temple of Isis. The two events must have taken place about the same time, and it is difficult not to see in them the evidence of some special arrange- 1 Histoire du Chrisiianismc, p. 39. Di Bcllo Persi'co, i., xix., pp. 59, 60. 294 JUSTINIAN AND THEODORA ment made with Silko by Justinian or, according to some writers, by bis Empress, Theodora. The part which Theodora is said to have played in the conver- sion of the Nubians is described by Bar-Hebraeus 1 in his Ecclesiastical History thus : — About this time (i.e., between 540 and 548) there lived a priest called Julian, of the orthodox faith, i.e., Jacobite, who was at Constantinople in the service of the Papa Theodosius of Alexandria. He was greatly concerned for the black people of the Nobades,2 who lived on the southern border of the Thebaid, and as they were heathen he wished to convert them. Julian told the Empress Theodora of his desire, and she begged Justinian to send him to Nubia. The Emperor, however, sent a certain bishop to Nubia, and with him went envoys and presents for the king of that country ; not to be out- done, Theodora sent Julian also, and gave him a letter to the " Duke of the Thebaid," wherein she said. " I and the Emperor " have determined to send [an envoy] unto the nation of the " Nobades, and behold I have sent Julian the priest on my own " behalf, and the Emperor hath sent other men, together with " objects of price. Do thou take good care that my [envoy] " entereth first, and let him make smooth the way for those [whom] " the Emperor hath sent." Now when the " Duke of the Thebaid " had read the letter of the Empress, he did as she had commanded " him, and he detained the ambassadors of the Emperor until 11 Julian arrived, and he showed him the letter of the Empress. ''And [Julian] taught and baptized the king and the nobles, and " he informed [them] concerning the schism which the Chalcedo- " nians had made, and how they had reviled the holy men, and " stablished a new faith besides that of Nicaea. ' And when the " ambassadors of the Emperor had arrived with the letters and " gifts, and said to the Nubians, ' Do not cleave unto those who " have been driven out and banned,' the king of the Nobades and '* his nobles replied, ' We accept the honourable gifts of the '• Emperor, and we will send [back] gifts twofold in return, but " we do not cleave to persecutors and calumniators. For behold, " we have already received holy baptism from this excellent man, 1 Ed. Abbeloos and Lamy, torn, i., coll. 220 ff. 295 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN " and we cannot receive a second [baptism].' Thus were all the " people of Kushites converted to the orthodox faith, and they "became subjects of the throne of Alexandria. And Julian " remained there for a period of two years. And it is related " that from the third unto the tenth hour he stood and baptized " in caves full of water, naked, and with a girdle about him, and " the only part of his body which was out of the water was the " upper part thereof."1 Whether this statement of Bar-Hebraeus gives the correct reason why the Nubians became Jacobites or not is comparatively unimportant, but it certainly supplies the con- necting link between the wars of Silko and the removal of the statues of Osiris and Isis from Philae, and it suggests that some of the earliest of this king's campaigns against the Blemmyes took place before 550, The conclusion of the period of the treaty of one hundred years which had been made by Maximums, and ratified by Florus, gave Justinian the opportunity he wanted, and he embraced it with the results already described. According to John, Bishop of Ephesus, Julian took with him into Nubia the aged Bishop of the Thebaic], and when he left Nubia to return to Constantinople he committed the newly Christianized people to his charge. The work of Julian was carried on by Longinus, who was appointed thereto by the Patriarch Theodosius on the day on which he died, and. in spite of all the opposition of his foes, Longinus succeeded in escaping from Constantinople, and he made his way, with two young men. into Nubia, where he built a church and established clergy, and taught the services and all the things which were ordered, according to the Christian faith. He stayed there about six years, and then, in obedience to certain letters which he had received from Alexandria, he proposed ive the country; but the king and his nobles refused to allow him to depart, and it was only with difficulty that he did so. He then went to "Theodore, the aged Bishop of Pildn (Philae), "which is in the inner (i.e., southern) Thebaid," a and finally departed to Mareotis. 1 The Syriac text will be found in Abbeloos and Lamy, i. coll. 229-234. Bar- Hebraeus drew his narrative from the work of John of Ephesus ; see Cureton, John of Ephesus, Oxford, 1853, p. 223 ff. John of l-.fihesus, ed. Cureton, p. 228. 296 SPREAD OF CHRISTIANITY When once the statues of Isis and Osiris were removed from Philae Christianity spread rapidly in the country. Silko's successor, who was called Eirpanome, or Eirpanomos,1 was a devoted Christian, and either during or about the time of his reign the temples of Tafa, Kalabsha, Dakka a (Pselcis), Wadi Sabu'a, 'Amada, and Abu Simbel, were turned into Christian churches. Under the direction of the Bishop Theodore mentioned above, the pronaos of the temple of Isis at Philae was turned into a church, and two inscriptions at Philae published by Letronne :! prove that he covered the walls with a coating of plaster to hide the figures of the Egyptian gods, and a third inscription, also at Philae, states that Theodore also built in the portion of the pronaos a sanctuary,4 which was dedicated to Saint Stephen, under the diaconate of Posias. The transformation of the pronaos of the temple of Isis into a Christian church took place about 577, and about the same time the church at Dendur, as M. Revillout has shown,5 was built. Thus it is quite clear that by the end of the sixth century that portion of Nubia which lies between the First and Second Cataracts had been converted to Christianity. The place chosen for the capital of the Christian kingdom of Nubia was Dongola, better known to-day as " Old Dongola/' New Dongola being Al-Urdi ; it is 351 miles from Haifa by river, and stands on the east bank of the Nile. Dongola can easily be defended by a small force, and the choice of the site by the Nubian king who first settled there was a good one. The people who belonged to it probably lived on the west bank of the river, where there is a comparatively large area capable of cultivation. For nearly one hundred years after Silko founded his capital the Nubians were allowed to remain in peace, but soon after the conquest of Egypt by the Arabs in 640 they were attacked by the 1 Revillout sees in this name a form of Ergamenes : see Blemmyes, pp. 4, 6 ff. - For the Greek inscriptions from Dakka and sites to the north, see Gau, Monumenta Nub., plates xiii. and xiv. ; Light, Travels, p. 270 ; Legh, Narrative of a Journey, London, 1820 ; Burckhardt, Travels, p. 106 ; Yorke and Leake, Trans. Soc. Lit., vol. i. p. 225; Niebuhr, Inscript. Nub., p. 10; Letronne, Recueil, p. 487 ; Letronne, Recherches, p. 370 ; Boeckh, C.I.G. ; Lepsius, Denkmdler, Abth. xii., Bll. 13 and 14 ; Dittenberger, Orientis Graeci, torn, i., pp. 311 ff. ; &c. 3 Hist, du Christianisme, p. 80. 4 KTiodfjuvos . . . to Upov tovto. 5 Blemmyes, pp. 5 ff. 297 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN conquerors, who advanced to their capital, and, having captured it, laid upon the king the annual tribute known as the Bakt. The facts concerning this are given elsewhere in this volume. In the various treaties which the Muslims made with the Nubians it is specially stipulated that the mosques shall not be injured, and that the Muhammadans are to be allowed to trade and travel at will throughout the country, facts which seem to indicate that they considered it useless to attempt to convert the Christians to the religion of the Prophet. It is tolerably certain that the Nubians were kept in subjection by the Arabs, but at the same time they seem to have possessed, in the rirst half of the eighth century, considerable power. For, in j$j, when the Copts were persecuted, and their Patriarch Khail was cast into prison, Cyriacus the king of Nubia marched into Egypt with 100,000 horsemen and 100,000 camels, and laid waste the country from Aswan to Cairo.1 Cyriacus is said to have been the over-lord of thirteen kings, the chief of whom was Elkera, a Jacobite prince, and his dominions extended very far to the south, probably to the borders of Abyssinia.- When the governor of Cairo saw what had happened, he begged the Patriarch to ask Cyriacus to withdraw his troops, and the Nubian king did so. About one hundred years later, Ibrahim, the brother of the Khalifa Al-Ma'mun, sent a letter to Zacharias, king of Nubia, ordering him to pay the Bakt, or tribute, which was fourteen in arrears. The annual Bakt consisted of about 400 men, therefore 5,600 men were due to the Egyptians from Zacharias. icharias found it impossible to pay his debt, he sent his son ge to Ibrahim, who was then in Baghdad, to say so, and to offer himself to the Khalifa. Ibrahim received him graciously, and granted all the petitions of Zacharias, and sent George back :\pt with honour. George next went to see the Patriarch Anba Yusab (831-850?), and received his blessing, and then asked him to ite an altar so that he might take it back to tlie house of the amir wherein he lodged. This was done, and the amir ordered the wooden board to be struck on the roof of •ole. Middle Ages, p. 27 ; Abil Salili, ed. Evetts, p. 267. tronne, Histoire dv CArtstiam'sme, p. 36 ; Le Quien, Oriens Christianas, torn, ii., p. 662. CHURCHES OF DONGOLA George's lodging, so that his friends might assemble at the house for prayers and hear the liturgy as in his own country. When George returned to Nubia his father founded a large church as a thank-offering to God for his son's safe return. This church was consecrated in 1020 by Anba George, Bishop of Natho, or Leontopolis.1 About the year 970, the Nubians, to a great extent, became an independent people, and they devoted their energies to the re-establishing of their power, and to the building of churches, monasteries, &c. In 1002 Raphael was king of Nubia, and he built at Dongola houses with domes of red bricks, similar to those which are found in Al-Irak. The flourishing condition of the Nubian kingdom in the twelfth century is testified to by Abu Salih, the Armenian, who says of Dongola that it is a large city on the banks of the blessed Nile, and that it contains many churches and large houses and wide streets. Dongola had, in fact, taken the place of the old city of Napata, opposite to Gebel Barkal, and about this time had become the capital of the kingdom of Northern Nubia, which extended from the First to the Fourth Cataract. A few years ago, Mr. Carl Armbruster, of the Sudan Civil Service, found three fragments of Greek inscriptions built into a wall at Dongola. With praiseworthy promptness he rescued them, and copies of the texts will be found in the Journal of Theological Studies, vol. iv., pp. 583 ff. Between the First and Second Cataracts there must have been many churches and monasteries, e.g., the " Monastery of Safanuf, king of Nubia,"2 which was probably situated near Abu Simbel, and the Monastery of Ansiin at Tafa, a few miles south of Philae, and the church of Saint Michael, which stood close to the frontier between Egypt and Nubia. On a large island about twelve miles south of Haifa are the ruins of a Coptic church called Darbe.3 Abu. Salih also mentions the Monastery of Michael and Cosmas, and the Monastery of Dera, and says that the latter was near an ancient temple, between two great mountains, but their exact sites have not been identified. He speaks, too, of the city of Bansaka as being large and handsome and containing many 1 Abu Salih, ed. Evetts, p. 270. 2 Ibid., p. 261. 3 Crowfoot in Gleichen, op. cit., i., p. 313. 299 THE EGYFriAN SUDAN churches, and the Monastery of Saint Sin u thins ; as he savs it was the abode of the "Lord of the Mountain" (see Vol. II., p. 193), and there was a gold mine near it, it certainly lay to the south of Wadl Haifa. On the west bank, near the Mountain of /1 Ian, was the town which contained the Monastery of Abu Garas, and which was the seat of a bishop. This town was probably near the Island of Sai, where the pillars of a Coptic- church, with crosses cut on them, may be seen to this day. In the Oasis of Selima, which lies fifty-five miles in the desert west of Sakiat al-'Abd on the Nile, Mr. fames Currie, Director of the Gordon College at Khartum, saw the remains of " an old Chris- " tian convent, moderately well preserved, but the point of interest " attaching to it is that it has apparently been built out of the PLAN 01 NIK CHURCH IN THE CHRISTIAN MONASTERY IN THE WADl Al.-GHAZAL, Nl. \K SAN AM Alii' HUM. us, Lttttts, p. 219. " ruins of something much older, to judge from the inscribed "stones one notices."1 From the neighbourhood of Sai also came the sepulchral tablet of Iesou, the Coptic Bishop, which was acquired for the Khartum Museum by Mr. Crowfoot and :t in [905. The numerous mines of gold and copper which existed between Dulgo and Koya,'2 close to the Third Cataract, suggest that there were Coptic settlements near, and between Khamlak and Old Dongola Mr. Crowfoot has found remains of Christian, or older, sites at Firgi, KhalSwa," Amen- togo, Arab Hag. and a place a few miles to the east of Meganda. 1 Quoted by Gleichen, op. it/., i., p. 203 ; and see Crowfoot, ibid., p. 313. 1 Irowfoot in ( ilcichen, op. j«. The building is 80 feet long and 40 feet wide, and stands in a great courtyard containing cells for the monks, built 1 Letters, p. 231. 2 Crowfoot in Gleichen, op. at., p. 315. 301 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of stone, and a " cell " for the Abbot, which is 46 feet long. There are two churchyards, and in the eastern one Lepsius counted twenty tombstones, with inscriptions in Greek and Coptic.1 This fact, taken with Mr. Armbruster's discovery2 mentioned above, is important as showing that Greek was used throughout the kingdom of Dongola for ecclesiastical purposes, and it con- firms the statement of Abu Salih, who says that the liturgy of the Nubians and their prayers are in Greek,:i and that their land is under the jurisdiction of the see of St. Mark, the Evangelist, which consecrates [their bishops] for them. Thus, as Mr. A. f. Butler has pointed out, Christianity must have been introduced into Nubia before the translation of the Egyptian liturgy into Coptic. That this liturgy was originally in Greek is proved by the Greek sentences which are still preserved in the midst of the Coptic versions, and by the existence of the Greek liturgy of St. Mark, which is apparently the original of the Coptic St. Cyril.1 A few miles beyond Belal, at the foot of the Fourth Cataract on the south bank, are the remains of a Coptic church and fortified monaster)'. The kingdom of Dongola was not, however, allowed to flourish in peace, and towards the middle of the twelfth century trouble broke out between the Nubians and the Sultan of Egypt about the country between the First and Second Cataracts. In the year 1173 Shams ad-Dawlah, an elder brother of Saladin, marched to Aswan, and, having collected boats, sailed up to Primis with a body of troops. Here he attacked the Nubians, and defeated them, and took their city, and made many prisoners. The Nubians were said to be 700,000 in number, and there were in the city 700 pigs, which the conquerors killed. In the city there was a large and beautiful church dedicated to the Virgin Mary, with a high dome, upon which stood a large cross. Shams ad-Dawlah had the cross burned, and the church pillaged, and the Muhammadan call to prayer was chanted from its summit. A bishop who was in the city was 1 For copies, see Lepsius, Penkmaler, Abth. xii., Bl. 22. - The stone set up to commemorate Marcus is dated in the 528th year of Diocletian, i.e., a.d. 812. a Ed. Evens, p. 272. « In Abu Salih, note i., p. 272. 302 KINGDOM OF ALWA tortured and then thrown into prison. Having left a number of men there to garrison the city, with supplies and stores of all kinds, Shams ad-Dawlah departed, carrying off with him a large quantity of cotton, which he sold at Kus on his way down the river. Ibrim had been captured by the Arabs before, in the reign of Muhammad ibn Tughg, the Ikhshid (a.d. 935-946). by Muhammad al-Khazin. Hitherto mention has been made only of the churches and monasteries of Northern Nubia, and we have now to consider those which existed in Southern Nubia, i.e., the country from the foot of the Fourth Cataract to the Blue Nile. The country on each side of the Fourth Cataract contains no ruins of any kind, but this is not to be wondered at when we remember that the routes to the upper country all crossed the desert to Berber or Shendi and did not run by the river. Ruins of Christian buildings are not found on the Island of Meroe, where, historical tradition tells us, a large and flourishing Christian kingdom existed at an early period, until we reach the south end of the Island, close to the Blue Nile. At a spot on the right bank of the Blue Nile, about twelve miles above Khartum, stood the city of Soba, or Suba, which was the capital of the great Christian kingdom of 'Aiwa, or 'Aliya, the Alut (I JH ^ of the hieroglyphic inscriptions. In late Christian times, i.e., about 1200, Nubia was divided into two great kingdoms, namely, the kingdom of Mukurra, with its capital at Dongola, and the kingdom of 'Aiwa, with its capital at Soba. The district between Tafa ' and Philae was known as " Maris," and its chief lived at Bagrash, which was probably near the modern Miharrakah. The people of Maris and those of Mukurra were said to be descended from Himyar, and their ancestors to have come from Yaman, in Southern Arabia. The kingdom of 'Aiwa included a portion of the land between the Blue and White Niles, and its capital probably consisted of two parts, one on each side of the Blue Nile. Eastward of Soba, according to Selim al-Aswani, is the river 1 A tradition, quoted by Abu Salih and Selim al-Aswani, declares that Moses, before he became prophet, made an expedition into Nubia, and destroyed Tafa, the people whereof worshipped stars and set up idols to them. 303 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN which dries up, and the bed of which is then inhabited.1 The city is said to have contained handsome edifices and extensive dwellings, and churches full of gold, and gardens, and guest-houses wherein the Muslims live. The chief of 'Aiwa was greater than the chief of Mukurra, and had a larger army, and his country was more extensive and fertile than that of Mukurra. He had great flocks of sheep and goats, and herds of cattle, fine horses, and cattle of a red colour. The religion of the chief and of his subjects was that of the Jacobite Christians, and their bishops were appointed by the Patriarch of Alexandria. Their [sacred] books were in the Greek tongue, and they were translated into the language of the country. Sellm adds, ''The understanding of these people is inferior to that of the Niibas." The rule of the chief was absolute and unquestioned. The tribes beyond 'Aiwa worshipped the sun, moon, stars, fire, trees, and animals. Abu Salih - says that the kingdom of 'Aiwa was large, and consisted of vast provinces wherein were four hundred churches. The town stood between the Blue and White Niles, probably on the site of the modern city of Khartum. Around it were monasteries, some at a distance from the rivers, and some on their banks. In the town was a large and spacious church, the largest of all the churches in the country, and it was called " Manbali." There is no reason to doubt the existence of a large number of churches in 'Aiwa, for many of them were in existence in the sixteenth century, and Alvarez tells us that he had talked to a certain " John of Syria," who declared that there were still in the country one hundred and fifty churches which contained crucifixes, and pictures of the Virgin Mary painted on the walls, and all old.8 Each church stood within a fortress, as in Northern Nubia. The ruins of Christian buildings which still exist on the Island of Me roe are very few, the most important being those which lie onthe Blue Nile, about twelve miles from Khartum; these are believed to be the remains of a part of the city of Soba. Here at all events a Meroitic temple stood in the early centuries of the Christian era, and on the portions of the pillars which still ickhardt, Travels, p. 500. ■ Ed. Evetts, p. 263. ee Mr. A. J. Butlers note in Evetts, op. a'/., p. 264. 304 CHURCHES ON THE BLUE NILE remain is cut the Coptic cross which proves that it was subse- quently turned into a Christian church. This temple was built about the same time as the temples at Nagaa, judging by the colossal stone ram which was found there, and which is now in Khartum ; the ram is in the Palace garden, and a good picture of it is given by Count Gleichen in his Handbook (i., p. 228). The region where search should be made for Christian antiquities is along the Blue Nile. Mr. J. W. Crowfoot knows of the RUINED CHURCH AT SIEDEVER, NEAR LAKE SANA, IN ABYSSINIA. [From Sir William Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. existence of ancient remains at Anti (west bank), Rodis (east bank), Kasamba (west bank, three miles from Kamlin), Arbagi (west bank opposite to Rufa'a), Hassa Hissa (near Arbagi), and Sennaar, and some of these he has seen. These most likely mark the sites of Meroitic towns, but among them will probably be found the remains of Christian buildings. Dr. Schweinfurth reports the existence of " some curious old Christian stone ruins and tombs," at Gebel Maman, 201 miles from Sawakin, on the " Ermenab " route to Kasala. Lastly, at Katena on the White VOL. II. 305 X THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Nile were found some inscribed bricks and pottery of the Christian period ; these are preserved in the Gordon College Museum.1 The most flourishing period of the Christian kingdoms of Mukurra and 'Aiwa was between noo and 1300, but at the beginning of the fourteenth century the power of the Muham- madans was in the ascendant, whilst that of the Christians began to decline. Up to this time the Christian Church of Nubia had acted as a block to the advance of Muhammadanism in the Sudan, and for more than seven hundred years it had maintained its position in spite of all external persecutions and attacks. Towards the end of the thirteenth century the neighbourhood of Dongola became filled with Muslims, and a mosque was dedicated there to the worship of God in 1317. Subsequently the upper part of a church there was turned into a mosque,2 but the exact date of this event is unknown. The immediate cause of the d< mnfall of the Christian kingdom of Nubia was due to dissensions between the chiefs of 'Aiwa and Mukurra ; and the Arab settlers in the north, and the negro tribes of the south, seized their opportunity, and wrested their dominions from them. In con- nection with this we must remember the loss of power and prestige which the Coptic Church in Egypt suffered about a.d. 1300, and this could not fail to have its effect in the Sudan. From the time of Cyril, Patriarch of Alexandria (a.d. 1235), the Nubian Church was left practically to native guidance, with the result which we should naturally expect. In the second half of the fourteenth century there broke out in Egypt a fierce persecution of the Copts by the Muslims, doe in a great measure to the in- solence and arrogance of the Christians who were employed in every department of the government.'' The Muslims burnt and destroyed Coptic churches everywhere, they beat and killed (opts in the open streets, and in the villages of Upper Egypt the Copts were so panic-stricken that they embraced Islam, and pulled down their churches and built mosques in their places, and, when- ever they could, married Muslim women. The same thing must happened in Nubia, and the conversion of the upper part of the church at Dongola into a mosque probably dates from 1 Crowfoot in Gleichen. i., p. 315. * row foot, ibid. a See Renaudot, Hist. Patriarckarum, vol. i.. p. 28 ; pp. 607-610. 306 ISLAM IN THE SUDAN this period. At all events, from about a.d. 1300 to the present day, the history of the Nubian Church is a blank page.1 A glimpse of the general condition of Nubia at the close of the fifteenth century is afforded us by Leo Africanus, or Hasan ibn Muhammad, the Geographer,2 and he says that the king of Nubia was engaged in continual wars with the people of Dfir Fur and Kordofan, who speak a language which no other people under- stand, and with the Bejas or Bisharin tribes, who live upon the flesh of animals and milk ; the latter took tribute from the king of Dongola and from the governor of Sawakin. Nubia was divided into " fifteen kingdomes whereof agreeing much in rites and " customes, are subject unto fower princes onely." The principal town, Dongola, was "exceedingly populous," and contained 10,000 families, and its houses were built of a " kind of chalke," and covered with straw. Its people did a large trade in ivory, grain, sugar, sandal-wood, civet, and gold, of which there was " great " plentie " in the country, and in a kind of poison which was sold at one hundred ducats the ounce ! The Nubians were governed by a woman, and they called their queen Gana. The spiritual condition of the Nubians he describes as most wretched and miserable, for having "lost the sinceritie and light of the Gospel, 11 they do embrace infinite corruptions of the Jewish and Muham- " madan religions." Whilst Alvarez was in Abyssinia the Nubians sent messengers to beg the " Prete " to appoint over them priests and persons to preach and administer the sacraments to them. These messengers said that the Nubians had often sent to Rome for a bishop, but as they received no assistance in this respect, they, little by little, lost all knowledge of the Christian religion, "and became infected with the impious and abominable " sects of the Iewes and Mahumetans." As the " Prete " was in sore need of clergy for his own churches he could not help the Nubians. Many of the churches in Nubia were destroyed by the Arabs, and the Portuguese travellers related that they saw pictures of saints painted on the walls. 1 Nawaya Krestos, king of Ethiopia (1342-1372), made war on Upper Egypt because the Governor of Cairo had thrown Abba Markos, Patriarch of Alexandria, into prison, because he failed to pay the appointed tribute; the Patriarch was released, and he returned to his duties. 2 Edited by Robert Brown, London, 1896, vol. iii., p. 836. 307 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN In the sixteenth century, about 1520, the Nubians were ruled by the Bosnians, who were sent into the Sudan by Selim after his conquest of Egypt, and about the same time the Arabs and Turks overran many parts of Ethiopia, and killed the Christians and destroyed their churches. The Portuguese missions to the Sfidan had for their object the conversion of the Abyssinians to the Roman faith, and nothing was done to help the Nubians, or to revive Christianity in their country. APPENDIX TO CHAPTER XV. THE INSCRIPTION OF SILKO, KING OF THE NOBADAE,' Translation. " I SiLKOam Chieftain * of the Nobadae and of all the Ethiopians. ••I came to Talmis8and to Taphis.4 Once, twice, I fought " with the Blemmyes, and God gave me the victory after the three. •• I conquered them once and for all, and made myself master "of their cities, and for the first time I stablished myself therein. "together with my troops. I conquered them, and they made " supplication to me, and I made peace with them, and they >re oaths to me by the in f their gods, and I trusted " in their oaths that they were honourable- men. Then I returned " into the upper part of my country.'' " When I had become Chieftain I did not follow behind other " kings, but [was] in the very front of them." •• And as toi'those who strive with me for the mastery, I do "not permit them to live in their own country, unless they beg 1 I am indebted to Dr. F. CdAYTOYC KA0€ZOM€ 14. NOI€ICXWPANAYTC0N€IMHKATHE:ia)CANM€KAin APAKAAOYCIN [5. €rarAP€ICKATWM€PHA€(ON€IMIKAI€ICANWM€P HAPt€IMI 16. €nOA€MHCAM€TATOJNBA€MY(ONAnOnPIM€OJC T€AHA€OJC 17. €NAnA£KAIOIAAAOINOYBAAWNANU)T€PU)€nOP 0HCATAC [8. X0JPACAYTWN€n€IAH€IAON€IKOYCIN M€T€MOY 20 OYKAU)AYTOYC KA06C0H NAI €ICTHN CKIA N€IM HYnOHAlOY 21. €£(dKAIOYK€nGJKANNHPON€CG0€ICTHNOIKIANA YTOJNOirAP 22. ANTIAC )IKOIMOYAPnAZajTCJNrYNAIKGJNKAITA HAIAIAAYTOON TRANSCRIPT. (Dittenberger, Orictitis Graeci Inscriptioncs Sclcctac. torn, i., p. 303.) 1. 'Eyw 57X/ca>, BaaiXLcTKos Novfid&Gjp /cat oXojr raw 2. AWiOTTdiv, rjXOov elf TdXptv K(d Tafyiv. carat; hvo eVo- 3. Xi/j.T)Ut)cra avTuyv 7. teal avrol r)%lwcrav pe. iirohjaa elpi)vi]v p,€T' avrwv 8. /cat ojpoadv pot rd eihcoXa avTwv /cat eirLo-itvaa top 9. bpKov avTcov, g>? fcaXol elaip avOpwiroi. dva\u)pr)Srfv 10. ) pou. ot€ iyeyopeuyp /SacriX-tWo?, 11. r.v/c dirrfxdov oXcos oiriaoi tow ciXXcop ftaaiXenop, 3IO INSCRIPTION OF SILKO 12. dWd a/CfM7]v e/jLTrpoaOev avrwv. 1 3. ol yap (piXovL/covcTLv /jl€t i/u,ov, ov/c defray avToi/s KaOe^o/x- 14. evoi et See Dr. Andrew Watson's unostentatious account, The American Mission Xyptt [854-1896, Pittsburgh, 1898. 318 THE AMERICAN MISSION well illustrated by the large number of boys and young men in Government employ who owe their positions entirely to the education and training given to them in the schools of the American Mission. The Copts owe them a large debt of gratitude, for it was the American missionaries who showed them the ad- vantage of an education given on Western lines in the English language, and taught them freedom of thought and methods of independence. As a result of the decision of the American Mission, Dr. Watson, Dr. Kelly Giffen, and Mr. A. A. Cooper went to Khartum on a mission of inspection, and on their return they recommended that work be undertaken in the Northern Sudan, and in the Blue Nile region. In 1900 H. T. McLaughlin, M.D., and Dr. Kelly Giffen were ordered to proceed to the Sudan to carry on missionary work. The Government, however, declined to allow them to work among the Muslims in the Sudan, but at the same time pointed out that they might go and open as many stations as they pleased among the black tribes on the White Nile, to the south of Khartum. Messrs. McLaughlin and Giffen went to Omdurman, taking with them Mr. Gebera Hanna, whom they authorized to conduct meetings for the young men who had been trained in the Mission and were then in Government service. They then visited the White Nile, and returned to Egypt to report on the situation. In September, 1901, they returned to the Sudan, taking their wives with them ; and on March 2nd, 1902, they set out to establish a station on the Sobat River among the black Shilluks, or Shullas, about 560 miles south of Khartum. On March 27th they arrived at a place called Duleb Hill, which is situated on the north bank of the Sobat, and there they established an American Mission station.' On March 14th, 1903, Lord Cromer visited the station and found that it was "manifestly conducted on those sound, "practical, common-sense principles which, indeed, are strongly " characteristic of American Mission work in Egypt. No parade " is made of religion. In fact, the work of conversion, properly ' " so-called, can scarcely be said to have commenced." He found 1 A very interesting account of their proceedings there has been written and published by Dr. Kelly Giffen, entitled The Egyptian SUddn, and to this the reader is referred for details. 3*9 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN " numbers of Shillouks, men and women, working happily at the " brickkiln. Cotton of a good quality has been produced, and " the mission houses have been constructed by Shillouk labour. " The creation of establishments conducted on the principles " adopted by Mr. Giffen and Dr. McLaughlin cannot fail to " prove an unmixed benefit to the population amongst whom they "liv< In 1902 Lord Cromer expressed surprise that none of the British Missionary Societies appeared to have devoted their atten- tion to the Southern Sudan, especially as its districts presented a far more promising field for missionary enterprise than the provinces whose populations are Muhammadan. Also he saw no objection to the establishment of Christian schools at Khartum, provided that parents were warned that instruction in the Chris- tian religion is afforded, especially as there is a small number of Christians in the city. In 1903 the American missionaries applied for the purchase of a considerable tract of land to teach the Shilluks agriculture. In [904 Lord Cromer and the Sirdar, Sir Reginald Wingate, were still of the opinion that "the time was still distant when " mission work could, with safety and advantage, be permitted '•amongst the Moslem population of the Sudan." In answer to the request of Mr. Mclnnes, the Secretary of the Church Missionary Society in Egypt, who asked for an expression of opinion as to the prospects of missionary work in the Sudan, Lord Cromer, on December 23rd, 1904, addressed a letter to the Church Missionary Society, in which he informed the Secretary that a large tract of country was, for the present, being reserved for them. The tract of country referred to is to the south of the Bahr al-Ghazal, and it extends south to about lat. 140 north;8 to the north-east of it lies the sphere of the American Mission, and to the west and north of it is the Roman Catholic Mission sphere Roughly speaking, it represents an area of about 25,000 - Ii is bounded on the N. by the I>ahr al-( ihazal ; on the E. by a line drawn from the White Nile to Agiung-Twi, and the Abyssinian Frontier to lat. 50 N. ; on the S. by the north border of the Congo Free State, the Lado Enclave, and Uganda ; and on the W. by a line drawn from Mashra ar-Rek to N'darama. 320 > £ a 25 2 GORDON MEMORIAL MISSION square miles. In October, 1905, the Church Missionary Society in London sent out a party to found the " Gordon Memorial Soudan Mission," consisting of the Rev. F. B. Hadow, M.A., the Rev. A. Shaw, B A., the Rev. A. M. Thorn, M.A., Mr. E. Lloyd, B.A., B.C., and Messrs. J. Comely and R C. J. S. Wilmot, industrial agents. The party reached Khartum on November 1st and Mongalla on January 8th, 1906. After exploring Mongalla and its neighbour- hood, the party decided that it was not desirable to make that place the base of the Mission, and on the advice of Cameron Bey. the Mudir, and Captain Logan, the Commandant, the mission boat was towed down the river to Bor, about eightv-four miles to the north.1 It now remains to mention the work done by the Austrian Roman Catholic Mission in the Sudan. As soon as possible after the taking of Omdurmfin in 1898 the Austrian Mission reoccupied the site which had formerly been their headquarters at Khartum before the rise of the Mahdi, and they found all their buildings and church in ruins ; the boundaries of their garden could be made out, but when I saw it in December, 1899, ostriches were feeding in it ! Monsignor Roveggio, the Bishop of Khartum, with a small but devoted staff began to take up the broken threads of their work with energy. Soon afterwards the Austrian Fathers went to the south, and opened a station near Fashoda, and it was visited in 1902 by Lord Cromer, who declared it to be well conducted 2 and to deserve the same amount of encouragement as that accorded to the American Mission. In 1903 Monsignor Gayer, the new Roman Catholic Bishop of Khartum, visited the Bahr al-Ghazal and made arrangements for founding the mission station of Lul, to the south of Fashoda, about 477 miles from Omdurman.* Lord Cromer suggested 4 that his operations should be confined to the west bank, as the Church Missionary Society was contemplat- ing the foundation of a station at Mongalla. The station at Lul was worked by five Fathers and three Sisters. In 1904 the Austrian Missionaries established stations in the 1 See the article in the Church Miss. Intelligencer for April, 1906, p. 262 ft. 2 Egypt, No. 1 (1903), P- 9°- 3 See the view in Gleichen, op. cit., i., p. 69. 4 Egypt, No. 1 (1904), p. 95. VOL. II. 321 Y THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Tonga district and at WAw, &c, and some of their number visited the Golo and Bongo tribes. Sir Reginald Wingate regards the work of the American and Roman Catholic Missions as that of civilizing agents, and says that the technical instruction which they are imparting to the Shilluks, Dinkas, and others, is very beneficial from a Government point of view.1 Lord Cromer has stated clearly that " proselytisrn forms no part of " the programme of the British Government, either in countries " which form part of the dominions of the Crown, or in others " where British influence is in some degree predominant. . . . " Missionary enterprise is entirely in the hands of private " individuals, who receive no pecunairy aid from the Government. " The action of the latter is limited to securing perfect toleration " for all creeds, and to exercising such an amount of supervision " over missionary efforts as will ensure none but legitimate and " unobjectionable methods being adopted in order to convert " those who are not Christians to the Christian faith." ; Every one who knows the Sudan and the exceedingly suspicious character of its people will readily understand the soundness of the policy and the wisdom of proclaiming it unequivocally. Slatin Pasha, whose unique experience of Sudani folk renders his opinion on the subject of the greatest value, says that missionary work among the pagan tribes is a civilizing one. The savages are taught by it the elements of common sense, good behaviour, and obedience to Government authority, rather than religion, lit- has never known any savage to be baptized, nor any to have been converted to Christianity, but, on the other hand, there is no doubt that the missionaries have had an improving effect on the character of the people amongst whom they have settled, and they have certainly gained their confidence.3 It is therefore to be hoped that the Missionary Societies, whose servants are doing such good work in the Sudan, will continue to support the " men on the spot " in all common-sense endeavours to promote the physical well-being of the natives, and the growth ot trade, and that they will not allow themselves to be hurried by enthusiastic stay-at-home persons into attempts to obtain results, in the shape of " conversions." which for some time to come can />/. No. i. (1905), p. 141. - Ibid., p. 139. :{ Ibid. (1906), p. 125. FATHER OHRWALDER only be attended with loss to their cause, and which will do the native no permanent good, and cause the Government anxiety and trouble. The inhabitants of the " land of the whirring of wings, which is beyond the rivers of Rush," : as Isaiah (xviii. i) calls the territory wherein the Missions of the British, the Americans, and the Austrians are now labouring, have been pagans and idolaters, as we know of a certainty, for 6,000 years ; and it seems only reasonable to suppose that many years must elapse before they will be able to make the results of the exalted truths of the Christian Religion manifest in their lives and works. Finally, among the European institutions in the Sudan which are working silently for the good of the people of that country, must be mentioned the school conducted by Father Ohrwalder in the heart of Omdurman. The history of the trials and sufferings of this devout man are well known to every reader of Slatin Pasha's Fire and Sword in the Sudan, and from Sir Reginald Wingate's translation of Father Ohrwalder's narrative which appeared under the title of Ten Years' Captivity in the Mahdi's Camp. After his escape from the Khalifa's clutches, Father Ohrwalder laboured in Sawakin, but as soon as possible he returned to Omdurman, where he now directs a school with conspicuous success. He has cast in his lot with the natives of that town, and teaches the elements of civilization and practical religion to their children in his characteristic, whole-hearted manner. His continuous residence in the town gives to his work the consistency which is necessary for success, and the example of his life, his obedience to the Divine commands, and the thoroughness of his ministrations cannot fail to give to all the natives who are brought into contact with his personality some idea of the beauty of the religion of his Master, Christ, Whose loyal servant he undoubtedly is. 1 D^SJJ bxbx yiN- The allusion seems to be to the buzzing of the wings of the innumerable insects which live in the Southern Sudan. 3*5 CHAPTER XVII. THE GOLD MINKS OF THE SUDAN A GLANCE at the main facts of the history of the Sud;'in for the last six thousand years will convince the reader that the prin- cipal inducements which made foreigners invade and occupy the country from the time of King Seneferu, B.C. 3700. to Muhammad "All, a. D. icS20, were the slaves which it produced, and the gold which lay hidden in its mountains and hills. The Egyptians welcomed the ivory, ebony, skins of animals, ostrich feathers, and spices, which the caravans brought northwards at intervals, but the objects which stirred their kings up to tight, and made them lead their troops over deserts and rocky cataracts for hundreds of miles, were not the love of conquest, and the desire to extend the blessings of the Egyptian civilization and religion t<> hordes of naked savages, but their greed for gold, and their need of the Sudani men to carry out their great works, to fight their battles, and to police their towns. The whole policy of the kings of Egypt towards the Sudan was dictated and directed by their need of slaves and gold, and the example set by them was closely followed by Persians, Macedonians (Ptolemies), Ron lbs, and Turks. In primitive times the Blacks traded with Egypt, and exchanged then- gold, and ivory, and skins, for stone and porcelain beads and other ornaments, amulets, &c, and it is certain that numbers of the men who accompanied the caravans from the south would settle in Egypt. But the demand for Blacks was greater than the supply, and in the IVth Dynasty we find that Seneferu made a raid into some part of the Sudan and brought back a large number of prisoners, i.e., slaves. In the Vth and Vlth Dynasties missions were sent into the Sudan under Ba-neb-Tet, Una and Her-khuf, and, besides the pygmies whom two of these generals 32.1 THE CONQU Reproduced from the painted cai I. — A Nubian Village. V. — Upper register : Tribute of the Nubian.-, — rings of gold, vases of spice, bows, chains, ostrich feathe Lower register: Tribute of the Nubians — panther skins, slaves, apes, ostrich, dogs, oxen, panther f RAMESES II. ;emple at Bet al-Wali at Kalabsha. IV. — Prince Ameni-her-unemi-f. II. — Rameses II. charging the Nubians. III.— Prince Kha-em-Uast. '[ iy, the lion and other animals. VI. — Rameses II., " Lord of the Two Lands (Egypt) of diadems," seated under a canopy and receiving the tribute of the Nubians. The king wears the double crown, and holds a club in his left hand. EGYPTIAN RAIDS obtained in the south, they brought into Egypt many other products of the Sudan, including gold and slaves. It is quite clear that, more than three thousand years before Christ, a system of slave-raiding existed and flourished under the approval of the kings at Memphis, and that the chief base of the slave-raiders was at Aswan. We have, unfortunately, no illustration of a slave-raid dating from this early time, but we are able to gain an excellent idea of the scenes which took place from the reliefs which Rameses II. caused to be cut upon the walls of his little rock-temple at Bet al-Wali in Nubia. These are represented on the accompanying plate, and are reproduced from the coloured cast made by Mr. Bonomi for Mr. Hay, which is now exhibited in the Fourth Egyptian Room of the British Museum. The left-hand top corner of the first section is mutilated, but what remains of the scene illustrates an attack made on a Sudan village by the king and his followers. Here we see a woman squatting under a tree by a fire, and stirring the food which she is cooking in a pot ; in the tree is an ape. Close by is the granary of the house, and the housewife stands among the trees, addressing three men, one of whom has come from the fight wounded, and is being led to his village by two friends. Near the woman are two children, naked, just as they are to this day. A little way off is a man running and shouting to unseen neighbours to come to him. Between two trees is a skin- clad man,. holding a bow, who appears to have run away from the fight. Behind him is a fight- ing and struggling mass of black men, into whose midst the king, standing in his chariot, has charged. Rameses II. and his horses are drawn in colossal proportions, and he is about to shoot an arrow from his bow. The black men are being trampled under the feet of the horses, and several are already dead ; the rest are powerless to resist, and their bows are useless. Behind the king are two chariots containing his sons, Amen-her-unami-f and Kha-em-Uast, and their drivers. There is no reason to assume that Rameses II. in person ever raided a village in the Sudan, and chariots and horses, considering the nature of the ground, would not be of much use. The end of the fight outside the village was always the same, 325 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN for bows and arrows were of little use in fighting, at close quarters, men armed with metal-headed axes and hatchets, and handy short swords, daggers, and spears. Then came the day of reckoning, when the local shekhs had to collect from the villagers the fine which had been laid upon them by the Egyptian officer, or his deputy, and bakshish had to be given in the shape of slaves, male and female, gold, &c, to the various servants of the Government, in order to get them out of the village. When the payment was a large one, the scene represented in the lower half of the relief was enacted. The king, or his chief officer, took up his position in some prominent place in or near the town, and the gifts, or tribute, were brought before him. In the scene here given the tributaries are introduced by Prince Amen-her-unami-f and by Amen-em-Apt, the son of Pa-ser, the Prince of Kash, or Nubia, and the latter is being invested with a garment by two Egyptians. On a stand between them rests a bar, with flowers above it, whereon are hung animals' skins and chains made of rings of gold. Immediately behind Amen-em-Apt are two stands, whereon are arranged large rings of gold, and leather bags, which were filled either with gold dust or precious stones. Next are seen heaps of red carnelian stones, bows, shields, chairs, large fans, ostrich eggs and feathers, logs of ebony, and the tusks of elephants, and then come men leading a lion, an oryx, and a bull, and the rear is brought up by a group of slaves. In the lower row the gifts are introduced by the Prince of Kash, and the Blacks bring skins, apes, a panther, a leopard, a giraffe, two bulls, with a negro's head between the horns, which terminate in hands stretched out in supplication, two hunting dogs, an ostrich, an oryx or ariel, and logs of ebony. The leader of the Blacks is dragged by an Egyptian into the presence of the king by means of the forked pole to which his neck is fastened, and to which his hands are tied. This instrument of torture was in use in the Sudan during the last century, and each captive who was brought from Kasala to ShendJ in 1845 was fastened to one If we examine the scene represented on the next plate we shall find that the tribute sent to Thebes was, but for the omission of some of the wild animals, substantially the same as that paid to the Prince of Kash in Nubia. In the first register the chief of 326 ITIVE OF THE KING OF EGYPT AT THEBES. [From Lepsius, Denkm'altr, Abth. iii., Bl. 117, TRIBUTE OF THE SUDAN the country of Maam, with two feathers in his head-dress, is bowing with his head to the ground before the Egyptian governor, and by his side kneel the " Chiefs of Shesait," with their hands raised in adoration. They are followed by a Nubian lady dressed in Egyptian fashion, and by four Nubian chiefs. Immediately behind comes a chariot, shaded by an umbrella, and containing the queen of the country or tribe, which is drawn by cattle. She and the other Nubian notables wear the same kind of head- dress. By the side of the chariot walk two slaves, bearing offer- ings, and behind her are five slaves, wearing feathers in their caps ; the first wears a linen tunic, and the four others leopard- skin tunics, with the tail of the animal attached. The rear is brought up by a negress, carrying a baby in a receptacle behind her shoulders, and leading a child, and by another woman, with a lighter skin, who is leading a child. The negress and her com- panions come from the country to the south of Khartum. The offerings brought by this company consist of shields, chairs, head- rests, bedsteads, stools made of ebony and ivory, with cushions, bows, and gold. The gold was brought in two forms, viz., in rings and in dust. In the second register the Blacks bring gold, , carnelian stones {kheuemet *^_ oo ), a giraffe, and oxen ; and in the third ( o o o they bring more gold and carnelians, large fans, skins, cattle, and balsam trees (?), or spice plants. Thus it is clear that the products of the Sudan under the XVIIIth and XlXth Dynasties (b.c. 1600- 1300) were practically what they are at the present time. Every object brought was a natural product of the country, and it is tolerably safe to assume that no manufacturing industry of any sort or kind was carried on in the Sudan from one end to the other. When the ancient Egyptians found that the ordinary caravans from the Sudan did not bring a sufficient supply of gold and slaves, and that the tribes did not send the tribute of gold and slaves, which they were expected to pay, their kings sent at intervals expeditions into the country which reduced temporarily the people to obedience, and brought back to Egypt the booty which had been collected by the usual methods of burning villages and slaughtering men. From the Government point of 327 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN view the results were unsatisfactory, for before the Egyptian soldiers had reached Aswan, the country behind them was in revolt, and a year or two later another expedition had to be despatched. Besides this, the bolder among the tribes on the frontier took to making raids in Upper Egypt, and it seems tolerably certain that from time immemorial the Nubians regarded the region between Aswan and Thebes as a portion ^\ their own country. The first Egyptian kings who set to work seriously to convince the natives that the region in question belonged to Egypt were those of the Xlth and Xllth Dynasties, about p..c. 2500. From Aswan they advanced step by step to Behen, or Wadi Haifa, and in the course of the following two hundred years they reduced to subjection the tribes on both banks of the river so far as the head of the Third Cataract. From the Mentiu, or "cattle-men," the ancestors of the " Bakkara " of our own time, who lived on the west bank, they obtained the products of Dar Fur, and Kord6fan, and from the Anti, or " Hillmen," the ancestors of the Blemmyes, Begas, and Bishari tribes, who lived on the east bank, they obtained gold in considerable quantities. When once the Pharaohs of the Xllth Dynasty had coin pa red great tribes, they began to occupy sites on the banks of the Nile and to build fortifications on them close to the river. One of the earliest of these was near the modern village of Dabfid, 13 miles south of Philae, and here the Romans built their station Parembole. Here was found a stele (now in Berlin) of Amenem- hat II., which leaves no doubt that the Egyptians occupied the site under the Xllth Dynasty. The next place chosen for a fort near the modern village of Kalabsha, between 35 and 40 miles south of Philae, and a third one was near the modern village of Dakka, about 30 miles further up the river. There was settlement near Korosko, no miles from Philae, and is abundant proof that there were two or more at Wadi Haifa. It is probable that there were two or more stations on the ■ and Wadi Haifa under the Xllth Dynasty, for it is unlikely that the garrison at the latter place would be left without the support of troops stationed nearer than Korosko. We may note that between Philae and Dakka, a WADI AL-'ULAKI distance of 63 miles, there were at least two stations, one near Dabud, and the other near Kalabsha. From the nature of the Nile Valley between Philae and Dakka we see that there can never have been any large number of people living there, and this being so, the question naturally arises, " Why did the kings of the Xllth Dynasty build stations at Dabud and Kalabsha ? " There were two reasons : 1. They had to feed a garrison at Dakka, and later another at Haifa, and places where the boats carrying the supplies could tie up for the night without being plundered were absolutely necessary. 2. The boats which carried food up the river would bring down Sudan products, and strong, secure halting-places were as necessary when they came down the river as when they went up. These stations were, at first, probably of a purely military character, but so soon as they were securely established a small temple was built in each to the local god or gods. At these places the boats tied up for the night, and the guard turned out, and took steps to protect their loads until the time when their crews resumed their journey ; and Government caravans travelling from south to north, or from north to south, could turn in and halt there for the night, or in times when the roads were unsafe. Under the Xllth Dynasty Dakka was a station of great import- ance, and consisted of two portions, one on each side of the river. The reason of this is not far to seek. Just above the modern village of Kubban is the entrance to a very old road which is used to this day, and which leads to the gold mines in the hilly region called 4t Wadi al-'Ulaki" (or 'Ullaki). According to the Arab geographer Al-Idrisi,1 this region is situated in the country of the Begas, which is a large and sterile plain, without villages and without •cultivation. The Wadi, or Valley, itself has from time im- memorial been inhabited by men who were occupied in the gold trade, and it has always been a sort of large village. Water was obtained from wells. The famous gold mines are situated in a plain, which is covered by vast masses of shifting sand. According to the same authority, the Arabs used to come by night, and each man would choose the place on which he intended to work. On the following day they came with camels and carried off a. load of 1 Ed. Dozy and de Goeje. Leyden, 1866, p. 31, text, p. 26 329 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN sand to a well and washed it in wooden buckets, and when they had secured the gold from it, they poured quicksilver on it, and then melted the mixture.1 From the Arabs the merchants bought the gold thus obtained and carried it into foreign countries. The natives of the place have no other occupation except this search for gold. The object of the Pharaohs of the Xllth Dynasty in invading Nubia is quite clear — they wished to possess themselves of the gold mines of 'UlAki, and having conquered the tribes who held them, they forced them to produce a regular supply, which was sent down the river under the protection of the soldiers stationed at the various points on the river already mentioned. In the earliest times the natives of WAdi 'UlAki contented themselves with washing gold out of the sand, but afterwards they found it necessary to dig into the veins of quartz which fill the rocks round about the valley, and then the labour of getting gold was very great. Now, deposits of quartz are found in many places in the Sudan, and the richest veins are in the neighbour- hood of the Second Cataract. As we should expect, the Egyptians became aware of this fact at a very early period, and the kings of the Xllth Dynasty took steps to occupy the country by establishing forts and garrisons, and to have the quartz crushed and the gold extracted under a Government monopoly. The first king to put this on a sure footing was Usertsen III., who built fortified outposts at Semna and Kumma, about forty miles south of WAdi Haifa, right in the heart of the district containing the richest quartz veins. The country round about could never have produced sufficient to feed the garrisons here and at the stations between this place and Aswan, and we may be sure that lu- provided for the safe transport of the grain, &c, coming up the river, and of the gold, slaves, &c, going down, by building numerous forts. The conquest of this part of Nubia was carried out at this time from a purely commercial point of view and for gain, and though the Pharaohs spoke of "enlarging the boundaries " of their kingdoms in their texts, their real object in invading the SudAn was the getting of gold and slaves. 1 Burckhardt ( Travels, p. 15) thought the natives mistook micaceous sand for gold ; but it is clear that his friends did not go far enough to reach the mines which undoubtedly exist there. 330 GOLD TRADE OF THE SUDAN Under the kings of the XVIIIth Dynasty the whole of the quartz- producing districts near the Nile up to the Fourth Cataract passed into the hands of the Egyptians. Step by step, these kings advanced south, establishing stations and towns wherever they were needed, and, before the downfall of the dynasty, the viceroys of the Sudan were absolute masters of all the trade routes, and of the river traffic, which they worked on behalf of the Pharaohs. Wherever there was a trade centre of importance a temple was built, and the size and grandeur of the building depended upon the amount of the offerings which the priesthood could extort from the worshippers who passed that way. In every station on the Nile under the XVIIIth Dynasty there was a small temple, which served not only as a place of worship, but as a storehouse for the valuable merchandise, which was placed directly under the care of the god to whom the building was dedicated. If we consider for a moment the position of the stations on the Nile in the quartz-bearing region between the head of the Second and that of the First Cataract, i.e., a distance of about 335 miles, we see that nearly all of them are on the west bank, i.e., that the garrisons had the river between them and the ferocious tribes of the Eastern Desert. And when all the stations whereat remains of temples and forts of the Xllth, XVIIIth, and XlXth Dynasties are enumerated, we see that between the limits mentioned above there were no less than twenty-one places where travellers by river or land would find Egyptian officials to help them. Begin- ning from the south, these stations were at Sulb, Dosha, Saddenga and Suwarda, the Island of Sit, 'Amara, Semna, and Kumma, Gazirat al-Malik, a site on the west bank of the Nile near Sarras, Ma'tuka, Wadi Haifa, Adda, Ibrim and Derr, 'Amada, Sabu'a, Miharraka, Korti, Dakka, Garf Husen, Kalabsha, Kartassi, and Dabud. It will be seen that whilst some stations were only ten miles from each other, others were as much as thirty. It is probable that many other stations existed on the river between B.C. 1700 and 1300, but hitherto no remains of them have been found. Now, the quartz-bearing district referred to above was never famous for the production of slaves, for the simple reason that the strips of cultivable land on the river banks could 33i THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN not grow enough grain, &c, to support a considerable population, and we are therefore driven to conclude that the Pharaohs maintained this great chain of forts and temples on the Nile in connection with their gold monopoly. They did not put themselves to the trouble and expense of erecting such buildings for the sake of spreading abroad the blessing of the Egyptian civilization or religion in the Sudan, but only because it enabled them to keep a (inner hold on their monopoly, and because it paid them handsomely to do so. Under the XVIIIth Dynasty the chain of forts and temples between Aswan and the foot of the Fourth Cataract, i.e., Napata or Merawi, was in a most effective state, and as Amen-hetep II. made his way so far to the south as Wad Ha a. it is pretty certain that the Pharaohs at that time were receiving gold from the country round about Sennaar and Fazogif. Not content with drawing large quantities of gold from the Sudan for their own use, the kings of Egypt, under the XVIIIth Dynasty, sent large quantities into Western Asia. Thus Kadashman-Bed, king of Babylonia, begs Amen-hetep III. to send him the gold about which he wrote, and says that if it comes within the season of harvest he will give him his daughter to wife' Another king, Burraburiyash, asks Amen-hetep IV. indignantly, u Why did you send me two manas of gold only ? " And he adds: '"Send me much gold." Assur-Uballit, a king of Assyria, writing to Amen-hetep IV.. says, ,% In your land gold is " [as] dust. Gather it together ... I am building a new house "and I would complete it, therefore send me the gold which I "require. When Assur-Nadin-Ahi, my father, sent to Egypt, " twenty talents of gold were sent to him ; and when the king of " l.lanigalbat sent to your father, he sent back to him twenty " talents of gold also. And you should send me twenty talents of "gold."' Tushratta, king of Mitani, also writes4 to Amen- hetep III., saying, " You sent my father very much gold . . . let u my brother send me a very Large quantity of gold, which cannot " be measured, and let him send more gold to me than he did to li my father. For in my brother's land gold is as common as 1 Tell Al-'Amarna Tablet, Berlin, N - Ibid., London, No 2. :t Ibid., London, No. 9. ' Ibid., No. 8. 332 EXPORT OF GOLD " dust. And though gold is now very plentiful in my brother's "land, I pray that the gods may so ordain that it may become " ten times more plentiful even than it is now." Under the rule of the kings of the XlXth Dynasty it seems that the gold mines in the neighbourhood of the Second, Third, and Fourth Cataracts became unprofitable ; at all events, we hear very little about them after the reign of Rameses II. It is probable that Rameses I. and his immediate successors found it impossible to maintain the forts and temples beyond Haifa in an effective condition, and that they turned their attention to developing the mines in Wadi 'Ulaki, a place which was much nearer Egypt, and the route to which gave far less trouble to defend. Moreover, the influence of Egypt over the Eastern Desert was greater than in former times, and the tribes which lived there brought their gold both to Ombos, the " gold city," ' the terminus on the Nile of one important desert route, and to Coptos, the termination of another. At this period of its history Egypt was able to absorb all the gold which could be brought into it, for the decoration of the funeral furniture, and ornaments of the dead, must have required as much of this metal as the jewellery and ornaments of the living. The first king of the XlXth Dynasty who took steps to increase the import of gold into Egypt was Seti I., about B.C. 1370. According to an inscription published by Lepsius,2 Seti I. was thinking about the countries from which the gold was brought, and the wish came into his mind to go and see the mines. He departed on his way up the river, and in due course set out on the desert road which leaves the Nile on the east bank near Edfii, and leads to the famous Emerald Mines of Gebel Zabara near the Red Sea. As the king went along the road he thought about the lack of water on it, and wondered how the ordinary folk quenched their thirst. He quickly realized how they must suffer, and that unless some means for supplying water to travellers were found, caravans could not travel on that road, and it would be impossible 1 In Egyptian Nubt, fwW . The name is probably connected with nub, the word for gold. 2 Denkmiiler, iii. &pb. 333 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN to work the mines. Thereupon Seti resolved to dig a well, and with the help of his god he found a suitable place for digging one; he then collected workmen, who dug the well, and the water sprang up and filled it, and ran over the sides in such quantities that it seemed as if the two great sources of the Nile of the South and the Nile of the North had been tapped. After this the king established a station near the well, and built a temple. Ra was worshipped ' in the sanctuary, Ptah and Osiris in the hall, and Horus, Isis, and Seti were associated with the leading gods of the place. When this temple was finished and fittingly decorated, Seti came and worshipped in it. This temple lies on the old road to the Red Sea, at a distance of about forty miles from the Nile, and is known as the Temple of Radasiyah. This road was used in the reign of Amen-hetep III., for Merimes, Prince of Kash, has left his name on the rock near the temple. From another inscription2 we learn that Seti I. dug a well on the old road leading from Kubban on the Nile to the Wadi 'Ulaki, at a place where several other kings had tried to find water, and that he, like them, was unsuccessful. These in- scriptions show that Seti I. did his best to increase the import of gold by making communication easier between the Nile and the mines in the Eastern Desert. The activity of his son Rameses II. in this matter was not less than his own, for this king dug a well on the road which led to the mines in the Wadi 'Ulaki, and he and his engineers were rewarded with the discovery of a splendid flow of water. From the time of Rameses II. onwards the kings of Egypt, whether Egyptian, Nubian. Persian, Macedonian, Roman, or Arabian, kept the mines working in the Wadi 'Ulftki, and derived revenue from them. They protected the roads leading to them, and maintained stations on the Nile so far as Dakka for this purpose. It seems that the quartz reefs in the Nile Valley between Haifa and the Third Cataract were worked out at a comparatively early period, i.e., during the XVIIIth or XlXth Dynasty, or at least that the working of them had become unprofitable. Reference has been made above to the systematic attempt made 1 See Chabas, Inscriptions des Mines d'Or, p. 6. - See Prisse d'Avennes, Monuments Egyptiens, Paris, 1847, pi. xxi. »334 <3;>fc^ W&*J&Vi REIGN OF SETI I., B.C. 1370. rin. Lepsius, Ausivahl, BL w«rl, or ' , and the Egyptians distinguished between "gold of the 0 ° ° mountain," " and " gold of the river ; " :< the ore was called "gold on its mountain."1 There was a difference too between mere "gold," ' ', and "good gold,'' ' T, and between "gold of OOO o o o 0 the mountain," and "good gold of its mountain,'* "' there was also "gold of twice," and "gold of thrice," 8 i.e., gold refined twice or thrice, or perhaps gold of one-third or two-thirds alloy; and there was a quality called " gold of the scale." ' Another kind of 1 It is called "The road of Thi ^ Ji*^ 0@ oM*\ /WWW 11 ^ 1 /WWW ■ phW*^ AAWAA WWW . W/WW 4 fs^^r^^^^^ 0 0 0 1 ^ 1 , r^ S2£ and r^\ 1 ^, ooo^> 1 o o o 0 ^ /WW\A V-^ ' ' /wwv\ v-^. OOO II J 0 0 III 7'^— l^MM^- 336 VARIETIES OF GOLD another gold was called Katemet, '—I ^ \\ ^ o? which has been compared with the Hebrew word for " fine gold," kethem, in Prov. xxv. 12, Job xxxi. 24, &c A large quantity of gold came from Nubia, and this is called the "gold of Kash," and large quantities came from the Eastern Desert to the cities of Coptos, Edfu, and Ombos. Lastly, one kind of gold was called " white (or pale) gold," (>m«q Y o j and green gold," ' 000 as opposed to the kind which the Abyssinians call " red gold." From the monuments we see that gold was brought to Egypt in small nuggets and in dust, or melted into flat cakes, or bars (ingots), or bricks, or rings. The gold dust which came from the regions of Sennaar and Fazogli was tied up in bags {arfu <==>^'), and the metal in its other forms was often brought in boxes.1 The principal gold weights were the teben, = teben, and the pek = yxg-th of a teben ; Lepsius thought these weights = 9°'959> 9"°959> and 07106 grammes respectively. The metal formed by the natural mixture of gold with silver was indicated by the sign rwi ° ; this, because the sceptre j 1 See Lepsius, Die Metalle, p. 43. vol. 11. 337 Z AA/WV\ th of a D _ s— S FRAGMENT OF A PLAN OF A GROUP OF GOLD MINES WHICH WERE WORKED IN THE REIGN OF RAMESES II. (B.C. I.330). [From Lepsius, Auswahl, PI. XXII. THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN has the value tcham} Dr. Birch read the sign " tcham " and trans- lated " pure gold " ; " a better rendering is, however, " electrum.' *:: This metal was brought into Egypt in bags, and also in the form of rings, and from the largeness of the quantities of it which are mentioned, it is clear that, as Lepsius says, it cannot have been gold of a very fine or pure quality. It was, however, a valuable substance, for it is mentioned in connection with gold, lapis- lazuli, and turquoise, and that it was a natural product is proved by the words "tcham of the mountains, and gold on its mountain " ' (i.e., gold ore). The colour of tcham was much admired, and in the late period gold and silver were mixed together artificially, and the " electrum " of the classical writers was thus produced. The mining methods of the ancient Egyptians were not very elaborate, and they appear to have been somewhat wasteful in character. The sites where the veins of quartz were thickest and most easily accessible were worked out first, but as soon as a vein ran deep, or a hard stone obstruction was met with, that section was abandoned. Where the veins were close to the surface the greatest trouble was taken to dig out every bit <>f quartz, as an examination of a mining site such as that near Semna on the Second Cataract will show. Here alternate layers of quartz and some hard stone are found, and the country for miles around is covered with fiat pieces of dark stone which were broken in getting out the quartz. Whether the old mines would pay in the re-working is a matter which only raining experts can decide, but it is impossible not to think that with modern tools and modern methods much gold might be obtained from the quartz veins which have only been partly worked, and from others which were overlooked by the ancients. Muhammad * All sent a party of men ike experiments with a view of reopening the mines in the Wad! 'l/laki, and the conclusion he arrived at was that the gold 1 See Birch in Bunsen. Egypfs Place, vol. i., p. 574, No. 145 ; and vol. v., p. 519. 2 Lepsius, op. cit.. p. 43. 3 According to Pliny (xxxiii. 23) a mass of gold of which one-fifth was silver was called " electrum." 4 rwn o (-' ' * <~T , Lepsius, of) cit., p. 4^ ; Dtimichen, Hist. 'To 1 ^ IIIO III I 4^' /nsck., 31. 338 OUTPUT OF GOLD obtained by them only barely covered the expense of mining, and' he therefore gave up the scheme. In this case the conclusion really depended on the honesty of his agents. A great proportion of the gold and silver which entered Egypt annually between B.C. 1500 and 1200 must have come from the Eastern Desert, and for nearly 3,000 years gold must have formed the principal article of commerce borne by the caravans from the country now called the " Southern Atbai." We have, un- fortunately, no information in the hieroglyphic inscriptions which enables us to calculate the exact amount or value of the gold and silver which were brought into Egypt annually, but that it was very great is evident from a statement made by Diodorus Siculus. In his first Book (chap. 48 ff.) this writer gives a description of the tomb of the king whom he calls " Osymandyas," who is really Rameses II.1 After enumerating the reliefs which are to be seen on the various walls, he says that in one part is the figure of the king, painted in colours, who is engaged in offering to a god the gold and silver which he drew annually from the gold and silver mines of Egypt, and above it was an inscription stating the amount thereof. Diodorus, or Hekataeus, calculated what this sum amounted to in the money of his time, and says that it was equal to thirty-two millions of minas ; 2 this sum in round figures is equal to about £80,000,000 sterling.3 It is possible that a small proportion of the gold which was paid into the Egyptian treasury in the time of Rameses II. came from Northern Syria, but not very likely, seeing that this king's dominions stopped at the Nahr al-Kalb, or Dog River. The bulk of the gold and silver paid to Rameses II. came from the Eastern Desert and the districts near Sennaar and Beni Shankul, and, though the estimate of its value given above may be excessive, it is quite clear from the figures quoted by Diodorus that the value of the precious metals which came into Egypt must have been very great indeed. 1 Osymandyas = Usr-Maat-Ra, ©J Sfcfi, the first portion of the prenomen of Rameses II. 2 imoyeypdqbdai 8e Kai to rrXr/dos, o avyKfCpakaiovpevov els dpyvpiov \6yov eivai pvwv TpifjyCkins Kai diaKOcrias pupiddas- Ed. Didot, p. 41* 3 The mina = 75 drachmae at 8d., or £2 10s. If the mtna be calculated to be worth 100 drachmae, the total will be rather more than one-third higher. 339 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN About the working of the gold mines by the ancient Egyptians we obtain some valuable information from Agatharcides, who was born at Cnidus, probably at the beginning of the second century B.C. He wrote a work in five books on the Erythraean Sea about B.C. 120, and in the fifth he describes the manners and customs of the principal peoples who lived in the countries bordering on the Red Sea. From this Diodorus (iii. 12 ff.) transcribed the account of the working of the gold mines near the Red Sea, which may be summarized thus: — To the south of Egypt, and on the borders of Arabia and Ethiopia, there is a place full of rich gold mines, whence with great expense, and toil, and difficulty, the gold is dug. The substance from which the metal is taken is a black stone seamed with white veins, and with shining patches. Those who are the overseers of the works at the mines employ a very large number of workmen, who are either condemned criminals, or prisoners of war, or men who, having been unjustly accused and cast into prison, have been banished to the mines, or men against whom the king had a spite. Frequently the last two classes are sent to the mines with all the members of their family, and their kindred, and these also are obliged to labour for the king's benefit. These wretched people work in fetters by day and by night, and chance of escape is impossible, for the guards and soldiers who are set over them keep strict watch, and as these speak only foreign tongues, it is impossible for them to be corrupted by the wretched miners either by bribes or entreaties. The rock which contains the gold is very hard and solid, and they make it soft by lighting fires under it, after which they can it with their hands. As soon as the stone is sufficiently softened, and is likely to break under the influence of a moderate effort, thousands of the wretched miners break it into pieces with the iron tools which are used in the working of stones. At their head is the skilled "ganger," who knows where to look for the veins of gold, and he shows the men where to dig. The most powerful among the wretched men who are condemned to work in the mines are told off to break the rock with iron picks, which they wield unskilfully, and with infinite labour. The galleries of the mines wherein this class of men work are not straight, but 340 GOLD MINES they follow the direction of the vein of quartz ; and since in such crooked passages they have to work in the dark, they carry lamps attached to their foreheads. They change their position accord- ing to the nature of the rock and the position of the veins of metal, and dig down the rock above them in fragments. Thus they work incessantly under the eyes of a stern watcher, who meanwhile showers blows upon them. As the fragments of quartz fall on the ground young children creep into the subterranean galleries, and collect them and carry them out to the entrances to the galleries. From these places men who are not more than thirty years of age take each a certain quantity of these fragments, and placing them in stone mortars they pound them with iron pestles until the ore is in pieces the size of a chick-pea (opoftos). The ore is then taken by women and old men and put in a row of mills, each of which is worked by two or three people, wherein the ore is ground as line as powder. As the poor wretches who do this work are not allowed to pay any attention to the care of their bodies, and they wear no clothing, not even a rag to cover their nakedness, every one who looks upon their pitiable plight must be filled with commiseration for them. No respite is given to the sick, or the maimed, or the halt, and neither the weakness of old age, nor women's infirmities are accepted as a reason for rest or intermission of labour. All alike are forced to work, and any temporary relaxation of work is visited with an increased number of blows ; finally many of them drop down dead through exhaustion. By reason of these suffer- ings, and being without hope in the future, these unfortunate beings await death with joy, for it is far preferable to life. In the next stage the miners collect the ore which has been ground, and spread it out on sloping boards, over which they pour a stream of water, which carries away the earthy matters, leaving the gold lying on the boards. They repeat the washing process several times, and at length all the useless matter is eliminated, and the gold dust becomes pure and bright. Then other workmen take a measured quantity of the dust, and pour it into an earthenware vessel, and having added certain quantities of lead, salt, tin, and bran, they place on the vessel a cover which fits it tightly, and then set it in a furnace fire for five days and five 341 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN nights continuously. At the end of this time they remove the vessel from the fire and set it aside to cool, and when they take off the cover they find nothing but pure gold inside it, for all the dross has disappeared. The gold, of course, weighs less than the powder which was put into the vessel to be smelted. Thus it is clear that the processes of gold mining were difficult, and that the digging out of the ore involved great trouble. Finally Agatharcides tells us that the mines which he has been describing were discovered in very early times, and that they were worked by the most ancient kings. .U2 CHAPTER XVIII. THE MODERN SUDAN. In the present and following chapters an attempt is made to describe briefly the principal facts connected with the country and people of the Sudan as they exist in our time, so that the reader may be able to compare the modern conditions of the " Land of the Blacks " with the ancient records of its history. A description of this kind would naturally deal with the country itself and its provinces, first of all, but as the Nile and its tributaries form the most important features of the Sudan, and the trade, and commerce of the country, and of every living thing in it, depend upon them for their existence, the first section of this chapter is devoted to the mighty river, which has for thousands of years formed one of the chief objects of veneration of the dwellers on its banks from the Central African Lakes to the sea. I. The Nile. The ancient Egyptians called the Nile-god Hep,1 or Hap,2 and the earliest representations of him depict him in the form of a man, with female attributes ; on his head he wears a cluster of lotus flowers, and he bears before him a table whereon are vases of water, flowers, &c. He dwelt in celestial regions, and poured out from his vases the life-giving waters, which appeared on earth from out of the two caverns, or Qerti, near the Island of Elephantine. The contents of one vase formed the Nile from Aswan northwards, and those of the other the Nile from Aswan southwards. That the Nile flowed into the sea was well known, but the Egyptians cannot have known, at all events with any certainty, where its sources were situated, though one would D 343 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN think that the caravan men from Dar Fur and Kordofan would bring down from the natives of those countries accounts of the existence of great lakes in Central Africa. The famous hymn to the Nile, after enumerating the benefits which the god gives to gods and men, states that his " secret place cannot be explored, " and the place where he is is unknown " ; ' elsewhere it is said that the Nile-god Hap is One, that he created himself, and that his origin is unknown.2 Whether the true sources of the Nile were known by the Egyptians, or guessed at by them, there is no evidence to show, but it is certain that the priests of Elephantine and Philae found it to their interest to declare that the sources of the Nile were at Philae, and according to the legend on the rock on the Island of Sahal in the First Cataract, it was to Elephantine that Tcheser, a king of the Illrd Dynasty, sent when he wished to find out why the Nile had not risen for seven years to a proper height during the inundation." During the later period of Egyptian history Silsila was regarded as the frontier town between Egypt and Nubia, and an idea seems to have been prevalent that the home of the Nile-god was here ; hence we find Rameses II. setting up an inscription on Gebel Silsila recording the establishment of two festivals in honour of the Nile-god. These were observed in June and August, and, as Dr. Stern pointed out, their modern Arab equivalents are the " Night of the Drop," 4 which is observed on June 17th, and the " Cutting of the Dam." about the middle of August. The first of these festivals was celebrated in connection with the beginning of the rise of the Nile, and the Egyptians thought this was caused by the tears which [sis shed annually in heaven in commemoration of her first great lamentation over the dead body of her husband Osiris. Her tears were supposed to possess the power of increasing A/WSAA C^ Zet't., 1873, p. 130. 3 Aeg. Zcitschrift, 1S73. p. 135. 4 Lelat al-Nukta. These festivals are well described by Lane, Modern Egyptians^ vol. ii., p. 224 ff. 344 Um Ainegba ^Marbeit * g^TJ ! y^/M.Zeraf ,/.g;«ni/A'--....-BelfpdiO;| p (V re Tills x<*>Pais Kal T("9 &pat$ Tciis dAeeii/als. Yiverai. fie kcl\ Trepi ttjv ' kpafiiav vos, Kal ravra payfiuia, Ka\ rrjs avrffs rjpepas iroWdicis, dm ritv avrr]v alriav. Meteor ologicorum , I., viii. 19. 347 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Africa, and the influence of the summer rains on one of them is described by him.1 Aristocreon (Pliny, Hist. \W., v. 9), Caecilius Bion (Pliny, Hist. Nat., xxviii. 57), Dalion (Pliny, Hist. Nat., vi. 35), and Simonides are mentioned in such a way as to suggest that they were authorities on the geography of north-east Africa, and as the last named is said to have lived five years at Meroe he must have heard much about the country to the south and east of Khartum. Hipparchus, who flourished late in the second century before Christ, sketched the course of the Nile to the south, and made its sources to be three lakes. Among the earliest travellers into the country south of Khartum were the two centurions, who about a.d. 65 were sent by the Emperor Nero to report on the Sudan. It is perfectly clear from the statements which they made to Seneca (see above, p. 172) that they reached the region of the Sadd, and if they could have forced their way through the obstruction, they would undoubtedly have reached the lakes. They were, of course, guided by local shekhs who, by taking them up the White Nile, showed that they them- selves understood the relation of the two great lakes to the Nile, and we may conclude that in the first century a.d. all the main facts about the course of the Nile and its lakes were known. Ptolemy, the geographer, about a.d. 150 collected all the available information about the Nile from early travellers, and succeeded in forming a correct opinion as to the general course of the Nile. He made the Nile to flow out of three lakes, and placed its sources in the Mountains of the Moon, and if the identification of these mountains with the Ruwenzori ran correct, it is clear that Ptolemy was substantially right as to his He made a mistake, however, in placing the sources of the Nile to the south of the Equator, but this may be due to the monastic copyists «»{' his maps, and in such a matter no one would expect accuracy from them, especially as none of the early raphers, not even Ptolemy, had correct views about the extent and shape of Africa. All the Muhammadan geographers state that the springs of the 1 Murray, Historical Account of Discoveries and Travels in Africa, London, 1818. 34* SOURCE OF THE NILE Nile are in the Mountains of the Moon ; they are ten in number, and five flow into one lake, and five into another. From each lake two streams flow, and when all four have united the Nile is formed. The principal lake was called the " Lake of Likuri," Likuri being the name of a people who have been identified with the " Wakuri," who still live on Lake Victoria. These geographers knew of the existence of the mountains of snow, but they identified them with Gebel Kaf, which surrounded the world. The length of the Nile was stated to be 3,748 or 3,000 parassangs. Shams ad-Din,1 who was born in the second half of the thirteenth century, says that the Nile springs flow from the Mountains of the Moon into two great lakes, which are four days' journey from each other, the eastern being called Kuku, or Tamim as-Sudani, and the western Damadim, or Galgur Hagami. These lakes, he says, are in lat. 70 south, and from them flow four rivers which run from the Equator to lat. 70 north, into the great lake which is called in Arabic " Gami'a," i.e., the " gatherer together," and in the native language " Kuri " (or, Wakuri, the name of a tribe). By the end of the seventeenth century a considerable amount of definite information about Lake Sana, and the Blue Nile and its course had been collected, chiefly through the observations of the Jesuits, Father Francisco Alvarez, Father Pedro Paez, and Father Jeronino Lobo, who visited Abyssinia in 1525, 1615, and 1622, and the sources of the Blue Nile in the Sakala Mountains of Gojam had actually been visited by Paez. The next European to see the sources of the Blue Nile was James Bruce of Kinnaird, who was in Abyssinia between 1770 and 1773. The investigation of the White Nile began in 1839, when Thibaut sailed up the river to within seven degrees of the Equator ; two years later Werne, a German, reached Gondokoro, and about this time informa- tion about a great lake at a distance of several days' journey to the south began to filter down the river through the natives to Khartum. In 1848 the missionaries Rebmann and Krapf actually saw the snow-covered " Mountains of the Moon," and they published accounts of Lakes Nyassa, Tanganyika, Baringo, and Victoria. These were the real pioneers of Nile discovery in the nineteenth century, and it was chiefly owing to the interest which 1 Ed. Mehren, St. Petersburg, 1866, p. 88. 349 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN metres ; its one outlet is the Victoria Nile. Its affluents on the north are the Sio, Nzoia, and Lukos ; on the east, the Nyando, Tuyayo, and Sundo ; on the west, Katonga, Ruizi, and the Kagera ; in German territory on the east are the Mara Dabash, Ruwana, and Mbalasati, and on the south the Mtuma, Suiuya, Moami, Wami, Lokungati, and the Ruiga. A current sets across the lake from the Kagera River to the Ripon Falls. The most important of all these is the Kagera, which is fed by the Nvavarongo, Akanyaru, and Ruvuvu, and if any one river can be said to have a special ANKOLl DISTRICT, MOUNTAINS FORMING EASTERN BOUNDARY OF ALBERTI1 RIFT VALLEY. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. influence on the rise and fall of the waters of the lake, then the ra is the real source of the Nile. Sir William Garstin does not consider the Kagera to be the real source, but the lake itself. The catchment basin of the lake, including the lake itself, is 240,000 square kilometres. The terminus of the Uganda Railway on the lake is Kisuma, or Port Florence. There are several large islands in the lake, e.g., Buvuma, Loliu, Busoga, Bugala, and Ukerewe, and several groups of islands, e.g., those of Buvuma, Sesse, Kome, Damba, and Korne. The level of the water of the 352 LAKE ALBERT EDWARD lake has been steadily falling for some years, and this fact is attributed to the steady shrinkage of the water surface which has been observed in other Central African lakes. The total amount of rain-water which enters the lake annually is computed at 138,750,000,000 cubic metres, and the amount which runs off into the Nile at 18,133,200,000 cubic metres. The amount lost by evaporation is 75,737,000,000 cubic metres. The mean daily dis- charge into the Nile is 49,680,000 cubic metres. Other contributory sources of the Nile are Lake Albert Edward LAKE ALBERT EDWARD. HEAD OF THE SEMLIKI RIVER. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. and Lake Albert. Lake Albert Edward was discovered by Stanley in 1875, and lies between the parallels of lat. o° 8' and o° 40' south, and the meridians of 290 32' and 300 6' east. At the north- east corner it is connected by a long, narrow channel with the small lake called Ruisamba, or Dueru, though Lake Albert Edward is itself called Dueru by the Wanyoro. The area of the two lakes is 2,100 square kilometres ; the larger is 70 kilometres long and 50 kilometres wide, and the smaller is 30 kilometres long and 16 or 17 wide. The catchment basin, including the lake itself, is in area 18,000 square kilometres, and the level of the lake is vol. n. 353 A a THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN 965 metres above the sea. Both lakes lie in the western " Rift," which starts from the northern end of Lake Xvassa in lat. 10 15' south, and ends near Gondokoro.1 The other Lakes in this rift are Tanganyika and Kivu. The only outlet of Lake Albert Edward is the Semliki River. In the Katwe Bay there are three islands, and in Lake Dueru two, viz., Chikalero and Naukavenga. The principal rivers which How into Lake Dueru are the Makokia, Nuisamba, Lokoku, Sebu, Mbuku, Hima, Ruini or Nsongi, Dura. Yeria, Balariba, Msongi, Mpango, Igasha, Nakatera, Malluna, VIEW ON THE SEMLIKI RIVER. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. and Manobo : nil these rise on the eastern face of the Ruenzori Mountains. The rivers which flow into Lake Albi it Edward are the kutshuru and Ruendu on the south ; the Muwengu or Mtungi on the south-east, and the Nyamgasha or Kyamgashani, and the Dibirra on the north. 1 The eastern "Rift" starts from the same place, follows the thirty-sixth meridian east of Greenwich, and either disappears at Lake Rudolph, lat. 4° north, or skirts the southern limits of the Abyssinian highlands, until it joins the similar depression now occupied by the Red Sea. In this "Rift" are Lakes Manjara, Natron. Naivasha, Al-Menteita, Nakuru, Hannington, Baringo; and Rudolph. See Garstin, Report on the Upper Nile J> in lat. g° 29' north, i.e., a distance of nearly 723 miles, the Nile is called the " Bahr al-Gebel/' or " Upper Nile." From the place where the waters of the Bahr al-Gebel meet the waters of the Bahr al-Ghazal in Lake No, at the point called " Makren al- Buhur," to Khartum, i.e., for a distance of about 600 miles, the Nile is called " Bahr al-Abyad," or "White Nile." The length of the Nile between the Ripon Falls and Khartum is about 1,580 mile.-. The rivers which flow into the Victoria Nile arc : 1. The Kafu, which rises in the Unyoro country, and enters the Nile from the 1 Called by the natives Muta N'zigi, or Luta N'zigi ; this name means "dead locust." 356 THE UPPER NILE west, near Mruli. 2. The Titi, near Mruli, from the north- west. 3. The Lenga, or Kubuli, on the east bank, opposite to Fuwera. 4. The Dukhu, on the east bank, ten miles north of Fuwera. The rivers which flow into the Bahr al-Gebel are: 1. The Tangi, on the east, at mile 15 from Lake Albert. 2. The Achwa, on the east, at mile 28 ; it rises in Mount Guruguru. 3. The Umi, on the east, at mile 40. 4. The Jokha, on the east, JUNCTION OF THE ASUA RIVF.R WITH THE BAHR AL-GEBEL. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Ofhce. at mile 85. 5. The Ayugi, on the east, opposite to Dufili, at mile 130. 6. The Unyami, on the east, near the Ayugi. 7. The Asua, on the east, at mile 148 ; it is about 170 miles long. 8. The Atappi, on the north-east ; it is a tributary of the Asua. 9. The Umi, on the east, at mile 173. 10. The Karpeto, on the east, at mile 183. n. The Niumbi, on the east, at mile 195. 12. The Kiveh, on the east, at mile 199. 13. The Lugololo, on the east, at mile 216. 14. The Peki, on the east, at mile 220. 15. The Kit, or Bahr Ramliya, on the east, at 357 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN mile 234. 16. The Lakodero, on the east, at mile 245. Besides these, mention must be made of the large channel on the east of the Bahr al-Gebel, which was discovered by Mr. E. S. Grogan ' on his march from Bor to the Bahr az-Zarafa, and called the "Gertrude Nile." Sir William Garstin investigated this channel in 1904, and found that the Gertrude Nile is no other than the river which the Dinkas call the "Atem." The course of this river is along the high land to the east of the Nile Valley : where [From Sir \V. Garstin** Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. ives the Bahr al-Gebel is not known, but it enters it about mile 437 from Lake Albert. About 54 miles north of Bor the Atem divides into two branches, that on the right being the Myding, or Mydang, and that on the left the Awai. A special map of the course of these rivers is given by Sir Willian Garstin in Appendix VI. of his Report. Into the western end of Lake No flat. 8° 29' north) flows the Bahr al-Ghazal, or " Gazelle River," which receives the waters of all the streams that drain the watershed between the Congo and 1 From the Cape to Cairo, London, 1900. 358 GAZELLE AND GIRAFFE RIVERS the Nile, i.e., in the area between lat. 50 and 8° north, and long. 240 and 300 east. The principal tributaries of the Bahr al-Ghazal river are the Rohl, the Jan, and the Tonj, on the right, and the Bahr al-'Arab, the Bahr al-Homr, and the Jiir on the left. Mashra ar-Rek, a place famous in the history of the THE RIVER ABAf, LOOKING UP-STREAM FROM THE BRIDGE OF AGAM DELDI. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. slave-raiding expeditions in the Sudan, was on "Kit Island," not far from the bifurcation (lat. 8° 44' 50" north) of the Bahr al- Ghazal, at mile 112 from Lake No. The tributaries of the White Nile are the Bahr az-Zarafa, or " Giraffe River," and the Sobat, or Subat,1 or the Bahr al-Asfar, 1 This is probably found in conjunction with A.sta, u river," in the classical "Astasobas." 359 THE EGYPTIAN ST DAN Yellow River." The Bahr az-Zarafa enters the White Nile on the right or east bank, about 48 miles down-stream of Lake N6, in lat. 9 53' 17" north. The channel by which it is fed leaves the Hahr al-Gebel 240 miles south of Lake No, and it receives on its way the waters from Khor Too, Khor Khos, and Khor Kanieti, which come from the Latuka Hills. The course of the Bahr az- Zarafa was explored by Major Peake, K.A., and Captain Stanton in 1898, and by Mr. Grogan and Commandant Henri in 1900. THK ABAI, NEAR LA KB SANA. Sir VV. Oarstin's Report, by permission of ih* Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. The Sobat rises in the Abyssinian mountains, and for the first 260 miles of its course is known by the Abyssinians as the " Baro," by the Nuers as the " Kir," and by the Anuaks as the '• I'peno," and from its junction with the Pibor to the Nile it is called the Sobat or Bahr al-Asfar. Its total length is about 460 miles. The tributaries of the Baro in its upper region are the Sako, right bank, Bonga, left bank; and tlu- Khor Gokau, or Garre, joins the Baro at Gokau and Machar. The Nigol, or Aluro, enters the Baro 17 miles below I tang, on the left bank. 360 THE SOBAT RIVER The Pibor enters the Sobat 25 miles above Nasser, and 200 miles from its mouth. A tributary of the Pibor is the Agwei, also called Neubari, Ruzi II., and Adjonaro. The Akobo, or Juba River, enters the Pibor about 70 miles from its mouth. The Ajibir, or Ruzi I. River, enters the Akobo on the west bank about 80 miles from the south end of the Pibor. The Gelo enters the Pibor on the right bank, 26 miles above its junction with the Baro. The Mokwai, or Bela, enters the Pibor above LAKE TSANA (SANA.). [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. the Pibor-Sobat junction, and the Khor Filus enters the Sobat on the left bank, about ten miles from its junction with the White Nile. The portion of the Sudan through which these rivers flow has been explored in part by Major Gwynn, Major Austin, Mr. Wellby, Mr. O. Neumann, Signor Bottego, Captain H. H.Wilson, Mr. Macmillan, Colonel Artomonoff, Messrs. Faivre and Potter, Major A. Blewitt, Lieut. Comyn, and others. Excellent sum- maries of the results obtained by these travellers and officers will be found in Count Gleichen's Handbook, p. 131 ff. 361 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN The Sobat enters the Nile on the right bank, about 800 miles from Lake Albert, hit. g 22' 8" north, longitude 310 31' east. I he water of the Sobat is at times of a " creamy white " colour, and at others a pale red, and it is probable that the White Nile derived its name from the milky colour given to its waters by those of the Sobat when in flood. The waters of the Nile are here of a greenish-grey colour, and Sir William Garstin notes that " for a long way down-stream a sharp line separates the two." THE ABAI, OR BLOB NILE, RAPIDS, NEAR THR FORD. [From Sir W Garstin 's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. Tlie Sobat brings down an immense quantity of water, which probably equals that derived from the lakes, and the volume and velocity of this are sufficient to hold back the discharge the White Nile. The country traversed by the Sobat is a rich alluvial plain covered with grass; large herds of cattle abound. At Khartum the White Nile is joined by the Blue Nile, or Abal, on the east bank. The Blue Nile brings down an immense volume of rain-water from the Abyssinian mountains and forests THE BLUE NILE It begins to rise in June, reaches its maximum height in August, and falls rapidly in September. In flood time its waters are of a deep chocolate colour, but in the winter they are of a " beautiful limpid blue colour," and from this the river derives its name. The Blue Nile rises about 60 miles south of Lake Sana,1 and flows northward into it at the south-west corner, and flows out again at the south-east corner of the lake.2 Lake Sana takes its name from " Sana," the largest of the PORTUGUESE BRIDGE OVER THE RIVER ABAi AT AGAM DELDI, ABOUT TWENTY- ONE MILES FROM LAKE SANA, [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office, eleven islands which are in it. The other islands are Bergida, Dabra Antones, Dabra Maryam, Daga, Dek, Galila, Metrakha, Mesle, Kebran, and Rima. Every island except Dek was inhabited by monks. The area of the lake is about 1,200 square miles ; its greatest length is about 35 miles, and its breadth is about the same. It lies among the Abyssinian hills at an altitude of nearly 5,000 feet. After passing through a series of channels 1 In Amharic Bahr Sana TfhC : *f : or HfhC : rflF : 2 See Mr. C. Dupuis's Report upon Lake Tsana, published in Egypt, No. 2 (1904). 363 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN it unites in a " fine broad stream about 200 metres wide." About 21 miles down-stream, at Agam Deldi, is the old Portuguese bridge, " a quaint, half ruinous old structure, very remarkable "as being still the only one spanning the Blue Nile in its whole " length." ' The narrow gorge crossed by the bridge is a striking one, and the Falls of Tis Esat " are really exceedingly fine " ; they are at the head of the gorge which is crossed by the bridge, and the river descends 150 feet in a single leap, into a profound abyss. Abyssinian writers say that the Abai surrounds Gojam in such a way that this country is always on its right bank, and that it rises in a place called Sekut,- to the west of Bagemder and the Lake of Dara (i.e., Lake Sana), and Bed. From this place it travels to Amhara, then turns to the west, then passes Walaka, and comes to the borders of Mugar and Shawa (Shoa), and passing between BizAma and Gonga, it descends into the region of Shankela. Finally it enters the kingdom of Senar (Sennaar). After this it flows on and receives the waters of two great rivers, the Takaze,1 which comes from Tegr6, and the Guangue,4 which comes from Dembea, and then it runs to Dengula (Dongola) and the country of N6bH (Nubia). The course of the Blue Nile from Lake Sana to the eastern frontier of the Sudan is Dot well known, but it can hardly be less in length than 550 miles, and as Sir William Garstin puts the distance by river from Khartum to Ruseres at 426 miles, the total length of the Blue Nile must be about 1,000 miles. From Lake Sana to Famaka, on the Abyssinian frontier, the river is called by its Abyssinian name, "'.\i;\v.'"r' KHR ; or Lwl," i\n*E :" but as soon as it enters the Sudan its name nes" Bahr al-Azrak," i.e., the " Blue Nile." The Blue Nile must have borne the name of " 'Abai " in the time of Strabo, for he calls it u Astapos," which is a Graecized compound of ast, or asta, " water, river," and 'Adds, the name of the river. 1 Arrangements are being made to build a bridge from Halfaya to Khartum, and I understand that work on the foundations lias actually been begun. flYl'l : Ilrill, : 3.TR : ' D'Abbadie transcribes Wbbay. ■ The form 'Abawi, ?\f|<^ : also occurs. See Pereira, Chronica, Lisbon, 1900, p. 634. 364 BLUE NILE, DINDER, RAHA1) The two tributaries of the Blue Nile are the Dinder and the Rahad. The Rahad rises in the Abyssinian mountains near Lake Sana, and enters the Blue Nile from the east close to Wad Madani, 123 miles from Khartum. The Dinder also rises in the Abyssinian mountains, and is about 250 miles long ; it flows parallel with the Rahad for about 75 miles of its course, and enters the Nile from the east, about 40 miles above Wad Madani, i.e., about 163 miles from Khartum. The Dinder has been navigated in a steamer so far as Dabarki, i.e., 120 miles from Khartum, and Mr. Armbruster once steamed up the Rahad to Mashra Abid, i.e., 420 miles from Khartum.1 The principal places on the Blue Nile are : — Soba, or Suba, 14 miles from Khartum, 'Elafiin, 18 miles, Kfimlin, 61 miles, Rufa'a, 94 miles, Masallamia, 105 miles, Abii Haraz, 117 miles, Wad Madani, 123 miles, Sennaar, 213 miles, Runka and Sanga, 266 miles, Karkoj (Karkog), 287 miles, Ruseres, 382 miles, Famaka, 434 miles. Beyond these are Gebel Fazo'gli, Gebel Kaba, Gebel Abii Ramla, and Gebal Beni Shanku.1. Between Khartum and the sea the great river, which is now called simply " Nile," receives but one tributary, viz., the Atbara, the "Astaboras " of classical, and the "Atbara"2 of Abyssinian writers. According to Mr. Dupuis, the river Atbara is formed by the confluence of three large streams, the Goang, the Bulwena, and the Gandwaha, a little to the south of Kallabat, on the border of Abyssinia ; other tributaries are the Salaam River,3 which enters it on the east bank, about 100 miles north of Kallabat, and the Setit River,4 which also enters it on the east bank, a little to the north of Tomato. Its tributary, the Royan, joins it four miles east of Khor Umbrega.5 The upper portion of the Setit River is called by its old Abyssinian name, "Takaze."6 A few miles north of Khashim al-Girba is the well-known Fasher Ford, where the Kallabat-Kasala road crosses the river. The character 1 See Sir W. Garstin, Egypt, No. 2 (1904) ; Gleichen, op. cit., i., p. 1 13 ff. - I.e., ?i."t"n<5. : See Pereira, Chronica de Susenyos, text, p. 204, line 2. 3 Also known as the Bahi al-Ankareb. 4 See Baker, Nile Tributaries of Abyssinia, London, 1867, pp. 136, 216, 468, 499; F. L. James, Wild Tribes of the Sudan, London, 1863, p. 156 ff. * Gleichen, op. cit., p. 101. 6 TYl H, : 365 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of the Atbara is torrential.1 The rains begin in its upper basin in May, in June the "swelling of the springs" takes place, and this is followed by the arrival of dirty red water, and by the end of this month the flood water reaches the Nile, in years of heavy rain in the form of a high wave which literallv drives the waters of the Nile over on to the western bank. The Atbara flood is at its highest in August. In September the river falls rapidly, in October it is fordable in many places, and by the end of November it is nearly dried up. The total annual discharge is estimated at 20,000,000,000 cubic metres. East of the Atbara is the Kash (Gash) River, which rises in the Abyssinian mountains, and flows north to Kasala, but a few miles to the north of this town it breaks up into channels, and disappears entirely. Further is the Baraka River, which rises in the Abyssinian mountains, and floods the country about Tdkar in the month of August. It should empty itself into the Red Sea, but it usually disappears in the desert before it reaches the coast. Between Khartum and Aswan there are on the Nile six great series of rapids, or ,k Cataracts," s and five of them are in the Sudan. The First Cataract lies between Aswan and Philae, and is abmit six and a quarter miles long. The Second Cataract is a little to the south of Haifa, and its most difficult part is about fourteen miles long. The Third Cataract is at Hannek, but between Surras and this place are the smaller cataracts of Senina, Ambikol, Tangur, 'Ukma, 'Ukasha. Dal, \Ainara, and Khebar. The Fourth Cataract is at Adramiya in the Shaikiya country, 250 miles from Hannek. The Fifth Cataract is at Wadi Al-Hamar. Between the Fourth and Fifth Cataracts are numerous small Tin Sixth Cataract lies between Shendiand Khartum about 194 miles south of Wadi al-l.lamar. and is ten miles long. On the Blue Nile there is a series of cataracts which begins at Rushes, and extends southwards for some forty miles ; and on the Bahr al-Gebel, 140 miles north of Lake Albert, is the series of cataracts which is known as the Fola, or Fiila, Rapids.* 1 S. Baker, Albert Nyansa, pp. 3 ff. ; Dupuis, special note, Ej^ypt, No. 2 (1904), p. 226. - Called by the Arabs " Shallalat,» or " Ganadal." 3 There are also the Yerbora Rapids, the Gougi Rapids, &c. 366 FOLA FALLS Here Sir William Garstin considers that a demonstration of the force and power of water is to be seen ! which is not to be witnessed in any other cataract on the Nile. The Rapids begin in two or more falls with a drop of some sixteen or twenty feet, and a total width of nearly 200 feet. Below the falls the stream rushes down a very narrow gorge, with a heavy slope, enclosed between vertical walls of rock. This resembles a gigantic mill race, over 300 feet long. " The water tears through this channel in a glassy, " green sheet with an incredible velocity " ; the width of the " gut 'r THE BAHR AL-GEBEL. FOLA RAPIDS, LOOKING UP-STREAM. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. is only about fifty feet, and in places it is less ! At the foot ot this race the river leaps into a cauldron about 160 feet long and forty feet wide, and fills it with a " boiling mass of white water, " lashed into foam. It is difficult, in words, to give even a faint " idea of this unique scene ; . . . photographs do not satisfactorily " reproduce it. They cannot show the colouring of the picture, " or the wild beauty of the scene." On each side are vertical walls of rock from twenty to thirty feet high, polished black, and covered with masses of vegetation which resemble green velvet. 1 Egypt, No. 2 (1904), p. 82. 367 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN "The inky blackness of the rocks and the variegated greens of "the foliage, contrast vividly with the seething mass of white " water, above which the spray is tossed high in the air in a " misty cloud. Above all a deep blue sky and a brilliantly clear " atmosphere add to the effect of an exceptionally lovely scene" The Inundation, or Nile-Flood, is caused, as Aristotle said, by the rains which fall during the summer in the mountains of Abyssinia and the Sudan, and which are brought down by the gnat tributaries of the river, the Bahr al-Ghazal, the Sobat, the Bahr az-Zarafa, the Blue Nile, and the Atbara or Atbara. The Sobat rises about the middle of April, the Bahr az-Zarafa about the middle of May, and the Bahr al-Ghazal begins to fill about the same time. Towards the end of the month the Blue Nile i and a little later the Atbara ; the Nile-Flood is highest in August. The White Nile continues to rise, and does not fall till October, when it does so slowly. Between Tawfikiya and Khartum the depth of the river varies from fifteen feet at low Nile to twenty- one feet in flood ; and its width varies from one and a quarter to two miles. The " green water,'' which is seen at Cairo in June, appears at Duw§m a month earlier ; its cause is said to be myriads of minute algae, which subsequently putrefy and stink. The of the arrival of the Flood at the various places down the river vary slightly each year. Sir William Garstin has calculated the river discharges as follows: — 1. The Victoria Nile. At the Ripon Falls, between 500 and 650 cubic metres per second. 2. The Bahr al-Gebel. At Wadelal, between 550 and 950 cubic metres per second. At Lad<>, between 600 and 700 cubic metres per second. The maxima are : 1,000 cubic metres per second in a low flood, and 2,000 cubic m< per second in a high one. By the time the river reaches B6r half the water has been lost, and at the entrance to Lake X<". less than half enters the lake. 3. The Bahr al-Ghazal. At Lake N6 20 to 30 cubic metres per second enter the lake during the summer. 4. The Bahr az-Zarafa. In flood this river contributed to the White Nile 80 to 160 cubic metres per second, but in summer only from 30 to 60. 368 COURSE OF THE NILE 5. TheSobat. In flood time goo to 1,000 cubic metres per second. 6. The White Nile. At Khartum the greatest discharge in flood time is about 1,700 cubic metres per second. 7. The Blue Nile. At Khartum, in a good flood, between 10,000 and 12,000 cubic metres per second. 8. The Atbara. At least 3,000 cubic metres per second. A series of calculations and measurements made in 1903 prove that the Nile north of the Atbara in flood time consists of very little more than the water which is contributed to it by the Blue CATARACT AT SEMNA AND Kl'MMA. Nile and the Atbara, in fact at this time the White Nile adds very little to these streams. During the spring and early summer, however, the water which reaches Egypt is supplied principally from Lakes Victoria and Albert, via the White Nile. It is calculated that about 1,150,000,000 cubic metres of water pass Berber in one day during an ordinary flood. The course of the Nile in the Sudan. By Article I. of the Treaty1 between the Governments of Great Britain and Egypt, the Sudan begins at the 22nd parallel of north latitude, and the course of the Nile from this point to Lake Victoria may be 1 Signed, July 10th, 1899. VOL. II. 369 Bb THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN briefly described.1 The mileage is that given by Count Gleichen, but it is understood that strict accuracy is not claimed for it. The most northerly settlement in the Sudan is on the Island of Faras, twenty miles north of Haifa, where there are remains of Egyptian, Roman, and Coptic buildings. At Haifa, formerly a thriving town, are the head-quarters of the Haifa province, and the terminus of the Sudan Railway. Since the opening of the Atbara-Red Sea Railway, the greater number of the workshops have been removed to Atbara, and the decline of the town has begun, for numbers of Greeks have left it. Here was the terminus of the railway which ran to Kerma, but as the line did not pay, and the rails, which were practically new, were wanted elsewhere, the portion of it between Kosha and Kerma has been taken up. On the west bank are the remains of a well-built Egyptian temple of the XVIIIth Dynasty. From the Rock of Abu Sir (seven miles from Haifa) a fine view is obtained of the Second Cataract, the foot of which is close by. Here the district called Batn al-I.Iagar, i.e.. the k> Stone Belly," begins, and a more desolate, dreary country can hardly be imagined. It is about 120 miles long; on the east bank are nothing but sun-blackened rocks of savage aspect, and on the west bank is an interminable waste of yellow sand. In the bright sun. and under a blue sky, the blackened and polished rocks of the river present a picturesque contrast to the yellow sand on the west bank, and the patches of bright vegetation on the islands in the stream lend a unique picturesqueness to the view. Near Ma'tuka (ten miles) are the remains of a temple of the Xllth Dynasty and those of an ancient tian town. At Sarras (thirty-three miles) the railway turns off into the rocky country of the Eastern Desert. At Gazirat al- Malik (forty miles) are the remains of an Egyptian temple of the XVIIIth Dynasty, which is built on the site of one erected by Usertsen III. of the Xllth Dynasty, and also those of a large fortress. At Semna and Kumma(43 miles), perched on the top of rocks 400 feet high, are remains of two Egyptian temples of the XVIIIth Dynasty. ; For full details, see Gleichen, op. ti/., i., pp. 23 ft". ; Garstin, Egypt% No. 2 (1904) ; and Shucair, op. tit., i., pp. 78 ff. 370 COURSE OF THE NILE At Semna, on the west bank, are also the remains, of a temple built by the Nubian king Taharqa (Tirhakah) ; the mountain beyond is Gebel Barga. The river here flows through a narrow channel, which has been eroded by its waters. The scenery is wild and grand. The Atiri, Ambikol, Tangur, and 'Ukma Rapids occur at miles 50, 57, 72 and 79 respectively. At 'Ukasha (85 miles) is another rapid. Here the railway approaches the river. At Dal (98 miles) signs of cultivation begin ; the cataract here renders navigation difficult. Near Gebel Firket (105 miles) the battle of Firket was fought on July 6th, 1896 ; near here is some cultivated land. The hills seen to the east are Gebel Idris and Gebel Hamra. Kosha (113 miles) is the head-quarters of a district, and from here southwards much cultivated land is seen, and large numbers of palms. At Ginnis (115 miles) the battle was fought on December 30th, 1885. At 'Amtira (118 miles) are the remains of a temple of Rameses II. (west bank), and those of a Meroitic temple (east bank). At Sakiyat al-'Abd (127 miles) a road starts for the Selima Oasis, fifty-seven miles distant. On the Island of Sai, near 'Abri (130 miles), are the remains of two or three Egyptian temples, a Coptic church, and a Bosnian or Mamluk fortress. Near Kueka (135 miles), on the east bank, is Kubba Idris, the tomb of a famous shekh and leader of the Murghani doctrine. Suwarda (142 miles) stands among much cultivated land, and round about are some very fine trees. On the west bank are the remains of the temple of Queen Thi, B.C. 1450, commonly called the Temple of Saddenga ; close by is Kubba Salim. Near Sulb (Gurgan Tau, 156 miles) are fine remains of a temple of Amen-hetep III., husband of Queen Thi. Between Suwarda and Sulb is Gebel Dosha, the boundary between Sukkot and Mahass. At Tinnara are the remains of a Bosnian fort. At Dulgo (191 miles) are the remains of a temple of Seti I., B.C. 1370 ; here the railway rejoined the river. Passing the Kagbar, or Khebar, Cataract (203 miles) Arduwan Island is reached at mile 212. Near Hannek (231 miles) is a series of rapids, and there are several small islands in the river. A little further on is Kubba Abu Fatma (243 miles), and opposite is the Island of Tombos, with rock inscriptions of Thothmes I. On this Island is a fortress 37* THE EGYPTIAN SUDAK built by Muhammad Wad Tunbul, king of Ark6, and here are the tombs of his ancestors. At Kerma (246 miles) was the terminus of the railway (201 miles from Haifa'. At Qaftr (248 miles) the Dervishes were defeated on September 20th, [896. Between mile 252 and mile 272 is Ark6 Island, which is well cultivated and thickly populated. Two colossal Egyptian statues lie here, and in ancient times there must been a large town on the island. From Dongola (280 miles), or Al 1'rdi. to Merawi the Nile runs through a plain, and in many 3 the soil is rich and the cultivation abundant. A few miles to the south, at Kawa. on the east hank, are the remains of a small Egyptian temple, which was discovered and partly : by Col. the Hon. J. Colborne in 1885. Near Hannag (j<)i miles) is the Fort of Wad Nimir, king of Dongola. Ashaha (296 mil the remains of some Muhammadan ) buildings. Near Sati Bashlr (304 miles) is the island whereon the Mahdi is said to have been born. A.t l.Iandak (320 miles) is a mosque, which has been built on the ruins of a Christian church, ami the ruins of several churches existed h few y About Ji miles from l.Iandak is the well of Markum, and three miles further on is the well of Aswan! : the people visit these springs in the summer, and bathe in their waters, and take hot sand baths there for an hour at a time. Those who suffer from stomach and other internal complaints derive great benefit from baths. Dongola al-' r " Old Dongola '' (351 miles), is built on a hill on the east hank : here are ruins of a fort and of a Christian church, the upper part of which has been turned into A town of considerabL -ted here at onetime, and it was the capital of the Dongola kingdom for about 600 years. The remains of a paved road leading to Merawi have recently been discovered. At Abu K 56 miles) the course of the river changes to nearly east and west. On Tankasi Island, near Dabba, iid to dwell some of the Fung people who migrated thither from Sennaar. Dabba (37] miles) was formerly a great trade centre, and Is for Omdurman and Korddfan. In the bourhood much petrified wood is found. Close by, COURSE OF THE NILE Karad, are the remains of some buildings erected by the British in 1885. In the course of the next thirty miles several islands, fertile and well cultivated, are passed. At Abfl Dom Kashabi the Nile bends and runs to the north-east. At Ambikol (413 miles) cultivation becomes general. Korti (416 miles) was the advanced base of the Gordon Relief Expedition in 1885 ; a road to Matamma via Gakdiil Wells starts here. Hannak (432 miles) was the capital of the Shaikiya Province. On an island between Hannek and Korti was born 'Ali Murghani, the son of Muhammad 'Uthman. Tankasi (441 miles) is famous for its Tuesday weekly market, to which throng merchants from Dongola, Berber, and Khartum. Close by are the ruins of Hosh al-Ibyad, an old Shaikiya town. Abu Dom Sanam and Merawi (447 miles) are well cultivated and are most picturesquely situated. Merawi is the chief town of a province, and the abode of the Governor. The British camped here in 1885, and it was occupied by the Frontier Field Force in 1896. A road leads from here to Gakdul Wells. Merawi can now be reached by train from Abu Hamed. The line was surveyed by Lieut. Newcombe, R.E., in 1904, and has its terminus at Karema. On the right bank is Gebel Barkal, 302 feet high, and at its feet are the ruins of several temples ; close by are several pyramids. On the left bank was situated the city of Napata, which as early as the XVIIIth Dynasty was the capital of the Northern kingdom of the Sudan. A few miles up-stream from Merawi is the foot of the Fourth Cataract, and from this place to Abu Hamed, 140 miles distant, the river is full of rapids which make navigation very difficult. After passing Nuri, where there are several pyramids and remains of ancient temples, there are no antiquities on either bank. Excellent itineraries for the left and right banks, by Major Slade, R.A., and Col. the Hon. M. G. Talbot, R.E., respectively, are given by Count Gleichen in his Handbook, pp. 38-43. Between Abu. Hamed and the Atbara the country on both banks of the river is uninteresting ; there is little cultivation, and even now the number of the inhabitants is not great As we advance south low ranges of sandstone hills appear, and villages and patches of cultivation become frequent on the western bank. At a little distance back from the east bank the whole country is a 373 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN howling wilderness. Between Berber and the Atbara there is on the east hank a fairly broad strip of cultivation, but now that Berber is no longer the capital of the district it is probable that the general condition of the neighbourhood will become less flourishing than formerly. The railway runs on the east bank. After leaving Abu Hamed the river is full of rocks for a few miles, and navigation is difficult, but when these are passed the water- way is clear for about 50 miles. The Fifth Cataract is found near the Wadi al-Homar, about 76 miles from Abu Hamed, and at low Nile is practically impassable. The Atbara River enters the Nile on the east bank, 151 miles from Abu Hamed, and 200 miles from Khartum. Between the Atbara and Shendi the country is uninteresting, and on each bank of the river the strip of cultivable ground is choked with thorn- growths and grass. Large patches of cultivation appear on the banks close to the river, but even now the natives find it hard to make a living. A large portion of the land went out of cultivation soon after Muhammad * Ali began to develop the slave trade, and during the rule of his successors the bulk of the population either fled and turned brigand, or remained on the land and were raptured and sold for slaves. The ruin begun by him was completed by the Mahdi and the Khalifa. About 44 miles south of the Atbara, and 3^ from the Nile, on the east bank, is the site of an ancient Meroitic city, which flourished between B.C. 300 and a.d. 200. Further to the east are the groups of pyramid-tombs under which its kings and queens and their families were buried. On or near the site of Shendi, 86 miles from the Atbara, another large Meroitic city stood, but there is no evidence to show that it was the capital of the 11 Island of Mi \ few miles to the south of Shendi, on the west bank, is Matamma. a town of the Ga'alin Arabs, 2,000 of whom were slain by the Dervish leader Mahmud in 1897 ; it is the terminus of the road across the Bayuda Desert to Korti and other places in the Dongola district. About 130 miles from the Atbara is the foot of the Sixth Cataract, commonly known as the Shabluka Cataract, which is about 10 miles long. Here the Nile Hows through a channel about 500 feet wide, which it has made for itself in the granite rocks, and in flood time the current COURSE OF THE NILE is said to run at a rate of from seven to ten miles an hour. The river is studded with rocks and reefs nearly the whole way to Wad Ramla, and the water-way is frequently blocked by small islands ; navigation here is very difficult. After Wad Ramla the cultivation increases, and every available acre on the islands all the way up to Khartum is covered with crops. Four miles north of Khartum, on the west bank, is the town of Omdurman, and passing Tuti Island the city of Khartum, which is built in the angle formed by the junction of the White and Blue Niles, is reached. Khartum is 480 miles from Merawi, 927 miles from Haifa, and 1,730 miles from Cairo, by river; the distance from Khartum to Cairo by railway and river is about 1,360 miles. The river between Khartum and Lake No is known as the " White Nile." After leaving Khartum the river banks are flat, and the country is low and treeless.1 The river is very shallow, and in some places is two miles wide, and the shelving banks make landing in boats impossible. Water-fowl and crocodiles are numerous, and in a strong wind the wide expanse of water is covered with comparatively high waves. Large crops are grown on the banks and islands as the river falls. Gebel Auli is passed on the east bank 28 miles from Khartum, and Gebel Mandara on the west bank at mile 32. At Wad al-Karel (34 miles) the river is three miles wide in flood time. At Al-Katena (55 miles) there was a settlement in the Christian period ; fragments of pottery from this place are in the Museum at Khartum. South of Salahiya (59 miles) as far as Duwem, i.e., for 66 miles, the banks are low ; on the east the plain is covered with thick brush, and a dense growth of mimosa fringes the channel line. The scenery is " monotonous and uninteresting." The cultivation is chiefly on the islands and fore-shore, which the people water with shaditfs ; the natives live in tukls. Near 'Amara (109 miles) is the range called Gebel Arashkol ; this mountain is volcanic, and its chief peak is Gebel 'Abd ad-Daim. At Ad-Duwem (125 miles), on the west bank, the river is divided by an island. The town contains 7,000 inhabitants, and is a large trading centre, with a good market. The transport service for.Al-Obed starts 1 See Garstin, Egypt, No. 2 (1904), p. 106; Gleichen, op. at., i., pp. 52 ff. ; Shucair, op. at., i., pp. 98 ff. 375 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and the Kordofan gum is brought here for shipment to Omdurman. The Governor of the White Nile Province liv< Duwem ; the Government buildings, including a hospital, are "substantial." Here there is a Nile-gauge, and the river levels are recorded daily. A road to Sennaar starts here. Five miles to the south is Hassaniya Island. Between Duwem and Kawwa (146 miles) the river is about 750 yards wide, and in flood it is double this width; at low water it is 13 feet deep. Islands are numerous, and the mud flats are very wide. At Kawwa a British Inspector resides. It possesses a gum depot, a small grain store, and a market ; it is inhabited by the Hassaniya, the Ga'alin, and the Danakla, who grow large crops on the mud- flats. The natives have much cattle, and thrive by boat-building, and the cutting of wood, which they supply to the steamers. Aba Island, usually written " Abba," is about 28 miles long ; its northern end is near Shawal (163 miles). This island is long and narrow, and thickly wooded, and is higher at the southern than at the northern end. Here the Mahdi declared his mission. and here Sir William Garstin saw the ruins of his house in 1904. The country is open and high, with scattered bushes and mimosa. Kdz Abu Guma (192 miles) is the head-quarters of a district of the same name. The telegraph line from Sennaar touches tlie White Nile here, and then proceeds southwards. The river is from 750 to 950 yards wide here. This place marks the limit of the " Sadd " vegetation on the north, and there are no swamps, properly so called. Here begins the country of tin- Negro, who takes the place of the Arab.1 At 'Abl Gadida (200 miles) is a colony of old Sudani soldiers. At Abu Z^\ (208 miles), for about 4 miles, the river spreads out to an immense width in a broad, shallow sheet. Upon its bed " fresh- water oysters " collect, and the broken shells form with the shingle a kind of ''conglomerate" almost as hard as rock, which nothing but a specially adapted dredger could remove. In years of a very low river the water here is only 17 inches deep. The papyrus is first seen here, and hippopotami begin to be plentiful. At Danko Salim [ny miles), [as ran Island, a reef of rocks " runs right across the river ./., p. 105. COURSE OF THE NILE "channel, and the only method of passing safely at low water is " to steer a course like the letter S." Masran Island is 27 miles long, and has Shilluk villages on it. Gebelen (238 miles) is marked by a sort of amphitheatre of granite hills about a mile from the river on the east bank ; the highest of the live peaks is about 330 feet high. The country on the right bank once belonged to the Dinkas, but it is now uninhabited, for the natives fled to the south to escape the slave-raiders. For the next 60 miles the scenery is " dreary and monotonous. A fringe of thick forest marks the higher land. Between this KASHODA (K01)6k). [From Sir W. Carotin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. the river winds through reedy islands bordered by the eternal belt of swamp" At Gebelen the serut1 fly first makes its appearance ; it is not poisonous, but is very troublesome. At Hellet ar-Renk (298 miles) the forest is very thick ; a British Inspector lives here. Gebel Ahmad Aghfi (353 miles) is named after Ahmad Agha 'Antabli, a former governor of the district. This granite hill is about 340 feet high, is hog-backed in shape, and is about two miles east of the river. From this place to Kaka (391 miles), the country is almost uninhabited ; in the river are several islands. At Old Kaka (404 miles) was a wooding 1 On the effects of the bite of this pest, see Balfour, Second Report of the Wellcome Research Laboratories, p. 32. (Published by the Education Depart- ment, Khartum, 1906.) 377 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN station. Between KAkA and Fashoda a succession of grass islands is met with. On the west bank is a double line of Shilluk villages, the one on the edge of the swamp, and the other further inland. On the same side of the river are several " Khdrs." To land in this reach is impossible, for the marsh is very reedy and deep, and nothing but a hippopotamus can force its way through it. At Fashoda (Kodok, 459 miles) are the head-quarters of the province, with telegraph station, Government buildings, &c. Position 90 53' long., and 320 1' latitude. Major Marchand occupied it in June, 1898, and evacuated it in December of the same year. It was formerly an important trade centre. The station is on a small peninsula which juts out into the river, and on three of its sides is a deep swamp. It has an evil reputation for malarial fever. The climate is steamy and damp, and mosquitoes abound. In March the temperature ranges from 980 to 105° in the shade. At Lul (477 miles) is the Austrian Mission station. From this point onwards the scenery is very dreary. The west hank is lined with Shilluk villages, each of which is surrounded by groups of Dult'b palms [Borassus /Etkiopicus). The serut fly drives the natives into the interior during the rainy season ; there arc no tires except palms to be seen, hut hippopotami abound in the grass islands in the river. Tawfiklya (511 miles), on the east bank, is Sir Samuel Baker's old station, and stands on fairly high ground. The place is very unhealthy, and the white ants erious nuisam The Sobal River joins the White Nile at mile 516 : the country is flat and open. Near the junction, on the left hank of the Sobat. is the old fort, which was abandoned when Tawtikiya was occupied. On the north bank of the Sobat, seven miles from its mouth. i> a station of the American Protestant Mission. Tonga Island begins at mile 521. The klmr which bounds it on the left is the so-called River Lolli, or Fanakama ; according to Perthes's map its source is in Dar Nuba, hut Sir William Garstin doubts its being a river at all. It was partially explored by Marno in 1880 and by Col. Sparkes in [899. For the next twenty-five miles the scenery is very the banks are low, and beyond the swamps on each 1 the river are v;ist grass plains. There is not a tree on the 378 COURSE OF THE NILE left bank, and the line of the horizon is only broken by the large ant-hills which dot the plain. The Bahr az-Zarafa enters the Nile at mile 547, at mile 600 is Maya Signora,1 and there is nothing to be seen but swamps and a treeless plain. The water surface is covered with masses of floating " Sadd." Twelve miles further on Lake No is reached and the White Nile ends. The next portion of the Nile, which extends from Lake No to Lake Albert, is called the " Bahr al-Gebel," i.e., " Mountain River," or the " Upper Nile." The Upper Nile starts from the extreme eastern end of Lake No, and the region of the " Sadd " is here entered. " Sadd," a word derived from the Arabic word a-, meaning a "barrier" or "obstacle," is the name given to the barrier of floating weed which formerly blocked the navigation of the river between Shambi and Lake No, i.e., for a distance of about 250 miles." The "Sadd" is formed chiefly of papyrus and the reed called umm sitf, i.e., "mother of wool;" the former grows to a height of from 17 to 20 feet, and the latter from 3 to 4 feet. These two, with the earth adhering to their roots, form the real obstruction. Other swimming plants assist, e.g., the Azolla, the Utricularia, the Otellia, and the Ambatch. Masses of these plants are broken from their places on the edges of the lagoons near the river by the wind during storms, and drift about, and in the rainy season when the swamps are full they find their way into the channel of the river. They are soon stopped by some bend in the river, and the channel is blocked. The masses of reed which follow are sucked by the current under the obstacle, and eventually " the whole becomes wedged into one solid block, " composed partly of earth, and partly of stalks and roots of " papyrus and reed, broken up by the extreme compression " into an inextricable tangle. So great is the pressure applied by "the water that the surface of the block is often forced several " metres above the water level." The thickness of the mass varies from 3 feet 6 inches to 23 feet ! All through the " Sadd " region the scenery is monotonous to a degree. Swamps and lagoons extend for miles on each side of 1 The Signora was Miss Tinne ; see above, p. 313. 2 See Garstin, Egypt, No. 5 (1899); Egypt, No. 2 (1901) ; and Egypt, No. 2 (1904) ; and Gleichen, op. cit., Appendix B., p. 299. 379 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN the river, and the marshes are covered with a dense growth of water-reeds, including the papyrus. Throughout this whole region, more especially between Bor and Lake No, it is extremely rare to see any sign of human life.1 Even the hippopotami appear to shun these swamps. There are no birds except a few night herons. Fish and crocodiles abound, and at sun-down the mosquitoes appear in millions. " The whole region has an aspect " <>f desolation beyond the power of words to describe. It must 11 be seen to be understood."' - Well may Nero's centurions have reported unfavourably on the country as a place for Roman con- quests ! At I.lellet an-Nuer, or Aliab Dok, 139 miles from Lake X<>, on the west bank, is " Captain Gage's channel." It was discovered by Captain Gage, who followed its course for 40 miles, but was then stopped by the " Sadd." The Shambi station, or Ghaba Shambi (256 miles) is on the west bank of the Shambi Lagoon, about i\ miles from the river, in lat. y° 6' 12" north. It is a dreary-looking spot, but is nevertheless the chief Nile post of the Bahr al-Ghazal Province, and has a garrison of 25 men.* Near Abu Kuka (293 miles) the papyrus swamps cease, the western forest approaches the river, and the banks are dry. The village is invisible from the river. At Kanisa (304 miles), i.e., " the church." a station of the Austrian Mission was placed; it was abandoned in 1864 on unt of the deadly effect of the climate on the Fathers. Mere the forest is very thick. Between Kanisa and Lake Powendael ( ; 44 miles) the country is desolate-looking and monotonous. This lake contains many small islands and is full of hippo- 'iii. \ miles) is a collection of Dinka villages, which are well kept, neat, and clean. The huts are circular in shape, are plastered with mud. and have conical thatched roofs. Each has ;i small door, through which the inhabitants crawl. The people 'jGarstin, Egypt% No. 2 1904), p. 98. -' The positions of the nineteen Blocks into which Major 1'eake di\idecl the '• Sadd" in this region are shown in Sir W. Garstin's map {Egypt, No. 2 (1901), plates 2 and 3), and their distances from Lake No are given by Count Gleichen, /., p. 73. leich'n, of>. cit.y \ ■Mi ^^L ^^H -if WtKFjL^T \mwm\m\\r^mm*mmt. JmW Jmmkf^l &v p iff .^Br y ^* »J . WOMAN GRINDING DHURRA AT KIRO IN THE LADO ENCLAVE. [From a photograph by Miss Hilda Burrows. COURSE OF THE NILE seem to be comfortable and contented, and they have large herds of cattle. x\t Bor the character of the marshes changes, and grasses take the place of papyrus and ambatch The Dem, or camp, of the Dervish leader Arabi Dafa'a Allah, is visible at mile 390. A few miles further south the scenery much resembles that of the Blue Nile; the forest is close to the river, the banks are high, and there is a profusion of creepers and undergrowth. About mile 410 the Bari tukls take the place of the Dinka THE BAHR AL-GEBEL — RIVER BANK AT BOR. [From Sir W. G.irstin's Rcfiirt, by per mission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. huts, and the difference is at once visible. Further on the west bank is inhabited by the Aliab tribe, a cross between the Baris and Dinkas. Near the site of the Anglo-Egyptian station of Kiro (456 miles) the river scenery is tine, and " luxuriant tropical " vegetation abounds. Giant Euphorbia area marked feature of " the forest. The whole of the banks and most of the trees are " covered with a velvety-looking mass of creepers. A bluff, three "to four metres high, projects into the stream. . . . The face of " this cliff is perforated by myriads of holes made by a very beauti- " ful and tiny species of bee-eater. These birds have rose-coloured • 381 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN " wings, with bronze-coloured bodies. They add much to the •• beauty of a lovely scene." ' Kim (the Belgian station). 460 miles from Lake N6, is the most northerly station of the " Lad<> Enclave; " it stands on the bank in lat. 5° u' or 50 13' north. It is a picturesque-looking place, surrounded by forest, in which there are some fine 1 The bank, which is from 17 to 20 feet high, suffers from erosion, and pieces of it are frequently falling into the river. The huts are nil'. i;ahr ai lDO. Sir \Y. < larstin's Rei well laid out and neatly built. The cantonment is surrounded by aw- ickade, in which Krupp guns are mounted. The commandant's house is a good one. and has a thatched roof and a deep verandah. On an island in the river vegetables and paw* paw 1 grown, otherwise there appears t<> be no cultivation. When Sir William Garstin visited Klrd it p I a small mer, the Van Kerckhoven, called after the leader of the Congo Expedition in [889, and several steel sailing boats. The steamer was brought from the west coast in sections. The 1 Garstin, Egypt^ No. 2 (1904), y. § I ■ i — > COURSE OF THE NILE garrison is recruited from the negro tribes round about. In two years the Belgians lost nine Europeans and 300 natives from fever. In 1905 some difficulty arose between Great Britain and the Congo Free State with respect to the territory on the Upper Nile. On May 8tb, 1906, "an arrangement was signed by Sir Edward " Grey and Baron van Eetvelde, at Brussels, which stipulates that " the lease of 1894 of the Bahr-el-Ghazal shall be cancelled except " so far as regards the Lado enclave, which remains leased to King "Leopold during his reign under the present conditions. The THE BAHR AL-GEBEL. "EARTHQUAKE HILL " (GEREL REGGAF). [From Sir \V. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. arrangement further provides for the construction of a railway from Lado to the Congo States frontier, the interest being guaranteed by the Egyptian Treasury ; the establishment of a commercial port at the railway terminus ; free navigation on the Upper Nile for Congo and Belgian steamers ; and free transit of passengers and merchandise over the territories of the Egyptian Sudan. Finally it is agreed that any differences as to the delimitation of the frontier which may henceforth arise between Great Britain and the Congo State shall be submitted to the Hague Tribunal" {Times, May 9, 1906). 383 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Mongalla (474 miles) is the most southerly post of the Sud&n Government on the Nile; it stands on the east bank, and is garrisoned by two companies. There Is a Nile-gauge here. The I has been cleared away, and huts for the men and houses for the officials have been built. Two miles further on is Shekh Lado's bouse. The natives of this part of the country belong to the Bari tribe, but they are few in number. Lado (495 miles the west bank of the river, in hit. 5 1' 33" north, was at one time the capital of the Equatorial Provinces of Egypt, and here Emin Pasha lived and governed. The houses are built of brick, and have conical thatched roofs; some of them rest on brick arches, which permit the air to pass beneath them. It is a desolate- looking spot, surrounded by a flat plain covered with bush. It is swampy in places. Food for the troops has to be brought from a long dist:: South of Lad6 the river winds its way between vast marshes, the banks are low, and the area of the country flooded is very P ipyr . and ambatch abound. There are numerous islands and channels in the river. 504 miles) is the north frontii mda Protectorate ; it is on the east bank, and Gordon placed it in lat. 4 51 rth, andl< LSt. The station stands on a high cliff from 18 to 20 feet above the water. Here were the church and houses of the Austrian Mission, but these have now disappeared, and the erosion caused by the* river threatens t< away the whole cliff. The huts for the garrison are built of bamboo and straw, and the house of the Collector and his staff is of brick, with a thatched roof. Here Sir Samuel Baker founded \n " Ismailiya," with a garrison of 1,500 men ; the remains of his lines are still to be seen, and a description of them is published by Count Gleichen in his Handbook (i., p. About eight miles above Gondokoro is Gebel Regg&f, i.e., " Earthquake Hill ; " it stands on the west bank, not far from the river, and is about 350 feet high. This hill is a perfect cone, and its name suggests that it was a volcano.1 To the north of the hill is the Belgian station of Reggaf, with its neat houses and 1 The Arabic root <-*», m the earth. i jj^R > • i «" r * ,1 ? 1 v, 1 • VI 'i Tmw-* «, V 4< i4i J !*#». : . k -^"mL f* 1 1 * . ; •..■ "*•.. / f mm i ■ J ^^K^^ GONDOKORO. BY THE BANK IS A "DUG-OUT" CANOE. [From a photograph by Miss Hilda Burrows. COURSE OF THE NILE thatched roofs and verandahs.1 There are no trees, and the country all round is open and bare of bush. Four miles up-stream the Kit River enters the Nile on the east bank; it rises in the Lumoga Mountains in lat. 30 53' north. About twenty-two miles from Gondokoro is Fort Berkeley, a collection of straw huts. Here the river is divided into three channels. Here is the north end of the Bedden Rapids. About mile 45 the Nile flows between two granite hills, each nearly 400 feet high. On the slopes of the western hill was the old fort of Kiri. Between THE MURCHISON FALLS ON THE' VICTORIA NILE. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. The original photograph is by G. Butcher, Esq. miles 50 and 62 are the Gougi Rapids, and a little further on are the Yerbora Rapids. Near the northern end of these was Emin Pasha's fort Muggi. At mile 75 the Umi enters the Nile on the east bank ; it is the boundary between the countries of Madi and Bari. Five miles on, on the west bank, is Emin's fort of Labori. At mile 95 the north end of Gebel Kurdu is seen on the west bank : this range is fully ten miles long, and some of its peaks are 350 feet high. 1 Garstin, Egypt, No. 2 (1904), P- 9°- VOL. II. 385 C C THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN About mile ioo the Asua, or Assua, River joins the Nile on the east bank. The Asua rises in lat. 2 20' north, in the Suk Mountains, and is about 170 miles long. The scenery here is beautiful. Between this place and Nimuli are the Fola Rapids. which have been already described. On the left bank are the Kuku Mountains. At Nimuli (116 miles) is a garrison of two companies of Sudani soldiers, each under a British officer. The country IS generally high and Hat. The military station is about half a mile from the river, and behind it to the north-east are the Arju hills. Here the river runs between high banks, and in a series of rapids. About mile i_m, on the west bank, is the Belgian station of Duiili, lat. 3 34' 35" north, and Ion-. east. Here is a collection of thatched houses within an enclosure. The armament consists of Krupp guns. Dufili is a dreary spot, is very unhealthy, and black-water fever is -aid to be prevalent. At mile 193, and 40 miles from Lake Albert, is Wadclai, which is situated on a rounded hill on the east bank. An English collector and a medical officer are stationed here, and their houses and the tal are on the top of the hill. It is an unhealthy and ! stricken place. From the hill fine views may be obtained, and to the south the Rubi Lake and the Albert N van/a mountains are visible. On the east the country is of a "park-like char, "with grassy glades, alternating with open 1 m the w< a bush-covered plain. The channel of the Nile is only about 450 vide here, and the river rushes along with a high velocity I >ufill and MagungO the rivers Achwa and Tangi join the Nile on the east bank. About mile 233 Magungo is reached, and the I'ahr al-Gebel, or Upper Nile, may for all practical purr* tal to begin. Magungo is about 747 miles from Lake I miles bom Khartum. Between Lake Albert and Lake Victoria the river is known as the " Victoria Nile.*' or the " Somerset River," and this section of it is about 255 miles long. The scenery for the first fifteen miles i> in place- very lovely. About mile 23 is the villa i o, where formerly caravan S crossed the river by a i A little above it are the Murchison Falls, and a mile or two on is the Island m. About mile 38 an- the Karuma Falls, and at mi. . which -tands 1,060 111 Kukn hills. COURSE OF THE NILE above the sea. This village is a large one ; opposite to it the Lenga River enters the Nile. Near Mruli, mile 116, lat. i° 39' north, and on the right bank of the Kafu River, was Gordon's Fort. The Kafu rises in lat. i° north, and is about seventy- five miles long ; its tributaries are the Dubengi, the Lugogo, and the Maanja. At mile 124 Lake Choga is reached, and the river flows through it for more than fifty miles, on the west side. This lake is situated between lat. i° and 2° north, and long. 320 15' and 330 30' east ; it is joined at its south-east end by the Gogonio and Sensiwa Rivers. At mile 180 the Choga Lake is left. At mile 205 is Kakoji, and between this village and the Owen Falls at mile 243 there are falls and rapids all the way. About five miles further on are the Ripon Falls, over which the Nile flows out of Lake Victoria. As the Victoria Nile is about 250 miles long, and the Upper Nile is 747 miles long, and the White Nile 612 miles long, and the Nile between Khartum and Cairo is about 1730 miles long, it is clear that the Ripon Falls are 3>339 miles from Cairo. If to this we add 130 miles for the length of one of the two great arms of the Nile from Cairo to the sea, the length of the Nile from the point where it leaves Lake Victoria to the sea is about 3,469 miles. Those who regard the Kagera River, which enters Lake Victoria at its southern end, as the true source of the Nile, add to these figures the length of Lake Victoria, 250 miles, and the length of the Kagera River, including that of one of its tributaries, the Akanyaru, which rises in lat. 2° 55' south, and then say that the Nile is 4,000 miles long. Sir William Garstin, however, does not regard the Kagera as the source of the Nile, but Lake Victoria itself; we must there- fore consider the length of the Nile to be not 4,000 miles, but about 3,469 miles. Since the above paragraphs were written the Survey Depart- ment of Egypt has published a masterly treatise on the Nile, entitled The Physiography of the River Nile and its Basin, by Captain H. G. Lyons, R.E., the Director-General of the Survey 'Department. In this work the Nile Basin is discussed as a whole, and the general lines of its geology, climate, and hydro- graphy, which together comprise its physiography, are treated scientifically for the first time. Throughout the volume are 387 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN given many maps, plans, tables, &c, which illustrate and explain the letterpress of the various sections, and all the in- formation given embraces the most recent results obtained by Captain Lyons and his staff, and by private investigators and travellers. Captain Lyons shows clearly how important it is that the Nile should be treated from the geographical as well as from the utilitarian point of view, and he is obviously correct in his conclusion that the study of the Nile geography is of the greatest value for all who are engaged in practical irrigation work. Want of space prevents our summarizing here many of the results given in this valuable supplement to Sir William Garstin's famous Report, but the following facts and figures are of general interest, and will be useful to many. The area of the Nile Basin is about 2,900,000 square kilometres. The areas of Catchment Basins are : — KILOS. SQUARE MILES. Lake Victoria . . . . Lakes Albert and Albert Edward and Semliki River Victoria Nile .... Bafrr al-Gebel and Bahr al-Zarafa B-ihr al-Ghazfil Sobat River White Nile Blue Nile . Atbara Nile . 238,900 925243 54,100 20,889 75,600 29,190 190700 73>632 552,100 213,175 244,900 94556o 353,550 136,492 331,500 u/,99& 220,700 85,216 605,600 1,832 Nile ... ... 2,867,650 1,107,227 Table of Distances on the River Nile. pla< distance Victoria Nile — miles. KROM Ripon Falls, Mil Ripon Falls Kakoji Mruli Foweira . Murchison Falls Albert Lake 40 40 ,s4 I 24 47 170 48 218 24 388 242 NILE DISTANCES PLACE. Bahr el-Jebel — Bahr el-Jebel entrance Wadelai . Nimule Asua River Fort Berkeley Gondokoro Lado Mongalla . Bor . Kenisa Ghaba Shambe Hellet Nuer White Nile — Lake No . Taufikia . Dueim Khartoum . Nile — . Shendi Atbara River Berber Abu Hamed Merowe Dongola . Wadi Haifa Aswan Luxor Qena Girga Assiut Cairo Delta Barrage Rosetta mouth Total length of Nile FROM DISTANCE. Ripon Falls MILES. MILES. 2 244 40 283 94 378 13 391 78 469 20 489 7 496 18 515 83 598 73 670 50 720 112 833 129 962 82 1,044 39i 1,435 124 1,560 116 1,675 86 1,762 25 1,786 129 1,916 149 2,065 169 2,234 277 2,510 214 2,725 136 2,861 40 2,901 77 2,978 88 3,065 247 3,3i2 14 3,326 HI 3,473 473 miles. 389 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN II. The Country of the Egyptian Sudan. The Egyptian Sudan is bounded on the north by the 22nd parallel of latitude, on the south by the Lfido Enclave and by Uganda, which extends to the 5th parallel of north latitude, on the east by the Red Sea, Eritrea, and Abyssinia, and on the west by the French Congo and Wadai. The Lado Enclave is leased to H.M. Leopold II., King of the Belgians.1 The area of the Egyptian Sudan is generally estimated at 1,000,000 square miles. The population at the present time is said to be 2,000,000, but this estimate is a very general one. Before the Dervish rule, i.e., about 1880, Sir Reginald Wingate believes the population to have been about 8,525,000, but between that period and the year 1899 3,451,000 persons are said to have died of disease, and 3,203,000 to have been killed in external or internal war, and in 190 ; he estimated the population to be 1,875,500 persons.2 The Dervish policy was to wipe out the tribes which refused to swear allegiance to Mahdiism, and in this way whole districts were depopulated. Thus, prior to 1882, the district comprising the banks of the Rahad and Dinder Rivers contained upwards of 800 villages : in 1901 not a village remained there. Small-pox alone decimated the population, and wholesale butcheries like that of the BaUahin, which Slatin PAshA describes, and like that of the Ga'alin at Matamma, account for the disappearance of thousands of men. The principal Rivers of the Sudan have already been enumerated in the preceding section on the Niles. On these the very life of Egypt and the Sttdan depends, and the manner in which Nature provides the Valley of the Nik; with water during the winter and summer is marvellous. The White Nile collects the waters of the Upper Nil'.', Hahr al-Gha/Al, l>ahr az-Zarfifa, and the Sobat, and thus produces a regular supply the whole year round. The Blue Nile and the Atbara collect the waters which rush down from the Abyssinian mountains as the result of the summer rains, and pour them into the Nile in such quantities that Mile Flood, or Inundation, is produced. They bring with them the scourings of forests and an enormous mass of mud, which has after several thousands of years formed the cultivable 1 The text of the treaty is given by Count Gleichen, Handbook, ii., p. 286. ypt, No. 1 (1904), p. 79. 30O DESERTS AND OASES land on the river banks between Khartum and the Mediterranean Sea. The Nubian Desert. On the east of the Nile the country between the river and the Red Sea so far south as the Atbara is practically a bare and stony desert. There are, however, many places in it where rain collects and permits the tribes to produce limited crops. From the Atbara south there is a good deal of cultivation, and many districts are very fertile. This is due to the water which falls as rain, and to the rivers which rise in the mountains which lie in Abyssinian territory, beyond the eastern frontier of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. On the west of the Nile the Sudan includes the southern part of the Libyan Desert and the Bayuda Desert. In places these deserts are seamed by ranges of low hills, which sometimes have peaks of considerable height, but the highest mountains in the Sudan are those of Gebel Marra, which lie on the 13th parallel of north latitude, to the south-v/est of Al-Fasher, in Dar Fur. Nearer to the White Nile are the Nuba Mountains, among which may be mentioned Gebel Abu Sinun, Gebel Dego, Gebel Kon, Gebel Abu Dom, Gebel Tebun, Gebel Kudr, Gebel Kadero, Gebel Takala, Gebel Gadir, Gebel Gurun, Gebel Morung, Gebel Werna, Gebel Tekem, &c. In the western desert are a few Oases, e.g., 1. the Oasis of Selima, which lies on the Arba'in Road, about 78 miles south of the Oasis of Shabb, 55 miles west of Sakiet al-'Abd, and 120 miles south-west of Haifa. It was visited by Mr. James Currie, Director of the Gordon College, in 1901, who examined the ancient remains there, and by Captain H. Hodgson in February, 1903, who estimated that there were 2,000 date trees there.1 2. The Oasis of Tundubi, 171 miles from Dongola.2 3. The Oasis of Lagia Kabir, 166 miles from Dongola.3 4. The Oasis of Bir Sultan, 283 miles from Dongola.4 Here natron is found in a seam of from half an inch to two inches thick. Horns of the oryx and addax are found here in large numbers, and Captain Hodgson assumes that from time immemorial these were the tools which the natives employed in digging out the natron. 5. The 1 Gleichen, op. cit., vol. i., p. 203. 2 Ibid., vol. ii., p. 170. 3 Ibid., vol. ii., p. 168. 4 Ibid., p. 171. 391 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Oasis of Tura. This oasis is, according to Count Gleichen, situated about 150 miles south of the Oasis of Lagia. These and the other small oases have formed the chief factor in determining the routes of caravans across the desert, and it is tolerably safe to assume that travellers in all ages have journeyed by the same main routes because of the water and shade which the oases afforded. In a few places in the desert pools of water or Wills exist ; some of them have been formed in the first instance by Nature, and others by artificial means. The best known wells are those of Uhmir, Unkat, Tarafawl, and Nugim, between Aswan and Berber; the Wells of Murrat, between Abfi Hamad and Korosko; the Wells of Handub, Awtaw, Hambuk, Dassa- bal, Haratarl, Kukreb, Aryab, and Albak, between Sawakin and Berber; the Wells of Magh&gha, Gakdul, and Abfi Tleh, between Korti and Matamma; the Seventy Wells in the Bayuda Desert, between Ambikdl and the Sixth Cataract; the Wells of Gabra, about 100 in number, between Dabba and Omdurman : the Wells of Kagmar Safiya, Zaba'l, Shutter, and Mahtul, between ()he(l and Dabba; and the Wells of Umm Badr and 4Ain Ham id, en Fasher and Dongola.1 1 See Shucair, op. dt.y L, pp. 22, 23 ; and Gleichen, Op. (it., Lndcx • Wells." PROVINCES OF THE SUDAN For administrative purposes the Egyptian Sudan is divided into Eight First Class Provinces and Five Second Class ; each Province has a chief town, and is divided into a number of Districts, as follows : — First Class Provinces.1 i. Khartum Province.2 Its chief town is Khartum, and its Districts are Khartum, Omdurman, and Wad Ramla. The town of Khartum was founded between the years 1820 and 1824 by the THE PALACE AT KHARTUM. [From a photograph by R. Tiirstig, Esq. sons of Muhammad 'All, and it stands on the angle of land between the junction of the White and Blue Niles, and nearly at the end of the left bank of the Blue Nile ; it is 1,253 feet above the Mediterranean. The obvious meaning of the name, as I pointed out years ago, is the "trunk of an elephant," and the shape of the land near probably suggested the name " Khartum " to the Arabs who first applied it to the town ; but, on the other hand, 1 For the old arrangement of provinces, see Shucair, op. tit., i., pp. 69-72. 2 For the boundaries of the provinces, see Gleichen, op. tit., i., pp. 335 ff., and for the list of the tribes which inhabit them, see pages 273 ff., and 322 ff. 393 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN " Khartum " may be the Arabic translation of an older name meaning the same thing, just as " Elephantine," the name which the Greeks gave to the island and town of Aswan, is a translation of its ancient Egyptian name "Abu." If the name Khartum means " elephant's trunk,"1 the correct transliteration is " Khurtum " and not " Khartum." The town of Khartum which has sprung up underthe rule of the British is built on the site of Muhammad ' All's town, and this in its turn stood on the site of an older settlement ; it is certain that a town existed here when the kingdom of Soba flourished, and we may assume that one always stood here. Khartum is the capital of the Egyptian Sudan, and the seat of the Government. It is connected by a chain ferry with Halfaya, or Khartum North, and with Omdurman by steamers which run at regular intervals. A little to the west of the railway terminus, on the opposite bank, is the Palace, built by Lord Kitchener on the site of the old Government Palace ; to the south of its fine garden is a statue of General Gordon, and in the garden itself is a large stone Ram of Amen which was brought from the ruins of Soba, about 12 miles up the Blue Nile, on the east bank. Close by are the War Office and other Government buildings, the Post and Telegraph Office, the Office of Works, the British Barracks, and at the west end of the town arc the Zoological Garcl« istwards arc Slatin lVislnVs house, the Sudan Club, the Egyptian Officers' Mess, &c, and further up the river on the same bank is the Gordon College. A large mosque has been built in the south-western quarter of the town, the foundation stone of which was laid on September 17th, 1900. The Copts are building a church, and it is to be hoped that the British will soon build a church which for size and dignity shall be a worthy symbol of the Christian religion, and of the dominant power in the land. The normal garrison consists of one battalion of British Infantry, three battalions of Infantry of the Egyptian Army, and forces of Iry and Artillery.- In rebuilding the town the British have been careful to provide for the construction of wide avenues, planted >. ed B. de Mi-ynard and P. de Courteille, toni. ii., p. 21, line 7. It is possible that the allusion is to the tusks of the elephant, for ry»> also means the tushes of a boar or the long teeth of any animal. e (ileichen, op. a'/., i.. pp. 3 and 49. It is understood that the garrison is to be increa A WOMAN DRAWING WATER AT OMDURMAN. [From a photograph by Miss Hilda Burrows. OMDURMAN with trees, and all houses and other buildings have been erected on plans which have been approved by the authorities. The hottest months of the year are April, May, and June, and the cool and pleasant season begins about November 15th, and ends early in March. The population at the present time is nearly 10,000, but it is increasing rapidly, and in a few years will be very considerable. The District of Omdurman, more correctly " Umm Darman," lies on the west bank of the Nile, about five miles from Khartum. It takes its name from a little hamlet which stood just above the sandy bank of the river to the south end of the modern town of THE MOSQUE AT KHARTUM. [From a photograph by R. Tiirstig, Esq. Omdurman, and which was frequented by Arab merchants, who arranged their wares there before they crossed over to Khartum. This hamlet existed for a considerable number of years, and is said by some to have been called " Omdurman," i.e., " mother of dannan;' because a thicket of darmdn trees stood behind it;1 if this be so, the trees must have been cut down by the inhabitants for firewood. Omdurman was occupied by the Mahdi on January 5th, 1885, and he lived there with all his followers for a few months afterwards. After his death the Khalifa 'Abd-Allah built a great Kubba over his tomb, and made Omdurman the 1 On the other hand " Umm Darman " is a name given by the Arabs to the hedgehog. 395 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN capital, giving it the name " Bak'a al-Mahdi," i.e., the " Province of the Mahdi." Then he allowed his followers to build houses for themselves, and eventually Omdurman became a town six miles long, and nearly three wide, and containing nearly 400,000 inhabitants. The Khalifa then built a house of two storeys for him- self close to the Mahdi's tomb, and also a large bazaar, wherein all kinds of Egyptian, Indian, and Yaman work could be brought. His so-called mosque, or " hSsa,'1 was merely a large rectangular piece of land surrounded by a wall built of red, i.e., burnt, bricks ; it was 460 yards long, and 350 yards wide, and had four doors. He set apart in the town a place which was called " Bet al-Amana," i.e., house of safe-keeping, or store-house, and he built the prison, of which such terrible stories are told in Slatin Pasha's Fire and Sword, and Ohrwalder's Ten Years' Captivity. The Khalifa's sanitary arrangements were very primitive, and he allowed the people to fill the town with cess-pits, which Count Gleichen thinks were responsible for the disease of cerebro-spinal meningitis that was at one time so common in the town. The population is now about 46,000, and the garrison consists of two battalions of Infantry, and they have two Maxims. 1. Sennaar Province. The chief town is Sanga, and its six Districts are Sennaar, Sanga, Abu Na'ama, Binder (Abu Hashim), Ruseres, and Par Fung. Sanga was founded by 'Abd-AUah wad al- Hasan about nineteen years ago. It stands on the left bank of Blue Nile, and is about 266 mile? from Khartum. Sennaar was the capital of the Fung dynasty of kings, who flourished from the beginning of the fifteenth to the beginning of the nineteenth century. Its position as a trade centre has been taken by Wad Madani, which has a population of 14,000, and stands on the left bank of the Nile, [23 miles from Khartum. Wad Madani was founded by a religious teacher called Madani, about a.d. 1800. The capital of the district of Dot Fung was formerly Gule, but it is now*Keili, where the "Mek,"or local chief, resides. Its inhabitants, the Ingassar\a, use boomerangs in hunting wild animals, and they have many curious and primitive customs. Their country is not well known. 3. Kokdoi an PROVINCE. The chief town of Kordofan is Al- Obed, and its eight Districts are Ob&d, Bara, Khurshi (Umm 396 PROVINCES OF THE SUDAN Damm), Tayyara, Nahud, Tandik, Dilling, and Talodi. This province lies between the White Nile and the eastern boundary of Dar Fur, and in its northern part the tribes which breed camels live. In the south are the Nuba hills, and " some of the views of the "hills looking over masses of forest are really beautiful" (Gleichen, i- ^Z)- The elephant, giraffe, and antelope abound, the trees are filled with birds and monkeys, and snakes are said to be common. Dotted over the country are several mountains, or hills, and the province contains four principal lakes. The inhabitants obtain their water from rain, from the lakes and smaller pools of water, and from the famous tabaldi trees. These trees are naturally hollow, and vary in diameter from 10 to 25 feet, and the portion in which the water is stored — some are filled by the rain running into them along the branches, and others artificially — is often 20 feet high. The chief products of the province are gum, cattle, and ivory. When the British occupied the country in 1898 the whole region was found to have been laid waste by the Khalifa, and of some of the most important towns it was difficult even to trace the ruins ! " Everywhere the destruction was wanton and complete." The only inhabitants who defied the Mahdiists successfully were the Nubas, who retreated to their hills, and were able to defend their villages with walls. The inhabitants are Nubas and Arabs, and among the latter are the camel-breeders and the cattle-breeders, i.e., the Bakkara, who are undoubtedly the descendants of the terrible " Menti " (" Cattle-men ") of the Egyptian inscriptions. Al-Ob£d, or Al-Ubayyad, the capital of the Province, is in lat. 130 11' north and long. 300 14' east, and Count Gleichen estimates that it contains about 10,000 people. It is 268 miles from Khartum, to which town its gum is carried via Duwem on the White Nile by a regular transport service. Al- Obed was besieged by the Mahdi for six months, and fell on January 17th, 1883. Nahud, the chief town of a District of this name, lies 165 miles to the west of Al-Obed, and is on the great trade route from Dar Fur, the eastern boundary of which forms the western boundary of Kordofan. Dar Fur is one of a line of ancient kingdoms running across Africa, which, according to Sir Reginald Wingate,1 may be thus 1 Mahdiismy p. 8. 397 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN enumerated : Senegambia, Bambara. Massina, Gando, Sokoto, Bornu, Bagirmi, Waddai, DAr Fur. Sennaar, and Abyssinia. A line of Sultans reigned over Dar Fur from the early part of the fifteenth to the middle of the nineteenth century, several of them, apparently, being of Arab origin, and their territory extended so far to the east as the Atbara River. About 1740, however, the Fung kings, whose capital was at Sennaar, occupied all the coun- try between the Blue and White Niles, and defeated the people of Dar Fur in several engagements. Some 25 years later the Fungs crossed the White Nile and seized the province of Kordofan, but they only held it for a few years, and eventually they were driven back across the river. At the close of the eighteenth century Dar Fur was visited by Mr. W. G. Browne, one of whose objects was to travel southwards to discover the true source of the Nile, for lit' was convinced that the Blue Nile. whose source Bruce had discovered, was not the true Nile. Mr. Browne lived in Dar Fur for nearly three years (1792-1795), and his shrewd observations on the manners and customs of the people are singularly instructive and interesting.1 Soon after 1820 Dar Fur was conquered by Muhammad Bey Defterdar, the son-in-law of Muhammad 'AH. whose infamous cruelties have been described by Mr. Petherick. In 1874 Dar Fur itself was conquered by Xubi'-r Pfisha <>n behalf of the Khedive of Egypt, and was annexed to Egypt. The limits of the present province are given by Gleichen (i. 184) as lat. io° and 160 north, and long. 22 and 27° 30' east, and its ruler is the Sultan 'Ali Dinar, who pays an annual tribute to the Sudan Government.. The capital of Dar Fur is AL-FiSHER, which took the place of " Cobbe,'1 as Mr. Browne writes the name, at the end of tin1 seventeenth century. It is 388 miles from Obed, and 650 miles from Khartum. The province produces dJiurra, millet, cotton, onions, simsim (sesame), cucumbers, pumpkins, &c, and ttives occupy themselves with the breeding of camels, horses, cattle, sheep, goats. &c, Salt is made at certain places, and the • s of Gebel Marrado formerly worked iron on a small scale. The Arabs of Dar Fur, Le., men of Arab descent, are Muhamma- . and the Negroes are pagans. 1 See Travels in Africa, 2nd Edition. London, 1806. 398 SHILLUKS ON THE WHI NILE IN THEIR FAVOURITE ATTITUDE OF REST. [From a photograph by Miss Hilda Burrows. PROVINCES OF THE SUDAN 4. The Fashoda Province, now known as Kodok, or the " Upper Nile Province." It extends from Gebelen in the north to parallel 50 north ; on the west it is bounded by the eastern frontier of Kordofan and the Bahr al-Gebel, and on the east by the western and southern boundaries of Sennaar and the western border of Abyssinia down to the Uganda frontier. The principal town of the province is Kodok, and its four Districts are Renk, Kodok, Tawfikiya and Sobat. Mongalla was formerly a District in this province, but on January 1st, 1906, it was formed into a separate province. 5. The Bahr al-Ghazal Province.1 It is bounded on the north by Kordofan and Dar Fur, on the south by the frontier of the Lado Enclave and a portion of the Congo-Nile water-shed, on the east by the Bahr al-Gebel, and on the west by the French frontier. Its chief town is Waw, and its three Districts are Waw, Dem Zuber, and Awrambek (Rumbek). The province in its lower portions is well watered, as may be seen from the large number of rivers which are in it." The products are ivory, a species of fig, the lulu or " Sudan date," timber and honey, and iron is found everywhere in large quantities. Owing to the abun- dance of fuel in the Province the natives, i.e., the Gurs and the Bongos, find no difficulty in smelting iron in small quan- tities, and it is they who have supplied the iron hoes which have been used in the country for untold generations. The principal inhabitants are Dinkas, Gurs, Bongos, Golos, Ndoggos, and Kreich in the north, the Niam-Niams in the south, the Mittu, Wira, and Madi tribes in the east, and the Mandalla tribes in the west.3 6. The Kasala Province.4 Its principal town is Kasala, and its three Districts are Kasala, Kadaref, and Kallabat. The town 1 For the history of the province since it declared in favour of the Mahdi in 1882, see Gleichen, op. tit., I, p. 259 ff. 2 I.e., the Adda, Akoli, Bahr al-Arab, Bahr al-Ghazal, Bahr al-Homr, Biri, Bo, Boru, Bolako, Bongo, Buri, Chel, Duma, Gell, Ibba, jur (Gur) or Sueh, Kir, Leisi, Lau or Dole, Merridi, Naam, Mulmul, Ragaa, Rikki, Rodi, Shaliko, Siri, Sunni, Tong, and Waw. 3 Gleichen, op. a'/., i., p. 159. 4 For the boundaries, see Gleichen, op. a'/., i., p. 336 ; and for the amended boundary, see the Sudan Gazette, No. 86, p. 415. 399 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of Kasala is, with one exception,1 the only permanent town in the Sudan east of the Atbara. It stands on the right bank of the Kash (Gash) River, 1735 feet above the sea, and is 15 miles west of Sabderat on the Abyssinian frontier. Three miles to the east and south-east respectively are Gebel Mokran and Gebel Kasala, the highest parts of the latter being 2,600 feet above the town. The local shekh is Sayyid 'Ali al-Murghani, but his brother Sayyid Ahmad acts for him. The total population of the town and district was estimated in 1904 at 46,000. As the rainfall is little, the people obtain most of their water from wells, which yield an abundant supply. Between June and October the country swarms with the smit fly. The game found in the country between the Atbara and the Eritraean frontier is thus enumerated by Count Gleichen : Elephant, rhinoceros, buffalo, giraffe, roan-antelope, kudu, waterbuck, tora, hartebeeste, ibex, wild sheep (?), bushbuck, roebuck, Abyssinian duiker, oribi, dig-dig, and the following gazelles : Sommering's, Dorcas, Heuglin's, Isabella, and possibly Rufifrons; also hippopotamus, crocodile, turtle, wart-hog, pig, wild ass, lion, leopard, cheetah, serval ; also various civet and wild cats, hares, wild dogs, baboons, and monkeys ; ostrich, bustard, guinea- fowl, francolin, sand-grouse, geese, snipe, wild fowl, and quail. Kadaref District has an area of about 11,000 square miles, and its inhabitants numbered 25,000 in 1904. It suffered greatly under the rule of the Dervishes, but was seized in 1898 by Colonel Parsons, who defeated its Dervish governor Ahmad Fadil after a hard fight. The population of the town of Kadaref was in 1904 about 5,500. A British Inspector lives here for more than half the year, and the town is furnished with a detachment of Sudani troops from Kasala. Kallabat District has an area of about 12,000 square miles, most of which is covered by forests. The town of Kallabat is on the left bank of the River Abnaheir, a few miles from the Atbara. It was sacked by the Dervishes in 1886, and here in 1889, towards the close of a terrible battle, King John of Abyssinia was killed. His death was the means of turning the victory of the Abyssinians into a defeat, and the Dervishes con- 1 I.e., Adarama on the Atbara, 78 miles above the junction of this river with the Nile. Capt. A. C. Parker reports a native tradition which says that the Kash has an exit in the Atbara near Adarama. 400 PROVINCES tinued to be masters of the town until December, 1898, when Colonel Collinson hoisted the British and Egyptian flags. The inhabitants of the district and town are chiefly Takruris from Dar Fur, and in 1904 they numbered about 3,800. 7. The Berber Province.1 Its chief town is Damar,2 and its four Districts are Rubatab, Berber Town, Berber District, and Shendi. The town of Berber 8 is a collection of mud huts, and stands on the east bank of the Nile, about 30 miles to the north of the Atbara ; it formerly belonged to the kingdom of Sennaar, and its inhabitants submitted to Isma'il Pasha, one of Muhammad 'All's sons, without striking a blow. On May 26th, 1884, the town was captured by the Dervishes, who made it one of their strong- holds, and its possession made them masters of the routes to Aswan, (245 miles), Sawakin (242 niles), and Masaw'a (543 miles) ; it was evacuated by them after the fall of Abu Hamed, and occupied by Lord Kitchener on September 6th, 1897. It was formerly the capital of the Berber Province, and a very important place, in spite of the dust storms, which at times made life there well-nigh un- bearable.4 Damar, the new capital of the Province, was a seat of learning in Burckhardt's days {Travels, p. 266), and was occupied by natives of Arab descent. Its governor was " Al-Faki al-Kabir," i.e., the "Great Faki," or chief religious teacher of all the learned men there. He was reputed to possess supernatural power and knowledge, and was the final arbiter and judge in all disputes. On one occasion he caused the flesh of a lamb to bleat in the stomach of a man who had stolen it ! There were several schools here in which young men from all parts of the Sudan studied the Kur'an and the Commentaries on it, and Muham- madan Law, and theological philosophy ; there was also a well-built mosque here. The great Faki lived in a small building, to which a chapel was attached. The natives traded with Dongola and Berber, and they made a kind of cotton stuff in the town, and mats of the dum palm leaves. Burckhardt saw here ostrich eggs 1 For its boundaries, seeGleichen, op. cit., i. 335. 2 The capital of the province was formerly Berber Town. 3 Shucair, i., p. 88, reports a native tradition which derives the name of the town from " Barbara," a former queen ! 4 For a description of the manners and customs of the people of Berber, see the interesting section in Burckhardt, Travels, p. 215 ff. VOL. II. 401 D d Ill K EGYPTIAN SUDAN and feathers, and wooden bowls used as ornaments on the walls of the houses, which had mats on the floor. A large trade is done in mats at Damar at the present time, and it is rapidly becoming an important trade centre. The town of Shendi is said to have been atone time the largest in the Eastern Sudan, and at present, though its population only numbers about 500, it bids fair to become a very important place. It is the residence of a British Inspector and of a Ma'amur, or native Governor, and forms the head-quarters of four squadrons of ■tian Cavalry, and of one field battery. There are large railway workshops here, and the railway station is a fine one. In the evening, when the north and south expresses are in, and the station is lit up by the electric light and crow tied with natives of all kinds, it presents an animated and interesting scene, and one which many a traveller must be surprised to find in the Sudan some 1,300 miles from Cairo. Little is known of the history of Shendi in the earliest times, but in or near the site of the modern town a large city must have stood at the time when the pyramids near As-Sur and Bagrawiya were built, between B.C. 500 and a.d. 200. The evidence derived from the reliefs in the chapels of these pyramids and from the sculptures on the columns of the temples at Nagaa shows that the Island of Meroe, or at all events that portion of it in which Shendi stands, was ruled by a succession of queens; each, according to Pliny, bore the title of " Candace." The sculptures represent them as fine, large women, with bold features, and an extraordinary girth of body and development of hips. Whether or not these large-bodied queens were natives of the Island of Meroe cannot be said, but it seems as if they were, for Shendi and its neighbourhood have always enjoyed the repu- tation of producing beautiful women. Their large dimensions, no doubt produced by artificial means, and to this day abnormally fat women are appreciated in many parts of Africa. Speke tells us that when he was in Karague he went to visit Wazezeru, the elder brother of king Rumanika, whom he found sitting side by side with his chief wife, with numerous wooden pots of milk in front of them. Of his wife he says: "I struck with no small surprise at the extraordinary dimen- " sions, yet pleasing beauty, of the immoderately fat fair one by 402 STEATOPYGOUS WOMEN " his side. She could not rise, and so large were her arms that, " between the joints, the flesh hung down like large loose-stuffed " puddings." On asking why his host had so many milk-pots there, Wazezeru pointed to his wife, and said, " This is all the " product of these pots : from early youth upward we keep those " pots to their mouths, as it is the fashion at court to have very " fat wives." ! Speke also called on one of the sisters-in-law of Rumanika, and he found her " unable to stand except on all fours." He wished to obtain a good view of her, and to measure her, and he gives her dimensions thus : Round the arm, i ft. n in. ; chest, 4 ft. 4 in. ; thigh, 2 ft. 7 in. ; calf, 1 ft. 8 in. ; height, 5 ft. 8 in. " Meanwhile, the daughter, a lass of sixteen, sat stark-naked be- " fore us, sucking at a milk-pot, on which the father kept her at " work by holding a rod in his hand, for as fattening is the first " duty of fashionable life, it must be duly enforced by the rod if ''necessary."2 Dr. G. Schweinfurth gives a picture3 of a Bongo woman of this class, and says that the thighs of some of the women of the tribe are "as large as a man's chest, and their measure- " ment across the hips can hardly fail to recall the picture in Cuvier's Atlas of the now famous ' Hottentot Venus.' ': These he saw day after day, and he thinks they may well demand to be technically described as " Steatopyga." 4 Some of these women wore long switch tails of bast, which contributed to their singular appearance.5 Women of such form were known and appreciated among the ancient Egyptians, as may be seen from figures and models in the British Museum.* The portrait of the Queen of Punt, reproduced by Mariette,7 also proves that the Egyptians knew of the existence of steatopygous women in other parts of Africa. Speke tells us that the specimens which he saw were produced by a superabundant diet of milk, 1 Speke, Journal of Discovery, Dent's reprint, p. 172. 2 Ibid., p. 189. 3 Heart of Africa, vol. ii., p. 121. 4 The whole subject of Steatopygy is discussed, with illustrations, bv Dr. H. Ploss in Das Weib, vol. i., pp. 202 ff. 5 Heart of Africa, vol. i., p. 295. . 6 See the marble figure, No. 173 5 the ivory figure, No. 42 (Table-case L) ; dolls, Nos. 25, 26 and 33, in Case C; and No. 22906, in Case 192 (Third and Fourth Egyptian Rooms). 7 Deir al-Bahari, plate 13, Leipzic, 1877. 403 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and it is said in the Sudan at the present time that women are fattened by feeding them on milk in which a certain herb is steeped. According to Bruce, who was in Shendl ir October, 1772, the queen of the place, or " Sittina" as he calls her,1 was a beautiful woman, and he describes her as being " scarcely forty, taller than "the middle size, with a very round, plump face, rather large " mouth, very red lips, and the finest eyes and teeth he had ever "seen. She wore a cap of solid gold on her head, hung round " with sequins, and about her neck were gold chains, solitaires. " and necklaces of the same metal. Her hair in ten or twelve 41 plaits hung down to her waist, and her shoulders and arms were " hare : her dress was a common white garment and a purple silk " stole, or scarf. She wore heavy bracelets and anklets of gold." It is only fair to say that Cailliaud made inquiries about this lady at Shendl, but could hear nothing of her, and it is clear from his narrative that he regarded as fictitious both the lady and Bruce's conversation with her!1 In connection with Shendi, mention must be made of the two brave women, FAtma, the mother <>t 'Uthman al-Morgh&ni of Kasala, and her daughter Nefisa, who resisted the Dervish Amir of Shendi, Ahmad Hamza, for months, and tried to keep the inhabitants loyal to the Government. (See Win gate. Malidiism, p. 162.) In 1N14 Jmrckhardt passed a month in Shendi and collecl number of very important facts about the manners and customs of its inhabitants, its trade, &c. ; these were published in his Travels (pp. 277-361), and from his narrative the following facts are derived. The town contains from 800 to 1,000 houses, some of which had courts 20 ft. square with high walls. The Mek. or rnor, was called Ximr, i.e., the "Tiger," who was akin to ;mg tribes that lived near their capital, Sennaar ; he was subject to the king of Sennaar, but up to a point his power was absolute. He imposed no tax on the merchants. Burckhardt described (pp. 224 and 280) the inhabitants as "people of frolic, " folly, and levity, avaricious, treacherous and malicious, ignorant " and base, and full of wickedness and lechery.*' They were shep- herds, traders and husbandmen, who produced d hurra, millet, 1 Travels, vol. vi., p. 448 (Edinburgh, 1813). I he stoiy is not doubted by Burckhardt. 404 SHENDI wheat, water-melons and cucumbers. The cattle were very fine. Tigers, ariel, and ostriches were common in the neighbourhood. Crocodiles were numerous, and horses more numerous than at Berber. A market was held daily, and a large one once a week. Cows and camels were slaughtered daily for food, and milk, both fresh and sour, was brought in by the desert girls in the morning. Tobacco came from Sennaar and was freely indulged in, and snuff was much used. The chemists and druggists sold cloves, pepper, cardamoms, tamarinds,1 sandal-wood, helba (a tonic), Libdn gum, MODERN SUDANI SILVE R-WORK— CIGARETTE CASE. gum arabic, shishm (for the eyes), antimony, kerf a bark (for fever), tamar al-barr (a digestive), &c. The trades were represented by sandal-makers, leather workers, blacksmiths, silversmiths, car- penters, and potters. Imported articles were the senbil perfume, the mahlab condiment, soap, sugar, blue cambric, white cotton stuffs with red borders, blue-striped cloth, English calico, stuffs from Lyons and Florence, linen, sheepskins, beads of all kinds, coral, real and imitation, paper, pewter, copper, brassware, razors, files, thimbles, scissors, needles, nails, steels, sword-blades, tar, silver trinkets, bells, looking-glasses, &c. A caravan from 1 From the Arabic tamar Hindi, i.e., the " Indian date." 405 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Sennaar bringing d hurra, dammur cloth, slaves, and gold arrived every six»weeks. Gold came from Ras al-Fil, four days' journey from Sennaar; at Sennaar it was worth 12 dollars an ounce, at Shendl 16, at Sawakin 20, and at Jidda 22. The shuts were chief!) Nubas. Other imports were ivory, rhinoceros horns, ebony, coffee, leather, leather water-flasks, shields made of giraffe and rhinoceros skin, honey, water-skins made of ox-hide, ostrich feathers, dates, and tobacco, and female slaves from Mahass. Slaves were divided into three classes, those under ten years of age, those under fifteen, and those who were full grown. A boy of the second class was worth 15 or 16 dollars, and a girl from 20 to 25 ; a boy of the first class was worth 12 and a girl 15 dollars, and a full-grown man not more than 8 or 10 dollars. Tin- Nuba slaves were considered to be the healthiest and to have the best disposition ; of the western Negroes the Banda were most esteemed. As soon as a slave was purchased, he was cir- cumcised and given a Muhammadan name. Eunuchs were made ;it Zawiyet ad-I)er, near Asyut in Upper Egypt, and this revolting trade was carried on chiefly by Coptic Christians, who were protected by the Government, to whom they paid an annual tax. The deaths resulting from the operation were rarely more than 2 per cent. A youth ' who had been treated was worth 1,000 piastres at Asyut (about £10), and 250 were treated annually. Among the slave girls who arrived at Shendl and Asyut were ral who, by reason of an operation ! which had been performed upon them, probably by the merchants, were called in Arabic " Mukhayyat" i.e., " consutae." Girls in this state were worth 1 " Puer, corpora depresso, a robustis quibusdam hominibus, super 1 netur. Tunc emasculator, vinculis s< ne illitis, genitalia compri- '• mit, et cum cultro tonsorio (dum puer pro dolore animo deficit) quam celerrime ndit Ad hemorhagiam sistendam plagam pulvereet arena calida adurunt, "et post aliquot dies calido oleo inungunt. Dein vulnus cum emplastro aliquo, '• quod inter Coptos arcanum est, per quadra ginta spatium dierum donee " -lutinetur curatur. Numqu 1111 decelotomia sub hoc coelo audivi." ( Burckhardt, Travels, p. 330.) - Browne < Travels, p. 347) says : " Mini contigit Digram quandam puellam, "qui hanc operationem subierat, inspicere. Labia pudendi acu et filo con- "suta mihi plana detecte fuere, foramine angusto in meatum urii •■ Apud Esne, Siout, et Cairo, tonsores sunt, qui obstructionem novacula '• amovent, sed vulnus baud raro lethale evenit/ 406 SHENDI more than those who were not. The daughters of the 'Ababda and Ja'afara Arabs, from Thebes to Sennaar, underwent excision, a fact which is also recorded by Strabo (koI ra d-qXea eicTenveiv).1 The treatment of slaves was kind, they were well-fed, not over- worked, rarely flogged, and kindly spoken to ; this was always the case in the town, but in the desert the disobedient slave often felt the whip. The male slave of indifferent character was tied to a long pole, one end of which was fastened to a camel's saddle, and in the other, which was forked, was placed the slave's neck, tied with a strong cord ; his right hand also was fastened to the pole. Thus he marched the whole day behind the camel, and at night he was put in irons. Finally, Burckhardt says, " Slavery, in the " East, has little dreadful in it but the name ; it is only by the " Turkish soldiers that slaves are ill-treated." In 1822 Isma'il Pasha, son of Muhammad 'Alt, was treacherously burned to death, whilst he was eating his dinner, by Nimr of Shendi; in revenge Muhammad the Defterdar destroyed the town, and massacred nearly all its inhabitants. 8. The Dongola Province. Its chief town is Merawi, and its six Districts are Arko, Khandak, Dongola Al-tTrdi, Dabba, Korti, and Merawi. This Province lies to the west of Berber, and takes in the northern part of the great bend of the Nile. Merawi is a few miles below the foot of the Fourth Cataract, and is the residence of a Governor. Second Class Provinces. 1. The Gazira Province. Its chief town is Wad Madani, and its six Districts are Wad Madani, Abu Dulek, Kamlin, Rufa'a, Masallamiya, and Managil. 1 On this Burckhardt remarks (p. 332) : " Cicatrix, post excisionem clitoridis, " parietes ipsos vaginae, foramine parvo relicto, inter se glutinat. Cum tempus " nuptiarum adveniat, membranum, a qua vagina clauditur, coram pluribus pro- " nubis inciditur, sponso ipso adjuvante. Interdum evenit ut operationem efficere " nequeant, sine ope mulieris aliquae expertae, quae, scalpello partes in vagina " proiundius rescindit. Maritus crastina die cum uxore plerumque habitat ; " undie ilia Araborum sententia, ' Lelat ad-dukhla mithl lelat al-futuh,' i.e., post "diem aperturae, dies initus. Ex hoc consuetudine fit ut sponsus nunquam * decipiatur, et ex hoc fit ut in Aegypto Superiori innuptae repulsare lascivias " hominum parum student, dicentes, ' Tabusni wala takharkani.' Sed quantum * eis sit invita haec continentia, post matrimonium demonstrant, libidini quarn * maxime indulgentes." n«o; THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN 2. The White Nile Province. Its chief town is Duwem, and its four Districts are Duwem, Katena, Kawa, and Gadid. 3. The Red Sea Province. Its chief town is " old " Sawakin, and it has a District of the same name. The town of Sawakin is built partly on an island, and partly on a portion of the mainland which is called Al-Kef ; ' these are joined by a road which is known as " Gordon's Gate and Causeway." The harbour is on the east side of the town. The place was originally colonized SAWAKIN- GENERAL VIEW. [From a photograph by ( '.. 1 ■'.. M by Arabs from Hadr al-Mut (which name has been corrupted into " Hadramout ") in southern Arabia ; some say they arrived there about a.d. 1800, and others say soon after the great spread of Islam. For a description of the town about 100 years ago,, see Burckhardt's Travels, p. 431 ; and for one of the modern town, see Gleichen, Handbook, pp. 94, 95. Now that the terminus of the Atbara-Red Sea Railway has been made at 1 IJurckhardt, Travels, p. 431. 408 Filigree work Matchbox, MODERN SUDANI SILVER WORK. Amulet. Amulet Case. PROVINCES Shekh Mersa Barghut,1 or " New Sawakin," the importance of Saw&kin is certain to decline. This place is thirty-six miles north of Sawakin, and is called after a certain Mersa, whose tomb stands on the northern point of the entrance to the harbour. Tokar, the chief town of the Tokar District, is situated at the mouth of the Khor Baraka, fifty-six miles south of Sawakin. 4. The Mongalla Province. Its chief town is Mongalla GORDON GATE, SAWAKIN. [From a photograph by G. E. Mason, Esq. The boundaries of this Province are set out in the Sudan Gazette, January 1st, 1906, No. 86, p. 413. 5. The Halfa Province. Its chief town is Halfa, and its three Districts are Haifa, Mahass (Dulgo), and Sukkot (Kosha). The province of Haifa extends from Faras Island (lat. 220 10' north) to Abu Fatma, near Kerma, and in 1904 its population was 30,800. The term Haifa comprises Haifa Town and the " Camp " ; the former being nearly two miles to the north of the latter. Haifa is the terminus of the Khartum and Kosha lines, 1 More correctly Burghuth, <±>£> ; the word means "flea." 409 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and contained large workshops, some of which have now been removed to Atbara Junction. Close by are the old fortifications, the barracks, the Sirdariya, &c. MINERALS in the Sudan. For several thousand; of years the Sudan has been famous as a GOLD-producing country, and almost every ridge or vein of quartz shows signs of having been worked saw AKIN BAZAAR LFrom a photograph by Lieutenant P. Lord, K or less some time or other. To this day. if a native finds a of quartz, he is not satisfied until he has broken it to see if is any gold inside it. The richest gold-producing districts formerly in the region which lies to the south and south-west of Lake Sana and Beni Shankul. A considerable quantity of alluvial gold was found in the khors or beds of streams here. 410 MINERALS Cailliaud says1 that in his day the purest gold was found at Kamamil,2 and that the less pure gold, which was of a yellowish- green colour, was mixed with silver. The market for gold from this neighbourhood was Sennaar, and hence it was called " Sennaar gold." A certain amount of gold was also found in Gebel Nuba, e.g., at Gebel Tlra and Gebel Shebun, to the west of Gebel Kadir. Large quantities of gold must also have been found in the region -%■* ^^j^^ i^N^PgM '. L i&e£U£ •iliiil **• . a *!ftr^«SP ■ r m Rf*6^L*iSl MAIN STREET, SAWAKIN. [From a photograph by G. E. Mason, Esq. called " Atbai," which lies between the 26th and 20th parallels of north latitude, and which is bounded on the west by the Nile from Kena to Haifa, and on the east by the Red Sea. The southern portion of this region belongs to the Sudan, and is inhabited by the Bisharin and Amarar tribes ; there are no towns or villages in the whole district. At one period of its history, gold-mining must have been carried on in this region on a large scale, for at Deraheb, about 208 miles 1 Voyage, iii., p. 19. - The pillar on which the names of the blessed in heaven will be cut is, according to Abyssinian writers, made of "red gold," i.e., pure gold. THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN from No. 6 Station on the Haifa-Abu Hamed Railway, Colonel the Hon. M. G. Talbot, R.E., found1 on the right bank of Wadi Kamotit " a number of ruined stone houses arranged in streets, " and covering three or four acres. They are built in stone and M mud, but a few arches in lime are to be seen." Here also are a ruined castle of stone set in mud, with two or three pointed arches set in lime, and another building of nearly equal size in plan, and the ruins of a number of houses and shelters, on the left bank. Here we have clearly the remains of a miner's colony, with the governor's house* A narrow-gauge railway has been constructed from No. 6 Station to Umm Nabadi, and mining work is now being carried on there, it is said with great success. Another great centre for gold-mining was the Wadi 'Ulaki, which is entered near Dakka, on the east bank of the Nile. COPPER is found at I.Iufrat an-Xahas, in the north-west ofthe Bahr al-Ghazal Province, and in the mountains near Sawakin and in the Peninsula of Sinai ; none ofthe mines have been properly worked yet. Iron is found in Par Fur, Kordoffm, and Bahr al-Ghazfd, and in some places the ore is so rich that it contains nearly 50 per cent, of the pure metal. Fuel is plentiful in these places, and the natives smelt the ore in small clay furnaces. A great deal of iron is found mixed with the sand in the river beds south of Sennaar. Lead is obtained in small quantities from Gebel Kutum, to the west of Kobi in D&r Fur. Antimony comes from Gebel Marra. A deposit of LIGNITE lias been found on the west bank of the river near 1 tongola, and a Company has decided to make trial borings on the east bank, and has sent out a diamond drill for the purpose. Lignite has also been found at Chelga in Abyssinia, and in the Peninsula of Sinai. Natron occurs in large quantities at Bir Xatrun on the Arba'in Road. Salt is found on the Atbara, at Sharshar mar Bara, in the Oasis of Selima, and in the Wadi Ka'ab, to the west of Dongola. Of Alum there is a large deposit in the Oasis of Shabb, i.e., the "Alum Oasis." The Inhabitants of THE Sn>.\N. The history ofthe various peoples and tribes who have inhabited the Nile Valley during the past ten thousand years is a subject of great difficulty, and general c the route described in Gleichen, op. cit., ii., pp. 1-5. Gleichen (i. p. 87) the number of houses at 500. 4IJ INHABITANTS agreement among ethnographers, even as regards its main facts, is not to be expected for some time to come. The traditions which the present inhabitants of the Sudan possess concerning their ancestry cannot be accepted implicitly, and all their racial characteristics are not so clearly differentiated that hard-and-fast conclusions on all points can be arrived at. The oldest evidence on the subject, is, of course, that which is derived from the monuments, and tombs, and writings of the ancient Egyptians, and this is usefully supplemented by that found in the works of Greek, Roman, and Muhammadan writers. The ancient Egyptian evidence proves that in the earliest times two kinds of people inhabited the Nile Valley between the Great Lakes and Middle Egypt, and that both these were included under the general name " Nehesu," i.e., " Blacks." One of these peoples possessed the chief characteristics of the Negro, i.e., thick lips, wool for hair, &c, and the other, though black-skinned, lacked them. The Negro people lived probably in the region which stretched from the southern parts of the district now called Dar Fur and Kordofan to the Equator, and formed the remote ancestors of the great belt of Black nations which stretched right across Africa from the modern Senegambia to Abyssinia. The people who were brown or black-skinned, but not Negroes, lived in the regions to the north of the Negro country, and they must at one time have occupied parts of Egypt so far north as Asyut, if not farther. It goes without saying that from the earliest times these two black peoples must have mixed and inter- married, and it is probable that the nomadic instincts of both, which were in reality the result of their incessant quest for food, and trade, led them at regular intervals into each other's country. The physical conditions under which they lived cannot have been very different from what they were during the past century, and, during the historic period, and that immediately preceding it, there must have been frequent intercourse between the southern and northern portions of the Nile Valley. The Negroes were then, as now, pagans or heathen, that is to say, their magic, which was probably of a low kind, had not developed into religion, and there is no doubt that many of the features of the religion of the Egyptians whose writings are in hieroglyphics were derived from 413 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN the Negro Magic of Central Africa. The description written under the Dynastic Period of King Unas, who slew, cut up, boiled, and ate his gods, who violated the dead bodies of his enemies in a shameful manner, who carried off men's wives whensoever the fancy took him, better suits that of a successful warrior and slave-raider in Central Africa than that of a king of Egypt, who was buried with all the religious pomp and ritual which were practised in Egypt under the Vth Dynasty. The black-skinned or brown non- Negro people had then, of course, many customs in common with the Nitrous, but it is clear from the Pyramid texts that in the reign of Pepi I. they worshipped a god called Tetun, and that they had. some kind of a religion. Down to the Roman Period the Egyptians worshipped the bull, Osiris himself being the " Bull of Amentet," and, if we may believe the reports of the travellers 1 quoted by Professor Wiedemann,2 the king of the crocodiles was, at the end of the eighteenth century, believed to live at Armant, eight miles south of Thebes, and a gigantic crocodile was held in veneration at Khartum in the reign of Muhammad 'All ! Many facts go to show the persistence of Negro influence on the beliefs, and manners and customs of the Dynastic Egyptians, and the most important thing of all in connection with this is the tradition which makes them to come from the land of Punt. It is unnecessary here to review all the theories which have been put forward by various scholars as to the position of this country, and we may accept without any misgiving the opinion of Professor Maspero and of Professor Naville, both of whom believe that it was situated in Africa, at a considerable distance to the south-east and south of Egypt. It could be approached by sailing down the Red Sea, and entering a certain port on the African co;ist, and it could also be reached by land, via the □ and Southern Abyssinia. The products of the country as enumerated in the inscriptions of the great Queen Hatshepset >t that Africa was their source, and that the particular 1 Sieber, Beschreibendes VetzeUhniss% Vienna, 1820, p. 59; Piickler, Aus Reich, iii., p. 250. telques Remarques sur U Culie des Animaux en Hgyptet Muse'on, vi. 2, pp. 113-128. 4M INHABITANTS region whence they came was in some part of the south-eastern Sudan, or a neighbouring country. There is no reason for assuming that the Egyptians knew of two countries of Punt, or that the Punt of the XVIIIth was different from that of the IVth Dynasty ; we must therefore think that the " spice-land " of Punt was the home of one of the peoples who were the ancestors of the Dynastic Egyptians. The influence of their Punt ancestors shows itself in many ways, especially in the matter of their long, plaited beards, and the animals' tails which hung down behind from their girdles, and their head-dresses.1 Some think that the men of Punt were Semites, but the evidence for this view seems unsatisfactory, and is, in many cases, insufficient. It is, of course, possible that a number of Semites entered Egypt by way of Punt, but, if this were so, we should have found traces of their Semitic speech in the early hieroglyphic inscriptions. All things considered, it seems tolerably certain that the men of Punt, who influenced the manners, customs, and beliefs of the people in the Nile Valley were of African origin ; but how, or when, or why they acquired the superior qualities which enabled them to do this cannot at present be said. The Egyptians under the XVIIIth Dynasty divided the world as known to them at that time into four parts, which were peopled by — i. Reth, or Ret (older, Remt) ; 2. Thehennu ; 3. Aamu ; 4. Nehesu. The first people, the Ret, i.e., " Men," were the Egyptians themselves. The Thehennu were the Libyans? the Aamu were the people on the east of the Nile, and probably included the Nomads of Sinai and Southern Syria, and the Nehesu were the Blacks. The Egyptians claimed to be of divine origin, their primitive home being the "divine land," or the "land of the spirits," i.e., Punt. The Thehennu lived to the west of the Nile, and their territory stretched away to the south, so far probably as Kordofan and Dar Fur ; from the way in which their name is written it seems as if they were regarded by the Egyp- tians as " the foreigners who brought scent, spices, and gum." 1 See the description of the curious green stone objects of the Archaic Period published by Mr. F. Legge in the Proceedings of the Society oj Biblical Archaeology for June, 1900. 415 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Tlu' Aamu appear to have been looked upon as the "animal- men," i.e., hunters of wild animals and shepherds. From the above facts it is clear that the Egyptians were not scientific ethnographers, but their classification of the peoples of the world as known to them is useful, especially as it represents a very old tradition. From the evidence of the Egyptian monuments we are justified in assuming that before the beginning of the Dynastic Period, the Nile Valley was inhabited by negroes, and by a brown or black- skinned people who are represented by the modern Nubians of Sukkot and Mahass, and the Nubas of Kordofan, and that these mingled and intermarried with the desert inhabitants on the east and west banks of the Nile. Then came a time when the country north of the First Cataract was invaded by a people who entered Egypt from the East, and who brought with them a high order of civilization, the art of writing, superior methods of agriculture, and a certain knowledge of arts and crafts. These conquered the natives, and their rulers founded a kingdom in Egypt, and with the union of the power of the kings of the South and North Egyptian Dynastic history begins. These new kings of All Egypt, having established their kingdom, soon found it necessary to take steps to reduce to submission the dwellers in the Eastern and Western Deserts and the Blacks, and from the time of king Seneferu, B.C. 3700, to the reign of Rameses II., about B.C. 1330, the Egyptian texts are, at intervals, filled with accounts of slave-raids into the Sudan, nearly all of which are of a more or less bloody character, and of conquests of Ta-Kenset, Uauat (Wawat), Kash (or Kesh), and Khent Hen-nefer, i.e., of the Nile Valley, from Aswan to the Bahr al-Ghazal. Among the peoples of this region were two who were regarded as especially brave, ferocious, and terrible, namely, the Anti, or " Hill-men," who lived in the Eastern Desert, and the Menti, or " Cattle- men," who lived in the Western Desert. The Hill-men were fine, tall, strong men, mighty hunters and ed to the use of the bow and the boomerang, and their boldness and bravery, and rapidity of movement across their deserts, struck terror at all times into the Egyptians. To conquer was impossible, for when pursued they retired to their 416 INHABITANTS mountain fastnesses, which were inaccessible ; to follow them for any distance into the desert was out of the question on account of the absence of water. What the physical characteristics and appearance of the Cattle- men were we have no means of knowing. In Roman times we find the country of the Hill-men occupied by peoples to whom classical writers gave the names of Megabari, Blemmyes, and Ethiopians (i.e., not Abyssinians, but dwellers on the Island of Meroe), who are now generally admitted to belong to the Hamitic race. As their qualities and characteristics were identical with those of the Hill-men, it is only reasonable to think that they were the descendants of the Hill-men, and that the Hill- men themselves belonged to the Hamitic race. Whether the Hill-men were indigenous, or whether they entered the country from the north, their stock being replenished from time to time by new-comers, is not known. Of the Megabari, Blemmyes, and Ethiopians (i.e., Meroites), the last people were the most civilized, and the " Meroitic " inscriptions, which have been found from the Blue Nile in the south to Philae in the north, are probably written in their language. The Blemmyes lived nearer to Egypt, the southern portion of which they frequently plundered, and their reputation for cruelty, robbery, and brigandage is too well known to need description. With the Blemmyes there is mentioned in the inscriptions of Adulis a group of tribes called " Bega " ' and " Bugaeitai," 2 and with them we may certainly identify the Baga, or Bejas, of Muhammadan writers.3 They were a fierce and warlike people, and possessed all the characteristics of the Blemmyes, and their ancestors, or predecessors, the Anti, or Hill-men. For centuries they lived chiefly by plunder and brigandage, and they were generally at war with the sedentary tribes who lived on the Nile. The modern inhabitants of the land once held by the Blemmyes and Begas, or Bejas, are the tribes called 'Ababdah, Bisharin, Hadanduwa, Halanka, &C The peoples who lived in the deserts on the west of the Nile, 1 Beyd: see Dittenberger, Orientis Graeri, vol. i., p. 290. - BovyaeiTcii : Ibid., p. jOO. 3 They have been identified by some with the inhabitants of the country of Buka, J ^N Li Q^£)? mentioned in the hieroglyphic inscriptions. vol. 11. 417 E e THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN among whom were the Menti, or " Cattle-men," were the descendants of the Thehennu of the Egyptian inscriptions, and were known to classical writers as " Nubae," or Nubians, and " Nobadae," or " Nobatae." In Roman times the Nubians consisted of a league of the great tribes of the Western Desert, fc v ▼ " T £ HdNcoi. \\\ i MRRCH W l . [From a photograph by K. TBrstig, Esq. and they were so powerful that Diocletian found it worth his while to subsidize them with an annual grant, and to employ them to keep the Blemmyes in check. In the second quarter of the sixth century a Nubian king called Silko embraced Christianity, and having defeated the Blemmyes in several battles, and occupied their towns of Kal&bsha, Dakka, and [brim, he founded a 418 INHABITANTS Christian kingdom in Nubia with Dongola as ,his capital. The northern part of this kingdom came to an end in the thirteenth century, and the southern portion of it about ioo years later. The modern representatives of the Nubians, or perhaps more correctly the " vile people of Kash " mentioned in the Egyptian [From a photograph by R. Tiirstig, Esq. inscriptions, are called " Barabara," and their home is the Nile Valley between the First and Fourth Cataracts ; the four principal divisions of this district are Haifa, Sukkot, Mahass, and Dongola. Akin to them are the Nubas of Kordofan,1 whose lan- guage is cognate with that of the Barabara of the northern Sudan. 1 Lepsius, Nubische Grammatik, Berlin, 1880, p. cxv. ; see also Reinisch, Die Nuba-Sprache, Vienna, 1879. 419 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN The early investigators of the language of the Barabara dis- tinguished in it two dialects, namely, that of Dongola, and that of Kenuz, or the country from Philae southwards to Korosko. Lepsius proved the existence of a third dialect, that of Mahass and Sukkot, and Reinisch distinguished a fourth, to which he gave the name " Fadigi," which he regarded as the speech peculiar to Sukkot. The dialects of Kenuz and Dongola are nearly the same, and the men of Kenuz and Dongola can understand each other without much difficulty ; the Fadigi and the Mahass dialects also are similar to each other. According to Count Gleichen, a man of Dongola cannot understand a man of Mahass, and he tells us that the Kenuz dialect is spoken from Shellfil to Korosko, the Fadigi near Korosko and south, the Mahass dialect from Haifa to Hannek, and the Dongola dialect from Kerma to Ambikol.1 Lepsius regarded the Barabara as a purely African people, and thought that the difference which now exists between them and the Nubas of Kordofan was due to their intermarriage with Hamites and Semites, whereby some of their semi-negro characteristics have disappeared. Opinions differ as to the Barabara. Mr. J. W. Crowfoot says, " They are an enterprising people, apt linguists, "and great travellers, very ready to take on a veneer of European " culture;" while Count Gleichen says, "The natives of Mahas and " Sukkot lag behind, the fault being entirely their own ; they are " of an extremely indolent nature, perpetually quarrelling among " themselves over questions as to ownership of land and date- " trees, and do little or nothing towards bettering themselves."2 The Barabara are Muhammadans, and most of them speak Arabic. Before referring to the Negro tribes of the Sudan, mention may be made of the Arabs, who during the last 500 years have occupied large tracts of country, and made themselves masters of them. For several hundred years before tin- Arabs became Muham- madans, numbers of them must have crossed the Red Sea and entered the country now called Eritraea and Abyssinia, and so made their way into the fertile country south of the- Atbara, or even farther west, where they settled down and became more or less absorbed among the population. After the conquest of Nubia '• Handbook, i., p. 83. - Ibid., pp. 84 and 318. 420 INHABITANTS by the Muhammadan Arabs about a.d. 650, we may assume that Arab immigration would increase, but it is unlikely that it attained to any large proportions until after the downfall of the southern half of the Nubian Christian kingdom, which had its capital at Soba on the Blue Nile, about a.d. 1400 or somewhat later. After SUDANI young man. [From a photograph by R. Tiirslig, Esq. the conquest of Egypt by Selim in 1517 a very considerable number of Arabs must have entered the Sudan by way of Abyssinia and Egypt, and their influence and power in the country began then to grow steadily. Little by little they added to the territories on which they had settled, but so long as the Fung Dynasty ruled at Sennaar, the progress of the Arab domination in 421 THE EGYFflAN SUDAN the Sudan generally was impeded, though the Fflng kings them- selves had embraced Muhammadanism. In the fourteenth century some knowledge of Muhammadanism entered Dar Fur, and in its train came some of the manners and customs and the language of the Arabs. These were brought in by the Tungur Arabs, who, leaving Tunis, travelled southwards, and occupied Bornu, Wadai, and Dar Fur, where they settled at Gebel Maria. The natives of Dar Fur were Negroes, and their chief tribes were the Furawa and the Dago, the latter being the dominant power in the land when the Tungur Arabs under 'All and Ahmad al-Makur made their appearance. Ahmad married a princess of Dar Fur, and, when her father the king died, he succeeded to the kingdom. Thereupon the Tungur Arabs left Bornu and Wadai in large numbers, and came t<> Gebel Marra, and practically crowded out the Dago tribe. When the Tungur kings bad reigned about ioo years, the last of them, Shan Durshid, was dethroned by bis half- brother Dali, who became Sultan of Dar Fur. Dab is famous as the author of the code of laws which was in force in 1N74 when ZubiT conquered the country ; be divided his kingdom into five provinces. Among Ins successors was SulSman, surnamed Solon, whose mother and wife were Arab women : under their influence Dar loir became a Muhammadan country. This took pla< the end of the fifteenth century. In the preceding paragraphs an attempt lias been made to sketch the distribution of the inhabitants of the Sudan in ac- cordance with the broad historical facts which have come down to us, but some of these may be capable <>t" a different interpretation when anthropologists and ethnographers have studied Sudan ethnography in the country, and when the contents of such ancient graves as remain have been exhumed and examined by them. Up to the present, very few of the travellers in the Sudan have i the technical know ledge and scientific training necessary to enable them to deal in a competent manner with the materials which surrounded them. Though men like Andersson. Alberti, tian, Burton, Browne, Burckhardt, Baines, Bowditch, maim. Faith. Baker, Brehm, Clapperton, Cameron. Denham, Fleurist de Langle, Guilain, Gussfeldt, Heuglin, Hildebrandt, Klunzinger. Kaufmann. Krapf. Livingstone. Len/. Lauder, New, 422 INHABITANTS Nachtigal, Pechuel-Losche, Pallme, Pruyssenare, Mungo Park, Ruppell, Russegger, Speke, Stanley, Thomas, Vogel, and others, have done splendid work in elucidating the manners and customs of the Black Tribes of North Africa, it cannot be said that any one of them was an anthropologist or ethnographer. Of those who have travelled and lived in the Sudan, and investigated the SUDANI MAN. [From a photograph by R. Tiirstig, Esq. subject in a scientific manner, two names stand out prominently, i.e., those of Hartmann and Schweinfurth. The works of the former, Die Volker Afrikas, Leipzig, 1879; Die N Wander, Leipzig, 1884; and other publications by him on the African peoples and their kinship and distribution, are most valuable contributions to the science of African anthropology, for they contain the results of a 423 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN practical knowledge of the subject gained at first hand by residence in the Sudan. Similarly Schweinfurth's The Heart of Africa, London, 1873 (translation by E. E. Frewer), forms a rich mine of facts collected by a trained mind during a period of three years' travel in the country. The researches made by Fritsch,1 Falken- stein," and others, also have a special value, and merit careful perusal. Among more recent works must be mentioned Prof. A. H. Keane's Ethnology of the Egyptian Sudan:'' and Die Heiden- Neger des Aegyptischen Sudan, by Dr. Herman Frobenius, Berlin, 1893.4 The last writer divided the peoples of the Sudan into two great classes, i.e., Moslems and Heathen. The Moslems comprise four divisions: — 1. Nubians, including the Barabara, Bisharln, Hadanduwa, &c. 2. The mixed Nuba tribes of Kordofan. 3. The mixed Negro tribes of Dar Fur. 4. The Bakkara Arabs. The Heathen of the Sudan he divides into six series : — 1. The Negroes who live in the swamp region, among whom he includes the Shulli (Liiri), the Shilluks (Jur), the Anuaks, the Dinkas or Gangas, and the Bari tribes, including the Shir, Mundar, Xifnnbara, Fagelu, Kakuak, Liggi, and Markhia. 2. The iron-working Negroes, i.e., the Bongo, the Mittu. Madi, Lubari, Kalika, Loggo, Brera, Abukaya (Oisila and Oigiga), Gogeri, Morir-Kod6, and Moni-Missa. 3, The Niam-Niams, or A-Sande, i.e., the " Great- eaters," and the Bomgta. 4. The Mangbattu tribes. 5. The Lattuka. Strictly speaking, they live in Uganda territory. 6. The Batua, who also live beyond Egyptian territory. Under each series Dr. Frobenius adds a short description of the physical characteristics of each people or tribe, and describes succinctly their manners and customs, &c. In the map which accompanies his book, he shows by means of colours the distribution of the various series of peoples in the Sudan in an effective manner. A view wholly different from that usually held as to the manner in which the Nile Valley was peopled has been put forth by 1 Verhand. der Berl. Gesch. Jur Ant/irop. Sits. v.. February 17th, 1883, .-189. - Die Loango Expedition, by 1'. G.J. Falkenstein and K. Pechuel-Loesche, Leipzig, 1879. 3 Journal oj 'the Anthropological Institute, November, 1884. * The most recent commentator on Suchm Ethnography is Mr. J. W. Crowfoot ; see Gleichen, op. eii., i.. p. .517, Ethnology oj the Sudan. 424 INHABITANTS Sir Harry Johnston in his Nile Quest, London, 1903. * Ac- cording to him, the first men who entered Egypt and ascended the Nile came from the East — from India. They may have been so primitive, and ape-like, and of so undetermined a type, as not to belong definitely to any one of the three main species of humanity. They entered Egypt by the strip of land which (he assumes) joined SUDANI WOMAN. [From a photograph by R. Tiirstig, Esq. Arabia to Ethiopia. Many types of Asiatic animals came by this bridge, also man, possibly in the form of a low Negroid, repre- sented to-day by the Congo Pygmies and the South African Bushmen. The region south of latitude 150 north was peopled by the Negro species, through southern Arabia. Egypt and Arabia were once a part of the domain of the Negroid Pygmies, 425 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN but these were overwhelmed by the negrified Caucasians who came from Syria or Libya. About B.C. 7000, there were steatopygous men, showing Bushmen affinities, in Egypt, and they formed the servile class. Next came people similar to the Dravidians of India, or the Brahuis of Baluchistan, and after them an aquiline type of nearly pure Caucasian stock, probably from \ sCdAn! maiden. ' From a photograph l>y K. Tiirsti^, Eiq, Syria or Cyprus. The men of the northern half of the Nile Basin emigrated from the direction of Gallaland, or Somaliland, or Abyssinia, and their degenerate descendants exist in the Dan&kil, ili, and Galla of to-day. They became the main stock of the Egyptian population, and profoundly modified Negro Africa, their influence penetrating to /ululand on the south, and to the 426 INHABITANTS Atlantic on the west. This Hamitic race was the mainstay of Ancient Egypt, and, assisted by the cognate Libyans, has been the main human agent in saving the Negro from slipping back into the life of the anthropoid ape. The Valley of the Lower Nile attracted many invasions from Europe and Asia, and from Libya, where the SUDANI YOUTH OF NEGRO ORIGIN. [From a photograph by R. Tih>tig, Esq. dominant race was of Iberian stock. All the races, save the Hittites, were of Caucasian species. The Egyptians penetrated among the Negro tribes 'of the Central Sudan and Equatoria ; they had in their composition a certain proportion of Negro blood, besides the drop of it from their Hamitic ancestors, and they absorbed the earlier Negroid population of their country, and 427 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN imported and intermarried with Negro slaves. But they were folly Caucasian in the vivid interest they took in nature, &c. After the early historical times relations between Egypt and the Upper Nile were severed. After the rise of Egyptian civilization B.C. 5000 the Egyptians easily impressed the Negroes of the south and the Libyans of the west by their power, and eventually taught them the art of working metals, &c. In course of time the Negro race, through the Hamitic blood which was pouring into it, resisted the Egyptians, who lost all interest in the Sudan. If we understand this theory aright, it is fundamentally opposed to that of Hartmann, who maintained that the ancient Egyptians were descended from a purely African black-skinned race ; and the labours of Maspero, Lefebure, and Wiedemann have proved from the religious ceremonies and social observances, as made known to us by the hieroglyphic texts, that a great deal is to be said in favour of this opinion. The proofs adduced from philological considerations in favour of this or that theory are not convincing, especially when we remember what inveterate tramps and wan- derers the peoples of the Sudan have always been, and it seems clear that a correct racial history of the Sudani folk can only be formulated by trained anthropologists and comparative ethno- graphers, who have a knowledge of Sudani peoples at first hand. Lists of the principal tribes in the Sudan at the present time have been compiled by Count Gleichen in his Handbook, and by Xaum Bey Shucair in his Arabic History of the S4dan% and both are valuable. The list here given is based upon that of Shucair, and the facts are collected from the works of Hartmann. Junker, Baker, Schweinfurth, and other travellers. I. Negro and Negroid Tribes. Agar. A branch of the Dinkas. They live on the Rul River in the Bahr al-Ghazal. 'AWRA. In IKu Fur, their chief town being Galla bet wren Kabkabiya and Kulkul. BANKti (Bongo). In the Bahr al-Ghazal. They smelt iron ore and work in iron. Their manners and customs are carefully described by Schweinfurth. They have no conception of im- mortality, and they do not believe in the transmigration of souls, 428 A WOMAN OF OMDURMAN. [From a photograph by R. Turstig, Esq. NEGROES AND NEGROIDS but they go in deadly fear of evil spirits, and their terror of witches and of their power passes understanding.1 Bari. A well-grown race who live near Bari and Gondokoro. According to Baker {Albert Nyanza, p. 58) the negro type of thick lips and flat nose is wanting. Their features are good, but they SUDANI WOMAN WEARING THE RAHAT, OR LEATHER GIRDLE. [From a photograph by R. Tiirstig, Esq. have woolly hair. They rub themselves with red ochre and tattoo their skins. They keep tufts of hair on the tops of their heads, wherein they stick'feathers. They wear a neat lappet of beads or small iron rings in front, and a tail of fine strips of leather or cotton behind. Their huts have projecting roofs, and entrances about two feet high ; they stand in enclosures formed by the 1 In the Heart of Africa, vol. i., pp. 259-311. 429 1 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN euphorbia, on ground plastered with ashes, cow-dung, and sand. The dead are buried in these enclosures ; a pole marks each grave, and on the top of it are fastened a few cocks' feathers. To the pole are tied skulls and horns of oxen. They used to poison their arrows with the juice of the root of a certain tree. Their bows were of bamboo, and their arrows, about three feet long, had detachable heads which fitted into sockets. Baker says the Bari were held to be the worst tribe on the Bahr al-Gebel. They wear no clothes, and are fond of singing, dancing, and strong drink. Barkad. Their chief place is Gebel Musku, between Gebel l.lanz and Gebel Marra. They worship images in secret. Barta. They live in Beni Shankul, to the south of FAmaka. They are akin to the Fung tribes, and are nearly black in colour, and they have been said by some to possess "Caucasian ''features. The men wear a girdle and a kind of tail, and the women go nearly naked. They are an industrious people, and they tat almost anything. They formerly paid £6,000 annually to the Egyptian Government. The Barta were discovered by Cailliaud. Barti. Their chief place is Gebel Takabu, three days to the north of Al-Fasher : they spuak Arabic as well as their own tongue. BIko. They live to the south of Dara. Bud£yat. A nomad tribe to the west of the Natron Wells. BURUN. A branch of the Hamags which lives in the mountains south of Khdr Dul£b. Dago. They live in Gebel Dago, two days west of Dara. D&WAR. A branch of the Shilluks ; they live to the west of the Dink Dinkas. They live to the east of the White Nile, near the Shilluks, between parallels 120 and 6° of north latitude. They are tall, comparatively slender nun, with long heads, and wide noses, blunted at the tips: they have large mouths, with fleshy but not thick lips. The men despise all clothing and go naked ; they live in grass-over ed tukls, and sleep on beds of ashes of cow-dung. The women wear aprons before and behind, and sleep on mats. The men carry spears and clubs. 43° NEGROES AND NEGROIDS The Dinkas of the White Nile ' migrated thither from the Bahr al-Ghazal. Faratit. They live in the Bahr al-Ghazal, in the south-west of Dar Fur. Fur. Their chief place is Gebel Marra. They became Moslems in the fifteenth century, and kings of mixed origin reigned over them from 1444 to 1874. Gablawiyun. They live in Gebel Mul, to the west of Dar Fur. Gablayun. They live in Famaka, and are akin to the Fung and Hamag tribes. Ganki. A tribe of the Bahr al-Ghazal, akin to the Dinkas. Gur (Jur). Their country lies between those of the Dinkas and Bankos ; they are akin to the Shilluks, whose language they speak ; they work in iron. Kaga al-Badu. Their country lies to the north-east of Umm Shanka. They are expert hunters of the giraffe and the darrak. Kimr. Their chief place is Abu 'Ushar, three days west of Kulkul. Kubk. They live to the north-west of Gebel Marra. Kulu (Golos). They live in clean, well-built huts to the west of the Banku (Bongos). Their currency is iron hoes, forty of which purchase a wife. Kumuz. They live to the east of Famaka ; their neighbours are the thievish Lamkasna. Latuka. A cattle-breeding tribe to the east of the Bahr al-Gebel. They live in bell-shaped tukls, and in each village is a high platform in three stages, on which are guards who keep watch day and night. Madi. They live near the Bari. They are a well-built people, and have long heads. Men and women cut their hair short ; the men cover the right shoulders, but their left and their breasts are bare. They are good farmers, and live in neat tukls. Makarak.'2 A branch of the Niam-Niams living in the Bahr 1 See Gleichen, op. at., i., p, 129; and especially Schweinfurth, Heart of Africa, vol. i., pp. 149-169. - Junker says {Travels in Africa, p. 234) this name means "man-eaters." 431 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN al-Ghaz-il. Their manners and customs have been described by Buchta, Hartmann, Junker, Marno and Schweinfurth. :aRit. Their chief place is Galla, between Kabkabiya and Kulkul. Masalit. Neighbours of the Kimr. ub. They live in Gebel Medub, three days' journey from Takabo, near the Arba'in Road. Their chief place b A number of them have become Moslems. :am, or X ya \ \ famous people who live chiefly between parallels 40 and 6' of north latitude, and who were at one time computed to number 2,000,000. They call themselv Sand!, or A-Zaxdi, which is the plural of a Dinka word meaning reat eater ; " because they were and still are eaters of human flesh, this word is said to mean "cannibals." Of Xiam-Xiam an Arabic plural has been formed, M Xiamanjam '* ; the Mittu are said to call them " Makarak." the Bongos know them as M Man- yanya," the Dyurs as " O'Madyaka," and the Manbattu as " Babungera."' They are thought by some travellers to be akin to the Somali, or Galla, or Wahuma peoples ; others make them akin to the Fan and the Manyema who live to the west of Lake Tanganyika. They are dark brown in colour, have well-built bodies of middle height, their heads are not long, their faces are broad, their noses are said by some to be of a Semitic type, but blunt at the tips and wide, the)* have thick lips, full cheeks, ears placed high, rounded chins, and small broad hands and feet. The hair is worn long by both men and women, and it fall- their shoulders, sometimes so far down as the middle of the body ; they dress it in fantastic ways, and plait portions of it, and tie it namental knots and bows. They tattoo various parts of their bodies, they wear long beards, and dress themselves in skins ; necklaces made of beads of all kinds are much prized by them. They arm themselves with lances, shields, and daggers of curious shapes and forms. Tr in groups of huts, but have neither towns nor villages. They are great hunters, and they keep dogs with pointed ears and tails curled up like those of pigs. They 1 See Schweinfurth, Heart of Africa, vol i, p. 416 ft. ; vol. ■me means " man-ea NEGROES AND NEGROIDS trap the elephant, and in former days collected large quantities of ivory. The men have many wives, and infidelity on the woman's part is punished often with death ; to be the mother of many children reflects great credit on a woman, and causes her to be held in high honour. They love music of all kinds, singing and dancing, and they pass a great deal of time in playing the Mangala game on a long board, which stands on four legs, and has sixteen cavities, the pieces being twenty-four little stones or cowries. They cut off the hair as a sign of grief. The bodies of the dead are decorated with feathers, &c, and are buried in a half-sitting position in hollows in the ground or in hollow trees. They sometimes make a chamber by the side of the grave in the ground, line it with boards, and build over it a tukl. The Niam-Niams are a very warlike people, and they make bold, steady, but cruel soldiers ; they eat those who fall in battle, and many who die in the course of nature, and they revel in human fat, with which they smear their bodies. They also eat dogs, a custom which Schweinfurth believes to be allied to cannibalism. Their manners and customs have been well described by Junker, Schweinfurth, Buchta, and others, and all agree in saying that the Niam-Niams are the most intelligent people of the Bahr al-Ghazfd Province. Their most recent visitor was Colonel Sparkes, and he says, " They are far superior to any other people I have met up here." ' There is a striking similarity in their manners and customs to those of the early Egyptians, whose ancestors came from Punt, and it is not impossible that these and the primitive Niam-Niams may have come from the country of the Fan people, which may even have been Pun, or Punt. NuwfiR, or Nuwehr. They live between the Sobat River and the Bahr al-Ghazfd. Their men go naked, and rub their bodies with ashes of cow-dung, and stain their hair red and plaster it with ashes mixed with cows' urine. The married women wear a fringe of grass about their loins, and perforate their upper lip ; in the hollow they wear an ornament of beads on an iron wire, which projects like a horn of a rhinoceros. The men wear coils of beads on their necks, heavy ivory bracelets and copper rings on their arms and wrists, and an iron spiked bracelet which they 1 Gleichen, op. cit., i. p. 161. vol. ii. 433 v f THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN for keeping their wives in order. They are tall and powerful, and carry lances and clubs, and live in large, well-built huts. They live by cultivating the ground, by hunting, and by fishing. Runak. They live to the south-west of Dagd. SiiKKi. They live a little to the north of (iebel Lfid<>. near the Bar!. The men are armed with lances, ebony clubs, bows always strung, and arrows; on their backs they carry a stool and a huge pipe. The women wear leather lappets, and tails made of strips of leather finely cut ; they carry their children in skins slung from the shoulders. SHILLUK. They live on the west bank of the White Nile, between Abu Island .and Lake No; their capital was Fash6da, and they are called by natives Shulla, or Ojallo. They are tall, but of slender proportions, and most of the men go naked ; the women wear a certain amount of clothing. The men arm themselves with spears, shields, and clubs, and are said to be good soldiers, brave, independent, truculent, quarrelsome, obstinate, crafty, cunning, untrustworthy, &c. ; Count Gleichen tells us that they are "the finest warriors in the Sudan," and says that "their morals in relation to women are very good " (i., p. 193). Accord- ing to Hartmann, they live in polygamy.1 Their chief occupation is cattle-breeding, for nearly the whole of the Shilluk country is grass land ; wives arc obtained in exchange for cattle. Shilluk land is ruled by a Mek, and is divided into two provinces, Gerr and Loak, which are subdivided into 29 districts. An excellent account of the Shilluks is given by Count Gleichen in his Hand- book, i., p. 193. It is based on the Reports made by Major Matthew-, bather Banholzer, and the Rev. J. K. Giffen, and it contains much new and valuable information about this most interesting people, especially as regards their history and religion." SlMYAR. A tribe akin to the Kimr and Masalit. near whom they live. SHULLA, A people of the sam< is the Shilluks; they live at the head of the IJahr al-Gebel, or Upper Nile. ■ \. A people who live near the Kimr. Zachawa. They live four days' journey to the north of Al- ter. A branch of the tribe, called Kamalt, lives near Dara. lander, p. 1 19. - See Schweinfurtli. Heart of Africa, vol. i„ p. 72 ff. . . HAMITIC TRIBES II. Nubians. The Barabara, or Nubians, who are to-day a mixture of Nubas, Arabs, and Turks, may be divided into five groups : — I. The Danakala, whose kings ruled at Dafar, old Dongola, Khandak, and the Island of Arko, and who lived between the Third and Fourth Cataracts. II. The Mahass, who live between the Third Cataract and Gebel Dusha, and whose kings reigned at Gebel SAsi. III. The Sukkots, who live between Gebel Dusha and the Second Cataract. IV. The Halfas, who live between Haifa and Sabu'a. V. The Kanuzi, who live between Sabu'a and the First Cataract. Many writers assume that the primitive Nubas were akin to some of the Beja tribes, and have asserted that the ancient kingdoms of Meroe and Napatawere founded by them, but facts in support of this view seem to be wanting. III. Tribes of Hamitic Descent. 'Ababdah. They live in the region of the 'Atbai, from lat. 22° 30' north to the Kena-Kuser Road, and are divided into live groups : — I. 'Ashshanab, whose seat is Aswan, and who live in the desert between Kena and Korosko (Kurusku). II. Malikab, whose seat is at Darfiw, and who live in the desert between that place and Berber. III. Fukara, whose seat is at Ramadi near Edfu, and who live on both banks of the Nile between Kena and Korosko. IV. 'Ubudin and Shanatir, whose seat is Sayyala, north of Korosko. Bisharin. There are three main divisions of this tribe. The first occupies the country on the Red Sea from Kuser to the Atbara; the second lives on the Atbara; and the third in the Gazira of the 'Atbai. The Bisharin claim to be descended from Arab ancestors, but this seems to be impossible. They divide themselves into the descendants of Umm 'Ali and Umm Nagi, the wives of 'Alt Ga'alan, a descendant of Bishar, the son of Kahl, and a descendant of Zuber, whose wife was a sister of 'Abbas, the uncle of the Prophet. The great 'Aliab section of the Bisharin are said to be the descendants of Umm Ali. Beni 'Amar. They live in the country between 'Akik and Senhit, and likewise claim an Arab origin. 435 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN 1.1 a B ah. They live to the east of the Beni 'A mar. Hadanduwa. They occupy the country between Khor Baraka and the Atbara. Halanka. The seat of this people is Kasala. UMMAR'AR. Their territory lies between Berber and Sawakin, and their chief place is Aryab. Sir Reginald Wingate speaks of a tribe of fine, tall men who live in the Eastern Desert, and who are generally known as "Anaks." They are probably the descendants of the tall, handsome men who are mentioned by classical writers in con- nection with their descriptions of the Island of Meroe, and of the Blemmyes. IV. Tribes of Arab Descent. 'AbdALLAB. They live at Halfaya. Their ancestor 'Abd Allah assisted the Fungs in founding their kingdom at Sennaar. 'AKALYUN. Their district is between the Dinder and Blue Nile. 'Alatiyun. On the Blue Nile between Hudebat and Nfashra' Tawla. 'AkakIyin. In the neighbourhood of Abu I.lanix and Wad Madam. 'Arab al-Bashir. Their chief place was 'Ureba. Awi.ai) l.lAMiD. They live near the Habaniya. Aiiamada. They Live near the Gim'a. BAKKARA MAHARABA. Between Sennaar and Gebel Shakada. Bakkara Al-IJawzanla. In the south of Kordofan. Their chief place is Birka. BARRlYAT. Their chief place is Tulu. BATTAHlN. To the north of the Shukriya tribe. Beni Fadl. In the neighbourhood of Al-Fasher. Beni Garrar. In the east of Korddfan, in the region of the ostriches and gazelles. B i.m I.Iasjn, or Awl.ul Abu Ruf. In the country between Gebel Shakada and Khor Duleb. Their chief seats are Al>u IJagar and Markum. r.i.M HasIn. In the neighbourhood ofMasallt. Beni Helba Their chief seat is Bulbul, west of Dara. ARAB TRIBES Buderiya. In Khurshi and Tayyara. They are said to be akin to the Ga'alin. Dar Hamid. In the neighbourhood of the Kabfibish. Dbaina. Their chief places are Tumat on the Atbara, and G ira on the Setit, and Duka. Dughem. Fung. Descendants of this formerly very powerful collection of tribes are found at Renka, near Sennaar, Dabba, and Dongola. They were originally Negroes, but even in the time of Selim (1520) they pretended that they were descended from 'Abbas, a near kinsman of the Prophet. Ga'alin, or Ga'aliyun. These tribes live in the country between Abu Hamed and Khartum, and they are among the best and ablest of all the Arab tribes in the Sudan. Gam'iab. On the Nile between 'Akba Kurra and Shekh At- Tayyib. Gamu'iya. On the White Nile from Omdurman south. Gim'a. Their chief place is Sharkila. Guwama'a. Their chief place is Bara. Habbaniya. Their chief place is Kaka in Dar Fur. Another tribe of the same name has its seat at Sharkila. Halawiyun. In the neighbourhood of Masallamia. Hamada. In the country between the Rahad and the Dinder, and their centres are Dabarki and Dunkur. Hamag. A Moslemized Negro tribe. Their chief seat is Gebel Kali, three days to the south of Karkog. Hamar. x\t Abu Haraz and Nahud, in the district of the tabaldi or water trees. Hasaniya. In Gebel Gilif, in the Gakdul Desert. Hawawir. They are said to have come from Upper Egypt, and they live in the Desert of Gabra. Hawatiya. To the west of Kabkabia. Humr. In Uclia, between Birka and Shaka. Hum rax. Hussunnat. Their chief place is Katena. Kababish. The greatest of all the tribes in Kordofan. Before the revolt of the Mahdi they were said to number 250,000. Their chief centres are Abar, Sana, and 'En Hamid. 437 THE EGYFflAN SUDAN Kanana. They live near Aba Island on the White Nile. Karubat. To the west of Kabkabia. Kiiaw .\ i •. i k. The) trace their descent from the Beni Ummia and the Beni 'Abbas. They are great breeders of cattle and horses., and their chief centre is Wad'a. Kiiaw ai. ada. Near 'Abud in the Gazira. KhawawIr. They are neighbours of the Hasaniya and the Hawawir. Klll'/AM. KuWlHLA. Near 'Abud and Wad Madani. Their nomads live on the west of the Dinder. Akin to them are the HasanAt and the SHANABALA. Kuwahsama. They live to the north of Seimaar. Branchi this tribe are the 'AbDALLAB, and the KAMATlR, who live on the east of the Blue Nile between Kunka and Ruse res, and have their chief seat at Kharko^. LahawIyun. Nomads who live on the White Nile between Kawwa and Gebelen. Mawi.lya. Their chief centre is Karkud, to the north of Tnwvsha and Koz al-Ma'a] M\i>A\i\r\. Their chief centre is Wad Madani. and they are called after their ancestor, Sln-kh Madani. M.MlAKi. MaiiakIva, who are said to be descended from Arabs from Yaman : their chief place is Dur. MASALLAMlYA. They live on the Blue Nile. Mik.u \i.. The)- live to tin- south of the Kubatab. and their chief seat is Berber. The four main divisions of the tribe are Sayy&m, Mustafyab, Labbay&b, and Rahmab. Mr\\siK. On the banks of the Nile at the Fourth Cataract, and at Abu Named : their divisions are W'ah.'ib.'ib, Kabbfma, Suldmaniya, Kagubab, and l.labra. MrsKkh a. Korddfan. Kai viyi \. Ki'imlin, on the Blue Nile. RaSHAIDA, or Arabs from the Nijaz. RubAjab. They live to the south of the Munasir. The three divisions of the tribe are Budertya, Faranib, and Da'ifab. They hold the views of Sudani folk who are- " the companions of king ARAB TRIBES Adh-al-Kkr and the cap," and in their possession are the throne on which he sat, and the cap. Ruzekat, a great tribe of Dar Fur, with its chief place at Shaka. Sarurab. They live north of Omdurman. Shaikiya, a tribe living in the country near the foot of the Fourth Cataract. Its main divisions are the 'Adlanab, Suwarab, Hannikab, and 'Umarab. Shambata. They live between Wad 'Abbfis and Sennaar. ShukrIya, a famous tribe which numbered 500,000 souls before the revolt of the Mahdi. Their chief centres are Rufa'a on the Blue Nile, Al-Fasher on the Atbara, Kadaref, Kala'a Arang, Abu Dulek, &c. Sulem. South of the Kanana. Ta'aisha. Their chief place is Mandawwa, near Kaka, whence came 'Abd Allah, the Khalifa, in the region of the Faratit. Targam. Neighbour of the Masalit. Tumam. Their chief place is Birka. 'Utefat. Their chief place is Anka. 'Urekat. Their chief place is Kutum. Ya'kubab. To the south of Sennaar. Zaballa'a. They inhabit the country between the Rahad and the Dinder. The only prophet they acknowledge is Abu Garid, who was the founder of their sect, and whose tomb exists at Hellet Bunzuka, between Karkog and Ruseres. Thus they say, " There is no god but God : Abu Garid is the prophet of God." Their women are white in colour, and both men and women love pleasure, and the former fatten themselves, and are much addicted to perfumes. Zayyadiya. Their chief place is Mallit. They trade in salt and natron, and derive their stock from Abu Zed of Nejd. The following are also given by Naum Bey Shucair (i. 63) : — Al-Aganib. This name is given to those who have travelled into the Sudan and other places. Al-Hadur. These are certain Egyptians who went from Cairo before the first "opening" of the Sudan, and they live in Khan- dak, Shendi, Masallamiya, and other places on the Nile, and occupy themselves with trade. 439 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Al-AwlAd ar-RIf. This name is applied to the Egyptians, Turks, Europeans, and others, who want into the Sudan after the first " openio Al-Makada, a term of abuse applied to the Abyssinians who are Christians. Al-Gabarta, a name given to Abyssinians who are Moslems. At-Takakaxa. the people of Takriir, to the south of Burnu ; now known as Katku. A l- I.I a i. a i; at, a name applied to tramps, showmen, jesters, and others who lead a careless and irregular life. Religions. The dominant religion in the Sudan is Muham- madanism, and the Arabs have succeeded wonderfully in imposing the teaching of the Prophet on a large number of its inhabitants. Speaking generally, those who are not Moslems are pagans. The Arabs and the Negroes, or Negroid tribes, together destroyed the Christian kingdoms of Dongola and Soba, and their teachings as regards polygamy and slave owning and holding have fitted in well with the natural manners and customs of the bulk of the Sudani folk, [slam appeals to all their material characteristics and instincts, and it allows them a freedom of life which is condemned by Christianity, and promises them a heaven replete with sensual delights and happiness. On the other hand, it must be admitted that it has had a good effect upon the people of certain savage tribes, and the Arabs have certainly been the means of introducing the elements of civilization into places which otherwise would have been given up to the cult of devils and fetishes, and to nameless abominations of every kind. The drawback to Islam, apart from theological considerations, when viewed from a practical, European standpoint, is the un- progressive character of its teaching. Though extraordinarily successful among many of the tribes of north-east Africa, and among several of the Negro peoples of the Sudan, the teachers of Islam have failed to eradicate many m beliefs, customs, and ceremonies, which appear to be among the fundamental peculiarities of their natures. Thus in Sennaar among the Moslem Fungs phallic ceremonies were celebrated during the last century, and the Barta, like the 44<> RELIGIONS ancient Egyptians, used the beetle as an amulet. The Hamags in Ruseres and Fazogli at the season of harvest used to tie a dog to the leg of a couch (ankareb), and then every one present would strike or stab the poor creature until it was dead. The Barta also used to dance at the time of full moon round holy trees, and then make a great feast, during which the grossest debauchery reigned supreme. The Dago in Gebel Dago have a stone idol called Kankara, which they worship in secret. The Budeyat worship a special kind of tree. The Barkad also worship images near Gebel Marra. The Dinkas have a dim belief in a good principle, the creator of things, which they call Deng-Dit. They also believe in the existence of the spirits of the dead, and they maintain a body of workers of magic called " Tit," who are supposed to repulse the evil spirits (Jok) who would attack them, and to make rain. The dead become the children of Deng-Dit. Mr. R. Ttirstig was witness of a ceremony performed in commemoration of a dead wife of Shekh Bor, during which a sheep was slain ; on another occasion he saw a bull slaughtered, and the anointing of the bull and the bystanders with butter, and the dances of feather-bedecked women, all of which things were done for the benefit of a sick man.1 The Dinkas appear to believe also in demoniacal possession. Sometimes when the " rain-maker " fails in his work, the bystanders fall upon him, beat him with their clubs, and then throw him into the river for the crocodiles to eat. Often the Tit are expert ventriloquists. A number of important additional facts about the religious beliefs of the Dinkas have been collected by Major S. L. Cummins,2 which may be thus summarized :— The Dinkas have a most elaborate list of gods and demi-gods. At the head of all is Deng-Dit, the " Rain-giver," with Abok, his wife ; they have two sons, Kur-Kongs and Gurong-Dit, and a daughter, Ai-Yak. Their Devil is called L'wal Burrajok, and is the father of Abok, the wife of Deng-Dit. They account for their origin thus : Deng- Dit gave his wife a bowl of fat, and she and her children softened the fat over the fire, and began to mould from it men 1 Quoted by Gleichen, op. cit., i., p. 146. a See Lord Cromer's Report, Egypt, No. 1 (1903), pp. 97 and 98. 441 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and women in the image of the gods. Deng-Dit warned her against L'wal, or the Devil, who was his enemy, but Abok forgot, and with her children went to gather wood in the forest. There L'wal found the howl, drank the greater part of the fat, and from the remainder proceeded to mould caricatures of men and women with distorted limbs, mouths, and eyes. Then, fearing the vengeance of Deng-Dit. he descended to earth by the path which then connected it with heaven. On discovering the result of her neglect, Abok hastened to her husband, who, greatly incensed, started in pursuit of L'wal. The latter, however, had persuaded the bird Atoi-toish to bite asunder with its bill the path from heaven to earth, and he thus escaped from the divine wrath. The Dinkas do not pray, but they offer sacrifices to their god, who, being rather of a malevolent than benevolent disposition, must be propitiated ; the sky is to them the place of divinity, and the bowels of the earth the place of evil. The Niam-Niams practise augury by means of wooden pegs dipped in water rolled on a flat stool, and by giving fetish-drink to hens; they call such ceremonies " borru." The Bari believe in the existence of a kind of creator whom they call Mini, and also of evil spirits. The mother of their tribe was, they think, a serpent called Yukanye, and they keep tame serpents in their houses. The magicians, whom they call " Bunek," are held in great esteem. especially if they be successful rain-makers. In the country of the Blue Nile, in many places, the people worshipped the river, and made offerings to it. Witchcraft is common everywhere in the Moslem districts of north-east Africa, and at Sennaar the people used to believe that witches took the forms of hyaenas, and went about by night ; at Famaka the black soldiers told Hartmann that they could cross the river by night in the form of hippopotami, and have intercourse with the women on the opposite bank of the Blue Nile. All over the same region a certain kind of python was held in great veneration by all the people, and in this respect the Sudani folk of to-day resemble the Abyssinians. The Shilluks believe in a Great Creator, whom they call ••Jo-iik," who is thought to be in a vague way connected with the events of their lives : they worship him and offer sacrifices to him in an indirect manner. In the beginning Jo-uk created a great RELIGIONS white cow, which came up out of the Nile, and was called Deung Adok. The white cow gave birth to a son called Kola, who begat Umak Ra, or Omaro, who begat Makwa, or Wad Maul, who begat Ukwa, who became king. One day Ukwa saw two maidens, the lower parts of whose bodies were like those of a crocodile, come up out of the river, and after a time, during which they refused to have anything to do with him, he went up to them and laid hold of them. They screamed, and their father, who was part man and part crocodile, came up out of the river to see what was happening; he raised no objection to the proceedings, and Ukwa married the two maidens, who were called Nik-kieya and Ung- wad. Nik-kieya gave birth to two sons and three daughters, her eldest being Nyakang (or, Nik-kang or Nyakam), and Ung-wad to one son only, called Ju or Bworo. Meanwhile Ukwa married a third wife, whose eldest child, a son, was called Duwat. When Ukwa died Nyakang and Duwat quarrelled about the succession to the throne. In the end Duwat seems to have succeeded Ukwa, for Nyakang, and his sisters Ad-Dui, Ari Umker, and Bun Yung, his brother Umoi, and his half brother Ju, got wings and flew to the south of the Sobat River, which they found to be in the possession of the Arabs. These they drove out, and then founded a kingdom of their own. Nyakang, however, wished to people his country with men and women, and this he did by creating them from crocodiles, hippopotami, wild beasts, and cattle. So soon as the men and women appeared all their parents, the animals, were destroyed, so that the human race might never learn what its origin was. The men and women who were made from the animals are called Shulli, or Shulla, i.e., common people, to distinguish them from Nyakang's descendants, who rule and perform all priestly functions to this day. Nik-kieya, the mother of Nyakang, is immortal. She usually appears in the form of a crocodile, and sometimes carries off a human being or an animal ; this mark of her favour is much esteemed in a family. The great god Jo-uk is worshipped through Nyakang, and sacrifices offered to the latter are supposed to be received by Jo-uk, the father and source of all life, and of evil as well as of good. Jo-uk is omnipresent, and to him the dead go when they leave this world. In every village 44S THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN is a temple of Jo-uk, only it is called the " house of Nyakang," and sacrifices are made 10 the god once a year, at the beginning of the rainy season. An animal is slain with a holy spear, and the flesh is divided among the people, and cooked and eaten. The twenty- six kings who have reigned over the Shilluks from Nyakang are, according to Father Banholzer and the Rev. J. K. Giffen, as follows : — i. Dag (Dok). 2. Odage. 3. Kudit. 4. Dokodo (Dak- kode). 5. Boj (Boiwj). 6. Tugo (Tuka). 7. Nya Dwai (Nya dwi). 8. Nya Ababdo. g. Muko (Mo Kao). to. Nya to (Nya ta). 11. Nyakong (Nik Kang). 12. Okun (Ukon). 13. Nya Gwatse 1 *&&$2pp-3S&*'» "y--)3Uj%; mki; [From Lepsius, Denkm'dler, Abtb. VI Bl. . (Nkwaji). 14. Nyadok. 15. Akwot. 16. Ababdo. 17. Awin. i.s. Akoj. ki. Nedok (Nyadok). 20. Kwad Keir (Kwat Ki). 21. Ajang (Ajung). 22. (.win Kun (Kwoe Kon). 23. Yor Adodoit (Yur). 24. Akol. 25. Kur Wad Nedok. 26. Fadiet Wad Kwad Keir. LANGUAGES. The language most commonly used throughout the Egyptian Sudan is Arabic, the principal language of the Southern Semitic Group. A useful work which will serve as a guide to Sudani Arabic has recently been written by Captain 1 These facts are taken from (iiffen, The Egyptian Sudan, London, 1905 ; and from Father Banholzer s Report, summarized by Gleichen, op. cit., 1.. p, 197 ft". 444 ^l|fr£'; HBHi ALTAR WITH MEROITtC INSCRIPTION IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM (No. 892). LANGUAGES Amery, and published by the Government of the Sudan.1 Koelle's Polyglotta Africana may also be consulted. The Nubian language has, in a great measure, been reduced to writing by Lepsius, Nubische Grammatik, Berlin, 1880; and by Reinisch, Die Nuba Sprache, I. Grammatik und Texte ; II. Worterbuch (German- ALTAR WITH MEROlTIC INSCRIPTION IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM (NO. 9Ol). Nubian, and Nubian-German), Vienna, 1879, 8vo ; and by Riippell, Reisen, 1829. On the " Beja Languages," spoken in the Eastern Desert, see Almkvist, Grammatik (Hadanduwa), Upsala, 1880 ; Hartm'ann, Die Bejah Zeii. Ethnog., 1882. The language of the 1 English-Arabic Vocabulary, Cairo, 1905. 445 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Barta has been discussed by Beltrame in 11 Sennaar e la Sciangallah, Verona, 1879; Marno, Reisen in flock Seuuaar, 1870-71; Salt. Account of a Voyage to Abyssinia, London, [809 ; and several of the dialects in their district are also briefly treated of by Marno, Riippell, and Munzinger. Valuable contributions to the study of the languages of the Niam-Niams, Shilluks, Nuwers, Dinkas, Barts, Bongos, Golis, Gurs, &c, x\ ill be found in Schweinfurth, Linguistische Ergebnisse {Zeit. far Etnnol.), Berlin, 1873: Heart of Africa, London. [873; Petherick, Egypt, Sadat, and Central Africa, London, [853-58; Long, C. C, Central Africa, London, : J. C. Mutterrutzner, Die Dinka-Spracke in Central Afrika, Brixen, [866; Thiermdtrchen% Z.D.M.G., Band xxi., [867; Die Sprache der Bart ,Text und Worterbuch, Brixen, [867; G. Beltrame, Gram, e Vocab. delta Lingua Peuka, Rome, [882 ; J I Finnic Bianco c i Dcnka, Verona, i«s>si ; Kueppell, Reisen in A'ubieu, A'ordofau, cS:c., Frankfort, 1829 ; Brun-Rollet, Excursion dans la Region Superieure du Nil {Bulletin dc la Soc. a apAie), iv., s65^ c. Feathers 2,722 d. India Rubber 10 e. Other Articles 1,645 24,565 8. Tribute from Nomad Tribc.^ . 12.404 9- Woods and Forests [6,714 10. By Sales: — a. Government Lands 2,619 b. Salt .... 668 c. Various 6,101 9,388 ii. Customs Dues .04S 12. Ferries 7,504 Cv Stamped Paper 1. 000 M- Licences : — a. Liquor .... 3,459 b. Fire-arms 277 c. Auctioneers and Pedlars 1,197 d. Game .... f,527 t. Prospecting . 2,436 f. Various .... 439 15- Slaughtering Dues 4,i83 1 6. Market Fees .... 7,216 17- Court Fees .... 5,575 18. Fines ..... 4,966 ig. Rent of Government Lands . 4,512 Contribution to Pension Funds 2,503 21. Mehkema Receipts 22. Tax on Treasury Chest Remit- tances .... 4^5 Commission on Postal Money Orders .... 2,39* 24' Sale of Postage Stamps Carried forward 8,375 342,43-2 454 SUDAN BUDGET Brought forward 342,432 25- Telegrams .... i/o/i 26. Transport : — a. Steamers and Boats • 104,643 b. Railways • 172,249 276,892 27. Various 27,095 28. Refund by Egyptian Ministry 1,397 Contribution by Egyptian Government . Grand Total Total 665,387 379,763 . £Ei,045,i50 Statement of the Revenues and Expenditures of Provinces and Departments in 1905. Receipts. 7,058 Provinces. Bahr al Ghazfil Berber Blue Nile Dongola Haifa . Kasala Khartum Kordofan Red Sea Sennaar White Nile Upper Nile 22,528 17,568 31,321 12,124 i3,74i 16,370 37,5oi 11,926 17,655 10,980 17,801 Mil. 084 175 214 048 286 661 842 877 815 989 401 3i5 Expenditures. Mil. 198 on 335 064 073 255 225 22,850 19,318 15,288 16,446 7,680 15,206 16,243 23,005 14,928 25,846 16,039 13,208 648 840 377 441 216,578 707 206,061 403 Departments. Civil Secretary . i,705 494 3i,752 756 Legal .... 3,492 745 19,056 206 Education . 497 978 13,740 097 Agriculture and Lands 2,623 302 3,55i 791 Game Preservation i,746 852 923 082 Carried forward 226,645 078 455 275,085 335 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Brought forward Medical General Central Ser vices Customs Steamers and Boats Posts and Telegraphs Railways Khartum Town . Refund by Egyptian Ministry of War Contribution by Egyptian Govern- ment Governor - General's Office Inspector - General's Office Finance Department . Forestry Survey ,, Cattle Plague Service Public Works Grand Total Reckipts. £E. Mil. 226,645 078 1,002 417 13,248 584 97,989 063 109,847 751 30,532 230 174,962 466 9,785 7io i,397 884 379,763 1,045,174 [83 Egyptian War Dept, for maintenance of Ann}- in Sudfm .... Surplus 1905 passed to Reserve Fund . Grand Total Expenditures. £K. Mil 275.085 14,085 869 27,365 74i 6,359 670 87,516 385 30,442 e^s [26,225 623 15,674 532 2,416 948 [7,602 377 14,567 126 9,078 056 1.567 462 4'), 761 516 681,880 989 186,757 176,536 194 £1,045,174 [83 The Reserve Fund of ££445, 229 has been formed thus : — I. Credit. £E. Surplus of 1902 ....... 20,454 Surplus of 1903 ....... 42,307 Carried forward 62,761 456 SUDAN BUDGET Brought forward Credit from Egypt in 1904 Surplus of 1904 Credit from Egypt in 1905 Surplus of 1905 Credit from Egypt for Public Works in 1906 Total 62,761 15,000 • 140,932 25,000 • 176,536 25,000 ££445,229 Credii Balance ( )|'i;\kd. Unexpended. . Debit. £& £E. Mil. Partial cost of two Evaporators 20,454 1,929 149 Telegraph (Tawfikiya to Kika ) 14,650 Steamers for Ferry . 10,000 65 531 Pearl Fishery Service 3,500 1,011 647 Roads and Communications 17750 7,345 844 Water Supply Works 20,250 Tawfikiya Dockyard 800 61 670 Sanitation 2,500 1,486 189 Law Courts 4,000 2,75i Cadastral Survey 8,000 5,o8i 682 Apparatus for Gordon College < ?>n 4 671 Public Works in 1905 36,000 7,700 Omdurman Tramline 6,250 4,3i9 138 Wing to Gordon College . 15,000 14,121 302 Expropriation of Land 14,606 14,119 532 Cattle Plague Service in 1905 9,000 5,651 266 Electric Lighting 12,700 12,641 5°o Engine for Stern Wheeler 1,500 1,500 Khartum Roads in 1905 . 1,000 264 340 Telephone Extensions 900 55 809 Telegraph (Tong to Mvolo) 9,363 3,099 930 Relaying Khartum Tramline 600 167 343 Quarters at Ad-Dfimar 1,000 564 600 Carried forward 210,145 83,942 143 457 Credit ( Opened. r.,\i Unexpended. £E. M11. 210,145 83,942 143 11,000 9,900 33° 21,235 J* ',609 547 3.125 ui [32 14,000 7,168 606 I43>350 143.350 402,855 265,091 748 42.374 42,374 £445,229 £307.465 7^ THE EGYPTIAN SIDAN Brought forward Special Grants to Provinces Telegraph (Rumbek to Bor) Conversion of Haifa Hotel into Offices Contingencies .... Various Services in 1906 . Total Unpledged Balance .... Grand Total . One of the most urgent needs in connection with the develop- ment of the country is Easy MEANS of CONVEYANCE both for men and goods. The natives have from time immemorial used the river for this purpose as much as possible, but the mass of floating vegetation called sadd or sudd, which choked the river south of Lake No, and the Cataract of Shabluka and the cataracts between Abu Hamed and Haifa, have always prevented the establishment of regular transport from the Sudan to Egypt for merchandise in large quantities by river, at certain seasons of the year. As a result, the native merchants of Dar Fur and Kordofan sent their goods and marched their slave-caravans by the " Arba'in ' Road," through the Oases of the Western Desert to Asyut or Cairo, and, in order to shorten the journey by cutting off the bends and windings of the river, merchants who traded with the natives on the Blue Nile sent their wares from some town such as Kiis, or Dai Aw. or Korosko, through the Eastern Desert, vtd Abu l.lamed and Berber. On the White Nile, i.e., the Nile between Khartum and Lake No, the only obstacle to navigation is at the ford of Abu Z&d, where in years of very low Nile a portage is necessary. On the Upper Nile, now that the sudd has been removed, there is a clear water-way to Gondokoro. The Blue Nile is only navigable for steamers for 1 I.e., the " Forty Road,': because the journey along it from one end to the other occupied forty days. 458 STEAMERS AND ROADS six months of the year, and the Atbara is useless as a water-way the whole year through, but several of the rivers in the Bahr al- Ghaztil Province have been ascended in steamers for very considerable distances from their mouths. When funds become available the Government will, no doubt, place steel boats and barges of shallow draught upon these rivers, and the development of trade will be greatly stimulated. A small steamer has been already placed on the Gur River, with the view of opening up communication for trade purposes with the French Congo, but the Raffili Falls at present obstruct the navigation to and from French territory, and nothing can be done until the rocks are blasted away. It is to be hoped that money may be forthcoming to extend and improve the Government Steamer Service in the Sudan, and that Commander Bond, R N., may be able to increase still further the benefits which his sound judgment, unosten- tatious work, and capable hands have bestowed upon the Sudan. After the rivers, the commonest and most natural means of communication are the Roads. Purely native roads in the Sudan, as in Turkey in Asia, leave much to be desired. They are narrow, winding, and tortuous, and the natives would rather make their beasts travel double the distance than remove the obstacles in the way of their progress. During the last few years the authorities have taken the matter seriously in hand, and Lord Cromer reports that there are over 4,000 miles of good roads now in the Sudan. The roads are tracks thirty feet wide, more or less straight, cleared of trees and stumps when they pass through forests or bush, defined by stones in the open country, and with ramps into and out of the kkors. Along the 2,550 miles of road opened in 1905, some 121 wells were made, thirty-three of them by private enterprise. A road for wheeled traffic between the White and Blue Niles has been begun by Mr. Gorringe, who has already completed the section between Ruseres and Gebel Agadi, a distance of twenty-four miles. He is now extending it to Renk, and when completed it will bring the southern districts of the Province of Sennaar into communication with a water-way open at all seasons of the year. In connection with the roads of the Sudan it is important to note the very thorough exploration of the country which has been 459 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN made by the civil and military officials during the last few years. All the old native trade routes and caravan roads have been travelled over, the towns and villages, and the country between them, carefully described, the distances from place to place measured, and every point of interest, and every piece of informa- tion, which was thought likely to be of use to administrative officials and travellers, have been noted. Besides the old roads new country has been diligently explored, and new routes found out, and the probability and possibility of the development of trade along them have always been kept steadily in view. This most useful work has been unostentatiously performed by Capt. H. F. S. Amery, Capt. F. H. Armstrong, Mr. J. Baird, Capt. A. B. Bethel, R. A., C- Sergeant Boardman, Major W. A. Boulnois, Major Bulkeley Johnson, Capt. Y. Bunbury, Mr. Jennings Bramley, Capt. Bower, I.S.C., J. Butler Bey, Sorel Cameron Bey, Mr. E. Bonham-Carter, Capt. R. C. Carter, Colonel Collinson, Capt. T. Conolly, Mr. James Currie, Director of the Gordon College, Major de Rougemont, Capt. Dugmore, Lieut. H. L. H. Fell, K.N.. Capt. C. E. Foster, Colonel Friend, Count Gleichen, Major C. W. Gwynn, D.S.O., R.E., Colonel Gorringe, Capt. H. R. Headlam, Colonel St. George Henry, Capt. H. Hodgson, Lieut. L. C. Jackson, R.E., Capt. Kenrick, (apt. C. Leigh, Capt. C. H. Leveson, Capt. C. 11. Lewin, R.F.A., Mr. C E. Lyall, Capt. H. 1). W. Lloyd, (apt. H. G. Lyons. R.E., Colonel B. Mahon, C.B., D.S.O., Capt. McKerrell, Capt. E. G. Meyricke, R.E., Colonel Mitford, Capt. H. H. Morant, Mr. R. E. More, Capt. J. R. CTConnell, Capt. A. C. Parker, Capt. A. Percival, Capt. R. I. Rawson, Major Powell, R.E., Major H. Y. Ravenscroft, Capt. C. Roberts, R.A., Capt. G. J. Ryan, Major G. de H. Smith, Colonel W. S. Sparkes, C.M.G., Capt. X. M. Smyth. Y.C, Major E. A. Stanton, Governor of Khartum, Lord Sudeley, Colonel the Hon. M. G. Talbot, R.E., Capt. A. A. C. Taylor, Lieut. A. M. Taggart, Capt. C. H. Town-end, Major Tudway, Major E. B. Wilkinson, Capt. H. H. Wilson, Capt. P. Wood, and others. The " Routes " compiled by the above have been carefully edited, in some cases with additions, by Count Gleichen in the second volume of his Hafidbook, and many of them are to be obtained separately at the Sudan Office in Cairo. A number of 460 ROUTES, MAPS, RAILWAYS other " Routes " have been compiled by the editor himself and printed in the same volume, and this collection of " Itineraries" must always be regarded as one of the most important pieces of work done by British Officers in the Sudan. All the useful facts collected by earlier travellers, such as Baker, Junker, and Schweinfurth, have been drawn upon, and there are many evidences that the information which has been collected by sportsmen and others in the Sudan and Western Abyssinia during the last six years has been examined and sifted by Count Gleichen. Side by side with the making of " Routes " the survey of the Sudan has been carried on under the capable direction of Colonel the Hon. M. G. Talbot, R.E., and, as the result of the work of himself and of his assistants, the Sudan Government has been able to publish a series of accurate maps of the country on a scale of about four miles to the inch. It is proposed to issue in all about 140 sheets, and of this number more than fifty have been already published ; each sheet covers one degree of latitude,1 and one and a half degrees of longitude. The country of the Sudan was never so well known by any of its conquerors in the long course of its history, and the British are the first among them to survey it and to make maps of it. From what has been said above it is clear that if the Sudan is to be developed, other means of communication must be found besides the Nile and the roads, and for nearly thirty years before it was carried out the idea of connecting Khartum with Cairo by railway was in the air.2 The first section of the railway to Upper Egypt ended at Asyut, about 210 miles from Cairo, and from this town travellers to Khartum usually went by river to Korosko, crossed the desert to Abu Hamed, and the rest of the journey they performed partly by camel and partly by boat. Many travellers preferred to take ship to Sawakin, and then to cross the desert to Berber, and so on by camel or boat, or both, to Khartum. A few hardy travellers with abundant means and leisure followed the course of the river the whole way from Cairo 1 For the list of the sheets already published, see Gleichen, op. cit., i., p. 349. 2 The first to propose it was Sa'id Pasha in i860. Surveys were made by Mougel by Messis. Walker and Bray in 1865, and by Mr. J. Fowler in 1871. 461 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN \ fit to Khartum, but it is obvious that the waste of time and money involved in such a journey prevented it from being generally adopted by merchants and officials. The administration of the Sudan was carried on by means of the telegraph, of which there were several lines in the country. Thus there was the main line from Cairo to Khartum, another from Khartum to Kordofan, a third from Khartum to F&zogtt, a fourth from Berber to Saw&kin, and smaller lines connected Khartum and Berber with Masaw'a, Saw akin, Kasala, Kallabat, Kadaref, and many other places in the Eastern Sudan. In a fashion this arrangement worked fairly well, so far as the transmission of the orders of the Government were concerned, just as it does in Turkey in Asia at the present time, but a telegraph system cannot supply a Government with all the information it ought to possess, and the first to realize this to the fullest extent was Isma'il Pasha. This Khedive determined to quicken the means of transport between Khartum and Haifa by building a railway on the east bank of the Nile, intending it to proceed through the Provinces of Sukkot and Mahass to Dongola, thence to Merawi, and on to Khartum via Berber and Shendi. A survey of the country was made, contracts were signed, and work began at Haifa in 1877. In course of time the railway reached Sarras, 33 miles from Haifa, and the road-bed was made for about 40 miles more ; the gauge was 3 ft. 6 in. The route chosen is, how- ever, said by experts to have been a wrong one, and the object of the surveyors appears to have been to make the undertaking cost as much money as possible. The gradients are far too steep, and near the Arobikd] Wells and other places they are positively dangerous. The cost of the railway per mile was very high, and the Khedive decided, some say at the request of General Gordon, to stop the work. Even the section of the line which was laid was never properly worked, and many of the locomotives ordered for it were never put under steam. In 1887 I saw several of them still standing on the river bank, tied up in sheets of native calico, and scattered about in the mud, close to the water's edge, were numbers of the machines used in repairing locomotives; these were intended to be placed in the workshops which were never built. The decision to stop making the railway at Sarras was an unfor- 462 WADI HALFA-KERMA RAILWAY tunate one; had the line been continued to Akasha ('Ukasha) it would have been useful in bringing down dates from Sukkot, and a reasonable tariff would have led to a development of trade. The line from Haifa to Sarras remained utterly useless until 1884, when the Royal Engineers of the Gordon Relief Expedition set it in order, and, having repaired the road-bed and continued it to 'Ukasha, used it for military transport. When the British retired from the Sudan in the spring of 1885, the Dervishes came north, tore up the rails for about 22 miles, and carried away as many of them, with bolts and fishplates, as they thought they required. Some of the sleepers they used for building huts for themselves, and others they burned to warm themselves at night, and to cook their food. In 1887 I saw a number of the " sleeper" huts made by the Dervishes and the remains of the charred wood, and to several places in the Cataract portions of the line, which the Dervishes could not take to pieces, had been dragged bodily from the road-bed, and thrown down the rocks near the water's edge. Curiously enough, the Dervishes did not interfere with the portion of the road-bed, 22 miles long, which Isma'il's engineers made beyond Sarras. Between 1885 and 1896 the line from Haifa to Sarras was just kept in working order and nothing more. The engines were old and in a dangerous condition, and there was no rolling stock worth mentioning. In 1896, when the Dongola Expedition was decided upon, the Royal Engineers once more took the railway in hand,1 and the works which they carried out on it were of such a comprehensive character that they may be said practically to have rebuilt it. During the expedition the line was extended to Kerma, about 201 miles from Haifa, and thus we see that the length of the extension added to the old Halfa-Sarras line by the British was about 170 miles. The extension was of course hastily built, but it did splendid work, under the care and superintendence of a band of young Royal Engineer officers, among whom may be mentioned Lieutenants E. P. C. (now Sir Percy) Girouard, D.S.O., G. B. Macauley, A. G. Stevenson, H. L. Pritchard, H. A. Micklem, G. C. M. Hall, E. C. A. Newcombe, and R. B. D. Blakeney. For three or four years after the capture 1 Lord Kitchener actually began to build a railway from Korosko to Abu Hamed, but lie abandoned the scheme and made his line start from Haifa. 463 TIIK EGYPTIAN SUDAN THE HM.l A-Al'.t IIAM1.D RAILWAY. From a plan by Sir E. Percy C. Cirouanl, K.C.M.O. of Omdurman the Ker- ma line was regularly worked, but unfortu- nately at a loss, and in 1902, whilst the working expenses amounted to /'Kj^oo, the receipts from paying traffic were only ££3,526. The line was in a very bad con- dition, and as a large sum of money would have been required to repair it thoroughly, it was decided to close it. In 1 90 3 the rails be- tween Kerma and Kosha were taken up and sent on to Atbara to be used in the construction of the Red Sea Railway, and the sleepers were stacked at Kosha. At the present time the railways in the Stidan are: — I. The LINE FROM IJalia to Kosha. about 108 miles long. The stations between the t\\ < > termini are : Sarra miles from Haifa, Murrat 47 miles, Ambik4 miles, and 'Ukfisha 86 miles. j. The LINE FROM Ha 1. 1 a to Khartum, about 575 miles long. 464 |:to° WADI HALFA# l:ti° J|rV^.No.i J7 ■ 3"\ /PSarras 33 l»* |»d .J4° 2 1 JiyMurat 47 X 'UfSft1'1* \N0.4WellS . ^KP^mbigol 64 77\<.r Gebil.Nuhoaaiwt ■ r2/ >^\kasheh S0 > 703&NO.5 'j^oMurrat Wells **KOSHEH 70S «eW/feAe/S§j f Gebel Mindara 726&No.6 Wells SJ OKuror M»r/.. d\* c x CDuljjo .•"\N0.8 .■J72\ so3 V /it jj \N0.9 / %' ■< W9\ KERMA VS j?72\No. 10 Junction v^Ji^-VjAbu Hamed £//& 24*fcDekheish DONGOLA< .... DakhfiuVj/-^ ^\ »5^??' Abu DistpoY li5" \ Gebel vOr ^—^ Gebel el Kirbehan \V «,// Birti \\ on? y' f ShereikhV^7 Khanda j^X m .'.":••.. Barkal ,Kareima 220 Kilom. Abu SillemO 1MEROWE 378 \ J V)01dDongola J **<"■*%%. Abadiafc Vi. 343 W V^ ! ^OKorti °A 3(j;)\ . — . D c b b aO^N^^a****^ BERBERS" \ 363a 18° Afat Atbaratt* 38ar* EL DAMERH^ ., Zeida^04 Map of the SUDi ^N RAILWAYS Aliab/f47C Mutmir(&20 17_ s cale ofEjiglish Miles M IT* Pyramids of Merujl:-: 1 » 50 0 50 100 Kabushialf44S Tarauma#60 From Wadi Haifa to Khartoum the METEMMEHO^ figure s denote distance in English _w*-N^^> . 477 Miles measured along the Railway. Shabluka^jy^% Q°* ^ From No 10 Junction to Kareima distance Catamctjf -S^/. "* **«? • shewn in Kilometres. Wad Raml}5547 *^ '^ 10° Gubba»557 "i0 BKadaru 565 OMn fiHALFAYA (Khartoum North) KHARTOUM* X 575 \ ^\ | I 1 / V [30° k |»« { las'V 34° IAP SHOWING THE ROUTE OF THE HALKA-KoSHA RAILWAY, AND THAT OF THE NEW RAILWAY FROM NO. IO STATION TO K-VREMA IX THE DONGOI.A PROVINCE. VOL. II. [From a copy supplied by Capt. E. C. Midwinter, R.E. 465 H h WAD1 HALFA-KHARTUM RAILWAY The construction of this railway is one of the greatest of the works which have been done by the British in the Sudan. When the advance to Dongola was effected in 1896, the idea was mooted that the Sirdar should proceed from Merawi to Matamma across the Bayiida Desert, and thence to Omdurman, and for a time it seemed likely that the further advance of the Frontier Field Force l ^ ^ -A. • J j/m ulfl ^' immmm^L _m ^^'^^SgggggggK^^'' ' "W -,4MBHMHl "^-r fir / * Wp^'i4 THE DRIVER OF THE " GEDAREF " AT NO. 4 STATION IN THE ABU HAMED DESERT. would take place by this route. The Sirdar, however, thought otherwise, and he determined that his battalions should go for- ward by the Nile, and by the Nile only ; in 1897 the places which he most wanted them to occupy were Abu Hamed, at the head of the Fourth Cataract, and Berber. The Frontier Field Force was already at Merawi, at the foot of this Cataract, about 140 miles 467 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN from Abu Hamed, but the Sirdar was wondering the whole time if there was not some way whereby he could convey his supplies from Haifa to Abu Flamed direct, a distance of about 230 miles, instead of sending them by rail to Kerma, 201 miles, by steamer from Kerma to Merawi, Jjh miles more, and by camel to Abu Named another 140 miles, in all about 5N7 miles. At Length he determined to make a railway from Haifa to Abu Hamed, and this notwithstanding the objections raised by many engineers and •RATED AMERICAN ENGINE "\ I UK IIM.IA ABU-HAMED RAILWAY. others, who knew the desert very well, and who declared the thing to be an impossibility. No map of the desert by any competent authority existed, and those who had crossed it from Korosko gave contradictory accounts as to details, but all agreed that there were no wells anywhere on the route of the proposed railway, and no water, and that it was so full of hills that no railway could be taken across it. The Sirdar was unmoved by any of these objections, for he the Abu Hamed desert better than any one else, and he confident that his knowledge was correct. More likely than not he had ridden over every mile of it in years past, 468 WADI HALFA-KHARTUM RAILWAY when he was quietly working out his plans for the reconquest of the Sudan. His experience in the Gordon Relief Expedition taught him the difficulties which a General who succeeded in reaching Omdurmfm would have to overcome before he got there, and that the greatest difficulty of all was the country and not the enemy. The exact route of the railway had, of course, to be planned by railway engineers, and a party was sent out to make the survey. When they returned they reported that about ioo A SHADY RESTING-PLACE. miles from Haifa the country rose to a height of from 1,200 to 1,500 feet, but that the ascent to the ridge and the descent from it were gradual, and that they had found a strip of "easy desert," which reached the whole way from Haifa to Abu Hamed, along which the line might be laid. They had also noted two places in the desert, about 77 and 126 miles from Haifa respectively, where they suggested that trial borings for water should be made; subsequently when wells were sunk there, water was found at the depth of 70 feet. The discovery at these places decided the route of the railway once and for all. 469 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Without delay work was begun at Haifa (the other terminus was actually in the possession of the Dervishes), and after May 4th, . when the line to Kerma actually readied that place, the whole of the Kerma railway battalion was sent from the Nile to the Aim Named desert, and the line was pushed forward with astonishing speed and success.1 It advanced at the rate of over a mile a day, 1 The following description of the making of the line, by Mr. Knight, the able correspondent of the Times (September 11th, 1897), is excellent: — ". . .1 walked to the end of the work and back. As this is a record "railway, and the methods employed are, I believe, in some respects unique, an " account of the order of the operations ought to be of interest In the first " place, the banking of the section had been completed in the morning (for a "great part of the way no embankment was necessary, and the sleepers had "merely to be laid on the desert), so the 800 men who had been engaged on "this work were at the time of my arrival resting at the end of the formation, "to which the entire railway camp was to be moved in the evening. Still "further off, and out of sight, was the survey camp, under the command of "Lieutenant Pritchard, R.E., which 1 was unable to visit. On walking up the "line from the further end of the work I first met the 17c men who were " bringing up the sleepers from the train and laying them, and also 200 men, "divided into gangs of to each, who were carrying and placing in position the '■ heavy rails. No one shirked his work ; on the left of the line hurried up the "sleeper carriers, each man with two or three of these on his shoulder ; on the •• right of the line worked the rail carriers, nine men to each rail, swinging along "with a fine stride. Backwards and forwards they went until they had emptied "the trucks of the mile and a half of material, which they did in a remarkably "short space of time. Immediately behind these I found a party of thirty men "and boys, the former bolting the fish-plates to the newly-laid rails, the latter — "the son of Hatriuda, the Dervish general who fell at Firkeh, was among "them holding the expansion pieces. Closely following these were 100 first "spikers, who spiked every other sleeper only ; and a few rough straight* "whose work left the railway incomplete, but made it possible for the engine "and train I 1. So just behind these came the train of material from "which the first-mentioned parties were unloading the rails and sleepers as fast " as they could handle them, following the train and working on the portion of " line over which it had just passed came four fish-plate tighteners and sixty "final spikers, who spiked the alternate sleepers which had been left by the spikers working at the head of the train. Next came six rough " straighteners, whose work was preliminary to that of the next party of 100 "men who were employed in lifting and packing; then came [90 men boxing and "tilling, and. lastly, a party of straighteners. It was a mile-long line of men tru( ting a railway through all the stages of the work. Every advance of "the train, and of the successive working parties from section to section, meant my hundreds of yards more of completed railway thrust into the desert. " <>ne realized this best when one sat on the train and felt it move on a little »'way every few minutes. We timed our progress and found that we were, on 4/0 WADI HALFA-KHARTUM RAILWAY and in the month of October the telegraph brought us news at Merawi that on one day three miles of rail had been laid and spiked down. The record for the whole of that month was fifty miles. By May 4th about fifteen miles had been laid, and at the end of August the railway had reached mile 160, and on October 31st it entered Abu Hamed. The whole line, 231 miles long, was laid in six months, and the work was carried out during the hottest months of the year. The engineer officer whose name must ever stand out prominently in connection with this wonderful piece of work is Lieut, (now Sir Percy) Girouard, who had already displayed the powers of organization and resource which he possessed in the construction of the Kerma line, and he in turn was most ably supported by Lieutenants Macauley, Stevenson, Pritchard, Polwhele, Midwinter, and others. There was no opening ceremony, and there were no speeches and mutual congratulations ; the locomotives alone did the " puffing." That trains should be running regularly into Abu Hamed in less than three months after it had been captured from the Dervishes seemed to be in the usual order of things ! The distance saved by the railway between Haifa and Abu Hamed is nearly 360 miles, and it enabled the Sirdar to dispense with a whole army of camels, and to obtain each supply of stores three weeks earlier than before. From Abu Hamed the railway was continued to Atbara Fort without difficulty, a distance of 151 miles. After the capture of Omdurman on September 2nd, 1898, a sum of £E300,ooo was granted from the Special Reserve Fund to continue the railway from the Atbara to Halfaya, opposite to Khartum. The Atbara is crossed by a girder bridge 1,050 feet long, made by an American firm for £6,500 ; the substructure and the making and placing of the cylinders were carried out by an Italian contractor. At the northern end of the Atbara-Khartum section a good deal " the average, doing eighty yards in six minutes— a rapid rate for railway "construction, when it is borne in mind that they are here working with only "one shift of men. The absolutely finishing work on each section is done by a "party of 150 men who are employed on the final lifting, straightening, packing "and boxing. They follow on about three miles behind the main working " parties which I have described, thus allowing several heavy trains to pass " over the lines and settle it before these final adjustments and corrections are " made. . . .:' 471 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN of cutting and banking had to be done, and towards the southern end the making of drainage cuttings and culverts cost much time and money. In spite of all this, the railway reached J.Ialfaya on December jist, 1899, and the journey from its northern to its southern terminus could be made with comparative comfort in about thirty-six hours. At the present day the time occupied on the journey is only twenty-six or twenty-eight hours. The train dc luxe, or, as the natives call it, muftakhar, i.e., the '* proud," provides the traveller with even- comfort, and supplies food and drink without difficulty. The sleeping berths are most comfort- able, and the compartments are roomy; they are provided with electric light and fans, a flap-table, cane chairs, and wire- gauze and other shutters, which permit the occupant to admit as much or as little light as he pleases. Though the gauge is only 3 feet 6 inches, the width of the bodies of the coaches is nearly 9 Every detail has been carefully thought out, and as the internal arrangements of the coaches represent the sum of the experience and needs of many desert travellers, the result is admirable;. Each compartment contains two berths, but there is far more room in it for the occupants than in the ordinary Continental train deluxe, unless one of them overcrowds it with luggage. There are no baths on the train, but this causes no inconvenience, as the train stops long enough at Abu I. lamed to allow travellers to enjoy the excellent baths which the authorities established by the side of the station. The stopping-places and stations on the Haifa- Khartum Kail- or tlie Sudan Government Railway, are: — Miles From IIai.ia.1 No. 1. '17. 2. 36. No. 3. 55. Xo. 4. 77. Here are wells on the east side of the line. Between Xos. 4 and 5 the country rises considerably, and in skirting Gebel Xahoganet the line makes a series of interesting curves. 1 I am indebted to Capt. E. C. Midwinter, R.I".., D.S.< ».. for these details. 472 WADI HALFA-KHARTUM RAILWAY Milks from Hal fa. No. 6. 126. Here are wells on the east side of the line, a large triangle, and some workshops. On the east is the terminus of the short line which runs to the gold mines. No. No. No. 9. No. 10. 148. 172. 199. 212. Between Nos. 9 and 10, on the east, is Gebel Mugran. Here is the junction of the new line to Karema. Miles From Hal fa. Abu Hamed Mashra' ad- Dakhesh Abu Dis Sharekh Abu Sillem . Abidiya Berber (North) Berber (South) Atbara Junction Atbara Ad-Damar . Zedab . Allah . Mutmir, or . Mukhmiya Umm 'Ali . Kabushia Taragma Shendi (Shindi) Al-K6z Wad Bfi Nagaa Al-Mega 230. t 248. £ The railway runs close to the river. 267. ' 291. Here the line bends away into the desert. 318. In the desert, some miles from the Nile. 343. A village of some size. 361. 1 Here the old caravan road to Sawakin 363. j started. 384. 385- 39-2- 404. 416. 429. 437- 448. 460. 47 *« 483- 496. Here the Sawakin railway joins the Khartum line. The first station on the Island of Meroi;. Nearest station for the Pyramids of Meroe. Here are several railway workshops. Here the railway leaves the river and cuts straight across the bend which contains the Shabluka Cataract. 473 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Miles from IIalia. 1 Gari . • 5*4- Royan • 538. Wad Ramla . 547- Here the railway approaches the rivti Kubba (Kubalab). 557- Kadaru . • 565. Hal fay a, or . Khartum North 575. THE RAILWAY FROM ATBARA TO SAWAKIN AND PORT si DAN. "From a copy supplied by ( ;ipt. E. ('. Midwintt rhe line from the Nile to the Red Sea. This railway - the Nile about one mile to the north of Atbara station, at a point called " Atbara Junction," or "Sawakin Junction.*' and crosses the Eastern Desert to Sal- L6m, where there is a junction. The line to the right runs south to Sawakin, via Handub, and that to the left runs north to Sh&kh al-Barghuth, which is to be officially known henceforward as " Port Si'id.-'in." The distance from Atbara to Sawakin is -507 miles, and from the former place to Port Sudan about the same. There are in all jji miles of main 474 ATBAHA-RED SEA RAILWAY line, and 15 miles of sidings. The cost was about ££1,375,000, or about ££4,150 per mile. The steepest gradient is 1 in 100, and the sharpest curve 5 degrees. Work on the main line was begun in August, 1904, and the first through train from Atbara reached Sawakin in safety on October 15th, 1905. The passengers were Messrs. Midwinter, Longfield, Sowerby, Lord, and Pelham, and the journey occupied 30 hours. Work was carried on simultaneously at each end of the line, but the Atbara section RAILWAY SHOPS, SAVVAKIN. [From a photograph by Capt. E. C Midwinter, R.E., I). SO. advanced more quickly than that which started at Sawakin, where there was much blasting to be done. Colonel Macauley, R.E., had the greatest difficulty in obtaining labour, and in the end recourse was had to the sturdy Egyptians. On several occasions there were bad " wash-outs ;' caused by rains in the mountains behind Sawakin, whilst in the desert the men were often short of water. Colonel Macauley and Captain E. C. Midwinter had had much experience of such difficulties, and in the end they triumphed over them all. 475 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN The opening ceremony of the Nile and Red Sea Railway was performed by Lord Cromer, and took place on January 27th, 1906, at Port Sudan. After a speech by Sir Reginald Wingate, Sirdar and Governor of the Sudan, Colonel Macauley, R.E., Director of Sudan Railways, made a statement of facts connected with the new railway, and tendered his thanks for assistance to Lieut. W. B. Drury, R..N, Capt. W. E. Longfield, R.E., ('apt. M. E. Sowerby, R.E.. Lieut. S. F. Newcombe, R.E., Lieut. P. C. LEAVING SAW AKIN. From a photograph by < • E Mason, Esq. Lord, R.E., Hon. A. Pelham, Mr. R. W. Windham. Capt. E. C« Midwinter, D.S.O., R.E., Mr. C. Hodgson, Mr. G. B. Macphersoo Grant, Mr. H. V. Hawkins, Mahmud Hey Kh«'r Allah, and five other native officers and gentlemen. Lord Cromer then made a h worthy alike of the great occasion and the speaker. He pointed out that the railway had been made in fourteen months, that the distance from Berber to the sea was henceforward shortened by nearly 900 miles, that the railway would be the main artery of communication which would open out the Sudan 476 i ATBARA-RED SEA RAILWAY to the world, that it would create a trade which, but for it, could never come into existence, that it was the first step in the execution of a series of works of great public utility which would be carried out by the British in the Sudan, and he indicated what these works would be, and he stated that Port Sudan and the Red Sea Railway would be open on equal terms to the trade of all the world. There would be no differential rates or duties to favour the trade of any one nation. After this speech Sir Rudolf von Slatin explained in Arabic to all the notables and local merchants LAVING THE ATBARA-RED SEA RAILWAY. [From a photograph by Lieutenant P. Lord, R.E. the effect which the railway would have on their trade, and then in the name of His Majesty King Edward VII. and H.H. the Khedive, Lord Cromer declared the railway open. H.E. Muhammad Pasha Chawarby then addressed the assembly in Arabic, and described to his auditors the great improvement which had taken place in the finances and conditions of Egypt under the influence of the British. The opening of the Red Sea Railway is the most important of all the great works which Lord Cromer has effected by the help of Lord Kitchener, Sir Reginald Wingate, and their band of hard- working assistants in the Sudan. For years past he has deter- mined to have this railway made, for he says that without it the 477 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Sudan could never develop, and the country would remain shut in from the world, as it has been from time immemorial. The Haifa- Khartum Railway could never have done what this railway will id by no other means could the Sudan have been given a seaport. Hitherto the Sudan has never had an outlet for the energies of its people and the produce of its land, and for thousands of years before the coming of the British its tribes, having realized the impossibility of developing a large and profit- able trade, have devoted themselves to inter-tribal fighting and wars. No one need wonder that the slave-raider turned the Sudan into a happy hunting-ground, and that the only function which it seemed to perform in the scheme of the world was the production of slaves. Some years ago Lord Cromer deli\ the fellahtn of Egypt from the oppression of a corrupt rule and placed them in the position of free men, and he has now done the same thing for the "Blacks" of the " Black Country." He it is who has brought the key and unlocked the Sudan for the first time. This fact is patent to all, but it is only future genera- tions who will be able to appreciate at its proper value the " first and preliminary step in the gradual execution of a large ".-cheme for the construction of works of public utility," which was announced to the world in such modest language on January 27th, [906, at Port Sudan. The stations on the Nile-Red Railway are as follows : — ' PORT Sidan 84 kilometres from Sawakin. Asotriba 19 kilometres from Port Sudan. Sal-Pom Junction 39 ,, ., ,, wakin. llandub _> i kilometres from Sawakin. Sal-Lorn Junction 45 ,, ,, 01,0 57 kilometres from Port Sudan Kamobsana 75 ., . . , . . , Krba .. (iebet "5 " Summit " . , Barameyu 158 .. 1 I owe this list to C. Midwinter, R.E., D.S.O. 47* ABU HAMED-KAREMA RAILWAY Erheb 179 kilometres from Port Sudan. Thamiam 198 >> •>■> »5 >> Einha 225 >> " )> ) J Shidieb 250 )7 >> >> »> Talgwareb 266 >> 5> J) , Musmar 299 t) J > ) J > Rogel 324 ,, »'» >> . Togni 340 ,, > J )> > Zehteb 372 >> >» 5> J j Ogren 386 >> 5 > J> > J Dogain 420 )> ,, ,, > Hudi 452 ,, • 1 it j , Zullot 468 ,, >> >> , > Atbara Junction 486 „ „ The fare from Atbara to SawAkin is 307 piastres, first class. 4. The Line from Abu Hamed to Karema. This line runs in the desert on the right bank of the Fourth Cararact, and only approaches the Nile once en route, viz., at Dakhfili ; it is 138 miles long. It was surveyed and made under the direction of Capt. E. C. Midwinter, R.E., D.S.O., assisted by Mr. C. G. Hodgson, Locomotive Superintendent, Mr. G. B. Macpherson Grant, and Mr. H. V. Hawkins. It was opened by Sir Reginald Wingate on March 8th, 1906. By the opening of this line the Dongola Province is brought into direct communication with Haifa, Khartum, and the Red Sea, and it may be confidently predicted that its trade will receive a great stimulus thereby. It may be mentioned in passing that it will also enable the traveller to visit the ruins of the temples and the pyramid-tombs of the Nubian kings at Gebel Barkal and Nuri, and, as steamers ply at regular intervals between Merawi and Kerma, he can proceed without difficulty to Dongola, and the islands of Arko and Tombos, where there are interesting remains of the Middle and New Empires. Other lines contemplated are: — 1. A branch from the Nile-Red Sea Railway to Kasala. 2. A line up the left bank of the Blue Nile. 3. A line to Al-Obed to bring the gum of Kordofan to Khartum. Since the closing of the Halfa-Kerma line the profits on the railway system of the Sudan have increased considerably ; 479 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN in 1905 the receipts were ££171.000, the working expenses /"E 1 1 8,000, and the profits ££52,000. The receipts from the railways in 1899 were ££31,000. One of the most important results of the opening of the Nile-Red Sea Railway is that coal is now cheaper in Khartum than wood. Since 1896, the year of the advance to Dongola, the TELEGRAPH m has been developed in a remarkable manner. The good work begun by that able officer, Lieut. Manifold, R.E., has been continued, and at the present time Khartum is in direct communication with all the great towns of the Sudan. About 3,925 miles of telegraph lines are open, and there arc thirty-five telegraph offices in the Sudan.1 The principal lines are: — 1. From Khartum to Haifa, both across the Abu Flamed Desert and along the river, via Dongola, Kerma, Kosha, K<">/ Abu Guma. 6. From Mashra4 ar-Rek to WViw and Tong.8 7. From Khartum to Al-()bed. The extension of the line from Tong to Rumbek is now being carried out. The receipts from telegrams in 1905 were ££29,000 and the working expenses were about £E 30,000 ; in 1NN9 the receipts E 3,500. In 1905 about 164,000 private tele-rams sent over the wires, while in 1901 the number was only In connection with the railways and telegraphs mention must be made of the Sudan POSTAL SERVICE. This Service was established at Haifa in 1897, and for the next year or two its chief customers were the officers and men of the Anglo-Egyptian Army. The natives, however, soon perceived the importance and value of a speedy and safe letter-post, and merchants and others ued to make use of it. In the winter of [901-2 the head- quarters of the service were removed to Khartum, and the postal and telegraph services were united and placed under the direction of Captain Liddell, K.F. The head of the Khartum Office is Mr. Williams, to whose experience and labours the Postal Department 1 See the list in Gleicben, op, d/.} i., p. 219. - Ibis line was laid by Major Dale and Corporal Stead, K.K. 480 THE • * = 'Mr- }- -': i a THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN supply of water from the Nile in Egypt, but he has proved that it influences it to a very small degree. This is not to be wondered at seeing that it is the Sobat, the Blue Nile, and the Atbara which are the ruling factors in the production of the annual Nile flood. On the other hand, the Sudd when it blocked the Bafrr al-Gebel, or Upper Nile, seriously interfered with the navigation on the river, and it practically cut off all communication with the country south of Lake No. In some years the main channel of the White Nile was blocked by Sudd for a distance of 250 mile-. Thus in 1863, 1864, and [868 it was blocked ; in 1N70 Sir Samuel Baker found it blocked so far as Lake No. In 1N72 both the Bafrr al-Gebel and the Bahr az-Zara fa were blocked. In 1X74 Ayub Pasha cleared the former river, but the channel was blocked again in 1878, and Linin Pasha could not ascend it. In 1 S 7 < - 1880 Marno cleared the river once more of Sudd. In 1880 I Pasha was completely hemmed in bySudd in the Bahr al-Ghazfd, and he lost more than half his force by famine and fever. In [881, i>s>Vf, iN()5. and [899 the Upper Nile was completely blocked by Sudd. In 1899 the Egyptian Government determined to clear the river, and the work of carrying out their decision was entrusted to Colonel Peake, R.A. He left Omdurman on December 16th, and by March 27th, EQOO,his party had removed 14 blocks of Sudd in a length of about 83 miles of river. The total length of these blocks was about 8,666 yards, and the thickness of the Sudd varied from 5 ft. 6 in. to 20 ft. Colonel Peake worked with 5 gun-boats and 800 Dervish prisoners, guarded by 100 black soldiers, 5 English and several Egyptian officers, and some English non-commissioned rs. The method he employed was to cut the Sudd into rect- angular blocks, which he hauled out of their places by steamers. and then allowed to float down the stream.1 When Colonel Peake stopped work on March 27th. only two more blocks remained to be removed, viz., No, 15 and No. 16. No. 15 was a reach of the river, about 2 ; miles long, blocked by Sudd the whole way. No. [6 was about 8 miles long, and really contained four blocks ; it emovedin January, 1901, by Lieutenant Drury, R.X., assisted by one English sergeant of Marines. " Major Peake and all who "served with him may well be proud of the results of the season's 1 Sir William Garstin, /u:v/>/, No. 2 (1901), p. 39. THE SUDD " work. He rendered a great service, both to Egypt and to the " Sudan, by opening up this important river. The work was well " and thoroughly done." l " It is difficult to speak too highly of " the work done by Major Peake and his staff in 1900. Lieut. " Drury also deserves a word of special mention. The work was " very heavy. . . . The result has been an immense improvement " in the navigation of the river." 2 In 1901 and 1902 Major Matthews cleared away about one half of block No. 15, but the rains stopped his work before it was finished. In January, 1904, Lieut. Drury, R.N., and Mr. Poole attacked the remaining portion of the block, but the former be- came so dangerously ill of malarial fever that he had to be taken back to Khartum, just when success was in sight. Therefore steamers passing north and south had, in 1904, to follow the false channel through the shallow lakes. This, however, mattered little, for steamers plied at regular intervals between Khartum and Gondokoro, the most northerly station of Uganda, and communi- cation between these places was maintained throughout the year. Lieut. Drury's work was taken up by Engineer-Commander Bond, R.N., and Engineer-Lieutenant Scott-Hill, R.N. Between 1900 and 1904 a channel was cut through the Sudd on the Gur River by Lieutenant Fell, R.N., the late Captain Saunders, and Colour- Sergeants Boardman and Sears. Turning now to Agriculture, we find that each year more and more land is being brought under cultivation, and that the natives are beginning to realize the blessing of peace in the country. In 1904 the area cultivated was equal to 529,239 acres, and in 1905 it had increased to 704,872 acres, i.e., a total increase of 175,633 acres. The principal crops raised were barley, cotton, dhurra, millet, maize, onions, lubia, beans, wheat, and simsim. There were 23,898 acres of cotton, and 22,000 of wheat. The plant- ing of date trees is going on steadily, especially in the Dongola Province. The number of fruit-bearing trees there in 1885 was about 600,000, but in 1897 the returns furnished to Mr. Dawkins by the Ma'amurs gave the numbers as 376,512. This decrease was due partly to the cutting down of the date trees by the Dervishes in the Haifa District, and partly to the break-up of the date 1 Egypt, No. 2 (1904), p. 120. 2 Ibid. (1901), No. 2, p. 39. 483 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN trade between Dongola and Haifa caused by the Dervish revolt. Colonel Jackson, Mudir of Dongola, reported in 1905 that the number of date trees in the province in that year was only 366,000, but that thousands more were being planted. Intimately connected with the development of agriculture in the Sudan are the great schemes for the Irrigation of the country which have been thought out by Sir William Garstin, who has examined the whole course of the Nile with the special purpose of finding out what can be done to regulate and improve the water supply of Egypt, and to extend irrigation both in that country and in the Sudan. The result of his labours is to show that the destiny of Egypt is bound up with that of the Sudan, and that the power which holds Egypt must also hold the Sudan, for the simple reason that the very existence of Egypt is in the hands of those who have control over the waters of the Upper Niles and their great tributaries. Stated generally, the twofold problem which Sir William Garstin has to solve is how to obtain four thousand millions of cubic metres of water to enable the whole of the two millions of acres of cultivable land in Egypt, which are at present uncultivated, to be irrigated and made to produce crops. Next, what steps are to be, or can be, taken, whereby all the summer water in the Blue Nile will be used for the benefit of the Sudan. It is understood that the waters of the White Nile must be ved for Egypt and the river valley between Khartum and ii. The only possible solution of the first part of the problem is to find some way of saving the waters of the I>ahr al-Gebel or Upper Nile, which are now wasted. This waste takes place as the river Hows through the " Sudd" region, and is chiefly due to ration which goes on over an expanse of marshes Ing an area of about 35,000 square miles, and to the absorp- tion of the water-plants which fill it. The wast that at the point at which the river -add " region it is from 50 to 80 per cent, less than when it entered it. No matter how high may be the water-level of Lake Albert, or how large the added volume brought in by the tributary streams which enter the river, the discharge of the Nile at the point where it issues from the "Sudd' area is practically constant at all seasons and under all conditions. Any works -4*4 GARSTIN'S IRRIGATION SCHEMES connected with the in- creasing of the present water supply, i.e., which shall enable the greater portion of the water en- tering the Bahr al-Gebel from Lake Albert to reach the head of the White Nile near the junction of the Sobat, must be carried out be- tween Bor, about 100 miles from Gondokoro, and the junction of the Sobat, about 444 miles north of Bur. To im- prove the channel of the Bahr al-Gebel suffi- ciently to enable it to carry all the water re- quired in the future is impossible,and the same maybe said of the Baljr az-Zarafa, which is a much smaller river. Sir William Garstin there- fore proposes to cut a channel between Bor and the Sobat junction sufficiently large to take the entire future sum- mer discharge of the Bahr al-Gebel, or Upper Nile. This channel would practically be a huge canal, about 210 miles long, which would be provided with 485 MAP SHOWING ROUTE OF SIR WILLIAM GARSTIN S PROPOSED CANAL IN THE SUDAN. [From Sir W. Garstin's Report, by permission of the Comptroller of H.M. Stationery Office. THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN a masonry regulator at each end. In the winter no water would be allowed to pass into the marshes, but in flood time the reverse would be the case, and only water sufficient for purposes of navigation would be allowed to enter the canal. The present long winding channel through the marshes would be replaced by a straight canal, very much shorter than the existing line. In this way a perfect control over the Upper Nile could at all seasons be obtained. As regards the Blue Nile, Sir William Garstin proposes to construct one or more barrages or weirs on this river somewhere between the point where it issues from the hills and Khartum. These works, which will raise the water-levels of the river, must be accompanied by large distributary canals on either bank. Other irrigation works contemplated in the Sudan are in con- nection with the Kash, the Rahad, the Dinder, and the Atbara. The estimates of cost are : — £*■ Works on the Bahr al-Gebel . . 5,500,000 Reservoir on Blue Nile Barrage on Blue Nile . Gazira canal-system Works on Kash River . Regulation of Lakes 2,000,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 500,000 2,000,000 13,000,000 It is believed that when the whole of Sir William Garstin's scheme is completed, about 1,000,000 acres in the Sudan will be brought under cultivation, and that the direct return, in the shape of land tax, at 50 piastres tariff per acre, will be £E5oo,ooo a year. And Egypt will benefit by the extension of perennial irrigation from Aswan to the sea. In this way the Sudan will prove to be, as Lord Cromer says, " a priceless possession to Egypt," and the life-giving waters, which are now wasted in the swamps of the "Sudd" area, will be brought to Egypt and will fill the heart of the farmer with joy, and put money in his pocket. When the Anglo- Egyptian Army captured Omdurman TRADE in THE StDAN was practically non-existent. The most im- portant products of the country under Turkish and Egyptian 486 TRADE rule were slaves and ivory; the market value of the former cannot be stated, but the export of the latter brought in from ££40,000 to £E6o,ooo. As soon as possible after the Khalifa's overthrow, Sir William Garstin visited the Sudan and travelled through it, and in his opinion gum, ivory, and senna were the three articles most likely to be exported for some years to come. There was a demand for clothes, sugar, cheap hard- ware, and especially iron nails, tobacco, cheap cottons, and tea. He further reported that progress must be very slow, that the poverty and depopulation of the country were very great, that the people were an indolent race, the Arab scorning manual labour, and the Negro doing no work except under compulsion or under the goad of his personal necessities. South of Khartum the natives needed to do very little work for a living, north of that place they had to work harder, for nature was less bountiful in her gifts. In spite of these facts, however, the authorities seized every opportunity of developing trade, and in 1904 the imports into the Sudan, via Wadi Haifa, were valued at ££935, 800, and the exports from the same place at ££303,502. The imports were : candles, cement, coffee, cotton stuffs, dates, drugs, flour, grain, iron and machinery, oil, petroleum, perfumery, provisions, rice, salt, soap, spirits, sugar, tallow, tea (100 tons !) timber, tobacco (158 tons), &c. The exports were : barley, butter, cotton, dates, dhurra, gum, ivory, ostrich feathers, palm trees, sinnamecca, sesame seed, skins, timber, lupines, wheat, &c. The imports, via Sawakin, Sennaar, Kasala, Italian territory, and Lado, were valued at ££136,000, ££4,448, ££15,644, ££6,858, and £E2,ooo respectively; and the exports at ££67,000, £En,345, ££2,764 and ££4,753 (nothing from Lado) re spectively. Thus the total imports were £1,100,750 in value, and the total exports ££389,364. The imports via Wadi Haifa in 1905 were valued at ££1,092,000, and the exports only ££251,000 ; for Sawakin the figures are ££171,000 and ££58,000. The above facts give abundant proof of the extraordinary success which has attended the efforts of the " small but very capable band of officials, ably directed by Sir Reginald Wingate," in the Sudan. In connection with the trade of the country, 487 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN attention must be called to the praiseworthy determination of the authorities to control the Liquor Trade in the Sudan. By an Ordinance promulgated in May, 1899, it was decreed that no one should trade in wine, spirits, &c, except under a licence, which costs ££50 a year. Every application for a drink licence is considered on its own merits, and with due regard to the size of the town, number of people in it, &c. We may now briefly summarize what has been done for the people of the Sudan themselves. One of the first things decided upon by Lord Cromer was the abolition of SLAVERY, but this was a matter of very great difficulty,1 for slavery in all its forms Iwaya been a fundamental institution among African peoples. In [899 a Slavery Department was formed under the direction of Captain McMurdo, and in the same year Colonel (now Sir John) Maxwell, Governor of Omdurman, reported that forty-seven persons had been condemned to various terms of penal servitude or imprisonment for dealing in or kidnapping slaves. In 1902 strenuous efforts were made to check slave-raiding on the Eastern Frontier, and the Sudan Government began to deal with domestic slavery in a successful manner. In 1903 Sa'id Ibrahim, a powerful shekh, was tried at Al-Obed for slave-trading, and, in spite of his influence and popularity, was sentenced to five years' imprison- ment. This action had a very decided effect upon the people, who clearly saw that the Government were in earnest in their efforts to put down the trade. Captain McMurdo, Mr. Gorringe, and Mr. Shakerley, all of the Slavery Department, worked with great success in the Abyssinian Frontier and in Kordoian, and they entirely prevented large gangs of slaves from being smuggled down to the coast. In the same year great strides towards the abolition of domestic slavery were made in Egypt; according to Lord Cromer this was due to the fact that the Egyptians 1 to think that slave labour was more troublesome and more costly than free labour ! This state of things had, of course, its reflex effect in the Sudan. In 1904 Colonel Gorringe succeeded in capturing the notorious -raider Ibrahim wad Mahmud, the terror of the Kastern Sudan : the ruffian was hanged, his followers slain, and their 1 See Lord Cromer's opinions in Egypt, No. 3 (1899), p. 31. 488 SLAVERY stronghold destroyed. The scene of Ibrahim's operations was the country of the Burun Negroes, and when Mr. Gorringe went through it after his namesake had captured the raider, he found that there were no children there, that the proportion of adults was seven men to one woman, and that there were no sheep, goats, poultry, or cattle in the villages. In this year the slave- trade received a very great check in the Sudan, and sixteen persons suffered imprisonment for being concerned in it, with the result that people were beginning to dread the slavery laws. In 1905 Colonel McMurdo found that the steady advance of civilization, improved means of communication, and the general opening up of the Sudan were all tending to destroy the slave- trade. The British Inspectors were ever on the watch, and ever devising means which more and more convinced the raider that it was becoming too difficult and dangerous an undertaking to deal in, in fact that slave-raiding did not pay. Moreover, the natives themselves are beginning to realize that slavery is illegal and is punishable by law. Between January and September 1st, about sixty-seven slave-dealers were captured, tried, and convicted, and sixty-one of them received sentences of imprisonment varying from seven years to one. It must, of course, be some time yet before slave-raiding and domestic slavery can disappear from the Sudan, but they will certainly come to an end when the country is opened up, and its wild parts are under effective control, and the people have work to do, and legitimate trading makes the slave-trade unprofitable. Meanwhile the British officials are doing a great and good work in a quiet and unostentatious manner, and their tactful and humane treatment of the natives will do more to bring about the result which we all desire than all the heroic measures and treaties which have ever been formulated. Isma'il Pasha's decree, which ordered that slavery should cease in 1889, was not worth the paper it was written on, and in turn amused and irritated those who understood the question. General Gordon, the best of all judges, knew this quite well, and Colonel Stewart took the same view. l As regards Education in the Sudan, Lord Cromer states that in 1899 the only education obtainable was in the village schools, 1 See Egypt, No. 11 (1883), p. 24. 489 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN with the exception of two Government schools, one at Haifa and the other at Saw&kin. He decided to start two Government schools in each of the large towns, and to open a primary school at Omdurman. The teaching was to be in the Arabic language, and to consist chiefly of reading, writing, arithmetic and Arabic. English was to be taught in the higher classes. In 1900 Mr. Bonham-Carter started an educational system which produced extremely good results, and reflected great credit on his fore- sight and energy;1 in November of that year Mr. James Currie became Director of Education in the Sudan, and Principal of the Gordon College. During that year it was decided to establish a certain number of kuttabs, or village schools, taught by trained Egyptian teachers, and a start was made at Khartum, Omdurman, Berber, Dongola, Wad Madani, Haifa, and Saw&kin. Meanwhile the Gordon College was approaching completion, and when it was habitable Mr. Currie determined to place there : 1. A Sudan Reference Library. 2. An Economic Museum. 3. A Meteorological Station and a small Observatory. 4. A small Analytical Laboratory. Without the College these schemes would have been impossible. In 1901 an efficient primary school was opened at Omdurman; it was attended by 170 pupils, of whom 103 paid fees. A similar school was opened at Khartum on October 1st, 1901 ; it was attended by 72 pupils, of whom 60 paid fees. In these and the village schools Mr. Currie decided to have the- teaching done in the Arabic language, and both he and Lord Cromer were wholly opposed to the establishing of schools for the teaching of English, " for the sake of the supposed political " advantage which such teaching indirectly confers upon the ruin- class." Only boys who are subsequently going into the rnnient service, or who are to follow commercial pursuits in which such a knowledge is necessary, should learn English, and the schools wherein it is taught should be good, and " it is nearly as important that at the present they should be few." They should also be fee-paying, though there might be a certain number of -cholars. The great need of the country was, and still is, a class of young men whose knowledge of reading, writing, and 1 See Egypt, No. 1 (1901), p. 75. 490 GORDON COLLEGE arithmetic will enable them to occupy with advantage the subordinate places in the administration of the country. The lack of such retards the development of the country, and the "prevalent illiteracy" enables the petition-writer, the money- lender, and others, to victimize the people to a terrible degree. In 1902 there were 215 pupils in the Omdurman School, of whom 181 paid fees, and in the Khartum School there were 115 pupils. In 1903 the number of pupils in the five educational establishments1 in the Sudan was about 600; they were of all nationalities, Blacks, Arabs, Egyptian Moslems, Copts, Greeks, &c. In 1904 Lord Cromer reported that " a very fair amount of progress " had been made by Mr. Currie in carrying out his plan formulated in November, 1901, viz.: — 1. Creating a small artisan class. 2. Diffusing elementary education among the people. 3. Creating a native administrative class. At the same time, however, it was felt in that year that the time had come when the introduction of a new educational programme was inevitable, and Mr. Currie proposed to establish a good secondary school, and two higher primary schools, and " to provide increased accom- modation at the Gordon College, so as to make that institution, even more than at present, the centre of the higher education of the country." To carry out this idea Lord Cromer provided £Ei5,ooo. At that time the three chief educational agencies at work at the Gordon College were : 1. A Training College for Schoolmasters and Judges in the Muhammadan Courts, with 85 pupils. 2. A Primary School, attended by 150 boys. 3. Industrial Workshops, attended by about 70 boys. At the close of 1905 there were 1,533 boys under instruction at the various Government schools in the Sudan. Of these, 392 were at the Gordon College, 229 at the higher elementary schools, 29 at the training colleges at Omdurman and Sawakin, and 723 at the elementary vernacular schools, which have now been established at 13 different centres.2 The principle of levying an education rate was also sanctioned in that year, and it was decided to make a beginning in the Blue Nile Province and in Sennaar. The educational system of the Sudan now centres in the Gordon College at Khartum, an institution which owes its existence to 1 Egypt, No. 1 (1904), p. 94. 2 Ibid., No. 1 (1906), p. 145- 491 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN the response of the British public to the appeal made to them at the end of 1898 by Lord Kitchener. The appeal brought in a sum of money sufficiently large to pay for the erection of the handsome building which now stands on the west bank of the Blue Nile, a little above Khartum, and to provide an endowment fund of £100,000. Lord Kitcheners general idea was, "to give " the most practical, useful education possible to the boys for their 11 future in the Sudan," and he intended Arabic to be the basis of education. These were his objects in appealing for means to establish the Gordon College, and when we come to consider the work which is now being done in the College itself, and in connection with it, it will be clear that its sphere of usefulness is far wilier than that which was originally contemplated by Lord Kitchener. It is possible that during the first years of its existence the " Gordon School " would have been a better name for it than the " Gordon College," for it was originally intended to be a sort of " Higher Primary School," where education was to be given on the lines of the Aswan and Wad! Haifa Schools. The rapid development of the Sudan, however, and the course of events in general throughout the country, especially during the last three or four years, have shown that, on the whole, the title of " Gordon College " is the best that can be given to the institution at the present time. The handsome building is a very prominent object at Khartum, lally when seen from I.lalfaya, and reflects the greatest credit on the original designer, Fabricius Pasha, and on Colonel Friend, R.E., Director of Works, and others who carried out the work of construction. The opening ceremony was performed by Lord Kitchener on November 8th, 1902, in the presence of Sir Reginald and a very large number of the military and civil officers of the Sudan. During the ceremony, Mr. Currie, the Principal of the College, read a letter to Lord Cromer from Sir William Mather announcing his splendid gift of " the equipment " for a Department of Manual Training and Technical Instruction, 11 together with a Complete Apparatus for the establishment of M practical Workshops in the College." This equipment consisted of a steam boiler, steam engines, electric dynamos and motors, pumps and accessories for raising water from the Nile for the use 492 GORDON COLLEGE of the College, machines and hand tools for wood and metal work, and sundry appliances for experimental illustration. Before the Gordon College was finished and opened, Mr. H. S. Wellcome, of the firm of Messrs. Burroughs and Wellcome, generously presented to the Institution an efficient analytical and bacteriological laboratory, equipped with all the necessary apparatus. An Economic Museum was also established there under the direction of Mr. Butler, of the Animals Preservation Department. We may now refer to the work which has been done in the Gordon College in recent years, the facts here given being taken from Mr. Currie's Report recently issued. The Patron of the College is His Majesty King Edward VII. ; the President, Lord Kitchener; the Hon. Treasurer, the Right Hon. Lord Hillingdon; and the Hon. Sec, Baldwin S. Harvey, Esq. The following are the Committee and Trustees : Lord Kitchener, Sir Reginald Wingate (ex officio), A. Falconer Wallace, Esq. {ex officio), Lord Cromer, Lord Rothschild, Lord Hillingdon, Lord Revelstoke, Sir Ernest Cassel, H. Colin Smith, Esq., Sir Henry Craik, Henry S. Wellcome, Esq., and Sir William Mather. The College now consists of three sections : a Primary School, a Training School for school- masters and judges in the Muhammadan Courts, and the instructional Workshops. The Primary School is attended by 180 boys. The curriculum extends over four years, and is intended to fit a boy for some minor Government post. The Boarding House was in 1904 full, the number of boys being 25 ; it has been enlarged and now holds 50 boys. The boarding fee is £g per annum. The Military School and the Training College are flourishing. The Workshops provide practical instruction in Carpentry, Fitting, Smiths' work, Moulders' work, Cotton-ginning, and a preliminary stage of mechanical Engineering, which includes the management and repair of Oil and Steam Engines, Pumping Machinery, and Turning. It has been decided to devote a sum of £5,000 from Mr. Beauchamp's bequest to a considerable extension of the Work- shops. Also the staff of the Higher School will contain a very efficient English element, and Mr. Drummond, of the School of Agriculture in Egypt, and Mr. Simpson, an Orientalist from Edinburgh, have already been appointed. The Workshops are under Mr. S. C. 493 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Rhodes, and have produced already excellent results, and the Head Master of the Primary School and Training College is Ahmad Effendi Hadayat. The Director of the Wellcome Labora- tory is Dr. Andrew Balfour, who has published two most valuable Reports on his investigations into the Sudan bacteriology. One important result of his labours is that Khartum is now practically free from mosquitoes, and his discovery of the causes* of certain diseases in Sudan cattle must, in a very short time, greatly benefit the community. In this work the Government have been helped by Dr. Sheffield Neave, the Travelling Pathologist, whose appoint- ment was made possible by Mr. Wellcome's generositv. Dr. Beam, the Chemist to the Laboratory, has carried out a series of analyst - of the waters of Sudan rivers, and has obtained important results. Through the courtesy of Mr. James Currie I was enabled t through a large portion of the Gordon College in February, 1905, and to see the arrangements which have been made by him and his staff for carrying out work there. I visited the Economic Museum and found the exhibits well displayed, and labelled in a clear and instructive manner. The collection is one of very considerable interest, and it is so arranged that a great deal of information may be gained about the products of the Sudan in a comparatively short time. The Committee of the Museum have for their Secretary Mrs. Broun, an expert botanist and en- tomologist, possessing a special knowledge of Sudan and Indian plants. In and about the Museum are many objects of interest, and among them visitors will note with interest the printing press and the lithographic stones from which General Gordon's pro- clamations were printed. Dr. Andrew Dalfour explained to me the arrangement of the Laboratory, and also some of the iments and processes wherefrom he was collecting important results. He pr< »udly pointed out a number of bottled " specimens " connected with Ins researches into the effect of marissa (beer) drinking on the human stomach, and with 4* pigmentation " in the human skin. One remarkable specimen was a child in an embryonic state, the offspring of black parents, whose skin was quite white. The arrangements seemed to be perfect, and that the utmost as made of the appliances which Mr. Wellcome had given to 494 GORDON COLLEGE the College was evident. When one looked round on the orderly rooms and the apparatus, it was almost impossible to realize that less than seven years ago the Dervishes were in possession of Khartum, and that the town was a heap of ruins. Mr. J. \V. Crowfoot, Inspector of Education, then showed me some of the class-rooms and their equipment, and the arrangements made for the well-being of the pupils, and all were excellent. No time has been lost in getting the educational machinery of the College into working order, but, on the other hand, there has been no undue haste. Mr. Currie has made good every step he has taken, and the goal which he has ever kept before him has been the education of the boys of the Sudan on useful and practical lines. Some critics have complained that his system is too practical, but this is impossible. It would be a terrible thing for the country if the higher education of the people were to consist of " grammatical conundrums, and arid theological and metaphysical disputation," and it is quite certain that the course which he is following is in accordance with the wishes of Lord Kitchener, Lord Cromer, and Sir Reginald Wingate, who best know what are the true needs of the youth of the Sudan. The Gordon College is playing a most important part in the development of the country, and events have already justified Lord Kitchener's foresight in founding it. England unwittingly allowed Muhammad 'All and his descendants to depopulate and ruin the Sudan, and it has fallen to England's lot to repair the injury to it which they committed. Her soldiers, co-operating with the Egyptians, have crushed the Khalifa and restored the country to the dominions of the Khedive, and some of the ablest of her sons are now shaping the future of the Black Country in the interests of peace and civilization, instead of those of the slave- raider. Philanthropists never gave money with a better object than the founding of the Gordon College, and it should afford great satisfaction both to them and to the originator of the scheme to note how wisely and judiciously, and with what regard to the true interests of the country their money is being spent.1 1 For detailed information concerning the curriculum of the Gordon College, see the Annual Report (1904) of the Education Department, which may be obtained at As-Sudan Printing Press, Khartum. 495 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN The list of schools controlled or inspected by the Education Department, Khartum, with the number and nationality of their pupils in 1905 and 1906, printed on the opposite page will interest all friends of Education in the Sudan. I owe this list to the kind- ness of Mr. Currie, and much regret that want of space prevents the printing of all the information on the subject with which he has so generously provided me. The establishment of a simple and humane system of criminal and civil JUSTICE, adapted to the requirements of the country, is due to the labours of Mr. Bonham-Carter, the Judicial Adviser to the Government of the Sudan. The Sudan Penal Code and the Sudan Code of Criminal Procedure were enacted and applied for the first time in 1899, and both were drafted by Mr. W. E. Brunyate, of the Contentieux de l'Etat. The Sudan Penal Code is an adaptation of the Indian Penal Code, and the Sudan Code of Criminal Procedure of the Indian Code of Criminal Procedure. " All offences are ordinarily tried in the province in which they " have been committed, the smaller offences before a single " Magistrate, the graver crimes, after a preliminary inquiry by a " single Magistrate, before a Court of three Magistrates, called a " Mudir's Court, or Minor District Court, presided over by the " Mudir, or other high official. Except in unimportant cases, " there is a right of appeal from the judgment of a single " Magistrate to the Mudir. Judgments of Minor District Courts - * and of Mudirs" Courts require confirmation, the former by the 11 Mudir. and the latter by the Governor-General. The Governor- " General possesses a general power of revision."1 In 1900 Mr. Bonham-Carter found that the "administration of justice reached a high level of excellence." Accused persons were with little delay, and criminal trials were characterized by fairness and patience, punishments being generally lenient good beginning was made in the administration of civil justice, and Courts for the administration of the Muhammadan law were established in the principal towns of the Sudan. Mr. Wasey Sterry was appointed to be Civil Judge at Khartum. In 1900 all the Kadis, or native administrators of Muhammadan law. were in pt of a moderate monthly salary. A scale of fees was fixed, 1 Mr. Bonham-Carter, in Egyptt No. 1 (i9co\ p. 53. 496 SCHOOLS nO o :- < u Oh p £ p & w tf hh w W s EC h H ::, pq 0 Z Q C w h c u , 3 w w Hi cr. M X, Q £ £ < c !* h i— i ►J J Z 0 c Pfii h 55 0 < u tf 0 * c p w Z u CO w h 73 W > < Uh O C/J W H < 7U ■ 0 H < P3X!IM • r,0C '-J- co co oo no ,| mM | M | NO -1- ssuuaqjajj " 1 M W " 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 ^ CO CO R3lOBia 1 1 ***-;k3- f-*n ii i m i i -1- CO sqnjy S| !>, IT) in Tt-\0 tN\Q N fO Q\ O O *t- h NOO N O i i -i- Nationality Religion snoauHj "l3DS!W 1 M 10 1 1 1 MM i r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n 1 1 r^ au,ei)suq3 1 * 1 1 « « 1 II! II II O SUI3lSOJ\[ snoairej i33SIIM co O O M Oi-i co t^-oo conn 0"0 cN COO 'fl On TJ-OO CO -nO O tf)N O O rj- t}-nO m O M O O "i O O hoc OOM^O conO O "ri-oo CO /, M u 0 z > o at Khartoum Haifa Suakin Berber Blue Nile Kassala . >> Dongola . White Nile o 0 a u Gordon College M i) Khartoum Omdurman . Haifa" . Suakin . Berber . E\ Damir Shendi . Metemma Rufaa . Wad Medani Kassala . Gedarif. Dongola Geteina VOL. II. 497 k k THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN and these were handed over to the Government. These arrange- ments have had a very far-reaching effect in the country. In 1902 some 624 convictions for crime took place, and Mr. Bonham- Carter was satisfied that the system of criminal justice which had been introduced was suited to the requirements of the people. On the other hand, native ideas were found to be sometimes out of harmony with the law, especially in such matters as Slavery and the Game Laws. In the matter of the administration of Muham- madan law, Mr. Bonham-Carter's efforts were ably seconded by the Grand Kfuii, Muhammad Effendi Shakir, and by Sh&kh Muhammad Hariin, the Inspector of Muhammadan Law Courts. In 1904 the British civilian legal staff of the Sudan consisted of a Legal Secretary to the Government (Mr. Bonham-Carter), a Chief Judge, three Judges, and an Advocate-General. The systems of legal procedure both Criminal and Civil, and the manner in which they are administered by military and civil officials, have been fully discussed by Lord Cromer in his Reports,1 and to these the reader is referred for information on the subject. Neither the systems nor the men who apply them may be perfect, but the practical result of their application by the said officials is that the natives are generally satisfied with the ions of the Courts, and admit that they are just. Moreover, they obey them, and they know that the judgments of the Mudirs and Magistrates, even when against them, are the result of honest investigation of their cases, and that bribery has played no part in forming them. In a country like the Sudan, where there are so many groups of tribes, each with its own unwritten code of and where large numbers of men prefer Muhammadan to ipean Law, it must be many years before exact justice will be vitv case which is brought before the Courts, and before the last dissatisfied litigant will cease to exist. It may, however, be claimed, as the result of Mr. Bonham-Carter's efforts, that there was never a time in the history of the Sudan when so little bribery in the Courts existed, and when the native was treated with such fairness, consideration, patience, and humanity as now. In many places the minds of the people ait- in such a back- ward state that " the principles underlying European systems of ;/>/. No. i (1904), p. 88, and No. 1 (1905), p. 127 ff. 498 BELIEF IN MAGIC criminal jurisprudence lose their significance when applied to them." In support of this statement Mr. Bonham-Carter quotes the following cases : — i. A native of southern Sennaar was tried for murder. He pleaded guilty, and said that he had killed his victim because he had cast the evil eye on his brother, thereby causing his death. The guilty man thought it was his duty to avenge his brother's death. 2. Taha All and Ahmad Hamad were partners in a butcher's business. Taha Ali told his partner that ten and a half dollars belonging to the business had been stolen, but Hamad did not believe him, and accused him of theft. They agreed to go to a holy man (fakir) and try the matter. When the partners had stated their case, the fakir wrote certain formulae on a board, and then washed off the writing with water which he poured into a bowl. He then dipped a piece of bread into the water, and divided it between the two partners, who ate it. Soon afterwards Taha Alt was taken ill, and, returning to the fakir, told him that he had stolen the money ; after this he became worse, and died a few hours later. The medical examination revealed no sign of poisoning.1 3. A Shilluk called Kwat wad Awaibung was tried for murder. He pleaded guilty, and said : " Ajak wad Deng, whom I murdered, owed me a sheep, but would not pay me. He said he would show me his work, and next day my son was eaten by a crocodile, which was, of course, the work of Ajak wad Deng, and for that reason I killed him. We had had a feud for years, as I was a more successful hippopotamus-hunter than he was, and for that reason he was practising witchery over me and my family." 8 The majesty of the law was vindicated by a sentence of death passed on the prisoner, but it is good to know that on the Governor's recommendation it was reduced to a term of imprisonment and a fine. In every department of the Government the officials are doing their utmost to promote the well-being of the people, and to protect the natural resources of the country. The Medical and Sanitary Department has, with very limited means, already worked wonders in freeing certain districts from the curse of the 1 Egypt, No. 1 (1903), p. 77- 2 Ibid> No- z (J9°4) P- 89. 499 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN mosquito, and under the direction of Colonel Penton many districts have been rendered comparatively healthy. In the GOVERNMENT Hospitals 40,862 out-patients and 3,357 in-patients were treated in 1903, and since that year the numbers have increased ; many natives willingly pay for treatment. The Prisons Department, started by Captain Borton and now directed by Major Coutts, has worked with excellent results, and order is kept among the people by the Sudan Police Force, which now numbers 1,820 men. The game and forests of tin- Sudan are also objects of care. For the former a large tract of land has been set apart as a sanctuary, and wise Ordinances for regulating the shooting of rare animals and birds have been promulgated. Mr. Butler has established Zoological Gardens at Khartum, but he is hampered by want of funds. Mr. Broun ' has taken charge of the Woods and Forests, and the reckless cutting of trees which went on during the first few years after the restoration of the Sudan will, it is hoped, be stopped. It would be a terrible thing if the Nile were to become like the Tigris between Baghdad and Basra, where, away from the towns and villages, for hundreds of miles there is scarcely a tree to be seen. Before the advance of man both the forests and the wild animals must eventually disappear from certain portions of the country, but we may safely assume that their destruction will not now be reckless and wasteful. Every attempt possible is being made to develop and utilize the natural resources of the country, and this work will be rendered easier as new means of communication are opened up. There seems t<> be no reason why Cotton should not be grown in con- ible quantities in the Sudan, especially when we read Mr. Nevile's Report on the subject. For this, however, a great :n<>re water will be required, and this cannot be supplied until some of Sir William Garstin's schemes have been carried out. There is no doubt that at the present time the agricultural lopment of the Sudan is being sacrificed and retarded in the interests of Egypt. The Pearl Fisheries of the Red Sea may one day yield a good revenue, but to attain this result time is required. 1 '' "P5K P- 134- 500 MUSEUM OF ANTIQUITIES From the brief summary of facts given above it is clear that the officials of the Sudan Government have directed their attention chiefly to the present material interests of the Sudan and its peoples, but they have done something also towards the encouragement of the study of the ancient history of the country and its languages. Sir Reginald Wingate has established a Museum of Antiquities in the Gordon College, and objects of interest are gradually coming into it. He arranged that excava- tions of theTyramids of Meroe should be made in 1903, and two years later he made it possible for the work to be resumed, and for Mr. J.W. Crowfoot and myself to collect a number of antiquities from the country between the Second and Third Cataracts, which are now in the Museum at Khartum. During this work the temple built at Semna by Tirhakah in honour of Usertsen III., the first Egyptian conqueror of the Sudan, was discovered and excavated, and a new and important set of facts was added to the ancient history of the country. Sir Reginald Wingate also decided to have the north wall from the chapel of one of the great Candace queens removed to Khartum, and thus preserved one of the finest sculptures extant of the later Meroitic Kingdom. Under his auspices, too, the clearing out of the temple at Haifa, and other works at the same place were carried out by Mr. J. W. Crowfoot and Mr. P. Scott-Moncrieff, and it is to be hoped that he will see his way to excavate other sites, and to remove their antiquities to a place of safety in Khartum. He has already caused some of the so-called " Anak " tombs to be excavated, and will, no doubt, as opportunity offers, continue the examination of other monuments of this class in the Eastern and Western Deserts. In all these works his efforts have been heartily seconded by Colonel E. E. Bernard, the Financial Secretary, who has cleverly managed to provide the necessary moneys. In connection with antiquities it may be noted in passing that in 1905 the Sudan Government promulgated "The Antiquities Ordi- nance " {Sudan Gazette, p. 376 if.), which provides for the better preservation of all antiquities that " were built, produced, or " made in the Sudan or brought thereinto before the year 1783 o M the Gregorian Calendar." Following the excellent example of the East India Company 501 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN the Sudan Government has decided to print works of linguistic importance written by its officers The Vocabulary of Suddti Arabic? by Captain Amery, is a good and useful piece of work, and we hope it will be followed by a. publication giving the texts of all the purely Sudani compositions which can be collected. Mr. Armbruster, Inspector of the Province of Kasala, has compiled an Amharic vocabulary of the Abyssinian language used in Kasala and its neighbourhood, and it should prove of considerable use to all the officials who are employed in administering the country near the Abyssinian frontier.2 The excellent Dictionary of Isenberg (Amharic-English and English-Amharic) is unfortunately out of print, and very scarce, whilst the splendid Vocabolario Amarico-Italiano (Rome, 1901) of Guidi, and the Dictionnaire tie la Langue Amarinua (Paris, 1881) of D'Abbadie, are very expensive works. The Sudan Government deserves the hearty thanks of all who are interested in the languages of North-Kast Africa for undertaking the publication of such works, and con- sidering the large number of able Oxford and Cambridge men who are now in its service, there is no reason why the Government should not, in years to come, produce works on the languages of the Sudan which shall be as thorough and comprehensive as the famous Grammars of Lepsius and Almkvist on the Nubian and Hadanduwa Languages. The Anglo-Egyptian Sudan is ruled by a Governor-General assisted by a Secretary-General, an Inspector-General, a I Secretary, a Financial Secretary, an Agent-General stationed in Cairo, a series of Directors of Departments, a number of Governors of Provinces, called Mudfrs, who are in turn assisted by Inspectors and sub-Inspectors, and by native Ma'amurs. The chief Departments are those of Surveys, Works, Education, Irrigation, Medicine and Sanitation, Woods and Forests, Agri- culture and Lands, Railways, Steamers and Boats, Telegraphs and Posts, Customs, Game Preservation, Veterinary work, and Slavery Repression. The Sudan comprises all the territories south of the 22nd parallel of north latitude which were in the possession of Egypt In 1882, and all which may be reconquered 1 Khartum and Cairo, 1905. I his work is being printed at Cambridge, and will appear in 1907. 502 SUDAN GOVERNMENT by the British and Egyptian Governments acting in concert. The British and Egyptian flags are used together throughout the Sudan, both on land and water, except in the town of Sawakin, where the Egyptian flag alone is used. In the Governor-General is vested the supreme military and civil command. He is appointed by Khedivial Decree, on the recommendation of His Britannic Majesty's Government, and can only be removed by Khedivial Decree, with the consent of His Britannic Majesty's Government. All Laws, Orders, and Regulations are made by Proclamations. The subjects of every Power trade in the Sudan under equal terms. Egyptian goods entering the Sudan pay no import duty, and the duties on goods from other countries do not exceed those on goods entering Egypt from abroad. Traffic in slaves in any form is absolutely prohibited, and the provisions of the Brussels Act of July 2nd, 1890, in respect of Fire-arms and Liquor are strictly enforced. Besides the above, the Anglo-Egyptian Convention of January 19th, 1899, which is the real Charter of the Sudan, decreed that no Consuls, Vice-Consuls, or Consular- Agents should be accredited in respect of nor allowed to reside in the Sudan, without the previous consent of His Britannic Majesty's Government. Without this last wise provision the progress of the Sudan could not have been so great as it has been during the last eight years. The present Governor-General, who is also Sirdar of the Egyptian Army, is Major-General Sir F. Reginald Wingate, K.C.B., K.C.M.G.. D.S.O., &c. He is the first authority on all questions connected with the history and the origin of the idea of the Mahdi both among the mystic Persian Muhammadans and the ''traditionalists" of the West. His great knowledge of Arabic, and of the manners and customs, and of the phases of thought and religions of the Sudani tribes, has proved one of the main factors in the successes which have followed the Anglo-Egyptian Army in the Sudan. His work, Mahdiism, and the Egyptian Sudan, is an encyclopaedia of one of the most remarkable Moslem religious movements which ever took place, and will be for many years the leading guide to the student of the subject. Fate fittingly confided to his hands the destruction of the Khalifa and of the Amirs who clung to him, and it was meet that the historian 503 THE EGYPTIAN SI/DAN of Mahdiism should be the instrument whereby the most baneful form of it which the world has ever seen should be finally crushed, and the claims of a mischievous impostor and rebel proved to be wholly vain. Most intimately associated with Sir Reginald Wingate in the great work which he has carried out for many years is the present Inspector-General, Sir Rudolf von Slatin Pasha, K.C.M.G., &c. The extraordinary experiences which this distinguished Austrian officer passed through during his long service and captivity in the Sudan have given him an insight into the character of the Sudani peoples which is possessed by no other man. He is master of their languages and dialects, and he is able to look at things from their various standpoints, a faculty with which, to the same de few Kuropeans are endowed; while his patience and sympathy have caused him to be regarded as the friend of the native through- out the Sudan. The Sudan Government is fortunate indeed in possessing such an Inspector-General, and is to be congratulated on having placed him in a position where his unique knowledge can best be employed in the true interest of both the conquerors and the conquered. To describe the work of all the Directors of Departments, and the results of the devoted labours of the past and present Mudirs, which are all duly detailed in Lord Cromer's Reportst would occupy more space than can be spared in this work, but reference must be made to the quiet but ceaseless toil of one of the principal makers of modern Khartum — Colonel E. A. Stanton, Governor of turn since 1900. When he took over the duties of the Governorship from the capable hands of Colonel (now Sir) John fell Maxwell, the town was, practically speaking, a heap of ruins, and the people, though suffering sorely from the effect of past oppression, were, as Colonel Maxwell reported.1 just " beginning to appreciate the situation, and learning to under- " stand that the officials no longer prey upon them, but try to do ''what is just and right, and to disentangle the truth from the " skein of lies that is generally put before you.'' With the help of Colonel Friend, Colonel Stanton set to work to make paths and roads, and then had them kept clean, and by degrees he has 1 (1900), p. 58. 504 KHARTUM managed to make the natives appreciate the benefits of street sanitation. He has helped to plan and carry into execution many works of the greatest public utility, and by the establish- ment, of steam trams in Khartum and Omdurman, and the con- struction of a road to the ferry, along the Blue Nile, he has conferred a great boon on all classes in Khartum. The town now contains many fine, broad roads and streets, with well defined pavements marked by kerb-stones, and the road along the river front is macadamized ; in the matter of cleanliness Khartum now compares favourably with many of the large towns in Egypt. Small wonder is it that it is now " practically " impossible to find a vacant house to let in either the second or " the third-class part of the town, and only one or two in the first- " class." l Few who visit Khartum now can realize the filthy state and disorder of the town in 1899, and among those to whom credit is due for the decency and order which obtain there at the present time, Colonel Stanton's place is certainly not the least. The Government of the Sudan is, owing to the peculiarities and nature of its inhabitants, of a highly paternal character, but this under the circumstances cannot be avoided. Not only can- not the natives rule themselves, but they cannot take care of themselves, and in many particulars officials have to interfere promptly in their affairs to save them from the evil results of their own recklessness and ignorance. The peoples of the Sudan have been oppressed for thousands of years, and the effects of this treatment are ingrained in them physically and mentally. It would be a great mistake to imagine that the innate characters of the various inhabitants of the Sudan can be changed in one or two generations, and a greater mistake to think that any radical change has already been made. The natives who have Hamitic and Semitic blood in them will adapt themselves to their altered circumstances more quickly than the Negro or Negroid tribes, because some of their ancestors were descended from peoples who possessed civilizations of a comparatively high order, and the characteristics of these, latent in them, have not been obliterated wholly by the climatic and other conditions under which they live 1 Egypt* No. 1 (1905), P- 147- 505 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN in Africa. The tribes of Hamitic and Semitic ancestry prefer fighting, highway robbery, and brigandage, to manual labour, just as, as we have already seen, their forefathers did thousands of years ago ; and the Negroes, where free and independent, have never done more work than they were obliged to do in order to satisfy their personal needs or wishes. The best way to help both classes of natives to overcome their hereditary instincts is to open up their country, to develop trade, and to find for them occupation which will keep their minds from being influenced by fanatical teachers and religious impostors, and their hands from the works of rebellion. All these things the British are doing with marvellous success at the present time. It is, however, important to remember that at intervals of years great waves of fanaticism have broken out among many Oriental peoples, and that at such times some of the strongest Governments have been swept away like chaff. Periods of religious unrest, or malaise, are certain to come again in the Sudan as elsewhere, and it behoves the authorities to keep in readiness behind their moral influence material power sufficient to meet all the demands which may be made upon it. All will be well so long as the reins of government are in the hands of men who know and understand the native character, and who are able to make full allowance lis they rule for the indolence, suspicion, ignorance, and fanaticism which characterize the people, especially in districts remote from towns. But a weak Governor-General, or injudicious taxation, or a great religious " revival "' such as might take place as the result of the Pan-Islamic ideas now being promulgated in many parts of Turkey and Egypt, and above all the knowledge that the garrison at Khartum was numerically weak, might tempt the tribes once again to fight for " liberty, equality, and a pure religion." Khartum is 530 miles from the nearer port, and the means of rapid communication consists of a single- line railway which passes for 300 miles through desert and hilly country, where it would be easy for the nomad tribes to tear up the line in dozens of places simultaneously. To the mere student of the history of the country who remembers that the " Hillmen." or Blemmyes, or Bejas in the Eastern Desert, and the "Cattle- men," or Nobadae of the Western Desert, successfully defied 506 LORD CROMER the power of Rome, the British force in the Sudan at the present time seems insufficient, and there are several competent military experts who are of opinion that the garrison at Khartum should be strengthened. It has already been said that the Government of the Sudan is of a highly paternal character, and we may now add that the " Father " of the country is Lord Cromer. A little more than three months after the capture of Omdurman he visited Khartum, so that he might see for himself the nakedness of the land, and the poverty and misery to which its scanty population had been reduced by forty-five years of Turkish " rule," and thirteen years of religious tyranny and cruelty, and might arrange with Lord Kitchener how the Sudan was to be administered, and provide the necessary funds. He himself has told us that at that time the "prospect was certainly not encouraging." There was " scarcely a germ of civilization in the land, and a whole fiscal " and administrative system had to be created." Nothing daunted, however, he returned to Cairo and found money to carry on the government of the Sudan, and despatched Sir William Garstin to the south to make an exhaustive report on the Nile Valley and Basin, the crops, the people, the animals, the Sudd, possible irrigation improvements, forestry, minerals, taxes, and trade. Sir William reported, as a result of a careful inspection, that there was reason to hope that the Sudan Provinces would pay the expenses of their administration in course of time, but that the process of restoration would occupy many years. The country, he said, must have peace and quiet, just government, easy taxation, and simple sanitary measures which will tend to reduce mortality. He warned the Government, however, that the climate would levy a heavy toll in the shape of valuable lives, and his warning has been, alas, justified by events.1 On July ioth, 1899, Lord 1 From 1901 to 1904, both inclusive, nine British officers, two British non- commissioned officers, and thirty-two Egyptian or Sudani officers died of disease, mostly fever. During part of 1905 and part of 1906 there died, Major Boulnois, Lieut. Fell, Captain Sterling, Colour-Sergeant Boardman, Mr. Barron, Mr. Marsden, and six Egyptian and Sudani officers. From 1901 to 1905, both inclusive, ten British officers, one British non-commissioned officer, and twenty- three Egyptian and Sudani officers were invalided from ill-health. Further, it cannot be doubted that many civil and military officials, who have neither 507 THE EGYPTIAN ST DAN Cromer and H.E. Boutros Ghali signed the famous constitutional treaty about the Anglo-Egyptian Sfid&n, and from that day. humanly speaking, the salvation of the country was assured. Some two years later Lord Cromer again went to the Sudan, and is able to notice what had been the effect of the efforts made by the new Government to grapple with the formidable difficulties which they had to encounter, and he found that some progress had undoubtedly been made. The Khalifa had been killed, Mahdiism had been crushed, and the inhabitants, having realized the falsity and worthlessness of the Khalifa's rule, were beginning to give their attention to their business. In January, 1903, Lord Cromer again went to the Sudan, and proceeded so far to the south as Gondokoro, examining the Government stations, and the American and Austrian Missions which had been established, and receiving deputations of natives, and hearing the expert of the British officials on his way. On his return to Khartum he and the Governor-General, Sir Reginald Wingate, were guests at the farewell dinner1 which was given on January 27th to Bimbashi W. E. Bailey on his retirement from the Egyptian Army. After the Governor-General had described in eulogistic terms the valuable services of Captain Bailey, and expressed the t which every one present felt at his departure, and announced the honours which H.H. the Khedive had been ph to confer upon him, Lord Cromer made a memorable speech. He said that during his third journey through the Sudan he had ed a very great improvement, that trade was reviving as the succumbed nor been invalided, have suffered severely in health from the praise- worthy zeal with which they have performed their work under conditions of I hardships. Egypt) No. 1 (1906), p. 119. '_The names of those present are : — Bimbashi Amery, Asser Bey, Captain . Colonel Bernard, Bond Bey, Borton Bey, Mr. H. Boyle, Colonel Briggs, Bey, Dr. Wallis Budge, Mr. Butler, Bimb. Sorel Cameron, Mr. Bonham- r, Bimb. Charlton, Bimbashi Conolly, Lord Cromer, Mr. J. Currie, Al-S&gfa Dale, Bimb. Done, Dra^e Bey, Bimb. Flint. Count C.leichen, the . C.wynne, Hall Bey, Mr. Drummond Hay, Henry Pasha, SirW. Hill Bey, Howard Bey, Bimb. Hon. Cuthbert James, Bimb. Kennedy, Mr. Kershaw. Lidded Bey, Bimb. Maclean, Bimb. McArdagh, Bimb. McKay, Nason PashA, Norbury Bey, Bimb. Owen, Bimb. Parker, Bimb. Parsons, Penton Bey, Phipps Mr. Poole, Ravenscroft Bey, Mr. Spring-Rice, Colonel Stanton, Bimb. -well, Sutherland Bey. Sir F. R. Wingate, and Bimb. Young. LORD CROMER'S SPEECH result of a return of confidence, and that there had been an advance along the whole line. The revenue was showing signs of elasticity, and the expenditure was under efficient control. Khartum, from being a dust-heap, had become a handsome and well-organized town. The Schoolmaster, in the person of Mr. Currie, was abroad. A simple system of criminal and civil justice had been established by Mr. Bonham-Carter, the River Trans- port had been organized by Commander Bond, and a good medical service by Colonel Penton. The people had learned that the foreigners who visited their country were no longer slave- dealers, but the bitter opponents of slavery. But the Sudan wanted more population, more railways, more irrigation, more British officials, more schoolmasters, and more public buildings. In fact, with the exception of sand, crocodiles, and hippopotami, there was not enough of anything in the Sudan. The Egyptian Government was paying ££350,000 a year for the Sudan, and had agreed that the yearly increment of revenue in the Sudan should be applied to Sudan interests. They had handed over more than a half-a-million sterling to improve the railways, and could do no more. Lord Cromer then went on to speak of the need of a railway between the Nile and the Red Sea, and he promised his hearers that he would try to have it made ; this has now been done. With reference to the governing agency in the Sudan, he pointed out that the Egyptian is just as much a foreigner as the British official. The latter, it is true, was some- what at a disadvantage, for he had to learn a difficult language ; on the other hand, the British enjoyed the advantages derived from approved and inherited capacity to govern. The great need was a Sudani agency, and he thought that such might be created if high education were let alone for the time, and reading, writing, and arithmetic taught. Fie was not in favour of pushing instruc- tion in English too hard. He wanted a railway to Kasala, another up the Blue Nile, a third to Al-Obed, and a dam or two on the Blue Nile. The Sudd had been dealt with in a manner beyond all praise by Colonel Peake and Major Matthews, but he wanted dredgers to remove the mud from under the Sudd and elsewhere. Turning to the question of the education of the British officials, 509 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN he agreed that there might be some truth in the allegation that the British lagged behind other nations in the matter of education. On the other hand, the results of the British system of education were best seen in countries like the Sudan. "A lad in whom " the sense of individual effort and personal responsibility lias " been fostered at one of our public schools or military colleges " naturally becomes capax imperii, ' a strong character/ In the M free atmosphere in which his boyhood is passed he learns a " number of lessons which stand him in good stead in after-life as •nil, of an imperial race. He is no automaton, but acquires " unconsciously habits which fit him to shift and to think for "himself, to take responsibility, in a word to govern, and I may " add, to govern with justice and firmness." Men of this kind were to be found dotted all over the Sudan, from Sawakin to Al- ( )lx"'d, and from Haifa to Gondokoro, and wherever they lived they were regarded by the natives as representatives of a just, humane, and righteous rule. This speech was delivered in the large dining-hall of the Hotel at Khartum, and all who were staying in the building were admitted to hear it. It was a remarkable speech in every way, and it helped those of the audience who were not members of the Sudan Services to realize the bond which existed between His sty King Edward's great representative in Egypt and the Sudan and every member of the British section of the governing v of the country. It was wholly British in its simplicity, British in pure common-sense and modesty, and above all British in its tacit recognition of the right of the British to rule by virtue of their justice in dealing with conquered peoples, and their inherent ability to wield power the world over. Not a word ittered which could indicate to the audience how Lord Cromer had himself toiled to bring about the results which he had seen ; but praise, justly due, was unsparingly given to the band of Sudan officials before him. The manner of the Speech was as interesting as the matter. It was delivered in simple, well-chosen words, and even- sentence home to its hearers. An earnest, hard-working mar was addressing and encouraging earnest, hard-working men, and inciting them to work on fearlessly and undismayed. The 5io PROGRESS wary British Lion was teaching his cubs how to rule and how to obey, and intimating to all whom it might concern that he would brook interference neither with himself nor with them — his family. Every official present felt that his own individual share in the great work of Sudan development was known to Lord Cromer, and that full credit was given to him for it, and this knowledge has had far-reaching effects, and produced the splendid results which are annually described in Lord Cromer's reports. From the time when this speech was made up to the present Lord Cromer has pushed on the schemes which he then indicated ; the railway from the Nile to the Red Sea is an accomplished fact, and when the necessary surveys have been made we shall, no doubt, see other railways built, and Sir William Garstin's great irrigation works carried out. Lord Cromer has shown that Egypt and the Sudan are one, and that the interests of the one country are locked up in those of the other ; he has made the Egyptian a really free man, and slave-dealing and slave- raiding in the Sudan are things of the past. All the world can see the marvellous changes which have been wrought by the determined and persistent efforts of the strong, far-sighted, broad-minded, and sagacious envoy of Great Britain in Cairo. And every true friend of civilization must rejoice that fate has placed the peoples of the Nile Valley in the hands of Lord Cromer, and of Sir F. Reginald Wingate, whose military achieve- ments, linguistic acquirements, and personal qualities and sympathy, supremely fit him for his position of Governor- General of the Sudan and Sirdar of the Egyptian Army. That they may continue to fill their high positions for many years to come, must be devoutly hoped by all who have the interests of the Sudan at heart. In conclusion, we may fittingly quote here the statement of the Inspector-General, Sir Rudolf von Slatin Pasha, on the general condition of the Sudan at the present time. It represents the opinion of a very high authority, and of one who is not an Englishman, and it therefore possesses exceptional weight and importance. He writes : — " The justice of the Government is " recognized by every soul in the Soudan, by sedentary natives as " well as by the nomad Arabs, and I have never heard that even 5" THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN " the losing party suspected Government officials of having been " influenced by private reasons in giving a decision or sentence. " They have often appealed, but they have never complained of " inji: Uthough there may still be sometimes a little dis- •loii amongst the population, if an order is given which •• does not tit in with their immediate views and inclinations, they i realize that such orders are issued in their interest and in " that of the public welfare. The people are daily gaining more " confidence in our good intentions, and are convinced that we " do our best to establish security in the country. The popula- "tion is becoming more active, and public wealth is increasing. •• Whereas, in former days, a wealthy man was afraid to draw " upon himself the attention of the authorities and thus be >sed to their despotic measures, now-a-days it is just the "contrary. Everyone wishes to be wealthy, or, at least, to be " considered as a man of means, because he knows that on account "of his wealth he may be consulted by the Government officials •' on public questions, and be able to exercise some degree of •' influence. The people give a great proof of their confidence in "the Government in sending their sons to Government schools. illy all the tribes of the Soudan are represented, and " there are so many applicants that we are forced to refuse a tain number. '• II" the Arab population gives proof of genuine progress in Ligation by better-built houses, bigger and cleaner huts. •• and a large demand for furniture, which was unknown before, ■ the pagans inhabiting the southern part of the their advance in their own way. Travelling long the White Nile, one finds men and used only to wear beads and brass wire, in t clothing, and they hesitate to meet you in their nudity. In former days, on seeing a steamer the bank, they used to run away and flee into the " int< taken away as slaves. Now. meet the b rid travellers, and try '"•'itd sell their hickens, &c, at as high prices »ible. A great number of natives, especially of the Shilluk Diuka tribes, already know the value of money and goods, PROGRESS " and the golden days when one could buy a bull or a sheep for " beads or copper wire worth a few pence have passed away. "This is, I think, a clear proof of the progress of civilization in " this part of the world. " Public security prevails throughout the whole of the Soudan. " Considering the extent of the country, murder and highway " robbery are rare ; there is comparatively little thieving, and " that nearly always amongst the natives, and not from the " white man. Our police is sound and good, and the Sheikhs " and Omdehs of villages and tribes, who are the pick of " the population, are responsible for safety and tranquillity in the " country. In consequence of this, there is no more slave- " raiding on a large scale, and Governors of provinces, who are " working hand-in-hand with the Slavery Department, state that " only isolated cases now occur. " The conclusion at which I have personally arrived is that, by " treating the people with justice and making allowances for " their habits and customs, we have succeeded in gaining their " confidence, and that they have now ceased to be indifferent to " our efforts, and are willing to assist us to attain our object — " peace and prosperity in the Soudan." {Egypt, No. i [1906], pp. 119, 120.) VOL. II. 5*3 L 1 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN ##* Names compounded of "De," "Du" "De La," and "Des," will be found under D. Names compounded of "Von" will be found for the most part under the itial letter of the principal component. 'Abd al-Latif, the Physician. Relation de VEgypte par 'Abd al-Latif . . . traduit et enrichi de notes historiques et critiques par Silvestke de Sacy. Paris, 1810. Abu 'Abd Allah Muhammad Ibn BatCjta. Voyage dans le Soudan. Translated by De Slane. Paris, 1813. Abudacnus, Josephus. The True History of the Jacobites of uEgypt, Lybia, Nubia, &c, their Origin, Religion. . . . Translated by Sir E. Sadleir. London, 1692. 4to. The History of the Cophts, commonly called Jacobites, under the Domina- tion of the Turk and Abyssinian Emperors. Translated from the Latin by Sir E. Sadleir, Bart. London, 1693. 4to. Abu-Salih, al-Abmani. The Ghurches and Monasteries of Egypt and some Neighbouring Countries. Edited and translated by B. T. A. Evetts, tvith Notes by Mr. A. J. Butler. Oxford, 1895. Abyssinia. Abyssinia and the Soudan. Blackwood's Magazine, vol. CXXXVL, 1884 L'Abyssinie et sa Grande Mission. Lyon, 1900. The Ethiopia Didascalia, or the Ethiopic Version of the Apostolic Constitution received in the Church of Abyssinia. London, 1834. Tiber der grossen Fluss in Sudwest von Abessinien. Ausland, Jahrgang, 1841, Nr. 296. Abyssiniennes. Les Abyssiniennes et les femmes du Soudan Oriental d'apres les relations de Bruce, Broivne, Cailliaud, Oobat, D'Euny, Lejean, Baker, &c. Turin, 1876. Adams, W. H. D. Egypt, Past and Present . . . and Recent Events in the Soudan. London, 1885. Recent Events in the Soudan. London, 1887. Afevork. G. J. Grammatica delta Lingua Amarica. Metodo pratico per VLnsegnamento. Rome, 1905. 515 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Aii:i .1 Mapp of Africa, by R. Walton. London, 1665. cm told by '/- . 2 vols. London, L894. Pr ifi '. London, May, 1894. vols. II.M. Stationery Off.ce, London. Ail: i' /'/• Hng the Discovery of Africa. Lond<*n, L790. Rapport. Brussels. L790. Pro London, 1708, also Ci hn. E. \\'., Qeechichte dor Unterauchung dor Britt. Geaellachoft, L790. AHMAD Ir.N 'Ann Al-KaDIB (S. ai. I).). Histom do la dt VAbyaeinie. Algiers, 1897. Ecole Superieure . «. 19, 20, Alexandre, W. Egyptian Lngravings. Alford, H. L S., and Sword, W. D. Egyptian Soudan. Its Los* and Recovery. London, 1898. AlAIKlhA. M. Hi '. Coimbra, L6( Al.MKVlsi, II. Biachari-Sprach [Tu-Be^awx rdoai Afrika beechn vergleichend. DargeeteUt von. . . . Upsala, 1881, 1885. I". ription del' Ethiopia. Anvers, 1558. Hm Anvers, 1557 ; Saragose, 1561 ; Tolede, l bossy to Abyaainia, 1520—27. Hakluyt L mdon, 1 - •o da Prt - lias, &C. Lisbon. L540. Also in Prenob, German, and Italian. Ami.a Skvmv, Ki,,- of Ethiopia. II i rot d'Ethiopie. L894 Journal :. iti.ju. . 18 Paris, I Ami'.i.im.a' . !•;. La Geographic a\ VEgypte a VEpc Paris, L8 i.'Y. II. 1 ■'. S. Arabic. Khartum and Cairo, L905. 516 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Ampere, J. J. A. Voyage en Egypte et en Nubie. Paris, 1882. Voyage et Recherches en Egypte et en Nubie. Revue des Deux Monies. Vols. XV.-XXIII., 1846-8. Anderson, A. A. A Romance of N Shabe ; or, Startling Events in South and Central Africa. London, 1891. Twenty-five Years in a Waggon in the Gold Regions of Africa. 2 vols. London, 1887. Andre, C. Forschungreisen in Arabien und Ost-Afrika. Divers Voyages faits par Burton, SpeJce, Krapf Rebmann-Erhart, etc. Leipzig, 1861. Ansorage, W. J. ruder the African Sun. London, 1899. Arab Warfare. Souakim, 1885. London, 1885. Archer, T. The War in Egypt and the Soudan. 4 vols. L mdon. 1885-7. Archinard, L. Le Soudan francais en 1889-90. Paris. 1891. Ardagh, Sir; J. Nilometers. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. 1889. Armbruster, C. Initia Amharica : Parti. Grammar; Part II. English-Amharic Vocabu- lary (with a phrase book) ; Part III. Amharic-English Vocabulary, (with a phrase book). Cambridge, 1907, etc. (In the Press.) Assenbuch, L. VON. Der Sudanaiif stand und die Englische PoliUJe. Unser Zeit. 1884, hf. 4, 5. Atteridge, A. H. Towards Khartoum. The Story of the Soudan War of 1896. London, 1897. Atkins, Sarah. Sec Belzoni, G-. Austin, H. H. Survey of tit e Sobat Region. Journ. Roy. Geogr. Soc. Vol. XVII., 495. Among Swamps and Giants of Equatorial Africa. London, 1902. AZEYEDO, L. DE. Histoire de ce qui s'est passe en Ethiopie, Malabar, etc. Paris, 1620. Baillaud, Emile. Sur les routes du Soudan. Toulouse, 1902. 517 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Baines, t. rica. London. 1864. Paris, 1868. Africa. London, 1877. BAKEB, Sii; ]». Min. Proc. Civil Eag. Vol. L.\ Baker, Sib S. W. •J vols. 1866, L872. Tin London, 1867. Ismatlia .• a Xm-niiirr of :, rica. London. 1874, I- pcw U. Vattemake. Paris, 1880. riqw Eqtk B. .make. Paris, 1880. 77/« EgypHai to ike "Times" and " PaU Mall London, 1" i. Baldwin, J. I >. I'r London, 18*i'.'. Balfour, Db, Andbew. First Reportofthe WeU he Gordon Memorial College, Khart&m. Khartum. 1904 »■/. Khartum, 1906. Ball, J. Geohxjn of //" ^urvey Dept., Cairo. Ballubb, II. Paris, i Babatiebi, 0. [byssinie. Rer. des Doui Mondes. Pari LTTI, G. I'r / tin Abissvns, or of Eth Inferior. L radon, L670. 1 1 . 1 : DE MeYNABD, C, AND I*. DE COUBTEILLE. Irabio and French. 9 vols. Paris, 18*61. Babdone, l;. E. Vubv L' Artiste, 1837. BABGB8, J. J. L \ I* ris (no date). 018, J. Paris, L90 1. II. rs 1849-55. 5 vols. L >nd London 1890 518 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN BaSCIA, G. Sette Anni nel Sudan Egiziano. L'Esploratore, 1884. Baschin, 0. Bibliotheca Geographica. Gesell. fur Erdkund zu Berlin. Berlin (in progress). Basset, E. Les Apocry plies Ethiopians. Paris, 1892 ff. Histoire de let Gonquete de VAbyssmie. (XVIe Siecle.) Arabic and French. Paris, 1899 ff. Notice sur le Magseph Assetat du P. Antonio Fernandes. Traduite du Portugais par R. B. Algiers, 1886. Etudes sur V Histoire d'Ethiopie. Paris, 1882. Baude de Maurceleky, C. L'Armee du Malidi a vol d'oiseau. Paris, 1884. Baumann, 0. . In Deutsche Ostafrika wcihrend des Aufstandes. Wien, 1890. Durch Massailand zur Nilquelle, 1891-3. Berlin, 1894. Baumgarten, J. Ostafrika, der Sudan und das Seengebiet. Land nnd Lente, etc. Goth a, 1890. Beau de Eochas, A. Oasis et Soudan. Paris, 1888. Beccari, C. Historia Aethiopiae. Rerum Aethiopicarum Scriptores Occidentales. Romp, 1905. Bechet, E. Oinq cms scjour au Soudan Francais. Paris, 1889. Beke, C. T. Routes in Abyssinia. Proe. Roy. G-eog. Soc. Vol. XIX. 1842. An Enquiry into M. Antoine d'Abbadie's Journey to Kaffa in the Years 1843 and 1844 to discover the Source of the Nile. London, 1850. The Languages and Dialects of Abyssinia and the Countries to the South with vocabularies of thirteen languages. Proc. Phil. Soc. Vol. II. 1845. Travels and Researches. London, 1846. The French and English in the Red Sea. London, 1862. An Essay on the Sources of the Nile in the Mountains of the Moon. Edinburgh, 1848. Bell, J. G. Extract from a Journal of Travels in Abyssinia in the Years 1840-2. Miscellanea Aegyptiaca. Vol. I., pt. i., 1842. Bellere, J. Description historiale de VEthiopie. Anvers, 1598. Beltrame, G. Grammatica e Vocabolario della Lingua Denka. [Spoken on the White Nile, north of the Equator.'] Roma, 1882. 519 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN BELZONI, Or. B. and Rea ni Dit lithin the Pyramids^ Egypt and Nubia. London, 1820. etc. 2 vols. Paris. L821. /•> bitedin On Tra 3elaoniin Egypt and Nubia, By Sarah Atkins. Loudon, 1821. Belzoni, Mrs. Igypt, Nubia and Syria. Brussels, L885 Bennett, E. X. Downfall of th Dervishes, London, IS Bent, J. Theodore. the Ethiopians. London. 1 .1 Visit to On m. Jonrn. Roy, Geog. Soc, 18! Berkeley, G. I-'. The Campaign andtfo Rise of Menelik. London, 1902. Berkley, I-'.. 'mil their People. London. 1884. Berlioux, E. I". i'wris, 1 - Bbrnatz, -i. M. London, l - Bernon, L Paris, L670. DGE, I". Ab\ i Si i HoTTBir, -I. < '.) London, 1 3< A I. A. Tl" 6 The Atheistic Platform. London, 1 • I Na oar. Boston. I tie, L902. //. rrlichheii >i> r Munich, 11)05. Adami. Gieszen, 1906. Birch, Dr S. I Iriental < Tom. II. //, uso. I • Lia Britani Proc, Soc. Bibl. iroh- VII., p. 121. Logia. Vol. XXXIV., pp. 857-391. 5-'° BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Birch, Dr. S. (continued). On some Monuments of the Reign of Tirhahah. Trans. Soc. Bibl. Arch., Vol. VII., p. 193. On the Early Relations of Ethiopia under the Egyptian Monarchy. Proc. Boy. Soc. Literature, Jan. 18 16. Bird, James. Observations on the Manners of the Inhabitants ivho occupy the Southern Coast of Arabia and Shores of the Red Sea. Journ. Royal Geographical Society. Vol. IV. BlSSING, F. W. YON. Geschichte Aegyptens im TJmriss von den iiltesten Zeiten bis auf die Erober- ung durcli die Araber. Berlin, 1904. Blanc, E. Routes de VAfrique sept, cm Soudan. Ball, de la Societe G£og. 1890. Blanc, Henry, M. D. The Story of the Captives. Mr. Rassam's Mission to Abyssinia. London, 1868. A Narrative of Captivity in Abyssinia. London, 1868. BL AN FORD, W. T. Geology and Zoology of Abyssinia. London, 1870. Blerzy, H. 1! Afrique Moderne. Histoire Physique, Races et Colonisation. Revue des Deux Monde*. Vol. LXXITL, 1868. Blundell, H. Weld. A Journey through Abyssinia to the Nile. Journ. Roy. Asiatic Society. Vol. XV., 1900. Bodini, C. L' Abissinia degli Abissini. Torino, 1887. BOEKEN, H. J. Um und in Afrika. Koln, 1903. BONCHAMPS, C. DE. Une Mission vers le Nil Blanc. Bull, de la Soc. Geog., Paris, 1898. BONFILS, F. Albums photographiaues, Egypte, Nubie, Palestine, &c. Paris, 1872. Albums photographigues des Monuments et des Sites les plus celebres de V Orient. Paris, 1872. BONNETAIN, P. Dans la Brousse. Sensations du Soudan. Paris, 1895. BONNETAIN, MME. P. Une Francaise au Soudan. Paris, 1884. BONOMI, J. Egypt, Nubia, and Ethiopia. London, 1862. BORCHARDT, L. Nilhohe und Nilstandmarken. Abb. d. Kgl. Preuss. Akkad. Wissen- scbaften. Berlin, 1905. 521 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN BOBELLI, J. Eihi >/■'!■ . Paris, 1890. Bobelli, < )< tavk Bit. . 1885. Paris, 1893. Views in Egypt and Nubia. London, 1824-27, fol. BOTELEB, T. - and Arabia. L821-1826. '2 vols. London, I BOTTEGO, V. Viaggi di I lioma, 1895. BOUEDABIE, I'. Fachoda, /.<» Minion Marchand. Paris, L899. BOUBDB, P. La Fro Ian. Revue des Deux Mbndes. Vols. KLIL, XXI II. Bourgi egnoh D'Anvillb, J. B. Dissertation war lee S Nil. Memoire de l'Academie des Inscriptions,]?")'.1. Tome XXVI, Boubke, D. R. W. (See M.wo.) BOUBNE, II. R. I'. oftiu Emin P m. London, 1891. DICH, T. E. .1 » Essay on the 8 to th An yptians, Abyssinians and Ashantees. Paris, 1821. Travels in the I \friea. London, 1820. {See Mollien, (J. T.) Boyle, St. John. limit iii t'i Abridged from the French. London, I tENBUBT, II. ' tin Xib nary : linbnrgh, I B Patbb. riaNyansa. I'etermann, Geog. Mitt. 1 .1. II. (". Chicago, 1906. .1 E L906. Bbehm, a. k. Afrika .... Egypten, Nul tahr, 7 1852. Jena, 1 - Ergebnisse m naeh lf< <> Phild. Zeitschrift fiir Aeg. Sprache, Bd. X.W pp. 57-69. 9 Ardhin. Zeit. Aeg. XIX., I. Die Libysch-lea Volher-gruppen. Leipzig, 1> Die Negentamm des Una-Iti8chr\ft. Zeit. Aeg., 1- _r.. L877. /;■ Oase El-Khargeh. Leipzig, 1878. Brum-Eollet, X. /.■ A/7 Bl • Paris. ITA. B. Die ■ lit in L60 Phot Berlin, 1881. //. igyptischer Kerrsehaft. Leipzig, 1*88. Der Aufstand im Sudan. Daa Auslatid, .March, 18 BUDGB, E. A. Wai.i.is. A History of Egypt 8 vols. London, 1 902. tpt and the Suddn. 2nd edition. London, 1906. The Nile: r*. 10th edition. Cairo, 1906. ///. Orientation of th< Pyramids in th S&d&n. 1899. London. 190 I. Ethiopic and English. London, Ethiopia and English. London, 1898, 1901. d Gabra Kristds. Ethiopic and English. London, Miracles of the Virgin Mary. Ethiopic and English. London, 1900. ih. Ethiopic and English. London, 1900. Magical Prayers. Ethiopia and English. London, 1900. Ethiopic and English. London, C. C, J. '/< d by //. ( 'ottrett, Esq., M.A. If. /.■ Occident m de Voyages. Soc. EL. Beige urr. Bulletin. LCKHARDT, J. L L >ndon, L819. Jena, I - Ara ley. London. 1830 and 1875. Ar rauche cL ■ Weimar, I 5*4 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Burdo, Ad. Les Beiges dans VAfrlque Centrale. Bruxelles, 188 I. Burette, H. A. .1 Visit to King Theodore. By a Traveller lately returned from Oondar. London, 1868. BURGES, J. Notice sur le Soudan fro net (is. Paris, 1893. Burleigh, W. B. Desert Warfare, being a Chronicle of the Eastern Soudan Campaign. London, 1884. Sirdar and Khalifa. London, 1898. Reconquest of the Soudan. London, 1898. Khartoum Campaign, 1898. London, 1899. Burney, J. A Chronological History of Xortli- African Voyage* and Discoveries. London, 1819. Burrow, Capt. G. The Land of the Pigmies. London, 1898. Burton, J. Plans, Drawings and Copies of Inscriptions of Temples, etc., from Kalabsha to Napata. Brit. Mus. Add. MSS. 25,649-51. Burton, Sir K. F. First Footsteps in East Africa, or an Exploration of Horror. London, 1856. The Lake Regions of Central Africa. 2 vols. London, 1860. Butler, A. J. The Arab Conquest of Egypt. London, 1902. Butler, Col. Sir W. F. Campaign of the Cataracts, 1884-5. London, 1887. Charles George Gordon. {English Men of Action.) London, 1889. Buxton, E. N. Two African Trips. London, 1902. CAILLIATTE, C. Les Sources du Nil et les demieres explorations dans VAfrlque equatorlale. Paris, 8vo. Cailliaud, Frederic. Ijand of the Nile ; or, Egypt Past and Present. London and Edinburgh, 1871. Les Abyssiniennes et les Femmes du Soudan Oriental, d'apres les relations de Cailliaud, etc. 1876. Voyage a Meroe. etc. Annees 1819-1822. Paris, 1826-1828. Carte detaillee du Cours du Nil levee dans VExpedition de 1819-22. Paris, 1821. 525 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Cailuaud, Frbdb d). y0yQ Thebes. Paris, L822-24 Paris, L82S, Caillik. K.. kt Jomard, !•:. cherehes geogretphiqvoa sur le :■ de M. Caillie par M. Jomard. Paris, 1830. Caix De Saint Aymour, VlCOMTB A. DB. L 634-1706. Paris, 1886. Paris, 1884. Cameron, < 'ait. V. L. 'I'},, Soudan. Revue Coloniale Internationale. M;iy, 1886. National Review. Sept., 16 Our Duty in H contemporary Review. April, IE Cameron, 1>. a. .,-,,/ (,/ //,. r-i : or, Mehemei Ml and hi* S London, i On the Tribes of the Ea Ian. .1 our n. Anthrop. Inst. Vol. XVI. Camprrio, Capt. ML ■'hi Egixiano. (Qeesi,R.) Rome, 18'.»1. Capenny, S. II. F. 77/e Kfo w i« the Basin of the Upper Congo. Scot. Geog. ( lARMOY, H. Le Mahdi et lee .' igteuees Mtt&ubnanee, Revue G6ne*rale, May, 1884. :. Gr, Ten Yean in Eqnatoria. Translated by J. I!. Clay. 2 vols. London, ( Iastlerbagh, Viscount. vrney to "Damascus through Egypt, irabia PeU tUne, and Syria, London, 1847. Ceoch] A - -\ Geo. Ital. Etoma, /,' Milan*., ls-7. Chabab, F. J. Lei Inscription* de* Mines !-">. '1 vols. War < >tlioe, London, 1889. The Land of the Nile Springs. London, 188 Colvtn, Sib A. Tht Making of Modern Egypt. London. 1906. ( lOMBES, E. Voyage en Egyj dans le desert dn Bayouda dea Bischarys. Paris, I* ( lOMBES, E., et Tamisdeb, M. Voyages en Abyssinie. Paris, 1838. Combes, P. V Abyssinie en 1896. Paris, 1896. CONDBK, J. .1 Popular Description of Egypt and Nubia. 2 vols. London, 1827, The Modern Traveller. London, 1830. GELMAN, W. < 'hroniq lius). Paris, 1895. , I, Rossini. Acta Marqorevooe. Paris. 1904. Acta Tared et Panfalewon. Rome, 1904. Rdgali. Bulletino della Soc. Ital. di Esplorazioni. Milan, 1904. Appunt 0 Takla Kaymanot Rome, 1895. Atti di Ab\ Rome, 1908. •" Amidk i U convento della Trvnita. Home, L902. populari Tigrai. Zeit. EurAss., Bd. XVII. La RedazioneEtiopica della Pregkiera della 1 ; Parti. Rome, 1897. Dv> rl'Archeologia Eritrea nella bassa valledel Barca. Rome,1903. lo studio della lingua Tigre. Florence, 1903. >,-•> di Dabra TAb&nos. Rome, 1901. // Qadla FMpos ed il <;<"ll" Johannes. Rome, 1901. / Loggoe la Leggt dei I. s <■ Florence, 1904. //"A-"/"/" 'i." Rome, 1904. qli Agau. I Appunti sutta lingua Khamta delV Averghelle. Fiorenoe, 1905. ll'tj-1 ides Ethioj \ His, 1894-1897. Hi suW Etiopia. Rome, LI Stori d' Etiopia, Rome. I Ua Dinastia Zdgue. Hume. lM'.T. Trad Rome, 190 1. Hjgiomo in Eritrea. Asmara, 1903. 528 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Cooke, Lieut.-Col. A. C. Routes in Abyssinia. Parliamentary Paper No. 3,964. Vol. XLIV., 1867-8. London, 1867. Cooper, E. J. Views in Egypt and Nubia. London, 1824-27. Cooper, J. The Lost Continent. London, 1875. Cora, G. Vlaggi cli G. Nachtigal nel Sahara e net Sudan, 1869-74. "Cosmos," Torino, Vol. VIII.', 1884. Cotton. (See Powell- Cotton.) Coulbeaux. An pays de Menelik. Missions Oatholiques, 1898. Cromeb, Lord. Reports on Egypt and the B&dan published annually, containing Facts about the Condition, Finance, Administration, etc., of both Countries. Published by the British G-overnment in London. Translations in French and Arabic may be obtained in Cairo. Cuny, Dr. C. Notice sur le Bar-Four et sur les Caravanes qui se rendent de ce pays en Egypte et vice versa. Bulletin de la Societe de Geographic, 4 ser., Tom. VIII. Paris, 1854. Currie, James, Director of the Gordon College, etc. Reports on Education. Published at Khartum. Reports on the Gordon College. Cust, E. Needham. Notice of the Scholars who have contributed to the extension of our Kno wledge of the Languages of Africa. Journ. B>oy. Asiatic Society. N. S., 1882. A Sketch of the Modem Languages of Africa. 2 vols. London, 1883. Cuzzi, G. Funfzehn Jahre Gefangener desfalschen Propheten. Leipzig, 1900. CZERNY, F. Egipt i Mahdi w Sudani. Krakow, 1884. D'Abbadie, Antoine. Dictionnaire de la Langue Amarinna. Paris, 1881. D'Abbadie, Arnaud. Catalogue raisonne des manuscrits Ethiopiens appartenant a A. d'Abbadie. Paris, 1859. Douze ans dans la Haute Ethiopie (Abyssinie). Paris, 1868. Geodesie d'une partie de la Haute Ethiopie, revue et redigee par E. Radau. Paris, 1860. Dal Verme, L. I Dervisci nel Sudan Egiziano. Roma, 1894. vol. ii. 529 m m THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Dandola, Emimo. Viaggio in Eg\ Milano, 1854. D'Arenberg, Prince, P. Paris, 1904. Darmesteter, J. TheMahdi. London,]- D'ATHANASI, ( i. Researches and l< Egypt made under the Direction of Henry Sali, Esq. London, l£ D'Avrzac-Macaya, Marie A. P. Esq\ VAfrique. Paris, 1837, 1844. partie de VAfriqu* Paris, L8! T)K BlZEMONT, H. VlCOMTE. Du Cairo << Khartoum. Bull, de la Soci6te Geog. Rochefort, 18* De KorosJeo a Kharto litilletin de la Soci' I Paris. L871. Les grandes Entr< puis 1870. Premiere partie: — Afiuque. Paris. Debono, A. Fruiin - ni du Nil Blanc). Paris. L861. De Breves, Savary. Voyages, Constantinople, 13 gypte, Afrique. Paris, 1630. De Cadalvene, E., and De Breuvery, J". L'Egypte ei la Nubia. Paris. 1841. De < Jhampeaux, G-. A Tra Paris, l!»03. Decern, Baron C. C. ton der Rei •Afrika m den Jahren 1859 bis 1865. 4 vols. Leipzig, 1869. Decreet, Emil. Der Aegyptische Sudan. Deutsche Revue, March, 1884. Deci Th < i/Wc ■. London, 1 8 De Constantin. L'Archimandr n Achinoff. Paris. L891, DE < JOSSON, Ma.k-i: E. a. The i 'radle qf the Blue Nile. London, 1877. De I Irozals, J. Des races prin Revue de Geog. Paris, 1881. Le I Sahara au Soudan. Pans. L896. ILLEVILL1 voyageu/rs ernes. L'J/rique vnconnue ei h \ il. Limoges, 1 530 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Defremery, C, et Sanguinetti, Dr. B. K. Voyages cl'Ibn Batoutah. Arabic and French. 4 vols. Paris, 1874 De Gasparin-Boissier. Journal d'un Voyage— Vol. II., L'Egypte et la Nubie. Paris, 1850. De Goeje, J. Al-Idrisi. Leyden, 1866. De Guerville, A. B. New Egypt. London, 1905. Cheap edition issued in 1906. Deherain, H. Le Soudan Egyptien sous Mehemet Ali. Paris, 1898. Etudes sur V Afrique — Soudan Oriental — Ethiopie — Afrique Equatoriale — Afrique du Sud. Paris, 1904. De Laborde, Leon. Voyage en Abyssinie, analyse critique, etc. Paris, 1838. Delafosse, M. Essai sur le peuple et la langue Sara (bassin du Tchad). Paris, 1898. Delaire. Les Chemins de Fer du Soudan a travers le Sahara. Paris, 1877. De Lanoye, P. Le Nil, son Bassin et ses Sources. Paris, 1870, 1873. De La Kenaudiere, F. . . . essais sur le progrhs de la geogr. de Vinterieur de V Afrique. Paris, 1826. De Lature, Count Escayrac. Le Desert et le Soudan. Paris, 1853. Memoire sur le Soudan, etc. Paris, 1855. De Lauribar, P. Douze ans en Abyssinie. Paris, 1898. De Lesseps. Souvenirs d'un Voyage au Soudan. Nouvelle Revue, tome XXVI., 1884. De Malortie, Baron. Egypt : Native Rulers and Foreign Interference. 2nd ed. London, 1883. Crusaders'1 Armour in the Soudan. Interesting Discoveries in the Soudan. Aberdeen Journal, 1883. Tablet, 1883. Demanche, G. Cote d'lvoire et Soudan. Eev. Franc, de l'Etranger et des Colonies. Paris, 1895. De Martonne, E. Dongola. Ann. de Geog. Paris, 1896. La vie des 'peuples du Haul Nil. Annal. de Geog. Paris, 1896. Hydrographie des Oberen Nil-bechens. Zeit. f. Erdk. Berlin, 1897. Denham, D. Travels and Discoveries in 1822-1824, ivith a short Account of Clappertons and Landers Second Journey, 1825-1827. London, 1831. 53i THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Denon, V. 3 vols. London, 1803. Debamt, J. Twtroduc ne en Abyssmie. Paris, 1895. De Reichenberg, L'Orza. Souvenirs de Mission. Rouen, 1902. De Rivoyre, L D. .h'-' Pays 1 1 n Soudan. Paris, L885. Dermott, Rev. J. V. .1 Visit to the Island of Ukerevoe. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc, Vol. XIV., Is'.1-. De Rouge, E. Ohrestomathie Egyptienne. I • Hoi Ethiopian Piankhi-1 Pari*, 1876. OSTES, F. A„ Soudan, 1890-1891. Paris, 1893. De si.ank. Bt. Histovre des Berberes ei des Dynasties Musulmanes. 4 vols. (Arabic Text l'voIs.) Alger, L866. Des Vergers, a. Abyssinia: VTJnwers; Histoire ei Description de tous les Peuples, Paris, L886. De Thevenot, J. Voyages de 'I'll ■ . Asie et Afrique. 2 vols. Paris. 1664. De Viieger, Rev. A. Origin and Warty History of the Ooptic Church. Lausanne, 1900. D'Hericourt, C. Rochet. Vbyagt danslepayt <. Paris, lsil. Voyage sur la lale de I" Met Rouge, etc. Paris, 1841. ,,nl voyage sur les deux rives de la lifer Rouge. Paris, 1846. 1)11.!. maw, ( I, F. A. Ohrestomathia Aethiopica. Leipzig, 1856. >iii:isi (Muhammad AL-lDRtsi). Description de VAfrique >-t de VBapagne. ESo. I >o/.v and 1 >e Goeji. Leyden, Egypt, Nubia, and Abysseixa. Society for the Diffusion of Useful Knowledge. London, 1868. Egypt and the Sudan. An, inn! Report of the Ministry of Public Works, 18!»2. etc. Egyptian Question, Thb. Edinburgh Review, 1884, Vol. CLIX. p. 145 ff. EHRBNBERG, C. Gr., and HeMPEICH, W. V. Reisen in Aegypten, Libyen, ITubien, am! Dongola. Berlin, 1828. ELLIOT, (i. F. SCOTT. Expedition t<> Ruwemori. Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc, 1895. Elton, .1. F., and Cotterdll, H. B. TraveUand Researches amongst the Lakes and Mountains of Eastern and Central Africa. London. 1879. Emin Bey. lam wnd AequatoriaJlprovinz in Sommer. Das Ausland, 1882. !:. F. S. Incidents of a Journey through Nubia* London, 1881. Eeman, A. Die Aloa-Inschriften. Zeitachrift fiir Aeg. Sprache, Bd. XIX. (1 p. 11 J ff. Zu den aethi Eieroglyphen. Zeitschrift fur Aeg. Sprache, 1897, p. . Etherington, s. udom, and Central Africa. Edinburgh. 1861. Ethiopic Letters. Ethiopic, Amlmrir, and Arabic Letters, written to Ebnbt Salt by Ras \\"\ lothers. British Museum Add. .MSS. 1'.'.:; I :;. ! ;. S. Die Auffassung des HohenUedet bei den Abeseimiern: ein historisch- getiecher Versuch, Leipzig, 1900. 1 FON, A. I'hts loin que VOubanghi. Lea I' t en Afrique. Paris, 1893. Faidherbe, L L « '. Ta I ronfois. Lille, 1881 ■ vocabulaire de lalangue Foul d V usage devoyageurs dans h Soudan. Paris, I Falkknstkin, J. Oeschich tdechungsreieen. Dresden, 1828. 534 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Falkenstein, P. Gr. J., und Pechuel-Loesche. Die Loango Expedition. Leipzig, 1879. Fatma, Zaida. L' ATkoran, 1861. Fblkin, E. W. Emin Pasha in Central Africa. London, 1888. The Climate of the Egyptian Soudan. Journ. Balneology and Climatology, 1899. Eelkin, E. W., and Wilson, C. T. Uganda and the Egyptian Soudan. London, 1882. Fenzl, Ed. Bericht ilber die in Abyssinien gesammelten geographisch-statistisclien Notizen. von Herrn Dr. Reitz auf seiner Reise von Chartum nach Gondar, etc. Wieo, 1855. FERLINI, Gr. Cenno sugli Scavi operati nella Nubia e Catalogo degli Oggetti ritrovati. Bologna, 1837. Relation historigue des Fouilles operees dans la Nubie. Home, 1838. Fernandez Cuesta, K El Ejipto y la Nubia. Nuero Viajero Universal, Tom. I, 1859. ElASCHI, T. Da Cheren a Cassala : note di viaggio. Firenze, 1896. Fischer, G. H. Am Ost TJfer des Victoria Nyanza. Petermann, G-eog. Mitt. 1895. Fisher, Euth. On the Borders of Pigmy Land. London, 1906. FlTZNER, E. Der Kagera Nil. Ein Beitrag zur Physiographie Deutschen Ostafrika. Berlin, 1899. Der Kagera Nil. Inang. Diss. Halle, 1899. Flad, J. M. Zwblf Jahre in Abessinien. Leipzig, 1887. Floyer, E. A. Etude sur le Nord Atbai entre le Nil et la Mer Rouge. Cairo, 1893. Abridged Notes on the Geology of the Northern Atbai. Jonrnal Geological Society, 1892, Vol. XLVIIL, p. 576 ff. The Mines of the Northern Atbai. Journal Royal Asiatic Society, 1892, Vol. XXIV, p. 811 ff. Forbes, Archibald. Chinese Gordon. 12th edition. London, 1885. FORNI, S. Viaggio nelV Egitto e nelV Alta Nubia. 2 vols. Milanc, 1859. FOURNEL, J. H. Etude sur la Conquete de I'Afrique par les Arabes. Duprat, Paris, 1857. Les Berberes : Etudes sur la conquete de VAfrique par les Arabes. Paris, 1875-1881. 535 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN FOURTAX, B. U Nil en Egypte. Bull. Inst. Eg., Cairo, 189 1. 1895. FOWLER, Sli; J. Report on the proposed Railway between Wadi //•< >!hendy; and (he Ship Incline at the First Cataract. Cairo, 1878. Frith, F. Eijih • "• London, 1862. Fritzscii, G. PortraUchara altdgyptischen . Verh. tier Berl. I fiir Anthrop. Sit* \\. 1 - Die Ki,< \frikae Ethnographiech wnd anatomisch b* Leipzig, 1 Frobenius, II. Die //< id n-Negi r a\ b agypti Berlin, L898. Die Era n. Sammlung gemeinverstiimllicher wia schaftlicher Vortrage, etc. Neue Folge. Heft -262, 1866. Fuller, F. W. Egypt and Hm London, I Gaillardot, C. II. r led forets petr ibie. Bull, de I'lnstitat Egyptien, 1873, No. 12. Galliem, J. Voyage au Soudam framcaU. Paris, 1" Gallina, F. Apologhi ed Aneddoti voltiin Lingua Tigrwina. Roma, L902. (rAMHAi;DKLI..\ L'EgiMo e VEHopia. Napoli, L890. Garcon, A. Guerre du Soudan. 1884. Garstin, Sib William. thi Upper Kile. Nineteenth Century and After, VoL LVIIL, LI The Batm of ike Upper Nile, L904 ///- Sudan (Egypt Xo. 5). 1899. a$ to Irrigation Projects on the Upper Nile, with 12 mope {Egypt L901. Gatelet, A. L. C. Htttaire de la I ;" fifotuZon. Paris, 1901. Gau, F. C. to .V/'///'1 . . . - par B. G-. Niebuur. Inscriptions restitutes / Abyssinia. "Letters, < /»-., edited by Lady Ekskink. London, L867. Gbant, J. OasseU's History of the War in the Soudan. London, 1885, etc. Gbant, J. A. Khartoum as ! saw it in 1863. London. 18$ .1 Walk across Africa ; or Doviesf rom my NUe Journal. London, 1864. Speke's and Grant's Travels in Africa. London, 1864. Gbant, J. A. Nil. Gbat, \\\. and Staff-Subgbon Dochabd. Travels in Western Africa. London, 18S GBEGOBY, .1. W. The Great Hifi Valley. London, 1896. GBIFFITH, Mi:. F. LL. Tirhakah (in Petri*, Tanis, Vol. II.. p. 29, plate '•'. No. 163). Gbogan, E. S., and Shabp, II. •airo. Revised ed. London,!: Gubssfeldt, P. Nil, Aegypten, A nach a Weimar, 1800. ANT. P. Marchom •. La Mission Congo-Nil. Paris, 1 - 538 ' BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN GlJFFAREL, P. Le Senegal et le Soudan fran?ais. Paris, 1892. Guidi, Ignazio. L'Abissinia Antica. Nuova Antologia, Giugno. Roma, 1896. Due Notizie istoriche sulV Abissinia. Giornale della Societa Asiatica Italiana, Yol. IIP, 1888. La Storia di Hdyla Mikael. Roma, 1902. Le Liste dei Metropoliti di Abissinia. Roma, 1899. Vita Za-Mikael 'Aragdwi. Roma, 1896. Sopra due degli Aeth. Lesesticclce, etc. (Z. f. Asa. XL). Sidle conjugazione del verbo Amarico (Ibid. VIII.). Documenti Amarinria. 1891. Di dueframmenti, etc. 1893. II Fetha Nagast. Roma, 1899. Grammatica elementare della lingua Amarinna. Roma, 1890, 1891. II Marha Ewur. 1896. Proverbi, strofe e racconti abissini. Roma, 1894. Qene o Inni abissini. 1900. Stdla reduplicazione delle consonanti Amariche. Milan, 1893. Una squarcio della Storia ecclesiastica di Abissinia. (Bessarione, fasc. 49, 50.) Lo Studio dell' Amarico in Europa. Paris, 1898, Vocabolario Amarico-Italiano. Roma, 1901. Annales Johannis I., Iyasu I. et Bakdffd. 2 vols. Paris, 1905. GrUILLAUMET, E. Le Soudan en 1894. Paris, 1895. Tableaux soudanais. Paris, 1899. G-UILLEUX, C. Journal de route de la Mission Saliarienne (Mission Foureau-Lamy), Sahara, Soudan, Lac Tchad. Belfort, 1904. GWYNN, C. W. Surveys on the Proposed Sudan- Abyssinian Frontier. Journ. Roy. G-eog. Society, Yol. XYIIL, 1901. Habert, C. Au Soudan; Excursion dans VOuest Africain. Paris, 1894. Halevy, J. Travels in Abyssinia. Translated by J. Picciotto. London, 1878. Halim, Prince, Pasha of Egypt. Egypt and the Soudan. Nineteenth Century, May, 1885. Haly, Col. Pt. H. O'Grady. The Nile above the Second Cataract. London, 1884. Hamilton, Chas Oriental Zigzags; or Wanderings in Syria, Moab, Abyssinia, and Egypt. London, 1875. 539 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Hamilton, J. it, th J I \s the Aethiojpian Desert . London, 1S">7. Hakniki:. W. VON. Ghartum und lioseires. Petermanns G-eog. Mitt., (iotha, 1861. Darmstadt, 1 E Harris, W. C. The Highlands of AethAopia. 3 vols. LondoD, 184 1. HARTMANN, I;. Ah \frikas. Leipzig, 18 : Der Nigritier. Win Anlhropotogisch-Eth/nologischi Monographic. Berlin, Mllinider. Leipzig, 1884, l)n VoVker Afrileas. Leipzig, 1879. WeatlicheB . Zeitschr. fin- All. Erdk. Berlin, 1865. II L8SAN Ebn Ahmad, al Kiiaimi. Xt^2. Hopkins. .!. s. A Winters Journey up the Nile, 1876-77. Birmingham. 1878. BORNER, J. S. Th md its Importanc to Egypt. United Service Magazine, 1898. BORNER, L. Observations on Lepsius* Discovery of Sculptured Murk* on Hocks in the , Valley Edinburgh, lb BORNER, REY. Gr. Th of the Apostles, or Canones Bcclesiae tici Efchiopic, Arabic, and English. London, 1 HOSKINS, G. A. Travels in Ethiopia. London, 1835. Ethiopia versus Egypt, or Reply to a Critique on his Travels in Ethiopia, London, 1836. Hottex, J. C, publisher of Abyssinia and its People. London, lw III ', I IKS, T. Abyssinian Tributaries of the Nile. Macmillan's Magazine, Vol. XVII., p. 1 i:.. BUGHES, T. P. Notes on Muhammadanistn, London, 1875. Dictionary of Islam. London, 18!'6. BUGHES, \V. Africa, the Bed Sea, and the Valley of the NUe, including Egypt, Nubia, and Abyssinia. London, 1867. BUTI HINX'N. T. J. Ti n Tears' \Y< rings among the Ethiopians. London, 1861. HUTTON, W. .1 I \frioa, etc. London, 1821. Ii;N Dikmak. Part TV. of his Description of Egypt. (In Arabic.) Bulak Press, Cairo, a.m. L309. Idkisi. Muhammad al. G&tgraphie d'JSdrisi. Traduite de VArabe en Francais, . . . par P. Ami dm: JAUBIJLT. Paris, 1836-1840. [RBY, C. L., and MANGLES, J. Travels vn Egypt and Nubia, Syria and Asm Minor. 1*17 and 1818. London, 1823. X. Tra in Eastern Africa. London, 1836. 542 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Isambert, A. J. and E. Itineraire Descriptif Historic] ne et Archeologicjue de V Orient. Paris, 1861 and 1878. ISBNBEEG, C. W. Grammar of the Amharic Language. London, 1842. Dictionary of the Amharic Language. London. Amharic Geography. Universal History in Amharic Vocabulary of the Dankali Language. Isenberg, C. W., and Krapf, L. Journeys in Abyssinia. London, 1843. Ismail Pasha. Narrative of the Expedition to Dongola and Sennaar under the command of H. E. Lsmail Pasha. Londoo, 1822. Jacobs, A. Ijes Voyages d' 'Exploration en Africpie. L'Afrique australe et les nouvelles Routes du Soudan. Revue des Deux Monde.-, Vol. X., 1857. Jaeger, H. Kamerun unci Sudan. Berlin, 1892. James, F. L. Wild Tribes of the Soudan. 2nd ed. London, 1884. The Unknown Horn of Africa. An Exploration from Berbera to the Leopold River. 2 ad ed. London, 1888. Janko, J. Das Nil-Delta. Buda-Pesth, 1896. JEPHSON, A. J. M. Emin Pasha and the Rebellion at the Ecpuaior. London, 1890. JEQUIER, G. A propos d'une Stele Ethiopienne. Recueil, XXVII. , p. 170. JESSEN, B. H. South-Western Abyssinia. Journ. Roy. Creog. Soc. 1905. Johnston, C, M.E.C.S. Travels in Southern Abyssinia in 1842, 1843. London, 1844. Notices of Abyssinia. Syro-Egyptian Society, Original Papers, Vol. I., 1845. Johnston, Sir Harry H. The Nile Quest. A Record of the Explorations of the Nile and its Basin. London, 1906. The Uganda Protectorate. London, 1902. JOMARD, E. F. Traverseedu Desert de Nubie. Mem. Soc. Greog., Ser. III., Vol. VI., 1816, p. 186. Voyage a la recherche des sources du Nil Blanc. Bull. Soc. G-eog., Ser. IV., Vol. XII., 1856, p. 267; XIII., p. 71. 543 THE EGYPTIAN ST DAN JOMABD, E. V. ('■'•. 24. Nouvelles d'Egypte 1 1 d'Ethiopie. Bull. Soc. G<'og. Juillet, 1857. VEtMopie avecVEgypte. 8vo. Paris, L822. \ il de VEgypte. Paris, 1825. Remarques .-■'>■ let - rAj'ri'juc Centrale, it h degrS de Civilisation des Peuplee qui Vhabitent. Paris. L827. I'r Abiad ou Nil-Blanc, bachi. Paris, L842. Obi voyage auDarj ubulam Farm 9W le NU-1 1845. De / ■ Nil Blanc, dr. P., .11. Sue. Geog. IX., 1848, p. -208. A';' Paris. Is: '.'.'. Itin&ravre du voyage de Moha/mmed'Aly a Fanaangoro. .\l«;m. Soc. Geog., r. XL, Yol. XII., 1839, p. 258. i pente dv NU superieur. Svo. .Paris. Jones, Sib W. with Abram, a rning the < 'it;/ o and the Sources of the Nile. Asiatick Researches. Calcutta, I. 1 i JOUVEAUX, E. I >, n.i ans dans VAfrique orientale. Tours, 1871. JUDD, PttOF. J. W. .1 Report on the Deposits of the Nile Delta. Proc. Roy. Soc, Vol. LXL, Junker, Dr. W. Travels in Africa, 1875-1878. Translated by A. H. Keajje. London, L890. Die Aegyptischen AequatorialrProvinzen. Petermann, Mitt., Vol. XXVI. Kani'T, U. Caput NUi. Berlin, 1005. Katik. A. von. Ri tinien im Jahre 1836. Stuttgart, 18 Kaufmanx, A. Dot W'rissen Flusses, und dessen l'> Brixen, 1861. Kkank, A. II. // Africa. London, 1895. Ethnology of the Egyptian Sudan. Journ. Anthropol. Inst., Nov. 1884. Ethnology of the Egyptian Sudan. Encyclo. Brit.. Vol. X VII., 1884. Kkav, .1. S. Ming the Egyptians. A Tale of Shame. Told from (he Blue-books. London, 1882. Kingston, W. B. G. rican Trader. London, 1883. n Travellers. London, 1885. Travels of Mungo Park, Denham,aA rton. London, 1886. 544 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN KlRCHEB, A. Sources of the Nile. (See Bruce, " Voyage in Nubia," Vol. III.) KlRKPATRICK, CAPT. E. T. Lake Choga and Surrounding Country. Journ. GTeog. Soc, 1899, Vol- XIIL, p. 410. Klobb, Lieut.-Col. Dernier Garnet de Route au Soudan Francais. Paris, 1905. KLOEDEX, G. A. VON. Das Stromsystem des Oberen Nil, etc. Berlin, 1859. Klunzinger, C. B. Bilder aus Ober Aegypten, der Waste und dem Bothen Meere. Stuttgart, 1877. Upper Egypt : its people and its products. London, 1878. Knight, E. F. Letters from the Soudan. Reprinted from the " Times." London, 1897. Knoblecher, I. Beise auf don Weissen Nil. Voyage dans la region du Haut Nil, KOETTLITZ, E. A Journey through Somaliland and Southern Abyssinia . . . through the Sudan to Egypt. Journal Tyneside Geog. Soc, Yol. IV., 1901. Kohn-Abrest, F. L 'Expedition anglaise et le Soulevement du Soudan. La Tripolitaine, 1884. KOLLMAN, P. The Victoria Nyanza: the land, the races and their customs, etc. London, 1899. Kotschy, Theo., and Peyritsch, Jean • Plantes Tinneennes, publie aux frais cT Alexandrine Tinne et John A. Tinne. Vienna, 1867. Krall, J. Beitrdge zur Geschichte der Blemyer und Nubier. Denkschriften Kais. Akad. der Wissen., 1898, zu Wien, Bd. XL VI. Das Jahr der Eroberung Aegyptens durch Kambyses. Wiener Studien II., 1. Grundriss der altorientalischen Geschichte. Wien, 1899 fF. Ein neuer nubischer Konig. W. Z. M. XIV., p. 233. Krapf, J. L. Grammatical Outline of the Galla Language. Vocabulary of the Galla Language. Travels, researches, etc. Journeys to Jaffa, Usambara, UJcambani, Shoar Abyssinia and Khartoum. London, 1860. vol. ii. 545 N n THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Kkk.mki;, A. von. • a zehwjahrig* n Aufenthalts. Leipzig, 1863. Krociiow von Wickerodb. Reisen wndJagden in I\ frika. 2 Bde. Berlin, 1867. Lagrilliere Bbatjcler< . K. Chambres d\ Commerce. Mission udan. I'aris, 1898. L.\IN<;. Majob a. < ;. Travels <• London, 1 E DER, \l. Copt. Clapper! Htion to Africa. LondoD, lv:'>". Lanier, L. VAfrique. Choi* de Lectures de Geographic, Paris, 1- Laporte, Laurent. Sailing o\ instated by V. Yaigiian. Boston, 1872. Latham, 11, < -. Descriptive Ethnology. Vol.11. London, 1859. Leach, J. Tram Is on the Nile. London, 1742. Leake, W. .M. rnal of n voyage on the Bahr'Abiad, or 11'/. Journal Royal Geog. Society, Vol. II., l^J. Le Begue, M. M. (Count de GrBRinENY). De Saint Louis an Niger. Souvenirs de Campagne. Printed for private circulation. Paris. Leoerf, P. E. ■ /(''-tv Gt'ologique, Vol. X. Ugh, t. MP. , Holy I. ' Lebanon,and Oyprw , 1814. London, 1 in Egypt and the country beyond //"• Cataracts. London, 1816. For Eeviews of ** Travels" see Monthly Review. Vol. LXXX1V.; (Quarterly Review, V..1. XVI.; Edinburgh Review, Vol. XXVII.; Eclectic Review. Vol. XXV. rch Aegypten wnd in da x Land oberhnlh d Weimar, 54r> BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Le Jean, G-. Lps Deux Nils. Paris, 1866. Voyage en Abyssinie 1862 a 1864. With Atlas. Paris, 1872. Empire a" Abyssinie et Jc* IntereU Francais dans le 8ud de la Mer Rouge. Revue des Deux Mondes. Paris, 1868. Le Hani-Nil et le Soudan. Souvenirs de Voyage.- Revue des Deux Mondes, Vol. XXXVII., 1862. Lelewel, J. Geographic du JSLoyen Age. 5 Tom. Brussels, 1852-1857. Lemaiee, H. En Abyssinie. A travers le Monde, Paris, New Series. 1899. Le Masceieb, J. B. Description de VEgypte. Paris, 1735. Lenz, 0. Timbuktu. Beise durch Marokko, die Sahara und den Sudan. Leipzig, 1884. Timbouctou. Voyage cm Maroc et au Sudan. Paris, 1886. Lepsius, C. E. Auswdhl der wichtigsten JJrhunden des Aegyptischen Altertlmms. Leipzig, 1842. Denkmdler aus Aegyjiten und Aethiopien, 1842-1845. Berlin, 1849. Explication des monuments de VEthiopie. Paris, 1885. Discoveries in Egypt, Ethiopia, and ike Peninsula, of Sinai in the years 1842-45. London, 1852. 2nd ed. 1853. Brief e aus Aegypten, Aethiopien und der Halbinsel des Sinai. Berlin, 1852. Letters from Egypt, Ethiopia, and Sinai. Translated by J. B. Horner. London, 1853. Nubische Grammatilc mit einer Einleitung iiber die VolJcer tmd Sprachen Afrilcas. Berlin, 1880. Le Roux, H. Menelih et nous. Pari?, 1902. Lekoy-Beaulieu, P. P. Le Sahara, le Soudan, et les chemins de fer transsahariens. Paris, 1904. LETEONNE, J. A. Materiaux pour Vhistoire du Ghristianisme en Egypte, en Nubie et en Abyssinie. Paris, 1832. Le Vaillant, F. Voyage et Second Voyage dans Vinterieur de VAfrique, 1780-85. Paris, 1780-96. Levi, G-. Osman Dehna cliez Itii. Le Caire, 1884. 547 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Leydkx. J. A historical and philosophical sketch of the discoveries a/nd settlements of Euro} ra and Western Africa, L799. Historical account of Discoi ica. - vols. Edin- burgh, 1*17. Edited by II. Murray. Hietoirx , ,■ Handel dee I. Zeitschriit fur Aeg. Sprache. Bu\ X.XIV., 1886, pp. 7-15. Light, Henbt. Travels in Nubia. London, 1818. LlN.WT DE BeLLRFONDS, E. Journal of a voyage on the Backer el Jbiad or the White Nile. Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc. 18! L'Etbaye, pays habite par les Arabes Bicharieh, Paris. L868. LlTT.MANN. E. Abyssinian Folk-Lore, I 'rinceton University Bulletin, Vol. XI 11., 1900. Die Pronotnina vm Tigre. Zett. fur Ass. Bd. XII. LIVINGSTONE, DB. D. Missionary Travels and Researches. London, 1857. A sketch Map of Livingstons' i 9 and Stanley's routes. New York and London, 1873. Lloyd, A. B. In Dwarf Land and Cannibal Land. London, IS1. »n. Uganda to Khartoum. London, 1906. Lobo, J. A Voyage to Abyssinia, by Father Jeronu Lobo. Translated I"/ Di. 8. Johnson-. London, 1735. .1 Voyagi to Abyssinia, with fifi rtations relating to Abyssinia. Translated by Da. 8. Johhson. London, 17- A Short Relation of the River Nile. London, 1669. Relation m des Abyssi\ W Nil, de I" Zncornet etc. Pans. L678. Relation historique d'Abyssinie, Paris, 17 den Quelle n des Nils. 2 vols. Zurich, 17!'::. I lish >ri■ V. -I. Malte-B • /"/<. 1862, 5. Paris. iNCOUET, C. X. S. Tra Egypt. Translated by EL Humteb. London, 17:".'. rUEL -I. y Bull, de la Soci<'te g., 1871. Paris. L878, Manzi, L // ■ Soma, l : Mabchand, J. B. Vers h Xtl Francois. 1898. Makiki i'k Bet, a Descrvph 54. fol. Paris, 186J Deir eUBahari. '/'• 1 I and , lates. Leipzig, 1877. 550 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Maekham, Sir C. A history of the Abyssinian Expedition. London, 1869. The Portuguese expeditions to Abyssinia in the fifteenth, sixteenth, and seventeenth centuries. Jour. Roy. G-eog. Soc, Vol. XXXVIII. Marno, E. Reisen im Gebiete des blauen und weissen Nil, in dgyptischen Sudan und den angrenzenden Negerlandem in den Jahren 1869 bis 1873. Wien, 1874. Reise in dor ligyptisclien Aeguatorial-Provinz und in Kordofan in den Jahren 1874-1876. Wien, 1879. Maspero, G-. Davm of Civilization. London, 1900. Struggle of the Nations. London, 1900. Passing of the Empires. London, 1900. Histoire ancienne des peuples de V Orient. Paris, 1904. Essai sur la Stele du Songe. Bibl. Egypt., Tom. III., p. 1. Paris, 1898. Sur un decret cV Excommunication. Bibl. Egypt., Tom. III., p. 71. Paris, 1898. Sur la Stele de V ' Intronisation. Bibl. Egypt., Tom. III., p. 135. Paris, 1898. Side of King Horsiateiv. Bibl. Egypt., Tom. III., p. 233. Paris, 1898. Stile of King Nastosenen. Bibl. Egypt., Tom. III., p. 239. Paris, 1898. Massaja, G-. I miei trentacinque anni di missions nelV alta Etiopia. Roma, 1885. In Abiss/'niii efra i Gatta. Firenze, 1895. Maud, K T. Egypt and the Soudan in 1897-98. Jour. Soc. Arts, 1898. Maud, Capt. P. Exploration in the Southern Borderland of Abyssinia. Jonr. Roy. G-eog. Soc, 1904. Max-Muller, W. In (igyptisehen Diensten. Leipzig, 1888. Asien in Europa. Leipzig, 1893. Aethiopien. Leipzig, 1904. Maxse, Colonel F. I. Seymour Vandeleur. London, 1905. Mayo, Earl of. Sport in Abyssinia, or the Mareb and Tachazzee. London, 1876. Mehemet Ali, Pasha. Premier Voyage a la recherche des Sources du Bahr-al-Abiad ou Nil-blanc, ordonne par Mohammed Aly. Paris, 1842. Melly, Andre D. Lettres d'Egypte et de Nubie. Sept. 1850 a Janvier 1851. Privately printed. Londres, 1852. Melly, G. Khartoum and the Blue and White Niles. 2 vols. London, 1851. 55i THE EGYPTIAN ST DAN Mebcieb, E. Lair ile Sahara au - 3 torn. Paris, 1888. Meybb, Db, E. Men Aegyptens. Berlin, 1887. Miani, < ;. // Viaggio de G. 3[<">>i. Soc. Ital. Geog., Roma. 1875. MlCHEL, C. r. rs Fachoda d I" c6 la mission Marchand a braver* VEthi Paris, L901. MlTTEBBl rTZNEB, J. C. I >n Dinka SpracJu in Central Afrika. Brixen, 1£ MOLLIEN, (i. F. Voyage dans Vvnteriewr de I'Afri '■ la lit en 1818. Paris, 1820. Mondon-Vtdailhei 1 wari, Paris. 1902. Manuel Pratique de la Langue Abyssme. Paris, 1- Oranvntavre de la Langue Abyssvne-Amharique. Paris, Ohroniquede Theodoras II. Paris, 1905. MONNIER, M. M,'s, Ivovre ei Soudan. Paris. I-:1 1. MONTEIL, idan Francois. Lille. l!»03. Moore, F. Travels i/n (he Inland Parts of Africa. London, 17 MOORE, J. I" London, 1901. Moore, J. II. mplete collection of voyages and travels by Pocock, A lh> Dutcl hers. London. 1786 (P). MORLAND, II. its of Abyssinia, a ml a short a* to the ho f Ailaat. Trans. Bombay Geog. Soc, 18< MOURIEZ, P. Hisioi/n d* '■' idan < / sur le Muhammad Ebs Omab At-Tounst. fage "" Darfour. Traduii de VArabe par I'f.kkon. Prefac* par M. JoiLLBD. Paris. I - Voya iddy. Paris. 1 » 552 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Mueller, Fn. Die Sprache der Bari (tin des dialectes du Nil Blanc). Wien, 1864. Ueber die Harari Sprache in Ostlichen Afrika. Kais. Akad. der Wissen- schaften. Yol. XLIV. 1864. Allgemeine Ethnographic. "Wien, 1878. MUENZENBERGER, E. F. A. Abessinien und seine Bedeutung fur unsere Zeit. Freiburg, 1892. MUNZINGER, W. Ost-Afrikanische Studien. Leipzig, 1864. Basel, 1883. Muriel, E. C. Report on the Forests of the Soudan. 1901. Murray, H. Historical account of discoveries and travels in Africa, etc. Edinburgh, 1820. MUSTAPIIA MAGDALY. Analyses Quantitative s de Veau du Nil, pendant dix mots de Va Me moires de l'lnstitut Egyptien, Tom. I., 1862. Myers, A. B. E. Life with the Hamram Arabs. . . . Sporting tour m the Soudan. Lou Ion, 1876. Naciitigal, Dr. G. Beise nach dem Bahr-el-Ghasal, etc. Petermann, Mitteilungen, 1873. Sahara und Sudan. Berlin, 1879-81. Relation de la Mort de Mademoiselle Alexina Tinne. Bulletin de la Societe Geographique, 1870. Sur son voyage dans le Soudan. Bulletin de l'lnstitut Egyptien, No. 13, 1875. Naville, Ed. Deir el Bahari. Parts l.—Y. London, 189o if. NERAZZINI, C. Itinerario in Etiopia. Roma, 1890. Nestor L'Hote. Lettres sur Egypte, Cossier, les Mines des Emercvudes. Neufeld, C. A Prisoner of the Khalifa. London. Neumann, 0. From the Somali Coast through Southern Ethiopia, to the Sudan, Jour. Boy. Geog. Soc, 1902. Neumann, E. Xordafrika mit Ausschluss des Xilgebietes, nach Herodot, Leipzig, 1892. New, C. Life in East Africa. London, 1874. 553 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN NlEBUHR, B. G. Insc Romae, 1 NORDEN, F. L. Voyage cFEgypte el Copenhague, 17 Travels in Egypt and Nubia. 2 vols. London, 17">7. ■ Voyages and Vol. II. London, L819. Tin Antiquities, Natural llisiorij. j ., of Egypt, Nubia, a . . . from drawings taken on tin spot. London, 1792. Ogilby, -I. Africa: being ">> acorn of tin regions of Egypt, Barbary, ... Ethiopia, "mi ih, Abyssines. London, 1670. Ohbwaldeb, .1. Years' ('"j>tii-;ti/ i,i the Mahdi's Camp. From tin original MS. by B P. II. Wi slate. London, 1892. Olivier, A., Viscount dk Sanderval. Soudan francais. Paris. L898. Ollone, II. m. <;. Ih !n Odtedflvowi Paris, 1901. Omboni3 T. Viaggi nelV Africa Occidentals. Milano, LS45. Orleans, Prince Henry of. Visite J>>\ Oudney, M 1 1 ■ u London, 18 Owen, Capt. W. F. W. Narratm of voyages toexphre tin ' frica, Arabia, and Madagt '2 vols. London, 1833. Paez, Pedro. leihiopiae. Vol. II. Romae, 1905. PaIMBLANT DC Kuril.. A. F. M. .1. Exp] Marchand. Paris. 1899. Palat, B. E. npagne des Anglais oak Soudan. Pari-. lx- 1-1885. Pallme, I. Trawlsim Kordofan. Trans London, 1844. kim. Dr. 1'. r I'Infibulation udan. Bulletin de l'lnstitut Egyptien, 187:'.. No. 12. 554 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Park, Mungo. Travels in Africa. London, 1816. Parke, T. H. My Experiences in Equatorial Africa as Medical Officer of the Emin Pasha Belief Expedition. London, 1898. Parkyns, M. Life in Abyssinia. London, 1853. Parry, Major E. Suakin, 1885. London, 1886. Parry, Capt. F. Narrative of an Expedition from Souakin to the Soudan. Jour. Roy. Geoaraph. Soc, London, 1874, pp. 152-163. Parson, C. S. The Eastern Soudan. Proc. Roy. Artillery Inst., 1899. PARTHEY, G. F. Wander ungen durch das Nilthal. Berlin, 1834-1840. Passage, S. Central Sudan. Berlin, 1895. Paulitschke, P. Ethnographic Nordost AfriTcas. Berlin, 1896. Peacock, G. The Guinea or Gold Coast of Africa, formerly a colony of the Axumites or Abyssinians. London, 1880. Pearce, K Life and adventures during a residence in Abyssinia from 1810-1819. London, 1831. Peel, Hon. Sydney. The Binding of the Nile and the Neiv Sudan. London, 1904. Penazzi, L. Sudan e Abissinia. Bologna, 1885. Peney, Dr. A. Memoires sur V Ethnographie du Soudan Egyptien. Revne d'Ethnographie, I., IL, III. Pensa, H. L'Egypte et le Soudan Egyptien. Paris, 1895. PEREIRA, F. M. E. Chronica de Susenyos, rey de Ethiopia. Lisboa, 1892-1900. Historia dos Martyres de Nagran. Lisboa, 1899. O Elephante em Ethiopia. Lisboa, 1898. Vida do Abba Samuel do Mosteiro do Kalamon. Lisboa, 1894. Canpdo de Galadewos rey de Ethiopia. Lisboa, 1898. Historia de Minas. Lisboa, 1888. Vida de Tahla Haymanot. Lisboa, 1899. 555 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Perrot, J. F. A. Essai eur les U la Nubie. Nimes, 1844. Perruchon, Jules. Apercu Grammatical de la Langue Amharique. Louvain, 1899. /.■ ZAvn des Mysteres du Gieletd I'aris. Wietovre d'Bsh nder. Journ. Asiat.. L894. Les Chroniques de Zar'a Tde qfib et rfi Ba'eda Mdrydm. I'aris, 1893. pour I'Hlstoire d? Ethiopia. Eevue Seraitique. Paris, 1893-1901. Lalibald, Ki/ng of Ethiopia. Text* Eil> •//-' dfapres un manuecrii du Mtu I'aris. L892. Peters, Dr. Carl. The Eldorado of the Ancients. London, 1902. Das Dent *< It Ostafrika/n Leipzig, 1895. Petherick, J. Travels in Central Africa. - vols. London, 1869. Egypt) the Soudan, and Central Africa . . . Sketch - I ravel. Edin. and London, 1861. PETRIB, W. M. F. .1 Wisi ypi from the Earliest Times to ihr XXXth Dynasty. London, 1894 Peyritsoh, Jean, and Kotschy, Theo. Sotsoby and Peyritsoh (ante). PFEIL, J. Gr. Afrika. Berlin, 1888. PlAGGIA, C. V arrivo f% lelsoggiorn nainAbii Lucca, 1877. Pierre, C. I., and Monteil, C. L' ill . Paris. 1905. PlMBLETT, W. M. ry of the Soudan War. London, 18$ PlNKERTON, J. Voya Travels. 17 vols. London, 1808-14. Plowden, W. (edited by T. C. Plowdj Travels in Ah d the QaUa country, witfi an account of a mission to RasAli London, lg POCOOKE, Et. A I Vol. I. contains observations on Egypt. London, 1748. dans VEgypte, etc. 7 vols. I'aris. 1 77J Krlangen, 1771-7::. 556 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN POMEL, A. La Geologie du Soudan. Eevue Geographique. Pommerol, Jean. Among the Women of the Sahara. Translated from the French by Arthur Bkll. London, 1903. PONCET, C. J. A voyage to Aethiopia made in the years 1 698-1700. London, 1709. Nachrichten aus Aegypten, Nubien, Aethiopien oder Abyssinia. 1728. PONCET, J. Le Fleuve Blanc. Paris, 1863. Poole, Stanley Lane. A History of Egypt in the Middle Ages. London, 1901. Portal, Sir G. H. My Mission to Abyssinia, 1888. London, 1892. Potagos, Dr. Dix annees de voyages dans I'Asie Centrale et VAfrique Eguatoriale, 1867-77. Paris, 1885. Pougeois, Abbe A. L 'Abyssinie, son histoire naturelle, politique et religieuse. Paris, 1868. Powell- Cotton, P. H. G. A Sporting Trip through Abyssinia. London, 1902. Power, F. Letters from Khartoum during the Siege. London, 1885. Praetorius, F. Kebra Nagast. Fabula de Regina Sabo.ea apud Aethiopes. 1870. Orammatik der Tigriiia-Sprache. Halle, 1872. Die Amharische Sprache. Halle, 1879. Aethiopische Grammatik, etc. Porta Linguarum Orientalinm, Pars VII., 1886. Prax, .... Instruction pour le voyage de M. Prax dans le Soudan Septentrionale. Paris, 1847. Pringle, Major J. W., E.E. With the Raihvay Survey to Victoria Nyanza. Jour. Eoy. G-eog. Soc. 1893. Prisse d'Avennes, E. Tribus Nomades de VEgypte. Les Ababdeh. Revue Orientale, Paris, 1853, III. p. 337. Prokesch-Osten, A. von (the Elder). Das Land zwischen den kleinen mid grossen Katarakten des Nil. Wien, 1831. Prokesch-Osten, A. von (the Younger). Nilfahrt bis zu den Zweiten Katarakten. Ein Fiihrer diirch Aegypten und Nubien. Leipzig, 1874. 557 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Prom it. M, La VaUee du Nil. Ball. Inst. Eg. Cairo, 1891. Resw sla Haute-Egypte. Boll. Inst. Eg. Cairo, 1892. Ian Nilotique. Brill. Inst. Eg. Cairo, U La VaUeeduNU. Reservoir des Oirafes. Ball. Inst. Eg. Cairo, 18 Proxjt, Majob H. G. rtonthePt Kordqfan. Cairo, 1877. Prudhoe, Lord. HJxtraeti randa kepi by Lord Prudhoe on a jo 1829, describing the Peninsula of Sennaar. Journal Royal Geog. Society, Vol. V.. L835. Prtjyssenaere de i.a Wostyne, E. //. j n i/n Oebiete dee Weissen wnd Blauen NU, tJotha, 1855. Purdt3 Col. E. S. Psychometrical Obe* taken ad Fascher, Varfour, etc. Cairo, 1877. PURVIS, J. B. Handbook to British East Africa and Uganda. London, 1900. QUATREMERE DE QUINCY, E. Memovres but VEgypte. 2 vols. Paris, 1811. Raffray, A. Les Eglises Monolithea de I" ville de Lalebela, Abyssinie. I'iris, 1882. Ratzel, Prof. F. Die Naturvolker JfriJeae. Yolkerkunde, Bd. I. Leipzig ( Bibliogr. Institut), Ravenstein, E. G. The Climatology of Africa. British Assoc. Comm. Reports, 1883-1901. Report mi the Up/per Nile. Egypt, No. -. 1901. Geog. Journal, Vol .WIN, p. 398 ff. Ray, Rev. J. lection of curious travels. London, 17:'.s. RECLUS, J. J. E. ■Il<\ Tome X. L'A ntrionalc. Ire a Wgypti Paris, 1884 Recukii. , qui n'ont point et public* . . . "/■>,■ des Traitez curieux touchani la Haute Kihyopie le ui i\u Nil, hi mer Rouge, etc. Paris, 1684. [Par un temoin VEn Ibissins. Reed, J. II. the Bahr-eUOhazal. Manchester, 1899. 558 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Eeinisch, S. L. Sprachen von Xord-Ost-Afrihi . Die Xuba-Sprache: Xubisch-deutsches und Deutsch-nub. Wdrterbuch. VII., 308, 240. Wien, 1879. Die Barea-Sprache. Wien, 1874. Die Bilin-Sprache, etc. Leipzig, 1883. Report on the Egyptian Provinces of the Soudan, Red Sea, and Equator. War Office, London, 1884. Eeulle, M. An Soudan, 1893-1894. Reims, 1896. Eevillout, E. Memoire sur les Blemmyes. Mem. presentes a l'Acad. des Inscrip. et Bslles Lettres. Ser. 1, Tom. XVII. Paris, 1874. ElFAUD, J. J. Voyage en Egypte, en Xubie et lieux circonvoixins depuis 1805 jusqu'd 1827. Paris, 1829. Xotice sur les travaux . . . en Italie, en Turquie, en Egypte, Xubie, etc. Paris, 1829. Tableaux de V Egypte, de la Xubie et des lieux circonvoisins . . . avec un vocabulaire des dialects vulgaires de la Haute Egypte. Paris, 1830. Gemdlde von Aegypten unci Xubien und den umliegenden Qegenden. Wien, 1830. ElMBAUD, J. A. Lettres de J. A. Rimbaud. Egypte, Arabic, Ethiopie. Paris, 1899. Bitter, C. Die Erdkunde im Verhdltniss zur Xatur und zur Geschichte der Menschen, etc. Erster Theil, erstes Buch. Afriha. Berlin, 1822. Ein Blick in das Xil Quell-land. Berlin, 1814. ElZZETTO, E. I commerci di Tripoli e quelli del Sudan. Roma, 1883. Eobecchi-Brecchitte, L. Nell' Harrar. Milano, 1896. Roberts, D. Egypt and Xubia. Drawings by D. Roberts. Historical descriptions by W. Brockeden. 3 vols. London, 1846. (Another edition, 5 vols., 1858.) Eoberts, Emma. Sketches and Tales in Egypt and Xubia. London, 1850. Eobinson, C. H. Central Soudan. London, 1896. EOCHAT, Gr. Le Missioni evangeliche in Abissinia. Firenze, 1897. 559 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN RODWELL, J. M. Ethiopia Lit' Hymns. Kitto's Journal of Sacred Literature. London, 1864-67. ROHLFS, Gr. r dutch Afrika. Leipzig, 1874. Land wnd Voile in Afrika. Leipzig, 1882. Meinr M Leipzig, 1883. ROMAGNY, C. M- Campagnea d'un rihcle. Tunis, Soudan, etc. Paris, 1900. ROMBB, Mi;s. A Pilgrimage to //'■ - and Tomb* of Egypt, Nubia, and Pali 2 vols. London, 1846. ROSELLINI, IPPOLITO. I Mowumsnti deW Egitto e delta Nubia. 3 vols. Pisa, 1834, ROSIGNOLI, P. Imi> i dodici-awai di prigionia in mezzo dei dervisci del Sudan. Mondovi, 1898. Eossi. i-;. La Nubia e il Sudan. Constantinople, 1858. Rowley, H. Africa Unveiled. London, 1876. nty Years in Central Africa. London, lv ROYLE, C. Egyptian Campaigns, 1882-1885. London, 1£ RUEPPELL, DR, E. Arabien. Frankfurt am Main, 18! lypten politischer Zustand unter Mehemei AU Pasha. Frankfurt am .Main. 1S38. Zoologischer . 1 lm nordlichen Afrika. Frankfurt, lv RtJNDALL, V. H. The Highway of Egypt. London, 1882. I ! • b Afrikanische Toplandes. L840, Reiurn in Euro pa, Asien wnd Afrika, 1835 bis 1841. (Vol. II. contains his travels in Egypt, Nubia, and the Eastern Sudan.) Stuttgart, 184 1. RUSSEL, H. The Ruin of the Soudan: London, 1892. Russi . S. Paris, 1 ell, Rev. m. in. London, l v 560 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Sabrijiax, D. Zwei Jahre in Abyssinien. 1886. St. John, J. A. Egypt and Mohammed Ali ; or Travels in the Valley of the Nile. 2 vols. London, 1834. Egypt and Nubia. London, 1845. Oriental Album. Characters, costumes, and modes of life in the valley of the Nile. London, 1848. Isis : an Egyptian Pilgrimage. London, 1853. Salt, H. A Voyage to Abyssinia and Travels into the interior of that Country. 37 maps and plates. London, 1809-1810. Voyage en Abyssinie. Traduit de V Anglais par P. F. Henry. 2 vols. Paris, 1816. Saxderval, 0. Soudan Francais. Paris, 1893. Santalena, A. L'Insurrezione de Sudan. Treviso, 1881-1885. Sante Stefano, G. Viaggio in Etiopia. Coin, 1860. Sapeto, Gr. Viaggio e missione cattolica fra i Mensa i Bogos e gli Habab. Eoma, 1857. Etiopia. Roma, 1890. Sarrazin, H. Races humaines div Sudan Franca/s. Chambery, 1901. Sartorius, Mrs. E. Three Months in the Soudan. London, 1885. SCHAEFER, H. Urkunden der dlteren A ethiopienkonige. I. Leipzig, 1905. Zur Erkliirung der " Traumstele." Zeit. fur Aeg. Sprache, BJ. XXXY. (1897), p. 67. Zur Inschrift des Taharka aus Tanis. Ibid. Bd. XXXVIII. (1900), p. 51 ff. Die Aethiopische Konigsinschrift des Louvre. Zeit. fur Aeg, Sprache, Bd. XXXIII. (1895), pp. 101-114. Eine Bronzefigur des Taharka. Ibid. pp. 114-116. Nubische Ortsnamen be/' den KlassiJcem. Ibid. p. 96 ff. SCHAUENBERG, DR. E. Reisen in Central Afrika. Lander, Clapperton, and Mungo Park. 1859. Schefer, C. H. A., and Cordier. Recueil de Voyages, etc. Relation de V Ambassade de D. Trevisan aupres du Soudan a Egypt, 1512. Publie et annote par C. ScHErEit. Recueil de Aroyages, lfc84. No. 5. Paris. VOL. II. 56l O O THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN SCHIAPARELLI, E. . See Actes du X. Cong, des Orien. Sec. J TV., Is!' J. I.n Confi i deW alto Egitio. "Cosmos," Rome. Vol. XII., 1804-96. Schillings, C. G. With Flashlight and /.' I byT. Wiiyte. 2 vols. London, 19 6. SCHINDLER, F. Die Armee dee Njegus \ UJc 11. Troppan, 1- SCHIRMER, H. Sahara. Paris I SCHLICHTEE, II. a Topograjihy of Eastern Equatorial Africa. I'roc. Roy. Geog. ■., Sept., 1891. SCHOENFELD, E. D. Erythraa und a\ r agyp Berlin, 1904. SCHUVER, J. M. let. Petermann, Mitt. Ergiinzangsheft 72. Gotha, SCHWEINFURTH, I r. ra Aethiopiene. Berlin, 1867. ImHertenvonJfrika. i lechtmgen tien Aeguatorial Afriha 1868 bis 1871. 2 Tie. Leipzig, 1874. I,i the Heart of Africa. 77 2 vols. London, 1873. 3rd ed., London. I De 1'Arenir du Soudan Egyptien. L'Exploration, Tome 18, 1884 SCHWEINTTZ, II. \ Deutech Ost-Afrika in Krieg n. Berlin. Schweitzer, G. . E. (Emin Pasha.) Berlin, 1898. LTER, Dr. P. L. On the Ma/mmah coUec bserved by Oapt. J. H. Speke during the Proc. of the Zoolog. Soc. of London, 1 r-ELLIOTT, Gr. F. A Naturaliet in ]£id-Africa. London, li Skankam , M. seconde moitie du XVI tiecle. Leipzig, 1S,,J. Seetzen, r. J. /'/•. Seetoent UnguieMecher Nachlass, Wor n one Nbi Afrihaniecher Sprachen. (See Vater, .1. S. Leipzig, 1816. NKOW8KI, J. I'etersbnrger Zeitnng, Vols. II., IV., \ N. 1822. 562 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Septans, Lieut.-Col. E. Les Expeditions anglaises en Afrique. Paris, 1896. SHARPE, S. History of Egypt. 2 vols. London, 1877. Shucair, Naum Bey, B.A. The History and Geography of the Sudan. In 3 vols. Cairo, 1903. This work is in Arabic. Simon, G. Voyage en Abyssinie et chez les Gallas Ba'ias. Paris, 1885. Voyage en Abyssinie (VEthiopie). Paris, 1885. Simpson, W. Abyssinian Church Architecture. Sessional Paper, Royal Inst. Brit. Architects. London, Jnne, 1869. SlPP, C. Central Soudan. Meissen, 1888. Skinner, E. P. Abyssinia of to-day : an account of the First Mission sent by the American Government to the Court of the King of Kings. London, 1904. Slatin Pasha, Sir R C. Fire and Sword in the Soudan. London, 1896-1898. Feuer und Schwert im Sudan, 1879-1895. Leipzig, 1896. Nel Soudan Orientale, 1879-1895. " Cosmos," Rome, Vol. XII., 1894-96. Smith, A. C. The Nile and its Banks: a Journal of Travels in Egypt and Nubia. 2 vols. London, 1868. Smith, A. D. Through unknown African Countries. London, 1897. An Expedition between Lake Rudolf and the Nile. Jour. Roy. G-eog. Soc, 1900. Smith, F. H. The Italian- Abyssinian Treaty. Un. Ser. Mag., New Ser., No. 14, 1897. Smith, H. F. H. Pacification of the Sudan, etc. London, 1887. Through Abyssinia. London, 1890. Soleillet, P. Obock le Choa le Kaffa. TJne exploration commerciale en Ethiopie. Paris, 1886. Voyages en Ethiopie. Rouen, 1886. SOUTHWORTH, A. S. Four Thousand Miles of African Travel. New York and London, 1875. Speedy, Mrs. C. M. My Wanderings in the Soudan. 2 vols. London, 1884. 563 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN si-KKK. Capt. J. H. Journal of the Discovery of the Source of the Nile. London and Edinburgh, L864. What led to the Discoz fihe Nile. London, L864. rcee du Nil. Paris, 1864. Entdechung der NilqueUen. Svo. Leipzig, 18 Lake Victor Narra nloration. London, 1868. Stacquez, Dr. UEgypte, la basse Nubie, si 362-1863. Liege, 1865. Standing, P. C. The Mahdi of the I dan. Unit. Serv. Mag., London, 1900. Stanley, Sib II. M. Through the Doric Continent. London, ls7^. l,i Darkest Africa. London, 1890. I ,» dunhelsten Afrika. 2 BJe. Leipzig, 1890. Magdala. The story of the Abyssinian Oampaig 1868. London, Steckeb, A. Ueisevpn Tripolis nach der Oase Kufra. 1881. Steevens, (i. AY. Wtth Kitchener to Khartoum. London, 1- StEGNEB, F. Die Nilzvfiusst in Abyssinien. ~ vols. Brunswick, 1867. HENS, J. L Notes of Trowel in Egypt a/nd Nubia. Revised and enlarged. London, 1876. Stebn, REV. II. A. Wanderings among the Falashas in Abyssinia. London, 1862. The Captive Missionary} being an Account of Hhe Country and I'raple of Abyssinia. London, 1*68. Stewabt, Col. the Sudan. Egypt, 1883, No. 11. 1883. B fl Egypt after th War. London, L8S Db, !•'. in Pashai Afrika. Berlin, 1894. Sudan, The, Report on the Egyptian Province of the Sum/it,,. London, IS The Trw Prophet in the Soudan. London, 1 - Paris, 1891. . Oairo. Sudan Gazette. I NiUlished monthly by authority of the Sudan Govern- ment. Cairo. Fi^st issue — March 7th, 1899. 5^4 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Sudan, The (continue J). Sudan Campaign, by "An Officer." London, 1899. Sudan Ordinances. See the List in Count G-leichen's Handbook, 2nd ed., Yol. I., p. 341, and in the Sudan Gazette. Sudan War. Lives and Adventures of Heroes of the Soudan War. London, 1887. Sudan and Abyssinia, The. A Visit to an Abyssinian Bobber at home. Blackwood's Magazine, Oct., 1884, No. 828, pp. 481-497. SWAYNE, H. G. C. Seventeen Trips through Somaliland. London, 1903. Tabarie, M. G. G. Gordon le defenseur de Khartoum. Paris, 1886. Taverna, E. Le service du train dans la campagne des Anglais en Abyssinie. Paris, 1897. Taylor, B. Life and Landscape from Egypt to the Negro Kingdoms of the White Nile. London, 1854. Line Reise nach Central Afrika. Leipzig, 1855. Teisseire, E. Marchand et la Question du Haut-Nil. Societe de G-eog. de Marseille, Nov. 1898. Tellez, B. The Travels of the Jesuits in Ethiopia. A New Collection of Voyages and Travels, Vol. VII. London, 1708-10. Tellier, L. H. Etude Soudanaise. Paris, 1902. Teynard, F. Egypte et Nubie. Sites et monuments les plus interessants pour I 'etude de Vart et de I'histoire. 2 pts. Paris, 1858. Thevenot, Jean. Voyages de There not en Europe, Asie, et Afrique, etc. Paris, 1664-1674. Thiersch, H. W. F. Abyssinia. London, 1885. Thomson, Joseph. In the Heart of Africa. From the Equator to the Pole. 1887. To the Central African Lakes and back, 1878-1880. London, 1881. Through Masailand. Londoo, 1887. Thruston, A. B. African Incidents (Egypt and Unyoro). London, 1900. 565 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN Tixxk, John a. Geographical il Africa l>y three Dutch s. Liverpool, 1 Traill, II. D. Cairo to the 8 idan Frontier. London, 1896. England, Egypt, on London, 1900. Treaties. 7V / Ethiopi ' Kingdom, Italy, and Ethiopia, relative to the Frontiers bt I Ethiopia, and Eritrea. London, Treaty Series. \o. 16, 1902. Tremaux, r. Rapport i ■/■ ' ntal. Paris, 18 Voyage en Eli •'. et dan* la Nigritie. Paris. 1862. Trevkan, D. he Voyage ... VEgypte. See Schefer, Reeueil de Voyages, 1882. Trot n.\. T. W. vox. Oetafrika. Berlin, 1897. Tupki.a, Pkn.iamin (Rabbi). Rei L160-78 door Europa, A firiha, (8. Keyser.) Leyden, 1846. TllIAIKV, B. Mon 3t. Petersburg, 1902. TWYFORD, A. W. to the proj lition to discov* ro§8 of the White I 'roc. Eoy. Geo. Soc, 1 Chiii rilca. I'etermann, Geo. Mitt., 1904. Ule, < rno. Ealle, 1861. V ALBERT, G. /.' ' .' h du ( 'olond Bor Uevue des Deux Blondes, VoL L1X.. 1883. NT. Drafts a \ lating to the History and Geography of I Egypt, and Abyssinia. Collected by Viscount Valentia. (British Milium. Add. MSS. No. L9,3 Voyages and Tra Oeylon, th* . and Abyssinia in 1802-6. 4 vols. London. 1809. deleur, Lieut. < '. F. Uganda. Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc, 1897, Vol. IX., Campaigning on the Upi London, 1898. 566 ' BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN Vandbbheym, J. G. Une expedition avec le Negous Menelik. Paris, 1897. Van Deventee, De. L. W. Les Anglais a la Decouverte des Sources du Nil. De Gids, Sept., 1869. Van Ghistele, J. Voyage in landen . . . Arabien, Egypten, Ethiopien, Barbarien, etc. Grand, 1557. Varthema, L. [Vertomanus.] Itinerario de L. di Varthema. Venetia, 1517. The Travels of L. di Varthema, A.D. 1503-8. Translated by J. Winter Jones. Hakluyt Soc, 1863. Navigation and Voyages of L. Vertomanus to the regions of Arabia, Egypt, Persia, Ethiopia, and East Indies. Translated by R. Eden. Paris, 1577. Vaucelle, L. Chronologie des Monuments antiques de la Nubie, etc. Paris, 1829. Vkitch, Sophie F. F. Views in Central Abyssinia. London, 1868. VENTRE Pasha. Hydrologie du Bassin du Nil. Ball. Soc. G-eog. Khed., 1894. Crues Modemes et Crues Anciennes du Nil. Zeit. f. Aegypt. Sprache, Bd. 34, 1896. Verner, Capt. W. Sketches in the Soudan. London, 1886. VlGNE D'OCTOX, P. Terre de Mort — Soudan. Paris, 1892. VlGXEEAS, S. Une Mission francaise en Abyssinie. Paris, 1897. VlGXOLI, T. Intelligenz im Thierreiche. Leipzig, 1879. VlLLOTEAU, Gr. A. De VEtat Actuel de V Art Musical en Egypte. Paris, 1812. YlNGTRINIER, A. Le Soudan Egyptien hier et aujourdhui. Revue du Monde Latin, Mars, 1884. YlVAEEZ, M. Le Soudan Algerien. Paris, 1890. Vivian, H. Abyssinia. London, 1901. Vivien de St. Martin, L. Le Nord de VAfrique dans VAntiquite Grecque et Bomaine. Pari3, 1863. Gi'og. gener. de V Abyssinie. 1868. 567 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN VOGEL, De. E. Raise nach Centred Afrika, 1853-4. Mitteilungen aus Justus Perthes Geographischer Anstalt, etc. Gotha, 1855. YuI.NKY. ( !. Pbj| trie et en Egypte pendant les wnnees 1783-1785. 2 Tom. I'aris, 1787. Trawl* through Syria ami Egypi in the Years 1783-1785. 2 vols. London, 1787. rah* g \mtvelles sur VHistoire Ancienne. Paris, 1814. . I. Dissertation touchomi Vorigine du Xil et autres fieuves, etc. Paris, 1667. Vossion, L. Khartoum ft le s.>:uvain. WlLFOED, !•'. Egypt inni oth r vceni to the Gait rwerfor Nile of Ethiopia, mi book* of the Hindus. Asiatic Researches, Vol. III.. 1807. WlLKINS, II. St. Ci.aik. rmoitrvng ia. London, 1870. WILKIN80N, S11; .1. <;. Remarks 0,1 the country betwet n Wady Halfeh cmd Qebel Berkel in Elh Journal Royal Geog. Society, Vol. XX., 1850. WlLLCOCKS, S11; W. !'■ r. nnial Irrigation. < iairo, 189 I. Egyptian Irrigation. London, 1899. London, 1901. Xil. in 11)04. London. 1904. Williams, I '. How The Fortnightly Review. M Williams. Dk. J, . Adventures amongst the tribes, and travels in Egyj't in - L-1682. Lutdon, 1884. Williams. Rev. R. O. Physical, Historical, and Ethnological. LTniversity Quarterly, \ X \ . Wilson, Rev. C. T.. and Kki.kin. EL W. Stuttgart, 188 Wilson, Sib G. W WW with the S The Asiatic 'Quarterly, April, 1886. From Korti m. London, 1886. Wilson, ("alt. H. II. .1 /v p '/■ the Khar /■'< ninj on the left of the Sobat. Jour. Roy. •.. L902. II. Voyages. 3 vols. London, 18 570 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN WlNGATE, SlK F. E. Mahdiism and the Egyptian Sudan. London, 1891. The Sudan Past and Present. Minutes of Proceedings of the Boyal Artillery Institution, Woolwich, 1892, Yol. XIX., p. 675 ff. The Fate of the Sudcm. Edinburgh Review, 1892, Arol. CLXXV., p. 232 ff. The Rise and Wane of the Mahdi Religion in the Sudan. Proceedings of the Oriental Congress, 1892, p. 339 ff. The Siege and Fall of Khartoum. United Service Magazine, 1892, p. 406 ff. Wingate, Sir F. E., and Father Ohrwalder. Ten years' captivity in the Mahdi' s Gamp. London, 1892. WlNSTANLEY, W. A visit to Abyssinia. London, 1881. Wolff, H., and Blachere, A. Sahara et Soudan. Les Regiments de Dromadaires. Paris, 1884. Wolverton, Lord. Five 'months' Sport in Somaliland. London, 1894. WOTJVERMANS, H. Les Sources du Nil. Bulletin de la Societe Geog., Anvers, 1*77. Wright, H. C. S. Soudan '96. The Adventures of a War Artist. London, 1897. Wright, Prof. W. Catalogue of the Etlnopic MSS. in the British Museum. London, 1877. Wyche, Sir P. A Short Relation of the River Kile, of its Source and Current. London, 1673. Wylde, A. B. '83 to '87 in the Sudan. London, 1888. Modern Abyssinia. London, 1901. Wyxdham-Quix, W. T. The Soudan, its History, Geography, and Characteristics. A lecture. London, 1884. Young, T., M.I). Observations on . . . some sepulchral inscriptions from Nubia. Archaeo- logia, Vol. XIX., 1819. Zain-el-Abidin. Das Buch des Sudan. Aus d. Turk, ubersetzt von G. Rose*. Leipzig, 1847. ZOEPPRITZ, C. E. de Pruyssenaeres Reisen und Forschungen im Gebiete des Weissen und Blauen Nil. Petermanns Mitt. Erg., Gotha, 1877. No. 51. Watsons und ChippendalVs Aufnahme des Weissen Nil von Ghartum Ins Rigafund Junker s Aufnahme des Sobat. Petermanns Mittedungen, V. 571 THE EGYPTIAN SUDAN ZOTBNBBRG, II. ilogue dea MSS. de I" Bibl. Nat Fonda Ethiop. Paris, 1877. ZUBBUCHEN, J. <•■// Chortum, durch Kordofan wnd Dcufwr, 1879. Tagebucbblatter, Petermanns Mitt., Bd. 30. 18 ZWEEG, A. W. De Pygmaeis Aclliiopiae populis d Kiliae, 1727. .MAPS. The best and roost modern maps of the .Sudan are those of the (>ki Siryky, which are issued by the Director of Surveys of the Sudan Government. Each map covers 1° of latitude, and 1£° of longitude. The scale is 1 miles to the inch. Price Is. 6d. each. Published by the Intelligence Department, War Office. 572 INDEX Aah, Moon-god, i. 621,624. Aah-al-Kkr, ii. 439. Aahmes I., i. 561 ; in the Sudan, i. 562. Aahmes, Queen, i. 623. Aahmes-nefert-aii, i. 564. Aala, i. 563. Aamu, i. 505, 600; ii. 415, 416. Aamu-heru-sha, i. 517. Aa-shamu (?), i. 3S3. Ab, i. 630. Aba Island, ii. 376, 434, 43S. Ababda, ii. 407. Ababdah, i. 496 ; ii. 417, 435- Ababdah Arabs, i. 235. Ababdo, ii. 444. Abai, or Blue Nile, i. 19 ; ii. 362. Abai River, ii. 359. Abala, ii. 160. Abar, ii. 437. Abaton, ii. 74. 'Abawi, ii. 364. 'Abay, ii. 364. Abba Island, ii. 242, 243. Abbas Agha, i. 294. Abbas Pasha, ii. 84, 218. Abbas, steamer, ii. 250. Abbas, Sultan, ii. 265. Abbas, uncle of the Prophet "• 435, 437- Abbasiya Gadida, ii. yj6. Abbeloos and Lamy. ii. 295. Abd- a Haifa) Pasha, ii. 220, 263. Abd al-Kader, ii. 201. Abd al-Kader II., ii. 201. Abd al-Kader, Dervish, ii. 250. Abd al-Kader Hilmy, ii 239- Abd al-Kader Pasha, ii. 244. 245- Abd al-Kader (Slatin Pasha) ii. 246. Abd al-Kuma, i. 573. Abdallab, ii. 436, 438. Abd Allah, ii. 436. Abd Allah, father of the Mahdi, ii. 241. Abd Allah At-Ta'aishi the Khalifa, i. 213 ; ii. 260. Abd-Allah bin Sa'd, ii. 184, 185 ; Treaty of, ii. 186. Abd Allah Gema'a, ii. 200, 204. Abd Allah II. ibn Agil, ii. 204. Abd Allah ibn Ismail, ii. 188. Abd Allah ibn Jahan. ii. 187. Abd Allah ibn Sanbu, ii 196. Abd Allah III. Wad Agtb ii. 204. Abd Allah IV. Wad Agtb, ii. 204. Abd-Allah Wad al- Hasan, ii. 396. Abd Allah Wad Sa'ud, ii. 272. Abdallat Shekhs, ii. 204. Abd Al-Magid, i. 96; ii. 260, 261. Abd al-Malik ibn Musa ibn Nasir, ii. 192. Abd ar-Rahman I. of Dai Fur, ii. 206. Abd ar-Rahman II., ii. 206. 573 1 Abd ar-Rahman ibn Abd Allah, ii. 191. Abd as-Salam, ii. 205. Abeken, H., i. 62. Abhat, country of, i. 518. Abhat, i. 605. Abhet, i. 612. Abidiya, ii. 473. Abka, ii. 261. Abkulgui, i. 44, 47. Abnaheir, ii. 400. Abok, ii. 441. Abraham, i. 224, 464. Abri, i. 444. Abri, ii. 371. Abskhent, ii. 95. Abu, i. 515, 519, .530, 533; ii- 394- Abu Acmet, i. 313. Abu Adel, ii. 280. Abu Anga, ii. 261, 263, 264. Abiid, ii. 438. Abu Dalek, ii. 272. Abu Dis, ii. 473. Abu D6m Kashabi, ii. 372. Abu Dom Sanam, ii. 273- Abu Duiek, i. 254; ii. 407, 439- Abu Fatma, ii. 409. Abu Gameza. ii. 262, 263. Abu Garas, ii. 300. Abu Garid, ii. 430. Abu II gar, ii. 436. Abu Ilamed,']'. 55, 59, 6r, 62, 70, 76, 85, 100, 103, 104, 106, 113, 115, 184, 233> 253, 294, 470, 496, 497, 509, 549 ; ii- 93, 247, 252, 259, 261, 373, 458, 461, 467, 46S. , baths at, ii. 472. INDEX capture by . ii. 272. , c 191. . desert, i. 244. ■ d-Karema Rail- way, ii. 479. Abfl Harfiz, ii. 125, 126, \37> '. lashtm, ii. 396. 37~- Abukaya, ii. 424. Ilea, ii. 252. , wells of, i. 1 10. , stern -whe< 100, 102. Abfl Kus, Abu Kusst, i. 107. Abu'l Kasim, ii 200. Abulay, Na'ama, ii. 396. Abu Naga, i. 57. Abuncis, ii. 168. Abfl Rakwa, ii. 1 Abfl Sal'h, ii. 191, 102, 290, 29S, 299, 302-4. Abu Sa'ud Al-'Akad, ii. Sillem, ii. 473. 1, i. 39, 40, 53, to. 507, 625, 63O ff., 640, 651 ; ii. 74, 75- M 1 ' t>33- § : Rock of, i. 53, S4'.i : lib, ii. 241. 214. shar, i:. 431. Abu / , ford of, ii. 376. 54, 61, 251 . '.52. ii. 105, 201, 20 8, 3A9, 368. 39S. • 9i 10, 12, 21, 85, 216, 432 : ii. 213, 214. 23;, 234, 261, 268. ■ eat raw meat, i. [8. Acetuma, ii, 160. Achwa, ii. ! . i. 543 ; B1 363. 574 Agir, ii. 42S. Agar Dinkas, ii. Agars, ii. Agatharcides, ii. 155, 340, 342. Aggeh, i. Agha. i. 463. Aghurdat, ii. 266, 267. Agib, ii. 202. Agi,> ibn . 202, 204. Agiung Twi, ii. 320. Agole, ii. 160. Agriculture, ii. 4S3. , at 'Arnara, i. 467. Agriophagi, ii. 1 Agrip a, M., ii. - Agwei, ii. 361. Abainada, h. Ahatiu-en-beq, i. 565. Ahlylej, ii. 1 Ahmad, ii. 2 Ahmad al-( Wiazali, ii. 2S4. Abroad 'Alt, ii. 266. Ahmad al-Makstshif, ii. 241, 245. Ahmad al-Makur, ii Ahmid ai-Manikli. ii. 217. Ahmad Ash-Sharif, ii. 284. Ahmad iiakr, ii. 206. Ahmad Bey Khalifa, i. 104. Ahmad Effendi Ila 494. Ahmad Fadil, ii. 2S0, 400. Ahmad Hamad, ii. Ahmad 1 lam/a, ii. 404. Ahmad ibn Solaim, ii. 191. Ahmad, king ol 1 tarar, ii. 231- Ahmad of Derr, i. 442. Ahmad 1'aslia, ii. 214. Ahmad Shekh, ii. - Ahmad Shekh Agb&, ii. 22S. Sid al-K6m, i. 10. Ai. king, i. 625. Aihetab, i. 612. Aikheotka, ii Aina, well of, i. 641. Ain llamid, ii. 392. Aithiops, ii. 163. INDEX Ai-Yak, ii. 441. Ajak wad Deng, ii. 499. Ajang, ii. 444. Ajibir, ii. 361. Ajung, ii. 444. Aka 1, ii- 226. Akaita, i. 632, 638. 'Akalyun, ii. 436. Akanyaru, ii. 352, 387. Akaritha, i. 612. Akarkarhent, ii. 95. Akasha, i. 86, 90, 92, 93, 94. 459- 'Akki Kurra, ii 437. Aken, i. 543. 612. Akhenthek, i. 612. Akherkiu, i. 536. Akhmtm, ii. 191. i\kik, ii. 435- Akita, i. 549, 6 1 2, 643. Akka, i. 523. Akobo, ii- 361. Akoj, ii. 444. Akol, ii. 444. Akoli, ii. 399. Akremi Arabs, ii. 197, 198. Aksba, i. 637, 63S. Aksomye, ii. 180. Aktarrmr, ii. 197. Akwot, ii. 444. 'Ala Ad-Din 1'fighi, ii. 239. Al-A'alam, i. 551. Alabastronpolis, i. 518. Alacli, ii. 164. Al-Afiam, ii. 194. Al-Aganib, ii. 439. Al-Aa.in Wad Mismar, ii. 204. Alana, ii. 160. Alatiyun, ii. 436. Albak, ii. 392. Al-Ballali, ii. 232. Albanians, ii. 210. Al-Barghuth, Shekh, ii. 474- Al-Basra, i. 471. Alberti, ii. 422. Albertine Rift Valley, ii. 352. Albert N'yanza discovered, ii. 222. Al-Debba, i. 107. Aldrovandia, ii. 481. Al-'Elafun, ii. 250. Aleppo, i. 30, 604. Alexander the Great, ii. 10S. Alexandria, i. 18, 62 ; ii. 157, 167, 16S, 184, 210, 218. , Church of, ii. 2S8. , Library, ii. 347. Al-Fasher, ii. 246, 249, 262, 263, 391, 398, 430, 434, 436- Al-Fuka'i, ii. 6. Al-Gabarta, ii. 440. Al-Ghuzz, ii. 207, 210. Al-IIadur, ii. 439. Al-Halabat, ii. 440. Alt, Haggi, i. 1. Ali of Tunis, ii. 422. Aliab, ii. 273, 473. Aliab Dok, ii. 380. Aliab tribe, ii. 381. Ali Abd AMvarim, ii. 281. Ali Agha, ii. 210. Ali Baba, ii. 190, Ali Bey, ii. 239, 227. Ali Bey Satfi, ii. 244. Ali Dinar, ii. 249, 282, 2S4, 398. Al-ldrisi, ii. 329. Ali Effendi, ii. 243. Ali Ga'alan, ii. 435. Aii Murghani, ii. 373. Ali Pasha Sharkas, ii. 21 8. Ali Pasha. Sirri, ii. 218. Al-'Irak, ii. 2Q9. Ali Shalabi, i. 8. Al-Islam, i. 224. Ali Wad Helu, ii. 275, 276, 280. Aliya, ii. 303. Al-Kao, i. 532. Al-Kasr, ii. 185, 188, 189. Al-Katena, ii. 375. Al-Kef, ii. 408. Al-Khartum, i. 42. Al-Kirman, i. 51. Al-K6z, ii. 473. Al-Kureshi, Shekh, ii. 242. Al-Lahun, i. 551; ii. 7, 18. Allan, Adriana, i. 18. Al-Makherif, i. 114. 575 Al-M-i'mim, ii. 298. Al-Mangaliik, ii. 204. Al-Masaw\varat, i. 47. Al-Mcga, ii. 473. Almkvist, ii. 445, 502. Al-Mutawakkil, ii. 189. Aloa, ii. 182. Al-Obed, ii. 213, 217, 2 ; 1, 245, 246, 281, 284, 375. 396, 479, 488, 509. Al-()i)cd, Shekh, ii. 250. Al-Ordi, i. 103 ; ii. 372. Altaku, ii. 34, 35. Altar at Wad Ba Nagaa, i. 287. , Meroitic, i. 433. Alu-Amen, Pyramid of, i. 382. Al-Ubayyad, ii. 213. Alum, i. 217 ; ii. 412. , Oasis, ii. 412. Al-Urdi, ii. 297. Aluro, ii. 360. Alut, ii. 89, 303. Alvarez, Father F., ii. 304, 307, 349- Aiwa, i. 324 ; ii. 186, 1 99, 288, 303, 306. Alwah, ii. 89, 9S. Al-Walid ibn Hisham al- Khariji, ii. 191. Amada, i. 14, 458, 574, 59S, 604, 629, 643, 651 ; ii. 297. , temple of Thothmes III. at, i. 599. , temple of Amen-hetep II. at, i.599. Amadi, ii. 282. Amadib, ii. 260. Amai, ii. 196. Aniam, i. 2, 517, 518, 520, 521, 526. Aman, i. 534, 536. Amana, i. 524. Amara, i. 60, 62, 444, 637, 651; ii. no, 1 16, 119, 120, 122, 134, 170, 261, 371- , Cataract of, ii. 366. , excavations at, i. 468. , temple of, i. 467. INDEX Amara. on White Nile, ii. 'Amara Dunkas, ii. 2CO. Amara ihn Sakakin, ii. 201. Amasis, i. 426. Amasis, a genera] of Psammetichus II., ii. 74. Amasis I., i. Amasis II., i. 425 ; ii. 90, 91. Amasis, son of liaba, the general i. 562, 563, 564, 565, 566, s A ma Pen-nekheb, i. 503, 564, 565, 570. Amathel, ii. 57. A mat her, i. 1 49 Amazons, i. 23. Am bad!, ii. 205. Ambasa, ii, 189. Ambatch, ii. 173. Amhikol (Ambigdl), ii. 372. , Cataract of, ii. 366. , Road, i. 91. , Wells, i. 50, 91, 246, 43S, 472 ; ii. 261, 270, 462, 464. Amemit, i. 370. Amen, i. 30, 67, 306, 36S, 400, 561, 572, 584. 9, 620, 622, 636, 637, \&l ii. 4, 5, 6, 7, 13, 15, 17, 19, 20, 21, Si, 52. 56, 58. 65, 76, 112, 131, 135, 136. , College of, founded, i. , double form of, ii. 3. , fame of, dwindl , festival of, ii. 1 5. . urkal,i. 143. Napata, 1. 134. 137, 3 ; ii. 87, 95, 96. 1 , of Pa-Nel 1 <,: , of Tarukhet(?) ii. 7" . . I ; fly. to Na] 652 ; memorial services of, i. 649 ; usurp royal powers, i. 645. Amen, Ram of, i. 617, 618. , Ram sacred to, i. 597. , the Nubian, ii. 1. , two forms of, at Gebel liarkal. ii. 46. Amen-i'ilti, ii. 82. Vr, Pyramid of, i. 357. Amen-Arit (or, Tarit), i. 365 ; ii. 117. , Pyramid of, i. 357. \i<|(ark)-ncb, ii. 1 18. , Pyramid of, i. 4:5. Amenfutas, ii. 28, 30, 23- Amen-asru, i. 625. , lion usurped by, i. 618. Amen-em-apt, prince of Rash, i. 630 ; ii. 326. Am en-em-bat L, i. 553 ; ii. 19, 328. , in the Sudan, i. 532, 534- Amen-em-hat II., i. 539, 553. , in the Sudan, i. 538. Amen-em-hat III., in the Sudan, i. 549, 554. Amen-em-hat IV., i 555. 573- Amen-her-khenesh-f, i Amen-her-unemi-f, ii Amen-hetep I., i. 62?, 648, , in the Sudan, i. 564- 567. Amen-hetep II., i.463, 597, 604, 616, 627 ; ii. 2, [24, , brings seven dead kings to Egypt, i. 598. mple of, at 'Amada, i- 599- , ar Behen, i. 601. , travels of, i. 602. Amen-hetep III., i. 61, 67. 149. 454, 462, : ii. 45. I70, 334- Amen-hetep IV.. i. 607, 57$ 552, 636. 325. Amen-hetep, a priest, i. 604. Amen-hetep, high priest, i. 644. Ameni, i. 535, 536. , inscription of, i. 4S1. , stele of, i. 5 Ameni-em-hat, i. 534, 553. Ameni of Menat-Rhufu, i. . 534- Amen-ka-Ankh, i. 362. Amen-khetashen, ii. 119. , pyramid of, i. 407. Amen-meri-Asru, pyramid of, i. 419 ft". Amen-netek, pyramid of, i. 412. Amen-Ra. i. 137, 104, 427, 451, 587, 588, 591, 597, 605, 612, 618, 621, 624, 625, 626, 630, 633, 635, 644, 651 ; ii. 8, 18, 33, 42,45, 49, 57, 62, 63, 66, 70, 79, 106, 122. , temple of, a1. Semna, i. 482. , of Redesiya, i. 628, 629. Amen-Ra-khu-Aten, ii. 45. Amen-rut-meri-Amen, ii. 51. Amen-Shipalta, Pyramid of, i- 373- Amen-Tahnamamip, ii. 119. Amentaket, i. 1 37. Amen-larhaknen, ii. 66. Amen-tari (Ra-mer-ka), ii. 119. Amen-tarit, i. 412 ; ii. 120, 1 22. 1 27, 140, 142. , temple of, ii. 130 ff. Amen-Tarit = Candace, the foe of Petronius(?), ii. 169, 170. Amen-taui-Kalbath, ii. 117. Amentet. i. 400 ; ii. 11. , Souls of, i. 385, Amenti, i- ;,oo. Amentiu g"ds. i. ; Amentogo, ii. 300. American Mission, i. 281. Amery, Captain II. F, S., i. 41 ; ii. 444, 460, 502. Amhara, ii. , INDEX Amharic, i. 8, 432. , Vocabulary, ii. 502. Amhet, ii. 22. Amin ibn Naser, ii. 204. Amiro, i. 381. Ammon the Monk, ii. 290. Ammonium, i. 56, 57 ; ii. 149. Amnah, Tale of, i. 235 ff. Amodita, ii. 160. Amoibichos, ii. 74. Amon Ship(?)a!ak, i. 374. Ann", a shekh, ii. 204. Amr Bey, ii. 214. Amr I. of Dar Fur, ii. 206. Amr II. of Dar Fur, ii. 206. Amr ibn al-'Asi, i. 184; ii. 185, 193- Amr ibn Shurahhil, ii. 187. Amsu, i. 368, 386, 599, 625. Amtel, i. 149. Amtes, queen, i. 516. Amu-kehek, i. 56$. Amulets, i. 105, '215 ft'., 222 ; ii. 23, 205. Amu-neb-hek, i. 565. An, ii. 11. Anaks, ii. 175, 184, 436, , tombs, ii. 501. Anba George, ii. 299. Anba Kha'il, ii. 192. Anba Yusab, ii. 298. Andatis, ii. 164. Andersson, ii. 422. Andetae, ii. 164. Androgalis, ii. 160. Andromeda, ii. 161. Anerua . . . ru, ii. So. Angrab River, i. 251. Anhai, Papyrus of, i. 370. An-IIer, i. 604; ii. 45, 82. Ani, Prince of Kash, i. 637. Aniba, i. 643. Animals, mythical, ii. 149. Anka, ii. 439. Ankarab River, i. 19, Ankaiib, i. 109, 205. Ankh-IIeru, ii. 24. Ankh-ka-Ra, ii. 84, 117 119, 120. VOL. II. Ankh-nefcr-ab-Ra, ii. 1 18. Ankh-s-en-pa-Aten, i. 624. Ankoli, ii. 352. An-Mut-f, i. 5S8. An-Nagumi, ii. 252. An-Nasir, ii. 196. Annu, ii. 22. An-Niir, i. 496. Anokal, ii. 203. Anpu, i. 358, 421. Anqet, i. 599, 626. Ansa II., ii. 202. Ansa III., ii. 203. Ansun, ii. 299. Ant, ii. 26. Antefa, i. 530. Anthony, a friar, i. 6. Anthony the Great, ii. 290. Anthropophagi, ii. 165. Anti (Hill men), i. 532, 571 588, 598, 631 ; ii. 174, 305, 328, 416. , figures, ii. 22. Anti, on Blue Nile, ii. 305. Anti of Ta-Kenset, i. 562, 563, 564, 569, 604, 628, 629. Antimony, ii. 412. Antinori, ii. 446. Antiquarium at Munich, i. 299, 382. Antoninus, Itinerary of, i. 633. Anuaks, ii. 360, 424. Anubis, i. 160, 301, 362, 367, 370, 3^5, 3S6, 389, 391, 392, 400, 404, 418. 432- Anuqet, i. 548, 556, 625, 630, 633, 637. Ape of Khonsu, i. 370, 3S1. Ape of Thoth, i. 36. Apes, i. 571 ; ii. 109. Apet, i. 643. Aphek, ii. 38. Aphrodisiacs, i. 221. Aphroditopolis, ii. 9, 12, 25. Apis, i. 400. Apollo, ii. 164. Apple, bitter, i. 3. Ap-she, ii. 18. Apt, Festival of, ii. 14. 577 Apthethua, i. 613. Apts, the, ii. 13, 17, 19. , temple of, at Gebel Barkal, ii. 79. Ap-uat, i. 358. Aqabet, i. 568. Aqen, i. 543. Aqleq, ii. 35, 41, 42. Aqreq, mother of Tirhakah, . "• 35- Ara, father of Herdchuf, i. 520. Araba, ii. 164. Arab al-Bashir, ii. 436. Arabeta, ii. 160. Arab-Hag, ii. 300. Arabia, i. 217 ; ii. 154, 158, 164, 170, 199, 225, 340. Arabia Felix, ii. 167. Arabians, ii. 53. Arabic, ii. 490. , graffiti, i. 365, 404. -, language, i. 30, 33; ii. 444. Arabi Dafa' Allah, ii. 284, 381. Arabi wad Dafa' Allah, ii. 226. Arabs, i. 10, 33, 34, 36, 40, 42, 57, 82, 252, 259, 506, 507, 510 ; ii. 90, 167, 184, 199, 221, 324. — in the Sudan, ii. 421. — of Singue, i. 44. — tribes, ii. 436. I Arafat, i. 32. Araktl Bey, ii. 220, 234. Arakiyun, ii. 436. Aramasos, ii. 160. Arambo, i. 35. Aramus, ii. 160. Arbab, ii. 202. Arbagi, i. 21 ; ii. 204. 305. Arba'in Road, ii. 391, 432, 458. Archers, ii. 16. Archisarmi, ii. 164. Arduwan, ii. 371. Arek, i. 605. Arendrup, Col., ii. 234. Arersa, ii. 95. Arerthet, i. 521. PP INDEX Argtn, i. 77, Si, S2, S3. 90 ; ArtotuonofF, Col., ii. 361. Astaboras, i. 31, 55; ii. 157, ii. 263. Arua, ii. Si. 365- Ar-hes-nefer, ii. 112. Aru-Amen, ii. 1 18. Astap Ariel, herd of, i. 325. Aruka ... th, ii. So. Astapus, ii. 153, 157, 159. Arimondi, Col., ii. Aruruk (?), i. 612. ':is, ii. 157, 359. Aristocreon, ii. 162, 164, Aruthnait, ii. S2. Ast»em-khebit, i. 04N. Ary&b, ii. 392. 436. nachus, ii, 17s- Asachae, ii. in+. Asua River, ii. }^J, 386. Aristotle, i. 522 ; ii. 347. A-Sande, ii. 424. Asuru, i. 613. Ari-Umkcr, ii. 443- A-Sandt, ii. 432. Aswan, i. 3, 13. 21, 22, 23, Arju hills, ii. 386. Asara, ii. 164. 26. Ark-Amen, i. Ascalon, ii. 24. 105, Arkaret, ii. 79. A*el, ii. 104. 463, 520, 530 639, 640; Ark-atalal (?) ii. 119. l2°- ii. 104, 105, 1S5, 187, Ark-teten (?) ii. M3- Ashshan&b, ii. 435. . mi. 107, 198, 199, Arkenkherel, ii. 117- Ashur, ii. 41. 207. . Pyramid of, i. Ashur-bani-pal, i. 4S7 ; ii. 366. Arkiko, i. 18. 40, 41, 40, 52. , map of, i. 66. ssal statues of, i. , Annals, ii. 50, 51. , tombs at, i 203. 4ii 557; ii. , and Tanuath-Amen, ii. , views of, 67. Arkd, island of, i. 3, 35, 36, 50. Aswan!, well of, ii. 37a. 51, 60, 62, 103, 556, 5S9, Asia. i. 562 ; ii. 16. a- Luxor Railway, i. 651 ; ii. 212, 372, 407, Asiatics, i. 505, 531. 2S3. 479- Askam, ii. 55. Ln-Shellal Railway, i. Armant, ii. 4!4- Askan, i, 51. 574- Armbruster, Mr. Carl, ii. Asmakh, ii. 54. 106. •. i. I. S, [0, 2 299, 365. 502. Asna, ii. iSo. 357. 50S; ii. 9, 105, 40b, 45S, Armlets from Merofe', i. 461, 647. 299 ff. Asotriba, ii. Atab, Island of, i. 46S. Arm- '., ii. 2S4. Aspelta, ii. 5S-65. Atappi, ii. j 460. Amu, i. 421-424, 427. Atbil, ii. 2S5, 41 1. 435. Arnaud, Mr., i. ^22. Asru-meri-Amen, ii. us. Atb.ua, i 31, 55, 97, 114, Arnauts, ii. 210, 214. • king, i- 515, 523, 524. 241, 250, 254, 264, 279, Arnitti Island, i. 444. 466 ; 532. 281 ; ii. S3, SS, 221, 231, ii. 291. As-Samarkandi, ii. 201. 27-' 390, 391. Amen, ii. 109, 1 12, 113. As-Senussi, Shekh, ii. 2S4. 459, 464, [14, 115. 154- i. 50S, 543. , Battle of, i. 17S ; ii. , caravan of, i. 520. 253. 273- 274- poisoned, ii. 1 the Forty-two, i. , British cemetery at, i. :. ii. 107. 369- 252. Arrpakha, i As-§ufra, ii. 152. Fort, i. 252, 256, 2S2 ; 1 j 1. ii. 272. m, i. 640, • ir, Pyramids of, i. 41, Junction, ii, 473, 474, 641. 49. 435 ; «■ 402. 479- Arta, ii. 69. • '• 55- Railway Bridge, ii. taabatitae, ii. 165. A-sur-nailin-ahi, ii. 471. : of, i. 102. Uballit, ii. , opened, ii, 2S0. Artatama, i. 604. 17. 40. Atbara (Atbarft) River, i. Artemidorus, ii. 155, Assyrians, 251, 252; ii. 365 if., 374, 162. 40, 41. 398. Arthct, i. 517, 51S. 520. 534. Thothmes , discharge of, ii. Aiticuia, Island III, i. 571. 578 INDEX Atbara-Sawakin Railway, ii. . 284, 443, 474 ff. Atchakhar-Amen, ii. 113, 114, 115. Atef crown, i. 383, 400, 401. Ateftfeit, ii. in. Atem, ii. 358. Aten, i. 622. , cult of, i. 623, 624. Atharumaqu, i. 612. Athlenersa, ii. 57. Athribis, ii. 52, 53. Atiri, ii. 371. Atlantia, ii. 163. Atlenersa, i. 139 ; ii. 27. Atoi-toish, ii. 442. Atshan, ii. 202. Attab, i. 444. At-Tabra, i. 102. At-Takarana, ii. 440. At-Tayyib, Shekh, ii. 437. At-Teb, ii. 249, 265. Atteva, ii. 161, 168. Atwaro, ii. 205. Auapeth the rebel, i. 648, 649, 650 ; ii. 5, 8, 14, 21, 24. Augustus, ii. 113, 161, 166, # 167. Auha, i. 526, 527. Aurelian, Emp., ii. 175. Aurusha, ii. 612. Auruspi, i. 164. Austin, Maj., ii. 2S2, 361. Autochthones, ii. 153. Automoloi, ii. 54, 106. Avaris, i. 561, 562. Awai, ii. 358. Awamba, i. 525. Awas al-Guarani, i. 75. Awin, ii. 444. Awlad Abu Ruf, ii. 436. Awlad ar-Rif, ii. 440. Awlad Hamid, ii. 436. Awlad Kenz, i. 197, 198. 'Awra, ii. 428. Awrambek, ii. 399. Awtan, ii. 260. Awtaw, ii. 392. Axum, i. 18 ; ii. 180. Aydhab, ii 189, 193, 194, | 197. Ayrton, Mr. E. R. A., i. 640. Ayub Pasha, ii. 482. Ayugi, ii- 357- Azande, ii. 287. A-Zandi, ii. 432. Azolla, ii. 481. Azz ad-Din Ibek, ii. 196 Baal, king of Tyre, ii. 38. Baba, i. 563, 564, 566, 567. Baboons, i. 28. Babungera, ii. 432. Bab Zuwela, ii. 198. Babylon, ii. 40. Babylon of Egypt, ii. 1S4, 193- Babylonians, ii. 74. Bicata, ii. 160. Bacchus, ii. 106. Badi, ii. 202. Badi V., ii. 203. Badi abu Dhikn, ii. 202. Badi abu Shallukh, ii. 203. Badi al-Ahmar, ii. 202. Badi ibn Mismar, ii. 204. Badi ibn Tabal, ii. 203, 204. Baert, ii. 266. Baga, ii. 417. Bagemder, ii. 364. Baghdad, ii. 189, 190, 199, 500. Bagirmi, ii. 39S. Bagrash, ii. 303. Bagrawiya, i. 62, 240, 287, 435- , Shekh of, 268 ff. Bagromeh, i. 55, 435. Bahnase, ii. 184. Bahr al-Abyad, i. 23 ,• ii. 356. Bahr al-Ankareb, ii. 365. Bahr al-'Arab, ii. 359, 399. Bahr al-Asfar (Sobat), ii. 359, 360. Bahr al-Azrak, ii. 364. Bahr al-Gebel, ii. 173, 350, 356, 366, 3^7, 379, 3S6, 4S1, 484, 485. Bahr al-Ghazal, ii. 106, 232, 235, 264, 267, 273, 281, 320, 356, 380, 390, 459, 4S1. 579 Bahr-al-Ghazal, discharge of, ii. 368. Province, ii. 236, 399. Bahr al-Homr, ii. 359, 399. Bahr az-Zarafa, ii. 230, 358, 36c, 379, 390, 481, 4S5. , discharge of, ii. 368. Bahr bila-ma, i. 508. Bihriya, ii. 290. Bahr Ramliya, ii. 357. Bahr Sana, ii. 363. Bahr Yusuf, i. 541. Bai, i. 640. Baibukh, i. 227. Bailey, Maj. W. E., ii. 508. Baines, ii. 422. Bairam, i. 503. Baird, Mr. J., ii. 460. Bak'a al-Mahdi, ii. 396. Bakennifi, ii. 14. Bakenrenf, ii. 28. Baker, Col.Valentine, ii.249. Baker, Sir Samuel, i. 76, 249, 251, 252, 258, 261, 522, 536 ;ii. 221,223,230, 238, 35o, 35i, 356, 365, 378, 384,461. , appointed Governor of the Sudan, ii, 227. , called a " steam en- gine," i. 270. , discovers Albert N'y- anza, ii. 222. , on missionaries, ii. 317. Baket, ii. m. Bakhit, ii. 301. Bakkara al-IIawzama, ii. 436. Bakkara Maharaba, ii. 436. Bakkara, the, i. 85, 93, 172, 242, 276, 328, 564, : ii. 397- Bakshish, i. 232. Bakt, or Tribute, ii. 185, 187, 18S, 189, 190, 193, 194, 29S. Balance of the Two Lands, ii. 21. Balance, the, i. 370, 381, 387. INDEX balanga, ii. 263. Balariba, ii. 354. Balad Sudan, i. 506. Balbona, ii. 356. 524. t, Dr. A., i. 190; ii. 494. Balii, ii. 165. Ball, Mr. John, i. 474. Balsam, i. 532. , trees, ii. 327. Bambara, ii. 39S. Baraia, i. 217. . igaa (or Ban Nagaa), ». 57- Banda slaves, ii. 406. Ba-neb-Tet, ii. 324. Bangles, i. 219. . gold, i. 305. Banholzer, ii. 434, 444. Banks, Sir Joseph, i. 29. Banner, ii. 135, 136. Bansaka, ii. 299. Baptism in Ethiopia, 1. 514. ii. 244, 396, 412. Baiabara, i. 13, 22, 26, 89, 9r, 531; ii. 410. , language of, ii. 420. 1 River, ii. 366. ;. 471. vu, ii. 478. Baralieri, Col., ii. 267. . ii. 104. it, ii. 409. Bar-] tebraeus, 295. , quoted, ii. 290. ii. 314, 385, 420 442. tribes, ii. 234, 313. tukls, ii. 381. . ii. 191. id, ii. 430, 441. d, village, i. 206 ff., 216, 21S, 222. 226. Barkuk, Sultan, ii. 210. Ik, i. 105. River, ii. 2S5. 236. i. 36. It, ii. 436. Barron, Mr., ii. 507. Barrow, Sir John, i Barta, ii. 430, 440, 441. , tribes of the, i. 44. Barter, i. 3. Barlh, ii. 422. Barti, ii. 430. die god, i. 62S. Baruat (MeroJJ), ii. Si, S2. Baruka, ii. 81. Bashbflzak, ii. 232. Bashi-bazouks, ii. 249. Bashlr, ii. 213. -. ii. 162. i. 29, 62. Basra, ii. 500. bis-, ii. 23; ofTaret, Tert, Thert, ii. 79, 90, 96, 102. Bastian, ii. 422. Bata, i. 523. Batahfn, ii. 436. Batn al-Ha^ar, i. 3 1, 60 88 ; ii. 370. Batta, ii. 160. Battahtn, ii. 390. Batua, ii. 424. Batwa, i. 525. Ba-ur-tet, i. 515, 532. Bavle, St. John, i. 24. Bayuda Desert, i. 4, 58, 61, 509, 525 ; ii. 89, 182, 374. , 70 wells of, ii. 392. Bazungu, i. 525. 1. 217, 218. , The thousand, i. 226. Beauchamp Bequest, ii. 493. rs, ii. 193, 194. Bid, ii. 364. 385. LS, ii. 1S4. us, ii. 179. Bee, i. 306. Beer, ii. 13. i. 222, 401 ; ii, 440. 63O. «, ii. 17;. ■ 417. (S Begaraviah, i. 2S7, 307. 580 Behen (Wadl Haifa), i. 54S, 553 576, 599, 601, 605, 627, 637; ii. 75. 328. Behent, ii. in. Behthalis, ii. 76. Behuti Beja, ii. [87 1, 193, 291, 307. , described, ii. 179. Bejas, ii. 417, 506. bekhani, ii. 336. Bela, ii. 301. Belak, i. S. Belal, i. 234 ; ii. 116, 302. Belgians, ii. 268. Bells, Gold, i. 305. '• Belly • ii. 93. Beltrame, Father, ii. 312,* 445- 446. i. < ',.. i. 40 ; ii. 313. Ben al-Kasreii, ii. 2IO. Beni "Abbas, ii. 187, Beni 'Amar, ii. 4 15, 436. beni Amer, ii. 261. beni Fad.lt ii- 436. beni Garrar, ii. 436. beni Hasan, i. 532, 554, 633 ; ii. 436. B ni Helba, ii. 436. '< )mniia, ii. 1S7. Shankul, U. 339, 410, 430- I 'minia, ii. 438. beni Wayl, ii. 189. Bennu bird, i. 384. bent-anta, i. 636. r, i. 31, 41, 49, 55, 61, IOO, 104, 113, 114, 115, [84, 1S7. 209, 247- 249, 254, 2S1, 294, 509; ii. 213, 217, 236, 241. '- 271, 273, 373, 574, 3, 461, 462, 467. , entered by Sirdar, ii. , evacuated by 1 tervishes, ii. 272. ! district, ii. 401. Province, ii. 401. Town, ii. 401. b-rbcr-Sawakin road, ii. 272 INDEX Ber es-Soudan, i. 506. Berghoff, ii. 243, 244. Bergida, ii. 363. Beris, i. 23, 85 ; ii. 266. Berkeley, Fort, ii. 385. Berlin, i. 61, 149, 502, 547. Museum, Ferlini's objects in, i. 299 ff. Bernard, Col. E. G., ii. 453, 501. Berressa, ii. 160. Berti, ii. 90, 99. Beruat, ii. 87. Berut, i. 646 ; ii. 39. Bes, the buffoon of the gods, i. 524. Bes, the god, i. 57, 133, 134, 138; ii. 45, 69, 125, 151. , the dwarf god, i. 523. Bet al-Amana, ii. 396. Bet al-Wali, ii. 325. , Temple of, i. 633. Bethell, Capt. A. B., ii. 287, 460. Beth Nahrin, i. 607. Beurmann, ii. 422. Bigga, Island of, i. 27, 72, 574, 598 ; ii. 74- Bihamu, i. 551. Biko, ii. 43. Bintemoda dates, i. 47 1. Bion, ii. 130, 164. Bir, i. 329. Bir al-Malh, i. 21. Bir at Masavvvvarat, i. 327. Birch, Dr., i. 299, 533, 536, 538, 548, 605, 648 ; ii. 35, 335. 336, 338. Bir Daffer, i. 52, 53. Birds, i. 234. , scaring, i. 267. Birejik, i. 328. Biremes, ii. 167. Biri, ii. 399. Birka, ii. 436, 437, 439. Bir Natrun, ii. 412. Birs, i. 315. Bir Sultan, ii. 391. Biselli, ii. 315- Bishar, ii. 435. Bishara, ii. 206. Bisharin Arabs, i. 70, 630 ; ii. 175, 328, 417- , three divisions of, ii. 435- Bishra, ii. 281. Bissing, F. W. von, i. 521. Bitumen, stream of, ii. 160. Bizama, ii. 364. Blacks, i. 505, 512,513,539, 544, 548, 600, 631 ; ii. 413- , country of, i. 506. , decree against, i. 543. , described, ii. 154. , Land of, i. 2, 515 ; ii. 79- Black Stone, i. 224. Black Tribes, i. 515. Blake, Mr., i. 109. Blakeney, R. B. D., ii. 463. Blemmyes, i. 28; ii. 158, 175. 176, 177, 173, 185, 290 ff., 309, 328,417, 436, 506. Blewitt, Major A., ii. 361. Blood of bulls, ii. 91. Blunt, Captain, i. 87. Bo, ii. 399. Boardman, Col.-Serg., ii. 284, 460, 483, 507. Boat-building, ii. 376. Boat of Amen, i. 646. , of Ra, i. 417 ; ii. 8. , of Tern, ii. 8. , of the Sun, i. 383, 425. Boats, scarcity of, i. 439. Bocchoris, ii. 28. Boeckh, ii. 297. Bogos, ii. 231. Boggia, ii. 160. Boiwj, ii. 444. Boj, ii. 444. Bolako, ii. 399. Bomgia, ii. 424. Bonaparte, Napoleon, ii.210. Bonarti, i. 2. Bond, Engineer-Commander, h. 459, 483, 5°9- Bones of animals in tombs i. 344- Bonga, ii. 360. 58i Bongo, ii. 315, 322, 399, 424, 428. woman, ii. 403. Bonham-Carter, Mr. E., ii. 460, 490, 496. Bonomi, Mr. J., i. 62 ; ii. 325. Boomerangs, i. 520, 571. Bdr, ii. 172, 230, 233, 266, 321, 358, 380, 485. Bordein, the, Gordon's steamer, i. 255 ff. Bornu, ii. 398, 422. Boron, ii. 160. Borru, ii. 442. Bor Skekh, ii. 441. Borton, Capt. N. T., i. 10S, 109, 182 ; ii. 500. Boru, ii. 399. Bosnians, ii. 20S, 308. , fortresses, ii. 207. , troops, ii. 207. Bottego, Signor, ii. 361. Boulnois, Major W., ii. 282, 286, 460, 507. Bourriant, ii. 27. Boutros Ghali, ii. 508. Bowditch, ii. 422. Bower, Captain, ii. 460. Bows, i. 2S6; ii. 154, 159. , the fifteen, i. 531. , palm-stem, ii. 107. Boyle, Mr. H., i. 264, 322. Boys, Ethiopian, ii. 105. Bracelet, i. 487. Brahuls, ii. 426. Bramley, Mr. Jenning.s, ii. 460. Brass, ii. 153. rings, ii. 154. Bray, Maj. II. A., ii. 2S7. Bread-stamps, i. 151. Breeches of human hair, ii. 154. Brehm, ii. 422. Brendo (raw meat), ii. 73. Brera, ii. 424. Brevedent, C. F. Xaverius de, i. 1, 3, 6. Briareus, i. 635. Bricks, ii. 159. Bridge, Portuguese, ii. 364. INDEX British Museum, i. 504*- , Trustees of, i. 63, 113. 321,323. 437, 502. Iwood, Col., i. 183; ii. 275. Bronze bowl, i. 306. boxes, i. 307. pot, i. 345- Brood mares, ii. 7. Broun, ii. 500. , Mrs., i Brown, Maj. R. II., R. E., i. 551, 552. Brawn, Mr. R., ii. 307. ne, W. G., i. 26, 52, 506; ii. 207, 39S. , Travels of, i. 23 ff. Bruce, James, i. 5, 7, 8, 12, 23, 41 ; »• 349» 404- , Travels of, i. 17 ff- h, Dr. H., i. 486, 541, 552, 568, 573, : ii. 84, 04. 447- 16 (raw meat), ii. 73. Brun-Rollet, ii. 446. Brunyate, Mr. W. E., ii. 496. '• 533. 55*'- 652 ; ii. 2, 5, 14, 23 SO. Bucbta, ii. 432, 433- tya, ii. 437, 43s- . 430, 441. on, i. 524. itai, ii. 417. Buiuuaua, i. 647. 648. , Museum of, i. 649. Bnlbul, ii. . Bull, Bulls, i. 301, 384, 397 ; ii. 155. j three hundred fighting, ii. 10S. , gold, ii. 101. , wild, ii. 157. of Amentet, ii. 414. Buller, Sir Red vers, ii. 259. BulrU Xarti, i. 2. Buhvena, ii. 365. Buma, ii. 160. Bunbury, Capt., i. 1S2 ; ii. 460. Bunek, ii. 443. Bun Yung, ii. 443. Burckhardt, i. 34, 93, 105, 225, 437, 439, 463, 466, 476, 478, 494. 521, 634. 636; ii. 184, 185. 1S7, 189, 190, 195, 297., 304, 330, 401. 404. , travels of, i. 29 IT. Harden, i. 279 ; ii. 239,251. Bordein. Burden! Bey, ii. 251, 253, 254. Purges Capt. F., ii. 2S1. Buri, ii. 399. Burn Murdoch, Major, i. ■ 94. Burnu, ii. 440. Burraburiyash, ii. 322. Burton, Sir R., i. 460 ; ii. 220, 350. Burun, ii. 285, 430. , Negroes, ii. 489. Bus, ii. 173. Bushmen, ii. 425. : is, ii. 5, 14, 24. a, ii. 352. ih, i. 471. Bey, ii. 460. Butler, Mr. A. J., ii. 192, 302, 304, 493, 500. Buvuma, ii. 352. i, ii. 443. Pyssus, ii. 23, 24. CADEUMA, ii. 160. Caecilius Bion, ii. 34S. • '• 57- . thrown n, ii. 168. Cailliaud, i. 12, 23, 37, 56, 57, 59. 120, 133, 134, ' 155. J56, 159, 102, 163, 164, 169, 175, 201, 240, 267, 274, 275, 287, 328, 342, 34S, 352, 35 I 1S« I5.h 4(JJ, 466, 582 566; ii. 10, 124. 125, 147, 292, 351, 404, 411, 430. Cailliaud, Travels of, i. 3S. Cairo, i. 5, 6, 8, 10, 22, 23, 25, 29, 30, 32, 36, 53. 54, 55, 64, 68, 92, 100, 250, 271, 272; ii. 191, 192, 196, 200, 209, 211, 458. rati, Count, i. 98, 1S0, 1S1. Cillisthenes, Pseudo, ii. 108. Cambusis, ii. 94, 161, 168. Cambyses, ii. 84, 90,91, 92, 105, 106, 153, 168. , attempts to conquer Sudan, ii. 93. , store places of, ii. 04. Camel Corps, i. 113, 115, 198. Camels, i. 198. bones, i. 344- post, ii. 220. transport, i. 470. Cameron, Sorel Bey, ii. 321, 422, 460. Canal in the First Cataract, i. 540. Candace, i. 290, 357, 414; ii. 108, 117, 120, 131, 163, 16S, 501. , attacks Premnis, ii. 169. , = Amen-taret 1 169. Candace queens, ii. 402. iri, ii. 164. Candy, P., i. Canimulgos, ii. 156. Cannabis Indica, :. 221. Cannibals, ii. 314, 432. iQ at Sai. i. 463. ■he, ii. 439. ruardafui, i. 571. Capuchins, i. 5. Carians, ii. 53. Carnelians, i. 538 ; ii. 10, 327- Carol) trees, ii. 159. Carriages in Omdurman, ii. Carter, Captain, ii. 460. INDEX Carter, Major, ii. 286. Carthige, ii. 89, 90. Casmari, ii. 164. Castle of Atab, i. 468, 469. , of Sat, i. 595. Castration, ii. 181. Cat, i. 307. , Golden, ii. 160. Catadupi, ii. 160. Cataract, First, i. 13, 17, 18 21, 39. 69, 505. 515- , Second, i. 13, 14, 15 16, 29, 31, 39. , Third, i. 29, 53, 99. , Fourth, i. 50, 104 114, 234. , Sixth, i. 4. of Tangtir, i. 595. Cataracts, head of, ii. 194. , Islands of, i. 496. , the Six, ii. 366. on the Blue Nile, ii, 366. Catholics flee from Sennaar. i. 5- Cattle, i. 543. breeding, ii. 398. keepers, i. 564. men, i. 588, 622 ; ii. 176, 416-418. Sudani, i. 392. Caucasians, ii. 426. Ca valla, ii. 210. Cecil, Lord Edward, i. 498. Cedar trees, i. 646. wood, i. 62S. Cemetery at Atbara, i. 252. Censi, ii. 160. Cepheus, ii. 161, 170. Cepus, ii. 157. Ceratophyllum, ii. 481. Chabas, i. 541 ; ii- 334*336- Chiltin's Column, ii. 273. Cbamamui, ii. 2S3. Chambezi, ii. 229. Champollion, i. 51, 60, 299, 534, 536, 576, 578, 601, 633, (>37- Charimortos, ii. 112. Chel, ii. 399. Chelga, ii. 412. Chelonophagi, ii. 156. Chermside, Col. Sir Herbert, i. 83; ii. 261. Chickens, i. 332. Chikalero, ii. 354. Chippendall, Lieut., ii. 350. Chitambo, ii. 229. Choga, Lake, ii. 387. Cholera, i. 91 ; ii. 214, 220, 270. Christ, Dr. W., i. 307. Christian church at Sat, i. 60. Christian VI., i. 13. Christianity in the Northern Sudan, ii. 288 ff. Christians, Jacobite, ii. 304. persecuted, ii. 2S9. Church Missionary Society, ii. 318, 320. Church of Jesus, ii. 195. at Soba, i. 324. Churches, 400 in 'Aiwa, ii. 304- in Nubia, i. 2S3. destroyed, ii. 194. ruined, i. 4. Circumciser, i. 514. Circumcision, i. 514; ii. 106, 156. Cisori, ii. 165. Cispii, ii. 165. Civet cats, ii. 181. Clarke, Mr. Somers, i. S2, 2S2, 283, 440. Claudius, Emperor, ii. 170, II., Emperor, ii. 175. Cleopatris (Arsinoe), ii. 167 Clubs, ii. 154. , iron-bound, ii. 157. , knotted, ii. 107. , leather-laced, ii. 89. Cnidus, ii. 155, 340. Coal, ii. 220, 480. Cobbe, ii. 398. Coffee, i. 105. Coffins, earthen, ii. 154. Cognac, i. 221. Colborne, Col. the Hon. J.. ii. 372. Colchians, ii. 106. Cold in Sudan, i. 494. Colli, Lieut., ii. 282. 5SJ Colligat, ii. 164. Collinson, Col., ii. 280, 282 40 1 j 460. Colo-quintida, i. 3 ; ii. 181. Colossi, the, i. 67. Col vile, Col., ii. 267. Colville, Commander, i. 102, io5. Colvin, Sir Auckland, quoted, ii. 255. Comeley, Mr. J., ii. 321. Commellaria, ii. 481. Comyn, Lieut., ii. 361. Congo, i. 506; ii. 390. Free State, ii. 266, 284, 286, 320. , French, ii. 4.59. Pygmies, ii. 425. Congolese Expedition, ii. 266. Connaught, T.R.H. Duke and Duchess of, i. 272, 49S. Conolly, Capt. T., ii. 460. Constantine, ii. 290. Constantinople, i. 6, 17, 227 ; ii. 178, 204, 210, 294. Consutae, ii. 406. Contarini, ii. 315. Contra-Pselcis, i. 634 ; ii. in. Contra-Syene, i. 520. Contra-Talmis, ii. in. Contra- Taphis, ii. nr. Cook, Messrs. Thos. Son, i. 68. Cooper, Mr. A. A. Copper, i. 599, 642 412. mines, ii. 158. of Dar Fur, ii. 284. ring, i. 305; ii 159. Coptic Church at Soba, i. 43- inscriptions, ii. 310. in Sudan, i. 464. lamp, i. 487. Saints, i. 50. stele, i. 464. Coptos, i. 535, 643 189, 336, 337- and ii. 319. ii. 2, 7, ii. 166, IX HEX Copts i. 9, 2S3, 496; ii- • 306, 3i9i 394- at Sat, i. 462, 463, 464. rising of. ii. 187. Cornelius Callus, ii. 166. I Cosmas ii. 299. . i. iS. Cotton, ii. 194. at 'An; stuffs, i. 105. Couches, ii. 23. Council of Seven, ii. 209. I. 327. Crandala, ii. 160. Cranes, ii. 107, 347. Crenellations, i. 517. Critensi, ii. 164. Crocodiles, i. 76. . g , hawk-headed, ii. 140. , worshipped at Khar- tum, ii. 414. 1 ilopolis, ii. 4. 12. a, ii. 157. Cromer, Earl of, i. 222, I : ii. 269, 45 47 v \ 490, 491, 495. 49S, 507 ff. , and the Shilluks >inkas, i. 3*3- . Coptic, i. 324, 463. Mr. J. W., i. 60, ;'.,457, 460, 621, 637; ii. 147, 300, 305. 420, : ; Cum 1 G., ii- 441. m, Major, i ii. 300, 3 5°9- Curtius, L-, i. Cush = Nubia, i. 535, 566. Cutting of the Dam, ii. 344. Cuvier, ii. 403. Cynamolgi, ii. 165. cepbali, ii. 157. iphalus, ii. 163. Cynopolis, ii. 9, 25. ( )yprus, ii. 426. Cyriacus, ii. 1S7, 298. Cyrene, ii. 104. Cyril, St., ii. 302, 306. Cyste, ii. 160. Dabarki, ii. 365, 437- Dabba, i. 107 ; ii. 37 D'Abbadie, ii. 34, 502. Dabeli, ii. 164, 165. Dabra An{6ro Dabra Maryam, ii. 363. Dabra Sin, ii. 261. Dabra Tabdr, ii. 2 I labrds, Island of, i. S2. Dalmd, ii. in, 113, 114 328, 329- Dafar, ii. Dafiifa, i. 58, 59. Dag, ii. 444. Dagi, ii. j 17. 441. tril e, ii. 4:2. Dahlak, ii. 170, 1 Dahlakye, ii. ftr, i. 515. 539. I >:t'ifal>. ii. ; Dakarti, Eland of, i. 52. 1 >akhfili, ii. Dakhla, ii. 174, 266. Dakin ilm Na'il, ii. 201. Dakka, i. 28, 74, 54 574, 629, 630, 63 ii. 10, 75. 110-114, 16S, 170, 297, 328, 329. Dakkode, ii. 444. Dal, ii. itaract of, ii. 366. Dale, Major, ii. ;v I >ali, ii. 4J2. Dalion, ii 162, 165, 34S. Dalil, ii. 206. Damadim, ii. 349. Damascus sword, i. 2S. Dam ha, ii. 3 Darner, ii. 401. I lamerarchon, ii. 74. Damietta, i. 8 : ii. 1S4, 281. Dammur cloth, ii. 406. Danakala, ii. 435, il, ii. 426. Danakla, ii. 376. Dancer of the | Dancing, i. 195. , at Tushki, i. ; Dank£l, i. 2 di, i. 55. Danko Selim, ii. 376. I '"Anville, i. 41. Daphnae, ii. 54. 18 ; ii. 235. , Lake of, ii. Darar, Island of, ii. D.navv, i. 31, 105, 509,530; ii. 435. Darbe, ii. 2 Daressy, M. ( i . i. 531, 647. rlit, i. 53. ;^, ii. 396. I nyara. i. 508. : iir, i. 23, . 52, 53, 1. ..507, 509, 521, $U2 : ii. 83, -. tss, 171 • 307, 39'- , annexed by 1 ;-:ypt, ii. 23 >■ « , revolt in, ii. 235, 260. , Sultans of, ii. 206, 207. I tar II am id, ii. 437. Darius the Great, ii. 104, 105. i of, i. 220. Vfahass, i. 34, 35, 60, 441. 44". 45°> 457, 549- 1 )ar Mara, i. Dar Nulia, ii. 37S. i. ii. 164. Darrak, ii. 431. 584 INDEX Dar Sukkot, i. 60, 93, 438, 449, 45o, 457, 464, 549- Dassabal, ii. 392. Dates, i. 41. at Merawi, i. 212. of Dongola, i. 2. tax, ii. 451. trade, i. 96. trees, ii. 483, 484. , Turkish, i. 472. , various kinds of, i. 471. David, Co!. E. F., i. 107, 109. David, king of Israel, i. 195- Davis, Mr. T. N., i. 607, 640. Daw, ii. 193, 197. Dawn, breath of, i. 186. , false, i. 100. Dawud, ii. 192, 194, 195. Dbaina, ii. 437. Dead, disposal of, ii. 154, 159. Debba, i. 107-109, no, 113 ; ii. 250, 270. Deche-Potasimto, ii. 74. Decius, ii. 289. De Horrack, ii. 55. De Goeje, ii. 329. Dek, ii. 363. Delen, ii. 233. Delligo (or Deligo), i. 35, 96,437, 615; ii. 207. Delta, i. 57, 362, 532, 533, 556, 645, 646, 647, 648 ; ii. 1, 2, 4, 29, 31, 35, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 49, 50, 187, 210. De Maillet, i. 5, 6, 7, 8, 12. Demba, Lake, i. 19. Dembea, ii. 364. Dembo, ii. 246. Dem Idns, ii. 237. Demiourgos, i. 464. De Morgan, Mr. J., i. 539, 604, 605. Dem Zuber, ii. 246, 282. 399- Dendur, i. 27, 74; ii. 170. 297. Deng Dit, ii. 441. Dengula, ii. 364. Denham, ii. 422. Denkmaler, the, i. 62, 277. Denmark, i. 13. Denna, ii. 160. Denon, Vivant, i. 26, 27. Dera, 2, 299, Deraheb, ii. 411. Der al-Bahari, i. 298. , removal of royal mummies, &c, i. 649. De Rouge, E., i. 627 ; ii. 4, 35, 46, 66. De Rouge, J., ii. 66. De Rougemont, Major, ii. 460. Derr, i. 14, 15, 16, 17, 2S, 29, 30, 31, 34, 440, 575, 651; ii. 107. , temple of, i. 634. Der Sullah, i. 53. Dervishes, i. 84-86, 87, 89, 90, 93, 9h 95, 96, 97, 101, 102, 104, 106, III, 113, 115, 179, 184, 187, 199, 209, 210, 211, 22S, 254, 256, 261, 265, 274, 366. , at Nihvitti, i. 457. Desert, Bayuda, ii. 391. -, Gakdul, ii. 437. , Libyan, ii. 391, , Nubian, ii. 391. Desert Column, i. no; ii. 252, 259. Deserters, ii. 54, 106. Dessaix, Fort, ii. 2S2. Detrelis, ii. 160. Deung Ad ok, ii. 443. Devils, i. 268. De Vogiie, i. 549. Dewar. ii. 43c. Dhurra, i. 3, 28, 40, 89, 212, 261, 262, 265, 439. Dibirra, ii. 354. Dikna, i. 95. Dilling, ii. 397. Dillmann, Dr., i. 18. Dimmi, ii. 50. Dinder, ii. 203, 390, 396, 436, 437, 486. 585 Dinder River, ii. 365. Dinkas, i. 322 ; ii. 246,267, 286, 322, 358, 377, 399, 424, 42S, 430, 441, 512. , origin of, ii. 441. tribes, ii. 213 villages, ii. 280. Diocletian, i. 2S ; ii. 176, 290, 291, 418. Diodotus Siculus, i. 39, 538; ii. 28, 30, 54, 94, 109, no, 112, 115, 153, 339- , quoted, ii. 58, 60, 340. Dion Cassius, ii. 166, 167, 169. Dionysos, i. 307. masks, i. 294. Direa, ii. 160. Dittenberger, ii. 292, 297. Diyab of Shendi, ii. 206. Diyab Wad 'A gib, ii. 204. Dochi, ii. 164. Dodekaschoinos, ii. no, 114, 115, 176. Dogain, ii. 479. Dog-fish, ii. 155. Dog king, ii. 164. Dog River, ii. 339. Dogs, ii. 156. , man-eating, ii. 108. Dok, ii. 399, 444- Dokodo, ii. 444. Dollars, Khalifa's, ii. 269. , Maria Theresa, i. 218. Dongola, i. 10, 30. 34. 33, 41, 51, 62, 86, 90, 101, 102, 103, 104, 114, 125, 150, 198, 211, 509, 6oi ; ii. 1, 291, 306, 364, 467, 480. , dialect of, ii. 420. , expedition, i. 93 ; ii. 463- Fort, i. 106. , Kingdom of, i. I. , New, i. 35, 103, 615 ; ii. S4, 372, 462. , Old, i.35, 59,61, 107, 615, 651 ; ii. 1S5, 190, 191, 195, x96, 197, *99, INDEX 200, 302, 207, 212, 213 217, 24I, 2S5, 297, 299: 302, 307, 372, 479- Dongola, Old, described, i 3- 4- Province, ii. 407. tale, i. 235 ft". la al-Urdi, i. 615. i. 216. Donkola al-'Aguz, i. 615. D6r, i. 646. Doric columns, i. 633. Dorvak, Father, *i. 312. ... i. 38, 40. , temple of, i. 595. Dove, i. 306. 1 >ozy, ii. 329. Drage, Colonel W. EI., 113, 181, 1S2, 203, 223. Drake, Captain W. II., 137. 354- 1 travidians, ii. 426. Dream, Stele of, ii. 51. Dromedaries, ii. 198. . tti, 1. 40. Drummond, Mr., ii. 493- Drury, Lieut. W. B., ii. 476, 482. Dubeng*, ii. 387. ■'. i'- 353- Dufilt, ii. 233. 234,263.357. 386. Falls, ii. 235. Dughem, ii. 437. . Capt.', ii. 460. ii •'• 437- Dukhu, ii. 357. b Hill, ii. 319. 96, 97, 437 vx>, 371 Duma, ii. iHimana, ii. 160. michen, i. 533 ; ii. 338. Dum palm, i. 01 ; ii. I Dunkur, ii. 437. Dupois, Mr. C.j i • Dura, ii. 354- Dust of Shekh Idris, i. 469. Duwat, ii. 443. as, ii. 245, 368, 375, 376, 397, 40S. , near Merawi, i. 234. Dwarf, i. 13S. Dykes on the Nile, i. 555. Dr. Karl, i. 382. Dyurs, ii. 432. B, i. 306. Earle, General, ii. 252. Earthenware, i. 105 ; jars, i. 345. 573- Ebony, i. 526, 571 J ii. 104, 105, 107, 520. forests, ii. 165. rods, ii. 108. trees, i. 521 ; ii. 153. Edfu, i. 530; ii. 87, 189, 435- Edinburgh, i. 17. Edos, ii. 160. tion, ii. 4S9 ff. h, i. 551. A., i. 478. i. 196. 332. Egypt, i- 32, 47- 53, 61, 280, 298, 337 ; ii. 34- med of mud, ii. 153. , tribute of, to ii. 104. Egyptian civilization in the . ii. 2. Egyptian I, 74, 83, . 106. , colony of, in Ethiopia, b- 153- Eight gods, the, ii. 17. i- 34- •Elalun, ii. 250, 251, 25S, 365. Flamites, i. 648. Electrum, i:. Elephant eaters, ii, 158. g. hunts, i. 573 ; ii. 112. ..;s. i. 105, 3 ii. 108. hi. 155, 15c. 160 Elephants, slaughter cf, ii. 45 1- , the Sudan, ii. 107. tusks, i. 323 Elephantine, i. 13, 515. 517, 533, 539, 54S. 553. 554. 550. 006, f>33- 037 ; ii- 49- 53. 54- 74. 92, 105, 100, 167, 394. Island, i. 51S. 574, 575 : ii- 343- Elephantomachi, ii. 156. •Elful, ii. 202. Elias the Armenian, i. 12. Elkera, ii. 2 El-Kowad, ii. 184. Elleslya, i. 575. Eltekeh, ii. 34. :i Fields, i. 5^6, I Embaba steamer, 1 Emerald.*, ii. 108, 181 . , mines, ii. 179, 189, 190, 333 Emeus, ii. 160. Emfras, i. 19. Emin Pasha, ii. 235, 250, 260, 262, 263. Em ma fit. i. 643. 1 1, blue and green, i. 301. : 1, ii. 157. Enenselsa, ii. 58, 02. h in school-, ii. 490. 'En llamid, ii. 457. Ephesus, ii. 296. . 160. or, i. 23, 50S; ii. 240, 348. Equatorial Provinces, ii. Equinox, ii. 153. .bene-, ii. I(>2, 547. Erba, ii. 478. Erbkam, (i., i. 61, 125. nenes, ii. 109, no, lt2, 114, 154. . Eiitrea, ii. 265, 390, 420. Ermenab. ii. ^o:;. INDEX i. 537, 554- Erment, ii. 189. Erta-Antef-Teti; Ertemri, ii. 291. Eru, i. 449. Esar, ii. 164. Esarhaddon, ii. 37, 38, 39, 40. ■ appoints governors in Egypt, ii. 39- Esest, i. 494. Esna, i. 31, 530; ii. 189, 212. Etbai (Atbai), ii. 339. Ethiopia, i. 4, 22, 54, 56, 57, 61, 514, 558, 559; ii. 32, 54, 107, 153, 170, 264, 288, 308, 340. ■ described by Strabo, ii. 157. , forty-five kings of, ii. 163. , not CCish, i. 535. Ethiopians, i. 21, 513; ii. 73, 105, 106, 107, no, 153, I55> 158, *59> 292. characters, i. 408. described, ii. 158 ff. , Eastern, ii. 107. , Western, ii. 107. Ethiopic, i. 8, 432. Eumachus, ii. 109. Eunuchs, ii. 406. Euphorbia, ii. 381. Euphrates, i. 328, 569, 570, 572, 598, 604; ii. 191. Eusebius, quoted, ii. 289. Eutychius, ii. 289, 447. Eval, G. S., i. 478. Evetts, Mr. B. T. A., ii. 192, 290, 298. Evil eye, i. 214. Evonymitae, ii. 162, 172. Eye of Horus, i. 382. of Ra, i. 307. Eye-paint, i. 571. Ezbekiya Gardens, ii. 211. Fabricius Pasha, ii. 492. Fadassi, i. 44. Fadiet Wad Kwad Keir, ii. 444. Fadigi, ii. 420. Fadil, ii. 281. Fadl, ii. 191. Fadl al-Mawla Bey, ii. 266. Fafa, ii. 432. Fagao, ii. 386. Fagelu, ii. 424. Fahal, ii. 205. Faivre, M., ii. 361. Fakhr ad-Din, ii. 192. Fakri wad 'Uthman, ii. 251, 259. Falfa, ii. 180. Falkenstein, ii. 424. Famaka, ii. 282, 364, 365, 430, 43 1 , 443- Famine, ii. 202, 203, 213. Fan, ii. 432. Fanakama, ii. 378. Fankaro, ii. 205. Fans, ii. 327. bearers, ii. 55. Farak-Allah, ii. 252. Faranib, ii. 438. Faras, i. 637 ; ii. 263. , island of, ii. 570. Faratit, ii. 431, 439. Fareg, i. 98. Far hat Bey, ii. 214. Farka, i. 93. Farkani, ii. 194. Faroge, ii. 268, 282. Fasher, ii. 392. Ford, ii. 365. Fashoda, ii. 213, 227, 22S, 229, 230, 233, 243, 244, 265, 266, 280, 286, 321, 377, 378, 434- Province, ii. 399. Fatalism, i. 223. Fatha, the, i. 224. Fathers of Jerusalem, i. 5. Fatiko, ii. 229, 233. Fatma, ii. 404. Fatme, i. 478. Fayyiim, i. 551, 607; ii. 7, • iS, 184. Fazogli, i. 44, 47, 61 ; ii. 200, 212, 214, 217, 337, 332, 441, 462. Fazogli, Kings of, ii. 205. Feast in Abyssinia, i. 19. 587 Feathers, i. 525. of vultures, i. 44. Felkin, R. W.. ii. 446. Fell, Lieut. J. L., ii, 286, 460, 483, 507. Feraki, ii. 188, 189. Ferket, i. 34. Battle of, i. 93, 94 ; ii. 270, 371. -Mountain, i. 94, 95, 96. Ferlini, i. 277, 325, 339, 343, 373, 375» 3§2. excavations by, at the Pyramids of Meroe, i. 285. , find by, i. 290, 291. , journey of, to Egyp^, i. 294. narrative of, in French, i- 313- in Italian, i. 307. Fertility of Sudani women, i.36. Festival of Amen, ii. 15. Apt, ii. 15. New Year, ii. 15. Fetish drink, ii. 442. Fever, i. 32, 563. Finger-nails, ii. 135. Finger-rings from Meroe, i. 307- Fire, ii. 163. Firewood stations, i. 261- 263. Firgi, ii. 300. Firmus, ii. 175. First Cataract, Una's work at, i. 518. Fish, ii. 155. eaters, ii. 26, 92, 155. traps, i. 112. Fitz-Clarence, Lieut., i. 104; ii. 233, 272. Fitzmaurice, Lord, quoted, ii. 256. Flags, British and Egyptian, i. 322. staffs for temples, i. 62S. Flavia Neapolis, ii. 292. Fleurian, Father, i. 5. INDEX Fleuriot de Langle, ii. 422. Flint, Capt. S. K., ii. 287. Florence, i. 536. Floras, ii. 179, 296. Fola Rapids, ii. 174, 366, Fort of Sulu, i. 538. Egyptian, in the In, i. 553. 651. Forty Road, ii : - 1... ii. 460 1 Peoples, the, i. 534. Four quarters ol world, ii. 4L 79- Fowler, Mr. J., ii. 461. France, i. 5, 7. Francis, St., i. 4. Franciscans, i. 5, 6, 8. i-'xanke, for/tia/ore, i. 62. Frankfort, Viscount, i. 83. Franks, i. 13, 15. Frederick William IV-, i. . J., i. 61. Friend, Col., ii. 460, 492, 5°4- Fritsch, ii. 424. Frobenius, ii. 424. Fruit trees cut down, i. 517. Fukara, ii. 435. Funeral at Barkal, i. 223, 224. Fung king, ii. 422. Province of, i. 3. tribe, ii. 199, 372, 430. 5, ii. 200, 208, 436, 440- defeated, ii. 207. Fur. ii. 431. Fusta{, ii. 1S5, i<;( FuwSra, ii. 229, 233, 357. Gaalin Arabs, i. 85, 216 ; ii. 205, 248, 271, 274. - un, ii. 437. I., ii. 205. II., ii. 205. wiyun, ii. 431. dn, ii. 431. Gabra, Desert of, ii. 437. , the Hundred Wells of, ii. 392. Gabriel, i. 224. 1, ii. 408. Gadsby, Mr., i. 54S. Gage, Captain, ii. 380. Gaius Petronius, ii. 167. Gakdul, ii. Wells, i. 58, HO, 179; ii. 252, Galerius, ii. 290. Galga, ii. 1S1. I laganii, ii. 349. Gallia, ii. 3 Galla country, i. 61 ; ii. 428, 432. Gallaland, ii. 420. ('.alias, ii. 160, 231. Game, ii. 400. Gaines of chance, i. 221. • 1, ii. 262. Gami'a, ii. 349. Gamlab, ii. 437. Gamilab tribe, ii. 285. Gamu'iya, ii. 437. Gana, Queen of Nubia, ii. 3°7- Ganadal, ii. 366. Ganbreves, ii. 160. ►i ii- 398. Gamhvaha, ii. 363. Gangas, ii. 424. Gangrene, i. 223. C.anki, ii. 431. Ganu, ii. 262. Garf Bussdo (or Hus&o), i. 74- 51 ; ii- 75- in. ( iarodes, ii. 164. Garre, ii. 360. Garrisons in Egypt, ii. 54. :n, Sir W., i. 525 ; ii. 17--. 173> 171- 312, 352, '. 481, 482. 4^. , 507, , reports of, on the Nile. ii. 350- Ga-di River, ii. 366. 588 Gatacre, General, ii. 273. Gate of Kalabshah, i. 74. Gates, the, ii. 195. Gau, F. C.. i. 54 ; ii. 292. ides, Island of, ii. 103. Gawhar, ii. 101. Gayer, Monsignor, ii. 321. Gazelle bones, i. 346. Gazelle Mountain, i. 125. River, ii. 35S. Gazira, i. 519. Province, ii. 407. Gazirat al-Maiik, i. 475. 540, 547, 563 ; ii- 370. , excavation of temple at, i. 4S8-493. ra, Signor C., i. 564. Gebal Bern ShankuJ, ii. Gebel 'Abd al-Daim, ii. Gebel Abu 1 >dm, ii. Gebel Abu Ramla, ii. 365. Gebel Abu Si nun. ii. 391. • ii- 459- Gebel Ahmad Agha, ii. 377. Gebel al-Ghazal, i. 123. Gebel An-Nagaa, i. 325, Gebel Arashkol, ii. 375. Gebel Ardan, i. 47. Gebel Auli, ii. 375. Gebel Barga, ii. 371. Gebel Baikal, i. 51, 35. 30. 01. 62, 64, 112, 114, I20. [22, 130 ff„ 143- Mb 140. 170. 201, 7, 462, 502. 617, 624, 651 ; ii. 23, 27, 5*i .v>. 37. 58. 73. so. i is. [99, 299, 479- , granite lions from. i. i. 6l8-62I. , historical stelae or, ii. 87. pyramids, i. 41. described, i. 132. opened, i. 169 ff. , Temple ni Amei at, ii. 9, 10. , view of, i. 50. Gebel Dago, ii. 430, 441. INDEX Gebel Dego, ii. 391. Gebel Deka, ii. 301. Gebel Dosha, i. 38, 52, 60, 449, 549, 553, 595, 596, 630 ; ii. 207, 371. , Egyptian remains at, ii. 451. Gebel Fazo'gli, ii. 365. Gebel Firket, ii. 371. Gebel Fung, ii. 213. Gebel Gari, ii. 474. Gebel Gerok, ii. 285. Gebel Gurun, ii. 391. Gebel Gilif, ii. 437. Gebel Ilamra, ii. 371. Gebel Ilariz, ii. 430. Gebel Idrfs, ii. 371. Gebel Kaba, ii. 365. Gebel Kadero, ii. 391. Gebel Kadir, ii. 243, 244, 391, 411. Gebel Kaf, ii. 349. Gebel Kali, ii. 437. Gebel Kasala, ii. 216, 400. Gebel Kon, ii. 391. Gebel Kudr, ii. 391. Gebel Kurdu, ii. 385. Gebel Kutum, ii. 412. Gebel Lado, ii. 434. Gebel Maman, ii. 305. Gebel Mandara, ii. 375. Gebel Marra, ii. 265, 391, 412, 422, 430, 441. Gebel Marrado, ii. 398. Gebel Mediib, ii. 432. Gebel Mokram, ii. 400. Gebel Morung, ii. 391. Gebel Mid, ii. 431. Gebel Musku, ii. 430. Gebel -Nagaa, ii. 127. Gebel Nahoganet, ii. 472. Gebel Nuba, ii. 411. Gebel Reggfif, ii. 384. . Gebel Sasi, ii. 207. Gebel Sesi, i. 442, 628. Gebel Shakada, ii. 436. Gebel Shebun, ii. 411. Gebel Surgham, ii. 275. Gebel Surkab, ii. 275. Gebel Tabi, ii. 286. Gebel Takabii, ii. 430. Gebel Takala, ii. 243, 391. Gebel Takali, ii. 202, 284. Gebel Tebun, ii. 391. Gebel Tekem, ii. 391. Gebel Tira, ii. 411. Gabel Werna, ii. 391. Gebel Zabara, i. 630 ; ii. 333- Gebelen, i. 531, 532. Gebelen on the White Nile, "• 377, 399, 438. Gebet, ii. 478. Geese as sacrifices, ii. 22, 23- Ge'ez, i. 432. Geili, ii. 233. Gell, ii. 399. Gelo, ii. 361. Gellabs, i. 53. Gellabas, ii. 248. Gemai, ii. 262. Gentil, i. 11. George, king of Nubians, ii. 191, 192. George, Saint, i. 50. George, son of Zacharias, ii. 298. Georgi, O., i. 62. Geref, ii. 250. Gerr, ii. 434. Gerri, i. 4. Gessi Pasha, ii. 234-239, 248, 259, 350, 356, 482. Ghaba Ger Dekka, ii. 239, 259- Ghaba Shambi, ii. 380. Ghalyk, ii. 184. Ghanim, ii. 232. Ghuzer All, i. 234. Giegler Pasha, ii. 244. Giffen, Dr. Kelly, ii. 319, 320, 434, 444. Gilif, i. 62. desert of, i. 114, 115. Gim'a, ii. 436, 437. Gimeti Island, ii. 301. Ginger, i. 105. Ginnis, i. 89, 96; ii. 261, 371, 444- Gira, ii. 260, 437. Giraffe River, ii. 358. Giraffes, i. 5l4 i »• I §9, 327- 589 Giraffes, as tribute, ii. 195. Girgaui, i. 534. Girouard, Sir Percy, i. 192; ii. 270, 271. Gish, Abyssinia, i. 19, 20. 41. Giuda, ii. 234. Giza, ii. 189, 191. , museum of, i. 547. Gizah, Pyramids of, i. 118. Glaser, i. 18. Glass, melted, ii. 154. ware, i. 105. Gleichen, Count, ii. 232. 233, 234, 236, 244, 246, 249, 282, 284, 285, 299, 300, 305, 306, 321, 365, 370, 380, 384, 386, 391, 392, 393, 394, 396, 397, 398, 399, 401, 408, 412, 420, 428, 431, 434, 441, 444,451, 460.461. Gloploa, ii. 160. Gnats, ii. 156, 157. Goang, ii. 365. Goats, i. 543. flesh, i. 28. God, the Ethiopian, ii. 159- unity of, i. 224. Gods of the Sudan, mortal and immortal, ii. 154. Gogeri, ii. 424. Gogonio River, ii. 386. Gojam, ii. 263, 349, 364. Gokau, ii. 360. G61am Allah, ii. 198. Gold, i. 2, 533, 534, 54i, 553, 631, 638; ii. 10, 23, 96, 167, 191, 214, 411. caravans, i. 622. dust, ii. 327, 337. of Abkulgui, i. 44. used as money, i. 44. , Egyptian word for, ii- 336- , export of, ii. 332. , Sreen, i. 571. , how obtained, i. 53S ; "• 155- INDEX . ioo bars of, ii. 10S. mines, i. 534, 554, 630, 1 : ii- 113, 153' . iM. iSj. 300. , how worked, ii. 340. in the Sudan, ii. 3-4 K rings, i. 306, 571 ; ii. 265, 327. from Me roe, i. 301. money, i. 44. , 700 talents paid to I >arius per annum by Egypt, ii. 104. , smelting of the ore, ii. 340. various kinds of, ii. 336. white, green, and red, ii- 337- Golden Cat, ii. 160. House, ii. 154. Temple, ii. 110. Throne, ii. no. Golo, ii. 322. ii. 399, 421. Gondar, i. 12, 19, 20; ii. , 262, 264. ..koro, i. 507 ; ii. 222, 226, 228, 229, 230, 251. h 349, 45S, 483, 485, 508. missionary station at, ii- 313- , Austrian, ii. 384. .1 Rapids, ii. 366, Gordon, Capt. II., ii. 2 ■ 102, 259, 265, I, 322; ii. 230, 231, »33, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 247, 150. returns to Khartum, ii. 247- , his proclamation, ii. prisoner in Khartum, ii. 249. Gordon, General C. G., his position desperate, ii. 250. , his paper money, ii. 251. , murder of, ii. 253 (f. , statue of, ii. 394. steamers, i. 25S ; ii. 276. Gordon College, ii. 300, 306, 490 fif. Gordon's Gate at Sawakin, ii. 408. Gordon Memorial, Soudan Mission, ii. 321. Gordon Relief Expedition. i. S3, HO, 231 ; ii.250 ff., 257 fT. Gordon, Mr., i. 17. Gorringe, Col., ii. 2S5, 460. Gorringe, Mt., ii. 459, 48S, 489. Gorthon, death of, i. 53. Gospel, the, i. 57. Goths, ii. 289. Gottingen, i. 29. Graffiti, i. 553. Graham, General, his expe- dition to Sudan, ii. 249, 259, 260. Graham, James, i. 17. Grain boats, ii. 270. Grand Signior, i. 15. Granite, i. 518. quarries, i. 51, 531. statues ;it Arko, i. 35. Grant, Capt. J. A., ii. 220, 221, 222. Grant, Mr. G. B. Mac- pherson, ii. 476, 479. Graucome, ii. 160. Greeks, i. 242, 250, 291, 605 ; ii. IS_\ bazaar at Atbara, i. 250. fire, ii. 197. inscriptions, ii. 302. in the Sudan, ii. 370. merchants at Merawi, i. 1- ( rreen water, ii. 368. /, ii. 354- 590 Grenfell, Lord (formerly Gen. Sir F.), i- 68, 76-78, 89, 95, 203 ; ii. 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 269. Grey, Sir E. ii. 383. Griffith, Col. G. B., i. 197. Griffith, Mr. F. LI., i. 531 J ii- 35- Griglioni, Sister, ii. 277. a, Mr. E. S., ii. 358. Guangue, ii. 304. Gubat, ii. 253, 258, 259. Gttbba Salim, i. 606. C.uidi, ii. 502. Guilain, ii. 422. Gule, ii. 396. Gulf of Arabia, i. 21. Gum, ii. 221, 376. Gundtla dates, i. 471. Gut, ii. 431. River, ii. 2S6, 315, 459- Gura, ii. 23S. Gurgan Tau, ii. 371. Gurong-Dit, ii. 441. Curs, ii. 399. Guruguru, ii. 357. Idt, ii. 422. Guwama'a, ii. 437. Gwin Kun, ii. 444. Gwynn, Major C. W., ii. 282, 284, 361, 460. Gwynne, Mr., i. 100. Gymnetes, ii. 164. Gystate, ii. 160. Ha, land of, i. 539. Ilabab, ii. 436. Habaniya, ii. 436, 437- Habba, ii. 250. ib, ii. 179, 182. Ilabir of caravans, i. 53. llabra, ii. 4 Habub, i. 192, 103. Hacbour, i. 435. Ilatianiiuwa, ii. 214, 246, 417, 436. Haddai, ii. 250. Hadharebe, ii. 182, 183. Ihulow, Mr. F. B , ii. 321. II.hIi al-Mut, ii. 408. Hadramout, ii. 408. INDEX Hadrian, Emperor, ii. 174. Haflr, i. 101, 103, 105 ; ii 261, 270, 372. I.Iagar al-Asal, if. 204, 213. Hagg, or pilgrimage to Mekka, i. 32. Haggi, i. 32. I.Iaggi Alt, i. I, 6. Hakim, ii. 191. Hakos, ii. 285. Halanka, ii. 214, 417, 436. Ilalawiyiin, ii. 437. Haifa, ii. 370, 496, 497, 503- Province, ii. 409. Railway, ii. 236. Abu Hamed Railway, i. 190, 191 ; ii. 271. Kerma Railway, i. 470, ii. 270. -Khartum Railway, ii. 464. ■ Kosha Railway, ii. 464 Haifa grass, i. 260, 274. Halfaya, i. 4, 21, 41, 47 ii. 250, 394, 436, 47 1 : 472, 474- Halim, Prince, ii. 314. Hall, Lieut. G. C. M., i. 264 ; ii. 463. Hall, Mr. H. R., ii. 112. Hall of Osiris, i. 384, 396. Hamada, ii. 437. Hamadab, i. 59. Hamad wad Ahmad, ii. 253. Hamags, ii. 430, 437, 440. Hamar, ii. 437. llama in, ii. 231, 234. Hambuk, ii. 392. Hamed al-Shemik, ii. 204. ] lamed ibn At-Tarabi, ii. 202. Hamest, ii. 181. Hamilton, Rev. Dr., i. Ilamites, ii. 420. Hamitic race, ii. 427. tribes, ii. 435. Hammar Island, i. 107 Hanbury, Rev. B., i 478. Handak, ii. 372. Hands cut off, i. 565. 29. 34, Handub, ii. 262, 264, 265, 392, 474, 47S. Ha-nebu, i. 629. Hanigalbat, ii. 332. Hanna, Mr. G., ii. 319. Hinnak, ii. 372. Hannek, i. 3, 52, 99; ii. 207, 291, 366, 371. , Cataract of, i. 559. Hannikab, ii. 439. Hap, ii. 11. (Nile), ii. 343, 344. Hapi (Apis), i. 400. Hapi (Nile God), i. 66, 361, 3S3 5 ii- 49- Harar, ii. 231, 236, 23S, 248. Haratari, ii. 392. Harmachis, i. 623, 637. Harmer, Baron, ii. 312. Harpocrates, i. 301, 417, 421, 557- Harrow, i. 17. Hartmann, ii. 423, 428, 434, 442, 445- Hnrua, ii. 30. Harun, ii. 235. Harun ar-Rasliid, ii. 202. Harvest, ii. 441. Hasab-Raba, ii. 203. Hasan, ii. 208. Hasan the admiral, ii. 209. Hasan, A^ha of Derr, i. 28, 34- Hasan Bey Salama, ii. 221. Hasan Effendi Zaki, ii. 279 Hasan Hilmi, ii. 235. Hasan ibn Muhammad, ii, 307. Hasan ibn Tabal. ii. 205 Hasan Kushi, ii. 207. Hasan Pasha, Prince, ii. 234- Hasanat, ii. 438. Hassaniya Island, ii. 376. tribe, ii. 375, 437. Hashish, i. 221, 222. Hasin ibn Suleman, ii. 208. Hassa Hissa, ii. 305. Hathor, i. 301, 307, 327, 576, 592, 599, 625, 636, 637, 643; ii- 45, 125- 591 Hathor capitals, i. 161, 454- pillars, i. 637. , tree of, i. 384. Hatim Musa, ii. 268. Hatshepset, i. 571, 573, -9s, 623 : ii. 414. Hawara, i. 552 ; ii. 198. Hawatiya, ii. 437. Hawawir, ii. 437. Hawk, stone, i. 391, 621. Hawk-headed crocodile, ii. 140. Hawk-nome, i. 362. Hawkins, Mr. H. V., ii. 476, 479- Hay, Mr., ii. 325. Haynes, Capt., ii. 2S5. Headlam, Captain H. R., ii. 460. Heat, great, i. 290. at Gebel Barkal, i. 51. in the Sudan, ii. 157. Heart, weighing of, i. 381 3S7. Hebdomecontacometae, ii. 160. Hebrews, i. 195, 535. Hebsi, ii. 80. Heeren, Prof., i. 56, 57. Heh, land of, i. 538, 541, 543, 544, 553- Heiligen Kreuz, ii. 312. Hejer, ii. 179, 187. Hekataeu?, ii. 339, 347. Helawa, i. 2. Heleii, ii. 157. Heliopolis, i. 621, 622, 624; ii. 8, 22. Heliostats, i. 334. Heilet an-Nuer, ii. 380. Heilet ar-Renk, ii. 377. Heilet Bunziika, ii. 439. Hemp, Indian, i. 221. Hen-Nefer, i. 562. Hennu, i. 532. Henry, Col. St. George, 1*. 2S2 ; ii. 460. Hep (Nile), ii. 343. Herakleopolis, ii. 4, 5, 7, 12, 14, 17. Princes of, i. 529, 530. INDEX 154, Herbagi, i. 21. Herbin, Mr. ii. 250. Hercules, i. 307 ; ii 159. Oer-Heru, fust priest king, i. 645, 646, 647 ; ii. 2. Heripetrnai, ii. 21. Heriu-sha, i. 533, 553, 56S. Her-khu, i. 2, 515. 533; ii-324- , inscription of, i. 520. meets Una, i. 520. Hermitages, ruined, i. 4. Hermopolis, i. 137 ; ii. 5. 6, 7, 12, 14. Parva, n. 5, 14. lotus, i. 39 ; ii. 28, 29, 34, 53, 54* 55. 9i, 93. 104, 105, 106, 107, no, 153- and Lake Moeris, i. 55i, 552. Heroopolis, ii. 166. Hero, ii. 41. Heru-envbeb, a priest, i. 625; ii. 41. Heru-em-khut, i. 623. Ileru-ker-taui, i«. Ileru-khent-Khatthi, ii. 23. Ileru-kbuti, i. 605, 626, Heru-nekht, ii. 56. lieru-nest-atebui (?), i. 485. Heru-Ra-kha-kau, Fort, i. 548. Ileru-sa-atef, ii. 75, 87. reign, ii. 75 4 h[er]-taui, ii. 27. ii. 49. . 165. 165. -5- nnu, ii. 12, 15. llet-kha-em-Maat, name of temple of Si;ll>, i. 612. riet-ka-Ptah, ii. 21. Het-Khent, ii. hi. Ilet-menen-kha-em-Ma&t, i Ilrt-nub, i. 5l8. ,t, ii. 12. Heuglin, II err T. von, ii. 314, 316. Hezekiah, ii. 33, 34, 35. Hick- ii., ii. 27S. , his defeat and death. ii. 245. Iliera-Sykaminos, ii. Ill, 162, 172, 176. Ilijaz, i. 32 ; ii. 238. 1 [ildebrandt, ii. 422. Hill-men, i. 56S, 5SS, 598, 604, 622, 631 ; ii. 174. 416, 417. Hima, ii. 334. Himantopodes, ii. 175. Ilimyar, ii. 303. Ilippaichus, ii. 348. Hipponon, ii. 6, 12. Hippopotamus, i. 41, 105 ; ii. 376. :: ■ ■ 383. Hirth, Mr. G., i. 3S2. Hittites, ii. 427. . Captain, i. 255. son, Mi. C. G., i. 7, 497, 503 J "• 476, 479- I [odgson, Capt. II., ii. 391, 460. fon, ii. 399. Hoimi, ii. 356. yd, i. 47S. 1 toly Mountain, i. 137 5 ii. 43. 46, 57, (-1. I [omer, i. 522. Ilomr tribe, ii. 451. Honey, i. 221, 230, 525 ; ii. 80, 90. Honey Rock, ii. 204. Hon, ii. 160. 1 [ornemann, i. 52. 1 [oro, ii. 356. ii, 7, 17, 23. *S Ik > 1 1 c* s , i. 344. s of I 'ongola, i. 105. in Egypt, the, i 565. s' scalps worn, ii. 105. 0, Mr. W. H., 1. :, 370,386, 42), 326, 547, 568, 625, 629, 633 ; ii. 16, I ;. •35- - and Set set up the ladder, i. 527. , eyes of, i. 301, 305. , Four Children of, i. 361. of Behen, i 599- of Behutet, i. 482. of Edfu, i. 543. of Kenset, i. 595. of Maam, i. 575. ; of Ram of Amen, i. 597- of Sekhem, ii. 24. Ra, i. 3S4. Set, ii. 33. Hdsb al-Ibyad) ii. 373. Hoskins, < r. A., i. 103, 105, 117, 1 18, 120, 122, 130, 133, 134, 13'), M", 150. 151, 152, 153, 154. [56, 162, 163, 164, 169, 201, J, 240, 267, 274, 276, . 342, 34S, 352. 428, 435, 440, 433, 454, 463, 466, 496, 557, 558, 559; ii. IO, , Travels tals, ii. 500. in Oradurman, ii. 279. Houri, i, Thousand x> ii. 80. of the Eight 1 ii. 17. House tax, ii. 451. Hoi, land of, i. 553, 554. .it, ii. 436. Hudl, ii. 273, 479. Hufrat An-Nabas, ii. 2S4, 412. Human sacrifices, ii. 177. Humr, ii. 437. llunnan, ii. 437. Hunter, Major (afterwards waral) Sir A.. 1. \o.\. 1 13, 102 : ii. 280. Hurl ... INDEX Husen Pasha Khalifa, ii. 198, 247. Hussunnat, ii. 437. Huu, i. 536. Hyalus, ii. 159. Ilyksos Kings, i. 559, 561, 562, 599- Hylophagi, ii. 156. Hypaton, ii. 160. IBBA, ii. 399. Iberians, ii. 427. Ibis-nome, i. 362. Ibn Janbalan, ii. 207. Ibn Miskaweh, ii. 190. Ibn Selim al-Aswani, ii. 186, 189. Ibrahim, ii. 298. Ibrahim of Dar Fur, ii. 207. Ibrahim, brother of Kerenbes, ii. 196. Ibrahim Pasha made ruler of Egypt, ii. 217. Ibrahim, son of Muhammed Ali, ii. 210, 212. Ibrahim Abu Shanab, ii. 253- Ibrahim ibn Abd-Allah, a name of Burckhardt, i. 30- Ibrahim Khalil, ii. 266. Ibrahim Murad, ii. 284. Ibrahim wad MahmCid, ii. 285, 488, 489. Ibrahimiya (Dufili), ii. 233. Ibrim, i. 22, 26. 28, 29, 31, 463. 599, 643 ; ii. 168, 174, 191, 192, 197, 207, 293, 303- Ice at Aswan, i. 71. Ichthyophagi, the, ii. 106, 155- Idris, Shekh, i. 444, 456, 458, 471. , Kubba of, i. 458 ff- Idris ibn Muhammad, ii. 202. Idris of Dar Fur, ii. 206. Idris, son of Yamni, ii. 205. Idris I., ibn Suleman, ii. 205. VOL. II. Idris II., ii. 206. III., ii. 206. 1-em-hetep, i. 400, Iesou, Abba, i. 464, 465 j ii. 300. Igasha, ii. 354. Ikhshid, the, ii. 303. Image of Am en-be tep III., i. 623, 624. Images, worship of, ii. 430. 441. Imam Ali, ii. 241. Incense, ii. 90, 521. trees, i. 521. India, i. 21, 34 ; ii. 170, 189. Indians, Calantian, ii. 105. India-rubber, ii. 451. Inoassana, ii. 396. Ingelela, ii. 246. Innocent XII , i. 5. Inundation, the, ii. 153, 157- , heights of, i. 550. — — , how caused, ii. 368. lonians, ii. 53. Ipoto, i. 524. Ipsodorae, ii. 164. 'Irak, ii. 207. Ire, ii. 286. Iron, ii. 412. fetters of a slave, i. 366. mines, ii. 153, 158, 181. money, i. 105. ■ working, ii. 398. Irrigation Dept. , i. 71. schemes, ii. 484. Isa, the -Robber, i. 495. 496, 606. Isaac, i. 464. Isenberg, ii. 502. Isis, i. 72, 160, 306, 365, 383, 385. 395-398, 421, 432, 591, 633; ii. 112, u8, 122, 134, 136, 154, 159, 176. and the Nile, ii. 344- goddesses in Nubia, ii. 82. 593 Isis, of Philae, ii. 177, 292, 294. Selqet, i. 394. , temple of, at Philae, i. '3- closed, ii. 17S. Islam, i. 82 ; ii. 182, l£6, 191, 200, 201, 408, 440. enters Sennaar, ii. 202. Island of Bigga, i. 59S. Sai, i. 595, 601, 606. Senmut, i. 59S. Islands of the Blessed, i. 524. Isma'il, ii. 203. Isma'il Bey, ii. 209. Isma'il Pasha, i. 35, 69, 87, 90, 105, 258, 271 ; ii. 204, 218, 235, 462. becomes Khedive of Egypt, ii. 222. , deposition of, ii. 238. and the slave trade, ii. 225, 226, 237. Isma'il Pasha Ayub, ii. 230 Isma'il, son of Muhamma i Ali, ii. 2o3, 210, 212. burnt to death, ii. 407. Isma'il Ya'kub Pasha, ii. 232, 235. Ismailia, steamer, i. 25S. Isma'iliya (Gondokoiu), ii. 229, 3S4. Issango, ii. 355. Isveli, ii. 165. Italians, i. 242 j ii.267, 269, 270. in Eritrea, ii. 265, 266. defeated, i. 85, 86, 26S. Itang, ii. 285. 360. Ituri River, i. 524, 525. luaa, i. 607. Ivory, i. 521, 525, 526, 554, 571; ii. 10, 104, 221, 223, 399- 451- trade, ii. 228. working of, de- scribed, ii. 224. 'Iyasu I. invades Sennaar, ii. 203. Iyasus, king of Abyssinia, i. 10, 11, 12. g q INDEX | A' AFAR Mazhar Pasha, ii. 226. Ja'afar Sadik, ii. 226. Ja'afara Arabs, ii. 407. Jaalin, i. 85. Jackals, i. 269, 344. Jackson, Colonel, ii. 280, 4S4. Jackson, Lieut. L. C, ii. 460. Jacob, i 464. Jacobites In Nubia, ii. 296. Jaheth, ii. 179. James, Mr. F. L., ii. 365. Jan, ii. 359. Janki, ii. 246. Jawabir Arabs, ii. 207. Jeddah, i. iS. Jerusalem, ii. 34, 37. , Fathers of, i. 5. 1,1.x, 7, 12. expelled, i. 5. Jews, ii. 167. Jidda, i. 18, 31 ; ii. l88, 190, 406. Jimangawu, ii. 356. John, king of Abyssinia, ii. 231, 234, 235, 236, 23N. 264, 400. John of I'.phesus, ii. 296. John of Syria, ii. 304. Johnson, Major Bulkeley, ii. 460. Johnston, Sir H., ii. 316, 347, 35°, 4-\v Jokha, ii. 357. Jomard, i. 24. . Sir \\ '., i. 19. lent, i. 6. bus, ii. 94. ., ii. 443. Ju, ii. Juba, ii. 160. River, ii. 233, 361. Judah, ii. 33. 73. Judgment Scene, i. 369 Julian, a priest, ii. Junker, ii. 351, 42S, 461. Jupiter, ii. 106, 154. Jupiter Ammon (or Ham- mon), i. 56; ii. 91, 93, 163. Sarapis, ii. 136, 141. Jiir (Gur), ii. 359. Jur£s, ii. 195, 196. Justice, ii. 496. Justinian, Emperor, ii. 178, 294. Ka-aat, ii. 117. Ka'aba, i. 224. Kaau, i. 517. Kababish, ii. 437. Kabarega (Kabba Rega), ii. 228, 260, 268. Kabbana, ii. 438. Kabenat, Island of, i. 50. Kabkabia, ii. 262, 432, 437- Kabodi, i. 98. Kabushiya, i. 41, 56, 3^1, 334, 497, 5°3 i »• 473- Kadaref, ii. 235, 246, 249, 265, 280, 399, 400, 439, 462. Kadaru, ii. 474. Kadashman Bel, ii. 332. Kaddin, i. 98. Kadero, ii. 233. Kadesh, i. 598 ; ii. 38. K:ul i"> Pudding, ii. 4S1. Kadro, ii. 202. Kafikingi, ii. 284. Kafu, ii. 356, 387. Kaga al-Badu, ii. 431. Ka^arandindu, ii. 356. Kagbar Cataract, ii. 371. ra, ii. 352, 387. Kagmar, ii. 392. ;l>, ii. 438. Kaheni, ii. 22. Ka-he>cb, ii. II, 14. Kahl, ii. 435. Kaja. ii. 240. t, ii- 377, 378, 437, 439- , Old, ii. 377. Kakibi, ii. 355. Kaknak, ii. 424. Kakogi, ii. 594 Kakoonda, ii. 355. Kala'a Arang, ii. 439. Kalal sha. i. 1 3, 73, 87, 574, 599, 629, 638, 651 ; ii. in, 170, 291, 292, 297, 328, 329. Kahikala, ii. 252, 253. Kal'at an-Nagil, i. 129. Kal'at Ma'atiika, i. 549. Kala'un, ii. 195, 196. Kalbas, ii. 205. Kali, i. 604. Kalika, ii. 424. Kalka, i. 426 ; ii. 118. Kalkibat, ii. 214, 238, 246, 260, 261, 265, 280, 285, 3"5, 399, 400, 462. Kallah, ii. 205. Kalmakul, ii. 202. Kaltela, ii. 1 18. Pyramid of, i. 426 fT. Kamalt, ii. 434. Kamamil, i. 44; ii. 4II. Kamatir, ii. 438. Kambir, ii. 205. Kambasuten, ii. 94. Kambo, ii. 205. Kamlin, ii. 305, 365, 407, 43*- Kamobsana, ii. 47S. Kamr ad-Dawlah, ii. 194. Kamana, ii. 43S, 439. Kanbalawi, ii. 206. Kandake, i. 357. Ka-nefert, i. 421. Ka-nekht-kha-em-Xept, ii. 75- Kanisa, Mission of, ii. 312, 380. Kanisa ul - Fakir Masaw- warat, i. 47. Kank, ii. 202. Kankara, ii. 441. Kan tat, i. 109. Kanun ibn Aziz, ii. 187, INS. Kaniizi, the, ii. 435. Kanz, tribe of, ii. 197. Kanz ad-Dawlah, ii. 193, 197. Ka-qem, ii. 22, 23. Kar'a, ii. 234. INDEX Karabin, i. 44. Karubat, ii. 438. Karad, ii. 373. Karague, ii. 402. Karam-Allah, ii. 249, 250, 264. Kirari, ii. 241. hills, ii. 276. Kararish tribe, i. 496. Kar Bel-matati, ii. 53. Karei, i. 607. Karema, ii. 473. -Abu Hamed Railway, ii. 173- Karert, ii. 82. Kari, i. 604, 632. Karka, ii. 118. Karkemish, ii. 74. Karko, ii. 202. Karkog, ii. 244, 280, 365 437- Kaikud, ii. 43S. Karnak, i. 54, 67 ; ii. 13. 30, 33, 38, 41, 42. Karpeto, a. 357. Kan, ii. 19S. Kartassi, i. 651. Kartept, ii. 94, 95. Kartera, ii. 118. Karnma 1'j.lls, ii. 386. Karuthet, ii. 82. Kas, i. 536. Kasala, i. 31, 86, 214, 217, 246, 305, 339, 502; ii. 235, 260, 265-268, 273, 282, 366, 400, 404, 436, 462, 479, 487, 502, 509. Province, ii. 399. Kasimba, ii. 305. Kasau, ii. 81. Kash (Cash), i. 535, 535 IT., 573. 592, 595. 622, 626, 628, 629, 631, 637, 642 ; ii. 39, 62, 66, "J2, 326, 334, 400, 416, 4S6. = Southern Sudan, i. 536. , gold or, ii. 337. . prince of, i. 554. River, ii. 366. Kashafa, the, ii. 201, 207. Kasbgil, ii. 245. Kashta, ii. 27, 28. Kasr Towago, i. 60. Kassam, ii. 215. Kassingar, i. 114, 191, 232. Katena, ii. 305, 408, 437. Katha . . . ., i. 612. Katimar, ii. 117. Katku, ii. 440. Katonga, ii. 352. Katwe Bay, ii. 354. Kaufmann, ii. 422. Kawa, ii. 242, 244, 245, 372, 408. Kawwa, ii. 376, 438. Keane, A. H., ii. 424. Kehkebiya, ii. 428, 438. Kebian, ii. 363. Kedesh, i. 609. Kefa, i. 612. Keffyah, i. 214. Kefia Abai, i. 20. Keili, ii. 396. Kelham, Sergeant- Major, i. 108, 109, 240. Kena, i. 18, 471, 642. Kenbetu, i. 572. Kenensat, ii. 2, 3. Kenretli, i. 418 ; ii. 117. Kenrethreqnen-m, ii. 117. -, Pyramid of, i. 417 ff. Kenrick, Capt., ii. 460. Kenset, i. 562, 564, 593, 595, 598, 604, 628; ii. 45- Kenset iu, i- 563. Kentakit, ii. 117. Kentlia - Hebit, ii. 117, 169. , Pyramid of, i. 357. Kentkit, ii. 169. Kenufi, i. 383, 3S4. Kenur, ii. 273. Kenuz, ii. 207. dialect, ii. 420. Kenyon, Dr. F. G., i. 175 ; ii. 30S. Keppel, ii. 272. Keren, ii. 231. Kerenbes, ii. 196. Kerkis, ii. 74. 595 Kcrma, i. 87. 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 188, 443. 470, 472; ii. 93> 270, 370, 372, 409, 463, 468, 470, 479- Kerman, i. 559. Kerri, ii. 262, 204. Kesh (Ciish), i. 564, 605, 628, 633. Ketshi, i. 612. Key of the Sudan, i. 249. Kba-em-Uast, ii. 325. Khali, Patriarch, ii. 298. Khalewa, ii. 300. Klialid Pasha, ii. 217. Khalifa Ahd Allah, i. 64, 77, 90, 96, 97, 106, 177, 209, 606. , his plans for conquest of Egypt, ii. 260, begins to invade Egypt, ii. 263. , escape of, ii. 277. , defeat of, ii. 280. Khalifa Sherif, ii. 281. , Khali] ibn Kiisun, ii. 197. Khamsin (Khamasin, Kham- siin), i. 51. Khanak, i. 97. Khandak, i. 615, 651 ; ii. 500, 407, 439. Kha-nefer, a pyramid, i. 518. Kliarba, ii. 179. Kharga, Oasis of, i. 9, 10, 23, 85, 508 ; ii. 93, 176, 177, 266. Khartum, i. 21. 38, 47, 54, 6l, 62, 78, 95, 102, 209, 264, 2S5, 321, 324, 4S0, 485, 4S8, 50O, 502, 503, 506, 50S, 519, 547, 567, 597, 621 ; ii. 89, 199, 212, 217, 375, 450, 462. besieyed and bom- barded, ii. 252 ii. , city or, ii. 394. ■ described by Baker, ii. 221. founded, ii. 212 , governors of, i. 271. , meaning of name, ii. 393- INDEX Khartilm, Museum at, i. Khnemu-Ra, ii. 49. Kit Island, ii. 359. 43<3, 477, 502. Khneph, i. 384. Kitchener, Lord, i. 34, 63, , North, ii. .;; Khnoubis, i. 68, 88, 89, 105, 321 ; ii. , schools in, ii. Khnoumis, i. 239, 262, 318, 44S, 477, taken by the Mabdi, Khnouphis, i. 3S4. 402, 495, 507. ii. 254. Khonsu, i. 370, 41S. Kitchener, Col. F. W., i. occupied by Lord Khor Abu 'Au Habl, ii. 245. Kiveh, ii. 357. Province, ii. 393. Kbdr Baraka, ii. 409, 436. Kivu, ii. Khas, i. 604. Khor Duleb, ii. 430, 436. Kleber, ii. 210. Khashtm al-Girba, ii. 365. Kh6r Filus, ii. 361. Klunzinger, ii. 422. Khali I., i. 529. Kh6r Gokau, ii. 360. Knoblecher, Father, ii. 312, II., i. 529. Khor Kanieti, ii. 360. 3*3 Khawabir, ii. 43S. Kh6t Khos, ii. 360. Knot of Hercules, i. 307. Khawalada, ii. 438. Khor Musa, i. S4 ; ii 262. Knowle?, General, Khawawir, ii. 43S. Khor Too, ii. 360. Kdbi, i. 53, 508 ; ii. 39^. K.hcbar, Cataract of, ii. 366, Khor Urabrega, ii. 365. 6k, ii. 213, 227. 371- Kh6r Wintri, ii. 268. 230, 286, 377, Khebit, ii. 66. Khu-en- A ten, i. 622. Koelle, ii. 445. Khemennu, i. 626 ; ii. 14. Khuit, ii. 23. Koka, i. 52. Khemer, i. 536. lvhu-ka-Ra, i. 139; ii. 57. Koke, i. 35. Khemthithet, ii. ill. Khulla, ii. 2 Kola, ii 443. Khennutiu, i. 569. Khurshi, ii. 396, 437. Koleydozo, ii. 185. Khen-Setcher, i. 517. Khurshid Agha, ii. 312. Koine, ii. 352. Khensu, i. 134, 13S. 3ofi> Khurshid Pallia, i. 2S5 ; ii. Konegoi, ii. 156. 526, 527 ; ii. 52, 60, ; 210, 213, 214. Island of, i. 531, Khensu-Ait.is, ii. 69. Khu-laui-ka, king, i. 04 ; ii. 74. Khensu - em - C. 486, Konldlan, i. 24, 31, 61, hetep, ii. 45. , statue of, at Khartum, ;, 295, 506, 521, Khe«t, or [mage, i. 623. i- 555- . ii. 96, 105, 155, 171, 175, Khent = Sudan, i. 562. Khut-en-Aten, i, 623. 208, 213, 217. 231, 242, Khent-ben-nefer, i. 561, 566 Kliuzam, ii. 43S. 24^. 567, 56S, 632 ; ii. 416. Kilgft, i. 44. Province, ii. Khent-Khattlii, ii. 23. Kilma dates, i. 471 . , revolt in, ii. 260. Khent-khat-ur, i. 53S. Kipkip, ii. 50. Koine, ii. 352. Khent-Nefer, ii. 24. Kimr, ii. 431, 432 434. 1 4. Khent-ruhi, ii. 69. Kings, liovv cho Korosko, i. 14, 31, 55, 61, Kheper-ka-Ra, ii. u8, l 19. 155. 159- 62, Kher-Aba, ii. 8, 22, 24. , mutilation of, ii. 1 531. 534, 53" Kheta, i- 605, 631, Kinnaird, i. 17. Kir, ii. 314. 328, 420, 45S, 401, , ! Kirbikan, ii Khiiem-ub-Ku, i. 423 ; ii Kiri, ii. 385. , mosque of, i. 75, 11S. Kirk man, Col. Sir J., ii IChnemu, i. 3S4, 421, 467. 234. , views of, i. 74. 531. 556, 571. Kin'., ii. 2S2, 2S4, 3S1. -Abu- 1 lamed Railway, ii. : 605 Kirsh, ii. 75. Korii, 1. 4, 35, 1 10, hi, ii. 3, 74, 112, 122. 135. , temple of, i. 633. 509; ii. 75, 259, ISO. Kismayu, ii. 2 ;i. temple at Elephantine, Kisuma, ii. m, ii. 31 5. i- 574 Kit, ii. y^j. River, ii. 315. INDEX KAsha, i. 95, 96, 97, 438, 442, 443. 46S, 469, 470 ff. ; ii. 89, 1 16, 261. 270, 290, 370, 371, 409, 464. Koskam, i. 20, 21. Kossinga, ii. 284. Kotschy, i. 24. Koye, i. 34 ; ii. 300. Koz Abu Giima, ii. 376, 480. Koz al-Ma'aliya, ii. 438. Koz-Ragab, i. 31. Krall, Dr., i. 648. Krapf, ii. 349, 350. Kreich, ii. 399. Kuanza, ii. 229. Kubalab, ii. 474. Kubba, ii. 474. Kubba, near Hannek, ii. 207. Kubba Abu Fatma, i. 559 ; ii. 371. Kubba Idri«, i. 444, 445, 459 ff.; ii. 371. Kubba Salim, i. 455, 456, 606, 621 ; ii. 371. Kubban, i. 74, 534, 574, 629, 631, 632, 633, 634, 638, 651 ; ii. Ill, 188, 329, 334- Kubi, ii. 412. Kubk, ii. 431. Kubuli, ii. 357. Kudit, ii. 444. Kueka, ii. 371. Kufit, ii. 261. Kuft, ii. 189. Kukreb, ii. 392. KukUj ii. 349. Mountains, ii. 386. Kulkul, ii. 428, 431, 432. Kulzum, ii. 189, 190. Kumm, ii. 190. Kummah (or Kumma), i. 40, 61, 476, 480, 48 1 487, 540, 54i, 552, 563, 571 ; ii. 116, 330, 370. , Fort of, i. 549. , graffiti at, i. 479. , Nile registers at, i. 55°- Kummah (or Kumma) temple of Thothmes III. at, i. 592. village and temple of, i- 479- Kumuz, ii. 431. Kur'an, i. 33, 214, 217, 224, 226, 230, 234, 457 ; ii. 188, 241. Kurar, i. 444. Kurbag, i. 210. Kuresh, ii. 207. Kur-Kongs, ii. 441. Kurkiir, Oasis of, i. 521. Kurna, i. 600. Kurru, i. 170 ; ii. 116. , pyramids of, i. 125. Kiirta, i. 574, 651 ; ii. in. Kurd, ii. 20 5. Kuruar-hi (?), ii. 46. Kurumut, ii. 69. Kuruses, i. 612. Kuru-tanen-Amen, ii. 66, 69. Kur Wad Nedok, ii. 444. Kiis, i. 298; ii. 179, 189, 190, 192, 193, 195, 196, 198, 303, 458. Kuser, i. 18, 642 ; ii. 1S9. Kush, ii. 41, 323. Kushites, ii. 296. Kutchuk Ali, ii. 227. Kuttabs, ii. 490. Kutum, ii. 439. Kuwahla, ii. 438. Kuwahsama, ii. 438. Kuwekka, i. 458. Kuyunjik, i. 487 ; ii. JO. Kwad Keir, ii. 444. Kwat Ki, ii. 444. Kwat wad Awaibung, ii. 499 woe Kon, ii. 444. Labbayab, ii. 438. Labori, ii. 385. Labyrinth, i. 551, 552. Ladder, i. 527. Lado, ii. 233, 250, 260, 368, 384, 487. 597 Lado Enclave, ii. 320, 382, 390, 399- Shekh, ii. 384. Lafargue, i. 478. Lagia, i. 24. Lagia Kabir, ii. 391. Lahawiyun, ii. 438. Lake Albert, i. 525 ; ii. 222, 235> 350, 353, 484, 485- described, ii. 356. Lake Albert Edward, i. 525 ; i'- 353- Lake Al-Menteku, ii. 354. Lake Bangweolo, ii. 229. Lake Baringo, ii. 349, 354. Lake Damadim, ii. 349. Lake Dueru, ii. 354. Lake Hannington, ii. 354. Lake Kuku, ii. 349. Lake of Likuri, ii. 349. Lake Manjara, ii. 354. Lake Moeris, i. 550, 551 ; ii. 104. r, existence of, dis- proved, i. 552. Lake Moero, ii. 229. Lake Naivasha, ii. 354. Lake Nakuru, ii. 354. Lake Natron, ii. 354. Lake Ngarai, ii. 229. Lake No, ii. 351, 356, 358, 368, 375, 379, 458, 481, 482. Lake Nyassa, ii. 229, 349, 354- Lake Rudolf, ii. 282, 354. Lake Sana, ii. 349, 363 ff. Lake Shirwa, ii. 229. Lake Tanganyika, ii. 229, 349- Lake Victoria, ii. 222, 350, 35i- Lakodero, ii. 358. Lamersekni, ii. 5. 12. Lamkasna, ii. 431. Lamp, dedication of, ii. 101. Lampreys, ii. 155. Lances, i. 3. Land of the Blacks, i. 506, 515, too ; ii. 340. of Men, i. 505. of the Spirits, i. 138,523. INDEX Land tax, ii. 451. 6171 ». i". 57i 84, 147. Liquor traffic, i. 250. Lane, Mr. E., i. 226 ; ii. • 357, 419, 445- Livingstone, Dr., ii. 229. 344- 502. Lloyd, ( "1., ii. 21 Languages, ii. 444. , travels of, i. 61 ft". Lloyd, Mr. E., ii. 321. Lapis lazuli, ii. 17, 23. Le Quien, ii. 29S. Lloyd, Capt. 11. I). \\\. ii. Latif Pasha, ii. 2lS. Letorzec, P. C, i. J7, 41, 460. L&tuka (place), ii. 233. 52, 368, 4! >ne, ii. 181. Hills, ii. 360. , travels of, i. Loak, ii. 434. Latuka (tribe), ii. 431. Letronne, ii. 292 ff., 297. [voando, ii. 229. Lattuka, ii. 424. Leuce-Come, ii. 167. Lobo, Father Jeronimo, ii. Lau, ii. 399. Leupitorga, ii. 160. Lauder, ii. 422. on, Capt. C. II., ii- Lobsters, ii. 155. Lausanne, i. 29. 460. Lockyer, Sir Norman, i. Laws of Egypt and Ethiopia, Lewin, Capt. C. II., ii.460. 276. ii. 153- Lewin, Captain II. F. F., Locusts, salted, ii. 156, 165. Lea, ii. 160. »• 55*, 332, 333.334. :., ii. 321. Leach, Colonel, i. 68. 337, 34i, 354- •. ii. 424. Lead, ii. 181, 412. Lewis. Colonel, i. 89, 183 Loin cloths, i. 260. Leake, ii. 297. 196 ; ii. 276, 280. Lokuku, ii. 354. Lebanon, L Lilian, i. 521. Lokungati, ii. 352. Lef&bure, ii. Libya, ii. 104. 1 5 S . Loliu, ii. 352. Legge, M. F., i. 513 ; ii. , Higher, ii. 155. Lolli River, ii. 37 415- Libyans, i. 505, 531, 577, Long, Colonel ( ' , i. 177, Legh, Thomas, i. 34 ; h. 631, 633, 638, 641 ; ii 231 ; ii. 230, 234, 446. 297. 13, S3- 74.415- Longfield, Capt. \V. E., ii. meets Burckhardt, i. Licences, game, ii. 451. 475, 476. 3i- , liquor, ii. 4.5 r . Longinus, ii. 296. , travels of, i. 26. Liddell, Capt., ii. 4S0. nipori, ii. 165. Leigh, Capt. C, ii. 460 in, ii. 336. . Lieut. Percy, K.F., :;S. Life, symbols of, i. 305, i. 324, 325, 326, 327, Leipzig. 306. 330, 331 ; ii. 475, 476- Leisi, ii Liffi, ii. 246. Lord of the Mountain, ii. Lelat al-Xukta, ii. 344. ;, ii. 424. 193. 30O- Lemaire, ii Light, ii. 297. Lot, i. 16. Lenga, ii. | Lignite, ii. 412. Lotus, ii. 154. Le Noir du Koule, ii. Likuri, ii. Lotus, gunboat, i. 96. 203. Limii tr, ii. 53. Louis XIV., i. 4, 8, 12 ; Lcnz, ii. 422. Linant, an officer, ii. 234. ii. 2. IUS, ii. 307. Linant de BeUefonds, i. 24. Louvre, ii. 2. 47. 55*. 55* ; ii- 66, Lubari, ii. 424. Linen, i. 3, 105. Lucan, i. 19. skins, ii. 107. Linthuma, ii. 160. go, ii. 387. >ld II., ii. 390. ■ : ''. • 57- 159. Lugololo, ii. 357. Lepsius, 1 >r., i. 80, US, at Magma, i. 325. Lukajuka, ii. 35b. I IN. 125, 1*9, *34i banner, ii. 1 36. Lukos, ii. 352. '54. 163, , gold, i. 305. Ltd, ii. 378. >, 20I, 240. 295. , gianite, i. 61S, 619. Mission station, ii. 296, 297. 342, , 100 slain by Amen- 321. 356, 404, hetep III., i. 622. 1 Lulu, the, ii. 399. 407 500, 502, -serpent, ii. 137. , Lumoga Mountains, ii. 3S5. 53 J- 54i, 547. 55o, 552, skins, ii. 107. Lupton Bey, ii. 239, 246, 557- 558, 573- 602, 605. Linpi, M., i. 9, 11. 1 249, 424. INDEX Lusehan, ii. 39. Luta N'zige, ii. 222, 350. Liittge, Dr., i. 534. Luxor, i. 30, 54, 67, 647 ; ii. 13, 30. L'wal Burrajok, ii. 441. Lyall, Mr. C. E., ii. 460. Lyddite, ii. 274. Lyme, i. 26. Lyons, Capt. H. G., i. 86, 536 ff., 553, 579, 584, 601 ; ii. 166, 387, 388, 460. Maa-Amen, i. 644. Maa-kheru, i. 422. Ma'aliya, ii. 438. Maam, i. 57*, 576, 599 5 «• 327- Maamam, i. 28. Maanja, ii. 387. Maac, i. 358, 370, 396, 397, 400 ; ii. in. Maati, Hall of, i. 369. Ma'atuka, i. 563, 651. Macadagale, ii. 160. Macauley, Col. G. B., ii. 463, 474, 475- Mac Donald, General i. 87 ; ii. 275, 276. Mace, i. II. Macedonians, ii. 324. Machar, ii. 360. Machell, Lieut., i. 85. Mclnnes, ii. 320. Mackay, Lieut., i. 193. Mackenzie, Mr. C. C. lr., i- 503- McKerrell, Capt., ii. 460. McKillop Pasha, ii. 233, 234- McLaughlin, Dr. H. T., ii. 319, 320. Macmillan, ii. 361. McMurdo, Col., ii. 262, 482, 488. Macrobii, ii. 164. Madani, Shekh, ii. 438. Madaniyun, ii. 438. Madi, ii. 385, 424, 431. tribe, ii. 399. Madibbo, ii. 246. Madina, i. 551. Madinat al-Kayyum, i. 551. Madinat Habu, ii. 30, 42. Madwa, i. 24. Magassa, ii. 160. Maghagha, ii. 392. Magic, ii. 441. , white, i. 219. Magungo, ii. 356, 386. Mahari, ii. 438. Mahariya, ii. 438. Mahass, ii. 207, 208, 371, 409, 462. Mahdi, Muhammad 'Ahmad, the, i. 77, 90, 97, 105, 208, 228, 229, 270, 458, 606. , his pedigree, ii. 241. , his life and revolt, ii. 240 ff. , his programme, ii 243- , his successes, ii. 244, 245- , master of the Sudan. ii. 246. appointed Sultan by Gordon, ii. 248. sends Gordon Dervish apparel, ii. 249. , death of, ii. 260. , his body destroyed, ii. 279, 449. , his tomb, ii. 277, 396. ■ destroyed, ii. 274 Mahdiism, i. 76; ii. 279, 504, 508. crushed by Wingate, ii. 281. , history of, by Sir F. Wingate, ii, 241. Mahdiists, i. 86. Mahhu Bey, ii. 213. Mahmud, the Dervish General, i. 253, 254, 264, 27S ; ii. 206, 267, 273, 374- at Matamma, ii. 271. Mahmud, uncle of Mahdi, i. 77- 599 Mahmud Bey Kher Allah, ii. 476. Mahon, Col., C. B., i. 101, 183; ii. 270, 281, 284, 460. Mahtul, ii. 392. Mai, i. 612. Maidens, Ethiopian, ii. 10S. Mai-khentka, ii. 95. Mail, shirts of, ii. 278. Maithariaa, i. 612. Makarak, ii. 431, 432. Makaraka, ii. 233. Makaraki, ii. 267. Makdum, ii. 208. Makhi-taui, ii. 21. Makokia, ii. 354. Makren al-Buhur, ii. 356. Makrizi, ii. 184, 185, 186. , his account of the Beja, ii. 179. Maksouh, ii. 184. Makwa, ii. 443. Malikab, ii. 435. Malli, ii. 160. Maliit, ii. 439. Mallos, ii. 160. Malluna, ii 354. Malta, i. 30. Mama, ii. 160. Mambli, ii. 160. Mamiuks, i. 22, 26, 27, 29, 30 ; ii. 2IO. Beys, ii. 209. , massacre of, ii. 210. Mamuda, ii. 160. Ma'mun, Khalifa, ii. 187. Managil, ii. 407. Manbali, ii. 304. Manbittu, ii. 432. Manclalla, ii. 399. Mandawwa, ii. 439. Mandulis, i. 599. Manetho, i. 539; ii. 27. Manfalut, i. 1. Mangbattu, ii. 424. Mangi, ii. 284, 286. Manifold, Lieut. M. G. E., i. 241 ; ii. 480. Manobo, ii. 354. Mans fur, ii. 206. Mansura, i. 222, 251. INDEX Mans ma, steam i . . Manyanya, i . Manyema, ii. Maqu, i. 612. Marabia, ii. 245. Mara D abash, ii. 352. a, ii. 1 16. t, ii. 452. Marauat, ii. 1 II. Marcasite, ii. 181. Marchand, Major, ii. 378- Marcianus, Emp., ii. 177. ba, i. 328. Marea, ii. 53, 54. Mareiui, i. Nfareotis, ii. 296. Margaret, 1 1. K.I I.. the Princess, i. 272. M iriette, i. 62, 1.19, 150, 340, 626; ii. 4. 3s, 46, ), 403- Marigerri, )i. 164. Marinus, ii. 292. Marts, ii. 303. 1, ii. 15S. Mark, Saint, ii. 288, 302. Markhia, ii- 424. Markum, ii. ', Well Marno Bey, i. 259 ; ii. Marsden, ii. 507. Martin. Colonel, ii, . Signor, ii Martyrs, i ua-Amen, i Mary the Virgin, ii, Masalat tribe, ii. lit, ii. 432, 434, 439- llaralya, i. 285 ; i 139. .\a, 1. 12, 18, 31 : ii. U 234, . 239, 266, 268, 401, 462. Masawwar&t, i. 240. described by Cailliaud, i. 47, 48, 49- al-Kirbikan, i. 57. an-Nagaa, i. 57, 326, 355i 407. as-Suha,i. 56, 57. 327, 329, 355; »• ll6> 146 ff. . ii. 160. Mashakit, i. 637. Mashat, ii. 101. Mashra Abtd, ii. 365. ad-Dakhesh, ii. 473. Tawla, ii. 436. Mashu, i. 2. asha, ii. 14. chiefs, i. 647 ; ii. 24. deparc to Sudan, ii 55- Masindi, ii. 228, 229. lomacam, ii. 160. Masks of Dionysos, i. 307. Bey, ii. 366. ., i. 340, 514, 523- 547. 549 55i. 626, 649; ii. 46, 52. 414. Q Island, ii. 377. Massina, ii. 398. Mas'udi, al, i. 17 507; ii. 1S4, 1S5. Matamma, i. 58, 61, 113, 179, 187, 188 j ii- 205, 251. 253, 257, 274. 372, 374, 39o, 407. bombarded, ii. 272. destroyed by Mahmud. ii. 271. of Kal.abat, ii . ii. 205. Matariya, ii. 22. Matchai, i. 631. Mitchaiu, i. 533, 553. . ii. 22. Mathaka , i. Mathaun, i. I Ma: lien, i. 004. Mat .... henen, ii. 58. , Stele of, ii. 66 ff. Mather, Sir W., ii. 492. Matthews, Major, ii. 434, 509. Ma'tuka, ii. 263, 370. MSturu, i. 612. Maud, Mr., of The GtA i. 100, 109, 189 ; ii. 214, 215, 2l6. Maumartnn, ii. 160. Mauritania, ii. 165. Maximums, ii. 177, 178, 290, 291, 296. lonel F. I.,i. 233-, ii. 2 Maxwell, Sir J. G., i. 241,498; ii. 275 5°4- Maya bita Signora, ii. 315, 379- Ma/ices, ii. 177. Mbalasati, ii. 352. Mbuku, ii. 354. Meat, eaten raw, i. 81. , eaters of raw, ii. 69, 70. • Mecindita, ii. 160. Medawij ii. 258. ii 74. i Dept., ii. 499. i. 105, 218, 2x9. , native, i. 220. Medimni, ii. 164. Medina (Madtaa), i. 32. Mediterranean Sea, 1. 601 ; ii. o. 24. , Inlands of, i. Medo6, ii. 164, Moluh, ii. 432. 1. ii. 4, 7. , Pyramid of, i. Il8, 515- Megal.arei (or -bari), ii. 157, 15S, J 04, 417. Megada, ii. 160. Meganda, ii. 300. Mega^nei, ii. 160. Megasthenes, ii. 41. Megaticbos, Mount, ii. 160. lo, i. 572 ; ii. 73. Mehat, ii. 82. Ml hit, ii. ill. Mehren, ii. 349. INDEX Mehtet-en-usekh, i. 648. Mehti-em-sa-f., i. 524. Mek, the title, ii. 212. Mekh Giyorgis (George), ii. 212. Mekhenteqnent, ii. 95, 96. Mekhetsa (or -sai), ii. 81. Mekhsherkherthet, ii. 95. Mekhu, tomb of, i. 519. Mekka, i. 30, 31, 33, 224; ii. 266. Melly, B., i. 478. Melons, i. 458. Memnon, ii. 161, 170. Memnones, ii. 164. Memphis, i. 56, 120, 144, 5*5, 5l8, 519, 523, 529> 532, 533, 557, 632, 643 ; ii. 4, 7, 11, 19, 28, 30, 33, 38.40, 49, 52, 90, 91,104, 325- , capture of, ii. 8. Men, i.e., Egyptians, i. 505. Mena, i. 512 ; ii. 2. Menat, i. 426. Menat-Khufu, i. 534. Mendes, i. 635 ; .ii. 5, 14,24. Mcnelek II., ii. 264, 26S, 284. Menes, i. 512. Menhi-khent-Sehetch, ii. 19. Men-Nefer, ii. 20, 21. Mennu-kha-em-Maat, i. 620. Menthu, i. 531, 584, 591, 644 ; ii. 24. Menthu-em-bat, ii. 41, 42. Menthu-hetep I., i. 530, 53i- II., i. 531. III., i. 531, 532, 537. Menthu-heteps, i. 553. Menthu-hetep, an official, i. 539- Menthu-Ra, i. 556. Menti (Cattle-men), ii. 397, 416. Menti of Asia, i. 629. Menti-nu-Satet, i. 612. Mentiu, ii. 176, 328. Mentiu of Asia, i. 562. Mentu, i. 588. Menu, the god, i. 195, 368, 386, 396, 531, 556, 559, 625,627; ii. 45, 122, 177. Merawi, i. 36,38. 51,58, 59, 64, 98, 104, 108, 109, III ff, 177 ff, 466 ; ii. 56, 259, 270, 271, 291, 372, 373, 407,462, 467,651. , antiquities of, i. 114 ff. Mercenaries, Greek, ii. 53-55- Mer-en-Piah I., i. 638, 639. Mer-en-Ra, king, 1. 519, 520, 524. Merimes, ii. 334. Meri-Ra Pepi I., 516. Meris, ii. 194. Merkanesh, ii. 24. Merkanshu, ii. 8, 21. Mer-ka-Ra, ii. 58. Meroe, Island of, i. 18, 41, 55, 58, 59, 62, 120, 149, 159, 240, 241, 321, 467, 483, 497, 500, 564, 622 ; ii. 81, 82,83. 93,95, 104, 105, 106, in, 116, 117. 153, 157, 160, 162, 165, 172, 175, 199, 288, 303, 348, 374, 435, 473. , shape of, ii. 158. , city of, Ferlini's ex- cavations at, i. 287. , Pyramids of, ii. 473. descriLed, i. 357 ff. , excavation of, i. 341 ff. queens of, i. 300, 402, 4I4,4I5- army of, ii. 1.63. Meroe, mother of Cambvses, »• 153- Mero'ites, ii. 417. Meroltic inscriptions, i. 429 433- kingdom, ii. 115. sculptures, i. 500. writing, ii. 446. Merridi, ii. 399. Meisa, ii. 409, Barghut, Shekh, ii. 409. Merseker, i. 591. Mer-'iein, city, ii. 12, 18. 601 Merthet, ii. 82. Merti, ii. 22. Mes, Prince of Kash, i. 639. Mesaches, ii. 164. Mesbra ar-Rek (Maslira' ar- Rik), i. 259; ii. 239, 280, 281, 314, 315, 320, 359. 480. Meskher, i. 520. Mesle, ii. 363. Mesopotamia, i. 87, 112, 217, 227, 2?0, 449, 607, 609 ; ii. 189, 207. Messiah, the, ii. 1S6. Mest, city of, ii. 8, 24. Mestha, i. 361. Mesuth Ra, ii. 91. Metamma, i. 110. Metammeh, stern-wheeler, i. 102. Metcha, i. 517, 518, 534. Metet, ii. 80. Methu, i. 520. Metrakha, ii. 363. Meyricke, Capt. E. G.,ii-46o. Miani, ii. 446. Mice, ii. 34. Michael, St., ii. 299. Micklem, Lieut. H. A., i. 97 5 ii- 463- Midas, ii. 91. Midwinter, i. 264, 279, 280, 437, 497, 503; •»• 27', 472, 475, 476, 479- Mihairaka, ii. Ill, 303. Mlka'tl, Island of, ii. 193, 194, 197. Millet, ii. 158. Milukhkhi, ii. 34, 37- Minuuit, Monsieur, i. 287. Minerals, ii. 410. Mines, i. 45s, 621. Miraiab, ii. 438. M ismar ibn Abd Allah, ii. 204. Mission, American, in Sudan, ii- 318, 378. • , Austrian, ii. 265, 268, 317, 321- , British (C.M.S.), ii- 320, 321 Missionary enterprise in the Sudan, ii. 317 ff. IXDKX Missions founded on the Mponbi, ii. 356. Muhammad KlTendi. ii. 213. White Nile, ii. 312. Mruli, ii. 357, 3S7. Muhammad EffendJ Shakir, , Portuguese, ii. 308. M>i>i, ii. 356. ii. 49S. Mitani, i. 604 ; ii. 332. Msongi, ii. 354. Muhammad Martin, ii. 498. Miter, the, i. 22. ii. 229, 230, 235. Muhammad II a sin, ii. 207. Mitford, Colonel, ii. 460. Mtuma, ii. 352. Muhammad ibn Abd Allah, Mittu, ii. 399, 424. 434. Mtungi, ii. 354. ii. 1 Miami, ii. 352. Mugar, ii. 364. Muhammad ibn Kala'iin, Modunda, ii. 164. Muggi, ii. 3S5. ii. 196. ire, ii. 160. Mughess, i. 23. Muhammad ibn 'Omar, i. Nfograkeh, i. 95. Mughrat Wells, i. 91. 24. 25. Mokeltree, ii. 181. Mugrum, i. 55. Muhammad ibn Tughg, ii. Mokwai, ii. 361. Muhammad, Captain, i. 444. 303- Moltke, Von, i. no. Muhammad the Defterdar, Muhammad Ibrahim al- Molum, ii. 160. ii. 212, 231, 407. Amin, i. 265 ft". Mombasa, ii. 351. Muhammad, king of Harar, Muhammad Kher, ii. 314. Bay, ii. 233. ii. 231. Muhammad Khusrtif, ii. Monastr Arabs, ii. 251. Muhammad the Prophet, i. 210. Money, i. 2 1 8. 131, 221, 460; ii. 1S6, Muhammad Mahmud, ii. iron, i. 105. 203. 250. M011-. ilia, ii. 282, 2S3, 286, Muhammad of Kumm, ii. Muhammad N (I bawl Shekh, 321, 384, 399. 190. ibn Garar, murder* Province, ii. 409. Muhammad Abu Dhahab, ( rordon, ii. 25 v. Monkeys, i. 571. ii. 209. Muhammad Pallia Chaw- Monophysite belief, ii. Muhammad Al-Amln, a arby, ii. 477. Montmorency, Hon. R. 11. Mahdl, ii. 204, . Muhammad Sharif, ii. 241. de, i. 83. Muhammad al-Ballali, ii. , his quarrel with the Moon, Mountains of, ii. 172, 232. Mahdt, ii. 242. 348, 349, 35o. Muhammad al-I'adl, i. 52 ; Muhammad Sub ii. 206. ■god Aab, i. 621, 624. ii. 207. Muhammad 'Uthman, ii. t, Capt. II. II., ii. Muhammad All, i. 31, 33, 373- 460. 34. -554,574; Muhammad Wad Ibrahim, Mr. R. F.., ii. 460. ii. 8 , 323, 338, Shekh of Baikal, i. 201 ff. Morgan, Mr., i. 334. J74. 393. 4'4- Muhammad Wad Tunbul, Lni, Shekh, i. , life of, ii. 210. ii. 372. Moilang, Father, ii. 312. , his rule in Sudan, ii. Muhammadans, i. 25, 32, Morocco, i. 76. 209 If. 33> 75- da, i. 17. visits Sud in. ii. 214. law, i. 33. Mora-Kod6, ii. 424. , death of, ii. 2l8. Mull, 1. 43. Moru-Missa, ii. 424. Muhammad A'.i Pasha, ii. Mukhmiya, ii. 473. 303. 250, 251. Muko (Mu Kao), ii. 444- 36. Muhammad al-Khazin, ii. Mukrnm. ii. OS, ii. 1S2. 303- Mukurra, ii. 303, 304, 306. Mosul, i. 227. Muhammad al-Kher, ii. 241. Mfiller, 1). II, i. 18. m, ii. [88, Muhammad al-Mak, ii. 206. Miiller, F., ii. 446. Mothitae, ii. 164.. Muhammad Bey, ii. 21 }. Milder, Mr. M., ii. 63. Mougel Bey, ii. 220, 236, Muhammad Bey Ahmad, ii. Midler, Mr. W., i. 541. 461. 281. Mulmul, ii. 399. Mount Arafat, i. 32. tnmad Bey Ristkh, ii. Mulukhiya, i. 217. 130. 221. Mummies, robbery of, i. Mount Pisgah, i. 525. Muhammad Dawra, ii. 206. Mpango, ii. 354. Muhammad Din, ii. 214. 602 Mini, ii. 442. INDEX Muna, ii. 432. Munasir, ii. 438. Mungo Park, ii. 423. Munich Royal Museum Ferlini's objects in, i, 299. Munkar, i. 224, 225. Munzinger, ii. 230, 446. Murad Bey, ii. 209, 210. Mur'aniya doctrine, ii. 371. Murat (Murrat), Wells of, i. 193 ; ii, 266, 392, 464. Murchison Falls, ii. 386. Murle, ii. 282. Murtek, ii. 118. , Pyramid of, i. 382 ff. Musa Ibrahim, ii. 214. Musa'id Kedum, ii. 266. Musa of Dar Fur, ii. 206. Musa Pasha, ii. 314. Musa Pasha Hamdi, ii. 222. Musa Shekh, i. 531. Musa wad Ilelu, ii. 257. Musallim the Makdum, ii. 208. Museum,, British, i. 447. 5 Khartum, i. 436, 494. Museriya, ii. 438. Musk-maidens, i. 226. Muslims, ii. 186, 241. Musmar, ii. 479. Mustafa Pasha Yawa.r, ii. 250. Mustafyab, ii. 438. Mustapha, i. 237. Mut the goddess, i. 160, 301, 362, 397, 626 ; ii. 4, 38, 43, 45> 52, 56, 58, 65, 66, 70, 117, 132, 134. of Nubia, i. 134, 137 Muta N'zigi, ii. 356. Mut-kha-neferu, ii. 30. Mutmir, i. 331 ; ii. 473. Mut-nefert, i. 570. Mutrus, ii. 273. Mutterrutzner, ii. 446. Muwengu, ii. 354. Muzil al-Muhan, ii. 266. Mvolo, ii. 285, 286. Myang Matyang, ii. 2S4. Myding, ii. 358. Myrrh, i. 532, 571 ; ii 90. Myrson, ii. 160. Naam, ii. 2S2, 399. Nabataeans, ii. 167. Nabu-shezib-anni, ii. 53. Nachtigal, ii. 316. Nadha, ii. 179, 188. Nagaa, i. 47, 48, 58, 13S, 240, 286, 324, 325, 330, 467; ii. 119, 122, 131, 139, 152, 305- , buildings at, i. 327. , temples of, ii. 143 ff. Nag' Ilamadi, i. 64, 65. Nagil Castle, i. 129. Nahoganet, ii. 472. Nahr al-Kalb River, ii. 39, 339. Nahud, ii. 397, 437. Nail, ii. 201. Naima, ii. 233. Nakatera, ii. 354. Nakhela, i. 253. Nakhila, ii. 273. Nakir, i. 224, 225. Napala, i. 28, 36, 59, 64, 234, 290, 306, 427, 600, 601, 615, 620, 637, 651 ; ii. 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 10, 27, 28, 35» 39, 45, 46, 49, 52, 53, 54, 72>, 82, 93, 104, 116, 117, 154, 161, 163, 168, 172, 299, 332, 373, 435- , endowment of gods of, ii. 83. Napoleon, i. 26, 38, 54. Napoleon, Prince, ii. 66. Napt, ii. in. Narekiheb, i. 610. Narnarti, ii. 291. Narses, ii. 178, 294. Narukiheb, i. 612. Naser, ii. 203, 233. Naser of Dar Fur, ii. 206. Naser Wad 'Agib, ii. 204. Nashi Pasha, ii. 251. Nason, Col. F. J., i. 324. 603 Nasr ad-Din, ii. 198. Nasser, ii. 282, 361. Nastaabusaknen, ii. 66. Nastasenen, ii. 75, no. , reign of, ii. 84-103. , translation of Stele of, ii. 97 ff. Natho, ii. 299. Natron, ii. 391, 412. Wells, ii. 430. Naukavengn, ii. 354. Naumburg, i. 61. Navectabe, ii. 164. Navi, ii. 164. Naville, Prof., i. $\2, 513. 549, 553, 560; ii. in, 414. Nawaya Krestds, ii. 307. Nawwar, ii. 203. Nazareth, i. 495. N'darama, ii. 320. Ndoggos, ii. 399. N'Doruma, ii. 286. Neave, Dr. S., ii. 494. Neb-Maat-Ra, name of Amen-hetep III. as god, i. 612. Nebt-Tatet, i. 636. Nebuchadnezzar II., ii. 74. Necho, ii. Jt,. Necklaces, i. 306. from Meroe, i. 301-303. Nedok, ii. 4 4. Needles, i. 105. Nefer-ab-Ra, i. 427. Nefer-ankh-iib-Ra, i. 422. Nefer-hetep, king, i. 556. Nefer-kha, ii. 58. Nefert-ari, i. 639, 637, wife of Rameses II. Nefer Tern, i. 362, 386, 421; ii. 45. Neferus, ii. 12. Nefisa, ii. 404. Negroes, i. 216, 449, 506, 560; ii. 413, 424. kings, i. 407. tribes, ii. 200. in the Sudan, n 428. Negroid Pygmies, ii. 425. Nehanat, ii. 82. INDEX Neharina, i. 607. Neharq, ii. 117. i, ii. in. 009, 612. 512, 539 ii. 413, 415. Kasb, i 559- Neith, i. 531 ; ii. 14, 25. , temple of, ii. 91. Nejd, ii. 207 -lis, ii. 39, 40, 41. 52. Nekau (Necho), ii. 73. Nekbebet, i. 575, 588, 599. t-IIcru-na-shcnnu, ii. 24. ueth the rebel, i. 648 ; ii. 4- 14. 16, 17. :ii, ii. 69. Nephthyg, i. 160, 383, 387, 121. Nepita, i. 600. 600, 615. 380. liuns up the Nil iers into the Q, ii. 170 ft. . i. 646. int. ii. 69. (or-keli), ii. 14, 24. entmeh, ii. 16. • . ii. 1 18, iin, 122, 125, I I70. pyramid of, i. Neter, 1 . 4, 11. ;. 12. C, ii. 261. released, ii. 277. Neufeld on Gordon's ii. 254. Neumann, Mr. O., ii. 361. Nevile, Mr., i. 32 330 ; ii. 500. New, ii. 422. Newcombe, I".. C. A., ii.463. Newcombe, Lieut. S. 1'.. R.E., i. 330; i.. 373, 476. stival, ii. 15. 11, i. 524. Ngusi, ii. 350. Ni.i. 5 Niamanjam, ii. 432. Niambara, ii. 424. Niam Niams, ii. j 285, 2S6, 287, 314. 315, 399, 44*- Niebubr, i. 18, 22 ; ii. 292, 297. Night of the Drop, ii. 344. Nigol, ii. 360. Nigroae, ii. 165. Nik-kang, ii. 443. Nik-kieya, ii. 443. Nile, i. 8, 9, 19, 3 507, 601, 033; ii. 4u, 134. mi. Basin, ii. 350. , arc , Blue, i. K,. 2i, 42, 61, 62, 151. 324, Sji ; U, ;62. 369- discharge of, ii. , works on, ii. 486. , course of, in I h ii. 369 ft". distances, ii. Hood, ii. 345. , how caused, ii. 368. gauge, ii- }7<->- at 1 . , (ieitn. go«l, i. 143- , tw< ii. 344. goddess, i. ; , history of, ii. 343. 604 lyrnn to, ii. 344. , islands in, ii. 291. Lakes, ii. 34S. , length of, ii. , North and South, i. , origin of name, ii. 344. r< • 350- , wees of, ii. »53i 344- , true source of, ii. 220. , Upper, ii. 356. described, ii. , discharge of, ii. , Victoria, ii. 356, 3S6. , discharge ot, ii. 30S. , views of Diodorus on, u. 133. , White, i. 23, 42, 58, 324, 521, 562 ; ii. 356. described, ii. 375. , discharge of, ii. 369. , worship of, ii. 442. Nili Paludes, ii. 172. Nilwa, ii. 291. Nilwatti, Nilwitti, Island of, i.444, 450, 457 ; ii. 29X. Nimr, ii. 213 Nimr, Mek, ii. 404, 407. Nimr of Shendi, ii. 206, 212. Nimuli, it. 3S6. as (or Tribes) of the Bow, the, i. 81, 598, 020. Nineveh, i. 227; ii. 30,38, 39, 40, 41, 50, 52, 74- hae, ii. 165. Nisan, ii. 38. . ii. 165. Nit, ii. 25. Nitrian Valley, ii. - Niumbi, ii. 357. • »»« 444 Noa, ii. 1. 364. ), ii. 176- •.. 295 I!., 308 ff., 41S, 506. INDEX Nomades, ii. 156, 160. Nome standards, i. 362. Norden, Capt., i. 22, 29. , Travels of, i. 13 ft'. Noubas, ii. 184. Nsabe, ii. 262. Nsongi, ii. 354. Nuba, ii. 2S5. Mountains, ii. 233, 2S6, 391. Nubae, ii. 158, 418. Nubar Pasha, ii. 237. Nubar Pasha Yvisuf, ii. 244. Nubas, i. 61 ; ii. 304, 397, 404, 416. Nubei, ii. 164. Nubi language, ii 447. Nubia, i. 13, 21, 22, 24, 26, 30, 32, 34, 39, 52, 53, 60, 6l, 75, 82, 121, 122, I44, 152, 176, 463, 505, 532, 534, 537, 562. 563, 565, 57o, 573, 597, 593, 604- 606, 621-625, 627629, 633, 636, 638, 640, 642, 643 ; ii. I, 3, 28, 30, 39, 45, 50, 54, 58, 73, 9i, 109, 153, 289, 326. , four princes of, ii. 307- , 15 kingdoms of, ii. 307- , names of, i. 535. 539. Nubian Desert, i. 30, 31. Language, ii. 445. Nubians, 1. 81, 84, 93, 531, 538, 541, 562, 563, 568, 605, 625, 626; ii. 2, 3, 5, 6, 53, 74, 92, 104, 115, 166-169, 1S5, 187, 416, 418, 435- described, ii. 92, 93. , Jacobite, ii. 152. Nubt, ii. 24. Nuers, ii. 265, 280, 360. Nugim, ii. 392. Nuisamba, ii. 354. Niil, ii. 203. Nuhva, i. 453. Numidians, ii. 109. Nups, ii. 160. Nur ad -Din, ii. 192. Nur al-Kanzt, i. 83 ; ii. 261. Nur Ash-Sham, ii. 241. Nuri, i. 114, 234; ii. 116, 373, 479- , pyramids of, i. 41, 59, 115 ff., 153, 169, 274. Nut, ii. 18. Xuucr, ii. 433. Nuzul, i. 182. Nya Ababdo, ii. 444. Nyadok, ii. 444. Nya Dwai, ii. 444. Nya Gwatse, ii. 444. Nyakabari, ii. 356. Nyakang (Kong), ii. 443, 444. Nyamgasha, ii. 354. Nyamgashani, ii. 354. Nyando, ii. 352. Nyato, ii. 444. Nyavarougs, ii. 352. Nzoia, ii. 352. Oases, i. 508, 458. Oasis, god of, i. 513. Oasis of Dakhla, ii. 174. Jupiter Amnion, ii. 91, 93- Kharga, i. 51 ; ii. 93, 174. Minor, ii. 174. Obed, ii. 285. 'Obed Allah ibn al-Habbab, ii. 187. Obelisk-House, i. 625. Obo, ii. 478. Obodas, ii. 167. O'Connell, Maj. (formerly Capt.), ii. 285, 460. Odaenathus, ii. 175. Odage, ii. 444. (Ecalices, ii. 165. Ogren, ii. 479. Ohrw alder, Father, ii. 241, 253, 255, 258-260, 265, 323, 396. Oigiga, ii. 424. Oils, i. 105 ; ii- 15S. Oisila, ii. 424. Ojallo, ii. 434. 'Okasha, Shekh, i. 93. 605 Okmah, i. 92, 93. Okun, ii. 444. Old Cairo, ii. 22. Old field, Capt., i. 98, 99, 282. Olympiodorus, ii. 291. O'Madyaka, ii. 432- 'Omar ibn Abd al-'Aziz, ii. 187. 'Omar Salih, ii. 266. 'Omar Tita, ii. 268. Omaro, ii. 443. Ombos, ii. 333, 337- Omdurman, i. 41, HO, 173, 178, 201, 202, 209, 240, 241, 264, 271, 272 ; ii. 246, 254, 375, 449. 463- , Battle of, ii. 274-276. surrenders, ii. 252. , town of, ii. 395 ff. Ophthalmia, i. 32. Opium, i. 221, 222. Oppert, Dr., i. 648. Orambis, ii. 160. Orsum, ii. 160. Oryx, ii. 391. Osiris, i. 67, 160, 169, 195, 383, 397, 40O, 421, 432, 524, 540, 547, 643 ; i'- 33, 106, 112, 117, 122, 134, 176, 4H- , cult of, at Napata, i. 167. gods in Nubia, ii. 82. , Hall of, i. 39°- , House of, i. 369. , Judgment of, i. 358. Khenti Amenti, i. 362, 369- , Lord of Tattu, i. 362. and the Nile, ii. 344- of Philae, ii. 294. pillars, i. 6^S, 634, 635. 63°- at Semna, i. 477. , statue of, from Gaziiat al-Malik, i. 493. at Semna, i. 60. Osman Agha, ii. 213. Osman Azrak, i. 94, 95 ; ii. 266, 270. INDEX Osman Rev, i. 296, 339, 340; ii. 213. Osman Dikna, i. 95, 253 ; ii. 246. 261, 2< 26a, 265, 268, 269, 272, 273- Osman Ganu, ii. 267. n Pasha, ii. 236. Usman wad Adam. ii. 262. Osorkon I., i. on III., ii. a the rebel, ii. 23. Ostrich feathers, ii. IO, 451. $39* ( Itellia, ii. 481. Other World, the, i. 369. 370, 384, 385, 407, 523, 524; ii. 17. , four divisions of, i. . Kails, ii. 3S7. Owen, Major •• Roddy," i. 91 ; ii. 21 Oxen, white, ii. 8, 22. Ox-gall, i. 19. Oxyrhynchus, ii. 4, 6, 12, 15, 184. it, ii. 14. Pa-Ba-neb-Tet, ii. 14. Pa-Bas, ii. 24. $L, ii. 14. dro, ii. 349. Mr., i. 99. , ii. 160. Pa- 1 lap, ii. Pa- IL bi, ii. 24. ; ' 1 49- ^14. ii- 35i 37. Paley, i. 57. Palimus plant, ii. 156. Pallme, i. 24 ; ii. Palm branch* shoots, i. 1,3, 260. Pa-Matchet, ii. 12, 15. Pamphagi, ii. 165. Pan, ii. 154, 159. Pa-Nebes, ii. 79, 82, S3, 89, in. Pa-neb- tep-ahet, ii. 12. Pankh-aluru, ii. 75, 88. Pankhi, i. 144 ff. Pannonia, ii. 289. Panthers, ii. 108, 159. skins, i. 3S5, 571 ; ii. 108. Pa-nub, ii. 11. Paoletti, i. 478. Pa-Pek, ii. 6, 14. Paper currency, ii. 258. Pa-Ptah, i. 633. Papyrus, ii. 173, 376, 3S0. Pa-Qem, Pa-Qemt, i . Pa-Qem-Aten, ii. 90, 96, 102. Pa-Ra, i. 635. Paradise, i. 224, 226. Pa Ka-sekhem-kheper, ii. II, 18. Pa-rehu, i. 571. Parei, i. 301. Parembole, ii. Ill, 1 13- 115, 328. Parenta, ii. 160. Parker, Capi. A. C , ii. 4C0, 460. Parrots, ii. 10S, 1S1. Parsons, Col., ii. 273, 2S0. 4C». Paschal, a friar, i. 6. Pa-Sekhet-neb-Rehesaui, ii. 24. khet-nebt-Saot, ii. 24. Pa-Sept, ii. 24, 39, 40, 41. 49. Pa-ser, ii. 326. Pasunka, i. 612. tet, ii. 23. Pata-nub, ii. 69. I ehuti - ap - reheb (01 rebehui), ii. 14, 24. Patbenf, ii. 24. 1, ii. 160. Paris, ii. 160. Patosan, Island, ii, 386. 606 Patricia, H. R. II. the Princess, i. 272. Pa-ur, Prince of Kasb, i. 625, 637, 643. Payne Knight, Mr., i. 100. Peake, Colonel (formerly Major), K.A.. ii. 380, 509. and the Sudd, ii. 482. Pearls, ii. 108. fisheries, ii. 190, 500. Pebbles on graves, i. 225. Pebekhen-nebiu, ii. 21. Pechuel-Losche, ii. 423. Pectoral offered to Tetun, i, 5§9- Pedjoul, i. 91. Pedley, Captain O., i. 64, 67, 68, 72, 98, 240. Pef-tchaa-Bast, ii. 4, 7, 17. Pehqennes, ii. ill. Peki, ii. 357. Pelekos, ii. 74. Pelham, the Hon. A., ii. 476. Pelham, Hon. II. (i. ('•., '• 437, 497- Pelkha, ii. 87. Pellegrini, Signor A., i. 514. Pelly, Miss, i. 498. Pehisium, ii. 34, 90. Pelusium Daphnae, ii. 53. Pemau, ii. 24. , ii. 21. Penn, Messrs., 1. 258. Pen-nekheb, i. 564, 565. Pennut, i 643. Pentaurt, ii. 24. Penth-bekhent, ii. 24. 1. Col., ii. 500, 509. Pepi L, 121, 195- 516, 519, 524. 526; ii. 414. , death of, i. 517. Pepi II., i. 522, 523, 526, 529, Pepi-nekht, i. 517. Percival, Captain A. J., ii. 460. Pereira, F. M. E., ii. 364, Pel I nines, i. 307. »i, ii. 165. Perron, Dr., i. 25. INDEX Persea tree, i. 384, 398 ; ii. 159. Persia, ii. 225. Persian Gulf, i. 471. Persians, ii. 95, 104, 105, 178, 324. Perui, i. 421 ; ii. 117. Perusii, ii. 165. Peta-Amen, a priest, ii. 69. Peta- Amen-neb-nest-taui, ii . 25. Peta-Ast, ii. 8, 24. Peta-Asteta, ii. 21. Peta-lleru-sma-taui, ii. 24. Peta-Khensu, ii. 52. Peten-Hert, ii. in. Petlierick, Mr. J., ii. 220, 232, 351. 393»446. Petronius, Prefect, i. 28 ; ii. 161, 167, 168. Thaliges, ii. 164. Phallic ceremonies, ii. 440. Phanes, ii. 90. Pharaohs, i. 65, 98, 299, 622, 626 ; ii. 17, 176. Pharbaetites, ii. 24. Philae, Island of, i. 13, 26, 27, 30, 31. 38. 67, 72: ii. 74, 105, no, in, 113, 166, 167, 176, 185, 188, 291, 292, 294. , worship of Isis at, ii. 177, 178. Philostratus, i. 522. Phoenicians, ii. 92. Phrygia, ii. 91. Phthouris (Phturis), i. 60 ; ii. 161, 168. Piankhi, i. 59, 120, 144 ff., 169, 201. Piankhi, husband of Amen- artas, ii. 30. Piankhi-meri-Amen, i. 600 ; ii. 2-26, 27, 42, 45, 46, 53, 56. Piankhi Senefer-Ra, ii. 56. Pibor River, ii. 361. Pide, ii. 160. Pidibotae, ii. 160. Pierret, ii. 2. Pigmentation, ii. 494. Pigs, ii. 192, 302. Pilon, ii. 296. Pindicitora, ii. 160. Pinnis, ii. 160. Pipes (tobacco), i. 105. Pirie, Capt. A. M., ii. 282. Pistia, ii. 481. Pithecussae, ii. 109. Pithom, Stele of, ii. ill. Pittara, ii. 162, 172. Plague, i. 563. Plenaria?, ii. 160. Pleyte, Dr , ii. 33. Pliny, i. 59, 543 5 «• 94> 153, 160, 169, 170, 171 172, 175, 338, 348. Ploss, Dr., ii. 403- Plunkett, Colonel, i. 69. Pococke, Dr., i. 13. , Travels of, i. 22. Poison, traffic in, i. 525. Poll tax, ii. 194. Pomades, i. 105. Poncet, i. 6, 7, 12, 23; ii 202. , Travels of, i. I. Poppies, i. 221. Poole, Stanley Pane, ii. 186 187, 192, 195, 298, 483. Portais, Father, i. 22. Port Durnford, ii. 234. Port Florence, ii. 352. Port Sudan, ii. 474, 476, 478. Posias, ii. 297. Postal Service, ii. 480. Potter, Mr., ii. 361. Pottery, Christian, ii. 375. Powell, Major, ii. 460. Powendael, Lake, ii. 380. Power, Mr., ii. 250. Premnis, i. 28; ii. 168, 169, 174. Priapus, i. 635 ; ii. 176. Price, Mr. PL E., i. 275. " Priest," the horse, ii. 312. Primis, i. 22, 26, 28, 575 599, 643; ii. 161, 191, 290, 291, 293, 294, 302. Prince of Kash, establish ment of, i. 566. Priscus, ii. 291. Prisse d'Avennes, ii. 42, 334 607 Prisons, ii. 500. Pritchard, H. L., ii. 463. Proaprimis, ii. 160. Probus, Emp., ii. 175. Proclus, ii. 292. Procopius, ii. 176, 179, 294. Prosda, ii. 160. Prudhoe, Lord, i. 617, 624 ; ii. 118. , Travels of, i. 54. Prussia, i. 61. Pruyssenare, ii. 423. Psammetichus, ii. 158. Psammetichus I., i. 53; ii. 58, 106, 164. Psammetichus II., i. 427; ii. 74. Psammetichus III., i. 91 ; ii. 90. Psammetichus, sonofNekau, ii. 52. Psammetichus:, son of Theokles, ii. 74. Psebo, ii. 159. Pselcis, i. 74. 634; ii. Ill, 114, 161, 167. Ptah, i. 625, 632, 634, 636, 644; ii. 7, 8, 19, 21, 33, 42, 49, 82. Ptah of the South Wall, ii 21. Ptah-Seker-Asar, i. 358. Ptoenphae, ii. 164. Ptolema'is Epitheras, ii. in. Ptolemies, i. 57, 169, 510; ii. 324. Ptolemy L, ii 109. Ptolemy II., i. 154; ii. 109, in, 115, 157- Ptolemy IIP, ii. 112. Ptolemy IV., ii. 112, 115, 118. Ptolemy V., ii. 115. Ptolemy the Geographer, ii. no, 172, 348. Ptolemy Lathyrus, ii. 163. Puarma. ii. 5, 12, 25. Puckler, ii. 414. Punt, i. 138, 512, 513, 515, 523, 532, 538, 554, 571, 572, 573, 599, 612, 626, 628, 642; ii. 414, 415, 433- INDEX Punt, chiefs of, i. 626. , Queen of, ii. 403. Pygmies, i. 13S, 515. ii. 158, 163, 324. described, i. 525. iv, the dancing, i. 522 ft. Pyne, Captain, ii. 265. Pyramids . 274. described, i. Bagriwtya, i. 323. Gebel Baikal, i. 240. described, i. opened, i. 169. of Kurru, i. 240. of Mero8, ii. 131. , groups of, i. j n. , No. it of, , Southern gr lip described, i. 4 16 ff. ofTankdsi, i. 240. of Zuma, i. 240. Python, worship of, ii. 442. Qantur, i. 125. qamisha, 1. 613. Qeb, i. 418, 421. Qebhsennuf, i. 361. Qebti, i. 643. Qehaq, i. 642. Qelhetat, ii. Qem-baiu-set, ii. 94. ■ur, ii. 2^. ]>a, ii. 50. Oerti, ii. 343. Qetshi, i. 609. Oetu folk, 1 of Ilet-nub, i. 518. at Meioe, i. 355. ;.■ at . 559. Quartz, i. 541. Queen, the fat, i. 467. Quicksilver, ii. 330. Ourui. 1 i»- 3. - '35- ;>i. 1. 56] . I Rabat, ii. 202. Rab-saki (Rabshakeh), ii. 40. Rada-ivah, Temple or, ii. Rafa'iyun, ii. Raflili Falls, ii. ; Ragab, ii. 212, 21 ;. Rahad. River, ii. Ra.Harmachis, i. to, 421. ii. 18. Rabat, the, i. 213, 2 Ra-IIerukhuti, 1. 574. ii. 45. Rahmah, ii. 438. Railway, Aim I lamed to Kan , Aswan to Shellal, i. 69. , Atbara to Red Sea, ii. 476. , Haifa to Rerma, ii. 463, 47^- , to Khartum, ii. 464. Railway survey, ii Rain at Asw&n, i. 71. makers, ii. 441. water, ii. I(>3, 165. 22 1 . Ram of Amen, i. 6l6, 617 ; ii. 3. Rams' heads, i. 306. Ra-Maat-neb, pyramid of, i. 403- Ramadan, i. 31. Ramadt, ii. 4 Ka-ma-ua-neteru, i. 637. Ka-mer-ka, ii. 1 10. Rameses, ii. 344. Rameses I., 633, 1 in the Sudan, ii. ^T,^. Rameses II., i. 57. Si • ; ii. IO, 74. 371. , his 11 1 sons ai in the Sudan, i. 630 fl reswathed, 1. Rameses II., tempi' . , , at Arnitti, i. 466. Rameses 1 1 1., i. 64 1.(14 ;. Rameses IV., i. 643. Rameses V., i Rameses VI., i. I Rameses VII., i. 644. Rameses VIII., i. Rameses IX.. i. 044, <■ | Rameses X.. Rameses XL, i. 1 •> XII.. i Ra-nefer, ii. 23. bsi, i. 559. Ranfi, ii. 204. Raphael, ii. 299. Raphia, ii. 38, ial, ii. 261, 263. Rfis Adar, ii. 273. . 406. l-Hudl, ii. 273. Ras al-Khartum, i. 42. Ra> Barydn, ii. 23 Rashlida, ii. Rashfd Bey, ii. 243. 24 \. idiammad, i. -52. Ritib Pasha, ii. 234. Ravasanja, ii. Ravenscroft, Major II. V., ii. 460. Rawlinson, Sir II., i. 227. Rawson, Captain R. I., ii. 460. Raw'ul I'asha, ii. 231, 236, 248. Rawyft, ii. 205. Rebaru, ii. 95. Reb-Khentent, ii. 95. Rebinan, ii. 349, 350. Kedesiyah, i. 630, 631. , temple of, i. I Red Sea. i. iS, 48, 54, 2 1 7, 505. 5i3. 5i6, 554, 571- 630, 643 ; ii. 95, 112, 155, 158, 163. 105, 1 So, 190, 199, 225, 233. 500. Canal, ii. 74. Province, ii. 408. j Railway, ii. 464. 1. 14. INDEX Reggaf, ii. 233, 263, 266, 268, 273, 384. Rehent, ii. 18. Rehrehsa, ii. 80, 81. Reinisch, ii. 419, 445. Rejaf, ii. 173. Religions, ii. 440 ff. Renaudot, ii. 306. Renk, ii. 399, 437, 459. Renni, ii. 160. Ren-seneb, i. 556. Reservoir, ii. 128, 148. Rest Camp at Aswan, i. 68, 71- Retennu, i. 599. Reth, ii. 415. Reuter's Correspondent, i. ICO. Revillout, ii. 291, 292, 297. Rhadata, ii. 160. Rhinoceros, ii. 108, 157. Rhizophagi, ii. 156, 157. Rhodes, Mr. S. C, ii. 493. Riketa, ii. 285. Rikki, ii. 399. Rima, ii. 363. Rimak, ii. 434. Rings, ii. 135. , gold, j. 305, 306. , silver, i. 305, 306. Ripon Falls, ii. 219, 352, 356, 368, 3&7- River Column, ii. 252, 259. River discharges, ii. 368. worship, i. 20. Roads, ii. 459. Robeits, Capt. C, ii. 460. Rodi, ii. 399. Rodis, ii. 305. Rogel, ii. 479. Rohl, ii. 359. Romans, i. 510 ; ii. 120, 167, 324. in the Sudan, ii. 166 ff. rule in Nubia, i. 28. Rome, ii. 166, 175, 506. Rosellini, i. 299, 536, 537. Rosetta, ii. 211, 281. Rossignoli, Father, ii. 268. Rothschild, Hon. C, i. 150. Roule, M. le Noir du, Travels of, i. 4. VOL. II. Routes, ii. 460. Roveggio, Monsignor, ii. 321. Rovuma Valley, ii. 229. Royalties, ii. 45 r. Royan, ii. 365, 474. River, i. 251. Royle, Mr. C, i. 85, 254; ii. 259. I quoted, ii. 257, 273, 276. Rubatab, ii. 40 1, 438. Rubi, Lake, ii. 386. Ruendu, ii. 354. Ruenzori, ii. 354, 355. Rufa'a, ii. 305, 365, 407, 439- Rufai Agha, ii. 246- Ruiga, ii. 352. Ruini, ii. 354. Ruisamba, ii. 353. Ruizi, ii. 352. Rxil River, ii. 428. Ruma-Amen, ii. 66. Rumanika, ii. 402, 403. Rumbek, ii. 237, 282, 399, 480. Rundle, Gen. Sir Leslie, i. 83, 89, 113, 177, 180, 183. 187, 198, 199, 200, 223, 230. Runka, ii. 365, 438. Ruppell, i. 24 ; ii. 445. Ruseres, i. 61 ; ii. 213, 280, 364, 365, 366, 396, 438, 44i, 459- Russegger, J., i. 24. , Travels of, i. 61. Rustum Pasha, ii. 218. Rutshuru, ii. 354. Ruvuvu, ii. 352. Ruwana, ii. 352. Ruzekat, ii. 439. Ruzi 1. River, ii. 361. II. River, ii. 361. Ryan, Capt. G. J., ii. 460. Rylls, Father, ii. 312. Sa'ad I., ii. 206. Sa'ad II., ii. 206. Sa'adab Dabus, ii. 205. Sab, ii. 69. 609 Hayes, 251- Saba Bey, i. 85. Sabaco, i. 558. Sabderat, ii. 268, 400. Sabderat tribes, ii. 213. Sabna, i. 517. Sab'ua, ii. 207. Sacrifices, bloodless, i. 624. , human, ii. 294. Sadd, ii. 348, 376, 379, 481. , regions of, ii. 172. Sadden, temple of, i. 453. Saddenga, i. 62, 453, 614, 651. , temple of, i. 606 ; ii. 371. Sadler, Colonel 579- Saea, ii. 160. Safanuf, ii. 299. Safia steamer, ii. Safiya (Safia), ii. 392, 437. Sahal, Island of, i. 540, 548, 556, 640 ; ii. 344. Sa Hathor, i. 538, 539, 553. Sai, Island of., i. 31, 34, 38, 40, 52, 60, 62, 439, 444, 457, 458, 462 ff, 466, 595, 601, 606. 651 ; ii. 194, 207, 291, 300, 371. , Castle of, i. 461, 462. Sa'id Ibrahim, ii. 488. Sa'id Pasha, i. 149; ii. 218, 236, 461. visits Sudan, ii. 220. Sainte Croix, ii. 312. St. Martin, i. 18. Sais, ii. 11, 14, 19, 28, 39, 40, 52, 53, 91. Sakiat (Sakiyat, Sakiet) al- Abd, i. 444 ; ii. 300, 371, 391- Sakkala (Sakala) i. 20. Mountains, ii. 349. Sakkara, i. 518. Sako, ii. 360. Saksaktit, ii. 95. Salaam River, i. 25 1; ii. 365. Salah ad-Din (Saladin), ii. 192, 193, 302. Salahiya, ii. 375. Sale, quoted, i. 224. Sallier Papyrus, i. 561. R r INDEX Agha. ii. 245. Bashfr, ii. 372. j Sea-calves, ii. 155. Sal i h Hey, ii. 244. Satiu. i. 533. 1 -turtles, ii. 156. , Shekh, ii. 261, 266. Satu, i. 592. Seankhka-Ra, i. 532. Salih, Sultan, ii. 206. Sa1) 1 . [65, 175. Sears, Colour-Sergeant, ii. Salim, Kubba, i. 455, 456. Saunders, ("apt., ii. 483. 4 323 ; "• 200, 201, Sebek-hetep I. 555. 412. 26 v . 401, 461, Sebek-hetep III., i. 558, . rock, i. 105 ; ii. 159. 462. 559- . well. i. 24. described, ii. 408. Sebek-betep I\'., i. 556. Samanirku, . Junction, ii. 474. Sebennytus, ii. 24. Samauiy 1 doctrine, ii. 241. , New, ii. 409. Sebosus, ii. 162. : 47- Sinjirli, ii. 39. Sinkat, ii. 246, 249. Sinuthius, ii. 300. Sio, ii. 352. Subitum, ii. 165. Sirdar (Lord Kitchener), i. 68, 72, 177. Siri, il. 399. Sinus, ii. 157. Sistrum, i. 137 ; ii. 7, 17. Sitra Amir, ii. 231. Sittina, ii. 404. Skins, i. 217, 520, 554. for crossing Nile, i. 42. Slade, Maj., R.E., ii. 373. Slatin I'asha, i. 94, 113, 178, 179, [83, 188, 200, 201, 202, 217, 230, 231 ; ii. 233, 241, 243, 246, 248, 254, 257, 259, 260, 323, 390, 394, 477, 504, 511. . escape of, from Om- durman, ii. 268. mi Mission work, ii. 322. Slavery, ii. . , abolition of, pro- claimed, ii. 220. . Burckhardt's opinion of, ii. 407. - I ; ii. 104, aravans, i. 622. labour, i. 533, 621. market at Dongola, i. 103. raiding, earliest in- stance of, i. 522. , runaway, i. 1 trade, i. 25 ; ii. 2l8. . llOW worked, ii. Slave trade increases, ii. 221. Slings, ii. 16. Sma-Behutet, ii. 24. Small-pox, ii.202, 213, 390. Sma-taui, ii. 91. Smelt, Rev. Charles, i. 2S. 3«- Smendes, i. 040, 047. Smerdis, ii. 91. Smith, Col. Sir C. Moiled, i- 576. 577. 584? ii- 264. Smith, Mr. C, ii. 51. Smith, Major ('.. de II., ii. 2$$, 460. Smyth, Capt. N. M., ii. 281, 282, 460. So, i. 29, 30. Soap, i. 218. S6ba, i. 42, 43, 62, 324 ; ii. 116, 151, 200, 204, 250, 303, 365, 394- j , the ram of, ii. 305. ! Sobat River, ii. 230, 233, 314, 358, 359, 360, 368, 378, 390, 433, 481, 4*5- , discharge of, ii. 369. , Mission station on, ii. 319. Sokoto, ii. 398. Soleb (Sold., Sulld. i. 34, 144. , temple of, i. 608-615. Solon, ii. 422. Solstice, summer, ii. 153. Somaliland, ii. 426. Somerset Nile. ii. 238, 3S6. Songs, Berberi, i. 80. Souls of Rameses II., i. 632. Sowerby, Capt. M. E., ii. 476. Sparkes, Col. \V. S . ii. 281, 282, 284, 378, 433, 460. Spear>, horn-tipped, ii. 107. Speke, Capt. J. H., ii. 220, 221. 222, 350. quoted, ii. 402-403. Spells, i. 222. Spermatophagi (or Spermo- phagi), ii. 150. 157. Sphingium, ii. 162. Sphinx, i. O23. 6lJ Sphinx, sand cleared from, i. 605. at Soba, i. 42. Sphinxes, ii. 108, 157. at Meroe, i. : Spices, i. 105. plant>, ii. 327. Spider.-, :i. 150. Spintum, ii. 160. Spirits, belief in. i. 220. , evil, i. 268. , land of, i. 523. in pyramids, i. 267. Spong, Surgeon-Capt. I i. 104. Stadasis, ii. 161, 168. Stambul, i. 216. Stanley, Sii II.. i. 220. ii. 2 Stanton, Col. K. A., i. 42. 324 ; ii. 460, 304. 505. Star appears in the Sudan, ii. 214. Statet, i Statues of Tombos, i. 559. Stead, Corporal, ii. 480. Steamers ,,11 Nile, i. 258; ii. 459. Steatopygy, i. 485 ii. 403. Stefani, Antoine, i. 285, 286, 5, 291, 293, 295, 3H. 3'"- 3'7, 3i8, 320, 343- Steindorff, ii. 46, 51. Stele of the Coronation, ii. 58, 60 rt". of Dongola, ii. S4. of the Kxcommunica- tion, ii. 70. of Piilnkhi, ii. 4. of I'ithom, ii. 1 1 1 . Stemiing, Mr., i. 331. Stephen, St., ii. 297. Steph> neral Sir 1 rederick, i. 95 ; ii. 257, 261. Step-pyramid, i. 357. Sterling, Capt., ii. 507. Stern, Dr., ii. 344. Stem. Mr. W., ii. 496. Steudner, ii. 314, 315. Stevani, Col., ii. 268. INDEX Stevenson, Lieut. A. G., i. 241 ; ii. 463. Stewart, Col., ii. 245, 247, 250. , murder of, i. 85 ; ii. 251. Stewart, Sir Herbert, i. no. , death of, ii. 253. " Stone Belly," i. 31 ; ii. 370. Strabo, i. 39, 55 ; ii. 41, 54, 93, 106, 153, 157, 166, 167, 175- Strack, Capt. L., ii. 283. Strates, i. 20. Struthophagi, ii. 156, 158. Sudan abandoned by Egypt, ii. 246. , absence of ancient remains in, i. 511. annexed by Arabs, ii. 193- , area of, ii. 390. , boundaries of, ii. 390. , British in, ii. 448. budget, ii. 453. caravan, i. 23. , deserts of, ii. 391. , desolation in, i. 452. destroyed by Muham- mad All's policy, ii. 240. , Egyptian influence in, i- 513- , extent of, i. 506. , inhabitants of, ii. 412. , irrigation of, ii. 351. , Kitchener's advance in, ii. 269. languages, ii. 444. , meaning of, i. 506. Military Railway, i. 65. , minerals of, ii. 410. , the modern, ii. 340. Oases, ii. 391. , population of, ii. 390. Provinces — revenues of, ". 455- — — religions, ii. 440 ff. revenue, ii. 451. , seven Provinces of, under Ahmad Pasha, ii. 217. Sudan, thirteen Provinces of, ii. 393 ff. , travellers in, i. 1 ff. , tribute of, ii. 326. *' Sudan Campaign," i. 85, 102. Sudd, i. 239, 259 ; ii. 230, 481. , regions of, ii. 172, 173. Sudeley, Lord, ii. 460. Sueh. ii. 399. Sueki, i. 442. Suez, i. 32, 470 ; ii. 227. Canal, i. 71. Sugar, i. 105, 217, 494. Suhna, i. 216. Suicide, ii. 154. Suinya, ii. 352. Suk Mountains, ii. 386. Sukkot, i. 31, 40, 459, 461, 471 ; ii. 207, 208, 371, 409, 462. dates, i. 455. , temple of, i. 453. Sulb, 1. 34, 35, 37, 38, 40, 4i. 52, 53, 55, 6o> 62> 144, 149, 439, 443, 47i, 497, 502, 596, 620, 621, 624, 651 ; ii. 45, 371. , hawk standard of, i. 621. , temple of, 608-615. , excavations at, i. 445 ff., 449, 450, 451- Sulem, ii. 439. Suleman (Solon), ii. 422. Sulem an I., ii. 206. Suleman II., ii. 206. Suleman, son of Zuber, i. 259 ; ii. 235, 236 ff., 248. Suleman Al-Adad, ii. 205. Suleman ibn Salam, ii. 206. Suleman Wad Kamr, i. 85 ; ii. 251, 259. killed, ii. 264. Suleman Wad Na'man, ii. 251. Sulemaniya, ii. 438. Sulphur well, i. 92. Sulu-n-Diffe, i. 537, 53^- Summara, ii. 164. " Summit," ii. 478. 613 Sun, men sacrificed to, ii. 177- , oaths sworn by, i. 54. , an object of fear, ii. 154- Sun-god, ii. 136. I Sundo, ii. 352. Sunni, ii. 399. Sunnu, i. 530. Sunt, ii. 81. Sur, ii. 116. Susa, ii. 91. Sutekh, i. 561. Suten-henen, ii. 12, 14, 17, 18. Suten-het, ii. 12. Sutherland, Capt. A., ii. 286. Suwarab, ii. 439. Suwarda, i. 95, 444, 449, 45i, 452, 453, 454, 651 ; ii. 270, 371. Swabey, Capt., i. 251, 254, 282, 283. Sweni, i. 24, 53. Sydop, ii. 160. Syene, i. 509,512,519, 530 ; ii. 160, 161, 162, 165, 166, 167, 168, 176. Syenitae, ii. 160. Syllaeus, ii. 167. Syrbotae, 8 cubits high, ii. 164. Syria, i. 6, 18, 30, 32, 505, 565, 570, 572, 598, 599, 604, 605, 622, 623, 625, 627, 628, 640-642 ; ii. 35 37-40, 70, 161, 170, 191. , North, i. 449. Syrians, i. 571, 577, 607, 646 ; h. 53- Syrtes, ii. 165. Taa-en - Amen-setep-en- NETERU, ii. II3. Ta'aisha, ii. 439. Ta-an, ii. 24. Tabal, ii. 201. Tabal II., ii. 203. Tabaldi trees, ii. 397, 437. Table of the Sun, ii. 92. Tablet, the Preserved, i. 220. INDEX Tacaze (or Takazc) River, i. 549; u. 157, 3"4- Tachompsoft, ii. 105. in, 160. Tadu, Island of, ii. 163. Tata. ii. Ill, 293, 297, 299, 303- Tafnekhth, ii. 4-26, 28. Taggart, Lieut., ii. 460. Taha AW, ii. 499. Tabarq, t. 482, 483 ; ii. 35. Taharqa, ii. 36, 37, 38, 42- 46, 51, 52. 56, 116, 170. , his temple lo Usertsen II!., ii. 43. , temple of, ii. 371. Taha Shahin, ii. 253. Ta-hehet, ii. 75. Tails worn by women, ii. 403- Taiutchait, ii. 12. Taka Kasala, i. 31, 339 ; ii. 214, 217. Takabo, ii. 432. Takali, ii. 202, 213. Takarta, ii. 69. Kt-'Amen, ii. 36, 43, 45- Ta-Kenset, i. 121. 134, 485, 486, 527, 575, 593, 600, 612, 619, 030 ; ii. 56, 69, 410. Ta-Kenset <>f the Blacks, i. Takla Havmam'.t, ii. 20}. Takla Ilaymanot II.. i. 19. Takla Mai yam, ii. 2 12. Takrur, ii. 440. Takruris, ii Talbot, Col. the Hon. M.G., i. 50, no, iao, 130, 154. 155, 180; ii. 282, 412, 460, 461. Talgwareb, ii. 4; Talmi>, i. 73 : ii. II I, 170, 291, 292, 293. 11. ii. 397. Tama, ii. 102. 172, 434. Ycwiaai, stern-wheeler, i. 102. 260. Tamakhith, ii. 95. Tamanib, ii. 240. Tamarin, ii. 20;. Tamarinds, i. 105. Tambura, ii. 286, 2 Tambura, Sultan, ii. 2S2. Tamim as-Sudani, ii. 349. Tammuz, ii. 38. Tandamanie, ii. 51. Tandik, ii. 397. besu, i. 505, 506. Tanen-Amen, ii. 69. Tanenbuta, ii. 69. Ta-neter, i. 599; ii. 26. Tanganyika, ii. 350, 354. Tangi, ii. 357, 386. Tangur. i. 596 : ii. 371. , Cataract of, i. 606 ; ii. 366. Tani, ii. 250. Tanis. i. 533, 556, 560, 646, 647, 652 ; ii. 35, 36, 40, 41. , kings of, i. 647, 648. Tankasi, i. 122, 170, 1S7. Taruti-peht, ii. 94. Tashet-khensu, i. 648. Tat, i. 418. Ta-tchennian. i. 6l2. Ta-tchesert, i. 386. Tatehen. ii. 6, 15. Tathem, i. 517. Tattu, i 362, 3S6. Tau-aa-qen, i. 561, 562. Ta- l'atchet, ii. 1 1 1 . Tauhibit, ii. 21. Ta-urt, i. 100, 421. 626. Taurus, ii. 165. Tawfik Pasha, it Tawfikiya, i. S2 f'f. : ii 399- founded, ii. 228. . i. 530 ; ii. 451. levied by priests of Amen. i. 644. Tayf, i. 31,33. Taylor, (apt. A A. C, ii. 460. 400, 168, 198, 214, 216, 218; ii. Tayyara, ii. 4 "", 373- fair, i. 399. Island, ii. 372. , pyramids of, i. 125 Tanpo, i. 612. Tantarene. ii. 160. Tanuath-Amen 53- 56. , his name, ii. 51, 52. , stele of, ii. 47 ff. Taphis, ii. 11 1, 293, 294. Tapp, Col., i Taqnat, ii. 81. :. ii. 95. Tarabil, name of pyramids IVha-ab, statue of, i. 488. Tcham, land of. i. 517. Tchart, ii. 94, 95. Tcharukha, i. 607. Tcheser, king, i. 512; ii. 344- 42, 46, Tchestcheset, ii. 174. Tchet-Amen-af-ankh, ii. 14. Tchet-Amen-auf-ankh, ii. 24. Tchet-khiau, ii. 24. Tchu-a, i. 514. Tea in the Sudan, i. 455. Teck, Prince Fran. [82. Tefaba. i. 529. in the Sudan, i. 41, 228, T 264, 267. wi, ii. 392. Taragma, ii. 473. Tarbushes, i. 105. Ta-Resu, i. 610, 612, 629. Taret, i Targam, ii. 439. [Ct, ii. 95. Tartan, ii. 40. Tarukhet (?)-reset, ii. 79. Tarumen, ii. 95. 614 Telahwiya. ii. 251. Telegraphs, ii. 462, 480. Telgona, ii. 246, 282. Tell al-'Amarna, i. 623. Tell Hashlm, ii. 260. Telmes ( rerraes), i. 599. Tem, (Temu), i. 385, 526, 621, 624 ; ii. 4, 8, n,2I, 22, 45. Tem-Khepera, ii. 22. INDEX Temple of the Gold Bull, ii. IOI. of Sukkot, i. 60. Temple-forts in the Sudan, "• 33i- Temples turned into churches, ii. 297. Templeman, Dr., i. 13. Tenedhbai, i. 287. Tenk, pygmy, i. 522 ff. Tenupsis, ii. 164. Terab, ii. 207. Teres, i. 520. Tergedus, ii. 162, 163, 172. Tert, ii. 90. Tessata, ii. 160. Teta, king, i. 516. , pyramid of, i. 514. Tetaan, i. 563. Tet-Ankh-Amen-taa - en-Ra, ii. 112. Tetun, i. 121, 477, 485, 486, 556, 527, 575, 584, 587, 588 ff., 593, 604; ii. 3. 41-45, 412. Tetun-khenti-nefert, ii. 61. Thakhisa, i. 598, 599. Thamiam, ii. 479. Tharebenika, i. 610. Tharesina, i. 610. Tharubnika, i. 61 2. Tharusma, i. 612. Tharutharu, i. 612. Thatice, ii. 160. Thebaid, ii. 167, 174-176, 177, 295, 296. , Christians in, ii. 289. Thebans, i. 561 ; ii. 115. Thebes, i. 48, 57, 67, 159, 298, 427, 531, 561, 568, 600, 606, 625, 643, 644, 648, 651, 652; ii. 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 13, 14, 26, 27, 28, 30, 40, 41, 42, 45, 46, 52, 53. 93, 166. , kings of, i. 647. plundered by Assyrians, ii. 50. . Princes of, i. 529, 530, 532, 561. Thehennu, i. 505, 612, 628, 633; "• *3, 415- Thekansh, ii. 12. Themeh, i. 2, 520. Themistocles, ii. 91. Thena, ii. 160. Thenteremu, ii. 24. Thent-sepeh, i. 648. Thent-taa, i. 563. Theodora, Empress, ii. 178, 295 ff- Theodore, king of Abyssinia, ii. 314. Theodore of Philae, ii. 296, 297. Theodosius I., ii. 291, 292. Theodosius, Papa, ii. 295. Theodotus, ii. 175. Theokles, ii. 74. Theon Ochema, ii. 165. Thert, ii. 96. Thesma-nefer-ru, ii. 76. Thet-taui. ii. 7, II, 19. Thi, Queen, i. 454, 607, 608, 612, 614, 622 ; ii. 371. Thi, wife of Ai, i. 625. Thibaut, ii. 349, Thiersch, H., i. 382. Thipamet, ii. 336. Thita, i. 612. Thorn, Rev. A. M., ii. 321. Thompson, Sir E. Maunde, i. 175, 323, 437. Thoth, i. 36, 137, 160, 370, 392, 396, 397, 418, 421, 426, 576, 591, 594, 626, 637, 644; ii. 7, 17, 45, 112, 113, 122. the " twice great,"' i. 370. , month of, ii. 6, 11. Thothmes I., i. 61, 540, 548, 567, 594, 595, 596; ii- 37i- in the Sudan, i. 568- 57o. Thothmes II., i. 61, 480, 537, 583, 593, 595- in the Sudan, 1. 570. Thothmes III., i. 53, 60,61, 449, 463, 477, 480, 481, 483, 484, 487, 537, 549, 613, 625, 627. 628, 630 ; ii. 42. 615 Thothmes III. and Usertsen III. at Dosha, i. 596. embracing Usertsen Iil.,i. 587. in the Sudan, i. 571 ff. kills 120 elephants, i. 573- Thothmes IV., i. 536, 538, 623. in the Sudan, i. 604, 606. Thread, i. 105. Throne of gold, ii. 89, 90. Thuaa, i. 607. Tiberius, ii. 113. Tiberius II., Emp., ii. 178. Tiedemann, Capt. A. von, ii. 278. Tiger grass, ii. 173. Tigris, i. 112; ii. 500. Timosthenes, ii. 162. Tinara, i. 31, 439 ; ii. 371. Tinne, Miss A. P. F., ii. 313 ff-, 379- Tinnis, ii. 184. Tirhakah, i. 51, 59, 122, 169, 487; ii. 35, 501. , temple of, i. 132 ff. , •, excavated, i. 482- 490. Tirikanlat (?), Tirikanle- tau (?), Pyramid of, i. 408 ff. ; ii. 1 1 9. Tis Esat, Falls of, ii. 364. Titi, ii. 357. I Titus, ii. 174. Tobacco, i. 34. T6f (raft), i. 479. Togni, ii. 479- T6kar,ii. 246, 249, 264, 265, 268, 366, 409. Tolles, ii. 164. Tomato, ii 365. Tombos, Island of, i. 51, 62, 99, 559, 568, 570 ; ii- 270, 371, 479- 568, 570,651. , quarries of, i. 60. Tomo, Giorgio, i. 368. Tom-tom, i. 79. Tong, ii. 2S2, 285, 399, 480. Tonga, ii. 322. IXDKX Tonj, ii. 359. Tonobari, ii. 164. Tor, i. 18, 32. ■ 508. Toski, i. 76, 77, 78, 90. Townshend, Col., i. 183, 196 ; ii. 460. Trade, ii. 486. Trajan, Emp., ii. 174, 289. Travellers in Sudan, i. I ff. Tree of Hathor, i. 384. Tree worship, ii. 441. Triad, Osirian, i. 500. Triakontaschoinoi, ii. 166. Trinkitat, ii. 265. Triremes, ii. 74, 167. Troglodytae, i. 562, 569 ; ii- 155, 156, 158, 163. Tu-a, i. 514. Tu-ab, i. 630 ; ii. 61, 70. Tuamutef, i. Tuat, i. 369, 385, 505; ii- 17, 18. Tud, ii. 193. Tudmur, i. 216. Tudway, Major, i. 183 ; ii. 460. Tufrik, ii. 260. Tugo, Tuka, ii. 444. Tukl, tukul, i. 113, 178, 206; ii. 375. Tukruf, ii. 26S. Tiili'i, ii. 436. Turn, ii. 206. Tuniam, ii. 439. Tumal, ii. 437. Tunbul, ii. 372. Tunbus, i. 559. Tunduhi, Oasis of, ii. 391. Tttngur Arabs, ii. 422. Tunis, i. 24, 25 ; ii. 422. Tunkul, i. 103, 104. Tura, ii. 235. Tura, ( fesis of, ii. 392. Tura. quarries of, i. 516. . Shah, ii. 192. Turdannu, ii. 30, 40. Turk 26, 40, 42, 109, 510; ii. 324. Turquoises, i. 538 ; ii. 23. tig, K., ii. 441. Turusu, i. 612. ■ Tushki, i. 76, 77, 7S ; ii. 263, 264. Tushratta, ii. 332. Tusks of elephants, ii. 107, 108. Tusun, ii. 210. Tut-ai) (Gebel Barkal), ii. 45- Tut-ankh-Amen, i. 624, 625. Tuti Island, ii. 252, 274, 375. Tutzis, i. 633 ; ii, III. Tuwesha, ii. 438. Tuyayo, ii. 352. Fyphon, i. 133 ; ii. 125. Typhonium, i. 132, 133 ; ii. 125. Tyre, ii. 38, 39. UAFIH - T.'\ r-SBMl - SEM l - M BT, ii. 75. Uahmani- Amen, ii. 69. Uasarken, ii. 14, 22. (Jaseb (?), ii. 15. Cast, ii. 13. Uatchet, i. 575, 588. Uatch-ka-Ra, ii. 57. Uau, i. 536. Uauaiu, i. 533, 553. Qauat, i. 517, 518, 519, 521. 534, 572, 573, 643; ii. 416. = Northern Sudan, i. 536. 'Ubitdin, ii. 435. Udamos, ii. 74. Udia, ii. 437. Ueberbacher, Father, ii. 312. Uganda, ii. 229, 230, 235, 267, 318, 390, 424- Protectorate, ii. 384. Railway, ii. 352. Uhat, i. 521. (Jhmir, ii. 392. Ujiji, ii. 229. •Ukasha, i. 86; ii. 261,269, 371, 463, 464. aaract of, ii. 366. 'Ukma (Ukmah), i. 92 ; ii. 37*- , Cataract of, ii. 366. Ukon, ii. 444. I'kwa. ii. 443. l'1-Makada, ii. 440. Umak Ra, ii. 443. 'Umar&b, ii. 439. 'Umayyad, ii. 191. Umi, ii. 357. Umla Gadida, ii. 267. Umm 'Alt, ii. 435. 473. j Ummar'ar, ii. 436. Umm Badr, ii. 392. Umm Dabe'a, ii. 273. Umm Dabrftk&t, ii. 280. Umm Damm, ii. 397. Umm Darman. ii. 395. Umm Dubban, ii. 250. Umm Durman, ii. 246. Umm Nabadt, ii. 412. mine, ii. 247. Umm Nag!, ii. 435. Umm Shanka, ii. 431. Umoi, ii. 443. I'm-Soof (or Suf), ii. 173, 379, 481. Un, city, ii. 14, 15, 16. , nome, ii. 12, 17. Una, ii. 324. ( , career of, i. 516. , journeys of, i. 516 (i~. meets ller-khuf. . Unas, king, ii. 414. ( fnguents, i. 307. Ung-wad, ii. 443. I'nkat, ii. 392. Unmatur, i. 55. lrn-nefer, an official, ii. 69. Unsa I., ii. 201. Unu-Amen, i. 646. Unyami, ii. 357. Inyanyembe, ii. 229. I'nyoro, ii. 228, 229, 260, 267, 268, 356. Upeno, ii. 360. Urbim, ii. 160. Urdamanie. ii. 51. 'I 'rel.a, ii. 436. •1'ivkat, ii. 439. i Usekht l)«>at, i. 51s. i Usertsen I., i. 412, 413. 534-538, 553. 576. 627. I builds dykes, i. 555. ill the Sudan, i. 5 INDEX Usertsen II., i. 637. in the Sudan, i. 539. Usertsen III., i. 38, 6c, 121, i95» 449, 462, 476, 477, 483, 484, 491, 492, 493, 496, 510, 553, 564, 57i, 575, 585,587, 588 fT., 601, 604, 625 ; ii. 42, 45, 116, 330, 501. and Thothmes III. at Dosha, i. 596. , decree of,, i. 542. in the Sudan, i. 539- 549, 533- , stele of, i. 541, 544 ff. Usibalci, ii. 165. Usr-ab, ii. 58. Usr-Maat-Ra, ii. 2. Utcha-Heru-Resenet, ii. 91. Utchat. i. 307. 'Utefat, ii. 439. 'Uthman, ii. 204. 'Uthman al-Morghani, ii. 404. Utricularia, ii. 481. Uu-en-Ra-nefert, ii. 14. Valerian, ii. 289. Valerius Largus, ii. 167. Vandeleur, beymour, ii. 268. Van Eeivelde, ii. 383. Van Kerckhoven, ii. 266. Van Kerckhoven, steamer, ii. 382. Ventriloquists, ii. 441. Venus, Hottentot, ii. 403. Vermilion, ii. 107. Verseau the Jesuit, i. 5, 6. Verus, Emp., ii. 174. Vespasian, Emp., ii. 174- Victoria Nile, ii. 356. Victoria Nyanza, ii. 220, 351, 352. Villiers, Mr. Fred, i. 100, 189, 190. Vinci, Father, ii. 312. Vines, i. 517 ; ii- 82. Vod Benaga, i. Vogel, ii. 423. Vulcan, ii. 163. Vulture, i. 306. Wad 'a, ii. 438. Wad 'Abbas, ii. 439. Wad Agib, i. 21. Wadai, i. 25 ; ii. 236, 2S5, 390, 398, 422. Wad al-Bishara, i. 101, 102, 103 ; ii. 270. Wad al-Karel, ii. 375. Wad an-Nagumi, i. 76-78, 90 ; ii. 260, 263, 264. Wad Arbab, ii. 261. Wad Ba Nagaa. i. 47, 286, 287, 324, 325, 330, 331, 412, 502, 602, 622; ii. 116, 118, 119, 120, 122, 124, 126, 134, 152, 170.. 332, 473. Wad Dafa' Allah, ii. 268. Waddington, G., i. 34, 478. Wadelai, ii. 260, 267, 268, 368, 386. Wad Habashi, i. 251. Wad Hojoly, ii. 229. Wadi Abu D6m, i. 114. Wradi al-Alaki, i. 534. Wadi al-Awaiteb, i. 57. Wadi al-Baniit, i. 49. Wadi al-Ghazal, Church of, ii. 300, 301. Wadi al-IIagar, i. 60. Wadi al-llamar (or Homar), ii. 366. Wadi al-Khawanib, i. 534. Wadi al-Kirbikan, i. 325 ; ii. 124. Wadi As-Sufra, i. 324, 327 ; ii. 146, 147. Wadi Awateb, i. 325. Wadi Ghazal, i. 234. Wadi Ilalfah (Halla), i. 31, 34, 38, 39,40, 53, 61, 62, 70, 77, 82-67, 436, 437, 449, 536, 538, 553, 573, 599, 601, 638, 651 ; ii. 75, 83, 105. no, 113. , frontier of Egypt, ii. 260. , temples at, i. 576 ff. Railway, ii. 462. Wadi Hammamat, i. 643 ; ii. 30. Wadi Ka'ab, ii. 412. 617 Wadi Ma'atuka, i. 549. Wadi Nagaa, i. 509. Wadi Sabu'a, i. 14, 74, 634, 638, 651 ; ii. 297. Wadi Tafa, ii. 308. Wadi Tarabil, plan of, i. 359- Wadi 'Ulaki (al-'UUaki), i. 549, 555, 574, 630, 638, 64a ; ii. 10, 104, no, 113, 329, 330, 3}3, 336, 338, 412. Wad Madani, ii. 213, 218, 281, 285, 365, 407, 436. , town, ii. 396. Wad Maul, ii. 443. Wad Nimir, ii. 372. Wad Kamla, ii. 375, 393, 474- Wahabab, ii. 438. Wahamba, ii, 356. Wahuma, ii. 432. Waiga, ii. 356. Wakki River, ii. 355, 356. Wakiiri, ii. 349. WTalaka, ii. 364. Walda Mikael, ii. 234-236. Walker & Bray, Messrs., ii. 236, 461. Wambutti, i. 525. Wami, ii. 352. Wandi, ii. 267. Wansleben, i. 22. Wanyoro, ii. 353. War boat, i. 518. — — correspondents, i. 100. song, i. 79. Ward, Colonel, ii. 234. Warriba Hills, ii. 281. Water Forts, ii. 262. tank at No. 6 Station, i. 245. trees, ii. 397. wheels, i. 3, 104 ; ii. 193, 195, 220. Watson, Dr. Andrew, ii. 318, 3i9- Watson, Lieut., ii. 350. Wauchope, Col., ii. 276. Waw, ii. 237, 282, 286, 315. 322, 399, 480. Wazezeru, ii. 402, 403. IXDKX Weapons, i. 105. Weather, i. nbach, I'... i. 61. Weidenbach, M., i. 61. Weill, R., i. Well at Nagaa, i. 320. at No. (> Station, i. 246. of Rameses II., i. 632. of Seti I., i. 630 ; ii. 333- of the Sun. Wellby, Mr., ii. 361. Wellcome, Mr. II.. i. 22 1, | ; ii. 493. Wells, ii. 459. , list of, ii. 392. , the Seventy, ii. 302. Werne, ii. 349. Whip, the. i. 2IO. Whiston, Surgeon-( )aptain, i. 104. White Kubba, i. 2 White Nile Province, ii. 408. White Wall, ii. 11, 19. Wiedemann. Prof. A., i. .. 515, 323 ; ii. 4, 55, 74. 4H- Wiggett, J. S.,i. 47«- Wilbour, Mi., i. 539. Wild, Mr. J., i. 62. Wilkinson. Major E. Ii.. ii. 460. Wilkinson, Sir I. ('•., i. 574. Wilmot, Mr. R. C.J. S., ii. 321- Wilson, <. '. T., ii. 446. Wilson, Capt. II. H., ii. 361. Wilsi 1'.., ii. 284. Wilsi ii. 253, 259. Windham. Mr. R.~\\ Wine, i. 221 ; ii. 156. of Rhodes, i. 174. Wingate, Sir F. K., i. 113, 17S, 1 S3. 201, 204, 205, 231, 321-323, 326, 3; |6, 437, 4<>4, ;<)S, 500, 501, 502, 577- 579i 5*3 : ■■• 239, 249, 250, 251, 255, 257, 258, 2S1. 2S5, 286, 320, ^22. ;,2]. 390. 397. 404, 436, 477. 479. 487> ;n. Wingate, Sir. F. K.. il( and kills Khali fi, ii. 2 Winged Disk, i. 543. Wira, ii. 399. Witchcraft, ii. 442. Wodel mel, i. 77, 8i, 84 : 11 263. Wolf, fire-breathing, i. 268. Wollen, Lieut. W. R i. 264. Wolsele\ , Lord, i. S3, no; ii. 250. Women rulers of Meroe, i. 4«. , steatopygous, ii. 402. warriors, ii. 154. Wood, Capt. r-.ii.285, 460. Woods and Forests, ii. 500. | Wussi Island, i. 444 ; ii. 291 Xf.r, ii. 27. YA'kOb, Khalifa's brother, ii. 265. Ya'kubab, ii. 439. Vaman, ii. 303, 4 Yambio, ii. 284, 285, 286. Yamni; ii. 205. ■ 44- Yellow River, ii. 360. " Yellow Maria," i. 87. 88, 91. Yernbo, i. ]2. Yemen, ii. 189, 192. Yerhora Rapids, ii. 366, Yeiia, ii. 334. Yor Adodoit, ii. 444. Yorke, ii. 297. Young, Dr.. i. 299. Yukanye, ii. 443. Yusuf, ii. 262. Yusuf Bey, ii. 233. Yusuf Pasha, ii. 244. Z\i;'\i, ii. 392. Zaballa'a, ii. 439. Zafr, gunboat, i. 1 Zaghawii, ii. 435. Zakarya ibn Bahnas, ii. [88. Zakarya ibn Salah, ii. 1 88. Zaki TummAl. ii. 261, 264, 265. Zankar, ii. 205. Zanzibar, ii. 222, 229. 233. 234, 264, 263. Zavviyat al-Karad>a. i, 551. Zawyet ad-Der, ii. 406. Zayid, ii. 262. Zayyadiya, ii. 439. Xedab, ii. 473. Zehteb, ii. 479. Zela, ii. 236. Zemio, ii. 268. Zenab, ii. 241. Zesobia, Queen, ii. 175. X Rivington Ltd., St. John's Hvi< .7, E.C. 0) ■■'■ £* H .a S i ■ti ■ b f 4 3 £ University of Toronto Library DO NOT REMOVE THE CARD FROM THIS POCKET Acme Library Card Pocket Under Pat. "Ref. Index File" Made by LIBRARY BUREAU